'jf^^xw"'^"''' 


\V' 


UC-NRLF 


$B    bDb    132 


i\ 


mm 


^M 


J>  Henry  '^enger 


^m  1 ! 


m 


wrmm 


3t^l 


WITH    COMPLIMENTS  OF 


THE   PUBLISHERS. 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elementarygrammaOOwormrich 


WOMAN'S  SERIES  FOR  THE  MODERN  LANGUAGliS. 


AN 


ELEMENTARY  GRAMMAR 


OP  THE 


GERMAN  LANGUAGE: 


WITH 


EXEKCISES,  KEADINGS,  CONVERSATIONS, 
PARADIGMS,  AND   A  VOCABULARY. 


By  JAMES  H.  WORMAN,  A.M., 

KOK-BBSn)BKT  PROFBSSOB  OP  MODERN  HISTORY  AOT)  LAITGUAQE  AT  LAVTSBKCB 
nnVBBSITT. 


A.    S.    BARNES   &    COMPANY, 
NEW  YORK  AND  CHICAGO 


IN  MEMORfAM 
WOR  MAN'S     SERIES 


•M^O  iJfeiM  N  •  LANGUAGES. 


OE  I?,  li/CA^liT 


First  German  Book,  after  the  Natural  or  Pestalozzian  Method,  for 
Schools  and  Home  Instruction.     i2mo,  69  pages. 

Second  German  Book,  intended  to  follow  the  preceding  work. 
i2mo.    84  pages. 

An  Elementary  German  Grammar.  An  easy  introduction  to  the 
language.     i2mo.    300  pages. 

A  Complete  German  Grammar.     i2mo.    591  pages. 

An  Elementary  German  Reader,  intended  for  beginners  in  German, 
i2mo.     145  pages. 

A  Collegiate  German  Reader,  or  Introduction  to  German  Literature, 
with  references  to  the  German  Grammars  of  Worman  and  Camp- 
bell, and  an  adequate  Dictionary.     i2mo.     525  pages. 

A  Manual  of  German  Conversation  —  the  "  Berliner  Echo."  For 
practice  in  the  language  as  spoken  in  Berlin,  with  Vocabulary  of 
words  and  idioms.     203  pages. 

F  i^  E  isr  c  n. 

First  French  Book,  after  the  Natural  or  Pestalozzian  Method,  for 
Schools  and  Home  Instruction. 

Second  French  Book,  on  the  same  plan  as  the  German.    (In  prepara, 

tion.) 
An    Elementary  French   Grammar,  on  the  same  plan  as  the  Ele- 
mentary German  Grammar.     (In  preparation.) 

A  Complete  French  Grammar,  on  the  same  plan  as  the  Complete 
German  Grammar.    (In  preparation.) 

An  Elementary  and  Collegiate  French  Reader,  on  the  same  plan 
as  the  German  Readers.    (In  preparation.) 

A  Manual  of  French  Conversation—  the  "  Echo  de  Paris."  Plan 
of  the  "  Berliner  Echo."    212  pages. 


Copyright y  i868,  by  A.  S,  Bartus  &*  Co. 


TO  THE 

Rev.  JOHN  McCLINTOCK,  D.D.,  LL.D., 

THIS  LITTLE  VOLUME 

IS  MOST  AFFECTIONATELY  INSCRIBED 

By  The  AuthoBc 


986720 


PREFACE  TO  THE  TENTH  EDITION. 


This  little  volume  was  prepared  with  special  regard  to  the  wants 
of  beginners.  It  has  been  carefully  revised,  and  in  its  present  form 
contains  many  corrections  and  additions  which  constant  investiga- 
tion of  the  language,  daily  experience  in  the  class-room,  a  continual 
study  of  the  wants  of  the  learner,  and  the  observation  of  otlier  instruc- 
tors have  suggested.  The  leading  principles  of  German  Grammar  are 
concisely  stated  and  illustrated  by  a  series  of  Exercises  for  oral  and 
written  translation,  accompanied  by  Conversations  in  German,  followed 
in  the  latter  part  of  the  work  by  a  series  of  Reading  Lessons,  all  of  which 
are  intended  to  enable  the  pupil  to  accomplish  his  tasks  with  ease,  as  he 
advances,  and  lay  the  foundation  for  a  systematic  knowledge  of  German, 
It  is  the  author's  opinion  that  any  one  who  thoroughly  masters  this 
little  book  will  gain  a  sufficient  knowledge  of  etymology  and  syntax  for 
all  practical  purposes. 

The  method  of  presenting  the  etymology  of  the  language  in  frag- 
ments, so  generally  adopted  in  elementary  works,  has  been  altogether 
discarded.  Each  new  form  introduced,  is  given  completely.  Thus  the 
articles  are  given  through  all  the  study  of  both  numbers,  the  substan- 
tives, etc.,  through  all  the  cases  of  one  number,  the  verbs  through  the 
different  persons  of  each  tense  ;  so  that  the  learner  may  see  at  once  the 
various  changes  which  they  severally  undergo,  may  learn  and  com- 
prehend them  in  a  few  minutes,  and  thus  save  hours  of  labor,  as  well  as 
infinite  vexation,  and  at  the  same  time  make  the  progress  easy  and 
natural. 

The  difficulties  of  pronunciation  also  are  greatly  diminished  by  the 
method  of  weaving  into  the  introductory  lessons  the  rules  of  pronuncia- 
tion with  practical  exercises  under  each,  thus  causing  theory  and  prac- 
tice to  proceed  side  by  side  from  the  very  hour  the  study  of  the  language 
is  taken  up. 

To  make  the  book  also  useful  for  reference,  and  to  meet  the  wants  of 
thos3  who  can  tolerate  nothing  short  of  a  strictly  systematic  course, 
there  is  a  synopsis  of  German  Grammar  added,  as  Part  III,  in  which  the 
inflection  of  words  is  treated  briefly,  but  yet  with  completeness. 


Vi  PREFACE. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  classification  of  the  nouns  and  verbs,  especially  oi* 
the  irregular  verbs,  and  tiie  alphabetical  lists  of  the  latter,  of  the  yeihi 
reflexive  in  German  and  not  in  English,  of  the  separable  and  inseparabli* 
verbs,  of  the  intransitive  and  neuter  verbs  conjugated  with  jcin  in  Qer' 
man,  and  in  English  with  to  have,  of  the  prepositions,  and  the  extensive 
German-English  and  English-German  vocabulary,  will  also  be  an  aid  to 
the  learner. 

To  those  who  desire  an  Elementary  Reader  to  accompany  this  gram- 
mar, the  author  recommends  his  own  Elementary  German  Readel 
which  contains  Notes  and  References  to  this  Grammar,  and  a  carefully 
prepared  Vocabulary. 

To  supply  the  wants  of  such  persons  as  desire  a  more  advanced  course, 
the  author  has  prepared  a  complete  German  Grammar  after  the  plan 
of  Gaspey's  English  Conversation-Grammar  (adopted  by  Otto),  also  a 
Reader  strictly  progressive  (of  which  Part  I.  contains  shorter  selections 
from  the  modern  German  classics,  and  Part  II.  Schiller's  Jungfrau  and 
Goethe's  Iphigenie,  complete),  with  an  adequate  dictionary  and  notes 
referring  to  his  own  grammars  and  to  those  of  Woodbury,  Otto,  and 
Campbell. 

The  author's  acknowledgments  are  due  to  the  late  eminent  scholar. 
Rev,  Dr.  H.  M.  Johnson,  President  of  Dickinson  College,  for  much 
valuable  advice  in  the  preparation  of  the  work.  He  desires  also  to  ex- 
press his  obligation  to  Prof,  McCord,  of  Washington  Seminary,  to  Prof. 
E.  Baur,  of  Ann  Arbor  (Mich.)  Union  School,  to  Charlton  T.  Lewis,  of 
the  *'  Evening  Post,"  and  to  Prof.  Hermann  Sjoberg,  for  their  frequent 
suggestions  during  the  revision  of  the  book. 

Jambs  H.  Wobman. 

Lawrence  University,  May,  1873. 


00]S"TEKTS, 


Pape 

Letters  of  the  Alphabet 11 

Writing  Alphabet 12 

PART  I. 

ELEMENTARY  EXERCISES. 

LesRon  ^ 

I. — Pronunciation  of  the  simple  vowels.      The    definite  article. 

Present  singular  of  !^  a  b  e  tt 13 

IL —  **  of   the  double  vowels.  Adjectives  before  and 

after  the  subject     Object  of  the  verb 15 

IIL —  **  of  the  modified  vowels.  Accusative  of  feminine 

and  neuter  nouns.     Plural  of  the  present  of 

^abcn 16 

IV. —  *«  of  the   diphthongs.        The   indefinite    article. 

Determinative  and  possessive  adjectives —  .     17 
V. —  **  of  58f  X)»  3)  and  2.  Past  participle  in  compound 

tenses.  Accusative  of  no ims.   Present  of  f  e  i  n     19 

VI.—  "  ofSand^ 20 

VII.—  "  ofSandB 21 

VIII.—  "  of  ®,  ^  and  3.     Determinative  and  intetToga- 

tive  adjectives.     Singular  of  masculine  and 

neuter  nouns  in  el»  cr  and  en 22 

IX. —  **  of  2>  and  SB.     Plural  of  possessive  adjectives.     21 

X.—  ♦*  of  %,  2,  3K,  9?,  3e,  D  and  fR,  Declension  of  mas- 

culine and  neuter  nouns  not  ending  in  c,  cl, 

er,  en,  d)en  and  Icin 26 

XL—  «  of  the  e^ 28 

XII. —  "  of  d,  ng,  IT  and  p.     Singular  of  feminine  nouns     29 


Vlll  CONTENTS. 

lesson  Page 

XIII. — PronuDciation  of  9^^  and  3)f.    Declension  of  proper  names.. .  31 

XIV.—             "             of  ed),  fp  and  )1 33 

XV.—             "             of3:t)and^ 34 

XVI. — On  the  accent.     Simple  words.     Monosyllables 36 

XVII.^ —              "              Derivatives.  Accessory  syllables.  Prefixes, .  37 

XVIIL—              "                                                                       Suffixes..  39 

XIX. —              "              Examples  with  prefixes  and  suffixes 40 

XX. —              **              Compound  words 41 

XXL — Comparative  degree  of  adjectives 42 

XXII. — Male  and  female  appellations 44 

XXIII. — The  superlative  of  adjectives  :  Predicative  form .  46 

XXIV. — Adjectives  aud  the  prefix  u  n 47 

XXV. — The  possessive  pronouns 49 

XXVI.— Imperfect  tense  of  fetn 51 

XXVII. — Declension  of  adjectives,  preceded  by  the  definite  article  52 
XXVIII. — The   superlative  of  adjectives:   Attributive  form.     The 

three  degrees 54 

XXIX. — Declension  of  adjectives,  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  55 

XXX. — :  he  English  auxiliary,  7b  i)o.  Regular  verbs,  present  tense  57 

XXXI. — The  auxiliary  verbs:  5Wii [fen,   fonnen  and  mbgen 59 

XXXII.—  "          "           "        Swollen,  follen  and  biirfen....  61 

XXXIII. — Prepositions  with  genitive  aud  dative 63 

XXXIV. — Nouns  in  the  partitive  sense 64 

XXXV. — Declension  of  masculine  nouns  endiii;^  in  c 66 

XXXVI. — Plural  of  masculine  nouns  not  ending  ia  e,  cr,  ct  and  en. 

Imperfect  of  f)  a  b  e  n 68 

XXXVIL—      "       of  feminine  nouns TO 

XXXVIII. —      "       of  monosyllabic  neuter  nouns 11 

XXXIX. —      "       of  adjectives,  preceded  by  an  article.     Future  of 

:^  a  b  e  n  and  f  c  t  n 73 

XL. — Feminine  nouns  with  an  irregular  plural 75 

XLL— Neuter           "         "     "         "            "       77 

XLIL— Mascuhne       "         "     "         "            "       79 

XLIII. — Plural  of  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  ending  ia  el,  cr, 

cn,  d)en  and  kin 80 

XLIV. — Irregular  plural  of  masculine  nouns  ending  in  er,  el,  ar  and  or  82 

XLV. — Adjectives  and  participles  used  as  substantives 84 

XLVL — Declension  of  the  interrogative  pronouns  and  adjectives. .  85 

XLV  1 1. — Compound  tenses  of  the  auxiliary  verb  1^  a  b  c  n 87 

XLVIIL—        »           "        «    "         "           "      fcin 89 

XLIX. — Declension  of  adjectives  preceding  substantives  without 

an  article 90 

L. — Fiist  conditional  of  the  auxiliaries  I;  a  b  C  n  and  f  e  i  n 92 


CONTENTa.  ix 

PART   11. 

EXERCISES  ON"  THE  VERB  AND  OTHER  PARTS  OF  THE 
ETYMOLOGY. 
Lesson  Page 

LI.— Conjugation  of  the  regular  or  modern  active  verbs 95 

LII. — The  cardinal  numbers    99 

LIII. — The  ordinal  numbers.    Names  of  days  and  months 101 

LI V. — ^The  demonstrative  pronouns 103 

LV. — The  relative  pronouns 105 

LVI. — The   personal  pronouns.      The  two  modes  of  address  b  a 

and  Bit 107 

LVII. — The  indefinite  pronouns   110 

LVI II. — Prepositions   governing   the   accusative.     The   diminutives 

d)en  and  letn 112 

LTX. — Names  of  countries  and  places ^  . . .   114 

LX. — The  irregular  or  ancient  verbs 115 

First  conjugation  (Radical  vowel  a ) 116 

LXI. — Second  conjugation  (Imperfect  with  a) 118 

Reading  Lesson :  !Die  fletnc  !Karic 121 

LXII. — Tliird  conjugation  (Imperfect  and  past  participle  with  t  or  ie)  122 
LXI  11. — Fourth  conjugation  (Imperfect  and  past  participle  with  0). .  12'^ 
LXIV. — Fifth  conjugation  (Radical  vowel  t  [or  ie],  Imperfect  with  a 

[orii].) 128 

Reading  Lesson :   Xprannci.    ® rieci^cnlanb 131 

LXV.— Separable  verbs 132 

LXVI. — Inseparable  verbs  135 

LXVII. — Separable  and  inseparable  verbs 137 

Reading  Lesson:   SeifpicI  »on  Stlt^altfam  f  ett  ....   139 
LXVIII. — Prepositions   governing    both  the    dative   and    accusative. 

Prepositions  contracted  with  the  definite  article    139 

Reading  Lesson :   STnbenSJIonb 141 

LXIX. — Neuter  and  intransitive  verbs 142 

Reading  Lesson :  DerSBanbcrer  unbbicDuclle 144 

LXX.— On  the  adverbs 145 

Reading  Lesson:  X)er  alte  Sanbmann 148 

LXXI. — On  the  conjunctions 148 

Reading  Lesson :  2)  i e  f  (^  0  n fl c  £  ^  r  i fl in 152 

LXXIL — Verbs  in  the  passive  voice 162 

Reading  Lesson :  2)  a  a  gcfl  0  ^lenc  9)  f  c  rb   155 

LXXIIT.— Reflexive  verbs 156 

Reading  Lesson :  ©incroberber^nbere 159 

LXXIV  —Impersonal  verbs  .  .• 160 

Reading  Lesson :  5lp^oridmen  163 


X  CONTENTS. 

PART  III. 

SYNOPSIS  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR. 

Page. 

Parts  of  Speech.    Cases  in  German 165 

The  Article :  Definite  and  Indefinite 16.5-166 

Declension  of  the  Common  Nouns.       Declensions  1.,  XL,  III.  and 

IV 166-171 

Declension  of  the  Proper  Nouns 173 

The  Adjective 175 

The  Numerals :  Cardinal,  Ordinal  and  Indefinite 178-181 

The  Pronouns :  Personal,  Possessive,  Demonstrative,  Relative  and 

Correlative,  Interrogative  and  Indefinite 183-195 

The  Auxiliary  Verbs  ^ben,  fein  and  mxtm 198 

The  Regular  Verbs  (active  and  passive  voice) 204 

The  Irregular  Verbs 211 

"    Auxiliary      "      of  mode 219 

The  Compound  Verbs  :  Separable 227 

"  "  "        Inseparable 229 

«  "  "        Separable  and  Inseparable 280 

The  Neuter  and  Intransitive  Verbs 280 

The  Reflexive  Verbs 283 

The  Imporsonal  Verts 234 

The  Adverbs 23G 

The  Conjunctions 238 

Nouns,  Number  of 241 

j^ouns,  Gender  of. 243 

•Jonstruction 251 

List  of  compound  verbs  which  are  both  soparabJe  and  inseparable  .  259 
List  of  verbs  conjugated  with  f  e  i  n  in  German  and  to  have  in  English  260 

List  of  verbs  reflexive  in  German  but  not  in  English 263 

List  of  Prepositions 263 


PAPiT  IV. 
VOCABULARY. 


German  and  English  Vocabulary 264 

English  and  German  Vocabulary 283 

National  appellations,  proper  nouns  and  adjectives . .  295 

Addenda  to  Vocabulary 296 


THE  GERMAN  LETTERS.     (Die  33ucf)(laOen.) 


The  German  Alphabet  consists  of  the  following  twenty-six 
letters  : 


31 

a     (ah) 

a 

^    It                  n 

93 

b     (bay)     b 

;D    o                 o 

G: 

C     (tsay)     C 

^     ^    (pay)       P 

^ 

h     (day)     d 

^      <]     (koo)         q 

@ 

C     (ay)        e 

^i      r     (err)          r 

S 

f*                 f 

^     fej              s 

(^ 

^    (gay)     g 

%       t     (tay)          t 

J^ 

1^    (hah)    h 

tt      tt     (oo)           u 

3t 

i     (ee)        i 

25      \>     (fow)          V 

3t 

i    (yott)   j 

9S5  tt>     (vay)         w 

^ 

f     (kah)    fc 

21       5     (icks)        X 

S 

1                   1 

?l      M     (ipsilon)    y 

g?i 

Kt              m 

3       J     (tset)          z 

COMPOUND  CONSONANTS. 

* 

ch 

^               sz 

^ 

ck 

n          tz 

Letters  which  may  easily  be  mistaken  one  for  another : 

':     ©     and     i8 

^ 

and    ^ 

b       and       ]^ 

G      and      (§ 

@ 

and     ^ 

f       and       f 

A    91     and      91 

^ 

and    §?: 

t>       and       ^ 

£f     and     Si 

2Jl 

and  >115 

r       and       ^ 

*  Wherever  the  name  is  not  given,  it  is  as  in  English. 

f  German  /and  /are  alike  in  print ;  but  the  fact  that  /  is  only  used 
before  consonants,  and  /  before  vowels,  will  enable  the  student  to  distin- 
guish these  two  letters  from  each  other. 

:|:  ij  is  used  at  the  end  of  w^ords  whether  standing  alone  or  compounded. 


GERMAN  WRITING  ALPHABET. 

a,      b,      c,      d,       c,        f,       g,       h,      i,       j,      \i,      1,      m, 

n,     o,    p,      q,     r,  r-,  t,     u,     v,      w,     x,       y,     z. 

'T/    <^yf.    y  ^^    -^y  y^  ^y       -^y    -^y   ^"^y    ^^^  ^^  J^^jt' 

COMPOUND   CONSONANTS. 

eh,      c"!i,       sr5,  Gz,         sch,  sp,        st,         th,  tz. 


CAPITAL    LETTE.15. 
A,         B,         C,        D,       E,        P,       G,        i:,  I,      J, 

r  -^  =4^^  /  ^  /  f  ^/. 

K,  L,         M,         N,        O,       P,       Q,        R,       », 

^  ^  m:  ^.  ^:  /f  /.  ^  ^ 

T,        U,        T,         W,        X,      Y,        Z. 


This  aucoud  s  ia  only  used  at  tlio  end  ol  words. 


I^A.FtT    I. 


LESSON    I.  y^   ,^  ^cHiotx  1,  ,^  .  ,  ,^ 

Pronunciation  of  the  Simple  Vowels.  '■  •  "'  ■   '• 

%,  a  is  pronounced  like  a  in  father. 

{§,,  t  is  pronounced  like  ey  in  they,  or  a  in  fate,  but  when 
followed  by  r  like  e  in  cherry. 

%,  t  wlien  followed  by  two  consonants  or  a  double  conso- 
nant, is  considered  short,  so  are  also  all  other  vowels. 
When  at  the  end  of  a  word,  or  in  an  unaccented 
syllable,  it  is  very  short,  like  e  in  battery. 

3,  t    is  generally  pronounced  like  i  in  give. 

3,  i    when  followed  by  e  is  sounded  like  ie  in  field. 

0,0  generally  like  o  in  siojie,  but  when  followed  by  two 
consonants  it  is  short,  like  omoff. 

U,  U  is  pronounced  like  oo  in  school  or  fool. 

^,  ^  which  occurs  only  in  foreign  words,  is  pronounced  like 
i  in  pm. 

Obs.  I. — In  German  every  substantive  begins  with  a  capital 
letter. 

Obs.  II. — Many  of  the  relations  of  objects,  which  would  in 
English  be  expressed  by  prepositions,  are  denoted 
in  German  by  a  change  cf  the  ending  of  the  noun 
and  the  article  which  accomj  anies  it.  There  are  in 
German  four  cases,  distinguished  by  their  endings 
both  in  the  singular  and  plural. 

Declension  of  the  Definite  Article. 

Singular.  Plural. 

ders. 

The  pronouns  bicfer, 
this,  »cla)cr,  which,  jebeiv 
every,  jencr,  that,  take  the 
same  endings ;  of  the 
ending  u,  i  its  elided,  and 
C  alouo  is  used,  bicfe  (not 
bicfie).  The  a  of  the  ending  a0  changes  to  e,  thus  t^t  ^i<\t^  <^  bicfae). 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

for  the  three  getiders. 

Nom. 

bcr 

bic 

Ui 

bic      the       j 

Gen. 

bc§ 

bcr 

beg 

bcr     of  the  1 

Dat. 

bem 

bcr 

bem 

bctt     to  the  I 

Ace. 

ben 

bic 

bag 

bic      the       J 

14  THE   DEFINITE   AFvlIGLE. 

l:er  Tlam,  tlie  man  Zit  ^a^e,  the  cat 

ler  53ater',tlie  father  tic  ^^ei^er,  the  pen 

t>er  fcf'en,  the  s^ovo  (oven)  tie  33irne,  the  pear 

ter  ^unt)*,  the  dog    ,  -  tie  Dlofe,  the  rose 

'icr  Sn.:t3r/tte  brother    ,  tie  SJ^utter,  the  mother 

lai  SBaffer',  the  water  tie  Slume,  the  flower 

ta^  9Jleffer,  the  knife  unt,  and 

ta^  ^int\  the  child  i(i\  [yah]  yes 

ta5  ^xol\  the  bread  nein,  no ' 

3(^"  l)ah,  I  have  ipabe  id),  have  I? 

tu  ^jl.  thou  hast  t)vift  tu,  hast  thou? 

er  (fte,  ti)  ^at,  ho  (she,  it)  has  l)at  er  (fi^'z  ^^),  tias  ho  (she,  it)  ? 


Reading  Exercise  I. 

ttr  ^antt  ^at  tie  53Iume.  Xer  'l^ater  unt  tie  S!}Zutter.  ^ctt  tai3 
^int  tie  ^at^e?  Xie  5)Zutter  l)at  tie  Slume.  ©ie  ^at  tie  33irui\ 
3c^  ^abe  tie  Seter.  S)CL\t  tu  tao  ^Baffer?  3<^  ^^^^  tie  Siofe.  ler 
^rurer  l)at  ta^  ^X'Zejfer.  Du  ^aft  tie  53lume,  Sr  l)at  tai?  33rot.  Tcr 
5}lum^t  tai5  53rot»  SGditen  ^unt  l)at  ter  5)?ann?  3encr9)iami 
l^.U  tie  ^at3e,  2CeId)c  ^a^e  ^ot  fte?  ^at  ter  33ruter  ten  Dfcn? 
3fter  "^Qtann  l)at  ^rot.  3cnt'»^  '^int  ^at  ta3  33rot  unt  tu  l)a|'t  ra^ 
SBaffer. 

Theme  I. 

I  have  the  cat.  Thou  hast  the  flower.  He  has  the  j)ear. 
The  child  has  the  bread,  it  has  also  (aud))  the  rose.  She  has 
the  knife.  Has  the  brother  the  rose  ?  No,  he  has  the  cat. 
Has  she  the  pen  ?  She  has  the  bread  and  the  knife.  Has  the 
man  the  child  ?  The  man  has  the  pen  and  the  knife.  Hasi 
thou  the  rose  ?     Which  flower  has  she  ? 

'  Si,  et  is  pronounced  like  ai  in  aisle.     This  must  not  be  mistaken  for  i«. 

3  (^  has  no  correspondiug  sound  in  English.    See  Lesson  XI,  p.  28. 

»  Pronounce  i)  like  /;  XO  like  v  ;  j  like  y  in  yea. 

<  b  at  the  end  of  a  word  like  t. 


THE   DOUBLIJ    VGWELG.  15 

LESSON   11.  2cmon   2* 

Pronunciation  of  the  Double  Vowels. 

^%  an  somewhat  longer  than  the  simple  a  (a  in  father). 
(^M,  ec  somewhat  longer  than  the  simple  c  {ey  in  they)* 
00,  00  somewhat  longer  than  the  simple  o  (o  in  stone). 

Obs.  I. —  Adjectives,  are  declined  when  they  precede  a  sub- 
stantive, but  when  placed  after  substantives  they 
remain  unchanged. 

Ob3.  II. — The  object  of  the  verb  is  put  in  the  accusative 
case. 

X;a^  ^aar,  ths  hair  Xa^  §ecr,  the  army 

t)er  3lal,  the  eel  ta^  ?0^eer,  the  sea  (ocean) 

tcr  ^affce,  the  coffee  fca^  ?iHoo^,  the  moss 

tie  @eelc,  the  soal  i%  is 

ter  21  ar,  the  eagle  gut,  good 

terSootfe,  the  pilot  njei^,  white 


Reading  Exercise  II. 

tai  ypaar  ifl  gut.  3d)  ^abe  ten  2lal  unt  ten  5lar.  I^er  5Batcr  ^at 
ten  ^affee.  "Zn  Wlann  ^at  tie  S^lofe.  Der  Sootfe  :^at  tie  ^^eter. 
TiViJ  "iB^eer  ift  tief  {deep).  Tn  ^aft  cine  (a)  (Seele.  T)a^  ^eer  ifl  ftein 
{small),  ^aft  tu  tie  ©djeere?  ^at  ter  Sootfe  ten  ^unt?  !Eif  3flofe 
ift  wcig.    Xer  ^affee  ift  gut.    3ft  ter  2lal  gut? 

Theme  II. 

The  man  has  the  coffee.  The  pilot  is  good.  The  rose 
and  the  pear.     Has  the  child  the  bread?    Yes,  the  child  has 

*  Except:  Sc^eere  =  scissors,  and  leer  =  empty,  which  are  prouounced 
ihairiih  and  lair. 


16  MODIFIED    VOWELS. 

the  bread  and  the  knife.  Hast  thou  the  water?  No,  I  have 
the  flower.  The  brother  has  the  dog.  Has  the  cousin  the 
stove  ?  Is  the  hair  white  ?  The  mother  has  the  pen.  The 
ocean  is  (tief)  deep.     I  have    a  (eine)  soul.    Is  the  cat  white? 


LESSON   in.  2cttwn   3. 

Modified  Vowels. 

Stc,  %,  d  nearly  like  ai  in  fair, 

Oc,  O,  i)  nearly  like  ea  in  heard, 

lie,  11^  ii  (=  French  u)  has  no  equivalent  in  English. 

Ob3.  I. — The  vowels  a,  0,  tt,  when  followed  by  c,  are  said 
to  be  modified.  Formerly  the  e  was  placed  above 
these  letters,  but  it  is  now  generally  replaced  by 
two  dots.  With  capitals  it  is  placed  after  the  letter. 

Obs.  ii. — The  accusative  in  the  feminine  and  neuter  is  like 
the  nominative. 

X)er  ^x\t,  the  cheese  T)Xi  D:I,  the  oil 

t»ie  ^dlte,  the  cold  tie  33rucfc,  the  bridge 

ta3  '^J^dDc^en,  the  girl  (maiden)  ta^  Uebel,  the  evil 

ber  ^i3l)ler,  the  collier  flein,  small 

tie  ipb^Ie,  the  pit,  cavern  tief,  deep 

JCnr^akn,  we  have  ipaben  tuir,  have  we? 

)ISie„,y-^-  ISriie,    have  you? 

pe  ^a6en,  they  have  I) aben  pe,  have  they? 


Reading  Exercise  III. 

"^tv  ^dfe  tp  gut  SBir  ^oBen  SBaiJer.  tai  ^dtct)en  Ut  tag  DeU 
"S^cr  ^bl)ler  t)at  ten  ^affee,  3ft  tie  53rii(fe  gut?  Xtc  ipo()Ie  tft  ftetn, 
^at  pe  tie  Sc^eere?  9lein,  toix  ^akn  tie  ©c^eere.    ^al't  i^r  ten  ^dfe? 


THE   DIPHTHONGS. 


17 


!Rein,  8ie  ^abm  ten  ^afe.  Xer  2ootfe  hat  ben  ^uut.  ^aben  ©ie 
rie  Sirne?  5^etn,  i^  ^abe  tie  ffio\i.  Da^  Del  ii"^  gut.  Xer  ^b^ler  ifl 
flein.    I)ie  33ruc!e  ift  Hcin  unD  gut.    3ft  ^^r  ^dfe  gut  i 

Theme  III. 

Is  the  oil  good?  Yes,  the  oil  is  very  (fc'^r)  good.  The  girl 
has  the  cheese.  We  have  water.  You  have  coffee.  Have 
they  the  pear?  No,  they  have  the  rose.  Hast  thou  the 
scissors?  No,  the  mother  has  the  scissors,  I  have  the  flower. 
The  evil  is  gi-eat  (gro§).  The  bridge  is  small.  Has  the  collier 
cheese?  Thou  hast  the  coffee  and  the  cheese.  I  have  the 
dog  and  the  cat.     Is  the  rose  white  ?     The  cheese  is  good. 


LESSON    IV. 


I^ettivn   4. 


The  Diphthongs. 


Wi,  dl  nearly  like  ai  in  aisle  (really  a  little  broader). 
$lu,  ttU  generally  like  ou  in  house. 
9lm,  an  nearly  like  oy  in  boy. 
61,  ci  almost  like  i  in  mine.  * 
6u,  Ctt  like  $lcu/  tiu  {oy  in  boy). 


Declension  of  the  Indefinite  Article. 

Masc.      Fern.        Neuter. 


Nom. 

ein, 

einr, 

ein, 

a  or  an  • 

Thus    aro    declined 

Gen. 

einc§, 

eincr, 

etnc§. 

of  a 

the  conju/ictive  posses- 
.  sive    pronouns    (me in, 

Dat. 

etncm, 

etncr, 

eincm, 

to  a 

bein,  fein,  unfcr,  i^r)  and 

Ace. 

eincn, 

einc, 

ein, 

a 

fein. 

*  This   diphthong   must  not  be  mistaken   r)r  ie  (long  {)  wliich  is  not  a 
diph! honor.     S  e.  Lesson  I.     Pronunciation  of  the  simple  vowels. 
9, 


18  DEMONSTRATIVE   AND   POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 

Demonstrative  Pronouns, 
ticfer  (masc),        tiefe  (fern.),  Diefed  (neut.),  this 


iener 

jene 

„               jeneiJ        „      that 

ta^  ^aui?,  the  house 

!Die  .^aitfer,  the  houses 

ter  35aum,  the  tree 

tie  33dume,  the  trees 

tcr  .^aifer,  the  emperor 

Me  SBaifc,  the  orphan 

ter  Wlcii,  May  (a  month  of 

fcajJ  33ein,  the  leg 

the  year) 

treu,  true 

t)a^  Si,  the  egg 

^eute,  to-day 

Conjunctive  Possessive  Pronouns. 

tneitt  (masc), 

meine 

(fern.) J        mein  {neut).,  my 

'Ctin        „ 

teine 

„            rein        „        thy 

feitt         „ 

feinc 

„            feitt        „        his 

i^r 

it)  re 

i^r         „        her 

unfer      „ 

unfere 

„            unfer      „        our 

3l)r        „ 

3^re 

„            3^r        „        your 

i^^ 

i^re 

i^r         „        their 

Reading  Exercise  lY. 

SO^eitt  5Sater  :^at  nn  fyavn,  Xiefe  i5rau  ^at  eine  ^a^e,  I)er  ^aifer 
^at  meitt  ?!}Zej[er.  Xiefe  ©aife  l)at  ein  (Ei.  1:iefer  ^ann  ^^di  ein 
53eitt»  ^tx  ®arten  (garden)  ^at  *3dume,  'Eiefe  ipdufer  ^af^en  ?^en^ 
fter  (it'mcZoiys),  ^^eute  Mt  id)  ten  ^JJ^ann  (^efe^en  {seen)J^  ©ein 
^>ater  tjl  ^ier  {here).  Xiefe*?  ^inb  ^at  eine  SfJ^ntter.  'Z\t\t  ^a^e  ^at 
eine  ?S)iaua  (mowse).  T)er  Dfen  ij^Jolt.  ipaft  tu  eine  ©eele?  Xeine 
9)Zutter  ift  !ran!  {dcTc).  ©ein  i^unt)  ifl  alt  {old),  ipajl  tu  beine 
^a^e  ?    3<i,  i(%  ^^fcc  nteitte  ^a^e  un^  feinen  iputtt* 

Theme  IV. 

Thy  father  has  a  dog.  This  emperor  has  a  garden  and  a 
house.  The  houses  have  windows.  Thy  dog  is  true.  This 
orphan  has  a  cat.  This  tree.  Thy  trees  and  the  houses. 
This  boy  has  an  Qgg  and  a  pear.  Our  brother  and  her  cousin 
have  houses.  This  eel  and  that  eagle.  Thy  mother  has  a 
pen.  The  ocean  is  wide  (breit).  The  emperor  has  an  army. 
Is  this  man  old  ?    No,  but  (aber)  that  woman  is  very  old. 

*  Notice  the  position  of  the  adverb  of  time  (p.  146,  IV.),  and  of  the 
participle  (p.  19,  I.) 


PRONUNCIATION   OF   £,  V,  T  AND  P. 


19 


LESSON   V. 


2t^tivii    5« 


^,  b,  as  in  English,  but  at  the  end  of  a  word  hke  p. 
2),  b,  as  in  English,  but  at  the  end  of  a  word  like  t. 
Z,  i,  just  as   in  English,  except  in  words  ending  in  iim 

which  are  derived  from  the  Latin,  the  t  is  pronounced 

like  tS  (i.  e.  Hon  =  tsijone). 
^,  ^,  as  in  English. 

Obs.  I.  — In  compound  tenses  the  past  participle  is  placed 

last. 
Cbs.  II. — All  nouns  form  their  accusative  like  tho  nominative 

(for  exceptions  see  p.  167,  8). 


Tcr  33aa,  the  ball 
tic  53inte,  the  pear 
tad  ®rab,  the  grave 
Icr  Xiencr,  the  servant 
tai?  Torf,  the  village 
tcr  %\iX>,  death 
gro^,  large,  great 

3ct)  Mn,  I  am 
tu  bifi,  thou  arb     ' 
cr  ijX  he  or  it  is 
ftc  (ii)  ifl,  she  (it)  12 


Xcr  5lbcnt,  the  evening 
taS  ^int,  the  child 
tie  2;onnc,  the  barrel 
tic  Scftion,  the  lesson 
tic  portion,  the  portion 
tcr  ^rcu^c,  the  Prussian 
(jcfcfecn,  seen 

IV ir  fint,  we  are 
ibr  fcit,     ) 

©ic  fIn^  f  y^^^  ^^^ 

fic  [tnt,  they  are 


Reading  Exercise  Y. 

^rt  S3at(  ijl  gro5,  iiicin  33aa  t|l  (]ut.  .^afl  tu  cine  ^nrnc  ?  9?citt, 
lib  tjabe  tcinc  Slofc.  Sijl  tu  cin  ^int?  9iein,  icb  Mn  cin  ^axm. 
Xicfcd  ^int  bat  cincn  ^unt*  ipabcn  ©ie  ticfcd  ®rab  gcfeben?  'Ead 
1^'orf  i[t  gro§  nut  tic  3:onnc  ijl  Hcin.  2^cr  3:ot.  £icfcr  ^aifcr,  T;cr 
5lbcnt  ift  fcbr  angcnebm  (pJeasant)^  53ift  tu  cin  ^rcu§c?  2Qir  l)abcn 
tic  Scftion  pckrnt  (Jcarncd),  'I^ie  53dumc  Mbcn  flatter  {leaven), 
Tk  ^LMiitkr  fint  c^xm  {green),  Xcr  ^atfer  ^t  ipdufcr.  "Eicfcr  ©ar;? 
ten  l)at  cincn  33aum. 


2.0  PKONDNCIATION    OF    C  AND  S. 

Theme   V. 

Are  yoTi  a  man  ?  No,  I  am  a  child.  We  are  good  and  you 
are  small.  Is  your  ball  good?  Has  this  child  thy  pear? 
This  village  is  very  large.  I  have  seen  *  the  Emperor  to-day. 
Are  you  a  Prussian?  This  evening  is  very  (fe^r)  pleasant. 
The  portion  is  good.  We  have  learned  *  this  lesson.  The 
barrel  is  small.  This  grave  is  large.  The  man  has  a  house 
and  a  garden.     This  child  has  thy  egg  and  my  pear. 


LESSON    VI.  ^cfttPtt    6. 

^,  c  before  o,  C,  i  or  ^  sounds  like  ts. 
^(J,,  c  before  tt,  0,  U,  au  and  before  consonants  sounds  like  f, 
^,  f  as  in  English,  but  it  is  never  mute  before  n. 

e.  t  ^,  t 

2)er  Samerab,  the  comrade  S^er  ^amm,  the  comb 

ter  CiantiCat,  the  candidate  ba^  ^reu^,  the  cross 

tie  Sapede,  the  chapel  ter  ^abe,  the  boy 

tie  Sitrone,  the  citron  ta5  ^nie,  the  knee 

(Eafar,  Caesar  ter  ^onig,t  the  king 


Reading  Exercise  VI. 

"La^  ^irtt  ter  %ran,  'Lev  Sflmerat  ifi  in  ter  Sapellc.  Xer  (£an^ 
titat  ^at  je^tt  (ten)  ^aufer.  ^aft  tu  ten  ^amm?  ?^eitt,  icb  ^abe  tad 
^reitj.  I)er  kmh  ift  gro^.  'Bad  ^nie  ift  ge^eilt  {has  healed). 
2Car  (was)  Safar  ein  ^onig?  ^tin,  (Eafar  njar  ein  ^aifer.  S3ir  fint 
franf  (sick) .  Tk  Sitrone  ift  fauer  (sour) .  Xad  ^int  ^at  tie  ^a^e. 
3d)  ^abe  einen  ^unt.  1;u  Bift  ein  ^nabe.  2:ie  Sapelle  ifl  gro§» 
3}Zein  35ater  ^at  ten  ^onig  gefe^en, 

*  This  participle  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the  sentence.     See  Observ.  L 
f  (?)  after  i  has  the  sound  of  c^.     See  Less.  VIII. 


PRONUNCIATION    OF   5  AND  Z. 


21 


Theme  YI. 

The  candidate  has  a  chapel,  and  the  king  has  a  cross.  The 
boy  has  a  comb.  Thou  hast  a  citron.  We  are  sick  (franf). 
Was  Caesar  an  emperor  ?  My  father  has  a  comrade.  His 
father  is  old  (alt),  thy  cousin  is  large,  and  my  mother  is  good. 
We  have  a  king,  you  have  an  emperor.  The  cross  of  the 
ohapel. 

Conversation. 


SiMuetrt^nak? 
^aft  In  ten  ^amm? 

^at  fceitt  33atcr  ein  ipaud  ? 

^at  He  'Mutttv  einert  ^unt)  ? 
3ft  ter  'Mann  ein  (£ant)icat  ? 


5^ein,  id)  lin  ein  ^JJatc^cn. 

3a,  id)  ^abe  ten  ,^amm  unt  tai 

^reuj. 
3a,  mein  -^ater  ^at  i^mi   {two) 

ipiiufer. 
5^ein,  meine  5J?utter  "^at  tic  ^a^e» 
3a,  er  ifl  ter  Santitat  tcr  (£a):elle» 


LESSON  vn. 


I^eftion    7. 


@,  f  is  pronounced  softer  than  in  Enghsh,  almost  like  z 


in  zone. 


3,  J  is  pronounced  like  ts. 

Die  ©uppe,  the  soup 
Der  ^afe,  the  hare 
ter  (Begen,  the  blessing 
ter  33efen,  the  broom 
ter  ©efang,  the  song 
oter,  or 


s 

!Die  3at)I  the  number, 

ter  3<^^^,  the  tooth 

ta^  3^^t,  the  tent 

ter  ^rinj,  the  prince 

ter  ^ranjofe,  the  Frenchman 

jmei,  two        je^n,  ten 


Reading  Exercise  VII. 

!Der  ^nalt  ^at  ten  8efen.  Da^  ^int  ter  ^xan.  "Lex  fxin  W 
ein  3elt.  Der  ^anjofe  ^at  einen  Jpunt.  ^aft  tu  einen  3<i^«^  Dff 
53e(en  ijl  quU    I)er  ©efang  ter  3Soget  (o/'^/ie  6ir£?s).   ^at  fte  (Suppe? 


22  PRONUNCIATION    OF    G,  II  ANi)  J 

3a,  pe  ^at  ©uppe  unD  Jlaffee,  3^)  i)^^^  P>^^  53ei'en,  tu  l)aft  je^n 
tiitronen  {Plur.).  Sir  finC)  grojj,  ru  Inft  llcin.  Sr  l)at  Den  XpuuC 
unt  He  jla^e,  Xer  ^oni^  ifi  ein  t^ran^ofe.  Ttx  ^rinj  ift  eiit  ^Preu^e. 
23ift  tu  ein  granjofe?  ^'Zcin,  ic^  bin  ein  ^reuj^e.  Siefer  33ci'cn  i[t  <ydt, 
fA'Cx  {here)  ftn^  jwei  i5ran30)'en  {Plur.). 

Theme  YII. 

Are  you  a  Prussian  or  a  Frencliman  ?  Tlie  emperor  is  a 
man.  The  broom  is  good  and  large.  Two  brooms.  The  song 
of  the  birds.  Hast  thou  soup  ?  No,  I  have  coffee.  We  are 
small  and  you  are  large.  Have  you  a  tooth  ?  Is  the  number 
large  ?  The  tent  is  small.  The  king  has  two  servants.  We 
have  a  citron  and  a  pear.  The  lesson  is  easy  (Ieid)t),  We 
are  Frenchmen,  you  are  a  Prussian.  Where  (mo)  is  the 
emperor  of  the  French.  He  is  here.  This  man  is  a  i)rince. 
Have  you  brooms  ? 

Conversation. 

^at  ter  ^^rinj  ein  ^aui^  Xer  ^rinj  M  j\n?ei  ^aufer* 

S;>.\t  "cai  Slim  einen  3<i^"  ?  3^;  t*^^  ^int  ^fit  einen  3^^)"* 

SBijl  tn  ein  %xan]oic^  ^dn,  i&i  bin  ein  ^reu^c. 

GinC  @ie  ein  Santibat  ?  ^^^cin,  icb  bin  ein  ^der  {painter) r 

^abt  i^r  ©uppe  ?  S>ir  ^aben  (5uppe  unt  ^ajfce. 

3(1  ter  Sefen  gut?  2er  Sefen  ift  febr  gut. 

^at  tiefer  ^nabe  einc  Gitronc?  ^Zein,  er  \)at  einc  53irnc. 

3ii  tag  3f^t  ter  granjofen  gro^  ?  Xa5  3^^^  ^^^  B^^anjofen  ift  flein. 

^abt  i^r  einen  'Sogel  gefe^en  ?  3ii/  t^ii^  ^aben  einen  So»}cI  gefel)en. 


LESSON    Vin.  2cttwn    S. 

©,  9  is  pronounced  hard,  like  g  in  garden. 
(3,  g  when  preceded  by  t  is  soft  (i.  e.  it  sounds  like  trf)). 
(y,  !^  at  the  beginning  and  middle  of  words,  as  in  hand. 
Q^  f^  before  a  consonant  and  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  mute, 

but  lengthens  the  vowel  of  the  preceding  syllable. 
3,  j  (yot)  corresponds  to  the  English  y  in  yea. 


N0UN3   IN    EL,  EN  AND    ER. 


23 


Obs.  I. — The  demonstrative  bicfcr  (this),  jcncr  (that),  and 
the  interrogative  pronoun  iucli^CV  (which),  are  de- 
cUned  Uke  the  definite  article  in  Lesson  I. 

Obs.  n. — MascuHne  and  neuter  nouns  ending  in  c(,  Ct  and  en 
add  S  in  the  genitive  singular.  (See  Decl.  I.,  p.  166.) 


Declension 


OF  THE  SINGULAR   OF   MASCULINE    AND   NEUTER   SUBSTANTIVES 


The  collar 
Norn.    I:cr  ^ragen 
Gen.     te5  ilragcuj 
Dat      tern  .^ragcn 
Ace.     ben  ^ragcu 


in  cl,  en  and  cr. 

The  servant        The  bird  The  water 

Xcr  l:iener         Xer  33ogel  tai  SCajJer 

te5  ^iener^        te^  3Sogel;i  tes  2Ba|Jer0 

tern  Xiener         tern  5SogeI  tern  Staffer 

ten  i:iener         ten  33ogel  ta^  SBaffer 


Xer  33crg,  the  mountain 
tie  03abel,  the  fork 
ter  Rm\\^,  the  king 
tcr  ^ragcn,  the  collar 
ter  3«te,  the  Jew 
tag  3a|r,  the  year 
lang,  long 
inir,  mo 


!i:er  ^elr,  the  hero 
ter  iput,  the  hat 
tie  .^b^e,  the  hight 
ter  ^abn,  the  cock 
tie  Whx,  the  watch 
tcr  (3ot)n,  the  son 
geben  Sie,  give 
war,  was 


Reading  Exercise  VIII. 

I^ie  ©abel  teg  Xieneri?.  Xer  iput  te>j  ^iBatcr^J.  I^ie  U^r  te^  ^iJUcret, 
%k  ^i3l)le  ift  tier  {deep).  ®eben  @ie  mir  einen  ^ragen.  I^iefer 
ipelD  l)at  jene  U^r.  3c^  ^iibf  K^ten  %rg  gefeben.  Xer  <Bo%n  Hi 
5Sater<3*  Xer  3:ot  te5  ^aifer^  ?  ^Belcber  3ute  ^at  ten  ^onig  gefeben  ? 
Xtefer  3wte.  Xer  ^alm  t)at  gefrdtjt  {crowed),  Xas  3al)r  ift  lang. 
Xcr  Gantitat  ter  (iapeUe  bat  einen  Xiener.  S3el(be  SapeCle  ?  Xte 
GapeUe  teiJ  ^aiferg.  ®eben  ©ie  mir  tiefe  Ubr.  SDelcbe  Ubr  ^at  ter 
^eft  ?  Sr  bat  tie  Ubr  te^  ^aiferg.  Xer  ©ol)n  tes  '^Baterg  {[I  gut, 
3ener  ^elD  ift  ter  (5o:^rt  teg  ^bntgg.* 

*  See  Lesson  X.,  Obs. 


24 


PRONUNCIATION   OF    F  AND   W. 


Theme  VIII. 

Have  you  the  hat  of  my  father  ?  The  watch  of  this  servant 
is  good.  Is  this  pit  (cavern)  deep  ?  The  fork  of  this  king. 
Which  emperor  has  the  watch  of  this  colHer  ?  Is  this  year 
long  ?  Has  the  candidate  of  this  chapel  a  hat  ?  The  death  of 
the  king.  Which  king  ?  This  child  has  a  mother  and  a  father. 
Which  king  has  seen  the  emperor?  This  Jew  has  seen  the 
emperor  and  the  king.  Where  is  the  son  of  this  father  ? 
Which  son  ?    The    cock  has  crowed. 

Conversation. 


^afl  In  ben  ^onig  gefe^en?# 

^abt  t^r  eine  cjute  ®abel  ? 

33tft  in  tin  ^m  ? 

3ft  biefer  JpelD  ein  ^i^angofe  ? 

SMa^Sa^rlang? 

ipat  jenejJ  ^inb  eine  3JJutter  ? 

Seld^en  ^aifer  l^aft  In  gefe^en? 

3ft  iener  SJJann  ein  ^reu^e  ? 

2Co  ifl  ber  ©o^n  biefe^  Cannes ' 

©eib  i^r  granjofen? 


3c^  fcabe  ben  !I^iener  fce^  ^ijnig^ 
gefe^en. 

2Cir  ^ben  eine  gute  ®akl. 

9^ein,  id)  Bin  ein  ^eibe  (heathen)  ♦ 

9Zein,  tiefer  ipelD  ifl  ein  IDeutfd^er* 

3a,  tae  ^a^x  ift  fe|r  lang. 

3ene^  ^int)  :^at  eine  9)lutter, 

Den  ^aifer  ber  granaofen. 

9letn,  er  ift  ein  grangofe. 

Sr  ift  Iter, 

S^^ein,  tt)ir  pnb  SnglSnbcr  (Eng- 
lishmen). 


LESSON   IX.  2cttwn   9. 

85,  tl   has  the  same  sound  as/. 

23S,  tiJ  takes  the  place  of  the  English  v. 


f8,ti=  F 

!r)er  SSetter,  the  cousin 

bie  33ernunft,  reason 

bag  25aterlanb,  the  fatherland 

ber  3Sogel,  the  bird 

ber  ®eoatter,  the  godfather 

ber  <SfIatte,  the  slave 

ber  SBein,  the  wine 

»er,  who 


"Ltx  SCagcn,  the  wagon 
bie  SBede,  the  wave 
bag  SBaffer,  the  water 
bag  SBetter,  the  weather 
ber  S3iIIen,  the  will 
ber  SBinter,  the  winter 
ttJO,  where 
!ran!,  sick      fait,  cold. 


PLURAL   OF    THE    CONJUNCTIVE   POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS.  25 

Plural  of  mcttt. 
Nom.       meinc     =  my 
Gen.        tneiner  —  of  my 
Dai         meinen  =  to  my 
Ace.        meinc     =  my 

Obs.— SWeitt  (my),  bcin  (thy),  fcin  (Ms),  Uin  (no),  unfer  (our), 
and  ^r  (your),  are  declined  like  cin  in  the  singular. 
For  me  proper  formation  of  the  plural  we  declined 
mein. 


Reading  Exercise  IX. 

^er  5Sater  tc^  (53cijatter3  ift  gut.  Die  SSernunft  be^  ^b^Ier^.  T)a^ 
SSaterlanC  meine^  DnteU  (uncle),  ^o  ift  bein  @Haije  ?  SBer  l)at 
fcen  SCagen  tetnev^  35ctter£j  ?  3Rein  55etter  ^at  feinen  2Bagen.  Tiu\tt 
S3inter  ift  fetjr  fait*  Xer  SBiUen  jene^  3}Janne«.  !Dag  SCetter  i(l  an^ 
gene^m  (agreeable).  3Bo  ift  ber  3Sater  unfere^  55etter^?  !Der  Dn!e( 
it)rer  splutter.  Unfer  ipaud  ift  gro§.  3^r  Garten  ift  Rein.  Unfere 
Jante  (aunt)  wax  franf.  3ft  bein  ©arten  gro§?  9lein,  mein 
(Garten  ift  tlein.  ^mt  ^van  (woman)  ijt  unfere  2)Jutter.  %i  ^^x 
BXnX  neu  ? 

Theme  IX. 

The  reason  of  our  cousin  is  good.  This  water  is  very  cold. 
The  waves  of  the  water.  Where  is  the  godfather  of  my 
uncle?  Thy  cousin  has  a  wagon  and  a  house.  Is  this  weather 
agreeable  ?  "V\niere  is  the  slave  of  thy  uncle.  Your  wagon 
is  old  (alt).  Her  father  and  your  mother.  His  boy  is  my 
friend  (^reunb).  This  woman  is  my  aunt  (Xante).  My  garden 
is  very  large.  Has  the  boy  his  pen  ?  Yes,  he  has  his  pen 
and  his  pencil  (33leiftift).     This  girl  has  a  flower. 

Conversation. 

SJo  ift  ber  55ater  beiner  *i»?utter  ?    (Sr  ift  ^ier. 

3jt  biefer  SKinter  fe^r  fait?  Win,  biefer  3Binter  ift  »arm» 


26  PRONUNCIATION   OF   P,  Z,  M,  N,  X,  Q  AND  R. 

4)a|l  bu  einen  3Satcr  ?  3a,  i^  :^aBc  einen  3Sater  unt)  cine 

4)at  ter  ©toe  ben  SSoget  nteines  5^ein,    er  :^at  ten   SSogcl  belrte<: 

2Bo  ift  tein  (Stoe  ?  SJiein  ©flaije  ift  |ier. 

SBer^att)en2Bagenmeine^5Sater^?  ^Ter  Dnfel  :^at  ten  ^a^txi  telnes. 

35aterg. 
^at  ber  ®e»atter  eitte  ^wttcr  ?       ^tnt  %x<iiU  \\i  feine  ?D^utter» 
Ser  ift  jene  ?^rau  ?  3ene  Srau  ift  feine  3:ante, 

3fitein35atergu^aufe  {at  home)  ^  91ein,  er  ift  in  Berlin, 
^aj^  bu  ben  Dn!el  beiner  ^iJlutter  3^,    t^    kbe  ben  Dnfel  meinei 
gefe^en  ?  SJJutter  in  Berlin  gefe^en. 


LESSON   X.  «efttpn   10. 

5f ,  f ;  C,  I ;  HR,  m  ;  91,  n  and  3^,  j  are  pronounced  nearly  as 
in  English. 

C  q  is  always  followed  by  u  and  they  are  pronounced  to- 
gether like  kw. 

M,  X  is  shrilled  ^nd  emphasized  more  than  in  Enghsh. 

2)ie  %axh,  the  color  X)er  %raum,  the  dream 

ber  t^Iu§,  the  river  bie  3;afel,  the  black-board 

ber  l^reunb,  the  friend  ber  5^amen,  the  name 

bie  SieBe,  (the)  love  ber  ^naU,  the  boy 

ber  %aUt,  the  falcon  bie  %j:t,  the  ax 

bag  ^leit,  the  dress  ber  3fln^m,  the  glory 

bag  S):empel,  the  example  bag  ^a^,  the  wheel 

bie  dvU,  the  ^arth  bie  DueKe,  the  source  (spring) 

bie  Dnal,  the  torment  ntnb,  round 

ber  ipammer,  the  hammer  atiQcnt^m,  agreeable 

Obs. — All  masculine  and  neuter  nouns  not  ending  in  t,  tl,  ttl, 
tX,  ^ett  and  Icin,  form  the  genitive  singular  by  adding 
g  or  c§,  and  the  dative  by  adding  c** 

*  See  page  169,  Third  Declension. 


SINGULAR   OP   MASCULINE   AND   NEUTER   SUBSTANTIVES.  27 

Declension 

OP    THE   SINGULAR   OP   MASCULINE   AND   NEUTER   SUBSTANTIVES. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 

The  man 
Der  'Mam 
beg  ^anncg 
bent  ^ann(c) 
ben  SJiann 

The  child 

Dag  ^inb 
beg  ^inbcg 
bent  ^inb(c) 
bag  ^inb 

The  tree 
Der  33aum 
beg  33aumcg 
bent  53aum(c) 
ben  33anm 

The  house 
Dag  Jpang 
beg  ipanfcg 
bent  ^auf(c) 
bag  ^aug 

Reading  Exercise  X. 

Die  garBe  ber  3ftofe.  Dag  ^lelb  beg  ?5reuttbeg»  Die  Siek  ber 
5J?utter.  Der  %alU  ijt  gro^.  Dag  ^leib  beiner  iJ^utter  ijl  iter.  2Bo 
ijl  mein  jammer?  Die  Srbe  ifl  runb.  Der  ^reunb  beineg  3Saterg  \\i 
toU  (dead).  Die  QneHe  beg  f^Inlfeg.  3(^  ^ak  einen  2:raum  ge^aM 
(had).  3enc  2;afet  iji  gro§.  Der  ^naBe  t)at  bie  W  feitteg  ^rennbeg. 
Der  ^amen  teg  3Setterg.  2Cir  '^aBen  bit  W  beg  greunbeg.  2Bo  ifl 
bag  Syempel?  Der  3fln^m  beg  Dnfelg.  Dag  Slab  beg  2Cageng  ijl 
runb.    Die  Dual  U^  ^Hdbc^eng.    Der  greunb  1:^^  33aterg  i)at  eine  W* 

Theme  X. 

The  love  of  the  father.  The  dress  of  the  mother.  My 
father  has  an  ax.  Where  is  his  uncle  ?  The  source  of  the 
river.  The  father  of  thy  friend  is  dead.  This  black-board 
is  small.  The  boy  has  the  pen  of  my  sister.  The  glory  of 
thy  cousin  is  great.  Hast  thou  had  a  dream?  The  name 
of  the  friend.  The  love  of  thy  mother.  The  earth  is  large. 
Is  the  earth  round?  Have  we  the  wheel  of  the  wagon 
(©agen)  ?  No,  we  have  the  ax  and  the  hammer.  The  torment 
is  great. 

Conversation. 

ipajl  bu  bag  ^(eib  meiner  Gutter  ?  9Iein,  id)  hah  mein  ^leib* 
3j^  bie  3:afel  groj  ?  3^,  bie  3:afet  ift  grog. 

2Go  ift  mein  jammer  ?  Dein  jammer  ift  ^ier. 

2Ber  (who)  ^at  bie  W  meineg  Dein  33ruber  \)at  pe  (it)* 
5$aterg? 


28  PRONUNCIATION    OF    CU. 

2So  ifl  ba3  Syempel?  3c^  |aBe  bag  @):empeL 

3j^  ter  ^reunb  t)eine^  35etterg  to^t  ?  3a,  er  ift  tott 
3jl  tie  grtc  runt)  ?  3a,  tie  (Srbe  ip  gro§  unb  runfe* 

2So  ifi  tie  DweUe  De5  glujje^  ?       2)ie  £^uetle  teg  glujfeg  ift  ^ier, 
^afi  tu  einen  2;raum  ge^aBt  ?        3^1,  ic^  ^a6e  einen  2:raum  ge^aBt. 
2Cer  :^at  ben  Balfen  feiner  ^wiitx  ?  SHein  33ruter  |at  ten  galfen  feiner 

muiitx. 


LESSON   XI.  ^tmon   11. 

6^5,  4  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  or  wlien  followed  by  g, 
is  pronounced  like  f ,  except  in  compound  words,  where 
the  g  is  abridged  from  c8,  especially  in  the  genitive  case. 

„  ,f  after  a,  0,  U,  and  au,  bas  a  guttural  sound  and  re- 
sembles the  Scotch  ch  in  Loch."^ 

„  „  after  e,  t,  t\,  a,  5,  liu,  tn,  n,  and  the  consonants  is  a 
soft  "  palatal  aspirate." 

^^,  K  ^\^,  guttural 

ttx  (E^or,  the  choir  I)er  33ad),  the  brook 

ter  (E^rifl,  the  christian  tie  33dc^e,  the  brooks 

bag  2Bad)g,  the  wax  ber  ^ucfcen,  the  cake 

ber  Od^g,  the  ox  bag  Sud),  the  book 

ber  ^ucfcg,  the  fox  bie  Siidjer,  the  books 

tie  S-^ronif,  the  chronicle  bag  Sid^t,  the  light 

bie  58iid)fe,  the  box  bag  I)ac^,  the  roof 

jtngt,  sings  reid),  rich 

gelb,  yellow  bie  .Winter,  the  children 


Reading  Exercise  XI. 

^er  (£^or  fmgt  ein  Sieb  {song).  Zxt\tx  3Hann  i(l  ein  ^^xx%  Jene 
grau  ijt  eine  S^rijlin  {fern.),    l^a^  ^^6^^  ij^  gelB.     Xer  Dd^g  ijl 

*  This  sound  cannot  be  clearly  defined.  It  can  only  be  acquired  by 
the  aid  of  a  native  teacher.  In  words  taken  from  the  French  it  retains 
Hs  original  sound  ;  e.  g.,  S^arlotte  =  Sharldttuh. 


PRONUNCIATION    OF    CK  AND  NG.  29 

grof,  Xcr  gud)g  ifl  braun  (brown),  Jpafl  ^u  tie  S^ronil  gelefen 
(reacf)  ?  I^ie  33u(^cr  te^  5D^dcd^en^.  ^Diefer  SJ'^ann  ^at  einc  Siid^fe* 
!Eer  ^ac^,  tie  33dd?e*  i:er  ^uc^en  ift  gro^  unt  gut  ipatt  t^r  ta« 
S3u(^  gelefen  {read}^  Tie  33iicber  teine^  DnfeliJ.  X;a^  2id}t  ler 
Sampe  {lamp).  Wtin  33etter  ift  rci^,  akr  fein  DnM  ip  gut.  I^ad 
5^ad)  te^  ^an]t^,  3ft  tag  SBad)^  gelb  ?  ©int  tie  Ddjfen  (^/le  oxen, 
pi)  grop  ?    3i^  jene  grau  eine  S^riftin  ?    ^ein  33ruter  i)l  fin  (E^rift. 

Theme  XI. 

The  children  are  good.  Have  you  read  tlie  books.  Is  the 
cake  good  ?  Yes,  the  cake  is  very  good.  The  brook  and  the 
brooks.  My  uncle  is  a  Christian,  but  my  brother  is  a  French- 
man. Is  the  wax  yellow  ?  This  fox  is  brown.  The  ox  is 
very  large.  Have  you  read  the  chronicle  ?  I  have  read  the 
chronicle  and  the  books.  Is  your  cousin  rich  ?  Yes,  he  is 
very  rich,  but  my  father  is  poor  (arm).  The  roof  of  the  houses. 

Conversation. 

3ii  3^1^  ^n^fl  ^^i^  ?  5^^ in,  ^r  i|l  arm  (poor), 

2Bo  ifi  mein  33rutcr  ?  I^ein   53ruter    ift   in   ter  ^irc^c 

(church), 

3ft  ter  ^ud)en  gut  ?  Ter  ^u Aen  ijl  fe^r  gut. 

31^  bag  ^a6^^  gelB  ?  3a,  ta«  3Bad)g  ift  gelb. 

^at  tein  33ruter  tie  33iicher  ?  3a,  er^at  tic  58iid)er  unt  tie  S^roni!. 

ipaft  tu  tie  S^ronif  gelefen  ?  9lein,  aber  mein  Srutcr  ^at  fte  ge- 

lefen. 

S3o  ftnt  tie  ^Biid^er  teg  9)^atc^eng?  3(%  ^abe  [te  (them), 

8int'tie  .Winter  gut  ?  3a,  tie  Winter  fmt  fe^r  gut* 


LESSON   Xn.  2t{twn    12* 

rf  has  the  sound  of  double  f. 

ntj  is  pronounced  like  ng  in  the  word  long.  * 

*  In  compound  words  where  the  n  and  the  g  belong  to  different  wordf 
each  letter  is  pronounced  separately. 


30 


SINGULAR    OE   FEMININE   SOUNDS. 


jj  is  used  in  the  middle  of  words. 

^*  is  used  as  double  f  (not  z),  at  the  end  of  words  and 
syllables,  and  sounds  like  ss  (not  sz). 
Obs. — Feminine  nouns  undergo  no  change  in  the  cases  of 
the  singular.     (See  Declens.  IV.,  pp.  171,  172.) 

Declension 

OF   FEMININE   NOUNS   IN   THE   SINGULAR. 


The  Woman 
Norn.      'Bit  %xau 
Gen.       ber  %vnn 
Bat.       ter  %vnvi 
Ace.       bie  j^vau 


The  Gun 

Die  33u# 
ter  53ucfcfe 
ter  Sud))'e 
tie  33uc^fc 


X)er  310(1,  the  coat 

bie  modt,  the  beH 

ter  ^acf,  the  pack 

ta^  2Berf,  the  work 

bie  33an!,  the  bench 

ber  ®efang,  the  song 

ber  ®ro§!oater,  the  grandfather 

bie  (Sro^mutter,  the  grandmother 

bte  grau,  the  woman 


The  Color  The  Ax 

"Bit  garbe  !Die  ^vt 

ber  ?^arBe  ber  Slyt 

ber  garbe  ber  %t 

bie  %axht  bie  Slyt 

!Dag  f5(i§,  the  barrel 

ber  3fling,  the  ring 

bag  5Heffer,  the  knife 

bie  9tiicffe:^r,  the  return 

bie  5Ragt,  the  servant  (fern.) 

ber  ^ag,  the  hatred 

grog,  great 

lang,  long 

lo^t,  praises 


Reading  Exercise  XII. 

T)er  9lo(f  meineg  35aterg.  I^ie  ©(ode  feiner  SO^utter.  Xer  9lo(f 
jeneg  ^anne^.  Da^  SBerf  Io6t  ten  SJ^eifter  (master).  t)k  33attf  ifl 
lang.  !5)ie  S^iidffe^r  unfere^^  Dn!eli?.  X)ein  3fling  ift  flein.  2^er  ®c^ 
fang  ift  ^errtic^  (beautiful).  1)er  ^paf  biefeg  5!}lanneg.  Da6  i^aj 
jener  ?^rau  ift  grog  unb  gut.  !Diefe3  ?D^ejfer  ift  ni^t  (not)  gut.  2^er 
(S^rogyater  unb  bie  ©rogmutter  1:)ahtn  einen  jammer  unb  eine  33tume. 
'Lit  SJ'lagD  ^t  ein  Sag  unb  ein  ^O^effer*  2oBt  ber  ®rog»ater  bie  ®rog^ 
mutter?    5^ein,  er  lot^t  unferen  (our)  33ruter  unb  bcine  SO^utter. 


*  This  is  really  compounded  of  f  and  ^  (final  s)  = 


PRONUNCIATION    Cr   PF  AND  FR. 


'61 


.     Theme  XII. 

"Where  is  the  hammer  of  my  father  ?  I  have  not  the  ham- 
mer, of  your  father.  The  pack  of  that  servant  is  large. 
The  work  praises  the  master.  The  bench  is  small.  The 
return  of  thy  brother.  The  grandfather  praises  the  grand- 
mother. The  servant  has  a  ring.  The  hatred  of  this  woman. 
This  knife  is  good,  that  knife  is  not  good.  The  song  of  the 
servant  is  beautiful.  That  barrel  is  large,  but  this  ring  is 
small.     Has  the  father  a  coat  ?     Yes,  he  has  a  coat. 


Conversation. 


ipat  jcner  3J?ann  einen  ^ad  ? 
2Co  ift  tie  3HagD  ? 
2Ber  ^at  meirt  Wt\\ix  ? 
3jt  tie  33anf  lang  ? 
Sobtber  3$ater  tic  ^rau? 
ipat  tiefe  ^rau  einen  Oting  ? 
SBoiflter^ro^yater? 
Jpat  tie  SJJagt  ein  f^af  ? 


3a,  cr  ^at  einen  ^ad. 
2:ie  ^iJiagt  ift  in  tern  ©artcn. 
I;ie  ©rojmutter  ^at  tein  ^JOJeffer. 
3a,  tie  33an!  ift  fel)r  (very)  lang. 
^dn,  er  tobt  ten  <Sxopattv. 
3a,  fte  (sAe)  ^at  einen  Soling. 
!Der  ©rojj^ater  ift  in  tern  (Garten. 
3a,  pe  l)at  ein  gag  unt  einen  0ling, 


It  occurs  mostly  in  words  of 


LESSON  xm. 

^^,  p^  has  the  sound  of  f. 

Greek  origin. 
^f;  ^f  are  united  so  as  to  give  one  sound,  which  is  uttered 

with  compressed  lips. 


^ie  ^^ilofop^ie,  Philosophy 

tie  ®eograp^te,  Geography 

Sltolp^,  Adolphus 

ter  '^iai)l,  the  post 

ter  ^feil,  the  arrow 

ter  5lpfel,  the  apple 

ta^  ^fert,  the  horse 


fiuife,  Louisa 
ipeinri(^,  Henry 
iflaxk,  Mary 
gmilie,*  Emily 
Sutnjtg,  Lewis 
grietric^,  Frederic 
Caroline,  Carohne 


*  The  i  is  pronounced  here  like  y  in  Yankee,  (Aymeelyiih). 


32  PROPER   NAMES. 

Da^  grdutein,  Miss  ge^brt,  belongs 

wit  ^eif  t,  how  is  called,  what  is  the  name  of 

Declension  of  Proper  Names, 

Obs. — Names  of  persons  preceded  by  the  definite  article  re- 
main unchanged.  Without  the  article  they  add  in  the 
genitive  §,  except  masculine  names  ending  in  §,  §,  f(^, 
^,  J  or  ^  which  take  cn8,  and  feminine  names  ending 
in  e  which  add  n8. 


Charles 

Max 

Emma 

Henrietta 

Nom.     ^arl 

^av 

Smma 

^enriette 

Gen.     ^avU 

mavcn^ 

(Smmag 

^enriettenS 

Dat.      ^arl 

Sfftav 

Smma 

^enriette 

Ace.      ^arl 

max 

Smma 

^mxuttt 

Reading  Exercise  XIII. 

Tit  ^^ilofop^ie  waj  in  ®ned?cnlan5  {Greece)  ju^aufe  (at  home), 
tit  ^eogrartie  tcr  Bfan^ofen  {Plur.).  Winn  ^fuSr^tblp^  ifi  flein, 
akr  meinc  3;ante  (aunt)  2uife  ift  gro^,  Tcr  ^fa^l  geprt  meinem 
33ruter  ^eittrid).  ttv  ^fcU  ifl  ni*t  gro§.  I^iefer  Slpfel  get)brt  meincr 
(Emma.  S^n^^-^ffr^  ift  J^idst  gro§.  Sene^  ^fert)  ift  meig.  ^arl  ift 
Hetn.  ^arie  ^at  eine  ^eDer.  Smilie  ^at  ein  33uc^.  tai  ^u6 
Smilien^  (or  gmilien^  33ud))  ijt  ^ut»  Xer  Jpunt  Bnetrid)^  ift  flein 
aber  ^aricn^  ^a^e  ift  grog.     2Bo  ift  ^atoUne  ? 

Theme  XIII. 

Mary's  hat  is  beautiful  (fcbbn).  Henrj^'s  apple.  The  hat  of 
Charles  is  small.  Geography  and  Philosophy.  My  brother 
has  an  arrow.  Emily  has  a  book,  and  Charles  has  an  apple. 
Henry  has  a  horse.  Hast  thou  a  horse  ?  No,  I  have  a  donkey 
(Sfel).  Miss  Louisa  is  a  girl.  This  geography  belongs  to  my 
brother.  Is  your  brother  Adolphus  small  ?  No,  my  brother 
Adolphus  is  largGi  but  my  sister  ((S(^tt?efter)  Mary  is  smaU 
"What  is  the  name  of  (wic  M^t)  this  man  and  that  woman? 
His  name  is  Lewis,  her  name  is  Caroline. 


PBONUNCIATION    OF   SCH,  SP  KBT>  ST. 


33 


Conversation. 

S3o  t|l  3|r  53ruber  Sufcwig  ?        Sr  i|l  in  faxi^  (Paris). 

^ot  fetneJante  (aunt)  tin  33uc^?  3a,  fie  ^at  sn?ei  53ud)er  (6oo^s). 

2Cie  ^eif  t  tiefe  ^rau  ? 

3fl  e^  unfer  ipeinrid)  ? 

^at  er  eine  ©eograp^ie  ? 

i^abt  i^r  bag  33u(^  ter  Suife  ? 

®o  ift  graulein  2ui|c  ? 

3ft  bein  33ruber  2lbolrt  Hein? 


X;iefe  i^rau  ^ei§t  3JJarie, 
9lein,  eg  (lO  ift  mein  55ater, 
9^ein,  er  ^at  eine  S^ronif. 
5^ein,  mir  ^aBen  Suifeng  ?5eber  (pen), 
i^rdulein  2uife  ift  ju  ^aufe  (a^  home). 
^'^ein,  meitt  33ruber  5lbolp^  ift  fe^r  gro§. 


LESSON  XIV.  £eftiott  14. 

S$,  f(^  like  the  English  sh  in  s/iip. 

(S|l,  f^  )  differ  from  the  English  only  at  the  beginning  of  a 

St,  ft    j    syllable  when  the  sound  of  s  approaches  that  of 

sh ;  I.  e.,  SHP  and  sht  respectively  ;  e.  g.,  ©pott,  Shpo«  ;  but 

Sljl,  ast 


^ie  Slfdse,  the  ashes 

bag  @*iff,  the  ship 

bag  ^enfter,  the  window 

bie  ®rf)ute,  the  school 

bie  ©dsmefter,  the  sister 

ber  (Sdjmager,  the  brother-in-law 

bag  (5d:)Io§,  the  castle 

ber  ©cbu^,  the  shoe 

ber  3flegett,  the  rain 

ber  9legenfd?trm,  the  umbrella 

bie  33iirfte,  the  brush 

f(!^Ott,  beautiful 


X)ie  ©prad^e,  the  language 
bie  ©pur,  the  track,  trace 
ber  ©pru(^,  the  passage  (from 

the  Bible) 
ber  ©pott,  (the)  mockery 
bie  ©pi^e,  the  point 
ber  ©cbliilfel,  the  key 
ber  ©cbneiter,  the  tailor 
bag  ^^ii.];  the  sheep 
bie  ©tabt,  the  city 
ber  ©tod,  the  stick,  cane 
ber  33Ieiftift,  the  pencil 


Reading  Exercise  XIV. 

^er  ©d)u^  ift  ju  (too)  grog.  t)ag  ©AIo§  beg  ^aiferg.  5J?efne 
©(^toefter  ^t  eine  ©dsule.  ttx  ©d^njager  beineg  Dnfeig,  D(e  2Ifc^e 
beg  Dfeng.   Tier  2ootfe  ^at  ein  ©d)iff.    Der  9legenf^irm  ijl  fitr  (for) 


34  PRONUNCIATION   OF    TU. 

ten  Sflegen.  %\t  ©prac^e  ber  i^^anjofen  ifi  W^»  Sir  ^aBcn  bie  ©pur 
Iti  'Eiebe^  {thief),  Xer  @prud)  (Salomon^  (Solomon),  Der  ©pott 
be^  ^nakn»  ^er  Sletftift  ^at  eine  ©pi^e,  3)^cin  53i*ut)er  ^at  i)iele 
(many)  (Sd^afe*    2)ie  8tabt  Berlin  ijl  gro§  unt  f^on* 

Theme  XIY. 

This  cane  belongs  to  my  brother  (DaL).  That  house  has 
four  (ijter)  windows.  My  brother  has  a  school.  The  brush 
belongs  to  my  father  (DaL).  We  have  seen  (gefe^en)  the  thief. 
Thou  hast  a  ship,  but  we  have  a  sheep.  The  castle  of  the  king. 
His  sister  and  my  mother  are  good.  Has  the  tailor  the  coat  ? 
No,  he  has  the  scissors.  My  cousin  has  a  cane  which  is  very 
beautiful.  Has  the  pencil  a  point  ?  We  have  seen  the  castle 
of  the  emperor,  it  is  beautiful. 

Conversation. 

^at  ber  Sootfe  etn  ©c^tff  ?  3^,  ^^  ^)^t  ein  (3d>iff. 

3ft  ber  (Btod  beines  33ruber5  fdjon?  ^m,  er  ift  nid)t  fct)5n. 

^ot  ber  ^aifer  ein  @d>Io§  ?  3^^,  ber  ^aifer  1^at  ein  ©(^log^ 

SCotftber^d^magerbeine^DnfeU?  Sr  ifl  in  33erHn, 

3i^  bie  (Btalt  33erUn  grop  ?  S3erlin  ifi  grog  unb  fdjon* 

3ft  biefe  33urfte  gwt  ?    ^  !I^iefe  ^iirfte  ift  fetjr  gut, 

ipaft  bu  ein  <Sd)af?  5Rein,  id)  kBe  ein  (Bd>ijf. 

^at  bag  ^aug  ein  ^enfler  ?  i:;aiJ  ^au^  ^at  ijier  %m^tx. 

2CeId?e5  ^inb  :^at  ben  ®d?u^  ?       Xiefe^  ^inb  ^at  ben  ©d^u^*      ' 

3ft  bein  SBater  in  ber  (Sc^ule  ?        9lein,  cr  ift  in  ber  ©tabt* 


LESSON   XV.  2cttivn  13* 

^5>  tj  is  pronounced  like  the  simple  i,  it  has  never  the 
sound  of  the  English  th.  * 

*  When  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  a  word,  the  preceding  vowel 
\b  lengthened. 


PKONUNCIATION    OF    TZ.  35 

^  is  compounded  of  t  and  3,   and  is   equivalent  to  33, 

(English  t8).  * 

2)ie  Vij^i,  the  deed  T)ie  2:a^e,  the  paw 

Cer  2^ or,  the  fool  bie  ^a^e,  the  cat 

Die  9lot^,  the  need  ber  53Ii^,  the  hghtning 

Der  9)Zut^,  the  courage  tie  3)^u^e,  the  cap 

tie  2lrmut^,  poverty  ba0  ^er^,  the  heart 

rer  2lt^em,  the  breath  fcer  Senj,  (the)  spring 

Slifabet^,  Elizabeth  tag  ®olD,  the  gold 

tie  @onne,  the  sun  ter  ilJ^ont,  the  moon 

alg,  than  jjiel,  much 


Reading  Exercise  XV. 

'I^ein  53ruter  l^at  eine  ^\x%t,  mein  3Sater  ^at  einen  iput  l^ag  ®o(t 
tj^  etn  9)^eta(I  {metal).  Xie  ^Krmutt)  ijl  feme  (no)  (Sc^ante  {shame). 
Tie  ^a^e  ^at  cine  3:a^e»  £;er  ?0^onr)  unt  tie  (Sonne,  3ener  ^nabc 
ift  ein  3:^or.  5^tefe  Z^at  ift  teg  $ol)neg  n?ert^  {worthy  of  reward).  Ter 
Sen^  ift  gefommen  {has  come).  2Bo  ifl  tetne  tScfcwefter  (Slifatetl)? 
mtm  (Sd)irefter  eiifabett)  ift  in  ter  (SMe,  ^aft  tu  Tuiti)  ?  3d) 
§aBe  ein  §era  unt  5!}Zut(),    ^at  er  tie  ^a^e  ? 

Theme  XV. 

Has  your  mother  gold  ?  She  has  much  gold  and  silver 
(®il6er).  The  sun  and  the  moon.  My  sister  Elizabeth  has 
ji  pencil*  Mary  has  a  cat.  That  man  is  a  fool.  Have 
you  a  cap  ?  I  have  a  cap  and  a  hat.  The  lightning.  Hast 
thou  a  heart  ?  This  deed  is  praiseworthy  (Io6engtt)ert^),  Has 
your  father  a  horse  ?     He  has  gold. 


*  Tl^e  t  and  j  are  Compounded  whenever  the  Bonnd  of  the  j  is  to  be 
doubled,  which  must  be  done  after  every  vowel,  except  in  compound 
words. 


36 


accent:  simple  words. 


Conversation. 


^aft  Du  eine  ^a^e  ? 

@d)eittt  (shines)  Ik  8onne  ? 

3Co  ijl  feine  <Sci>n?efter  Slifabet^  ? 

^at  3|r  5Sater  ®oId  ? 

3fi  feitt  SruDer  eln  2;^or? 

^at  er  eine  "Sflixi^t  ? 


3a,  er  ^at  ^ut^, 

9iein,  ic^  ^abe  etnen  ^unb, 

5^ein,  Der  ^lonl  fc^eint, 

©ie  tft  in  ter  @d)ule. 

SKein  3Sater  ^at  »icl  ®o(t>. 

5^ein,  er  ijl  !ein  (7io)  3:^or. 

mx  t)aben  ^S^ut^. 

^f^ein,  Da^  ®olD  ift  ein  ^etaK- 

Sr  ^at  cinen  iput  un^  eine  '^ii^e. 


LESSON    XYI. 


2emon    16. 


On  the  Accent. 

Obs.  I. — lu  German  a  distinction  is  made  between  simple 
and  compound  words.  The  former  have  (gene- 
rally) one  accent,  the  latter  have  two  or  more. 

Obis.  II. —  Simple  words  are  either  monosyllabic  roots,  or  deriv- 
ative words. 

Obs.  in. — Foreign  words,  even  when  their  ending  is  Ger- 
man, have  their  accent  generally  on  the  last  syllable. 


I^a^  T)a&i,  the  roof 
:as  S)an^,  the  house 
la^  ^int,  the  child 
i;a5  ^a§,  the  barrel 
\:a^  ^eer,  the  army 
ca^  Si,  the  egg 
3d5  lieBe,  I  hke 
ucu,  new  war,  was 


1:ie  %xcLVi,  the  woman 
ter  Xieb,  the  thief 
ter  3Iu§,  the  river 
ta^  &vai\  the  grave 
5a^  Torf,  the  village 
tie  W,  the  ax 

ler  Dffi^icr  (French,  officier),  the 
l)ier,  here        officer 


Reading  Exercise  XVI. 

3d)  lick  tag  ^inli.    l:ie  grau  l)at  cine  5Iyt.    Ter  ®raf  ^at  einen 
ttener,     I^er  ^luf  ift  tief  {derp).     Xa5  Xerf  ift  groj.    I)ad  <pau3 


1.CCENT:    PKEFIXES.  37 

ijl  Heitt,  He  ipiiufer  ftnt>  grop.  Ztx  ^ut  ifl  neu,  bic  Wixi^t  ijl  alt  (old). 
ier  Xieb  §at  eine  %t  gefto^Ien  (s^oZe^),  Jpaft  Cu  ein  St  ?  3*^  ^i^^JJ 
fcie  Sier  (egr^^')*  ^^^  ^^^^  ^^^  ^^aifer^  ift  :^ier.  Da^  ®ra6  be^ 
^i3nig^»    3Bo  ift  mein  ^inl)  ?    DiefeiJ  ^aui  ^ot  ein  Dac^, 

Theme  XVI. 

The  hat  of  the  father  is  new.  My  brother  has  an  ax.  The 
thief  has  stolen  (geftot)len)  a  barrel.  This  child  has  an  egg, 
that  child  has  a  cap.  Has  this  house  a  roof  ?  Thou  hast  the 
dog  of  that  man.  The  king  has  an  army.  Here  is  the  thief. 
That  woman  has  a  child,  my  brother  has  a  hat.  This  house 
is  new.    Is  your  hat  new  ?    I  have  an  ax. 

Conversation. 

ipaft  tm  cine  W  ?  3^)  ^^^  ^in^  5l):t  unb  einen  SBagen* 

3ft  3^r  ^ut  neu  ?  91ein,  mein  ^ut  ift  alt,  akr  meine 

^O^itt^e  ift  neu, 
^at  ta^  ^inb  cin  Si?  9?ein,  ba^  ^int)  ^at  einen  ?5uc^«. 

$Bo  ift  ca^  ^eer  De^  ^aifer^?  T;a<5  ^eet  fce<5  ^aiferg  ift  in  fm^. 
^aft  tu  33ier  ?  (6eer)  5'^ein,  akr  i(^  lieBe  ba^  58ier, 


LESSON   XVII.  «efttPtt    17. 

Obs.  I. — A  derivative  consists  of  a  root  or  principal  syllable, 
and  of  one  or  more  accessory  syllables. 

Obs.  II. — Accessory  syllables  are  partly  prefixes,  partly  suf- 
fixes. They  are  unaccented  and  are  used  only  in 
connection  with  the  roots  or  principal  syllables, 
upon  which,  in  derivative  words,  the  accent  is 
placed.  * 

Obs.  m. — The  prefixes  (i.  e.  such  as  are  placed  before  the 
root),  are:  bc,  cm^,  txii,  tv,  gc,  dcr,  jcr. 

*  Foreign  words  have  the  accent  generally  on  the  last  syllable. 


38 


accent:   prefixes. 


£)er  33eruf,  the  calling 

ter  (Empfang,  the  reception, 

receipt 
ber  Sntfd)Iug,  the  decision 
gefauft,  bought 
ijerloren,  lost 
gefunten,  found 


S)er  (SJekaud),  the  use 
bie  35ernunft,  the  reason 

bcr  Srtrag,  the  result 
angefommen,  arrived 
gelefen,  read 
er^Iten,  received 


Reading  Exercise  XVII. 

X)ie  35emunft  be^  ^anne^,  "tiv  Snt)'cblu§  meine^  33ruber«  i[l  gut. 
^er  Srtrag  t^  »erIoren.  !Der  Smpfattg  be^  ,^aiferg.  2)er  IBeruf  jened 
^O^anneg.  3(^  ^ii^^  ba^  33u(^  gelefen.  ©eine  Gutter  ifl  angefommen. 
3(^  ^Be  ein  Suc^  gefquft.  ^aft  bu  ba^  Si  er^alten  ?  2Cir  ^abcn  eine 
SiHii^e  gefauft.  ^abt  i§r  bag  ®raB  be^  ^onigg  gefuaben  ?  Da^  ^eer 
^at  einen  General  (general)  er^atten.  3^^^  ©(^mefter  ift  angefommen. 

Theme  XVII. 

Hast  thou  lost  a  book  ?  The  reason  of  the  woman.  The 
result  of  the  day  (3;ag).  We  have  read  the  chronicle.  My 
decision  is  good.  The  reception  of  the  general.  The  army 
of  the  emperor  has  (ift)  arrived.  Thy  brother  has  found  a 
watch  (Ut)r).  His  father  has  lost  his  umbrella  (3flegenfc^irm). 
He  has  read  it  (e^).     What  have  you  received  ? 

Conversation. 

ipaben  <Sic  3^^  33u(^  »erloren  ? 


2Bo  t|t  ber  General  ? 
3fl  ber  ^atfer  angefommen  ? 
^aft  bu  ben  Srtrag  er^attcn? 
ipat  beine  ©^tijefter  ben  ^unb  ge? 
funben? 
(e/Vtea^?  tiahn  <Bk  gefauft  ? 
'4)akn  @ie  ben  SBrief  gclefen  ? 


3(^  l)aU  t(i^  33uc^  meineg  SBruberi 

ijerloren. 
2)er  General  ift  in  ber  ©tabt. 
Xer  ilaifer  ift  nic^t  angefommen* 
Wltin  5Sater  ^at  ben  Srtrag  er^alten. 
3a,  pe  l^at  ben  ^unb  gefunben. 

3(^  ^ak  eine  3l):t  gefauft. 
9leln,  ic^  ^ak  ben  33rief  i?erloren. 


accent:   suffixes.  39 


LESSON   XVin.  Scftton    18* 

Obs. — The  suffixes  (i.  e.  such  as  are  placed  after  the  root)  are: 
e,  c(,  en,  cub,  cr,  cm,  cS,  eft,  et,  ig,  idjt,  in,  i)(§,  U^,  rt)en, 
ung  and  igen. 

J)te  Z^uxt,  the  door  ^Eie  Sbwin,  the  Honess 

tag  SJZittel,  the  means  ^einrl(^,  Henry 

bag  2ekn,  the  Hfe  fintifi^,  childish 

bic  2:ugent,  virtue  tag  S3dum(^en,  the  little  tree 

tag  3in^ttter,  the  room  tie  SBo^nung,  the  dwelling 

tie  Sltern,  the  parents  tie  2Bol)nungen,  the  dweUings 

teg  Xorfeg,  of  the  village  fid)  befleifngen,  to  endeavor 

ter  ^onig,  the  king  ^ol^^icfct,  wood-like,  wooden 

tu  rete|l,  thou  speakest  er  Uitt,  he  prays 


Reading  Exercise  XVIII. 

t)xt  Z^mt  teg  ipaufeg.  '5^er  ^ann  ^at  ein  ^iJZittet  {remedy).  !D{e 
Jugent  teg  ^onigg.  Unfere  SItern  fmt  ange!ommen.  Xiag  ^at^en 
ift  fintifc^.  Vxt  Somin  ^at  tintxi  %\x^i  %t]xt^tn  {devoured) .  @ic 
befleif  igen  ft^»  !Eer  (Smarten  ^at  einen  ^aum  unt  ein  33anm^en* 
2)ie  SBo^nungen  ter  SItern.  ^er  ^onig  tetet  fiir  {for)  tie  (SItem. 
i)er  3)^ann  teg  X^orfeg.  I)u  reteft  ijon  tern  ^aifer*  1)er  ^onig  ^t 
tag  SauttK^en  gefanft,  ipeinric^  \\i  angefommen.  I)ie  ^ugent  iDcr 
eitern,  ,  ^ 

Theme  XYIII. 

Thou  speakest  of  (»on)  the  dweUings  (DaL).  The  king  has 
a  Hdness.  That  woman  has  the  means.  The  room  of  Henry. 
The  parents  of  this  man.  The  virtue  of  the  woman.  He 
prays  for  (fiir)  the  girl  {Ace).  The  boy  is  childish.  Your 
parents  have  (jlnt)  arrived.  Where  is  the  room  of  the  king? 
The  door  of  the  house.  The  little  tree  of  the  garden.  The 
dwelHngs  of  the  neighbor.     The  result  and  the  decision. 


40 


PREFIXES   AND    SUFFIXES. 


Conversation. 


$at  3^^^  Mann  cinen  I^iener  ? 
^at  ba^  ipaug  eine  X^ixxt  ? 
©inb  biefc  So^nungen  gu  ijer;; 

miet^en  (for  rent)  ? 
3ft  bag  9)?atd)en  fint^ifd)  ? 
Sie  ^ci§t  3^r  33ruber  ? 
^aft  ^u  eirt  3t«tmer  ? 
2Bag  ^t  bie  2ott>m  gefreffen  ? 


SJ^ein  iDlann  ^at  awei  X;tctter* 

i:a5  ^aug  ^at  eine  J^iire. 

3ci,  biefe  SBo^nungen  fmb  gu  oer; 

miet^en. 
3a,  ba<?  ^abc^en  ift  fel)r  toifc^< 
5!}?eitt  33rurer  ki§t  ^emrtc^. 
3d^  ^abe  brei  3immer» 
<Sie  ^at  einen  ^unt  gefrejjert* 


LESSOIS^  XIX.  ^cftivn  19. 

Examples  with  Prefixes  and  Suffixes. 


!Der  Smpfanger,  tlie  recipient 
bie  (Erfa^rung,  the  experience 
bie  Srfa^rungen,  the  experiences 
bie  3^rftbrung,  the  destruction 
bie  3Sermunf(iungen,  the  impre- 
cations 
bag  ©ilber,  the  silver 
9lic^arb,  Richard 


gemiit^Iicb,  agreeable 
ijerloren,  lost 

entfpred)cn,  correspond  to 
bie  ©djule,  the  school 
bie  %mQa.h,  the  exercise 
bag  (Eifen,  the  iron 
©op^ie,  Sophy 
marum,  why 


Reading  Exercise  XIX. 

SJiein  ^Setter  tfl  gemiit^Iid^.  Xiefe  Srfa^rungen  eitifprec^en  ber  dx^f 
fa^rung  mcineg  55aterg.  !I^ie  S^ff^'^^wng  ber  ©tabt.  9li(^arb  ^at 
fein  ®elb  (money)  yerloren.  ^arum  Betet  er  nid)t  ?  Tag  Sifcn 
unb  bag  ©ilber  fmb  nii^Iic^.  SBarum  finb  (Sic  nid^t  gemiit^Iic^  ?  3<^ 
l^aBe  meinen  §8ater  ^erlorcn.  !Eer  Smpfdttger  beg  ©iI6erg.  tit 
(5d?ule  ift  gro^.  ^raulein  SopMe  ift  angefommen.  ^eiue  Srfa^rung 
i|l  traurig  (sad),  'tit  ^ern?iinfd>ungen  unb  bie  Srfa^rungen.  Tag 
Sifcn  ijl  ein  2)^etaII.     3ft  3Ricfcaru  ni^t  (not)  in  ber  (at)  ©cbule  ? 


accent:   compound  words.  41 

Theme  XIX. 

Why  are  you  not  agreeable  ?  Is  Miss  Sophy  your  sister  ? 
Miss  Sophy  is  my  aunt,  and  iiichar  J.  is  my  brother.  Hast  thou 
silver?  ^io,  I  nave  iron.  Have  you  learned  (gelernt)  the 
exercise  ?  My  uncle  has  lost  his  lioness.  The  recipient  of 
the  silver.  His  experience  is  sad  (traurig).  His  brother 
Richard  is  childish.  The  Uttle  tree  of  the  garden.  The 
decision  of  my  cousin.  My  brother  has  read  the  books. 
Richard  has  learned  the  exercise. 

Conversation. 

SCarum  i|l  er  ntc^t  gemiit^lic^?  Sr  ^at  fciit  ®el^  ^^crloren^ 

2Co  ift  ter  Smpfanger  te^  (Silber^?  Sr  ift  in  "^onr^on. 

^at  tie    3^^ifj^"n9    ftattgefunten  T)k  S)^vkQ^nQ  ^at  flattgefunben. 

(taken  place)  ? 

S3arum  bift  tu  traurig  ?  3<^  ^oibt  meinc  Wntttx  ijerloren, 

3ft  3^f  ^rucer  9lic^art»  ju  ipaufc  ?  3flic^art)  t)l  e6en  (just  now)  anr 

gefommen. 

^at  ©op^ic  »iel  ®oIr  unt)  ©ilber  ?  ©op^ie  ^at  »iel  Sifen. 

^at  er  tie  5lufgabe  gelemt  ?  3^,  ^J*  ^<tt  tie  Stufgabe  gelernt. 

3ft  ter  (Smpfdnger  gemiit^lic^  ?  Sr  ift  fe^r  (very)  gemiit^Uc^. 


LESSON   XX.  Sefiiott   20* 

Obs. — There  are  a  great  many  compound  words  which  have 
an  accent  on  each  of  the  components.  * 

I^er  Slnfang,  the  beginning        I)ie  grei^eit,  Hberty 
bag  ipauptnjort,  the  substantive  ter  3ungling,  the  youth 
ter  Santmann,  the  peasant        tie  ^reuntfc^aft,  friendship 
ber  5)?ittag,  noon  bag  Sebermejjer,  the  pen-knife 

bie  ^'^ad^rid)!,  the  news  ber  3flegenbogen,  the  rainbow 

*  The  first,  however,  is  the  strongest.  Compound  particles  have  only 
one  accent,  which  is  placed  on  the  second  syllable ;  e.  g.,  umjjcrgel^en.  For 
other  rules  see  the  Lessons  on  Compound  Verbs,  p.  132,  sq. 


42  accent:  compoukd  words. 

ber  Siitgang,  the  entrance  ber  9leic^t|um,  riclies 

tmmer,  always  ojfen,  open        liebt,  loves 

TerHg,  ready  triige,  lazy 

cbenfo — aU,  as — as  P^i^ig^  diligent 


Reading  Exercise  XX. 

^er  2lnfang  ijt  fd)mer  (difficult).  "Lex  3flegcnBogett  ifl  ^^errlic^* 
Der  SuJigiing  ^i^^t  ^i^  ?5rei^eit.  ^er  Sancmann  ^at  einen  9lcgen^ 
fd)irm.  'S^er  3fleid)t^um  te^  ^O^^anneS.  2)er  ^nak  ^at  eirt  %mx:^ 
mej[er*  2)er  Sanbmann  bringt  (brmgs)  tie  5^ad)ri(^t,  3d)  bin  tmmer 
fertig*  "Dai  %m\kx  be^  ipaufe^  ift  offen.  S^ner  ^nabe  ift  immer 
trdge,  Der  3^ei(^t^um  mtint^  ^ater^S  ift  ebenfo  grog  aU  ber  3flei(^^ 
t^um  be^  Sanbmanneij,  ^mti  ^an^  ^at  einen  Singang*  33ijl  bu 
ebenfo  g.og  aU  bein  33ruber? 

Theme  XX. 

The  youth  brings  the  news  of  the  village.  It  is  noon. 
The  beginning  is  always  difficult.  Biches  is  a  substantive. 
The  peasant  has  a  penknife.  The  friendship  of  the  youth. 
The  liberty  of  the  child.  The  entrance  of  the  house  is  al- 
ways open.  Are  you  lazy  ?  We  are  not  ready.  My  sister 
is  as  large  as  your  mother.  Every  beginning  is  difficult.  Is 
he  as  diligent  as  your  cousin  ?  No,  he  is  very  lazy.  Has  this 
house  an  entrance  ?  This  youth  is  as  white  as  the  son  of 
our  neighbor. 

Conversation. 

33ringt  ber  Sanbmann  bie  ^Za^ric^t?  3a,  er  bringt  bie  ^a^^xidft 

2Bo  ift  ber  3ungUng  beg  !Dorfeg  ?  @r  ift  in  ber  (Sc^ule  (DaL). 

^at  ber  ^nabe  ein  ^e^ermejfer  ?  ^tin,  ber  3ungling  ^at  fein  ge^ 

bermejfer. 

3|i  ber  (Singang  offen  ?  2)er  Stngang  ijl  tmmer  offen^ 

58ift  bu  fe^r  trdge  ?  ^m,  i^  bin  fleigig. 

3ft  ber  Stegenbogen  fc^cn  ?  !2Der  3flegenbogen  ift  ^rrltd). 


COMPARATIVE  DEGEEE.  43 


LESSON   XXI.  2cttwn    21. 

Obs. — Adjectives  form  their  comparative  as  in  English,  i.  e. 
by  the  addition  of  cr,  and  generally  modify  the  radical 
vowels  a,  0,  n,  of  monosyllables  into  a,  0,  ii.* 

mt,  old  mi6>,  rich 

gro§,  great  mi^,  white 

frud)tbar,  fertile  fd)5n,  beautiful,  pretty 

ftar!,  strong  gelb,  yellow 

[corner,  difficult  fd^maii,  weak 

arm,  poor  lei^t,  easy 


jung,  young  itii^lid),  useful 

flei§ig,  diligent  liiFen^n^urtig,  amiable 

ber  D^eim,  the  uncle  Mt,  cold 

tie  2;ante,  the  aunt  ^  \)0&j,  high 

t>er  ©(filler,  the  pupil  i^n,  him 

Itnnm  (Bit,  do  you  know  ?  meln  iperr,  Sir 


Reading  Exercise  XXI. 

•£ie  grau  i(l  alt,  Der  ^JJann  ift  alter,  "La^  ^iibc^en  i(l  grog,  ber 
^nabc  ift  grower.  Tiein  ©arten  ift  frud^tbarer  aU  ber  ®artcn  teineg 
35etterij.  ^iefe  5lufgabe  i(t  fd)ttjerer,  ^tm  Zantt  ift  arm,  fein 
Dnfcl  ift  armer,  l^er  Siingling  f^at  einen  fc^meren  ^ad,  !I:er 
Sanrmann  ^at  einen  fd)mereren  (Ace.)  ^acf»  3ft  ^^w  3Sater  jitnger 
a(5  unfer  D^eim  ?  ^arie  tj^  flei§ig,  ®op^ie  ift  fleif iger»  in  bift 
)&!Voa6>,  ic^  bin  fc^madjer,  l:iefe  5lufgabe  ift  fd^merer,  aber  jene  ift 
niiBUcber,  'La^  graulein  ift  lieben^wiirbiger  aU  bie  2Jiagb»  S^  ift 
falter. 

Theme  XXL 

Are  you  younger  or  older  than  Mary  ?  I  am  older.  Thy 
Uncle  is  richer  than  my  cousin.     His  father  is  siaronger  than 

*  The  comparative  of  gut  is  beiTer,  and  of  ^06),  ^ol^er.  For  exceptions, 
see  p.  177. 


44 


MALE    AND   FEMALE   APPELLATIONS. 


yottr  brother.  Is  Miss  Louisa  prettier  than  Miss  Caroline  ? 
Do  you  know  his  uncle  ?  This  pupil  is  more  diligent  (flet^i^ 
ger)  than  your  cousin.  This  paper  (^])apier)  is  whiter,  that 
book  is  better  (bejjer).  This  exercise  is  more  useful  (nii^Ucber) 
than  that  exercise.     Henry  is  weak,  Adolph  is  weaker. 


Conversation. 


3ft  ter  ^unb  eknfo  grop  aU  ta^ 

3ft  3^^^  SAmefter  jiinger  aU  ©ie  ? 
3ft  tier  SJJann  ftdrfer  aU  rer  ^naBe  ? 
3ft  Smilie  fd^rod^er  a(^  ^mt  ? 
3ft  bag  ^olc  lo\thaxtx  aU  bag  Sifen  ? 
2Ber  ift  reidjer  aU  mein  ^ater  ? 


5Zein,  bag  ^ferb  ijl  grower* 

9leitt,  ic^  Mn  M  alter* 
Der  3Jlann  ift  ftdrter  alg  ber  ^nabe . 
^axu  ift  ftdrfer  alg  Smilie. 
Dag  ®oIb  ift  »iel  foftbarer» 
@ein  Dnfel  ift  reic^er* 


LESSON  xxn. 


2ettwn  22* 


Obs.  I. — Many  appellations  of  male  individuals  form  their 
female  appellations  by  adding  the  syllable  in  (simi- 
lar to  ess  in  English),  and,  if  monosyllables,  modify 
the  vowel. 

Obs.  n. — If  the  masculine  form  ends  in  e,  this  letter  is 
omitted. 


Mascidine. 
Der  ^bnig,  the  king 
ber  greunb,  the  friend 
ber  (S^raf,  the  count 

ber  ^f^a^kr,  the  neighbor 
ber  ©chiller,  the  pupil,  scholar 
ber  Sngldnber,  the  EngUshman 
ber  ^aler,  the  painter 
ber  ^iinftler^  the  artist 


Feminine. 
Die  ^bnigin,  the  queen 
bie  ^reunbin,  the  friend 
^ie  ®rdftn,  the  countess 
^ie  ^urftin,      )    , , 

bie  9lac^barin,  the  neighbor 

bie  ©(^iiterin,  the  pupil 

bie  Sngldnberin,  the  English  lady 

bie  50^alerin,  the  painter 

bie  ^iinftlerin,  the  artist 


MALE   AND    FEMALE   APPELLATIONS. 

ter  ^oc^,  the  cook  tic  ^ijc^in,  the  cook 

fcer  afluffe,  the  Russian  tie  ffin\[m,  the  Russian  lady 

cer  ^ansofe,  the  Frenchman  tie  ^ransbfin,  the  French  lady 

3c^  fe^e,  I  see  ahv,  but 

m6^,  also  nod),  still 


Reading  Exercise  XXII. 

3(3^  ^ak  ben  ^onig  unt)  fcie  ^onigin  gefe^en.  "Ltx  ^o4  ij^  ein 
Sfluffe,  aber  tie  ^5(^in  ijl  eine  j^rangoftn,  S3ifl  tu  ein  ®raf  ?  9lein, 
id)  bin  eine  ©raftn.  3ft  teine  ^reunDin  eine  ©cbiilerin  teined  3Sater^? 
X;ie  5'Za^barin  be^  ^aler3  ijl  and)  eine  aftuffm.  !Eie  ^rinaeffm  ^at 
einen  B^eunt)  unb  eine  i^reuntin.  Tk  ^iinftlerin  i|l  eine  Sngldnterin, 
aber  ber  ^iin^Ier  ift  ein  Snglanber,  Xu  1^a^  ben  ®raf  gefe^en,  aber 
ic^  \^abi  Un  ^aifer  gefe^en.  ^ein  33rnter  ^arl  :§at  and)  bie  ^aiferin 
gefeljen.  3^^  f^^  Submig,  Snifen^  35ater  i(i  reic^,  aber  ?0^arieng  3Sa^ 
ter  ift  reid)er.  l:ie  9)ZaIerin  ijl  eine  Sngldnberin*  Sir  ^aben  an6i 
eine  ^bc^in. 

Theme  XXII. 

They  have  a  cook  (masc.) ;  we  have  also  a  cook  (fern.). 
The  Russian  has  a  friend  (fern.).  The  artist  (fern.)  is  an 
English  lady.  I  see  the  prince  and  the  princess.  The  count 
has  lost  his  friend  (/em.).  The  neighbor  (masc.)  has  a  cook 
{fern.).  The  painter  {masc.)  is  a  Frenchman,  but  the  artist 
(fern.)  is  an  English  lady.  My  brother  is  a  scholar,  and  my 
sister  is  a  scholar.  The  queen  is  richer  than  the  countess, 
and  the  count  is  poorer  than  the  artist.  This  garden  is  much 
larger  than  the  garden  of  my  neighbor  (fern.). 

Conversation. 

ipajl  bu  ben  ^aifer  gefe^en  ?  3^^  ^cibe  bie  ^aiferin  gefekn. 

3ft  ber  ^bnig  reiser  aU  ber  ®raf?  Die  ^oniginifi  reiser  al^berO^raf* 
ipat  beine  9Hutter  einen  ^oc^  ?         5^ein,meine  3J^utter  ^at  eine  ^o(^in, 
3ii  ber  ^iinftler  ein  (Engldnber?       ^^^ein,  ber  ^iinftter  ifl  dn  ^ranjofe* 


46  suPEr^LATiVE  degeee:  predicative  form. 

^at  bie  ©rafirt  em  3d)Iog  (castle)'^,  ^a,  bte  ©rdftrt  ^t  cin  ®(^(o§» 
3)1  teine  greuntin  cineS^ulerin?  @iet|lr!ie(B(^uIertttt)einc5D|eimfc)> 
^ijl  Du  ein  ^D^aler?  9^ein,  t(^  bin  eine  ^)}ialerin» 

ipabt  i^r  ten  3ftu|yen  (jefe^en  ?  SSir  Vkn  bie  ^u\\m  gefe^en* 


LESSON   XXin.  Seftiott    23. 

Ods.  I. — The  superlative  degree  has  two  forms.  When  afte.:' 
the  noun  it  is  called  the  predicative  form,  which 
takes  the  termination  [ten,  and  is  preceded  by  am/' 

Obs.  II. — Adjectives   ending  in  b,  t,  or  in  a  hissing  sound 

ih  ^r  ff'  fe'  f^)  ^^^^^^  c  before  ftcn  :  am  fr^lcc^tcftcu 

[the  worst). 

5)a5  (Sc^af,  the  sheep  5)te  ^u^,  the  cow 

bcquem,  comfortable  ge^^orfam,  obedient 

rut)tg,  quiet  gefc^icft,  clever 

gere^t,  just  PetBig/  diligent 

loftkr,  precious  l^art,  hard 

ttja^,  what  ?  fc^reibt,  writes 


Reading  Exercise  XXIII. 

T)a^  (Sifen  ifl  nii^Ii^,  ba^  33tei  ift  nii^Iic^er,  ba^  ©il&er  ifl  am  n% 
lic^jlen,  31^  ba^  ^^ferb  eBenfo  grog  al^  bie  jlu^  ?  2^ie  ^u^  ift  fleiner, 
ber  Jpunb  ift  am  Heinften.  3cner  ^anit  ift  am  reicfcften,  benn  er  ift 
am  gufriebenften.  2^er  '^ann  ift  gut,  meine  @(^n?efter  ift  Beffer,  meine 
tJJlutter  ift  am  Beften*  3^^^^  Siting  ift  am  foftbarften,  er  if^  »on  ®oIb. 
I^iefeg  (Sd)Io§  ift  :^oc^,  jeite^  ^aug  ift  :^b^er,  ber  58erg  ift  am  ^o^fteiu 
2Ber  if!  am  rei^ften?    X;er  jufriebene  ^enfd^  ift  am  reid^ften. 

Theme  XXIII. 

That  sheep  is  useful ;  this  horse  is  more  useful ;  our  cow 
is  the  most  useful.     (The)  iron  is  precious ;  silver  is  more 

*  Except  gut,  which  is  am  beften.     For  exceptions,  see  p.  177. 


THE  PREFIX    Um  47 

precious  ;  gold  is  the  most  precious.  Our  tree  is  high  ;  that 
house  is  higher  ;  this  church  is  the  highest.  Who  is  the 
poorest  ?  Who  is  the  richest  ?  What  is  (the)  best  ?  This 
wine  is  the  strongest.  Mary  writes  (the)  worst.  Louisa 
writes  the  best.  Which  metal  is  the  hardest?  A  pen  is 
good,  a  pencil  is  better,  a  book  is  the  best.  Art  thou 
happier  than  my  cousin  ? 

Conversation. 

SBelc^ea  detail  ijl  am  prteftm?    ttx  Sta^l  ijl  am  ^rtejlcn. 

3fi  fcer  ipunb  efeenfo  nii^Iic^  aU  5^ein,  ta«  ^fert)  tjl  am  nu^Hc^jlen. 

la^^ferD? 
3ft  ter  ^ont)  grijper  <xU  tie  Srte  ?  ^ein,fcte  Srbe  i(l  grower,  He  (Bonne 

ift  am  grb^ten; 
SSelc^er  9JJann  ijl  am  retc^jlen  ?     I^ergufrierene  5}?ann  ift  am  reidjften* 
Sift  tu  m6>jt  fo  gliicflic^  aU  bein  ^ein  S^cunD   ift  nidjt  fo  gliicfUc^, 

greunt)  ?  aU  id). 

3ft  beine  ©^meftcr  eBenfo  gut  al^  ^OZeine    ©(^wefter  ijl  beffer,  meine 

bein  Sruber?  Gutter  ift  dm  Beflen, 

2Ceriftftar!er,?^riebri(^ober^arI?  ^arl  ift  am  ftarfften. 
3ft  fete  ^u^  eBenfo  grop  al^  t>a3  ?Rein,  ffe  ift  lleiner,  unt  bcr  §unt) 

^fert)?  {ft  am  Hetnften. 

3ft  tiefe^  ^au^  eBenfo  ^^6^  aU  ber  Der  Saum  ift  ^b^er,  ber  S3erg  ift 

33aum?  am  pd^j^en* 


LESSON  XXIV.  Seftion  2^. 

Obs. —  Many  adjectives  take  the  prefix  utt,  to  express  a  nega- 
tive meaning,  which  is  in  Enghsh  expressed  by  wn, 
diSj  in,  etc. 

gliidli^,  happy  ungtii(!(t($,  wnhappy 

gefcpcft,  skillful  ungef^icft,  unskillful 

fruc^tkr,  fruitful  (fertile)  unfru(^tbar,  unfruitful  (infertile) 

Bequem,  comfortable  unbequem,  uncomfortable 

wftg,  quiet  unru^ig,  unquiet 


48  THE   PilEFIX    CA' 

jufrieten,  contented  unjufrietctt,  discontented 

gc^orfam,  obedient  unge^orfam,  c?i«obedient 

aufmerffam,  attentive  unaufmerffant,  i?iattentive 

gered)t,  just  ungerecbt,  w/ijust 

^bflicb,  polite       ^  un^bflid),  ^77^polite 

artig,  courteous.  unartig,  naughty 


Reading  Exercise  XXIV. 

8ie  ifl  gc^orfam,  er  ifl  fe^r  unge^orfam.  SQir  ftnt)  gliicflic^,  fte  fint 
ungliicflid).  3ft  ^einric^  fleigiger  al^  ^iJtarie?  '^arie  ift  trage  unr) 
unartiger  aU  ^einri^.  3P  ^uifenS  5Satcr  befltd)'^  CEr  i|l  unfcbflid), 
aber  3flic^arcg  Sruter  ift  un^bfli^er*  ©mtlie  ift  aufmcrffamer  aU  i^rc 
@(^wefler.  2)iefer  SJJann  ift  fe^r  gej4idt,  <i^cr  tie  %xa\i  ift  [el)r  ungej? 
fcbidt,  X)ie  ^od)in  ift  ge^orfam,  ter  ^o(^  ift  ungel)orfam,  X:iefc5 
Jpau^  ift  un&equem,  ba^  ipau^  feinc^  D^eintiJ  ift  fe^r  hqucm.  ,^arl  ift 
immer  aufmerlfam,  aber  feiit  33ntter  3^oBert  ift  immer  unauf merffam. 

Theme  XXIV. 

He  is  attentive,  she  is  very  inattentive.  Do  you  know  my 
pupil  Robert  ?  Is  he  as  obedient  as  Frederic  ?  No,  he  is 
very  disobedient,  but  his  sister  is  diligent.  Thi^.  boy  is  very 
skillful,  that  man  is  very  unskillful.  Is  this  land  (^iant)  fer- 
tile ?  It  is  very  unfruitful,  but  my  garden  is  the  most  in- 
fertile. The  king  is  unjust,  but  the  queen  is  just,  and  the 
empress  is  the  most  just.  This  boy  is  always  lazy.  Charles 
is  as  large  as  Sophy.     Are  you  feeble  ?    I  am  strong. 

Conversation. 

3fi  fein  53rut>er  unge^orfam?  ^nn,  er  ift  gel^orfam  urio  fletpig. 

2Celd)er  ^onig  ift  am  gcrec^teften  ?    !Der  ^bnig  i?on  ^reu^cH  i\t  am 

gered^teften. 
3ft  Smilie  unaufmer!fam?  ©ie  ift  ebenfo  unaufmerffam  all 

iD^arie. 
SCeldser  f^ann  ift  gefc^idt  ?  2:;icfer  mann  ift  ungef(^idt. 

3ft  3^r  ipau^  kquem  ?  SJiein  ^aud  ift  fe^r  wnkq.uem. 


POSSESSIVE   PEONOUNS.  49 

3jl  ^etnrt(^^  Zantt  ^bflic^  ?  @ic  tft  fe^r  un^oflicb. 

3ft  fein  Garten  fru(^tbar  'i  @ein  Saat*  ift  n*u(^tbar, 

53ift  tu  ebenfo  flei^ig  aU  Caroline  ?    9Zein,  meiit  ^err,  x6)  Unjavl, 


LESSON  XXV.  «ettion  25* 

Possessive  Pronouns. 

Obs.- — Besides  the  conjunctive  form  of  the  possessive  pronotm 
(pp.  18,  23,  25),  there  is  also  an  absolute  form,  which 
is  used  when  a  possessive  pronoun  is  not  imme- 
diately connected  with  a  noun,  but  simply  refers  to  a 
substantive  already  mentioned,  or  understood.  When 
this  form  is  used  without  the  article,  it  takes  the  ending 
of  the  (wanting)  article,  viz.:  et  {masc),  t  (fern.),  eg 
{neut.) ;  e.  g.,  meiner,  teinc,  feineS  (comp.  tiefcr  under 
Declension  of  the  Def.  Article,  on  p.  13).  Accom- 
panied by  the  article  the  absolute  possessive  pronoun 
generally  inserts  tg  between  the  root  and  the  ending, 
which  is  c  in  the  nominative  sing.,  and  en  in  all  other 
cases,  except  the  accusative  sing,  feminine  and  neuter 
(always  Hke  the  nominative). 

Singidar.  Plural. 

Masc.  Fern.  Nevt&r.  for  all  genders. 

ber  mcine  or  (ige)  Me  mein(ig)e  ba^  meiH(tg)c  bte  mein(ig)en,  mine 
fcerteinc  or  (ige)  Mebein(ig)e    ba5bein(ig)e    biebein(ig)en,   thine 
berfeine  or  (ige)  bie  fetn(ig)e     bag  fetn(ig)e    b{efein({cj)en,     his 
ber  i^re    or  (ige)  biei^r(ig)e      baiS  i^r(t9)e     bie  i|r(ig)en,     hers 
ber,  bte,  bag  uttfr(ig)e;  plural,  bie  unfr(ig)en,  ours 

ber,  bie,  bag  3^r(tcj)e  or  eurige;  plural,  tie  3^1^(19)^"^  yours 
ber,  bie,  bag  i^r(ig)e;  plural,  bie  i^r(ig)en,  theirs 

T:er  Partner,  the  gardner  T)ag  papier,  the  paper 

ber  33rief.  the  letter  bie  U^r,  the  watch 

bie  Sampe,  the  lamp  ber  ©onnenfc^irm,  the  parasol 

erl)alten,  received  weberrr^itoi^,  neither— nor 

ijerbroAen,  broken  genommen,  taken 


60  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Reading  Exercise  XXV. 

3f^  S^t  ©arten  ebenfo  gro§  aU  fcer  meini^e  ?  Sr  i(l  ebenfo  gro^ 
al3  fcer  S^rige,  3ft  Suifen^  ©rofmutter  eknfo  alt  aU  tie  3^ri|3c  'i 
(Bit  ijl  iilter  al5  tie  meinige.  Wnn  ^ut  ift  nic^t  fo  gut  al^  ter  rci^ 
nigc;  tenn  ter  fceinige  ift  neu;  aber  ter  meinige  ift  alt,  (Sie  fint  nicbt 
fo  reic^  aU  unfer  ^'Zad^bar;  aber  fie  fmti  jufrietener  unt)  gliidlic^er  aU 
er.  ^arl  ^at  fein  Su(^  unti  tad  meinige  »erIoren.  SSir  ^aben  tit 
geber  ted  Sc^rerd  unt  tie  feinige  gefunten.  Jpat  ter  ^naU  mm 
Wlt^tv  genommen?  9lein,  er  ^at  tad  i^rige  genommen^  I^iefea 
^fert  ijt  nic^t  mein,  wo  ift  tad  feinige? 

Theme  XXV. 

-Is  that  house  yours  ?  Yes,  it  is  mine.  It  is  very  large;  it 
is  larger  than  yours.  My  brother  is  not  so  dihgent  as  yours, 
but  he  is  older.  Your  garden  is  prettier  than  mine.  He 
has  lost  his  pencil  and  mine.  Charles  has  broken  his  watch 
and  mine.  Why  has  Frederic  bought  a  stick  ?  This  pen- 
knife is  not  so  pretty  as  thine.  His  horse  is  younger  than 
yours,  hers  is  the  youngest.  Have  you  my  parasol  ?  No, 
I  have  hers.     He  has  found  neither  his  penknife  nor  mine. 

Conversation. 

3fl  tiefed  papier  gut  ?  ^dn,  tad  unfrige  ifi  beffen 

2Bo  i)l  3^r  @o^n  ?  Sr  ijl  in  ter  @^ule. 

3fi  er  ebenfo  flei§ig  aid  ter  meinige  ?  (Er  i(l  flei§iger  aid  ter  3^trige, 

31^  3^r  Garten  ebenfo  grog  aid  ter  (Er  ift  grbper  aid  ter  3^nge, 

meinige? 

^at  tie  ©rafin  meinen  S3ricf  er^  (Sie  fi^at   3^^^"  S3rief  nic^t  cx^ 

l)alten  ?  ^alten. 

^at  er  einen  0ting  oter  tint  U^r?  (Er  |at  meter  eine  U|r  no^  e<nen 

Samm  ^t  ter  X)iener  mein  Wlt\\tv    Sr  |at  ed  nicbt  genommen, 

genommen? 
^at  ter  ilnabe  tad  (Sladaerbrod^en?    (Er  :^at  ni(%t  tad  ®Iad  jetbro^en, 

er  ^at  ten  ©piegel  jerbrodjen. 


IMPEKFECT   TENSE  OF  feilt,  61 

LESSON   XXVI.  Seftiott   26* 

Imperfect  Tense  of  fciit. 

3d)  toav,  1  was  toix  toaxtn,  we  were 

t)u  warft,  thou  wast  i^r  waret,  )    ,^^„  ^^^^ 

' ,  X,  r   yon  were 

cr  war,  he  was  (Sie  tuaren,        3 

|te  (c^)  njar,  she  (it)  was  pe  waren,  they  were 

i)er  Spiegel,  the  looking-glass  X;er  T)iener,  the  (man-)  servant 
ter  SO'iantel,  the  cloak  ber  ^aufmann,  the  merchant 

in  Branffurt,  in  or  at  Frankfort  fciefeit  ^3JZorgen,  this  morning 
treu,  faithful  ijerfauft,  sold 

t^euer,  dear  cin  tuenig,  a  Httle 

tt)o^l,  well  i^m,him  unttjo^t,  unwell 


Reading  Exercise  X  XVI. 

3(^  ttar  treu,  t)u  warjl  unartig,  (Sr  war  fe^r  uttwo"^!  biefen  ^Jiori? 
gen,  @ie  war  fe^r  franf.  2Cir  waren  ein  wenig  unartig»  3^^^ 
waret  nid)t  fo  ^bflic^  al^  wir.  I)er  ®ro§»ater  unb  bie  (Dro§mutter 
waren  in  ^ranffurt,  SJZein  SJJantel  ifl  etenfo  t^euer  aU  ler  3^^igc» 
!Eein  ipunt)  ijl  treuer  al^  ber  meinige,  3Bar  ^arl  in  5^ran!furt? 
9lein,  er  war  in  Sonfcon,  'Mm  35ater  war  mit  i^m.  SCaren  @ie 
biefen  ?!JJorgen  ju  ^aufe?  ^dn,  i6>  war  ni(^t  gu  ^anfej  ic^  war  in 
ter  ^ir^e,    !Der  (Spiegel  war  ger&roc^en* 

Theme  XXVI. 

I  was  lazy.  Thou  wast  a  little  naughty.  He  was  very 
sick.  We  were  not  so  attentive  as  they.  You  were  always 
very  faithful.  They  were  very  dear.  Is  Charles  here  ?  No, 
Sir,  he  was  here  this  morning,  but  h^e  is  in  Frankfort  now. 
They  were  not  always  contented.  Who  was  with  her  (i^r)  ? 
Her  sister  was  with  her.  That  child  was  not  very  polite. 
It  was  a  little  naughty.     The  merchant  had  (war)  arrived. 


52 


DECLENSION   OP   ADJECTIVES. 


Conversation. 


2Bar  ber  mantd  t^euer? 
^a6en  ©ie  i:^n  ijerfauft? 
2Bo  war  bein  D^^eim  ? 
SBarft  fcu  unmo^l  ? 
SBaren  @ic  tmmer  gufrteben  ? 
Saren  fte  nic^t  in  ber  @d^ule  ? 
^aben  @ie  einen  33rief  er^alten  ? 

2Ber  f^at  ben  (Spiegel  gerbroc^en  ? 
^aben  ©ie  einen  9tegenf^trm  ober 
einen  ©tod  genommen  ? 


3a,  er  mar  t^^eurer  al^  ber  3§rige. 
9lein,  i^  :^aBe  i^n  ijerloren, 
Sr  war  in  i^^'cinffurt* 
3a,  ic^  war  ein  menig  unmoM. 
2Bii?  maren  nic^t  immer  jufrie^en, 
9lein,  fte  maren  gu  Jpaufe. 
9lein,  mir  |a6en  leinen  53rief  er^ 

fallen, 
Tier  <3pieget  mar  jerbrot^en* 
3^  ^aBe  meber  einen  Sflegenfc^irm 

noc^  einen  ©tod  genommen* 


LESSON   XXVII.  ^efttPtt    27* 

Declension  of  Adjectives, 

PRECEDED   BY   THE   DEFINITE   ARTICLE. 

Obs. — The  adjective,  when  preceded  by  the  definite  article, 
or  by  biefer,  jener  or  melc^er,  is  subject  to  the  same  rule 
as  the  possessive  pronoun.  See  Lesson  XXV,  Ob- 
servation I. 


Masc.  Sing. 

Nom.  ©er  altc  S3rief 

Gen.  beg  altctt  33riefeg 

Dat.  bent  altcn  33riefe 

Ace.  ben  altcn  33rief 

Plural 

Nom.  I^ie  treucn  Wiener 

Gen.  ber  treucn  T)iener 

Dat.  ben  treucn  IDienern 

Ace.  bie  treucn  I^iener 


Fern.  Sing. 

'Lit  Quit  ^ampt 
ber  gutcn  ^antpe 
ber  gutcn  ^ampt 
bie  gutc  Sampe 


Neuter  Sing. 

Dag  fc^onc  papier 
beg  fc^oncn  ^apierg 
bem  f^oncn  papier 
bag  fc^onc  papier 


Sing,  with  m  e  I  (^  e  g. 

S3el(^eg  neuc  ^ani 
mefc^eg  neucn  ipaufeg 
njel^em  neucn  ^aufc 
ttjet^eg  neuc  ^aug 


DECLENSION    OF   ADJECTIVES.  "  53 

I)ie  ^afc^c,  the  bottle  ^a€  !Dorf,  the  village 

fcie  53rieftafc^e,  the  portfolio  ^er  Slrjt,  the  physician 

fca^  33roC,  the  bread  ter  2if(^,  the  table 

lang,  long  3c^  fe|c,  I  see 


Reading  Exercise  XXYII. 

T)tv  faute  T;tener  |at  tie  i$tafd)c  gcrSroc^en.  Tat  %x^i  ^at  einc 
Srieftafd^c  er^alten.  !Die  treue  ©c^wefler  ^at  bad  alte  53u(^.  3J^ein 
D^eim  ^t  taiS  alte  ^aud  »erfauft.  T)te  aufmerlfame  ^agt)  ^t  tic 
gute  Sampe  gerbroc^en.  Die  alte  ?i}?utter  liett  i()ren  fleiftgen  ©o^tt* 
2Cir  :^a6en  Dad  gro§e  ipaud  oerfauft.  ipaben  ©ie  aud)  unfern  grofeti 
©arten  tter!auft?  ^'^ein,  i(^  ^aBc  i^n  ttid)t  oerfauft,  So  ift  tad 
n?ei§e  ^rob?    §ier  ijl  ed»    3^  ^Brmeinen  goltenen  ^tng  ijerfauft* 

Theme  XXVII. 

Our  teacher  praises  (to6t)  this  diligent  girl  (ace).  Where 
is  the  good  father  ?  The  good  father  is  in  Berlin.  We  have 
bought  the  faithful  dog  (ace)  of  the  friend.  Have  you  found 
the  gold(en)  (ace.)  ring  ?  No,  Sir,  but  I  have  bought  it  (i^n). 
Hast  thou  received  the  key  (ace.)  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  received 
it  (i^n).  This  new  hat  of  thy  cousin  is  very  large.  I  see  the 
little  village.  Have  you  read  my  long  letter?  Who  has 
bought  the  gold(en)  ring  ? 

Conversation. 

2Co  tfl  bad  gute  weigc  35rob  ?  SBir  ^dbm  feirt  guted  33rob»* 

^a^  t}n  einen  golbenen  dixncj  ge-  9letn,  ic^  ^aBe  einen  gefauft, 

funben  ? 

ipaben  ®ie  aut^  ben  gro^en  ©artert  S^lein,  16)  l^aU  i^n  nid)t  gefauft, 

gefauft?  fonbern  (but)  »er!auft» 

^cnnen  (3ie  bicfe  alte  %xavL^  5^  !enne  fie  niit,  aBer  ic^  !enne 

jenen  altctt  Wlann. 

2Co  ij^  ber  treue  ^utib  bed  (55artnerd  ?  Der  gute  3Sater  ^at  i^n  gefauft. 

^  For  the  inflection  of  adjectives  preceded  by  fcitt  see  Less.  29. 


54 


SUPERLATIVE  DEGREE  :  ATTRIBUTIVE  FORM. 


^at  tier  ^mk  mein  ^Jlejfer  ge? 

nommen  ? 
^attie  ^ag^  bieSampeserBroc^en? 


5^em,  t)ie  gute  ©c^mejler  |at  beiit 

^^ejfer  genommen. 
5^ein,  ter  unaufmerlfame  Diener 

l^at  tie  meije  Skf^^  gerbroc^en* 
S^leitt,  biefc^  iorf  ifi  fe^r  flein* 


LESSON   XXVin.  ScftiPtt    28 

Second  Form  of  the  Superlative. 

Obs.  — The  second  form  of  adjectives  in  the  superlative  de- 
gree is  the  attributive  form  which  takes  jle  only,  and  is 
declined  like  other  adjectives,  preceded  by  the  definite 
article.  It  is  used  only  when  a  noun  follows  or  is 
understood.     See  Obs.  Lessons  XXV  and  XXVII. 

ADJECTIVES  IN   THEIR   THREE  DEGREES. 

Positive.   Comparative.  Superlative. 

jtarf,  fldr!cr    ter,  tie,  ba«  ftdrlfte,  or  am  jldrrjlen  strong 

[i^on,  \6>mtx  ter,  tie,  ta^  fcl^bnftc,  or  am  fc^ijnflen  beautiful 

alt,  alter      ter,  tie,  ta^  diteftc ,  or  am  dltefteit  old 

gut,  (irreg.)  Bcffcr    ter,  tie,  ta^  beftc,     or  am  bejlen  good 


X;ie  5tufgaBe,  the  exercise 
tie  5lrBcit,  the  work 
ter  iput,  the  bonnet,  hat 
ter  Slrjt,  the  physician 
ter  ©tiefel,  the  boot 
gotten,  golden  (gold) 


2)ic  5'^i(^te,  the  niece 
ter  9Jeffe,  the  nephew 
ber  ^elt,  the  hero 
ta^  !t)orf,  the  village 
tag  53rot,  the  bread 
gcrriffen,  torn 


Reading  Exercise  XXVIII. 

Der  ©ta'^I  ijl  tag  ^drtefle,  tag  33lei  ifl  tag  fc^merfte  ^etatt.  ^eiit^? 
rid)  ifl  ter  fleigigfle  unt  befle  (S^iiter.  31^  2uife  .aufmerlfam  ?  ©tc 
ijl  tag  aufmerlfamfte  ^dt^en.    !Der  ^elt  ijl  j^arf,  mein  Dn!el  ijl 


DEGBEES    OF   ADJECTIVES.  55 

fliirfer,  aBcr  fcin  ^a6^hav  i|l  ^er  flarffle  Wlann.  Seine  ^x&ik  ijt  ta3 
fc^onfte  ^Jlaijciett  in  granffurt.  Die  Slufgabe  ijt  tie  fdwerfte  UxUiL 
^akn  @ie  ehua^  »erloren  ?  3<^  ^^^^  meinen  beften  i^ut  »erloren* 
i)ein  5^effe  tcit  ben  langften  (Btod  genommen*  ^i^xt  9li(^te  ^t  ten 
neueften  ^ut  gefauft*  @ie  ^aUn  ben  grb^ten  urio  fc^onften  ©arten* 
3^re  2;ante  ^at  ta^  t^euerfte  ^leit. 

Theme  XXVIII. 

The  best  bread.  The  whitest  rose.  Mary  is  the  most  dili- 
gent girl,  Charles,  the  most  attentive  boy.  They  have  bought 
the  largest  garden.  I  have  taken  the  longest  stick.  "Who  is 
that  girl  ?  She  is  the  youngest  daughter  of  his  uncle.  This 
female  servant  has  broken  the  finest  glass.  Do  you  know  the 
best  man?  Yes,  I  know  him.  (The)  lead  is  the  heaviest 
metal.     Nelson  was  the  most  celebrated  English  hero. 

Conversation. 

^dbm  @ic  ben  l^bc^j^en  33erg  ge?  5!JJeine  5Dlutter  ^at  ben  l)bd)jlen  Serg 

fe|en  ?  gefe^en. 

2BeI(^e5*iftbiefd)onfie  '^xau  ?  (Seine  3:ante  ifl  bie  f(^bnfle  %xa\x. 

2CeId)eg  ifl  ber  fleigigfte  ^naU  ?  Unfer  53ruber  ift  ber  flei^igfte  ^nabe. 

2BeId)er  SO^ann  ifl  am  ftdrfften  ?  3}iein  5^ad)6ar  x\t  ber  ftdrffte  '^ann. 

^ajl  t)u  ein  S3uc^  getefen  ?  ^&i  ^abe  ba6  Befte  i8u^  gelefen, 

2Cer^atbenBe(ten©tod3er6ro(^en?  "Lex  Xiener  ^at  i^n  gerbroc^en. 

^akn  ©ie  etmas  yerlorcn  ?  3^  i)«t^c  mcine  befte  gebcr  ijcrloren. 

^ajt  bu  cine  5^id^te  ?  Sc^  l)af>c  bie  bejie  5^i^te« 


LESSON   XXIX.  ^cftivn  29. 

Adjectives  preceded  by  the  Indefinite  Article. 

Obs.  — An  adjective,  when  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article, 
or  by  a  conjunctive  possessive  pronoun  (ntcin,bein,  fein,i^r, 
unfer^  3^i^/  i^v*),  or  by  f ein  (no),  takes,  in  the  nominative  sin- 
gular, the  terminations  cr  (maf^c. ),  e  (fem.),  and  c§  {vmtt.), 

*  For  tliis  use  of  rod^^tS  see  p.  194,  103. 


56 


ADJECTIVES  PEECEDED  BY  THE  INDEFINITE  ARTICLE. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


In  all  other  cases  it  takes  en,  except  the  accusative 
of  the  feminine  and  neuter,  which  ends  hke  the  nomi- 
native. 

EXAMPLES. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 

cin  Quttv  '^am  cine  gute  %vau 

eine^  gutcn  ^anne^  etner  guten  %van 

eincm  guten  SJianne  einer  guten  %xau 

einen  guten  ^^ann  eine  gute  i^rau 


Neuter. 

tin  neinc§  ^int) 
eine^  lleinen  ^inte^ 
eirtem  lleinen  Mnt? 
eitt  fleineg  ^inb 


Win  has  no  plural,  but  with  mein,  betn,  fein,  k.,  the  ad- 
jective is  decHned,  taking  the  ending  en,  according  to  the 
Observation  of  this  Lesson. 

Ter  ®(^u^macber,  the  shoemaker  foftbar,  precious 


ter  3fl^ein,  the  Rhine 
tcr  glu§,  the  river 
nac^Idfjig,  negligent 
gcf^rieben,  written 
geftern,  yesterday 
itxix^mt,  celebrated 
angcne^m,  agreeable 


fc^arf,  sharp 

treit,  broad 

lith,  dear 

gemad)t,  made 

(Etwa^,  anything,  something 

englifc^,  English 

teutfd),  German 


Reading  Exercise  XXIX. 

Unfer  5^ac^6ar  ijl  ein  guter  ^ann,  Sure  5^a^krin  i|l  eine  fcblec^te 
%xaxi.  ©etn  ©cbu^^macber  ift  cin  junger  ^ann,  X)ag  ©oil)  ift  ein 
loftbare^  'MdaU.  ^^r  ®ro§«ater  ift  ein  guter  alter  SHann.  ^aben 
Gie  meine  golcene  U^r  ^erloren?  ^aht  i^r  einen  langen  33riefgc:: 
Meben?  ipier  ift  ein  ate  ^ferc.  ^ennen  ©ie  biefen  reid^en  9)^ann? 
jd)  lenne  weter  biefen  reiAen  Waxin  noc^  jenen  armen  SJJann*  Jpat 
unfere  9lic^te  einen  langen  33ricf  gefdjrieben  ?  3^,  pe  f^at  einen  fe^r 
langen  33rief  gefdjrieben. 

Theme  XXIX. 

Tour  neighbor  has  a  large  garden.      The  Rhine  is  a  broad 
(Brelt)  river.     Who  has  taken  my  sharp  knife?    I  have  taken 


THE   ENGLISH   AUXILIARY    TO  DO.  5T 

neither  your  sharp  knife,  nor  his  long  stick.  Here  is  his  old 
horse.  We  have  seen  our  good  king.  Have  you  lost  your 
gold  watch  ?  That  old  man  likes  his  faithful  dog.  The  count 
has  bought  a  young  horse.  (The)  silver  is  a  precious  metal. 
My  dear  sister  has  received  a  beautiful  dress.  The  rose  is 
a  beautiful  flower.     You  are  the  oldest  tailor. 

Conversation. 

^at  fcer  ®raf  ein  neucd  ^au5  ge^    ^lein,  er  ^at  ein  neues  ipau^  »er^ 

!auft  ?  fauft. 

ipaben  (Sie  ein  oXiti  ^ferb  ?  2Bir  \)^hxi  ein  alte^  unb  ein  jungea 

^fert)» 
3jt  t)eitte®ro§muttereinea(te^rau?   ®ie  ijl  eine  fe^r  alte  ^rau. 
^at  i^r  5fiac()bar  cinen  (5)arten  ?        (Sr  ^at  einen  gropen  ®arten. 
3ft  ta^  (Silber  ein  detail  ?  3^a5  @i(kr  ift  ein  fcftbare^  ^et(\II. 

^aBen  (5ie  3^^^^  golcene  U^r  »er^     ^^^ein,  i^  ^aBe  meincn  goltenen 

loren  ?  9ling  tterloren» 

SCer  l)at  mein  f^arfes  SJ^ejJer  gc^    3c^  ^abe  meter  fcein  fc^arfe^  ^ejfcr, 

nommen?  nod)  teinen  langen  ©tocf  ge- 

nommen. 


LESSON  XXX.  Seftiott  30. 

The  English  Auxiliary,  TO  DO. 

Obs.  — The  auxiliary  verb  to  do,  which  accompanies  the  verb 
in  negative  and  interrogative  sentences  in  English,  is 
not  expressed  in  German. 

Eegular  Verb.    {Modem  Form), 

PRESENT   TENSE. 

Singidar.  Plural. 

3c^  lieBe,  I  like,  I  love  n?ir  lieBen,  we  like 

fcu  liebft,  thou  likest,  lovest  i^r  lieBt,       |  ^^ 

er  liebt,  he  likes,  loves  ©ie  lieben,   ; 

fie  liebt,  she  likes,  etc.  fie  lieben,  they  like 

icb  liebe  nic^t,  I  do  not  like  lieben  (Sic,  do  you  like? 


58  REGULAR  VERB  I  PRESENT  TENSE. 

Thus: 

ic^  lenne,  I  know  x6^  faufe,  I  buy 

id)  fu^e,  I  seek,  look  for  id)  Braud^e,  I  want 

i6:i  finte,  I  find  ic^  fd^reiBe,  I  write 

i&j  ermarte,  I  expect  ertuarten  <Bk,  do  you  expect? 

Dcr  Zi]^,  the  table  !Der  ©ommer,  (the)  summer 

ber  2:ifd[)Ier,  the  joiner  ber  Sinter,  (the)  winter 


Reading  Exercise  XXX. 

3(^  HeBe  meine  gute  Splutter*  ^u  liebft  beinen  alten  3Sater.  Sr 
licBt  feinen  reic^en  D^cim,  2Bir  lieben  uttfern  gropen  ®arten»  3^r 
lieBt  euer  jungc^  ^fcrK  ©ie  liekn  i:^r  fd^arfe^  ^^cflfer.  Du  fauffl 
einen  33Ieiflift,  er  brauc^t  eittc  8ta^Ifeber*  5Bir  fuc^en  unfern  altcn 
©tod.  ^ennft  bu  jenen  SJlann  ?  Sag  fu^fl  bu  ?  'J^er  2:ifd)Ier  fudt 
ben  2;if(%,  2)er  ©ommcr  ift  angene^m,  ahx  ber  Sinter  ift  unange^^ 
ne^m.  @ie  lieBen  3^^^  2:ante;  fie  iithn  unfern  ®ro§»ater»  3<^  ^f«nc 
jenen  Jungen  Wlann*  ^ennft  bu  feinen  Se^rer  ?  8u(^en  @ie  3i)f 
X;intenfa^  ?    3c^  pnbe  biefeg  33u(^  fe^r  gut. 

Theme  XXX. 

I  know  his  little  sister.  He  seeks  thy  new  parasol.  You 
want  a  new  umbrella.  Thou  dost  buy  an  inkstand.  They 
Hke  your  steel  pen.  I  want  a  good  book  and  a  pencil.  Do 
you  buy  a  cap  ?  No,  I  do  not  want  a  cap.  Where  is  Mary's 
copy-book?  she  is  seeking  it,  (she  seeks  it).  I  like  that 
beautiful  flower  very  much  (fe^r).  Do  you  hke  it  also  ?  What 
do  you  seek  ?  I  seek  my  gold  (en)  ring.  Which  pen  does  he 
want  ?  Who  knows  our  ugly  little  girl  ?  They  do  not  know 
her.     Do  you  know  our  merchant  ? 

Conversation. 

Siett  jener  alte  '^Sflann  ?  3fner  alte  'Mann  lieBt  feinen  treuen 

ipunb. 
3ft  ber  9l^cin  ein  glu§  ?  Xer  3fl^cin  ift  ein  Brciter  Slug. 


auxiliaries:  SJliiffen,  {onnen  and  mbgen. 


59 


^ennjl  bu  ben  fleiftgen  ©(filler? 
^ahm  @te  ben  fd)bnen  33rief  meine^ 

SSetter^  gelefen  ? 
Sarum    fauft    ber   SSakr  neue 

©tiefel? 
©^reibt  3fli^arb  auc^  feine  beutfc^c 

Slufgabe? 
5Bag  fuc^t  uttfer  Zi\&ikx^ 
2Bie  pnbejl  bu  biefe  gebcr  ? 


3c^  tenne  ben  fleigigflen  (Sc^iilcr* 
3c^  ^abe  i^n  nic^t  gelefen» 

Der  alte  (Stiefet  m  SBaterg  ift 

jerrtiJen  (torn). 
5^ein ,  er  fc^reibt  feinc  englifdjc 

^ufgabe. 
Sr  fuc^t  ben  3:iffi* 
3c^  ftnbe  fte  nii^t  fe^r  gut* 


LESSON   XXXI.     '  Seftioii    31* 

Auxiliary  Verbs:  SWuffcn,  fonncn  unb  mogcn. 

2J^uffen» 
3c^  muj,  I  must  2Cir  mujfen,  we  must 

bu  mu^t,  thou  must  i^r  miiffet  or  mit^t, )         ^^^^ 

cr  mu§,  he  must  ©ic  mujfen,  )  "^ 

jie  (e^)  mu§;  she  (it)  must  fie  mujfen,  they  must 

^bnnen, 

SBir  Fbnncn,  we  can 
i^r  fount,      ) 


3c^  !ann,  I  can,  may 
bu  !annft,  thou  canst 
er  faun,  he  can 
fte  (eg)  !ann,  she  (it)  can 


(Sie  fonnen, 


you  can 


3c^  mag,  I  may  (like) 
bu  magft,  thou  mayest 
er  mag,  he  may 
fie  (eg)  mag,  she  (it)  may 

f(^rei6en,  to  write 
lefen,  to  read 
[pred)en,  to  speak 
ge|en,  to  go 
^anjbftfc^,  French 


(te  !bnnen,  they  can 

9Jl  b  g  e  n* 

SBtr  mbgen,  we  may 

you  may 


i'^r  mbget,    ] 


(Bit  mbgen^ 

fie  mbgen,  they  may 

fui^en,  to  seek 
!aufen,  to  buy 
Ikikn,  to  stay  (remain) 
auggejcn,  to  go  out 
qfcng,  without 


60  auxiliaries:  ^Riiffen,  !bnnen  and  mogen, 

Reading  Exercise  XXXI. 

3c^  mu^  einen  Srief  |%ei6en.  Xu  mu^t  Jeine  UeBeffe^un^  lefen. 
Sr  mu§  frangbftfc^  fprec^en.  2Btr  mujjen  unfern  Partner  fu$en.  3^r 
miigt  ein  neue^  33u(^  faufen.  (Sie  miiffen  o^ne  (without)  ®d)u^e 
i^c^en,  ^annfl  t)U  fc^rcibcn?  3c^  fcinn  fd^reiben  unD  mein  ^rur^er 
lann  lefeit.  ^bnnen  tie  ^JiKaCi^en  fprecben  ?  2Btr  fonnen  Heiben,  [te 
•uuj[en  ge^en.  Sr  mag  au^ge^eit.  X)u  magft  Bleiben  ot)er  gekn* 
v^einri^  mu§  in  tic  (Sd)u(e  ge^en,  Die  (Sc^iiler  mogen  franjbfifd) 
iprec^en.  3^)  1^^^  mein  53udj  oerloren,  toix  miiffen  e^  fuc^en.  SDkg 
cer  2:ifc^ler  auege^en? 

Theme  XXXI. 

May  we  stay  ?  No,  you  must  go  out.  May  I  read  French  ? 
No,  thou  may  est  seek  the  joiner.  Can  he  stay  at  home  ? 
Charles  may  stay  in  Berhn,  but  Henry  must  go  to  (nad)) 
Frankfort.  I  must  make  my  English  translation.  Frederick 
must  write  a  German  letter.  Can  he  speak  English?  He 
must  learn  French.  Can  you  write  a  letter  for  me  (mid))? 
No,  I  must  go  out ;  I  must  buy  a  new  hat  for  my  brother. 
He  has  a  cap  ;  but  he  may  also  have  a  hat. 

Conversation. 

^annfl  bu  lefen  unt>  fc^reiBen?  ^a,  i(^  fann  lefen  unt  f^relBen^ 

jJlag  bcr  2;if^ler  tien  2:ifd)  fuc^en?    3^1,  ^r  mag  i^n  fud^en. 
i^onnen    toix    ten    neuen    2;ifc^    Der  nmt  Z\\d)  ift  nic^t  "^ier. 

fe^en  (see)? 
Hn^t  tu  ein  nened  33udj  i^ahcn^.      ^a,  ic^  tranche  ed  tiefen  SGinter. 
Connen  @ie  franabftfc^  lefen  ?  3a,  id)  tann  frangbfifd)  lefen,  aber 

nid)t  fran^bfifd)  fprcdjen. 
-Jiiijlcn  ©ie  eine  neue  ^rammati!    S^^ein,  id)  braudje  feine  neue ;  tie 

ifaufcn?  meinige  ij^  nod)  (still)  gut. 

J3o  i[l  t)cr  X)icncr ?  Qx  i^  au^gegangen  (has  gone 

out);   er  mu§  ten   ©djlujyd 
3^reg  3immcrvJ  ^olen. 


auxiliaries:    2B  0  H  e  n ,  f  o  U  e  n  and  fc  ii r  f  e  n. 


61 


LESSON   XXXn.  «efttott  32* 

Auxiliary  Verbs :  tSSottcn,  fottcn  unt  biirfcn. 

2Bir  tt?olIen,  we  wish 

(Bit  mollen,  ) 

[le  n?o(Ien,  ttey  msh 

©ollen, 

2Bir  foden,  we  shall 

@ie  jollen,   ) 

fie  foilcn,  they  shall 

X)urfen, 
3d)  t^arf,  I  may  or  dare,  (I  am    2Bir  fciirfen,  we  may 

permitted)  t^r  tiirfct, 

tu  tarfft,  thou  mayest  ©ie  turfen, 

er  tarf,  he  may  Pe  liirfen,  they  may 


3(^  Witt,  I  wish  or  will 
ru  wiOft,  thou  wishest 
er  tvill,  he  wishes 
fie  (c^)  mill,  she  wishes 

3d)  foil,  I  shall 
bu  foUft,  thou  shalt 
er  [oil,  he  shall 
fte  (ti)  foil,  she  shall 


you  may 


tai  SBorterbuc^,  the  dictionary 

to  mm  en,  to  come 

l^pn,  when 

tie  UeBerfe^ung,  the  translation 

tie  3ii^^s^3fit,  the  season 

men,  whom  ? 

fui^en  @ie,  do  you  (seek)  look 

for? 
mo^nen,  to  live  {dwell) 


Ta^  Sweater,  the  theatre 

»erfaufen,  to  sell 

morgen,  to-morrow 

3emanb,  somebody,  anybody 

Alternant,  nobody 

fiir  men,  for  whom  ? 

3d)  ^a6e  ^uft  I  have  a  mind  or 

I  would  like  to 
er  mo^nt,  he  hves  {dwells) 


Raading  Exercise  XXXII. 

3d)  mill  avL^ti)tn,    Wnm  ©^mefter  mitt  ^u  Jpaufe  fclei^en;  fie  mill 
ein  ^ud)  lefen.     Swollen  (3ie  in  ten  ©arten  (^eben?    ^6^^ahtUint 


62  auxiliaries:    SCollen,  follen  and  t ii r f e n» 

Sup,  3U  Hei6en.  3c^  tt^itt  in  bag  2:^eater  gel)ett»  Xaa  ?0^db(^ett  tuill 
tie  Ueberfe^ung  fc^rciben;  fie  fuci^t  lai  SBorterbuc^.  @oU  id)  gu*  tern 
Slrjt  ge^en?  Du  foUft  na^  tern  3:^eater  lommen.  ^ann  follen  ivir  in 
tie  ©c^ule  ge^en.  ^^v  fotit  t>en  33rief  fcforei6en.  @ie  foden  tie  5lufgak 
lernen,  Darf  ic^  in  ta^  2;^eater  ge^en?  Xu  tarfft  fommen.  Sr 
tarf  fein  SBortert^u^  »er!aufen,  2Bir  tiirfen  3U  ipaufe  (at  home) 
Heiben* 

Theme  XXXII. 

What  will  Charles  write  ?  Henry  will  write  a  French  let- 
ter, and  I  will  learn  my  lesson.  You  shall  read  this  beautiful 
book.  Thou  shalt  sell  neither  thy  house  nor  thy  garden. 
We  may  sell  our  horse.  May  you  stay  here  ?  I  may  stay 
here,  but  I  will  go  tof  the  theatre.  When  will  you  go  to* 
Berhn  ?  Thou  art  permitted  to  go.  May  I  go  out  ?  We 
will  go  out,  you  shall  stay  at  home.  Mayest  thou  (art  thou 
permitted)  to  remain  at  home?  They  shall  sell  their 
dictionary  to-morrow. 


Conversation. 

2BitIfl  bu  franjofijc^  lefen  ?  ^tin,  t^  ^ak  feine  Su(!, 

SCoUt  t^r  in  ta^  2:^eater  ge^en  ?  ^tin,  mir  tiirfen  ni^t  auSge^en* 

©oflen  (Sie  na(3^33erUn  ge^en?  ^f^ein,  t(^  foil  gu  ^aufe  bleiben. 

Darfft  bu  teln  SSSbrterbud)  »er^  3«,  t^  tarf  e^  »erfaufen» 

!aufen  ? 

S3ann  wotlen  ©ie  ju  mir  !ommen  ?  3^  trill  morgen  fommen. 

2BiII  ter  @(^u^ma(^er  tai  S©er^  Sr  ^at  feine  Sufi,  eg  su  faufen* 

terBu(^  faufen  ? 

SJiu^t  tu  tin  neueg  53ucb  faufen  ?  5^cin,  t(^  mid  e«  faufen, 

^aft  tu  Suft  nac^  granffmt  au  3d)  ^abe  feine  3ctt. 

ge'^en  ? 

SBen  fud)t  tein  3Sater  ?  gr  fud)t  ten  (Scbiiler, 

*  After  verbs  denoting  direction  toward,  ju  is  generally  used  before 
the  name  of  a  person,  and  no4  before  the  name  of  a  place  or  country 
f  Translate  here  in  (with  the  Accus.). 


PREPOSITIONS   WITH   GENITIVE   AND   DATIVE.  63 

LESSON   XXXin.  Seftiott    33* 

Prepositions  Governing  the  Genitive  and  Dative. 

Obs. —  In  German  the  prepositions  govern  different  cases. 
They  may  govern  either  the  genitive,  dative,  accusa- 
tive, or  both  the  dative  and  accusative. 

1.  Prepositions  which  Govern  the  Dative  only  : 

%ni,  out  of,  from  ©eit,  since 

bet,  near,  at,  by  (at  the  house  of)  »on,  of,  from,  by 

mit,  with  3U,  to,  at 

mij,  after,  to  gegcnuber,  opposite  to 

2.  Prepositions  Governing  the  Genitive  only  : 
SBd^rent),  during  SBegcn,  on  account  of 

Der  ^J^upne^rer,     the  music-  tiietlcicfot,  perhaps 

teacher  au^gegangen,  gone  out 

ber  U^rmadJcr,  the  watchmaker  jvot)in  get^en  @ie,  where  are  you 
3c^  n?ci§,  I  know,  Mtte,  pray  going? 


Reading  Exercise  XXXIII. 

3c^  war  fcei  tern  Z\\6^Uv;  a6er  er  war  nict)t  ju  ^aufe,  er  war  ani^ 
gegangen.  ^rie^ricb  ge^t  ju  tern  ©c^u^mad)er,  Vix  iO^ufine^rcr 
tro^nt  hi  meinem  D^eim.  3fi  ^r  aw  §«WK  *  3*  rm^n\6>t  Sr  ijl 
ttielleic^t  au5gegangen.  ®e^en  ©ie  ju  tern  3:ifd>Ier.  2Bo|irt  ge^t 
3^r  53rutcr  ?  @r  ge^t  ju  fcem  ©artiter.  3^re  Jante  ge^t  ^u  i^rer 
9lac()barin.  3c^  fomme  ani  ter  ©Me.  Xer  .^aifer  wo^nt  M  ter 
^aiferin.  Der  ®raf  ift  mit  ter  ®rdftn  nad)  53erHn  gegangcn  (gone). 
(EiJ  war  wdkent)  fce3  .^rieged  (war).  2Bir  fint>  we^  te3  0legen3 
nic6t  au^gegangen.  Jpaft  tu  einen  Srtef  i>on  meinem  Ce^rer?  @eit 
tern  ^riege. 


64 


NOUNS   IN   THE   PARTITIVE   SENSE. 


Theme  XXXIIl. 

He  must  go  to  my  friend.  I  live  at  my  father's.  My  young 
friend  lives  with  his  grandfather.  Is  the  physician  at  home  ? 
I  wiU  go  and  see.  He  is  at  the  tailor's.  From  whom  have 
you  received  this  letter  ?  It  is  from  my  sister.  He  comes 
from  school.  Where  are  you  going  during  the  rain  ?  We  have 
an  umbrella  on  account  of  the  rain.  Since  the  war.  After 
the  rain.    During  the  summer.    I  was  at  the  music-teacher's. 

Conversation. 


2Bta|ltuna(^  SBerlin  ge^en? 
(SoOft  Du  ju  tern  @6nei?er  gel)en? 
ipaft  tu  ein  53ud)  »on  teinem  2e!^rer 

er^olten  ? 
2Bo  »o^nt  fein  greunb  ^oUxt  ? 
9)?it  mm  tt)o6nt  ter  ®raf? 

2Bot)irt  ge^en  @ie  ? 
!E)art7t  bu  morgen  au^gel)en? 


9?ein,  tdb  mitt  nac^  ^ranffurt  ge^en, 
5^ein,  i^  fott  jum  Jifd^ter  ge^en. 
3ci,  cr  ^at  e^  mir  gegeben* 

gr  ttjo'^nt  Bet  feiner  ®ro§ mutter. 
Sr  wo^nt  mit  feinem  Sruber. 
Sr  ge^t  »iettetd?t  gu  tern  Se^rcr. 
3c^  ge|e  3U  bem  ^O^ufifte^rer. 
3c^  tarf  ni^t  an^Qt^tn, 


LESSON  'XXXIV.  2emvn    34* 

Nouns  in  the  Partitive  Sense. 

Obs. —  In  German  when  a  noun  is  taken  in  a  partitive  sense 
the  article  U  omitted  both  in  the  singular  and  pluraL 


33roD,  some  or  any  bread 
%ki\&!,  some  or  any  meat 
3Bein,  some  or  any  wine 

"Lk  ?0^itcb,  the  milk 
bie  33utter,  the  butter 
bic  Dinte,  the  ink 
ber  ^afe,  the  cheese 


3urfer,  some  or  any  sugar 
^affee,  some  or  any  coffee 
SBajJer,  some  or  any  water 

"La^  (Bali,  (tlie)  salt 
ba^  33ier,  (the)  beer 
ein  ^funj,  a  pound 
ge^ort^  belongs 


NOUNS   IN   THE   PARTITIVE   SENSE.  65 

ber  Z^ti,  the  tea  getrunfen,  drunk 

Bringen  ©ie  mtr,  bring  me  9^9^11^",  eaten 

IQthtn  @te  mir,  give  me  9^9ft>en,  given 

tei^n  <Sie  mir,  lend  me  gelietjen,  lent 

i&i  jUicfe,  I  send  gefdndt,  sent 

id)  gebe,  I  give  n?ie  »iel,  how  much  ? 

id)  gleii^e,  I  resemsble  ttjem,  to  whom  ? 

mir,  to  me  or  me  i^m,  to  him  oi"  him 


Reading  Exercise  XXXIV. 

SBoHen  ®ie  SBein  ober  33ier  ^af»en?  3*  Jvitt  Sier  :t;akn.  Xa« 
^Bier  ift  fe^r  gut ;  e^  ijl  kjfer  d^  Scin.  "Ba^  ©alg  ifi  fe^r  nii^Ii*. 
(3ihtn  @tc  mir  <Sal3  unD  ^xcl,  Sei^en  (Bie  mir  3^^  SQiiiterbud). 
'Ea^  ^inn  ^at  ^affee  getrunlen,  ®o  ift  ter  3w<^^^?  ®^^  »?i^ 
Bleifc^  ^aben  ?  2Cie  »iel  ^affce  unt  3:^ec  mU^  M  ^aUn  ?  (Sekn 
(Sie  mir  ein  ^^funD  ^letfd),  tin  ^funt)  Salj  unt)  ein  5^funb  33utter. 
^aji  bu  33ier  oter  ^iJlitd)  getrunfen  ?  3c^  ^flt)e  guteg  gleift^  unt)  meiged 
Srob  gegejfen.    2Bir  woUen  feinen  ,^afe. 

Theme  XXXIV. 

Bring  me  some  coffee  and  sugar.  Will  you  have  tea  or 
coffee?  Give  me  a  pound  of  meat  and  a  pound  of  cheese. 
Do  you  want  anything?  I  want  a  pen,  some  paper  and  some 
ink;  I  must  write  a  letter.  Bring  me  some  tea.  Bring  me 
also  some  butter.  What  has  the  child  drunk  ?  It  has  drunk 
some  water  and  some  milk.  The  cousin  has  drunk  wine  and 
beer.  How  much  coffee  does  your  servant  want  ?  He  wants 
a  pound  (of)*  coffee  and  a  pound  of  sugar.  The  gardener's 
wife  wants  some  salt  and  some  cheese.  Pray,  give  me  some 
bread.     Lend  me  your  dictionary. 

Conversation. 

2Ble  »ie(  (Salj  '^aben  ©ie  gefauft  ?    3^  ^o.U  ein  ^funb  gcfauft. 
33raud?en  @ic  au(^  ^affee  ?  3^,  0^^  ©if  ini^  f i"  finnt)  ^ajfec* 


*  Of,  after  names  of  measure  and  weight,  is  not  expressed  in  German. 
5 


66 


DECLENSION   OF    MASCULINE   NODNtJ  IN    E. 


SBitt  ter  gro^e  ^naBe  3u(ier  \io!itx(i 

^ot  unfer  I^iener  33ier  gctrunlen? 
3ft  ba^  eal5  nii^lic^  ? 

®c6ett  (Sic  ntir  53rob  un^  ^cife  ? 
2Ba«J  ^t  ca^  ^int  getrunlen  ? 
SBie  ijiel  3:^ee  braudjt  3^re  3}lutter? 
Mtfeuaud)  X)inte? 
giir  n?en  ift  Mefer  3wtlcr? 


!Da3  Heine  ^dbdjen  Witt  3w(ier 

^aben* 
9lettt,  er  ^at  SCajfer  getrunJeit, 

T)a^  (Salj  ift  ebenfo  nii^Iid)  al^  bag 

3d)  ^abe  feinen  ^dfe» 
©^  ^at  ^ilc^  getrunten* 
©ie  brauc^t  ein  ^funt)  2:^ce, 
3a,  ic^  :^a6e  X)inte  unb  papier* 
(Sr  ift  fiir  tie  Z^^iix  meiner  S'lac^^ 
barin ;  fie  ift  Iran! ♦ 


LESSON   XXXY. 


«efttott  33< 


Declension  of  Masculine  Nouns  ending  in  c. 

Obs.  — Masculine  nouns  ending  in  the  nominative  in  c,  form 
all  other  cases  both  of  the  singular  and  plural  by 
adding  n,  but  do  not  modifj^  their  vowel.  * 


Examples. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Angular. 

Plural. 

Nom. 

Der  «Reffe 

"Lk  5^effen 

'Lit  ^naBe 

'Die  ^naben 

Gen. 

be^  9Zeffen 

ter  5^ejfett 

beg  ^naben 

ber  .^naben 

Dat. 

bem  9leffen 

ben  5^effen 

bent  ^naben 

ben  ^naben 

Ace. 

ben  Sf^ejfen 

bie  ^f^ejfen 

^tn  ^nabert 

bie  ^naben 

Der  9lujfe,  the  Kussian 

ber  3wbe,  the  Jew 

ber  D^fe,  the  ox 

ber  Some,  the  lion 

ber  2ljfe,  the  monkey 

ber  ?^effe,  the  nephew 

unartig,  naughty 

^h^m,  ugly        gro§,  bi(f ,  big 


!t)ag  ©rag,  the  grass 

ber  $afe,  the  hare  ^'Y'- 

ber  ^opf,  the  head 

ber  Deutfdje,  the  German 

ber  granjofe,  the  Frenchman 

bag  J^ier,  the  animal 

3(^  tt)ei§,  I  know 

jttjei,  two 


*  Der  ^err,  Mister  (the  gentleman)  also  takes  this  inflection. 
page  167,  Second  Declension). 


(See 


MASCULINE  NOUNS   IN   E.  67 

Reading  Exercise  XXXV. 

Der  9leffc  te^  granaofen  ^at  einen  Somen,  X:iefe^  3:^ter  i[l  ein 
5lffe.  3ft  liefer  iperr  ein  ^^ranjofe  oDer  ein  !Deutfct)er  ?  3l't  ^^^  3:^ier 
ein  ipafe  ?  5^ein,  ter  ^afe  ift  ein  3:^ier,  %ix  Some  ^at  einen  gropen 
un5  ^apUcben  ^opf.  I^icfer  "^yxu  ift  ein  reic^er  ^ftujfe,  aber  jener 
arme  ^nabe  ift  ein  ^ranjofe.  $Qie  ^eift  tiefer  Heine  ^xi^t  ?  S^iefer 
unge^orfame  $.Xi^\it  ^ei^t  Gilbert,  X;ie  Somen  ftn^  fc^r  parL  %tx 
Slffe  tes  ^errn  ^Jlartin,  ipier  ifl  He  U|r  3^re5  ^f^effen;  fte  ift  jer^ 
broken*  Sei^en  @ie  tern  ^^i^an^ofen  3^^  SKbrterbucfc,  er  mill  ein  teut^ 
fc^eiS  SBort  fud}en. 

Theme  XXXV. 

The  boy  is  diligent.  The  boy's  hat  ( the  hat  of  the  boy)  is 
new.  The  Frenchman's  house  (the  house  of  the  Frenchman) 
is  large.  Here  is  Mister  Eobinson.  The  boy  of  Mr.  Martin 
is  ill.  The  head  of  an  ox  is  big.  The  hares  eat  (freffcn)  grass. 
Which  gentleman  do  you  mean  (meinen  @ie),  the  Russian  or 
the  Frenchman  ?  This  horse  belongs  to  the  Jew.  No,  Sir, 
the  Jew  has  bought  it.  My  nephews  like  the  Germans  very 
much  (fe^r). 

Conversation. 

^^tv.  ®ic  ben  2lffen  gefe^en  ?  ^^^ein,  \^  ^abe  ben  Somen  gefe^en* 

^at  ber  3w^e  einen  ^afen  ?  Sr  ^at  einen  ipafen  itnb  ein  ^ferb* 

2Ci(l    biefer    ^nabe    fein   33u(^  ^Zein,    cr  mill    fein   Borterbuc^ 

l;aben?  "^abcn. 

5Ca5  ^at  ber  ipafe  gefrejfen  ?  (Sr  ^at  ®rag  c^efrcjiTen. 

^<xi  ber  D(^^  einen  bicfen  ^opf  ?  9lan,  er  :^at  einen  gro^en  ^opf* 

^aben  ^xt  ^naben  biefen  (Stu^l  3c^  ii^eig  e^  nic^t;  i^  ^abe  e^  nic^t 

aerbroc^en  ?  (]efel)en. 

SBoUen  ©ie  bent  Sranjofcn  ^x  3d)f^«neben^ran3ofertmdbt;  aber 

SBorterbu^  lei^en  ?  {{^  mitt  i^m  mein  5Sbrterbuc^ 

Ici^en. 

^r  ijt  biefer  junge  9)?ann  ?  SriftDer^leffe  unfere^^aufmanne^. 

f^o^tn  8ie  einen  5fiejfen?  3<^  ^abe  gmei  ^fleffen. 


68 


PLUEAL   OF   MASCULINE   SUBSTANTIVES. 


LESSON   XXXVI.    ,  !^ettwn  36. 

Plural  of  Masculine  Substantives, 

Obs.  I. — Masculine  nouns  not  ending  in  c,  el,  C11  and  tv  take 
C  in  the  plural,  and  modify  their  vowel.    (Seep.  169). 

Obs.  II. — All  substantives  take  n  or  en  in  the  dative  plural, 
if  they  do  not  already  have  that  ending. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat 
Ace. 


the  tree. 

I)ie  33aume 
ter  53aume 
ten  33aumcn 
Me  Sdume 


Examples. 

T)tx  3:if^, 
the  table. 

Xte  3:ifc^e 
ter  3:ifd)e 
ben  3:ifcben 
bie  2:ifc^e 


Xer  (BM, 
the  chair. 

'Lit  (StiiWc 
ter  8tu^Ie 
fcen  (Stii^Ien 
tie  ©tii^lc 


X;er  21^  the  branch 

ter  S3aum,  the  tree 

ter  ©todf,  the  stick 

ter  ^ifd),  the  fish 

ter  ^ug,  the  foot 

tie  ®(^n?et3,  Switzerland 

i?iete,  many 

njte  Vll^^i  liow  many 

meinen  ©ie,  do  you  mean 

fe^r,  very  much 


£)ie  5lefte,  the  branches 
tie  33aume,  the  trees 
tie  (Btodt,  the  sticks 
tie  ^ifd^e,  the  fishes 
tie  p§e,  the  feet 
fie,  (plur.)  them 
trei,  three 
ijier,  four 
Itegen,  to  lie 
talD,  soon 


Impebfect  Tense  of  l^aBen,  To  Have. 

3(^  ^atte,  I  had  ffiir  l)atten,  we  had 

tu  ^atteft,  thou  hadst  i^r  |attet,    |        ^^^ 

cr^atte^  he  had  ©ie  fatten,  3 

fte  (e^)  ^atte,  she  (it)  had  fie  "fatten,  they  had 


IMTEllFECT    TENSE    OF    ^  a  b  C  tt.  G9 

Reading  Exercise  XXXYI. 

3d)  :^atte  imi  Sriefe  er^Iten,  'Lk  33aume  kttcn  Slefle*  5Jtein 
^Setter  ^atte  trei  ©tbcfe  gefauft.  SSie  »iele  ^reunte  ^tte  3^r  3Sater  ? 
gr  ^attc  »ier  ?^reunte.  ^at  3c»tanr)  unfere  ipute  genommen  ?  ^arl 
^atte  fte  genommen*  2Ber  mill  tiefe  ^legcnfd^irtne  faufen  ?  S$ir  traiu 
d)ett  siuei  ©tocfe.  Tie  %i\6^t  ^tten  feine  p§e.  ipatteft  tu  cinen 
9iegenfAirm  ?  Tic  (So^ne  teg  3uten  fmt  angefommen.  2Cir  :^atten 
^afeit  uni)  Bifd)e.  Tie  2ott)en  ^aben  ijier  p^e.  4)attet  i^r  ipafen  "^ 
S^lein,  toix  fatten  Ddsfen. 

Theme  XXXVI. 

Do  you  know  the  sons  of  Mr.  Kobinson  ?  They  are  my 
cousins.  Have  you  received  any  letters  from  my  friends  ? 
I  have  received  letters  from  the  Jews.  What  has  Henry 
broken  ?  He  has  broken  four  chairs  and  three  sticks.  Do 
the  fish  Hve  (leben)  in  the  rivers  ?  With  whom  do  you  speak 
(fpredjen)  ?  The  Jew  has  four  sons  and  one  daughter.  I  have 
two  feet,  but  the  oxen  had  four  feet.  The  German  physicians 
are  very  clever.  I  had  bought  two  umbrellas  and  my  aunt 
had  lost  two  parasols. 

Conversation. 

SBic  ftnben  @ie  biefe  ©tii^Ie  ?  3d)  ftnbe  fte  fe'^r  f(^on» 

2Bie  ttiele  ^reunte  ^attt  3^r  35ater  ?  Sr  ^atk  »ier  %nun'^i. 

^ai  3fntant  unfere  ipiite  genom==  Ter  SDIufiHe^rer  1^at  fte  genome; 

men?  men. 

3Ber  Witt  tiefe  3flegenf^irme  tan::  2Bir  hxau6^m  feine  3ftegenf(^trme, 

fen  ?  njir  Brand) en  trei  (Btodc. 

^ennen  ©ie  He  8o^ne  beg  %x^k€  ?  3a,  icb  fenne  fie ;  fte  fmb  fe^r  fleif  ig. 

aBeld)er  3:ifd)Ier  ^atte  fciefe  a;tf(^e  3c^  ireig  nic^t;  id^  fenne  ben  3:tf(^^ 

unt)  (Stiible  gema(^t  ?  ler  nid)t. 

fatten  tie  33aume  flatter  ?  5^ein,  tie  Saume  )^atkn  2lejle,  ater 

feine  Slattir. 

^att:t  i§r  gifc^e  gefauft?  ^txn,  njir  fatten  nicbt  ®e(b  genug 

(enough). 


70 


PLURAL  OF   FEMININE  SUBSTANTIVES, 


LESSON   XXXVn.  2enwn   37. 

Plural  of  Feminine  Substantives. 

Obs.  — The  plural  of  the  dissyllabic  and  poUysyllabic  feminine 
.nouns  ends  in  n  or  en*  Some  feminine  monosyllables 
end  likewise  in  en.     See  p.  171,  Fourth  Declension. 

Examples. 


Tit  ^flan^c, 

T;ie  ©clegen^eit, 

Tit  Z^at, 

the  plant. 

the  occasion. 

the  action. 

Nom.    Tit  ^flanjctt 

Tit  ©etegen'^eitett 

Tit  Zi^attn 

Gen.      t)er  ^^flanjen 

ber  ^elegen^eiten 

ber  Z^atcn 

Dat.      fccn  ^flan^eu 

ben  ©elegen^eiten 

ben  Zl^attn 

Ace.      Me  ^flanjen 

bie  ©elegen^eiten 

bie  3::^atett 

Tit  ©tunbe,  the  hour 

Tit  g)fli(^t,  the 

duty 

tie  SJJauer,  the  wall 

bie  33Iume,  the  flower 

tie  @traf  e,  the  street 

ttjie  lange,  how 

long? 

Breit,  broad,  wide 

gefc^Iafen,  slept 

giitiq,  kind 

fiittf,  five 

»erfd)ieten,  different 

fec^^,  six 

erfiiUen,  to  fulfil 

Ubtn,  to  live 

Reading  Exercis3  XXXVII. 

^itl^  bu  bie  S3Iumen  ?  3(^  HeBe  bie  3io\tn  am  meiflen  (most  or  best). 
Tit  Wantm  be^  (B^lo\fti  ftnt  |od).  ^atte  bie  ©drtnerin  Slumen  ? 
Tit  ©traf  en  S3erUn^  fmb  treit  unb  fc^on.  2Gie  lange  V-f^  ^^  gefcbla^ 
fen  ?  Sr  ^at  fec^^  ©tnnben  gef(^lafen.  fatten  bie  ©(^iiler  i^re  ^luf;; 
gaben  gemadst  ?  Unfere  ^reunbinnen  fmb  ^eute  aBgereift.  (BinD  meine 
greunbc  gu  ^aufe?  5'Zeitt,  pe  finb  au^gegangen.  3c^  ^enne  fed)^ 
©(^njejlern,  pe  fInb  fe'^r  fc^bn.  ^atOemanb  meine  brei  gebern  genome 
mtn  ?  3a,  t^re  9licf)ten  I)akn  fie^enommen.  3^^  ^enne  biefe  imi 
%vautn  nicfet;  mx  (inb  |ic? 


PLURAL  or  NEUTER  MONOSYLLABLES.  71 

Theme  XXXVII. 

How  many  doors  has  the  house  of  the  uncle  /  It  has  four 
rooms  and  six  doors.  How  many  walls  has  that  castle  ?  I  have 
slept  five  hours.  How  long  has  the  German  slept  ?  He  has 
slept  six  hours.  To  whom  do  you  give  these  steel-pens?  I 
give  them  to  my  (female)  friends.  We  iulfil  our  duties;  but 
you  do  not  fulfil  your  duties.  I  love  my  aunts;  they  are  very 
kind.  The  streets  of  BerUn  are  broader  than  the  streets  of 
London.  Who  are  those  two  ladies  ?  They  are  my  neigh- 
bors {fern.). 

Conversation. 

@int  tcine  <S^meflern  ju  §aufe?  9lein,  f^e  ftnt  in  tern  3;^eater, 

2Bo  i|l  3^r  53ruter  ^arl  ?  (Sr  ijli  au^gegangen. 

(Sint  tie  ©tra^en  53erUn^  keit?  <3te  ftnt  keit  unt  fd^on* 

ipatte  SQil^elm  einen  (^todf  ?  Sr  ^attc  ^n?ei  ©tocfe. 

2Bie  lange  |at  ter  3ute  gefc^Ia^  (Sr  ^at  gwei  oter  trei  ©tunten 

fen  ?  gefd^Iafen. 

©int  tie  ?5arBen  ter  9lofen  sax^  (Sie  ftnt  fe^r  »erf^ieten. 

fdjieten? 

SjlterXeutfc^eeingiittger^J^ann?  Sr  ijl  ein  giitiger  9J?ann  unt  er^^ 

fiillt  immer  feine  5^flid)ten. 


LESSON   XXXVIIL           ^ettxvn  38. 

Plural  of  Monosyllabic  Neuter 

Substantives. 

Obs. — Many  monosyllabic  neuter  nouns  form  their  plural  by 
adding  tt,  and  modify  t^e  radical  vowel.  (See  p.  170, 
1 1  •    Third  Declension). 

ExAMMiES. 

l:ag  ^int,                  2:a(5  IDorf, 
the  child,                  the  village. 

the  house. 

Nom.    !3^te  Winter                2)ic  l^orfer 
Gen.     ter  Winter                 ter  X^brfer 
Dat.      ten  .^intern                ten  Dorfem 
Ace.      tie  Winter                  tie  T)ijrfer 

T;ie  ^dufer 
ter  ^dufer 
ten  ^dnfem 
tie  ^dufer 

72  PLURAL  OF  NEUTER  MONOSYLLABLES. 


Da«  natt,  the  leaf 

Die  flatter,  the  leaves 

Mi  33uc^,  the  book 

tie  53u(ter,  the  books 

lai  &lai,  the  glass 

ta^  ^le4t,  the  dress,  robe 

DaiJ  33oIf,  the  nation 

ta^  9Zeft,  the  nest 

nai  Si,  the  egg 

ta^  3;^al,  the  valley 

Da5  ipu()tt,   1  the  fowl 
tie  ^enne,   j  the  hen 

ta^  33anb,  the  ribbon 

xot^,  red,        ivcip,  white 

^iibfc^,  pretty,  nice 

»erIoren,  lost 

(egen,  to  lay 

g^e^n^seen 

Reading  Exercise  XXXVIII. 

Die  Winter  fatten  jmci  ©Idfer,  abcr  |ie  ^a6en  fte  jerbroi^en,  Die 
^leiDer  ter  .Winter  finD  ^erriffen.  3ft  ^te  ipenne  unferer  5flad)6arin 
mx^  oDer  rotb  ?  Da3  J^al  ift  oiriiit.  Die  griinen  33anrer,  Die 
^u^ner  legen  Sier.  5Co  ift  t)a5  9?eft  ter  ipenne  ?  Da^  tcutfd^e  SBoIf, 
Die  ©o^ne  meine^  9^acbbar5  finD  imaitiij»  "^fldm  S3itd)er  fmt  alt; 
tie  teinigen  fint  neu.  Der  .^ijnii}  l)at  i>icle  ^djlojjer  unt  »ie(e  33aume. 
Die  2: pier  unferer  Sante^  fint  fc^r  fcton.  Die  ^nakn  ^akn  trei 
9lefter  gefunten.    Die  fi}iJnfien'S3aume  pbcn  tie  fd}bnften  53latter. 

Theme  XXXVIII. 

How  many  glasses  has  the  servant  broken  ?  He  has  broken 
three  glasses.  Your  ribbons  are  not  very  nice.  Do  j^ou  like 
the  red  ribbons  ?  The  ribbons  of  my  niece  are  green,  white 
and  red.  Those  nitions  are  very  happy  ;  they  have  a  good 
emperor  and  a  good  empress.  Have  you  seen  the  valleys  of 
Switzerland  (ter  (Bri^ivei^)  ?  These  three  boys  have  lost  their 
books.     The  eggs  of  the  hens  lio  (liiQtn)  in  the  nests  (dot.). 

Conversation. 

SiJen  tie  Sngldntcr  (Sier  ?  Bit  t\^m  »ielc  Sier, 

Jpaben  tie  33dume  3^red  ®arten3    3^/  fie  \)ahm  griine  S3tdtter» 

33ldtter  ? 
fatten  (Sie  tie  Jpler  ter  <B6^nm]    ^a,  fte  fint  fek  fdjijn, 

gefe^en  ? 


PLURAL  OF  ADJECTIVES  PRECEDED  LY  AN  ^RTICLE. 


78 


2egen  tie  ^ut)ner  Sier  ?  Xie  ^ut)ner  legeu  jeDen  Za^  trci 

Sier. 
©ittD  tie  .^leicerCcr  Winter  §ubfdj?    9^ein,  fie  fmr)  alt  unt>  gerriffen. 
Sjl  liefer  Solf  gliicflic^  ?  3a,  e^  ift  ein  fe^r  gliidUc^e^  ^olh 


LESSON    XXXIX. 


^Ocftioii    39, 


Plural  of  Adjectives,  when  preceded  by  an  Article. 

Obs.  I. — ^The  plural  of  adjectives,  when  preceded  by  an  article 
or  some  word,  replacing  it,  has  the  same  termination 
as  masculine  substantives,  ending  in  c.  See  Lesson 
XXXV. 

Examples. 


Nom. 

Xie  guten  flatter 

!Die  rotten  (£triimpfc 

Gen. 

ter  guten  33Iatter 

ter  rot()en  ©triimpfc 

Dat. 

ten  guten  Slattern 

ten  rotben  <Striimpfen 

Ace. 

tie  guten  33Iatter 

tie  rotten  ©triimpfc 

Ta&  3^funt,  the  pound 
ta^  ^aar,  the  pair 
ta^  Xu^^ent,  the  dozen 
tie  ^antfd)ut)e,  the  gloves 
tie  ^ijrf^e^the  cherry 
ter  <8torc^,  the  stork 
ter  ^ab,  the  neck 
ein   ^funt   S^dtx,  a  pound 
of  sugar 


£ic  Sae,  the  yard,  ell 

ta3  ipemt,  the  shirt 

ta^  Ju^,  the  cloth 

tie  (Striimpfe,  the  stockings 

tie  2eute,  the  people 

tie  Seinmant,  the  linen 

^untert,  a  hundred 

trage,  lazy 

e^rltcb,  honest 


Obs.  II. — With  the  future,  the  infinitive  is  placed  last. 
Future  Tense  op  ^  a  B  e  n» 


3(^i»erte  ^aUn,  I  shall  have 
tu  njirjl  \^ahtn,  thou  wilt  have 
er,  flc  (e^)  mirt  ^akn,  he,  she 
(it)  will  have 


SBir  werten  ^aben,  we  shall  have 

©lemerten^aben,  3 

fie  ttjerten  ^kn,  they  will  have 


74  ruTURE  TENSE  OP  ^ttbcH  AND  fcim 

Future  Tense  op  feiit. 

3c^  Werbc  fein,  I  shall  be  S3ir  ttjerben  fcin,  we  shall  bo 

bu  wirjt  fein,  thou  will  be  i:^r  mercet  fein,    )  .,, , 

cr  (jle,  es)  »lrt  fein,  he  (she,  it)  @ie  werten  fein,  |  ^^^  ^       ® 

will  be  fte  ttjcrten  fein,  they  will  be 


Reading  Exercise  XXXiX. 

3(^  tt>ert)e  S3rob  ^aben.  Du  wirfl  SQctn  ^abeit,  Caroline  tt)irt)  eln 
^funt  3wcfer  ^aben,  <5ie  iPtrb  ein  ^aar  ©triimpfe  ^aben.  2Bir 
mxltn  s»el  X)u^ent>  ipemben  ^a6en,  3^r  »ert)et  (or  ®te  tt)erten) 
trcl  Paar  ipantfd)u^e  ^aben.  Die  ©critter  werben  trei  Sticn  3:u(^ 
^akn,  3<^  w^rbe  fieiJtS!'^  f^ i«»  ^^^^  bw  SJlorgen  in  Berlin  fein  ? 
3:rdge  2eute  njerten  immer  arm  fein*  SBirt)  bein  Dntel  gu  ^anfe  fein? 
3c^  Uebe  lit  n)ei§en  S^ofen,  Xie  guten  ipanbfdju^e  mxUn  immer 
t^euer  (dear)  fein*  2)ie  ^irfc^en  wer^en  balt>  (soon)  reif  fein,  ADie 
©tbrc^e  ^abm  lange  §alfe,    ipafl  tu  Seinnjanl)  gefauft  ? 

Theme  XXXIX. 

He  will  have  three  pounds*  qf'f  coffee.  What  do  you 
want?  I  want  four  yards  of  cloth.  I  will  have  also  (a)' 
hundred  yards  of  linen.  I  shall  have  one  dozen  shirts.  These 
storks  have  the  longest  necks.  These  little  books  will  be  as 
useful  as  those  big  books.  The  good  fathers  will  love  their 
children.  '^^Tiere  have  you  bought  those  beautiful  ribbons? 
Give  to  the  poor  people  some  bread  and  butter.  The  large 
houses  will  be  dearer  than  the  small  houses. 

Conversation. 

SBirfl  tu  na(^  Berlin  reifcn?  5flein,  i^  werbe  gu  ^awfe  Heiben. 

SSerten  ©ie    flei^ig  unt   e^rlic^    3c^  «>crt>c  e^  fein. 
(honest)  fein? 

*  The  words  9)funb>  ^aar  and  Du^enb  are  invariable  when  preceded  by 
a  number, 
t  Of,  after  names  of  measure  and  weight,  is  not  expressed  in  German. 


FEMININE  NOUNS  :  PLURAL  IN  C. 


75 


$at  bcr  (Stor^  einen  ^aU  ? 
SBerten  @ic  gutc^  2:u(^  ^aben? 

2Bic  »iele  ^emten  ^at  ter  arme 

^nabc  ? 
4)at  tcr  3utc  tic  langen  23ricfe 

gelefen  ? 
SBerfcen  tie  gropen  3intmer  Bcjfcr 

fein  a(g  tie  Heinen? 


^lein,  mtr  merten  2le)jfel  (apples) 

laben, 
Sr  ^t  einen  fe^r  langen  ipaU» 
3(^  merte  ta6  Befle  a:u^  ^aUn. 
t)it  Stte  Xuc^  !o(let  fiinf  J^lc^ 
®r  ^at  fiinf  oter  fec^g  4>cmtctt^ 

Sr  ^at  jtc  aHe  gelefen, 

Xie  grogen  3immer  tuerten  tjiel 
beflfer  unt  angene^mer  fein. 


LESSON   XL.  2eftwn  40* 

Feminine  Nouns  adding  e  in  the  Plural,* 

Obs.  L — Some  feminine  nouns  form  their  plural  by  modifying 
the  radical  vowel  and  adding  e  only. 

Examples. 


Die  man^, 

J^ie  Sraut, 

!Die  Sau(l,        tit  ^m% 

the  mouse 

the  bride 

the  fist            the  art 

Norn.    'Cie  Wdu\t 

!Die  SBrdute 

Die  gdnfle        Die  ^iinjlc 

Gen.     ter  Wavi]t    * 

ter  33rdute 

ter  gdujie         ter  ^iinjle 

Dat.     ten  3)^dufen 

ten  SBrduten 

ten  Sduflen       ten  ^iinfien 

Ace.      tie  5JJdufe 

tie  33rdute 

tie  gdujie         tie  ^iinjle 

Tit  (Btalt,  the  town 

!Eie  ©tdtte,  the  towns 

tie  ^a&it,  the  night 

tie  9ld(^te,  the  nights 

tie  2uft,  the  air 

tie  Siifte,  the  airs 

tie  Jpant,  the  hand 

tie  ^dnte,  the  hands 

tie  ®an^,  the  goose 

tie  ®dnfe,  the  geese 

tie  ^\xi,  the  walnut 

tie  5fliiJTe,  the  walnuts 

tie  ^ui  the  cow 

tie  ^ii^e,  the  cows 

bie  Srucit,  the  fruit 

tie  t^riic^te,  the  fruits 

See  page  171,  Fourth  Declension. 


76  FEMININE  nouns:  irbegular  plural. 

Obs.  n. — The  words  Gutter   and   2:  o  (^  t  e  r  modify  their 
vowel  in  the  plural,  but  do  not  add  c. 

tit  Sautter,  the  mother  Vu  ^ixtttx,  the  mothers 

fcie  2;oc^ter,  the  daughter  bie  2;5c^ter,  the  daughters 

tie  ^elier,  the  feather  ber  9^u§baum,  the  walnut-tree 

ter  ^mol^ntx,  the  inhabitant  »erfd?ieben,  different 

fett,  fat  Piegen,  to  fly 

jongen,  to  catch  im  (contraction  of  in-b em)  ♦ 


Reading  Exercise  XL. 

i)ic  Semo^ncr  grofer  ©tabte  unb  Heiner  Xorfer  fmb  fe|r  »crfc^ie:s 
ttn  (different) »  ^ie  ©tragen  ber  <BtMt  33erUn  un^  faxi^  ftnb 
keit,  Die  rcid^ften  Seute  Jt>oI)nett  nic6t  immer  in  ben  gro§ten  ©tabten, 
(Sinb  bic  5^dc^te  langer  im  SBinter  al^  im  ©ommer?  2^ie  ^a^en  fan:; 
(5Crt  Wdn\t.  Die  ?5^ucl)te  ber  S3flume  ttjcrben  kib  (soon)  reif  fein, 
Diefe  ^ii^e  ftnb  fett,  abtx  unfere  (55dnfe  tuerben  fetter  fein.  Die  guten 
2;ijj|ter  unferer  ^la^krin.  3d)  ^Be  gwei  ^dnbe  uxio  pvd  %ii^c, 
^ahn  @ie  bie  Hcinen  ^a^en  gefe^en  ?  SSo  fmb  bie  25i3gel  ?  @ie 
Rnb  in  ben  ^dflgen,     ®ekn  ©ie  biefe  ^Briefe  Sl^en  3;iJdjtern» 

Theme  XL. 

The  monkeys  have  four  hands.  What  have  you  there 
(ba)?  I  have  two  mice.  Are  the  cherries  ripe?  No,  they 
will  be  ripe  soon.  The  geese  have  feathers.  I  like  the  fat 
geese.  The  fruit(s)  of  the  trees  will  be  ripe.  The  walnuts 
are  very  good.  The  cows  are  not  so  big  as  the  oxen.  The 
gardener  will  have  five  cows.  The  inhabitants  of  these  vil- 
lages will  have  many  cows  and  geese.  The  walnuts  are  the 
fruit  (s)  of  the  walnut-tree.  These  daughters  love  their 
mothers. 

Conversation. 

Sangen  bie  SWdufe  bie  ^a^cn  ?         S^ein,  bie  ^at;en  fangen  bic  SJJdufe* 
So  (liegen  bie  35bg;I?  Die  3SbgeI  flicgen  in  ber  2uft. 


NEUTER  NOUNS  I  PLUEAL  IN  C. 


77 


2iekn  ©ie  tie  gro^ett  (Std^tc  ? 
2Bie  fmt  Die  ©tra^ert  tiefer  @tai)t? 
SJBertet  i^r  ®dnfc  ^abcn  ? 
SBa^  l^aUn  tie  ®dnfe  ? 
2Cie  oiele  ipdnte  ^aicn  bie  2lffcn  ? 


9letn,  i(^  lieBc  fcic  flcinen  X;brfcr, 
@ie  finb  keit  unb  fdjbn* 
9leirt,  mtr  werben  ^ii^e  l^ahm^ 
@ie  ^aben  langc  ^ebern* 
©ie  Vben  »ier  ^dnbe* 
5^ein,  fie  )^a)>in  feine  ^inber* 


LESSON    XLl. 


2eftwn   41* 


Neuter  Nouns  adding  e  in  the  Plural.* 

Obs. — Some  neuter  nouns  form  their  plural  by  adding  e 
only,  t 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


the  float 

ber  gIo§e 
bcrt  %\o^m 
bie  t^Io^e 


Examples. 

Dad  ^ferb, 
the  horse 

Die  5)ferbc 
ber  ^ferbe 
bctt  ^ferbett 
bie  ^ferbe 


Dag'®ctct^ 
the  prayer 

Die  ®e6cte 
ber  (S^ebcte 
ben  ®ekten 
bie  ©efccte 


Dad  ^ferb,  the  horse 
bad  @c^af,  the  sheep 
bad  3tt^^f  the  year 
bad  J|ier^  the  animal 
la^  ®(^iif,  the  ship 
bad  ©(^n?ein,  the  pig 
ber  ^atxo\t,  the  sailor 
bie  SCoCe,  the  wool 
bie  ^aiji,  the  number 
bie  S'Za^rung,  food 


Die  ^ferbe,  the  horses 

bie  (Sd)afe,  the  sheep  {pi} 

bad  ©piet,  the  play,  game 

bad  c^eft,  the  copy-book 

bad  2:l)or,  the  gate 

bie  ^aare,  plur.  the  hair 

rein,  clean 

n?ic  alt,  how  old  ? 

Sa^Irei^^  numerous 


gefunb,  healthy 
tit^n,  ten,  SttJ^J^S^Q;  twenty  breijig,  thirty 

*  See  page  169,  9.  Third  Declension, 
t  The  dative  plural  always  adds  n. 


t8       IRREGULAR  PLURAL!  NEUTER  MONOSYLLABLES. 

Reading  Exercise  XLI. 

^er  i)eutf(^e  :^at  bret^tg  ^fcrfce,  sttjanjig  ©c^afe  unt»  aC^n  ^ii^c* 
'£)te  3:^ore  Ux  ©tdbte  flnb  offen*  (Sinl)  alle  J^iere  nii^lic^  ?  i)ic 
^la'^rung  ber  3;^iere  ijl  »erfd)iebctt.  Dcr  ®raf  l^at  aOe  feine  ^ferbe 
t)er!auft,  ^atte  er  »ielc  ^ferfcc  ?  (£r  ^attc  ge^  ^ferbc*  Sin  ^uU 
l^otte  flc  gefauft.  Die  S^icrc  faufen  SBaffer.  Die  ?0^atrofen  pnt)  auf 
(on)  ben  englifc^en  ©c^iffen*  Die  ^aare  ber  Winter  pnti  fc^warg* 
fiieben  Me  Winter  Me  ©piele?  Du  bi(l  ge^n  3a^re  alt,  id)  tucrbe 
gttjattsig  Sa^re  alt  fein.  2Cie  alt  ifl  biefe^  ©c^wein  ?  Die  reine  SBolIe 
ter  ©d^afe.  Die  ©ci^afe  unb  tie  5>ferte  (tnb  bie  aa^lreic^flen  2^iere» 
©inb  bie  S^ore  ber  ©tobt  offen* 

Theme  XLI. 

The  gates  of  the  towns  are  shut  (gef(^loj[en).  Have  you  any 
pigs?  The  horses  are  larger  than  the  sheep.  The  boys  like 
the  games.  Where  are  the  copy-books  of  your  pupils  ?  They 
are  not  very  clean.  The  sheep  have  wool.  We  eat  the  meat 
of  the  sheep,  of  the  oxen,  and  of  the  pigs.  The  meat  of  the 
sheep  is  better  than  that  (M^)  of  the  pigs;  it  is  healthier. 
The  ships  of  the  English  are  very  numerous. 

Conversation. 

iaUn  ©ie  ^ferbe  ?  9leitt,  akr  h)ir  tverbeti  je'^n  ©(i^afe 

^ben. 
©inb  bie  ^ii^e  ttu^H^er  aU  bie    Die  ^ii^e    finb    bie    nii^lic^jlen 

©d)tt)cine  ?  S^iere. 

SflbieSCotleber  ©c^afenii^lic^?     Die  SoUe  ber  ©(^afe   i(l   fe^r 

nii^lic^, 
©ittb  bie  §aare bed  ^inbeg  fc^warj  ?    ©ie  jinb  ttjei§. 
a:rinft  ber  iputrt)  SSaffer  ?  SlEe  ^^iere  faufen  SBajfer. 

SBaiJ  |at  ber  3ube  gefauft?  @r  ^at  neue  i^emDen  ge!auft» 

^aUn  ©ie  bie  ©(^iffe  ber  Sngldn^    2^  ^U  »iele  ©d^iffe  gefe^en. 

ber  gcfe^en  ? 
2Cie  alt  fmb  ©ie  ?  3^  Mn  swanaig  ^a^xt  alt. 


IRKEGULAB   PLURAL!   MASCULHra   MONOSYLLABLES. 


79 


LESSON    XLn. 


Scfttott   42* 


Some  Masculine  Nouns  with  an  Irregular  Plural.* 

Obs. — Some  masculine  monosyllabic  nouns  form  their  plural 
by  modifying  the  radical  vowel  and  adding  er. 


Examples: 

Tin  Seib, 
the  body 

"Der  ®ei^ 
the  spirit 

t)tx  Drt, 
the  place 

^er  SRant, 
the  edge 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 

^Die  Seiber 
ter  2eiber 
ten  iiihtxn 
tie  Seiber 

^ie  ©cij^er 
ter  ©eifter 
ten  ©eijlern 
tie  ©eifter 

!Die  Derter 
ter  Derter 
ten  Dertern 
tie  Derter 

!£)ic  9ldnter 
ter  Planter 
ten  SHdntern 
tie  9ldnter 

2)er  ^ann,  the  man 

ter  SCurm,  the  worm 

ter  3SaIt),  the  forest,  wood 

^ott,  God 

ter  Sfleic^t^um,  (the)  wealth 

ter  ^eite,  the  heathen 

Sjlelleic^t,  perhaps 


T)ie  SJ^dnner,  the  men 
tie  SOBiirmer,  the  worms 
tie  SdlDer,  the  forests 
tie  ©otter,  the  gods 
tie  9leid)tl)umer,  (the)  wealth 
aUmdd)tig,  almighty. 
(lerMlc^,  mortal 


Reading  Exercise  XLIl. 

T)ie  (SJiJtter  ter  ^eiten  fint  fe()r  sal^Ireic^.  '^tin  Dktm  fcatte  einen 
gro§en  0leiAt^um.  ®eben  (Bit  tiefcn  armen  3)^dnnern  33roC  unD 
^dfe.  greiJenf  (eat)  tic  SBiirmer  tie  5Sbgel?  S3ir  fennen  tie 
Sfleic^tpmer  ter  ^onigin.  2Bem  ge^bren  tiefe  SBdtcer  ?  @ie  ge^bren 
tern  reid^en  9lad)6ar.  iperr  ^iitler  ^at  atle  feine  Steic^t^iimer  loerloren. 
Die  Seiber  ter  ^Kenfc^en  fint  fterblic^  (mortal),  aber  tie  ©eelen  [int 
unfterHic^.  SCo  teBen  tie  SCiirmcr?  ©int  tie  ©otter  ter  ^eiten  aU^ 
mdi^tig  ? 


*  See  page  166,  Third  Declension  (Exception  III.). 
t  The  word  freffen  (to  eat)  is  applied  only  to  aminalt. 


80 


PLURAL  OP  MASCULINE  AND  NEUTER  NOUNS. 


Theme  XLII. 

The  worms  live  in  the  ground  (earth).  Do  the  worms  eat 
(frejjen)  birds?  No,  the  birds  eat  worms.  Have  the  gods 
wealth  ?  The  count  has  lost  his  wealth  (plur.).  The  gods 
of  the  heathens.  These  men  have  taken  my  gold  watch. 
Do  you  know  these  Enghsh  men  ?  Had  your  uncle  any 
woods  ?  No,  the  rich  count  has  large*  woods.  The  beautiful 
horses  belong  to  those  poor  men.  God  hears  (§brt)  the 
prayers  of  the  poor  people. 


Conversation. 


Softnbttc^Sbgel? 
2Ber  ^at  meine  golcene  U^r  Qt^ 
nommen  ? 

^ennen  ® ie  tiefe  SOIanner  ? 

5Qem  gc^ren  tiefc  Scatter  ? 

©int)    tie    Scikr   ter  ?i}?enf(^en 

fterMid)? 
<Sinc  t)ie  hotter  ter  ^eitcn  alt;? 

ttidd)tig  ? 


8te  fmb  in  ten  5Baltem. 

3d)  ^abe  jirei  9)^dnner  in  ^^xtm 

3immergefel)en;  ^kM6>t\)ahn 

tiefe  '^i)ve  U^r  genommen. 
3a,  id)  fenne  fic ;  fte  mo^^nen  in 

tent  ^aufe  metne^  9lQd)bar^. 
©ie  ge^oren  tern  reid)en  ^^teunrc 

unfere^  5?ater^. 
3ci,  tie  Seiber  jint  fterMidj,  ahv 

tie  ©eelen  ftnt  unfterHid). 
5flein,  aberunfer  ©ottift  allmdc^tig. 


LESSON   XLni. 


2ettwn   m. 


Plural  of  Masculine  and  Neuter  Nouns  ending  in  cr, 
ci,  en,  j^cn  and  (cin. 

Obs. — MascuHne  and  neuter  substantives  ending  in  cr^  tt, 
en,  ^Ctt  and  (fin,  have  the  same  termination  in  the 
cases  of  the  plural  as  in  the  nominative  singular,  but 
generally  modify  their  radical  voweLf 

*  Translate  grope  (see  Less.  49). 

t  Words  in  ot  come  under  this  rule.    See  page  166,  First  Declension. 


PLURAL   OF    MASCULINE   AND   NEUTER   NOUNS. 


81 


Vtx  3Sater, 
the  father 

Nom.  2^ie  35atcr 

G-en.  "ter  ^dter 

Dat.  ben  35dtem 

Ace  tie  S3dter 


Examples. 

X)er  3SogeI, 
the  bird 

ber  25bgel 
ten  5SbgeIn 
tie  SSogel 


^er  ©arten, 
the  garden 

T)k  (3Mm 
ter  ®drten 
ten  ©drten 
tie  ©drten 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


X;a^  ?!)Zdtc^ert, 
the  girl 

Tk  ?0^dr»c^en 
tcr  9Jldtd)en 
ten  "i][Jidt)C^en 
tie  ^dtc^en 


Dcr  ^Sdcfer,  the  baker 
ter  Sbffel,  the  spoon 
ter  ^tiigel,  the  wing 
ta^  ^Qleffer,  the  knife 
filbem,  silver  (adj.) 
fc^arf,  sharp         nur,  only 


'DaiJ  ^intlein, 
the  little  child 

^ie  ^intlein 
ter  ^intlein 
ten  ^inttein 
tie  ^intlein 

Vtv  ©tiefel,  the  boot 
ta^  ^intlein,  the  little  child 
me^rere,  several 
wenigc,  few 
njeife,  wise 
l^oren,  to  hear 


Reading  Exercise  XLIII. 

Unferc  SBdter  ttjaren  alt.  Sie  Siebe  ter  55dter  unt  ter  3!)?utter» 
Diefer  ©drtner  |at  amei  ®drten,  mir  werten  eincn  ®arten  ):)abm.  "Lit 
3?5ge(  leben  in  ter  2uft  (air).  So  m^nt  ter  33d(fer?  SCir^aben 
feinc  iBdrfer  in  tiefer  ©tatt.  T:iefe  5J?di}d^en  fmt  tie  2:oc^ter  te^ 
33dcfcr3.  l:ie  m^t)  ^at  tie  £otfe(  unt  tie  ^effer  sertroc^en.  ^ahcn 
tie  356j3et  ^(iigel  ?  ^a6t  i^r  gottene  oter  ftlberne  25ffe(?  Sir  ^a6en 
mekere  Sruter,     3^r  ^H  nur  ft^arfe  'iJ}Ze|Jer. 

Theme  XLIII. 

The  fathers  are  wiser  than  the  sons.     Where  are  Charles's 
brothers?      How  many  brothers  has  he?      He  has    four 
brothers.     Has  she  (any)  sisters?     She  has  only  two.     The 
6 


82 


IBREGULAR   PLURAL:    MASCULINE  NOUNS. 


gardens  of  the  queen  are  beautiful.  These  bakers  are  poor. 
The  birds  have  wings.  The  tailors  make  (mac^en)  coats;  the 
shoemakers  make  boots  and  shoes;  the  watchmakers  make 
watches.  The  servant  has  lost  only  four  gold  spoons  and 
two  silver  knives. 


Conversation. 


2Ber  [tnb  tiefe  jmei  iUlatdjcn  ? 
ipat  ter  Partner  ijiele  Sfcl  ? 


©ie  fmb  Mc  2;od)tcr  be^  U^rmac^er^. 

Sr  ^at  nur  einen  Sfet,  aBer  er  1^(d 

i)icr  ^ferbc. 

2Cic  toieic  Sacfer  flnt  in  fciefen    3n  ben  I^ijrfcm  ptib  nur  ircnige 

Xiorfern  ?  33acfer,  akr  in  ben  ©tattcn  jint) 

toiele. 
itcnncn  ©ic  bic  Sriibcr  be«  ©rafcn  ?    3<i/  f f  ^«t  i'^^i  SBriibcr. 
SCerbenbieipaufer  genflcr:^aBen?    3<i,   pe    n^erbm   met)rcrc  t^cnjicr 

l^aben. 
2Bic  ijieic  ©(|nciber  l^akn  ©ie?      3c^  ^^  Jtuf  fiwen  @d)neiber* 


LESSON  XUY. 


2eftwn  44» 


Irregular  Formation  of  the  Plural  of  Masculine 
Substantives.* 

Obs. — Some  masculine  nouns  ending  in  tt,  cl  and  av,  form 
their  plural  by  adding  n  ;  words  in  ur  add  en. 


Examples. 

2:er  <BtaM,      'Lev  ®e»attcr, 
the  sting    the  god-father 

Norn.  Die  <Bta&ieln  !Die  ©e^attem 

Gen.  bcr  ©tad^eln  ber  ®e»attem 

Dat.  ben  ©tad^eln  ben  ®ei)attem 

Ace.  ble  ©tac^eln  bie  ®e»attem 


Xer  SJIu^fcI,    !rer  S3a{er, 
the  muscle  the  Bavarian 

T)u^uMn  ^^ieSaiem 

ber  5!)Zu^!eIrt  ber  33aiern 

ben  SJlugfeIn  ben  Saiern 

bie  'MuMn  bie  33aiem 


*  See  page  167,  First  Declension  (Exceptions). 


IKBEGULAR  PLURAL:  MASCULINE  NOUNS.  83 

!Der  33auer,  the  peasant  Die  58auern,  the  peasants 

tcr  55etter,  the  cousin  Me  53ettern,  the  cousins 

bcr  5^ad)6ar,  the  neighbor  tie  ^ad^jhavn,  the  neighbors 

Ux  ^antoffct,  the  slipper  tie  i^antoffeln,  the  slippers 


Reading  Exercise  XLIV. 

Die  S5cttem  imfered  ©eoatterg  jtnt)  33auern.  Unfer  9la^&ar  ijl  eiit 
23aier,  feine  5^ad)6ant  fine  33aiem.  Jpaben  tie  9lofen  (Stad>e(n? 
5flein,  tie  Stofen  :^aben  ^^ornen  (thorns).  5Bo  fint  unfere  ^antoffeln? 
!Die  ©(^u^ma^er  ma^en  (make)  ^antoffeln,  3enc  ?!Kdnner  )^abm 
Par!c  SJ^u^teln.  Die  S3aiern  pn^  ^ic  ■^^i^^"  53auern.  2Cir  ttjcrten 
tie  ©arten  ter  (SeDattem  faufen^ 

Theme  XLIV. 

I  am  a  peasant  These  men  are  peasants,  they  have  lands 
and  forests.  This  house  belongs  to  our  neighbors.  Your 
neighbors  are  my  best  friends.  Here  is  your  shoemaker: 
he  brings  your  shppers.  These  are  aU  my  riches.  The  rich 
count  has  many  houses,  gardens,  fields  and  forests.  The 
fishes  like  (the)  worms.  Are  these  men  Frenchmen?  We 
have  bought  horses,  oxen,  cows  and  calves.  Do  you  want 
my  slippers  ?    Yes,  Sir. 

Conversation. 

^aBctt    tie  53auern    einc  5flid)te  ^m,  fte  ^abeit  trei  3Settem. 

(niece) ? 

©int  tie  9la(^6artt  teinc^  (Seoat^  9Zein,  fie  ftnt  fe^r  rei(^. 

terg  arm? 

ipafl  tu  teine  ^antoffeln  gefuttten  ?  @ie  ftnt  Bei  tent  "S^u^mac^er, 

ipat  jener  ^ann  ftarfe  ?i)iu^!e(tt  ?  S'Zein,  fcine  ^u^feln  ftnt  fd^wac^. 

kxibt  i^r  cinen  ^Setter  ?  ^nn,  aBer  tt>ir  njerten  trei  5Sctteni 

^a&en. 

©int  tiefe  9}Zanner  granaofen  ?  X)iefe  banner  fint  33aiem» 


84 


ADJECTIVES   AND   PARTICIPLES    USED    SUBSTANTIVELY. 


LESSON    XLV  ^  2eftwn  43* 

Adjectives  and  Participles  used  as  Substantives. 


Obs. 


I. — Adjectives  and  participles,  when  used  substantively 
are  declined  like  adjectives,  varying  according  as, 
they  are  preceded  by  the  definite  (see  Observation, 
Lesson  XXVII)  or  indefinite  article  (see  Observa- 
tion, Lesson  XXIX). 


1)er  0let|'ence, 
the  traveler 

Nom.  Xer  JReifenbc 

G-en.  t)e^  9leifent»en 

Dat.  tern  9leifen5en 

A.CC.  ten  5leifen5en 


Examples. 
Plural. 
Die  9letfenben, 
the  travelers 

l^ie  S^eifenten 
ter  9letfenben 
ten  9leifent)en 
tie  3fletfenten 


Sin  ?^remter, 
a  stranger 

©in  ^^remrer 
cine^  ?5remten 
cinem  gremten 
einen  f^remten 


Obs.  II. — Tliere  being  no  plural  to  the  indefinite  article  the 
adjectives  and  participles,  when  used  substan- 
tively, take  the  inflexion  of  the  definite  article. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


Examples: 


@itt  ©efangener, 
a  prisoner 

©efangene,  prisoners 
(S^efangener,  of  prisoners 
©efangenen,  to  prisoners 
©efangcne,  prisoners 


Sin  3fleifcnter, 
a  traveler 

Sleifente,  travelers 
9leifenter,  of  travelers 
3fleifenten,  to  travelers 
Sleifente,  travelers 


X)cr  Sflcifcnte,  the  traveler 
ter  ^remte,  the  stranger 
tcr  (Sefanciene,  the  prisoner 
ta3  (53cfan3ni§,  the  prison 


Sin  SBetienter,  a  servant 
ein  ©efantter,  an  ambassador 
ein  (SJele^rter,  a  learned  man 
ter  ^Bwcfc'^antler,  the  bookseller 


THE  INTERKOGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  85 

Reading  Exercise  XLV. 

Sin  fremfcer  3fleifcnter  ^at  ten  ©cfangenen  geka(^t  (brought). 
I^er  53ud)bdnller  fud^t  einen  ®elc^rten.  ^er  33e5ientc  te^  ^^efanbten 
ift  im  {contraction for  in  tern)  ©efangnig.  S^iefer  ^ut  ge^ijrt  Dent 
i^remten.  ^mtx  9^leifenDe  ifl  ein  ^remDer.  ^ennen  ©ie  ten  3flei^ 
fenten?  Sin  Sebienter  U^  @rafen  ift  (has)  ange!ommen.  2^rei 
(53efangene  [tnti  im  (5^fangni§.  ^mt  ^remten  ftnD  9^ei|'ente»  T;er 
iBacfer  fd)i(ft  tiefe^  33rot)  tern  ©ele:^rten.  Xiefe  ©ele^rten  fint  33aiem. 
3^  ge'^e  mit  meiner  ©c^mefter  3n  nnferer  3:ante. 

Theme  XLV. 

Our  neighbor  is  a  learned  man.  These  learned  men  are 
Bavarians.  "WTio  is  this  stranger  ?  He  is  a  traveler.  Is  a 
learned  man  an  ambassador?  No,  but  this  ambassador  is  a 
learned  man.  The  booksellers  have  received  these  apples? 
To  whose  house  (or  to  whom)  are  you  going?  I  am  going 
(3cf^  ge^e)  to  my  aunt's  with  my  little  sister.  Where  is  the 
prisoner  ?  He  is  in  the  prison.  We  have  seen  a  stranger 
at  the  merchant's* 

Conversation. 

Ser  i|t  tiefer  ^rembe  ?  Gr  i[t  ter  8ot)n  unfere^  ©ete^rten. 

^ennen  (Sie  jenen  "^ann  ?  ^tin,  er  ift  ein  gremter. 

^a|l  bu  einen  ©ele^rten  gefe^^en?      5flcin,  aBer  x^  |aBc  einen  9leifen^ 

ten  gefe^en* 
S}o  ftnb  tie  ©efangenen?  ©ie  ftnt  in  tern  ®efangni§, 

@int  tie  Bremtennoc^  (still)  ^ier?    3^,  fie  merten  erj^  (only)    mor-- 

gen  akeifen. 
2Cer  wo'^nt  in  tirfcm  .^paufe  ?  (Ein  fremter  ®ele^rter» 


LESSON    XLVI.  ^cttion    ^6. 

Tlie  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

Obs.  I. — The  interrogative  pronouns  are  tucr,  who ;    tottg, 
what ;   tn clever,  which  (declined  like    the   definite 


86  INTEEEOGATIVE  PRONOUNS:  DECLENSION  OF  tt)  CT  AND  W  a  0« 

article) ;  and  )tia0  filr  cilt,  what  sort  or  kind  of? 
(of  which  only  the  indefinite  article  tin  is  de- 
clined). 

Declension  of  tocr  and  tiia0. 


Nom. 

mv,  who? 

xoai,  what? 

Gen. 

m^m,  whose? 

n?effm,  of  what? 

Dat. 

ftjem,  to  whom? 

^^,    )    to  what? 
""•''  1  what? 

Ace. 

mn,  whom? 

Obs.  n.— SBcr  and  nJtt§  are  used  with  verbs,  ttJCltjcr  and  ttial 
filr  tin,  with  substantives. 

!Dic  W6M,  (pi)  the  furniture  !Dcr  ginger^ut,  the  thimble 

ta^  Xn6!i,  (the)  cloth  gefc^lagen,  beaten 

tier  ©ulnen,  the  florin  gerufen,  called 

tic  Stle,  the  ell,  yard  !o(let,  costs 

mit  mir,  with  me  befhaft,  punished 

mit  S^nen,  with  you  (to  you)  no&i,  still         je^t,  now 


Reading  Exercise  XLVI. 

2Ca3  fur  ein  S3uc^  njoHen  @ie?  2Ca^  faqen  (say)  ©le?  SBcr 
fommt  tnit  ^^mn  tton  33erltn  ?  2Ben  l^aBen  ©ic  gerufen  ?  S3er  ijl 
jener  Sleifenfce  ?  Sr  ift  ter  9leffe  t>e^  Su(^^dnt(erg.  Unfer  3;ifdjter 
l^at  tiefc  iS^oBet  gcmaci^t.  2Bett  ^at  fcer  (Bd^neiDer  gerufen  ?  Sent 
ge^brt  tiefer  Garten  ?  gr  gcl)5rt  tern  ^rofeffor.  T;er  junge  3:ifc^Ier 
^at  tiefe  fci^bnen  ©tittle  unb  allc  Wokl  in  tiefem  ipaufe  gemad)t.  Ser 
^at  SBil^elm  gefdjtagcn  ?  Seffcn  3ftocf  ^aft  bu  aerriffen  ?  ^arlg  «Rocf 
ifl  gerriffen,  3(^  ^abe  teine  ©rammati!  bem  ^Robert  gelte|en.  2Bcm 
^at  i^rc  Souftne  i^ren  i^inger^ut  gelie:^en?  SBen  l)aBen  ©ie  eingela;^ 
ten  (invited)  ?    3(^  l^aBe  meine  Bejien  greunte  eingelaten* 

Theme  XLVI. 

"Who  has  made  this  beautiful  table  ?  The  old  joiner  has 
made  all  our  furniture.     Who  has  beaten  the  bookseller? 


AUXILIARY   VERB    ^alttll    COMPOUND   TENSES.  87 

The  learned  man  has  lent  me  a  book.  How  much  is  (ttJie  ttiel 
foftet)  a  yard  of  this  cloth  ?  To  whom  do  you  give  this  ring? 
Whose  thimble  is  this  ?  A  yard  of  this  cloth  costs  two 
florins.  Whom  hast  thou  punished?    The  son  of  the  prisoner. 

Conversation. 

2Cer  ijl  Jeiier  grembc  ?  Sr  ifl  ein  ©o^n  bed  (^tit^xttn* 

2Bej[ett  fRod  ijl  gerriffen  ?  !Eer  0lo(J  bed  2:ifc^Ierd. 

^at  ber  33ac!er  biefe  Wohd  gemad^t?  5^ein,  bcr  2;tf^ler  1:^at  (ic  gemac^t. 

Sent  gel^brt  biefer  ©tu^I  ?  Sr  ge^ort  metnem  ®ro§ttater. 

SCejfen  ginger^ut  :^a(l  bu  ?  3<^  ^<ii>c  ben  ^ingertjut   belner 

®ro§mutter. 

Sarum  l|at  er  bfe  Z^vm  aufge^;  Sr  ^at  bie  a:pren  unb  i^enjler  auf^ 

mac^t  (opened)  ?  gema(^t,  ttjeil  eg  tuarm  ifl, 

SBadfiir  ein33u^^aktt(Sie?  3(^     |ak    ©d^iaer'd  (SeHt^te. 


LESSON   XLVn.  2cftwn   47* 

Compound  Tenses*  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  §oktt^ 
TO  HAVE. 

Participle  Fast:  (Se^aH,  had. 

PERFECT  TENSE. 

3^  ^a^e  ge'^aBt;  I  have  had        SCir  ^Un  ge^aBt,  we  have  had 
bu  ^ajl  ge^abt,  thou  hast  had     i^r  ^aU  ge^aM,     )  you  have 
cr  (jte,  eg)  ^at  ge^abt,  he  (she,  ©ie  :^akn  ge^a^t,  I     had 
it)  has  had  fie  ^ben  ge^aBt,  they  have  had 

PLUPERFECT   TENSE. 

3(^  ^tte  ge^att,  I  had  had         SBir  fatten  ge^aH,  we  had  had 
bu  ^attefl  ge^aM,  thou  hadst  had  t^r  ^attct  ge|aM,     )  you  had 
er  (fie,  eg)  ^atte  ge^abt,  he  (she,  ©le  ^attm  ge^aBt, )      had 
it)  had  had  fic  fatten  ge^aBt,  they  had  had 

*  Compound  tenses  of  this  verb  are  formed  in  German  as  in  Engliah. 


88                    AUXILIARY   VERB  l^aBett:    COMPOUND    TENSES. 

Die  9ZaieI,  the  needle  !Die  Sigarre,  the  cigar 

fcic  ©tccfnatel;  the  pin  iB^tO^n,  to  show 

ta^  (5)emalt)e,  the  picture  aufgemac^t,  opened 


Reading  Exercise  XLVII. 

Sejyen  ^ut  ):^at  ter  ^remte  Qti^aht  ?  Sr  l)at  ben  iput  fce^  S3u(!^^dttbif 
ler^  ge^aBt.  ipattefl  bu  einen  ©tod  ge()abt  ?  3<^  ^iiBe  einen  ?^inger^ 
^ut  ge^abt,  aBer  ii^  ^ak  i^n  ijerloren,  2Ben  "^aft  r>u  gerufen  ?  SJTetne 
3;ante  l)at  ^mi  ©tecfita^eln  ge^abt,  aber  beine  iD^utter  ^atte  eine  5'Za5eI 
ge^bt,  ^attt  er  nictt  eine  (Etgarre  ge^abt  ?  SBir  ()aben  ein  ©ental^e 
ge^bt,  aBer  unfer  3?ater  ^at  e5  ^erfauft*  SBejJen  Singerpte  ftnD  tie0 
(these)?  3Bem  moKcn  ®ie  tiefe^  S3orterbud)  gekn?  ipatten  @ie 
ein  S3u(^  ge^aBt  ?    Sir  batten  eine  Sigarre  ge^^abt. 

Theme  XLYIL 

Have  you  pins  ?  No,  I  have  had  pins  and  needles,  but  I 
have  lost  them.  Have  you  had  cigars  ?  No,  we  shall  have 
cigars  Wednesday  (^ittn?0(^).  Had  you  taken  Robert's  gram- 
mar? That  tall  man  is  our  gardener.  What  have  those 
little  boys  had  ?  I  had  not  seen  the  king,  but  I  had  seen 
the  queen.  Whose  grammar  have  you  had?  I  have  had 
Robert's  grammar.  I  have  had  a  picture.  To  whom  will 
you  give  this  dictionary  ? 

Conversation. 

^at  fcer  ^Bwct'^anbler  55uc^er?  Sr  I)at  53uc^er  ge^^aBt,  aber  er  i^at 

fte  ij erf auft. 
^afl  t)U  eine  goltene  U^r  ?  3c^  ^attc  eine  filberne  U^r  ge^abt, 

aber  id)  i^ah  fte  ^erloren. 
^aben  8ie  ijiele  ©emalce  ge'^abt?    2Bir  fatten  nur  jwei  ©emdlne. 
^atkt  i^r  Gigarren  ge^abt?  2Cir  fatten  gute  Sigarren  ge^abt* 

ipaft  t)n  3Cein  ge^bt  ?  Sir  fatten  SBajfer  ge^bt. 

SBejfen  Sigarre  f)ahtn  8ie?  3 A  ^abt  feine  ©igarren. 

5Bem  jeigen  ©ie  tiefe^  ©emdice?     3(i)  tuerbe  e^  tern  ®elel)rten  jeigen. 
2CnlIfttuniireine(StecfnateIgeben?    3cb  ^<ib^  fie  alie  ^crlorcm 


AUXILIAEY   VERB   fettt:    COMPOUND   TENSES.  89 

LESSON  LXVm.  2emon  48. 

Compound  Tenses  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  ^cin,  TO  BE. 
Participle  Past :  ©  e  it>  e  f  c  n ,  been. 

PERFECT   TENSE. 

3c^  Mn  gemefen,  I  have  been  2Bir  ftnD  gewefen,  we  have  been 

tu  Bijl  gewefen,  thou  hast  been  i^r  feiD  gemefen,     ]  you  have 

er  (fte,  cd)  iftgemefen,  he  (she,  it)  @ie  ftnb  gcn?efen,    )      been 

has  been  pe  ftnt»  genjefen,  they  have  been 

PLUPERFECT   TENSE. 

^^  mar  gcwefen,  I  had  been        S3ir  iraren  gemefen,  we  had  been 
tuwdrflgewcfen,  thou  hadst  been  i^r  iraret  gemefen,    )  you  had 
er  ([ie,  e^)  itjar  gcmefen,  he  (she,  8ie  tuaren  getrefen, )      been 
it)  had  been  fte  ttjaren  gemefcn,  they  had  been 

l^a5  3:^eater,  the  theatre  tropin,  where  (whither)  ? 

^ag  Concert,  the  concert  traurtg,  sad 

HUig,  cheap  t^euer,  dear 

in^  (contraction  of  in  ta^)  im  (contraction  of   in  fccm) 


Reading  Exercise  LXVIII. 

3(^  BinHm  ©arten  gemcfen.  33ij^  bu  im  2:^eater  gchjefen  ?  gr  ijl 
in  ^Berlin  getrefen.  2Bir  fmD  auf  t)cm  S3att  (ball)  geitjefen.  3^^^ 
feit)  nid^t  imntfr  flet§tg  unc  aufmerlfam  getuefen.  ©inD  @ie  im  (£on^ 
cert  getrefen  ?  ©ie  ftnn  in  ter  8d^ule  gemefen.  3t^  iv<i^^  in  Sranf^ 
furt  gewefen.  SCarft  tu  in  33remen  {Bremen)  gewefen  ?  3^r  tt?arct 
in  SBien  (Vienna)  getrefen.  (Er  mar  im  3:^eater  gemefen.  SCaren 
©ie  traurig  gemefen  ?  (£^  war  teener  gemefen.  2Co  finb  ©ie  ge^ 
ttjefen?    3^^  53ruter  ift  in^  (Eoncert  gcgangen  {gone). 


90      ADJECTIVES  PRECEDING  SUBSTANTIVES  WITHOCT  AN  ABTICLB. 

Theme  XLVIII. 

Hast  thou  been  to  the  theatre?  No,  I  have  been  to  the 
concert.  Has  the  tailor  not  been  at  the  ball  ?  Have  you  ever 
(itmaU)  been  in  Berlin  ?  No,  we  have  only  been  in  Frank- 
fort. They  had  been  here.  Had  you  been  there?  We  had 
been  therea  twoj  hours.i  She  had  been  in  Berlin,  He  had 
been  iuj  Vienna*  twoj  daysj. 

Conversation. 

55t(l  bu  im  Garten  gewefen  ?  3c^  war  im  3:^eater  getuefen* 

©eib  i^r  im  Concert  gewefen  ?  9lein,  njir  njaren  in  33erUtt  gemefen^ 

3fl  er  in  2lmeri!a  geroefen  ?  ^tin,  er  ift  nie  in  Slmerifa  gcnjefcn* 

SSarum  Mfttu  fotrauriggewefen?  2^  iaBe  meinen  t^curen  Dnfct 

uertoren, 

fQc^in  ttjerben  ©te  gc^en  ?  2Bir  trercen  ing  (Eoncert  gc'^en. 

2Bie  lange  (how  long)  war  cr  in  (Sr  war  trei  ^ge  in  Slmerifa  ge^ 

Slmerifa  gemefen  ?  ttjefen,          ^ 


LESSON   XLIX.  Sefttott  49. 

Adjectives  Preceding  Substantives  without  an  Article. 

Obs.  — ^When  adjectives  accompanying  a  substantive  are  not 
preceded  by  an  article  or  by  a  demonstrative  pronoun, 
the  gender  of  the  substantive  must  be  expressed  by 
the  adjective,  which  takes  the  terminations  of  the 
(wanting)  article.  The  genitive  singular,  to  avoid  a 
repetition  of  g,  takes  n. 

Examples, 
masculine. 
Singvla/r.  Plural. 

Nom.  guter  SCein,  good  wine        gutc  SBetne,  good  wines 
Gen.    gutenSBeine^,  of  good  wine    guter  SSeine,  of  good  wines 
Dai    gittem  5Belne,  to  good  wine    gutcn  3Bcinctt,  to  good  wines 
Ace     guten  SJein,  good  wine        gutc  SBeine,  good  wines 


ADJECTIVES  PRECEDma  SUBSTAimVES  WITHOUT  AN  AETICLE.      91 
FEMININE. 


Plural. 

N.  fd^lcc^te  ©uppc,  bad  (poor)  f(^Ie(i^te  (Bvc^^^tn,  bad  soups 

soup 

G.  fc^Iec^ter  "Suppe,  of  bad  soup  f(^Ie^tcr  (Suppcn,  of  bad  soups 

D.  fc^lec^tcr  @uppc,  to  bad  soup  fc^Iec^ten  ^Bu'^'ptn,  to  bad  soups 

A.  \^\t^tt  ^uppe,  bad  soup  fc^lcc^te  ©uppeit,  bad  soups 

N  B  U  T  B  B. 

SingvZa/r.  Plural. 

Nom.  frifc^e^  33rob,  fresb  bread         atte  33udjcr,  old  books 
Gen.    frifc^en  33rotc^,  of  fresh  bread  alter  33u(%er,  of  old  books 
Dai    frifc^em  S3rote,  to  fresh  bread  alten  Siic^ern,  to  old  books 
Ace.    frif(^ed  33rot>,  fresh  bread        altc  S3u(^er,  old  books 

!Der  (Sc^^tnfen,  ham  gekatcn,  roast,  roasted 

tie  @uppe,  the  soup  gefod^t,  boiled 

bie  ®aBel,  the  fork  ttJilD,  wild 

ba^  Dbfl,  the  fruit  tjortrepc^,  excellent 

Me  9?ac^ricbt,  the  news  bicf,  thick 

fc^bne  33Iumen,  fine  flowers  c^  gieH,  there  is,  there  are 

junge  Seute,  young  people  giett  e5,  are  there? 

neue  ©c^u^e,  new  shoes  Jemal^,  ever 


Reading  Exercise  XLIX. 

3(^  "^aBe  guten  ©(^infen  unb  njarmc  ©uppe  o^t^alL  SBittfl  bu  Mte 
©uppe  ^ben  ?  S©ir  tuerben  fd^bne  33Iumen  ^aben.  Sr  liebt  tt)et§ed 
l^apier  unb  fd^warje  3:intc.  ®ebcn  ®ie  bent  Oleifenben  warmed 
SBaffer*  2Bo  ijlber  ©ciju^mad^er?  ipafcen  bie  ©drtner  reifed  (ripe) 
Dfefi?  ©iebt  eiJ  junge  Scute  in  biefer  ©tabt  ?  SCirb  ber  3:tfc^Ier  neue 
2)^oBeI  ^aben  ?  ^er  ©c^u'^mactjcr  t[l  in  granffurt  gemefen  unb  IcA 
neue  (Sd)ul)e  gebrac^t.  (E^  maren  mitte  9^ac^ric^ten  gemefen.  ©eka^: 
tene^  glctft^  ift  gefunDer  ftU  gefo(^te5  Slcif(^»  3c^  l^abe  fd)n?ar3e^  unb 
rotted  2;u(^  gefc^en. 


92 


AUXILIAKY  VERB   1^  ttB  ett.     FIRST  CONDITIONAL. 


Theme  XLIX. 

Wilt  thou  have  some  good  ham,  fresh  bread  and  good 
butter  ?  I  have  bought  white  and  red  paper.  We  have  eaten 
excellent  frmt.  The  gardener  has  drunk  very  strong  beer. 
My  father  Hkes  only  good  old  red  wine.  Have  you  green 
tea  or  black  tea?  I  want  good  coffee  and  sweet  milk.  Will 
the  boys  have  roast  meat  or  boiled  meat?  Here  is  good 
fresh  water,  and  also  good  white  wine. 

Conversation. 


^nUn  ® ie  gutcn  ^afc  ge'^abt  ? 

SBaren  <Bk  im  alten  2:^eater  Qt^ 

wefen? 
^at  unfer  U^rmac^er  gute  U^ren? 
®ibt  e^  9cf(^i(!te  Slcr^te  in  tiefer 

©tatt? 
9)^a(^ett  t)te  2;ifAter  newe  WoM  ? 
ZxinUn  ©ic  rotten  oJer  tueifen 

Sffieitt? 
3BotIen  ©ie    etne  gutc  (Eigarre 

rauc^en  (smoke)  ? 
2Ser!auft    ber   ^aufmann    guten 


SSir  fatten  guten  ^dfe  unb  frifc^c 

33utter» 
9^ein,  luir  ttjarcn  im  Concert  gc^: 

n?efcn» 
Sr  ^at  kjfere  U^ren  aU  ber3Mge» 
9lein,  geft^idte  Slerjte  leben  (Hve) 

itur  (only)  in  ieutfiilanb, 
(£ic  ma(^en  nur  neue  ^bbel. 
3c^  trinfe  weter  rotten  no(^  met§cn 

SCein,  ic^  trinfe  frifc^e^  SBajfer. 
^6>  raucfce  meter  gute  noi^  fc^Iec^te 

Sigarren. 
Sr  ijerfanft  fe^r  gnten  griinen  unb 

fc^margen  S^ee. 


LESSON   L.  «efttott  30* 

First  Conditional  of  l^aBen. 

3(^  tuiirbe  ^aBen  or  tcfj  ^iitte,  I  should  have 

tu  miirbefl  ^aBen  or  bu  Mttef^,  thou  wouldst  have 

er  wiirbe  ^aBen    or  er  ^atte,  he  would  have 

SBir  hjiirben  l^iaUn  or  toix  Wkn,  we  should  have 
i'^r  n?urbet  1:}aUn  or  i^x  ^tttt,  you  would  have 
fie  wiirben  ^kn    or  fie  fatten,  they  would  have 


AUXILIARY  VERBS  ^  a  &  C  tt  AND  f  C  t  tt,     FIRST  CONDITIONAL.  Do 

l^emt  i^  :^atte,  if  I  had  SBenn  n?ir  ptten,  if  we  had 

»entt  tu  ^atteft,  if  thou  hadst      trenn  i^r  ^dttet,     )  ^^        j^^^ 
tuenn  er  (fte,  e3)  ^atte,  if  he  (she,  mnn  @ie  fatten,  ) 
it)  had  mnn  fie  l)atten,  if  they  had 

First  Conditional  of  fcin. 

3(^  wiirCe  feitt  or  ii^  ludre,  I  should  bo 

tu  njiirtefl  fetn  or  tu  wdreft,  thou  wouldst  be 

er  wiirte  fein     or  er  mare,  he  would  be 

2Cir  miirtien  fein  or  h)ir  mdren,  we  should  be 
i^r  toiivUt  fein  or  i^r  mdret,  you  would  be 
(le  ttJiirten  fein  or  jle  mdren,  they  would  be 

^mn  {^  metre,  if  I  were  SBenn  mir  mdrcn,  if  we  were 

menn  bu  mdreft,  if  thou  wert  menn  i^r  mdret,     )  ^ 

menn  er  (fte,  e^)  metre,  if  he  (she,  menn  (Sie  mdren, ) 

it)  were  menn  fie  mdren,  if  they  were 

5)te  ^flaunte,  the  plum  Q^^^^^,  just 

tie  ©cfcta^t,  the  battle  tat)eln,  to  blame 

ba^  ®|)ieljeug,  the  plaything  l^ungrig,  hungry 

fro^,  glad  fcu^fti^/  thirsty 

Uttnht,  sorry  getrunfen,  drunk 


Reading  Exercise  L. 

^6^  miirbe  ®elD  ^ahn,  menn  ic^  nic^t  getrunfen  ^dtte.*  t)U  miirbejl 
nte^r  grennte  ^abm,  mjnn.tu  gerec^ter  mdrejl*  (£r  miirbe  ein  ^ferD 
l^aben,  menn  er  ©elD  genug  ^dtte.  Wdnt  @b^ne  miircen  au^ge^en, 
menn  fte  nid)t  unmol)t  mdren »  Unfer  3:if^Ier  miirte  nid)t  \o  arm  fetn, 
menn  er  flei^iger  mdre,  X;ie  3:ante  miirte  nic^t  fo  ^ungrig  fein,  menn 
fie  Stma^  gegejfen  ^tte.  SCiirten  ©ie  auf  ua^  Sanb  gel}en,  menn  ba^ 
^Better  ni^t  fo  fd^Iei^t  mdre  ?  Xit  ^inber  miirben  ©pielgeuge  :^aBen, 
menn  fte  fpielen  miirten.  "I:ie  ^remben  miirben  nidjt  fo  burj^ig  fein, 
menn  fte  5Bajfer  ^tten,    <Sie  miirben  ni(fct  tatetn, 

o  After  mm,  the  verb  is  placed  at  the  end.    See  Lesson  71. 


94        AUXILIARY  VERBS  ^  tt  B  etl  AND  f  C  (it.     FIRST  CONDITIONAL. 


Theme  L. 

I  should  be  glad,  if  I  had*  those  playthings.  Thou 
wouldst  be  thirsty.  He  would  be  hungry,  if  he  had  not 
eaten  (gegefcn) .  Would  you  be  sorry,  if  he  were  just  ?  She 
would  be  just.  If  thou  wert  glad,  he  would  be  glad  also. 
They  should  have  plums  and  apples,  if  they  were  ripe.  Would 
she  be  happier,  if  she  had  more  friends  ?  Would  they  be 
sorrj'-,  if  they  were  more  diligent  ?  They  would  have  won 
(ijewonnen)  the  battle. 

Conversation. 


SCiirfecfl  bu  (15elt>  f^ahn,  mnn  bein 

SSater  ju  ipaufe  mare  ? 
SBurten  (tc  fro^  fein,  njenn  fte 

tag  ©pielgewg  fatten  ? 
SBiirben  <Sie  SSein  trinlen,  wenn 

©ie  burftig  mxtn  ? 
SBitrbe  bie  3:ante  gered^  fein,  n?enn 

|Ie  ni(!^t  Irani  ware  ? 
SCiirbe  ter  ^aifer  gufrieben  fein, 

ttjenn  Ue  (Solraten  W  @(^ia(^t 

ni^t  ijerloren  ^tten  ? 
Siirben  @ie  mir  3^^  ^f^^  lei^en, 

menn  @ie  eg  fatten  ? 


2^  njiirbe  \jlel  ®e&  '^aBen^ 

©ic  ttJiirben  nie  tvieber  (never 

again)  Mxixht  fein. 
3c^    wiirbe    nur    frif(^e0,    lalted 

SSajfer  trinlen. 
©ie  jpurbe  fro^  unt  gereti^t  fein. 

Sr  ttJiirbc  fe^r  fro^  fetn. 


3c^  ttJiirbe  eg  3^tt«t  wit  35ergnugen 
(with  pleasure)  lei^en. 


•  After  mm,  the  verb  is  placed  at  the  end.    See  Lesaon  71. 


P»A.I^T    II. 

•     I  III  .    ■ 

LESSON  U.  2emvn  51. 

Conjugation  of  Eegular  (or  Modern)  Active  Verbs. 

Obs.  I. — ^All  German  verbs  end  in  the  infinitive  in  n*  or  ctl» 
By  removing  this  ending  we  find  the  root,  e.   g., 
taUi-n,  to  blame  ;  lob-eit,  to  praise. 
Note. — In  German  the  infinitive  when  after  another  verb  is  preceded 
by  jtt  ;  but  the  auxiliaries  of  mode  (see  p.  219),  also  finbett^  to  find ;  fit^Iett, 
to  feel ;  preit,  to  hear ;  blcibcit,  to  remain  ;  l^et^eit,  to  bid,  (not  to  call) ; 
l^clfcn»  to  help ;  le^rettf  to  teach ;  Umen,  to  learn,  and  maditn,  to  make, 
are  followed  by  the  infinitive  without  ju  ;  ^-  9>  ^^  ^ci^C  tiid^  e^  t^tttt^ 
I  bid  you  {to)  do  it,  but  ©r  fam  fie  ju  fe^en,  he  came  to  see  her. 
Obs.  n. — The  Present  Participle  is  formed  by  adding  tvh 
to  the  root ;  e.  g.,  Uhcnh ;  the  Past  Participle  by  pre- 
fixing gc  and  affixing  t ;  e.  g.,  geloit. 
Note. — The  prefix  ge  is  not  used  in  the  participle  past,  1.  With  all 
verbs  of  foreign  origin  ending  in  i(c)rettj  e.  g.,  marfd^iren*  to  march;  mav 
fc^irt  (not  gemarfd^irt);  2.  With  such  as  have  the  unaccented  prefix  btr  %tt 
tmp,  tnU  tx,  tJcr,  or  jcr ;  e.  g.,  kfuc^en,  to  visit ;  kfuc^t  (not  gebefuci^t).    ^ 
Obs.  III. — ^The  Imperatiye,  which  is  only  used  in  the  second 
person,  is  formed  in  the  singular  by  adding  e:  ^olc, 
fetch  (thou) ;  and  in  the  plural  by  adding  ct :  fuc^ct, 
seek  (ye),  or  etl  when  the  verb  is  followed  by  the 
pronoun  @ie:  loBetl  @ie,  praise  (you). 
Obs.  rV. — ^The  Present  tense  is  formed  by  adding  e  :  ic^  Me ; 
the  Imperfect  by  adding  te :  i(^  lobte. 

PRESENT  TENSE.  IMPERFECT  TENSE. 

3(^  lerne,  I  learn  or  am  learning  3c^  Ue6tc,  I  loved 
tu  ternft,  thou  leamest  tu  lieBtcft,  thou  lovedst 

er  (fte,  a)  lernt,  he  (she,  it)  learns  er  lieBte,  he  loved 
ttJlr  lernett,  we  learn  ttjlr  Uebtcn,  we  loved 

il)r  Iern(e)t  J         ,  i|Miettct,    ]         ,       , 

eie  lernen,  [  ^^^  ^^^^  ete  Mttn,  \  ^^^  ^^^^^ 

fie  lernett,  they  learn  pe  Hebtett,  they  loved 

*  The  only  verbs  which  in  the  infinitive  elide  the  t  before  n  are :  fcin, 
to  be  ;  t|tttt»  to  do,  and  those  whose  root  ends  in  el  or  cr. 


96  REGULAR   OR    MODERN    VERBS:    COMPOUND    TENSES. 

Obs.  V. — For  euphony  sake  regular  verbs,  whose  last  radicals 
are  b,  t,  hn,  ^n,  hm,  fftt,  <^n,  or  ti)m,  retain  c  be- 
tween the  root  and  the  ending  in  every  mode,  tense, 
and  person  ;  e.  g.,  3<^  rete,  I  speak,  tu  ret  eft,  er  rercte, 
xoxx  ^ben  geretet,  etc. 

Obs.  VL — ^Verbs  whose  last  radical  is  a  sibilant  (f,  ff,  fc^^  §) 
insert  c  in  the  second  person  singular ;  e.  g.,  ic^ 
njiinf^e,  I  wish,  fcu  i»unf(^cft,  etc. 


Reading  Exercise  LI. 

3(i^  leme  nieine  Slufgabe.  Xu  lobft  teinen  ©c^iiler.  Sr  geI)or^ 
feinem  Se^^rer.  SStr  wo^nen  in  ?5rcin!furt.  3^^  ^^^'^  i'tc  SiiAer. 
^olen  (Sie  SBajfer  oter  3Cein  ?  Xie  ©Mer  fud^en  ta^  Si}i3rterbu(ij. 
3c^  lieBte  meinen  Se^rer.  Sobteft  t)u  fcen  tragen  <3d)iilev  ?  Xer  ^ater 
fuc^te  ten  3;ifd)(er.  SBir  !auften  Slepfel  itnt  53irnen.  3^^  ^"^^tet  n?a^ 
mein  Dnfel  fagte.  SBo^nten  8ie  nicbt  in  33erUn  ?  8ie  ge^ordjten 
tern  X)tener.  i)u  fannft  in^  (Concert  ge^en.  SoUen  a>ir  eine  neuc 
5lufgabe  lernen  ?  9leifen  ©ie  nad)  ^ari^  ?  Unfere  Sltern  ge^en  in^ 
3:l)eater.  ipole  etn  ®la^  Sajfcr.  ©uc^et  eure  teutfd^en  ©rammatifen. 
2Bag  njunf(^eft  bu?  Sr  retet  fe^r  (angfam  (slow). 

Theme  LI. 

I  love  my  pai^nts.  Thou  livest  in  Berhn.  Charles  learns 
his  lesson.  We  buy  a  new  dictionary.  "WHiat  do  you  seek  ? 
The  gardener  and  the  tailor  live  in  Frankfort.  What  did 
you  buy  ?  I  bought  a  white  horse.  She  loved  her  teacher. 
What  are  you  making?  I  am  learning  my  lesson.  The 
teacher  praised  his  pupils,  they  learned  the  lesson.  Learn 
(sing.)  to  obey.  Obey  (plur.)  your  teachers.  Love  (plur.) 
your  parents.     My  parents  have  visited  your  uncle. 

Obs.  Vn  — The   Compound   tenses   are   formed  in  German 
nearly  as  in  English. 

1.  In  the  Perfect  the  participle  past  of  the  prin- 
cipal verb  is  preceded  by  the  present,  and  in  the 
Pluperfect  by  the  imperfect  of  ^dUxi  (sometimes 
(ein) ;  e.  g.,  3(i)  \><iht  gclemt,  I  have  learned ;  Ic^ 
l^atte  gelteBt,  I  had  loved. 

2.  In  the  First  Future  and  First  Conditional,  the 


BBGULAR  OB  MODERN  VERBa:    C03IP0UND  TENSES. 


infinitive  of  a  principal  verb  is  combined  -with  the 
auxiliary  tUCtbett  (like  shall  and  should  in  English) ; 
e.  g,,  3d^  toer^e  faufen,  I  shall  buy;  3i3^  ttifitbe 
ma^tn,  I  should  make. 

3.  In  the  Second  Future  and  Second  Conditional 
the  past  participle  of  the  principal  verb  is  inserted 
between  the  auxihary  toetbett  and  the  infinitive  of 
f^ahtn  (sometimes  fettl) ;  e.  g.,  id)  wertc  ^chaut  ^f 
Un,  I  shall  have  built ;  i(^  toiixU  ^c^QXtfyt  ^ahn,  I 
should  have  obeyed. 

PERFECT  TENSE.  PLUPERFECT. 


I  have  made 

fcu  ^aft  ^cma&it 

»ir  ^akn  gemadjt 
i^r  ^dU  gcmac^t 
(5ie  ^afeen  gemac^t 
(le  ^aUn  gemad^t 

FIRST  FUTURE. 

I  shall  build 
3d)  t0tthchavitn 

tu  n?irft  bauen 
er  n)irfc  baucn 
njir  »crben  baum 
i^r  wcrbet  Baucn 
(Sie  wertcn  bauen 
fie  irerben  bauen 

SECOND  FUTURK 

I  shall  have  bought 

3c^  tocthc  gelauft  (^aben 
tu  tt)irjl  gefauft  ^abm 
er  tt>irt  gefauft  ^abm 
toix  njertcn  gefauft  ^aben 
i^r  hjertet  gefauft  ^a6en 
<Sie  wcrben  gefauft  ^abm 
Pe  tijerfcen  gefauft  ^aben 


I  had  made 
5^  }^attt  gcma(^t  . 
t)u  ^atteft  Qcmactyt 
cr  ^atte  ^tmaii;t 
ttJir  fatten  gcmad^t 
i^r  :^attet  gemacbt 
©ie  fatten  gemac^t 
pe  fatten  ^tma6:jt 

FIRST   CONDITIONAL. 

I  should  obey 
3(^  ttjurbe  gc^ori^cit 
tu  ttJiirteft  ge^orc^en 
er  ttjurtc  ge^ord^en 
tt)ir  ttjurten  ge^ord^eti 
i^r  miirtet  ge^orcben 
<Sie  ttjurten  ge^or(^ett 
pe  tt)urt)ett  gel^ord^en 

SECOND   CONDITIONAL. 

I  should  have  bought 
3d)  tt^utbc  gefauft  Isabel 
tu  hjurteft  gefauft  ^ahtn 
er  iDurte  gefauft  ^aBen 
ttJtr  miirDeu  gefauft  ^ahn 
tt)r  witrtet  gefauft  t^aUn 
<Bk  wiirten  gefauft  ^aben 
pe  wixxUn  gefauft  f^ahm 


98  REGULAR  OR  MODERN   VERBS:    COMPOUND  TEN8ES. 

Additional  Reading  Exercise.* 

^at  uitfer  <Bc^u^mac^er  biefe  ©c^u^e  gemac^t  ?  ^tein,  er  1:)at  fie 
n\6>t  gemad^t*  i^aft  tu  W  Slffen  au^  gefe^en?  3c^  ^^^c  biefe^  ipau^ 
gekut.  ipatte  ter  ©c^iiler  tie  Slufgak  gelemt  ?  91ein,  er  n?irt  ftc 
kute  lernen.  2Cir  miirten  tad  2Bi3rtertu(^  gefauft  ^aben,  n?enn  n?ir 
®elD  ge^abt  ^attenf*  3^5  ii?ci^^c  ^te  Seftion  morgen  (to-morrow)  Be^; 
entiigen*  SBirp  tu  ten  33rtef  kenfcigt  ^abm,  e^e  eg  iunfel  ij^  ?  S3ir 
werben  tie  3flec^nurtg  tega^It  ^aBen,  e§e  ©ie  abreifen.  ©ie  juurben  tic 
S3u(i^cr  0efu(%t  ^aben,  »enn  fie  3cit  geWbt  l^dtten. 

Additional  Theme. 

Who  has  made  these  tables  ?  I  have  learned  my  lesson. 
Charles  has  not  read  his  book.  The  watchmaker  had  sold 
all  his  watches,  we  will  sell  ours.  Would  the  children  have 
played,  iff  they  bad  had  playthings?  Where  will  your  teacher 
live?  Will  you  buy  a  new  house  in  Berlin?  Our  sister 
would  buy  the  dress.  The  merchant  would  have  sold  his 
house,  iff  he  had  lost  his  son.  I  should  have  believed  it,  if 
I  had  heard  it.  If  you  had  loved  me,  I2  shouldi  have 
loved  you  also.  The  Professor  would  have  praised  Charles, 
if  he  had  learned  his  lesson  better. 

Conversation. 

SBo^nten  @ie  frii^er  iit  ^ari^  ?        ^^^ein,  ic^  wo^nte  fritter  in  33erlin, 

aber  je^t  wo^nen  njiritt^^ranlfurt. 

SBag  »irt  ter  l^iener  ^olen  ?  Sr  tt»irt  SCajJer  :^olen. 

2Ga5  ^aUn  ®ie  ge^brt  ?  3d)  ^aU  eine  fd)bne  SJ^ufi!  geprt, 

Sernfi  tu  Deutfd)  ?  9lein,  i(^  leme  Snglif^. 

SBirt)  ter  ^bnig  eiit  neued  ©c^Iog  5^ein,  aber  er  njiirte  ein  neueiS 
bauen?  @(^Iop  bauen,  n?enn  er  (^elt 

Uttt. 

SSerten  @ie  tad  blaue  Zu6>  nja^Ien  ?  5^eitt,  i^  ttjerte  tad  griine  toa^Un. 

*  These  additional  exercises  may  be  reserved  for  a  separate  lesson, 
t  SBenn  {if)  here  governs  tlie  subjunctive  (which  see  on  page  206)  and 
requires  the  auxiliary  at  t?ie  end. 


CABDINAL 

aBirfl  t)u  in'g  Concert  ge^en? 

2Bcr  ttJtrt  bie  glaf^cn  mit  2Bein 
futlen? 

^aben  ? 
%ixv  mn  ^atte  bcr  Odrtner  biefc 
S3Iumen  gebrac^t? 


NUMBERS. 


99 


9lcin,  after  i(%  ttJiirtc  ge^ett,  ttjcnn 

i&i  meinc  ^luf^aBe  gelernt  ^atte. 
Der  I^iener  wixxU  fte  fiillen,  wenn 

mir  SBein  fatten* 
3c^    toixxu    lai   »ei§e  getud^U 

^aben, 
(Sr  ^atte  fie  fur  unfere  (Smilie  ges^ 

fcrac^t. 


LESSOlSr   liH. 


«eftiou    52* 


Cardinal  Numbers. 


tin,  e  (ein5  *  one 
jwet,  two 
trei,  three 
»ier,  four 
fitnf,  five 
fec^g,  six 
Pcben,  seven 
ad^jt,  eight 
neutt,  nine 
jc^n,  ten 
elf,  eleven 
gmblf,  twelve 
bretke^tt,  thirteen 
tjicrjc^tt,  fourteen 
fiintge^n,  fifteen 


fec^^e^n,    sixteen 

peknge^n,  seventeen 

ac^tje^n,  eighteen 

neunje^tt,  nineteen 

anjanljig,  twenty 

tin  unti  snjan3i9,  twenty-one 

Ireifig,  thirty 

ijierjig,  forty 

fiinfaig,  fifty 

fe^gig,  sixty 

peknjig,  seventy 

ai^tsig,  eighty 

ticutt^ig,  ninety 

l^unbcrt,  a  hundred 

taufenc,  a  thousand 


Obs.  I. — The  numbers  13  to  19  add  the  particle  g  c  ^  n,  which 
answers  to  the  English  teen  ;  from  20  to  90,  with 
the  exception  of  thirty,  f  they  talie  the  affix  5  i  g 
answering  to  ly. 

*  (£  i  n  ^  is  never  used  at  the  beginning  or  in  tlie  middle  of  compound 
numbers. 

f  The  word  b  r  e  i  ending  in  a  vowel,  f  i  fi  is  added,  instead  of  j  i  g,  to 
prevent  a  liarshness  of  sound. 


100  CABDINAL   NUMBERS. 

Obs.  n. — ^The  English  expression  what  o'clock  or  what  timey 
is  translated  n?  i  e  »  i  e  I  UJr ;  as,  What  o'clock 
(what  time)  is  it  ?  2Bie   ttiel  U^r  ij^  c^? 

Obs.  m. — When  speaking  of  the  hour  !^  a  1 6  (half )  and 
25  i  cr  t  e I  (quarter)  are  placed  before  the  next  num- 
ber ;  as,  ^alfe  »ier  (half  past  three)  hteraUy 
half  (towards)  four;  eitt  2$iertel  auf  fedjg 
(a  quarter  past  five)  literally  a  quarter  towards 
(of)  six. 


Reading  Exercise  LII. 

Uttfer  ^arhter  :^at  brei  ^aninc^en  gefc^offen.  Dtefcr  altc  Sager  :§at 
neutt  3SbgeI  gefangen  (caught).  2Bie  alt  fmt)  ©ie?  3<^  H"  fle&ett:^ 
3e"^tt  Sa^rc  alt  "L^i  3a^r  ^at  gmblf  ?!Jionate.  I:iefer  ?!J?onat  ^at 
ein  unt)  brei^ig  2:a0e.  3tt  biefer  @tatt  fint)  taufenb  ^dufer.  2Ctc 
»ie(  U^r  ifl  ei3  ?  S«  ijl  brei  U^r  ober  ^16  »ier.  !Der  ^bnig  ^at  mt^x 
aU  ^unbert  f)ferbe*  SBie  ijiele  SlufgaBen  :§at  ber  ©c^iiler  HiJ  je^t  (as 
yet)  gelemt.  Sd  ftnb  fec^a^l^  ipu^nt^cn  in  bent  ipofe.  ^JZeln  SiZejfc 
^at  »ier  unb  swanatg  <Stdbte  unb  fec^g  unb  a^t^ig  !Dbrfer  gefe^en* 

Theme  LII. 

How  many  horses  has  your  uncle  ?  He  had  six  horses, 
two  dogs  (ipnnbc)  and  four  oxen.  How  old  is  your  eldest 
son  ?  He  is  fourteen  years  old,  and  my  eldest  daughter  is 
eighteen  years  old.  The  hunter  has  shot  to-day  nineteen 
rabbits.  Our  gardener  has  caught  more  than  twenty-seven 
chickens  in  your  yard.  There  are  eighteen  florins  in  my 
purse.  A  week  has  seven  days  ;  a  month  has  four  weeks;  a 
year  has  twelve  months,  fifty-two  weeks  or  three  hundred 
and  sixty-five  days. 

Conversation. 

2Cie  ufete  ©d^iiler  ^ai  iperr  2ange  ?    (£r  '^at  fiinf  unb  swan^ig  (Sc^iilcr. 
2Cie  alt  ftnb  3^re  Jotter  ?  X;ie  altej^e  ip  fiinfje^n  3al)re  alt. 


ORDINAL   NUMBERS.  101 

2Dic  »iel  U|r  ifl  e«  ?  Sd  ifl  cirt  2$iertcl  auf  »ier  obcr  ^alb 

3Bo  ^at  ter  X;iener  tie  ^ii^nc^cn    (£r  ^at  fte  in  Cent  ^ofe  gefangen, 

gefangen  ? 
©int  ijiele  Sager  im  SSalDe?  S3  pnb  fe:^r  »iele  3ager  im  Balbc 

unt  in  ter  <3tatt. 


LESSON   Lm.  Sefttott    33.  '"   ' 

Ordinal  Numbers. 

ttx  erfle,  the  first  !Der  gttjanjigjlc,  the  twentieth 

itx  jttJeite,  the  second  ber  brei§igjle,  the  thirtieth 

ttv  iritte,  the  third  ter  ttier^igfle,  the  fortieth 

ter  »ierte,  the  fourth  tcr  fiinfjigfle,  the  fiitieth 

fcer  fiinfte,  the  fifth  ter  fe^aigjle,  the  sixtieth 

ter  fec^^te,  the  sixth  ter  jlebcn^igflc   (or  Petjigfle,)  the 
ber  (iefccnte,  the  seventh  seventieth 

ter  aci^te,  the  eighth  ter  ac^tgigj^e,  the  eightieth 

ter  neunte,  the  ninth  ber  neunjigfle,  the  ninetieth 

ber  ^ti^nk,  the  tenth  ber  ^untertfte,  the  hundredth 

ber  le^te,  the  last  ber  gwei^unbertfte,  the  two  hun- 
ber  ttjiet)iclte,  what  day  of  the        dreth 

month  ber  taufenbfle,  the  thousandth 

Obs.  I. — ^The  ordinals  are  formed  from  the  cardinals,  up  to 
the  19th  inclusive  (ber  erfle,  britte  and  act)te  excepted), 
by  adding  t,  and  from  the  20th  upwards,  by  adding 
ji,  and  are  preceded  by  the  article.  They  terminate 
in  e  in  the  nominative,  and  are  declined  like  adjec- 
tives.    See  Lesson  XXV,  Obs.  V,  page  49. 

Obs.  rC. — ^In  compound  numbers  the  last  only  is  ordinal, 
the  others  remain  cardinals  ;  as,  the  1238th,  ber 
gwblf^unberta^t   unt  breifigfte. 


102  ORDINAL    NUMBERS. 

Obs.  m. — In  German  the  names  of  months  and  days  require 
the  definite  article. 

Der  Sftttuar,  January  ^cr  3uH,  July 

ber  ^ebruar,  February  ber  2lugufl,  August 

ber  Wdx^,  March  ter  (September,  September 

bcr  Slpril,  April  ber  D!toBer,  October 

ber  ?3Zai,  May.  ..  ,.  .  ber  9lo»emlber,  November 

ler  ^ani,  Jund'.  .•  <  ber  ^e^ember,  December  , 

be?  Sp'mit^a,  Sunday    _  ber  Donnerflag,  Thursday 

itc  '^ontaQ,  Monday  ber  %vcxtaQ,  Friday 

ber  Dienjiag,  Tuesday    '  ber  ©amftag,  {or  (SonnaSenb) 
Der  SJlittrood^,  Wednesday  Saturday 

Obs.  rV. — To  denote  repetition  m  a  I  is  added  to  the  cardi- 
nals; e  in  ma  I,  once;  jmeimal,  twice,  etc.  They 
are  sometimes  written  e i n  Tlal,  3 id e  i  50^ a  I ,  k» 


Reading  Exercise  LIII. 

T)er  erfle  Za^  ber  britten  SBoc^e.  !I^ie  le^ten  Xac^t  ber  ioorif^eit 
SBotS^e.  Unfer  ^einriA  ifl  tmmer  ber  gwcite  ober  britte  in  feiner  ^laj^e. 
X)er  3anuar  ifl  ber  erfle  ^mat  be3  3a:^re3,  ber  Dienflag  ber  britte  ZaQ 
ber  SBoAe.  ^^nebric^  n?irb  am  ©onntag  ober  SJJontag  ju  3^nen  tom^ 
men.  SSil^elm  ber  Srfte  ifl  ber  fiebente  ^onig  »on  ^reu^en.  £ubn?ig 
ber  SSierje^nte  mar  ^bnig  toon  gran!rei(^  unb  ©uflato  5lboIf  ^onig  toon 
©Aweben.  3c^  bin  breimal  in  Sonbon  getoefen.  I^en  mie  ijtelten 
bed  9Konat«  ^aben  »ir  ^tutt  ?    2Bir  ^aben  ^eutc  ben  neunge^nten. 

Theme  LIII. 

The  first  week  in  May  was  beautiful  Henry  the  eighth, 
king  of  England,  had  six  wives.  Saturday  is  the  seventh 
day  of  the  week.  I  have  lost  the  second  volume  of  Schil- 
ler's works.  Mary  is  the  third,  Sarah  is  the  fifth,  and  Eliza- 
beth the  last.  How  much  money  do  you  have?  I  shall  pay 
him  on  Thursday  or  Friday.  I  read  my  (news)  paper  every 
morning  at  eight  o'clock.*  What  day  of  the  month  is  to-day  ? 
*  At. . .  .o'clock,  render  um. . .  'XU^X* 


DEMONSTEATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


103 


Conversation. 


3|1  bein  Se^rer  je  in  33erlin  (je^ 

irefert  ? 
SBie  lange  1:)aUn  (Sie  in  X)eutf(^^ 

lant)  gcIeH  ? 
SCann  n>irjt  tu  ju  mir  fommen? 

ipaBen  ©ie  fd)on  bie  3^i^it«9  9^^ 

lefen? 
SCann  flarB  Sa^oB  ^er  3»cite  ? 
2Bar  (Sonntag  nic^t  bcr  treije^nte  ? 


3a,  er  ijl  brei  ober  tiicrmat  tort 

gen?efen» 
3d)  ^aU  tret  donate  unt)  »ier 

^2a0_e  bort  geleBt. 
3c^  njert)e  morgcn  ober  am  X)oniJ 

nerftag  ju  3^nc«  fommen. 
3a,  i(i  lefc  fte  jeben  ^orgen  urn 

jteBcn  U^r. 
5lm  ijierje^ntcn  (Btpttmhv  1701» 
^f^ein,  ©onntag  »ar  fcer  neunae^nte* 


LESSON  LIV.  :8cftiott  34* 

Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

Obs.    I. — X)iefcr,Hcfe,  biefcS,  this ;  pZwr.  bicfc,  these; 

jener,    }cne,    jcne^,  that ;  plur.  j e n c ,  those  ; 

are  declined  like  the  article.  * 
Obs.  IL-— I:  crjenige,  tiejcnigc,   ta^jenigc,   that,  the 

one;   b^xlil^   biefcUe,  b  affclbe,   the  same; 

also    b  e  rnTmT  i  d^  e ,  the  same,  and  clben    ber? 

fclbe,  the  very  same,  combine  the  declension  of 

the  article  and  the  adjective. 


Declension  of  bcrjenigc  and  the  Abridged  Form. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Nom.    berjenige    or  ber  f 

btejenige    or  bie,      that 

Gen.     begjcnigcn  or  beffen 

berjcnigen  or  bercn,  of  that 

Dat.      bemjenigen  or  bem 

berjenigen  or  ter,      to  that 

Ace.      benjenigen  or  ben 

biejenige    or  bie,      that 

*^-  Instead  of  b  t  e  f  c  ^  Germans  often  use  b  i  e  ^  and  ha^,  and  also  e  i. 
Ex.  2)tc^  ftnb  mcinc  SBorte,  these  are  my  words. 

t  This  abridged  form  of  the  demonstrative  pronoun  receives  more 
Btress  than  the  definite  article. 


104  DEMONSTKATIVE   PKONCUNS. 

Neuter. 

Nom.      ta^jenigc     or  bad,  that 

Gen.       tciJjenigctt    or  teffcit;  of  that 

Dat.        temjenigen  cyr  fcem,  to  that 

Ace.        tadjcnigc     (yr  tad,  that 

Plural. — Masc.y  Fern,  and  NeuL 

Nom.  tiejenigen  or  tie,      those 

Gen.  terjenigen  or  tercr,    of  those 

Dat.  tenjenigen  or  tcnen,  to  those 

Ace,  tiejenigen  (yr  tie,      those 

Obs.  m. — ^In  German  if  this  or  tJiat  is  separated  from  its 

subject  by  the  yerb  to  be  it  takes  the  neuter  form 

of  the  singular  without  any  regard  to  the  gender 

or  number  of  the  following  noun.     Ex,  This  is  my 

son,  Die  fed  ijl  mein  <5o^n» 


Reading  Exercise  LIV. 

^ier  ifl  mein  ^ut  wnt  tcrjenige  {cyr  ber)  bed  33rief6otett.  ^ier  i^ 
feine  i^eber  unb  biejenige  (or  bie)  unfered  33ebientett.  3*^^  U^r  tfl 
fleiner,  aid  bie  meiner  Sante.  S^ned  ^inb  ijl  grb§er,  aid  bad  3^^^^ 
^a(^feard.  2^er  unartige  ^nate  :^at  nic^t  nur  fein  33ud)  i)erIoren,  \^n^ 
^em  aucb  bad  fcined  Se^rerd.  I^icd  iuaren  bie  2Corte  unfered  Slr^ted. 
Dad  ifl  bad  2Ber!.  2Cir  fpredjen  meber  »on  wnfcrem  Bebienten  nod^ 
»on  bemjenigen  (or  b  e  m)  3bred  ©enerald,  fonbern  x^on  bem  bed  ^erfn 
^b^Icr.  SBeffen  53aU  iflbied?  Der  Se^rer  ^at  kibe  ^iic^er  genome 
men.    I:iefer  33anb  tt^  2Ber!ed  ij^  audgegekn. 

Theme  LIV. 

Elizabeth's  silver  thimble  is  better  than  that  of  Louisa. 
Have  you  taken  my  hat  or  that  of  Charles.  We  shall  sell 
not  only  this  house,  but*  also  that  of  our  uncle.  I  have  taken 
neither  your  umbrella  nor  that  of  Miss  Miller.  I  have  taken 
Frederick's  umbrella.     Henry  has  spent  his  money  and  that 

•  But  after  a  negated  clause  is  generally  rendered  f ontkettt  (see  p. 


BBLATIVE   PBONOUNS. 


105 


of  his  niece.  The  rabbits,  which  we  have  shot,  are  fatter  than 
those,  which  the  hunter  has  caught.  Emily  has  lost  her 
watch  and  that  of  her  mother.  Gustavus  has  eaten  his 
peas  and  those  of  his  brother.  Monday  is  my  eighteenth 
birthday. 

Conversation. 


^at  ttx  Scorer  3^^  S3u^  tterloren 
oter  badjcnigc  nteinea  33rut)cr^  ? 

Spre(^ett  'Bit  »on  ^^vtm  <So^nc 
pter  »on  km  m  ^errn  ©an!? 


SCejfettU^riftbie^? 

SWlt  mm  tt)unf(^en  <Sic  ju  fpred^en  ? 

SfltiefcdS^r^ut? 

3)1  biefcr  Oarten  ju  »er!aufen  ? 

SB^c^e^  ijott  tiefen  9)Ze(fem  ttjerbcn 

©ie  faufen  ? 
3f^  jenee  J^au^  Qxo^tv,  aU  bad 

3^rc3  ««ac^Bar3  ? 
Serpen  @ic  mein  ^ferb  ober  bad 

bed  $errtt  SJ^iitter  laufen  ? 


Sr  ^t  badfenige  3'^rcd  S3ruber3 

^erlorcn. 
3^  fpred^e  mcber    ijon    nteirtem 

8o^ne  noc^  »on  bent  bed  ^erm 

33anf,    fonbern   i?on  bem  bed 

Slrjted. 
Sd  ifl  tie  meiner  3:od^ter  Smiltc. 
3c^  njiinfc^e  mit  bem  alten  SSriefsf 

boten  ju  fprcdjctt. 
^tin,  ic^  ^be  feinen  §ut. 
I^iefer  Oarten   unb  ber  itnfered 

^Rac^bard  jlnb  ^u  »er!aufett. 
3c^  tDerte  treter  bad  cine  no^  bad 

anbere  !aufen. 
3encd  ipaud  ijl  tiiel  grb^er  unb 

beffcr,  aU  bad  unfered  5^ad)bard, 
3(^  n?e«e  iveber  3^^^  ^fer^  no(^ 

bad  bed  Jperm  ^D^iiller  faufen* 


LESSON  LV.  Seftiott  35* 

Eelative  Pronouns. 

Obs.  I. — In  German  the  relative  pronouns  n?eld^er,  melc^^e, 
n?  e  I  d)  e  d ,  and  b  e  r ,  b  i  e ,  b  a  d  are  used  without 
regard  to  persons,  animals  or  things,  and  require 
the  verb  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 

Obs.  n. — ^In  English  the  relative  pronoun  may  be  omitted, 
but  in  German  it  must  always  be  expressed. 


106  BELATIVE   PBONOUNS. 

Declension  of  mld^tx. 

Singular.  Plural, 

Masc.        Fern.        Neut.   For  all  genders, 
Nom.  jucldjer     n?el(^c     trelc^e^        ttjcldje,       who,  which,  that 
Gen.    tejjen       teren      tejfen         teren,         whose,  of  which 
Dai    n?elc^fm    weld)er    njelc^em      njelc^cn,     to  whom,  to  which 
Ace     n?eld^en    xotX^t     weldjed       njclc^e,       whom,  which,  that 


Declension  of  bcr. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fern.       Neut. 

For  all  genders 

Nom. 

ter 

tie        ta^ 

tie, 

who,  which,  that 

Gen. 

teffcn 

teren     teffen 

teren, 

whose,  of  which 

Dat. 

tern 

ter        tern 

tenen, 

to  whom,  to  which 

Ace 

ten 

tie       tad 

tie, 

whom,  which 

Reading  Exercise  LV. 

S3o  ip  ter  2;ifc^Ier,  ttjetcber  unfercn  neuen  Z\\&i  gemacbt  '^at  ?  §aBett 
©te  tad  ipau«  gefe^en,  me^ed  ter  ^iJ^e^ger  gekut  ^at  ?  Die  ^naben, 
njelc^e  tie  ^irfd)en  ge!auft  ^aten,  ftnt  tie  meinigen.  ©int  tie  ©c^iiler, 
teren  5lufgak  @ie  ijerbejfert  ^aben,  flei^ig  ?  Die  .Winter,  teren  3?ater 
hjir  geflem  gefe^en  ^aten,  ftnt  fe'^r  fd}bn.  Der  U^rmac^er,  n?eld/em 
ic^  tiefen  35rief  gefc^riekn  l^abe,  §ei§t  2Batter.  X)er  ^uc^en,  tuelc^en 
tt)ir  gegejien  ^ben,  war  ni(^t  fe^r  gut.  Dad  ifl  ter  ©d^neiter,  welAer 
teinen  3flo(f  gemad)t  ^at.  SBer  i(l  tie  Junge  B^^au,  teren  ^ann  !ran! 
ift  ?  Dad  ift  tie  2Cittn?e  SCalter,  in  teren  ipaufe  mein  D^eim  n?o^nt, 
3fl  tad  tie  junge  Dame,  mit  ter  (Sie  ind  Sweater  ge^en  werten  ?  Sd 
ift  grautein  SJ^iitler,  tie  geftem  Bet  meiner  ©c^wefter  war. 

Theme  LV. 

I  have  seen  the  shoemaker  whose  brother  has  lost  all  his 
fortune.  Show  me  the  widow  whose  daughter  has  received 
the  reward.     The  pen  which  I  have  made   (gef^nittcn)  does 


PEBSONAL   PRONOUNS. 


107 


not  write.  Is  this  the  son  of  the  butcher  whom  you  know  ? 
Have  you  seen  the  houses  of  (oon)  which  we  have  spoken  ?  I 
shall  see  them  to-morrow.  These  are  the  gardens  which  the 
butcher  has  sold  to  the  widow.  The  books  (which)  you  have 
bought  in  the  bookseller's  store  are  very  old.  The  flies  which 
we  have  in  our  house  are  generally  very  troublesome.  The 
postman  whose  trunks  are  lost  is  ill.  Will  you  take  the 
bread  to  the  kitchen  ?  The  postman  whose  son  has  received 
a  reward  is  in  Spain. 


Conversation. 


S3o  ijl  ber  ^naU,  twelc^er  mein 

33ud}  gerrijfen  ^at  ? 
^ahtn  <£ic  tie  Srcmten  gefe^en,  \>on 

n?el(^en  toix  gcfprodjen  i^aUn  ? 
3ft  tai  tic  jungc  2Bittn?e,  mit  ter 

@ie  im  J^eater  ge^en  n?erben  ? 
S3cr  Ifl  jener  alte  ^am,  tn  ten 

S3rief  9cbrad)t  ^at  ? 
Bennett  @ie  ten  ^IJie^ger,  tcr  "^eute 

Ui  unferer  2;ante  war  ? 
2Bie  ^eipt  ter  maUx,  )^t^en  2oA^ 

tcr  tiefcn  33rtef  gef(^rie6cn  ^at  ? 
SBic  »iclc  Stmntcr  i^at  ta^  ^m^, 

tod6>t^  tein  33ater  gcmieti)ct  ^at? 
SQBc^eg  tton  tiefcn  33u(^ern  l^aUn 

<Bit  gelefen  ? 


3(^  njcig  e^  nic^t,  ic^  ^aBe  i^n 

nic^t  gefe^en. 
9lctn,  mein  ^err,  id^  '^aBe  fte  noi^ 

nic^t  gcfel)cn. 
9lcin,  ta^  ift  tic  ^amt,  tie  mir 

einen  Slcgenfc^irm  gelie^en  ^at 
g^  ij^  ter  Srief bote,  in  teffen  ipau5 

mein  Dnfel  tvo^nt. 
3a,  icfc  !cnne  i^n,  er  ift  ter  greunt) 

ter  mttm. 
Der  5J^aler,  teffen  2:od^ter  tiefcn 

S3rief  gefd)rteben  l)at,  ^cigtSBcif . 
S^  ent^alt  (contains)  ad^t  3int^ 

mer  unt  cine  .^iidje. 
3c^  ^aBe  Beite  33u(^er  gclefen. 


LESSON   LYI.  2cltwn    36* 

Personal  Pronouns. 

Obs.  L — ^The  personal  pronouns   are  i  (^ ,  I;   bu,  thou;  er, 
(mas.)  he;  fie,  (/em.)  she  ;  and  eg  (new^.)  it. 


108 


DECLENSION  OF  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


Declension  of  the  Personal  Pronouns, 

Singular. 


1st  Person. 
For  aU  genders. 
Nom.     X^,   I 
Gen.      meiner,  of  me 
Dai      mir,  to  me 
Ace.      m\^,  me 


2nd  Person. 
For  all  genders, 
tin,  thou 
teincr,  of  thee 
fcir,  to  thee 
txA,  thee 


8d  Person. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


Masc. 
cr,  he 

felner,  of  him 
i^m,  to  him 
i^n,  him 


Fern, 
fit,  she 
i^rcr,  of  her 
i^r,  to  her 
Pe,  her 


Neut. 
c^,  it 

feiner,  ofit 
it)m,  to  it 
e3,  it 


Nom.  to\x,  we 
Gen.   unferer,  of  us 

(unfer) 
Dat.    uni,  to  us 
Ace.    un^,  us 


Plural. 

For  aU  genders. 
i^r    or  (Bit,  you 
euer  or  ^^xtv,  of  you 

ciidj  or  3|nen,  to  you 
tit&j  or  <Bit,  you 


fle.they 
i^rer,  of  them 

itncrt,  to  them 
fie,  them 


Obs.  IL — T)  u  is  employed,  in  German,  in  addressing  the 
Deity,  and  is  used  between  near  relations,  intimate 
friends,  and  to  servants  and  inferiors  generally.  @  i  e, 
hke  you  in  English,  is  the  polite  mode  of  address  ; 
it  is  used  particularly  with  strangers  and  superiors. 
'  Properly  speaking,  ©  i  c  is  in  the  third  person  plural, 
but  is  distinguished  from  the  other  form  of  the  same 
person  by  the  initial  capital. 

Eeflexive  Form:  fidj. 

O.  Irix.     ( himself,  herself,  itself  )  For  both  numbeni 

A. )  '  ^ '  1  yourself,  yourselves,  themselves  j    aad  all  f!:ender8. 


DECLENSION  OF  THE  PEESONAL  PRONOUNS.  109 

Obs.  HL — The  reflexive  pronoun  f  i  d^  has  only  one  form  for 
all  genders  both  in  the  singular  and  plural,  and  is 
used  only  in  the  dative  and  accusative. 


Reading  Exercise  LVI. 

3(^  a(%tc  tic^  unb  bu  liebjl  mi(^.  ®ie  lenncn  un^  unb  tt)ir  lofcen  fie* 
^at  er  jlc^  genjafd^en  ?  Xiefe^  Jafc^entuc^  ifi  nic^t  troden,  lei^^c  mir 
ba«  bcinigc.  2Bie  ^eigt  Cer  ^aufmann,  teiJen  33ruber  bir  einen  33rtef 
Qef^riefcen  ^at  ?  2Cir  werbcit  tud:^  nac^  ^aufe  nc^men.  ^6)  h)crbc 
fie  bir  nid)t  tci^en.  <3eib  i^r  ^ungrig  ober  burflig  ?  SBir  werben  cd 
felBjl  t^un.  SSottt  l^r  felbjl  ge^cn  ?  2Bir  banlen  S^neit  fur  3^re 
©lite.  S«  ifl  mir  leib.  3§r  werbet  6ei  un«  Heiben.  j^onnen  ©ie 
ntlt  irno  fpajieren  ge^en  ?  9leitt,  ic^  banfe  3^nen,  ic^  l^aBc  bem  33u(i^:J 
binber  ijerfproc^en,  jcDen  ZaQ  mit  i^m  fpajieren  ju  ge^cn. 

Theme  LVI. 

I  am  not  yet  ready.  Do  you  esteem  us  ?  Hast  thou 
washed  my  handkerchief  ?  I  have  washed  it,  but  it  is  not 
yet  dry.  Is  it  necessary  to  learn  this  conversation  ?  Yes,  it 
is  very  necessary,  you  must  learn  it.  Have  you  read  the 
paper  this  morning  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  not  had  time,  but  I 
shall  read  it  to-morrow  or  the  day  after  to-morrow.  Give 
(jlicb)  me  (Dat)  a  piece  [of]  bread.  We  will  buy  you  play- 
things. Will  you  do  it  yourselves  ?  Do  you  need  a  trunk  ? 
Why  is  he  sad  ?  The  books  which  you  have  lent  me  are 
very  interesting.  Here  is  the  newspaper  which  you  had  the 
kindness  to  lend  me  ;  I  thank  you  very  much  (fe^r) . 

Conversation. 

S3i|lbue«?  3a,  id?  Hit  c^  fcllf . 

^aben  @ic  meinen  ©tocf  genome  5^ein,  3§r  jiingfler  eoI)n  ^at  i^it 

men  ?  genommett. 

^at  bie  ^rau  be^  S3riefBotcn  mein  ^a,  fie  ^t  ea  Qtm]<i)m,  aber  e^  iji 

3;afc^entuc^  gemafd^en?  nidbt  trocfen. 


110  INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 

SBirft  bu  il)r  einen  58rief  f(^reiBen  ?    ^dn,  mein  iperr,  i^  ^k  f eine  3eit. 
2Bo  ift  Dag  |)ferD  tmu  ^ad^bax^  ?    Sr  ^atte  e3  nid)t  me:^r  nbt^tg  unD 

ijerfauftc  eg, 
Sotit  i^r  mit  itng  ge^cn  ?  2Cir  banfen  3|nett,    tvir  ^aBen 

^eute  feine  3eit. 
^onnen  @ie  mir  3|r  SBortcrbu^    (£g  t^ut  mir  (eic,  id)  fann  eg  S^neit 
lei^en  ?  nic^t  let^en,  eg  ift  ki  bem  S3ud)^ 

binber. 
^bnncn  @ie  nic^t  augge^en  ?  9lein,  mir  muffen  gu  4)aufe  bteibeti. 


LESSON   LVn.  Scttivn   57* 

Indefinite  Pronouns. 

The  indefinite  pronouns  are: 

SJian,  one  (French,  on),  they. 
Sebermann,  everyone,  everybody. 
Semanb,  some  one,  somebody. 
SRiemanb,  no  one,  nobody. 
(Stmag,  anything,  something. 
9li(^tg,  nothing,  not-anything. 
©elbjt  (?/  fel&er),  self. 
(Sinanbcr,  each  other,  one  another. 
^dntt,  t,  g,  nobody,  none,  no  one. 

Obs.  L — ^  a  tt  occTirs  only  in  the  nominative,  (if  another 
case  is  required  the  corresponding  oblique  case  of 
einer  is  used  (see  107),  and  requires  the 
verb  in  the  singular.  It  is  expressed  in  English 
not  only  by  one  and  they,  but  also  by  the  passive 
voice  :  ^  an  f a  g  t ,  they  say,  one  says,  or,  it  is  said 
(French,  on  dit). 

Obs.  n. — 3  eDermann  takes  g  in  the  genitive,  the  other 
cases  remain  unchanged.  3  f  nt  a  n  b  and  91  i  e  ? 
manb  take  0  or  cS  in  the  genitive.    In  the  dative 


INDETTNITE    PEONODNS.  HI 

the  ending  is  em,  and  in  the  accusative  ctl.  Quite 
frequently  these  endings  are  dropped. 
Obs.  in.~@  e  I  b  )1  or  f  e  I B  e  r  is  invariable.  It  cither  follows  a 
noun  or  (pers.)  pron. ;  e.  g.,  3^r  <SoI)n  fclbfl  fagtc  e« 
mix,  or  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the  clause  :  3^r  ©o^n 
fagte  e^  mix  fclbfj,  your  son  himself  told  me  it. 


Reading  Exercise  LYII. 

"Man  fagt,  er  ift  franf.  Man  bat  i^n  gellebt.  Jpat  man  einen  5)^ann 
gefe^en  ?  ^ega^It  3cJermann.  ffiir  ^ijren  ^emanteiJ  ©timme.  'Man 
foU  loon  ^f^iemanDem  (or  »on  9licmanU)  S3bfe^  (euiZ)  reDen.  !Die 
SJiutter  kac^te  (brought)  i^re  3:oc^ter  felBfl.  3d)  ^Be  c5  \tib^  ^t^ 
madjt.  3Han  mu§  feinen  9^ad)bar  licBen  n?ie  (as)  fic^  felBjl.  .Reiner 
(or  5flicmanb)  Xann  jn?cicn  (^lyo)  ^erren  Menen.  ipat  Cir  ta^  3^ntant> 
gefagt  ?    SJlein  SSrutier  loBt  5f^iemanCen« 

Theme  LYII. 

My  brother  does  not  love  anybody.  Has  somebody  told 
you  that  ?  Nobody  can  serve  more  than  one  master  (^  e  r  r). 
They  say  {or  it  is  said)  that  he  is  ill.  One  must  love  one's 
(feinen)  neighbor  as  oneself  (fid)  fclbfl)*  He  has  come 
himself.  I  shati  do  it  mysell  One  is  happy  when  one  ia 
contented.  Be* polite  to  (g  eg  e  n)  every  body.  Had  the  man 
received  anything?  No  one  is  without  faults.  Several  have 
made  the  same  mistake. 

Conversation. 

^at  man  i^n  gefeC)en  ?  ^t\n,  er  xoax  nic^t  jn  S^an\t. 

ipat  tir  bag  3fntant)  gefagt?  SJ^eine^  Dnfeig  2;o(^ter  iat  e^ 

mir  gefagt. 

SoBte  tie  Gutter  i^re  Joc^terfelbjl?  5^ein,  unfer  Dnfel  lobte  |Ie, 

2iebt  bein  Sruber  3fntanren?  5flein,  er  Iie6t  5fliemanten. 

2Car  3entant  ^ier?  9lein,  ti  toax  S^liemant)  ^ier* 

Stalin  Wu^xixi  benfelBen  ge^Ier  ^arl  unb  So'^^nn  nnb  nod^  anbcre 
gemad^t?  l^akn  i^n  gemad)!. 

*  For  the  imperative  of  to  he,  see  p.  200. 


112  PREPOSITIONS    GOVERNINO   THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

3fl  fcieo  Setcrmann^  ^fli*t  ?  S^  ifl  nic^t  Sebcrmann^  ^fl^t 

^u6:^tn  tiefe  ^naBen  einancer  ?        ^tin,  pc  fprecfcen  ni^t  mit  eliu 

anter. 
4)ajl  bu  je  (ever)  etma>$  ©c^one^    3<^  ^^^  "is  (never)  etnja^  ©(^Oi? 

re^  gcfe^en  ?  nere^  gefe^cn, 

3jl  Reiner  o^ne  ?$e^Ier  ?  9liemanl)  (Reiner)  i[l  o^ne  ?5c^Isr- 


LESSON  LVm.  Seftton  S8- 

Prepositions  Governing  the  Accusative. 

Obs.  I. — The  following  prepositions  govern  the  accusative 
case  only.     See  Lesson  XXXTTT,  page  63. 

T;ur^,  through,  by  means  of,  by    D^ne,  without 

fiir  *  for  urn,  around,  about,  at 

QtQtn,  against,  towards  toiur,  against 

The  Diminutives  $en  and  Icin. 

Obs.  II. — In  German  nearly  aU  substantives  may  be  formed 
into  diminutives  by  affixing  ^ni  or  Iciit*  Nouns 
ending  in  e  drop  this  letter  in  the  diminutive  form, 
and  those  containing  the  vowels  a,  0,  U  are  modified. 
The  diminutives  are  neuter,  and  are  used  not  only 
to  express  small  size,  but  also  affection,  and  in  some 
cases,  oddity. 


Reading  Exercise  LVIIL 

X)a5  ^yiatcben  !aufte  ein  Seilc^cn  fiir  meine  ®d)mejler.  2Bir  iverten 
turd)  ten  2Calt  gc^cn.    I^icfe  ^trfdjen  (int  mr  ta^  3;b(^terlein  unfercd 

o  5  u  T  is  netier  a  conjunction  in  German,  the  word  corresponding  to 
the  English  conj unction /(?r  is  b  c  nn. 


THE   DIMINDTIVES    6^  t  tX   AND   t  C  t  tt«  113 

gjle^gerd,  tn  t^ufl  tic«  toittx  feitten  SBiUcn.  Sirfl  bu  bur^  ba« 
Bajler  ge'^en?  pr  wen  ift  biefer33nef?  @r  ijl  fiir  mein  ©ime^ 
flerc^en.  X)a3  ^unl'djen  fcr  2}tttn?e  liiuft  (runs)  gcmbt)nIiA  tur(%  Me 
@tra§c.  3fne^  ilHannc^en  "^atte  ein  Apdu5d)cn.  ahtx  e5  l)at  e^  nic^t 
me^r  (any  longer).  Unferc  Se^rflunDc  ifl  »orul>cr,  follen  mir  ^Icr 
Udhn  occr  nadj  ipaufc  ge^en  ?  iSin  3H5^Iein  roac^jt  (grows)  auf  ler 
33ruc!e.  i)}Jit  mem  ifl  tetn  Srii^ercben  angcfommen  ?  (£0  ijl  mit 
jmei  antern  3fleifenDen  anae!ommen,    ®cgen  mi(^ 

Theme  LVIIL 

Through  the  little  forest  (SBalbc^cn).  That  little  man  stays 
more  than  an  hour.  My  dear  wife  (SEftbc^en)  is  commonly 
not  very  troublesome.  A  little  dog  sits  upon  the  bridge. 
This  is  only  one  little  trunk,  where  are  the  trunks.  This  book 
is  for  my  little  sister.  At  four  o'clock.  Against  the  wall  of 
the  house.  I  cannot*  buy  it  without  money.  How  much 
money  do  you  want  for  it  (Cafiir)  ?  He  is  against  me.  We 
shall  sit  around  the  table.  Shall  I  do  it  against  (wtter)  his 
will  ?  By  (mit)  what  means  have  you  bought  tJiis  little 
tree  ?    A  little  rose  and  a  little  bird. 

Conversation. 

4)aBctt8ie  mein^iint^en  aefe^:n?    3a,  tndn  ^err,  e«  ij^  tUn  urn  ba^ 

^au^  gelaufen  (run). 

®cgett  mn  foti  man  "^bflic^  fein  ?      ©ec^en  S^fermann* 

2Bo:^in  flog  (flew)  fcas  55ogcId)en  ?    SiJ  flog  turd)  tag  genjierlein. 

SBIetbjl  tu  ju  ipaufe    witer  ten    9?ein,  unfer  Se^rer  if^  !ranf,  ttjir 
SCillen  teine^  Se^rerd  ?  Mm  ^cuk  feine  ©tunte, 

I)urc^tt>eI(^e^itteIMfttu9efunt?    l^urA  tie  ^Jlittel  te^  ^erm  (of 

the  Lord). 

giir  njen  ifl  Mefeg  Sriefc^cn  ?  S^  ijl  fur  tein  ©djnjejlerlein. 

SBirfl  bu  t)urc^  tag  SBajfer  ge^en  ?     9lein,  ic^  merte  gegen  ben  S3erg 

ge^en. 

©int  ®ie  o^ne  ®elt  ?  3<%  Hn  o^ne  etnen  pfennig* 

*  For  the  place  of  the  negation  see  p.  219  136,  and  p.  254. 


114  NAMES   OF   COXJNTBIES  AND  PLACES. 

LESSON   LIX.  «eftiott    39* 

Names  of  Countries  and  Places. 

Obs.  I. — ^Names  of  countries  and  places  have  in  German,  as 
in  English,  no  article,*  and  form  their  genitive 
by  adding  g,  except  those  ending  in  g,  y  and  j, 
which  remain  unchanged,  but  are  preceded  by  the 
preposition  \)  o  n, 

Obs.  U. — ^When  the  governing  word  stands  before  the  name 
of  a  country  or  place,  the  genitive  of  the  latter  is 
not  formed  by  the  addition  of  g,  but  the  preposition 
» 0 n  precedes  it,  as :  %\t  ^bnigin  »on  Snglant, 
and  not  Die  ^onigin  ©  n  g  I  a  n  fc  ^  g« 

(Europa,  Europe  Dejheic^,  Austria 

2lmeri!a,  America  ©panien,  Spain 

Snglanb,  England  Stalien,  Italy 

f5ranfrel(^,  France  ^reugen,  Prussia 

X)cutfd^lant,  Germany  Sluplanb,  Eussia 

SKien,  Vienna  9lom,  Rome 


Reading  Exercise  LIX. 

3<^  ge^e  na^  granfreic^.  25cr  ^rofeffor  35art^  \tW  in  !DeutfcbIant)^ 
X)iefe  Slu^ttjantercr  »erlaf[en  i^rc  ipeimat^  unt)  ge^cn  nadj  Snglanb. 
2Bte  kigt  tie  ^aiferin  »on  S^anfreic^  ?  (Sie  ^ci§t  Sugcnic  uni  W 
^onigin  »on  ^rcugen  :^eigt  Slugujlc.  Der  9lame  beg  ^aifers  ijott 
9luglanr  ifl  5llej:anter.  3fi  Portugal  Heiner  aU  ©panien  ?  Deftreid) 
ift  nid^t  fo  grog  aU  3lmeri!a,  SBeldje^  ift  bag  grogte  Sant  in  Suropa  ? 
Stalien  ij^  ein  ^bnigrei^,  9lugIanD  ein  ^aifert^um.  ^ommen  ©ie 
»on  ^ari3?  SBeldjeg  ijl  T)eutf*Iant)'g  ^auptftatt?  granlfurt  am 
SJJain.  ipaten  ®ie  ben  SSater  ber  beutfc^en  i^Iuffe  gefe^en  ?  3ft  ^^ 
ber^etn? 

«  Except  b  i e  <S (!^ »  c t j ,  Switzerland,  and  b i  e  Z'a.xttx,  {%valii^)t 
Turkey 


IRBEQULAR  OR  ANCIENT  VERBS,  115 

Theme  LIX. 

Is  Germany  larger  than  England  ?  Berlin  is  the  capital 
of  (»on)  Prussia,  Vienna  the  capital  of  Austria.  My  best 
friend  lives  at  Kome.  I  am  going  first  to  Spain,  then  to 
Italy  or  to  Russia.  The  emperor  of  France,  Napoleon  the 
third,  is  beloved  by  all  his  subjects.  Austria  is  an  empire, 
but  Italy  is  a  kingdom.  Paris,  the  capital  of  France,  is  a 
very  beautiful  city.  Have  you  seen  the  Rhine,  its  banks 
(feine  Ufcr)  are  beautiful  ?  Europe  is  more  populous  than 
America. 

Conversation. 

©e'^en  ©tc  nac^  S3erlin  oter  nac^  3c^  9c^e  mUv  nac^  Scrtin  noc^ 

^arig  ?  nac^  ^axii,  fontern  na^  9lom. 

2Bie  ^eip  biefer  berii^mte  afrifani?  ©ein  ^amt  ifl  ^axt^,  er  war  mcin 

fc^c  ^ieifente?  2e|rer  in  S3erlin* 

3f^  ^orhtgal  grower  al^  (Spanien  ?  9lein,  eg  ifl  ijtel  fletner. 

SBo^er  fommft  lu  ?  3c^  fomme  »on  3JJat)ril»» 

SCclc^e^  ift  fcajJ  grogte  Sanb    in  T!a3  ^aifert^um  3ftu§lant)  ijl  bas 

(Europa  ?  grb^te  in  Suropa. 

2Col)in  ge^en  biefe  Slu^Jwanberer  ?  @te  ge^en  nac^  2lmeri!a. 

SCelc^eg  ift  Me  fdjonjlc  ©tatt  in  S3erUn  ifl  ungiueifel^aft  tie  ft^onjlc, 

!Deutf(^Iant)  ?  SCien  tie  grbfte. 

3tt  welc^er  ©tatt  lebt  3|r  i5^^eunt)  ?  Sr  lebt  in  Ronton. 


LESSON   LX.  £eftiott  60* 

The  Irregular  or  Ancient  Verbs. 

Obs.  I. — There  are  in  German  163  verbs  which  deviate  from 
the  modem  or  regular  verb  in  the  formation  of  the 
imperfect  and  participle.  In  the  imperfect  the 
ancient  verbs  do  not  add  a  termination,  but  change 
the  radical  vowel,  and  in  the  participle  past  most 
generally  affix  ctl  instead  of  i,  and  frequently  change 
the  radical  vovsrel,  as  in  the  imperfect.  Some  of  the 
irregular  verbs  also  modify  or  change  the  radical 


116         IRREGULAR  OR  ANCIENT  VERBS:   FIRST  CONJUGATION. 


vowel  in  the  second  and  third  person  singular  of 
the  present,  and  in  the  imperative  singular. 

In  order  that  the  various  changes  which  the  ir- 
regular verbs  undergo  may  be  well  comprehended 
we  shall  divide  them  into  five  different  conjuga- 
tions, and  each  of  these  again  into  different  classes. 

First  Conjugation  (Eadical  Vowel  a). 

Obs.  n. — This  conjugation  consists  of  verbs  having  a  for 
their  radical  vowel.  In  the  imperfect  the  dis- 
tinguishing vowel  is  u  in  the  first  class,  and  it  in 
the  second. 

First  Class:  Imperfect  with  u. 
Infinitive :  53  a  cf  e  n ,  to  bake.     Fast  Fart. :  g  e  b  a  cf  c  n  ,  baked. 


Freaent  {Indicative). 


cr  Bricft 
Wa  bacfen,   i^r  Bac!et 
(<3iekc!en),  ftebacfen 


Imperfect 


3(i^  bttcf,  tutucfjl,  cr 

bucf 
Sir  budfen,  i^r  bucfct 

(©tetu(fen),flebucfcn 


Imperative. 


hadt,  bake  (thou) 

badtt  or  batfen  (Bit, 
bake  (you) 


Thus  are  conjugated :  fa^ren,  to  drive ;  graben,  to  dig ; 
lafcen,*  to  load ;  fdjaffcn  *  to  create  ;  f^Iagen,  to  beat  (strike) ; 
tragen,  to  carry  (wear) ;  mac^fen,  to  grow;  ttJafc^en,  to  wash;  also 
ftc^ett,  ftaat,  geftancen,  to  stand. 

Second  Class:  Imperfect  with  tc. 
Infinitive :  33 1  tt  f  e  n ,  to  blow.    Font  Fart. :  g  e  b  I  a  f  e  n,  blown. 


Present  {Indicative). 


3(^  blafe,  tublafep, 

er  Mdf^ 
2Bir  Hafctt,    i^r  blafet 

(@ieHafen),fteb(afen 


Imperfect. 


3*Hie^,l)uMiefefl, 
er  Mied 

Sir  Hiefen,  i^r  Hiefet 
(@ic  bUefen),rte  blicfcn 


Imperative. 


blafe,  blow  (thou) 

blafet  or  blafen  ©ie, 
blow  (you) 


*  The  radical  vowels  of  f  (^  a  f  f  e  n  and  I  a  b  e «  are  not  modified  in  the 
Present. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS  ;    FIRST   CONJUGATION.  117 

Thus  are  conjugated  :  hxatm,  to  roast ;  fatten,  to  fall ;  fan:* 
gen,  to  catch ;  ^alten,  to  hold ;  ^angen,  to  hang ;  lajfen,  to  lot 
(permit)  ;  ratten,  to  advise  ;  fc^Iafen,  to  sleep.  To  this  class 
may  also^be  added  :  \)amn,  |ic6,  ge^aucn,  to  hew;  laufen,  Ucf, 
cjelaufen,  to  run ;  {to§en,  jtic§,  geflo^en,  to  push  ;  rufcn,  ricf,  Qtxn^ 
fen,  to  call ;  grten,  ging  {or  gi  en  g),  gegangen,  to^go  ;  none  of 
which  modify  their  radical  vowel  in  the  present,  except  I  a  us: 
f  e  tt  and  jl  o  g  e  n. 


Reading  Exercise  LX. 

Ber  Bacft  euer  33rob?  Sir  Baden  e^  felBj^.  Wt  mm  fa^rt  bein 
Dnlel  nad^  i^anfreic^  ?  2Cir  n?erten  nacfe  ^oln  fa^ren,  meine  ^reun^ 
tin  fu^r  gcflem  fea^ln.  Xtx  ZoWnQxahx  gruB  ein  ®ra6.  SBarum 
fc^tdgfl  tu  ben  ^naben  ?  3*  fc^Iug  i^n  geflern.  ^ilaht^  ttjufc^  flc^ 
tie  ipdnte,  weil  er  nid>t  te^  33(ubergie§en^  f^wlttg  fcin  ttjollte.  3tt 
5lmerifa  wdc^fl  »iel  ZaUd,  fritter  n?uc^^  er  nic^t  in  Xeutfc^lanb*  ^m 
2lnfang  f^uf  ®ott  ^immel  unt)  Srbe,  SCarum  |aj^  bu  tid^  nic^t  ge^: 
njafdjen  ?  ^er  SCinb  Blieg  gej^em  fldrfer.  Jpat  tte  ^b(^in  bad  ®etf(% 
gebraten  ?  !Der  9)^ann  fiel  »om  !E)ad^e»  3)^it  <Specf  fdngt  man  Wdu\c* 
%ixx  wen  ^ielten  ©ie  i^n?  ^at^m  fie  mir  ed  pngen  su  laffen?  Sflie^ 
fen  @ie  mlc^  ?  3<^  ^<i^^  I^Jtc  5flad^t  nici^t  gut  gefc^lafen,  SSarum 
Po^ep  turnip? 

Theme  LX. 

The  baker  bakes  good  bread.  With  whom  did  you  drive 
yesterday?  We  drove  in  an  elegant  carriage.  Are  you 
digging  a  hole ?  Why  did  you  beat  the  woman?  The  Ger- 
mans say:  One  hand  washes  the  other.  Will  much  tobacco 
grow  in  Germany  ?  Where  did  it  formerly  grow  ?  What  did 
God  create  in  the  beginning  ?  Is  the  gun  loaded  ?  Does 
the  wind  blow  to-day?  Are  you  cooking  the  meat?  When 
did  the  man  fall  from  the  roof?  How  are  mice  caught?  They 
took  him  for  a  thief.  I  advised  him  to  go  to  Paris.  I  called 
you  twice.  I  slept  more  than  eight  hours.  Why  did  you 
push  the  old  woman?     Go  (thou)  to  bed. 


118 


IRREGULAR  VERBS:  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


Conversation. 


Serben  ©ie  33rot)  Bacfen  ? 

S3it  n?em  fu^rft  fcu  geflern  ? 

^at  ber  3;ottengra6er  ein  ©rab 

gegraBen  ? 
ipat  ber  ^oc^  fca^J  gleifcb  geBraten? 

ipakn  @ie  mi^  gerufen  ? 
2Gie  fann  man  SJZaufe  fangen  ? 

Ber  fc^uf  ipimmel  unt)  (Srbc  ? 
S3o  ttJd#  Der  ZaUd  ? 

SBarum  fc^lagen  ©ie  ben  ^nakn  ? 

Sftat^en  ©ie  mir  nac^  ^oln  gu 
ge^en? 


5^eirt,  ic^  ^aBe  geflern  gefcadfen. 

9)^it  unferem  SRe^ger, 

3d)  glaube,  er  ^at  e^  biefen  ^^JJlor? 

gen  gegrakn. 
^dn,  er  pel  in  ben  teller  unb 

ijerle^te  (hurt)  ftc^, 
9Zein,  id)  rief  ^axL 
Wit  ©pecf  ober  mit  ^h]t  fangt 

man  fie» 
®ott  f^uf  fie  im  2lnfang  au^  9li(i^t^. 
(Er    mdc^fl    in    X;eutfc^Ianb    unb 

2tmeri!a. 
SBeil    er  trdge  ifl  unb  nic^t  bie 

SBaW^it  fagte. 
5^ein,  ic^  rat^e  ^l)ntn  na(^  Scrlin 

3U  ge^cn. 


LESSON  LXI.  Scltion  61. 

Second  Conjugation  (Imperfect  with  a), 

-This  conjugation  is  divided  into  three  classes,  and  has 
C  for  the  radical  vowel,  which,  in  the  Imperfect,  is 
changed  to  o-  The  past  participle  has  in  the  first  class 
the  radical  vowel  c,  in  the  second  o,  and  in  the  third 
0.  The  second  and  third  person  singular  of  the  pres- 
ent (indicative)  has  i  (or  ic)  in  the  first  and  second 
class;*  the  third  is  regular. 


<*  93cfc^Ien,  empfc^lcn,  g^tb&xtn,  geben,  lefen,  fc^en,  jle^ten  and  gefi^c^cn  have  ie 
in  the  second  and  third  person  singular  of  the  present,  all  t^e  remaining 
verbs  of  the  second  class  have  i  only. 


IRREQULAR  VERSa:    SECOND  CONJUGA'llON.  119 

First  Class:  Past  Participle  with  e. 

Ivfinitive :  ^  f  f  e  n ,  to  eat.     Past  Part. :  G  c  g  c  f  f  e  n ,  eaten. 


Present  (Indicative). 


Si^ejfe,  tu  iffejt,  er 

Sir  effen,  i1^v  cffet  (@ie 
ejfett),  pe  cffen 


Imperfect. 


3d)  tt  f ,  tu  a  f  c  jl ,  er 

2C{ragen,i:^ra§et(@ie 
apen),  ftc  apen 


Imperative. 


if,  eat  (thou) 

cffet  or  ejjett  ®ie, 
eat  (you) 


Thus  are  conjugated  :  frejfen,  to  eat  (applied  to  animals); 
geBen,*  to  give;  gcfc^e^en,*  to  happen;  lefcn  *  to  read;  meffen,  to 
measure ;  fe^en,*  to  see  ;  tretcn,  to  tread;  ttergejfen,  to  forget: 
genefcrt,  3  c  n  a  §  ,  genefen,  to  recover  from  illness;  and  the  very- 
irregular  verb  t^un,  t^at,get^an,  to  do  (make),  which 
is  conjugated  regularly  in  the  present :  i(^  t^ue,  t>u  t^uft,  etc. 


Second  Class:  Past  Participle  with  0. 

Infinitive :  33  e  f  c  ^  U  n  ,*  to  command  (order). 
Past  Part. :  b  e  f  a  I)  I  e  n ,  commanded. 


Present  (Indicative). 


3^   kfe^Ie,  tu   be? 

fic^Ifl,erbefic^It 
Sir  befe|Ien,  i^r  befe^? 

let  (@ie  befe^Ien),  [te 

befe^len 


Imperfect. 


3c^  b  e  f  0  H ,  ^u  be? 

fa^(|l,  er  befall 
Sir  befa^ten,  i^r  be? 

fa^tet  (©ie  befallen), 

fte  befablen 


befic^I,  command 

(thou) 
befe()let  or  befe^Ien 
(Sie,  command 


Thus  are  conjugated  :  bergcn,  to  hide  (conceal)  ;  berjten,  to 
burst ;  brcc^en,  to  break  ;  t)refc^en,t  to  thrash  ;  empte^len,*  to 
recommend  ;  erfc^recfen,  to  be  frightened ;  gebdren  *  to  bring 
forth  ;  gelten,  to  be  worth  (estimated) ;    ^elfen,  to  help  ;  ne^? 


*  See  note  on  preceding  page. 

t  Sometimes  b  rof(!^  in  the  imperfect  instead  of  brafc^* 


120 


IRREGULAR  VERBS:  SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


men,  to  take ;  fc^elten,  to  scold ;  fprec^en,  to  speak ;  flec^en,  to 
sting  :  fle^Ien,*  to  steal;  fterBen,  to  die;  trcffen,  to  hit ;  ijert)erktt, 
to  spoil  (ruin) ;  mvhm,  to  levy,  (sue)  solicit ;  wcrfen,  to  throw 
(cast)  and  Fommen,  f  a  m,  gefo mmen,  to  come,  which  is  regular 
in  the  present  indicative. 

Third  Class  :  Past  Participle  with  tt. 
Infinitive:  S3 r r n n c n,  to  bum.  Fast  Part.:  gcBrannt, burned. 


{Present  Indicative.) 


tu 


3(fc     b  r  e  tt  n  e 
brennft,  er  brennt 

2Bir  brennen,  i^r  Srennt 
(®ic  henttcn),  fie 
brennctt 


Imperfect. 


Imperative. 


bum 


fcrennc, 

(thou) 
brennct  or  Brenneti 

(Sie)  burn  (you) 


3(^  bronntc,  tu 
branntejt,  er  brannte 
©ir  brannten,  i^r 
branntet  (@te  brann? 
ten),  fie  brannten 
Thus:  bringen,  b r a  c^ t e ,  gebrac^t,  to  bring  ;  ten!en,  'ia^tt 
getac^t,  to  think;  fennen,  to  know;  nennen,  to  name;  rennen,  to 
run ;  fenfcen,  to  send  ;  wenDen,  to  turn  ;  and  the  very  irregular 
verb  njtjfen,  tt)  u  p  t  e ,  genjugt,  to  know,  which  inserts  e  in  the 
present  singular:  3c^  ttiet^^  tu  toei^t,  er  Itiet^^  xo'xx  ttJiffen,  etc. 


Reading  Exercise  LXl. 

SBag  ^a^  ttr  ber  Se^rer  ?  Sr  giebt  tir  p^  gem.  2l§en  ©ie  nf*! 
ju  ttiel  ?  tiai  ^ferD  fri§t  Srbbeeren.  ^aben  (Sie  fca^  %vi^  gemejfen  ? 
Sr  mag  ten  ^afer.  ier  ©filler  lie^t  ju  leife.  (5al)en  (&ie  ^en 
33(inten  ?  3d)  trat  ang  r^enjlcr  aU  er  nad)  ^aufe  ging.  3ft  tie  ^ran!e 
genefen  ?  3c^  »erga§  3^nen  gu  fa^en,  tag  e^  nid?t  ge|*d)a^.  SSer 
ftant)  an  fcer  S^iire  ?  Unfer  2;ifd)Ier  t^at  e3.  S^  gefi^a^,  tt?eil  ein 
3fl6mer  U  befall.  Sr  bepe^lt  mir  eg  nid)t  gu  ttjerfen.  3:rafft  tu  t^n 
ju  ^aufe  ?  !Dn  »ertirbjl  tein  Sluge.  3c^  ^^A  ^in^"  <Stein  unD 
jte  erfc^raf.  Denfft  t)u  fcag  ber  Setriiger  geflorben  ijl?  SSad  :^ajl 
l\x  genommen?  3^^  lannte  fie  nid^t.  SBugteft  bu,  ta§  er  ^ier  tt?ar? 
Sr  (tanb  auf  ber  a;reppc  aU  ic^  e«  fanbte.  SCarum  rennjl  bu? 
e^  ijl  gettjanbt. 

<*  See  note  on  page  118. 


lEfiEGULAB  VEEBS;   SECOND   CONJUGATION.  121 

Theme  LXL 

Who  commands  the  soldiers  ?  The  captain  ordered  me 
(dot. )  not  to  break  the  glass.  I  think  this  milk  is  spoiled. 
I  was  frightened  and  ran  when  he  came.  I  gave  him  all  my 
money.  Henry  was  bom  on  Saturday.  John  has  been 
(ttjur^e)  stung  by  a  bee.  Louis  XIV.  died  in  the  year  1716. 
This  boy  spoUs  his  coat.  I  spoke  of  Frederick  the  Great. 
Thou  didst  not  hit  the  mark.  I  gave  you  a  pen,  have  you 
given  it  to  my  brother  ?  This  boy  ate  too  many  strawberries, 
I  have  commanded  him  not  to  take  it.  This  boy  reads  very 
low.  Why  did  you  measure  this  cloth  ?  The  blind  do  not 
see.  You  have  spoiled  this  book,  I  shall  not  take  it.  We 
know  your  qualities.  Who  burned  my  letter?  Didst  thou 
send  it  yesterday? 

Conversation 

5Ca«  frt§t  bad  '^hxii  ?  ^i  fri^t  ®rad,  ipeu  wnb  ^ofer. 

©abft  tu  tetnem  2e^rer  Srtbeeren  ?    9lein,  ic^  glauk  cr  i§t  fie  nic^t 

gem. 
ipafl  fcu  fcavj  2:u^  gemeffen  ?  @g  ma^  t)ier  unt)  elite  ^albe  (SQe. 

3:rafft  cu  ben  ^JWe^ger  gu  ^aufe  ?       9ietn,  er  wugte  nic^t,  taj  ic^  tonxf 

men  werte. 
©agte  er,  ba§  ber  Setriiger  Qtf    2&j  weig  nic^t  »a«  er  fagte. 

ftorben  ift? 
<B(ii)m  <Bii  ben  23Unben?  ^dn,  e«  ttjar  bunfel  wnb  bad  Sidit 

brannte  nic^t. 
©e)Ual)  bied  »ell  ber  (General  ti    Sr  befall  ed  unb  e5  muf  te  ge^ 

befall  ?  fc^e^en. 

SBarum  ^a(l  bu  t&  nidjt  get^an  ?       3c^  ^attc  !eine  3^it,  obcr  ic^  werbc 

c«  morgen  H^nn, 

Reading  Lesson. 
Sic    flcittc    SRaric. 

Sined  ?0Zorgen«  ging  bie  Heine  ^axk  in  bie  ©c^ule,  i^re  53u^er 
unter  einem  5lrme,  i^r  ^orBc^en  unter  bem  anbern.    Untertuegd  begeg^ 


122 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  I  THIRD  CONJUGATION. 


ttctc  Pc  cittern  artttett  ©reife,  weli^er  bie  ^aitb  gegert  fie  au^flrejJte  unb 
fagte:  „5lc^I  ntein  liebeg  ^ittb,  fc^enfe  ntir  Stma^,  i(^  ^^abe  ^un^ 
ger."*  Wlaxk  fudjte  itt  i^rer  3:af(^e,  aBer  fte  mar  leer.  Daittt 
offitete  |te  i^r  ^brbc^eit  uitD  tta'^ttt  la^  Dbfi  itttb  tia^  (Stucf(^en  33rob, 
meldjeg  i^re  SJZutter  fiir  i^r  (^riil^jlucf  ^ineittgelegt  ^atte  uttb  itttem  fte 
e^  tetn  alten  armett  9Hanite  gab,  fagte  fie:  ^'Da,  bag  ift  2lUeg,  was  it^ 
l^abe,  wir  juollen  e3  t^eilett."  T)er  (^reig  ban!te  i^r  mit  3:^rditeti  in 
teit  2lugett,  uitb  9J?arie  g  i  n  gf  mit  fro^ent  ^erjen  b  a  i)  o  it.f  5^ici^ 
maU  ^atte  eiti  grii^jhidt  i^r  fo  »iele  greubc  g  e  m  a  (^  t.J 


LESSON   LXn. 


2ettwn   e± 


Third  Conjugation  (Imperfect  and  Past  Participle  with 

i  or  it). 

Obs.— This  conjugation  is  divided  into  two  classes  and  is 
characterized  by  the  sound  of  i  in  the  imperfect  and 
past  participle,  which  in  the  first  class  is  short,  and  in 
the  second  is  lengthened  by  c,  which  follows  the  i. 
Verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  recognized  by  the  radi- 
cal diphthong  ci. 

First  Class:  Imperfect  and  Past  Participle  with  i 
Infinitive :  33  c  t  §  e  tt ,  to  bite.     Fast  Fart. :  g  e  H  f  f  e  n ,  bitten. 


Present  {Indicative). 


3(!^Bei§e,  buBeifeft, 

er  ki^t 
2Bir  ki^cit,  i:^r  Bei§et 

((Bie  bei^cn),  fte  ki^ctt 


Imperfect. 


3*  BiJ,  bu  Mffefl, 

er  M§ 
5Cir  Hffett,   i:^r  Hffet 

((Bie  H|Jeit),fieMffen 


Imperative. 


beipe,  bite  (thou) 

Beiget  or  beigen  (Bie, 
bite  (you) 


*  I  am  hungry. 

I  ©ing— bavonr  went  away.  Sep.  verb  b  ft  5>  on  0e:^cti,  to  go  away. 

%  Caused  or  prepared. 


mREGULAH   verbs:    third   CONJUGATIOiTi 


123 


Thus  are  conjugated:  Beflci^en  (ftc^),  to  apply  one's  self;  HeU 
(^cn  *  to  fade;  gleic^en,  to  resemble;  gleUett,t  to  glide;  QXtu 
fen,i  to  seize  (grasp);  fneifert,to  pinch;  lei^en,  to  suffer;  ))feifen, 
to  whistle;  reifen,  to  tear;  reiten,  to  ride  on  horseback;  fc^leU 
cten,  to  sneak;  fc^Ieifen,*  to  grind;  f^Iei^en,  to  slit;  fd)mei§cn,  to 
throw;  fi^neiDcrt,  to  cut;  fc^reiten,  to  stride  (step);  fpleifen,  to 
split;  flrei(^en4  to  stroke  (rub);  ftreiten,  to  dispute  (quarrel, 
contend);  ireirf^en,*  to  yield;  also,  the  compounds  erHcic^crt,  to 
turn  pale;  ijerHeic^en,  to  fade,  and  t)ergleid)en,  to  compare. 


Second  Class:  Imperfect  and  Past  Participle  with  it. 

Infinitive :  S3  I  c  i  6  c  n ,  to  remain,  to  stay. 
Past  Part. :  g  e  B I  i  c  B  e  n,  staid. 


Present  (Indicative), 


3*HciBe,t)ubIei6il, 
er  UtiU 

(<3iebleiktt),fte  Hei- 
ben 


Imperfect. 


er  Uith 
SBir  Wieben,  i^r  Hickt 
(@ie6Ueben),fieHie^ 


Imperative. 


Utih,  stay  (thou) 

Unkt  or  Heikn  ©ic, 
stay  (you) 


Thus  are  conjugated:  gebei^cn,  to  thrive;  Ici^en,  to  lend; 
meit)ett,  to  avoid  (shun) ;  ^reifen,  to  praise  (extol) ;  niUn,  to 
rub;  fdjeiten,  to  separate  (part);  fd^einen,  to  shine,  appear 
(seem);  fd^reiben,  to  write;  fd)reien,  to  cry  (scream) ;  fii^njeigen, 
to  be  silent;  fpeien,  to  spit;  fteigen,  to  ascend  (mount);  treikn, 
to  drive;  weifen,  to  show;  sei^en,  to  accuse,  and  the  verb 
t)elj)en,  which  retains  the  radical  vowel  in  the  past  participle, 
get)cijjen. 


*  SSIeic^cn,  to  Ueach  ;  fc^teifcn,  to  demolish  (drag  along) ,  and  wcic^en,  to 
soften  (soak)  are  regular. 

t  SBegleitcn,  to  accompany,  is  regular. 

%  ®  r  e  i  f  c  n  and  f!  r  e  i  c^  c  n  omit  e  in  tlie  ending  of  the  second  person 
singular  of  the  present :  bu  srcifj^,  bu  [ireic^f^. 


124  IREEGULAB   VERBS:    THIRD   CONJUGATION. 

Reading  Exercise  LXII. 

$a(l  bu  bi(^  fceflijjen  Deutfd)  ju  lemen  ?  Dcr  ^unb  M§  mic^  in  tic 
ipanD.  Der  ^nabe  glitt  unt  Brac^  ein  33ein.  SSirj^  bu  i^n  grcifen? 
3(^  1^aU  »iel  gelitten,  @ie  gleii^t  i^rer  ^utttv.  3fi  ^^  geriffeit  ? 
Sr  ritt  gu  f^nelt,  3^r  j^rittet  n?ie  ipelDen,  akr  muftet  enblic^  »et(^en. 
Xer  SBittb  pfiff  burc^  tie  33dunie.  ^ajl  bu  bic^  in  ben  finger  gefd)niti: 
kn  ?  3d»  Befall  meinem  Diener  bein  SJlejyer  gu  fc^Ieifen*  ^einric^ 
Hieb  gtt)ei  ©tunten  auf  bent  ^affee^^aufe.  ^ennfl  bu  ben  35erfaffer  bcr 
jene^  33uc^  gefcbrieBen  ^at  ?  SCarum  ^afl  bu  i^n  nicfjt  gemieben  ? 
@ie  miiffen  nic^t  fc^reien,  SBie  |ei§en  ®ie  ?  ©eine  SJiutter  ^ie^ 
3o^nna.  SBenn  bu  gef^miegen  ^attefl,  wiirbej^  bu  9liemanb  Beleibigt 
f:^aUn.  (£r  pxit^  ®ott.  511^  icb  ©ie  fa^,  jlieg  i(^  m6!j  auf  ben  53erg, 
oBgleic^  bie  Sonne  fe^r  warm  fd^ien. 

Theme  LXII. 

Your  dog  bites  everybody.  We  perceived  a  large  flame. 
John  applied  himself  to  learn  German.  He  compared  my 
theme  with  yours.  He  cut  his  name  in  the  tree.  Have  you 
made  (cut)  a  pen  ?  We  strode  across  (liBer)  the  field  and 
found  a  dog.  Does  she  resemble  her  mother  ?  He  rides  too 
fast.  Did  you  suffer  much  during  your  illness  ?  Henry 
whistled.  I  cut  (myself  in  the)  my  finger.  I  commanded 
our  servant  to  sharpen  your  razor.  How  long  will  you  remain 
here  ?  I  wrote  a  letter  of  six  pages.  A  shepherd  drives  the 
sheep.  Has  (3ft)  the  flax  thriven  ?  Why  did  you  scream  ? 
The  teacher  pardoned  him.     The   good  men  praised  God. 

Conversation. 

^aUn  ©ie  ©ic^  BefliiJen  X;eutf(^  3c^  BUeB  taglid)  gmei  ©tunben  6ei 
gu  lemen  ?  meinem  2e§rer  urn  e^  gu  lemen» 

^ennen  @ie  ben  55erfajfer,  ber  3^^)  J^nn^  i^«  i^^djt,  fein  ^amt  ifl 
jenes  33uc^  gefc^rieben  ^at  ?  auf  bem  3:iteIBIatte  nic^t  ange^; 

geBen* 

SBarum  '^aben  ©ie  ben  Umgang  ©ie  fdjien  fe^r  ^bflid)  unb  e^rli(i^ 
iener  ?^rau  nid)t  gemiecen?  gu  fein. 

^lieBen  ©ie  lange  in  33erUn  ?  3i^^i  ober  brei  SJionate. 


IBBEGULAR   VERBS :   FOUBTH    CONJUGATION. 


125 


iiat  3^)nen   ter  SBec^gler    ®eft>  ^tin,  mdn  ?flad)bar  Ue^  ce  mir. 

gelie^en? 

2Cie  |ieg  3^r  D^eim?  (5r  ^ie§  Da^jibfo'^tt. 

®Ieid)ett  tt?ir  unferer  Gutter  ?  ^f^cin,  @ie  gleid^eu  3^i^em  33ater, 


LESSON   LXin.  «eftton   63* 

Fourth  Conjugation  (Imperfect  and  Past  Participle  with  o). 

Obs. — This  conjugation  has  both  in  the  imperfect  and  past 
participle  o  as  the  characterizing  vowel.  It  is  divided 
into  three  classes,  the  first  of  which  has  c  for  the  radi- 
cal vowel,  the  second  ic  {or  i),  and  the  third  the  modi- 
fied vowels  d,'6,'n,  or  the  diphthong  au. 

FiBST  Class:  Radical  Vowel  e. 
IpfinUive :  2B  e  B  e  n ,  to  weave.  Past  Part :  g  c  »  o  6  e  n,  woven. 


Present  {Indicative). 


3c^  tt?  e  b  e ,  bu  tt?eb(l, 

er  mhi 
SKtr  ttjeben,  i^r  webct 

(©icn)ebcn),pcnjeben 


Imperfect. 


j         Imperative. 


3*  tr  0  b  ,*  bu  mobfl,  webe,  weave  (thou) 

er  mob  I 

3Cir  iDobcn,  i^r  njobet  tuebet  or  tueben  ©ic 

(@ie  mobcn),|te  moben  1   weave  (you) 


Thus  are  conjugated:  beHcmmcn,  to  press  (distress);  bewe^ 
gen,  to  induce;  fec^ten,t  to  fight  (fence);  flec^ten.f  to  twist 
(plait);  ^eben,  to  lift  (raise);  melfen,  to  milk;  pflegen,  to  treat 
(cherish);  f(^eeren,  to  shear;  also,  erf(^allen,  to  resound;  and 
the  foUowing  words,  which  take  i  in  the  second  and  third 
person  singular  of  the  present  (indicative) :  quellen,  to  spring 
forth  ;  fc^meljen,  to  melt  (smelt) ;  and  fc^wcUen,  to  swell. 


*  SCBeben  is  also  regular. 

f  ?5cd)ten  and  flec^ten  take  e  in  the  ending  of  the  sacond  and  third  per- 
son of  the  present ;  as  :  bu  f  e  c^  t  e  )1 ,  etc. 


126 


lEEEGULAR   VEEBS:    FOUETH   CONJUGATION. 


Second  Class:  Radical  Vowel  ic  {or  i). 
Infinitive :  5 It c g e n ,  to  flow.   Fast  Part. :  g e f I o f f e tt,  flowed. 


Present  (Indicative.) 

Imperfect. 

Imperative. 

2^  fliegc,    tufliepejl, 

er  fliegt 
mx  fliegen,  i^r  fliegct 

(@ie  fliegen),  jle  flie^ 

gen 

3c^  m,  *«  flow, 

SBir  floffcit,  i^rflop 

(®iefloffen),nefl''f' 
fm 

fliege,  flow  (thou) 

flieget  or  fliegen  ^i(, 
flow  (you) 

Thus  are  conjugated  :  Heten,  to  offer  (bid);  geniegen,  to 
enjoy,  (er.t);  giegen,  to  pour;  [(^iegen,  to  shoot;  fdjUegen,  to  shut 
(lock);  fie^en  (fott,  gefotten),  to  boil  (seethe);  fprtegen,  to  sprout 
(germinate);  ftieben,  to  fly  off  (sparks),  to  dust,  disperse; 
tricfen  (troff,  getroffen),  to  drop  (drip);  ijcrBieten,  to  forbid;  ijer^ 
bricgen,  to  vex  (grieve);  jte^en,  to  draw  (pull);  and  the  follow- 
ing verbs  which  omit  c  in  the  ending  of  the  second  person 
singular  of  the  present:  Megen,  to  bend;  fliegen,  to  fly;  flie^en, 
to  flee;  frieren,  to  freeze;  friec^en,  to  creep  (crawl);  riedjen,  to 
smell;  f(^iekn,  to  push  (shove);  ijerlieren,  to  lose;  miegen,  to 
weigh ;  also,  glimmen,  to  ghmmer ;  flimmen,  to  climb,  and 
tertoirren,  to  entangle. 


Third  Class:  Veebs  having  the  Modified  Vowels  a,  3,  ii,  ok 
THE  Diphthong  m,  for  their  Radical  Vowels. 

Infinitive :  S rm a g e tt ,  to  consider 
Past  Part.:  c  r  to  o  g  e  n ,  considered. 


Present  (Indicative). 


3(^  ertodge,  bu  er? 

n?dgjl,  er  erwdgt 
SBir  ertodgcn,    tt)r  er:; 

mdget  (@ieern?dgcn), 

fic  erwdgen 


Imperfect. 


3c^  e rn) 0 g ,  iutx^ 

ttjogfl,  er  erwog 
2Bir  erwogen,  i^x  er? 

tooget    (®te    er»o? 

gen),  peerwogen 


Imperative. 


ermdge,  consider 

(thou) 
errndget  or  erwdgen 

<Bk,  consider 

(you) 


IRREGULAB   VERBS!   FOURTH    CONJUGATION.  127 

Thus  are  conjugated:  ga^rett,  to  ferment;  rddjen,  to  revenge; 
fd)tt)dren,  to  fester ;  wdgert,  to  weigh  ;  erlof^en,*  to  become  ex- 
tinct ;  f^ivbren,  to  swear;  ktriigen,  to  cheat  (deceive);  erturen, 
to  choose  ;  liigen,  to  he  ;  triigen,  to  deceive  ;  faufen,  to  drink  ; 
faugen,  to  suck;  f(^nauben,  to  pant,  snort. 


Reading  Exercise  LXIII. 

2Cag  knjog  tic^  tie  ^u^  ni^t  gu  mellen?  3i^  ^^^  S^ucr  eriofcfecn? 
^ie  Ool^aten  ^aBen  tapfer  gefo(^ten,  ^iefe^  ^orBd^en  ijt  fc^cn  ge? 
floc^ten*  ^annft  Du  e5  ^cben  ?  3c^  fan^  ^ ^  nid)t  fe^r  [corner  al^  id) 
c^  ^oB.  Sarum  liigft  tu  ?  3c^  ^<iBe  nicBt  gelogen.  SBann  mirjl 
tu  unfere  ©d)afc  fc^eeren  ?  2Cer  l)dt  biefe^J  2:uc^  genjoben  ?  !Dag 
^fer^  fduft  ju  ijiel  SSajJer.  Xer  ©d)ein  triigt.  (Er  Bctrog  mid)  nur 
einmal.  Der  3«bf  Bot  ntir  ncunjig  2:^aler  fiir  mein  ^ferD.  ^ann 
fcein  5SbgeI(^en  fliegen  ?  !I)ic  ^^oni^icr  genoffeit  i^r  einfac^e^  9}?at}l. 
Der  0l^ein  friert  felten.  ^aft  bu  je  ^uloer  gcrodBen  ?  ©ieben  bie 
^artoffettt?  ^a,  fic  merben  Balb  gefotten  fein.  SBir  jogen  in  bic 
(Sd)la^t  unb  f^njoren  gu  ftegen  ober  gu  flerBen,  ^a^  bu  bein  ®elb 
terloren?  S^  warwo^l  ermogen*  2^ie  ^ferbe  fc^noBem  3fi  ^^  g^go^reu ? 

Theme  LXIII. 

What  induced  you  to  leave  Germany  ?  Will  the  light  of 
the  sun  ever  become  extinct?  We  have  shorn  our  sheep. 
He  milks  the  cow.  The  soldiers  fought  bravely,  they  swore 
to  conquer  or  to  die,  not  one  soldier  fled.  The  fire  ghmmers 
long.  The  bees  suck  honey  from  flowers.  You  must  never 
lie.  The  river  is  swoUen.  Who  has  woven  this  cloth  ?  This 
Jew  does  not  cheat.  The  wagon  bent  under  the  weight  I 
offered  120  dollars  for  the  horse.  The  hunter  shot,  and  the 
bird  flew  away  (baijon).  We  enjoyed  our  supper.  The  rain 
poured  in  streams.  The  door  does  not  lock.  The  snakes 
creep.  The  rose  smells  agreeably.  The  potatoes  are  frozen. 
What  are  you  boiling  ?  My  uncle  has  lost  all  his  money. 
The  leeches  suck  blood.  Does  it  screw  ?  The  fire  melted 
them.     It  is  forbidden  to  smoke  here. 

*  Cofc^en  and  »crlof(^cn,  to  extinguish,  are  regular. 


128  nffiEGULAB  verbs:  fefth  conjugation. 

Conversation. 

SCad  Bewog  <Bk  Deutf(^lanl>  ju    3c%  fonnte  feine  Meit  finben. 

ttcrlajfen  ? 
ipaben  tie  ©olcatcrt   tapfer  ge^    ©ie  foc^ten  wie  ipelren,  benn  jtc 
foc^ten  ?  fatten  gef(!^ivoren,  gu  (tegcn  oter 

gu  fterBm. 
^bnnen  ©ie  tiefen  (Stein  ^tUn  ?     ^f^ciit,  er  ifi  gu  [corner  fiir  mi^, 

ater  ntein  Dnfel  ^at  it)n  gc^oben. 
$akn  ©ie  tiefed  2:uc^  gewoben  ?      9lein,  ter  3;u^macfcer  ^at  eg  ge:= 

n?oten; 
2Bann  fc^ecrcn  8ic  3()re  ©c^aafe  ?    2Cir  ^aben  j?e  immer  im  ^rii^ja^r 

gefdjoren. 
fBerben  tie  ^artoffeln  batD  gefot^    ©ic  n?erten  in  trei  3Kinuten  ge^ 
im  fein  ?  fotten  fcin. 


LESSON  LXIV.  I^eftwn  64* 

Fifth  Conjugation  (Kadical  Vowel  i  [or  it],  Imperfect 
with  a  [or  u]). 

Obs. — ^This  coujugation  is  divided  into  three  classes,  all  of 
which  have  i  for  their  radical  vowel.  In  the  imper- 
fect t  changes  to  o.  In  the  past  participle  i  changes 
in  the  first  class  to  u,  in  the  second  to  o,  and  in  the 
third  to  e. 

FiKST  Class:  Past  Participle  with  u. 

Infinitive:  33  i  n t)  e n ,  to  bind,  tie. 
Past  Part. :  g  e  b  n  n  t  e  n ,  bound. 


Present  {Indicative). 


3d)binte,t)uHnte^ 

er  bintet 
SBtrbinten,  i^r  bintet 

(©iebintcn);  ficbin^ 

ten 


Imperfect.  i  Imperative. 


3d)  b  ant ,  tu  bantfl,  |  binte,  bind  (thou) 
er  bant 


3Cir  banten,  i^r  bantet 
((5ie  banten;,  fie 
Banten 


bintet  or  binten  ©ic, 
bind  (you) 


IRREGUAR    verbs:    FIFTH   CONJUGATION. 


129 


Thus  are  conjugated:  bringen*  to  urge  (press);  empftnten, 
to  feel;  pnCen,  to  find;  gelingen,  (impers.),  to  succeed;  fUngen,* 
to  sound  (tinkle);  ringen,t  to  wrestle  (wring);  fd)Ungen*  to 
sling,  twine;  fcbwinten,  to  vanish,  disappear;  fdjwingm,*  to 
swiDg;  fingen  *  to  sing;  ftnfen  *  to  sink;  fpringcn,*  to  spring, 
jump,  crack;  (linlcu  *  to  stink;  trinfen,*  to  drink;  Winten,  to 
wind ;  att^ingctt,  to  compel  (force)  ;  tingen,*  t)ung,  get)Uttgen,  to 
hire;  and  fd)intcn,  f(^unc,  gefd)Utttctt,  to  flay. 

Second  Class  :  Past  Participle  with  o. 
Infinitive :  S3  e  g  i  n  n  e  n ,  to  begin. 
Fast  Part.:  bcgonnen,  begun. 


Present  {Indicative). 


3c^  beginne,  lu  Be? 

ginnft  cr  kginnt 
SBir  kginnen,  i^rbe^ 

ginnet(@iebeglnnen), 

fie  beginnen 


Imperfect. 


3d)  b  e  g  tt  n  n ,  tu  Bc; 

gating  cr  fcegann 
2Btr  kgannen,  i^r  Be^ 

gannet  (©ic  began? 

nen),  jle  begannen 


Imperative. 


beginnc,  begin 
(thou) 

beginnet  orbeginnen 
(Bie,  begin  (3'ou) 


Thus  are  conjugated:  beflnnen,  to  reflect,  (recollect);  entrinnen, 
to  escape;  geirinnen,  to  gain  (win);  rinnen,  to  leak  (flow); 
fd^wimmen,  to  swim;  (tnnen,  to  meditate;  fpinncn,  to  spin. 

Third  Class:  Past  Participle  with  c. 

Infinitive:  bitten,  to  beg,  request 
Past  Part. :  g  e  b  c  t  e  n ,  begged. 


Present  (Indicative). 


3d5  bitte,  t)U  bitteft, 

er  btttet 
mt  bitten,    i^r  btttet 

(<3ie  bitten),  fie  bitten 


Imperfect. 


3*    bttt,   tu  batefi, 

cr  bat 

mx  Utm,  i^r  batet 

(©iebaten),  fie  baten 


Imperative. 


bitte,  beg  (thou) 

bittet  or  bitten  (Sic, 
request  (you) 


*  The  verbs  marked  with  an  *  omit  c  in  the  ending  of  the  second  and 
third  person  singular  of  the  present :  bu  bringjlf  er  bringt. 
+  Umtingcn,  to  surround,  is  regular. 


130  IRREGULAR    VERBS:   FIFTH    CONJUGATION. 

Thus  are  conjugated  :  Uegcn  *  to  lie  down;  ft^en,  fa§,  gefeffcit, 
to  sit;  and  the  compound  verb  U[ii^tn,  kfaf,  kfeffen,  to  possess. 


Reading  Exercise  LXIV. 

^afl  bu  ta«  33aumd^en  an  einen  ^fa^t  gebun^cn?  3^  f<int' 
Sert^olt  im  ^affee^aufc.  !Dic  ^reugcn  Drangcit  auf  Sajfcnftiaj^anD, 
!Die  ^ugel  ift  X>m  ©olcaten  tur^  ta^  SBein  getrungen.  Da5  5)ferti 
unferes  S'laAbar^  fprang  iiber  einen  :§o^en  2^m,  ©ofrate^  tranf  ten 
®ift6e(!^er»  2©er  ^at  tic^  gejwungen  e^  ju  t^un?  Da0  ©Aiff  fan! 
gejiem  2lben^,  wd^renD  mir  un3  unter^ielten.  2Bir  werDen  fpielen,  ftn? 
gen  unt  trinfen*  3c^  bitte  bi^  e«  ni^t  ju  t^un»  SJei^t  bu  wer  i^n 
getungen  :^at  ?  'Da^  ®elt)  Hingt,  tie  ®Io(f e  tont.  Se^nnft  tu  t)id) 
feiner  nic^t?  ^ie  '^xautn  unD  5Jidt)d)en  ^aben  SBIumenfrdnje  genjun^ 
ten,  urn  Me  tapferen  ©olcaten  su  fdjmiiifen.  3Bag  bewog  ©ic  na(^ 
2lmeri!a  ju  fommen  ?  ^^iJc^ten  t)ic  (Soloaten  nid^t  ttjie  ^elcen  ?  (Bie 
Ibnnen  Uefen  (Stein  nic^t  auf^eben,  er  ifl  ^u  firmer  fiir  @ie,  SBir  '^a^; 
ben  biefed  3;uc^  gemoben.  l^er  SSec^^Ier  »irb  3^tten  ©elclei^en.  Senn 
©ie  un  Umgang  jene^  ?0^anne^  gemieten  l^dtten,  wiirten  ©ie  reicbcr 
fein,  5)u  ^afl  bi^  beflijjen  teutfc^  ju  (ernen,  je|t  foUfl  fcu  franjopfdj 
lernen*  Sejfen  ©rammati!  (grammar)  ^aben  <Bk  gebrau(^t 
(used)? 

Theme  LXIV. 

I  cannot  find  my  dictionary,  do  you  know  where  it  is? 
The  bDokbinder  has  taken  it,  he  will  bind  it.  Your  dog  has 
bitten  me.  His  sister  was  called  Mary.  How  long  did  you 
remain  at  the  coffee-house  ?  What  did  the  German  teacher 
give  thee  ?  Have  you  seen  the  blind  man  ?  Did  you  know 
that  I  had  been  at  Paris  ?  They  catch  mice  with  bacon  or 
cheese.  I  advise  you  to  go  to  Berlin  to  learn  German.  He 
is  very  lazy,  he  does  not  tell  the  truth.     Did  you  drink  any 

*  See  note  on  page  129. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS:    FIFTH    CONJUGATION.  131 

beer  ?  We  bound  the  thief  hand  (plur.)  and  foot  (plur.). 
Emma  sings  beautifully.  Tlie  dog  jumped  over  the  table. 
Who  forced  you  to  become  (a)  soldier?  If  the  captain  had 
been  cautious,  the  ship  would  not  have  (fein)  sunk.  Lord 
Byron  swam  across  (liber)  the  Hellespont  {ac.m).  The  servant 
sat  by  the  door.  The  poor  man  begged  me  to  help  him. 
Where  did  the  apple  lie  ?  Do  you  know  who  has  hired  that 
man?  Do  you  recollect  how  much  I  owe  you?  We  medi- 
tated jail  (ithe)  aday.  Our  neighbor  possessed  much  land, 
but  he  has  lost  it.     Who  has  spun  this  flax  ? 

Conversation. 

2Bo  fanbfl  bu  ba^  ^inb  ?  3d)  fant)  es  f^Iafenb  untcr  eincm 

33aumc. 

2Cci§t  bu,  tuc^^alb  tie  Jirompetcn  Vk  Jrompcten  crtlattgctt  unb  btc 

crflangcrt  nm  lit  %al)ntn  gc^        gafcnen    mintw    gefd)n?un(jen, 

fc^wungen  njurbcn  ?  treil  r»er  ^a\\n  nal)ctc. 

2Ba^  ^abtn  @ic    geftern  Slbenb  Sir  fpielten,  fangcit  unb  tranfcn. 

getktt  ? 

Sefmnen  ©tc  ftd)  meiner  ?  ^tin,  i^  beftnne  mic^  ^^xtx  nt*t. 

^at  bcr  ^ric(^  fd)on  fcegonnen  ?  3^^  ^r  kgnnn  im  (^riibjak. 

^aben  (Sie  mcinen  33ebicntcn  gc:?  9Zein,  id)  glaubc,  raj)  er  liigt. 

bungcn  ? 

SBerben  ©ic    mid)  gtuingen  ben  3<^trugi§ttfelber»orcincr@tuntc 

S3ricf  auf  bic  ^Poft  ju  tragen  ?  ba^in,  fonft  triirte  id)  eg  t^un. 

^elang  ed  3^n^«  bie  ©locfe  au  5^etn,  i(^  mar  ni(i^t  ftar!  genug. 

Iduten  ? 

Sntrann  ber  ©efangene  unferen  (Er  entraun  i^ncn,  aUx  fie  finfjcn 

©olcaten  ?  il^n  mieber  nac^  einer  ©tunrc. 

Reading  Lesson. 

etn 2:9rattn  fallt*  ben ©eift  frii^er  ai& ben  ^brpcr  an; *  ic^  meine, 
cr  fu(^t  fcine  (Sfla^en  ^or^erf  tumm  ju  macfcen,  e^'  er  fte  elenc  matt}t, 
meil  er  ttjei§,  ^ag  2eute,  tie  einen  ,Kopf  ^aben,  i^re  Jptoe  Jamit  re^ 

«  g  a  lit— an,  eep.  verb  anfallen,  to  attack.        f  First 


132  COMPOUND  verbs:  sep arables. 

jteren  unb  fic  gegen  ben  ^^i^ranncn  a  u  f  ^  e  b  c  n.  !Der  ipen!er  a  1^  mt 
t^m  n  a  ^  unb  » c  r  b  i  n  b  e  t  *  bent  ^iiJet^ater  Die  Slugen  bettor  cr  t^n 
foltert  3ticfeter  (3ean  ^aul). 

@ttcr!$entanb. 

T!te  ?^ret^eit  ttnb  bie  ©onne  ge^cn  ntemal^  unter  auf  ber 
5rbe;  fonbern  nur  ewig  auf»  ^ort  i^r^f  baj  Die  (Sonne  fterbenc  e  r-- 
t'(ci(^et  uttD  im  Djean  entfc^laft,  ober  bie  grei^eit;  foj  Mirft 
:\i\&j  2lmerita,  ba  gldnjt  morgenfrifd^  §  bie  @onne,  «nb  neben  i^r  bie 
jrei^ett*  SR  i  (^  t  e  r  (3ean  ^aul). 


LESSON  LXV.  «efttott  63. 

Compound  Verbs. 

Obs.  I. — In  German  most  verbs  permit  certain  particles, 
adverbs  or  prepositions,  to  be  prefixed  to  them, 
and  thus  become  compound  vet-bs.  There  are  three 
classes  of  compound  verbs.  In  the  first  the  prefix 
is  in  certain  tenses  detached  from  the  verb;  in  the 
second  it  is  inseparable,  and  in  the  third  it  may 
be  separated  or  not. 

Separable  Compound  Verbs. 

Obs.  n. — Verbs  whose  pre^f?s  have  a  signification  of  their 
own  (generaUy  prepositions  or  adverbs)  alid  have 
the  primary  or  full  accent,  are  called  separable 
compound  verbs. 

Obs.  ni. — The  prefixes  are  detached,  and  placed  at  the  end 
of  the  sentence  (except  when  there  is  a  conjunction 
or  relative  pronoun  in  the  sentence),  in  the  present 
and  imperfect  indicative  and  in  the  imperative. 

*  Covers.  f  If  you  hear.  t  Then.  §  In  fuU  splendor. 


COMPOUND   verbs:    SEPARiVBLES.  133 

Conjugation  of  a  Separable  Verb. 
Sludge  Vw, to  go  out. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present  Tense. 
3ci^  ge^^c  avi^,  I  go  out  SBir  ge^en  au&,  we  go  out 

tu  ge^t  au.%  thou  goes  out  i^r  ge|et  aug.   )  ^^^ 

er  ge^t  au^,  he  goes  out  ©ie  ge^ett  aud,  J 

jlc  (ed)  ge^t  aud,  she  ( it)  goes  out     jte  ge^en  aud,  they  go  out 

Imperfect.  3c^  gtng  aud,  I  went  out,  etc. 

1st  Future.  ^&i  trertc  au^ge|en,  I  shall  go  out.. 

1st  Conditional.      3<^  'caviXU  audge^en,  I  should  go  out. 

Peifect.  '^^  ^ in  ayx^t^ario^tn,  1  have  gone  owi. 

Pluperfect.  3d)  i^<ir  au^gegangen,  I  had  gone  out. 

2nd  Future.  3c^    liJCT^c    au^gegangen  fein,    I  shall  have 

gone  out. 
2nd  Conditional    3<^  ttiixxU  au^gegangcn  fein,  I   should  have 

gone  out. 

IMPERATIVE. 

©e^e— au(8,  go  (thou)  out  gefen  Sie  }  ~^"^'  ^°  ^^^^^  °^^ 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present.  Sludge^cnti.  going  out.     Pos^.  2lu3gcgangcn,  gone  out. 

Obs.  rV. — The  prefix  gc  of  the  past  participle  always  remains 
next  to  the  verb,  so,  that  its  place  is  between  the 
particle  and  the  verb. 

Obs.  V.  — The  separable  particles  are  the  prepositions,  a  6, 
an,  auf,  au^,  &ei.  mit,  in,  nacfo,  »cr,  gu ;  the  adverbs, 
tar,  cin,  empor,  fe^I,  fort,  '^tm,  fcer,  "^in,  lo^,  nieter,  njeg, 
guriicf,  ^ufammen ;  or  ba,  ^in,  \)tx  and  ttor,  compounded 
with  prepositions  or  adverbs  ;  as,  bobei,  ^iitauf, 
Jcra^  Doran. 

Obs.  VI. — The  prefix  is  not  separated  from  the  verb  in  ac- 
cessory sentences  beginning  with  a  relative  pro- 
noun or  a  subordinative  conjunction,  because 
these  require  the  verb  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 


134  COMPOUND  verbs:  sepahablks. 

Reading  Exercise  LXV. 

3c^  reifc  ^eutc  ab.  ®e|ett  ©ie  morgen  au5  ?  ^6>  ging  geflem  au^ ; 
trenn  tag  Setter  ni^t  fo  fc^Iec^t  mtt  toixxU  i6>  au^  ^eute  au^ge^en* 
(SoE  i(^  bieff  Slufgabe  abfc^rei&eit*  <Sc^rieB  grieDric^  tie  feinige  ah  ? 
SJ^adbe  tag  t^enjter  auf.  ipajl  tu  tag  ^adfet  aufgemadjt  ?  Seld)en 
Sicd  3te^ft  tu  an?  3cfc  ^^^^^  teine  neuen  ipofen  anste^en.  3d)  t^eilte 
i^m  eine  angene^me  9lad)n(^t  mit»  3(^  ttJoUte  3^nen  geftern  ten  3^- 
l^alt  tiefeg  SSricfeg  ntitt^eilen,  aber  <Sie  !amen  nid)t,  Sarum  fc^icftc 
cr  ttefeg  33u(^  auriid?  Urn  mie  t>iel  U^r  fte^en  @ie  auf  ?  ®ie  fint 
urn  »ier  U|r  angefommen,  2)er  33e^iente  fc^lop  tie  2:pre  mir  iwr  tier 
S^lafe  (m  my  face)  gu*    3d)  na|m  fein  ^Inerbieten  an. 

Theme  LXV. 

"When  will  you  set  out  (depart)  ?  I  shall  depart  to-morrow; 
my  uncle  sets  out  with  me.  Are  you  going  out  ?  John  in- 
troduced hiss  friends  to  (bet)  me.i  Do  not  detain  me  longer. 
Did  you  put  on  your  boots  or  shoes  ?  I  was  not  dressed 
when  they  went  out.  Henry  always  shuts  his  room.  I 
cannot  open  the  door.  My  sister  put  on  her  black  silk  dress. 
I  shall  send  you  (Dat.)  back  the  book  which  you  lent  me. 
Do  you  copy  all  these  exercises  ?  I  shall  communicate  to 
you  agreeable  news.  Get  up,  Sir.  I  cannot  get  up  very 
early.     I  am  sick  and  tired. 

Conversation. 

2Ber  fc^rieb  tiefe  Slufgakn  ab  ?         ^art  f(^rieb  tie  meiften  aK 
SBann  famen  @ie  ^ier  an  ?  S3ir  fmt  ^eute    SKorgen    ange;? 

lommen. 
SCertctt  ®ie  mein  Slnerbieten  an^    3d)  n>erte  eg  mit  SBergniigcn  an^^ 

ne^men  ?  ne^^men. 

i^akn  ©ie  ^^xt  S3raut  suriicfbe^    ©ie  wirt  erft  am  Dienfiag  a^ 

gleitet  ?  reifen. 

SBarum  tkilten  8ie  tiefe  S^lac^^:    3c^  trollte  fie   3|tten  mitt^eiten, 

ric^t  meinem  33ruter  mit  ?  aBer  i^  fant  @ie  nic^t  gu  ipaufe. 

©oU  ic^  tie  genfter  aufmai^en  ?        91ein,  eg  ift  gu  fait,  mac^en  <Bit 

tie  3:^ure  auf. 


COMPOUND  verbs:  inseparables.  135 

LESSON  LXVI.  2eftwn  66* 

Compound  Inseparable  Verbs, 

Obs.  I. — Compound  inseparable  verbs  are  formed  by 
prefixing  to  the  simple  verbs  prepositions  or  ad- 
verbs having  only  the  secondary  accent,  or  un- 
accented syllables  that  are  without  any  meaning  of 
their  own. 

Obs.  n. — The  prefixes  of  the  inseparable  verbs  are  the  un- 
accented syllables  be,  emp,  ent,  er,  »er,  ger,  ge,  mi§,  the 
preposition  xoiltx,  and  the  adverbs  »otI  and  Winter.* 

Obs.  m. — The  inseparable  verbs  riever  admit  of  the  prefix 
gc  in  the  past  participle;  (as  jerftort  and  not  gejer^ 
ftbrt),  and  are  conjugated  like  simple  verbs.  If 
regular,  according  to  the  rules  in  Lesson  LI,  and  if 
irregular,  according  to  those  in  Less*     LX — LXIV. 

Obs.  IV. — The  following  verbs  compounded  with  nouns,  ad- 
verbs or  other  prefixes,  arc  also  inseparable^  but 
take,  contrary  to  the  general  rule  (see  Observa- 
tion ni),  the  prefix  gc  in  the  past  participle,  and 
have  the  primary  accent  on  these  prefixes, 
argnjo^en,  to  suspect  atttttjcrtcn,  to  answer 

fro^locien,t  to  exult  rat^fd^Iagen,  to  deliberate 

frulfliicfen,  to  breakfast  rec^tfertigen,  to  justify 

^an^^akn,  to  handle,  maintain    urt^eilen,  to  judge,  criticize 
l)eirat^en,  to  marry  meiffagen,  to  prophesy 

(iebaugein,  Uebfofen,  to  caress        ttjctteifern,  to  emulate 
mut^ma^en,  to  conjecture,  guess    ttJi(Ifa^ren,t  to  gratify 


*  The  last  four  prefixes,  when  serving  to  compound  a  noun  or  ad- 
jective, have  the  primary  accent. 

t  The  two  verbs  fro^lotfen  and  wittfa^rcn  mostly  omit  tne  prefix  q  c  in 
the  past  participle. 


136  COMPOUND  verbs:  inseparables. 

Reading  Exercise  LXYI. 

(Eitt  dimtx  jcrjtbrte  ten  2;empeL-  2Bir  mxlm  immcr  ten  SSerlufl 
Uttfered  ^reunbcg  fcettjeinen*  Srlennjl  tu  mic^  ?  ^er  2^icb  cntrif  mir 
ten  33eutel  unt»  uerfc^want*  Siirtiefl  bu  i^n  nic^t  mtt  cinem  '^Slantd 
Beteden?  ^tmv  9leifcnbc  ijl  ein  S3etruger,  er  fcetriigt  S^termann. 
3jl  ter  ©olDat  tjermunbet  ?  ipafcen  @ie  unfere  2lufgabcn  »erbe|[ert  ? 
2Bir  er^alten  jeten  ©amftag  {or  ©onnabent)  cinen  sBrief;  manc^mal 
auc^  am  Dienjlag.  3c^  ^iirte  3^nen  tic  3^itunc5en  gefc^icft  ^aben, 
Jpa(l  tu  etne  Slntnjort  auf  teinen  33rief  er^aUen?  @ie^  ttc^  »or,  tad 
^fert  fd^lagt  and.  (Sc^lage  eln  Slatt  urn,  tad  5>apicr  fd)tagt  turc^. 
SBer  njeiffagte  tie  3fi^ftofUtt9  3cntfalem5  ?  5i}?an  ^at  mir  tie  ©tetlc, 
ijon  ter  ©ie  fprec^en,  angetragen.     S^c^t  tie  U§r  auf. 

Theme  LXYI. 

The  poor  woman  covered  her  hands  with  a  cloth.  The 
merchant,  whose  son  is  in  Berhn,  loses  everything.  This 
thoughtless  girl  has  broken  her  parasol.  The  professor  is 
correcting  your  exercise,  he  will  probably  tear  it.  Henry 
will  probably  lose  his  mother,  she  is  very  ill.  Your  neighbor 
cheats  everybody.  The  diligent  scholars  will  be  rewarded. 
The  Eomans  destroyed  Carthage.  Did  you  understand  me  ? 
Our  king  abdicated  in  favor  (^u  ©unften)  of  his  son.  Have 
you  received  your  newspaper  ?  Frederick  is  very  thought- 
less, he  neglects  everything.  Dr.  Johnson  has  criticized  my 
book  very  favorably  (giinftig).  This  young  man  has  misused 
our  confidence.  Would  your  sister  marry  her  cousin  ?  Many 
physicians  in  tliis  country  are  quacks. 

Conversation. 

gr^Iten  <Bit  oft  S3riefe  ^on  2^xtx  Sir  cr^alten    jetcn   T:Dnnerfiag 

3;DC^ter  ?  einen  33ricf. 

^aUn  tie   i^einte    unfere  ©tatt  @ie  ^erjibrten  Mt^,  felt^fl  {even) 

gerftbrt?  tad  (?c^lo§. 

^ajl  tu  mic^  ^erftanten  ?  9lein,  i&i  ^vtt  ni(^t  mad  ©ie  fagten. 

Ser  l)at  tiefen  Spiegel  jerbroc^en?  3<^  i^ft§  e$  nidst. 


COMPOUND   VEKBS:    SEPABABLE3   AND   INSEPARABLES.  137 

§at  iperr  Dr.  ^o^nfon  3^r  S3u(^  3a  mctn  iperr,  er  ^at  ti  \t^T  giinjlig 

kurt^etlt?  Beurt^eilt. 

ipat  ter  ^rofeiJor  unfere  Slufgaben  (Er  ift  noc^  nict)t  fertig,  er  ijcrbcflfert 

»erbejyert  ?  ft^  eben. 

SRecfctfertigte  bcr  junge  ^ann  tai  ^dn.  er  miprauc^tc  eg  unt)  Betrog 

2>crtrauen,  t)a5  i^r  in  it)n  fe^tet  ?        un^. 

2Ca5yerurfa(^tefogro§en(S(^rc(fen  !Die  5f?ad)ri(^t  'oon  bent  ©lege  ber 

in  curer  <Btalt  ?  geinDe. 

Urn  wic  »iel  U^r  frii||Hcfen  @ie  ?  Sir  frii^ftucfett  ge»o^n(i(i^  urn  fle^ 

kn  U^r. 


LESSON   LXVII.  !Qc7twn  67* 

Separable  and  Inseparable  Verbs. 

Obs.  L^Verbs  compounded  with  turd^,  iibcr,  unter,  um 
and  11?  i  e  t  e  r ,  are  either  separable  or  inseparable 
according  as  they  have  the  primary  or  secondary 
accent. 

Obs.  IL— Verbs  retaining  their  original  meaning  and  that  of 
the  prefix  have  the  primary  accents  on  the  prefix 
and  are  separable,  while  those  that  have  a  figurative 
meaning,  have  the  secondary  accent  on  the  prefix 
and  the  primary  accent  on  the  verb^  and  are  inse- 
parable. 

Examples.* 

Separable.  Inseparable. 

Inx^ QtM^,  to  run  away  iDnrd^  g  e ^  c  rt ,  to  peruse 

ii  b  e  r  fe^en,  to  cross  iiBcr  f  e  ^  e  n ,  to  translate 

ii  b  e  r  laufen,  to  run  over  iiber  b  r  i  n  g  e  n ,  to  deliver 

u  n  t  e  r  jie^en,  to  go  under  shelter  unter  ft  e  |  e  n  ,  to  dare 

u  m  merfen,  to  upset  um  a  r  m  e  n  ,  to  embrace 

ttj  i  c  ^  e  r  ^olen,  to  bring  back  wicter  ^  o  I  c  n  ,  to  repeat 

*  Most  verbs  admit  of  both  the  separable  and  inseparable   form, 
but  some  are  either  separable  or  inseparable  only. 


138    ^    COMPOUND  verbs;  separables  and  inseparables. 

Reading  Exercise  LXYIL 

fyibtn  ®ie  ^l)v  3Sor ^aBen  t  ur  (^  gefe^t?  !Ea3  ^ferb  unfere^  ^a^fi 
bar3  ging  b  u  r  c^.  2Sir  irerben  ttac^  einer  (Stunt)C  u  m  fe^ren, 
Sarf  Da^  ^ferb,  als  e^  b  u  r  d)  ging,  ben  SBagen  u  m  ?  S^a^  ©c^iff, 
in  njeld)cm  tuir  s>on  T;eut|"d)Iant)  lamen,  ging  u  n  t  e  r.  !Ete  SJlitd^ 
Iduft  liber,  ipafl  bu  bie  Slwfgabe  iiBerie^t?  I^er  (Sc^iffer  fe^te 
iibcr  ben  ^lup.  Xiefe  gwei  i^^eunbe  umarmten  fid).  SBerben 
@ie  !I)cutfc^lanb  unb  i$ran!retc^  burdjretfen?  2lm  Dienflag  merre 
i^  b  u  r  c^  ^ari^  reifen.  (S^  wirb  regnen.  mir  ntiiffen  u  n  t  c  r  fle^en, 
!Die  9lbmer  unter  j  o  c^  t  en  »iel^  33blfer.  ©critter  unb  ®oet^e  ixUx^ 
t  r  e  f  f  e  n  aUt  beutfcben  !Di(^ter. 

Theme  LXYIL 

Who  has  translated  Goethe's  Faust  ?  I  have  a  mind  to 
cross  the  river.  Our  emperor  has  passed  through  the  whole 
empire.  I  pray  you  to  come  again.  Have  you  carried  through 
your  design  ?  The  boat  is  sinking,  we  must  leave  it.  The 
boy  has  upset  the  table.  I  returned  after  two  hours.  The 
horse  ran  away  and  upset  the  wagon.  When  shall  we 
return?  Schiller  excelled  all  German  poets  in  depth  of 
feeling.  Who  will  instruct  you  during  the  winter  ?  That 
water  is  boiling,  it  will  run  over.  My  uncle  and  his  brother 
have  traveled  all  over  France.  Examine  that  trunk.  Could 
you  undertake  this  ? 

Conversation. 

^aben  ©le  ©oet^e'g  ©ebi^te  iiBer^  9lein,    id)  »crfle^e  niti^t  X)eutfc^ 

fe^t?  gcnug. 

©aglen   ©ie,   bag  ©dottier  aHe  3^  fagte,  ba§  er  pe'an  Jiefe  beS 

beutfdjen  I)i(^ter  iibertrifft  ?  ©efii^I^  ubertrijft. 

3ft  bled  ber  (Sc!^iffer,  teener  une  9lein,  it^  glaubc  er  ijl  ca  nic^t. 

iiberfe^te  ? 

SBad  t^aten  <Bxt  aU  ti  regnete  ?  2Cir  finb  untergeflanben* 

SBirp  bu  l^eutfAIanb  unb  fRn^^  3($  n?erbe  t^  tUn,  menn  ic^  ®eft) 

(anb  burdsreifen  ?  genug  ^ahn  mcrbe, 

3ft  bad    ^ferb    eured  S'Zadjbarg  g^  ging  burc^  unb  warf  ben  ^a^ 

burdbgcgangen  ?  gen  urn. 


PEEPOSITIONS   YvlTn   DATIVE   OR  ACCUSATIVE.  139 

Reading  Lesson, 
©cif^iel  tion  ^nt^altfamfcit. 

Slleyanber  bcr  ®ro^e  tarn  auf  feinem 3^9^ *  tie  SBelt  juerobern, 
turd)  cine  lange  (Santwiifte  Slften^,  in  fcer  pd)  nirgentsJ  SSajJcr  B  e^^ 
f  an  1. 1  (Entlic^  ^atte  ein  8oltat  ettua^  a  u  f  (j  e  f  u  n  t  e  n  unt) 
brad)te  e3  in  feinem  ipelm  bent  Sllcyanber.  T)a  biefer  akv  fa^,  baf 
feine  ©oltaten  e&enfc  wie  er  »or  !Durft  lec^jten  i>ra(^  er:  „@oli  ic^  rer 
gingigc  fein,  ber  ba  trinft  ?"  unD  gog  bag  SCaffcr  auf  bie  Srbe,  3llle, 
sjoH  Semunberung  iiber  bie  Snt^altfamleit  beg  ^bnigg,  riefen:  J  „2luf ! 
flit) re  ung  fortI§  mir  finb  nic^t  ermattet;  n?ir  fmbnic^tburj^ig; 
toix  ^alten  ung  nic|t  fiir  fterHic^,  fo  lange  uni  ein  fo((^er  ^bnig  fii^rt." 

^einfiug* 


LESSON   LXVIII.  ^eftivn  68. 

Prepositions  Governing  the  Dative  or  Accusative. 

Obs.  I. — The  following  nine  prepositions  require  the  dative 
when  the  verb  in  the  sentence  imphes  rest  or  motion 
in  a  place,  answering  to  the  question  "  Where  ? " 
and  the  accusative,  when  it  expresses  a  direction  or 
motion  from  one  place  to  another,  answering  to  the 
question  "Whither?" 

an,  at,  in,  on,  to  u  b  e  r  ,  over,  above,  across 

auf,  on,  upon  ii  n  t  e  r  ,  under,  among 

Winter,  behind  .  »  o  r  ,  before,  ago 

in ,  in,  into  3  n?  i  f  (^  e  n ,  between 
n  e  B  eti ,  by  the  side  of,  near 

*  Expedition. 

f  fSt^-befanb,  iJiere  was  to  be  found. 

t  0i  i  e  f  e  n  is  here  equivalent  to  au^riefcn,  exclaimed, 

§  Up,  let  us  hence ! 


140  CONTRACTION    OF   PREPOSITIONS   WITH   ARTICLE. 

Contraction  of  Prepositions  with  the  Definite  Article, 

Obs.  II. — Some  prepositions  are  frequently  contracted  with 
the  last  letter  of  the  definite  article  into  one  word, 
and  are  in  very  general  use.     They  are: 


an  bcm    into 

am* 

an.ba^      into  ang 

hi  tern      „ 

Uim 

auftad       „     aufj 

in  fcem       „ 

im 

tur(^  bal    „     turc^g 

ijon  tern    „ 

»om 

fiir  tad       „      fiirg 

gu  tent      „ 

h^wt 

in  tad         „     ing 

m  ^er 

gur 

urn  tad       „     nmg 

»or  ta«     „ 

i)or| 

iikr  tad     „     iiberg 

Reading  Exercise  LXVIII. 

T^ai  T^ienflmatdsen  ge^t  an  ten  33ntnnen;  fie  mirt  2Baj[er  ^olcn. 
2Bir  flanten  lange  am  (or  an  tern)  ^enfler.  ^er  ^yiaurcr  [ieigt  aui 
tad  (or  aufd)  5^ac^.  X)ad  ^SBgeld^en  ft^t  auf  tern  33aume.  5)^eine 
9}Zii^e  ifl  ind  (or  in  tad)  Gaffer  gefatten.  Xtx  2eid)nam  Itegt  noi^ 
im  (or  in  tern)  SBaffer.  l:er  S^ig^r  P^Qte  ft^  Mnter  tie  ?0^auer. 
^afl  tu  teinen  ^all  gefunten  ?  3c^  fant  i|n  ^^inter  ter  SJlauer  im 
(or  in  tern)  ©ante,  ipdngc  ten  fRod  nekn  tie  3:pre.  3^r  5D^anteI 
^dngt  neben  tern  ©piegeL  ©telle  tiefen  53Iumentopf  »ord  (or  »or  tad) 
i^enfter.  3Sor  tem  Sinter  fliegen  »iele  SSogel  iikrd  ?!J^eer.  Sad  lag 
liber  tem  ©arge  ?  Xer  ^unt  liegt  unter  tem  33ette.  @te^t  3^r  ^aud 
ni&it  anf  einem  Heinen  ipiiget,  gwifc^en  tem  ^^lujfe  unt  tem  Serge  ? 
Slid  fte  mi(^  fa^,  lief  fte  gum  ^Sater. 

Theme  LXVIII. 

My  neighbor  and  your  uncle  William  are  in  the  garden. 
We  stood  at  the  foot  of  the  hill.  Put  this  book  upon  my 
table.   We  waited  for  you  at  the  gate,  but  you  did  not  come. 

«  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  n  of  prepositions  is  merged  into  m  of  the 
article. 


PREPOSITIONS   WITH   DATIVE   OR    ACCUSATIVE. 


141 


Did  you  say  he  had  a  black  cap  on  his  head?  Pray  sifc  down 
on  this  bench.  The  fish  Hve  in  the  water  and  the  birds  in 
the  air.  The  child  which  has  fallen  into  (Ace.)  the  water  has 
been  carried  to  the  grave-yard.  Who  knocks  at  the  door? 
TeU  me  the  nearest  way  to  the  castle  (of)  Frankenstein. 
We  can  have  a  beautiful  view  over  the  valleys  on  the  moun- 
tain. My  birds  sit  on  the  roof  of  your  house.  My  cane  has 
fallen  into  the  water.  Hang  this  broom  behind  the  door  very 
near  the  window.  Are  the  flower  pots  before  the  window  ? 
Your  pupils  speak  often  of  (»Ott)  your  school. 

Conversation. 


SCo^inge^en  ©ie? 

SCe^^alb  fteigt  itx  ^aQtx  auf  itn 

33aum? 
31^  3^r  ^ut  ing  Staffer  gefaUen? 

2Co  flttt)  unfcre  Zanhtn  ? 

3fl  Sraulein  Sutfc  im  Jpaufe  obcr 

im  ©arten  ? 
Jpaben  (Sie  meinen  SJlantel  Winter 

tie  Z^ixxt  ge^dngt  ? 
2Co  '^aUn  ©ie  fciefe  33lumen  gc^ 

funten  ? 
SBarum  ge^jl  cu  fo  oft  an^  ?^en(lcr  ? 

2Ca^  l^at  ^arl  iiBer  tie  ?0^auer 

gemorfen  ? 
2ag  taa  fc^marje  Zn6^  untcr  oter 

iiber  tcm  ©arge  ? 


Sir  ge^en  iit  ten  ®artcn» 
Sr  fuct)t  ein  3SogeInej!. 

gr  flog  mir  »om  ^opfe  imt  pel 

in'^  ©affer. 
(Bit  ft^ett  auf  tern  Da^e. 
©ie  ift  meter  im  ®arten  ttoc^  im 

^aufe,  fie  ift  auf^  Sant  gegangen. 
9Zein,   i(^    '^ing    i^n   neben  ta5 

Senfter* 
S?ir  ^aBen  fic  im  S^ttc  gefunten, 

SBetl  i(^  mctnen  t^reunt  §etnri^ 

erwarte. 
Sr  I) at  feinen  33 aU  liBer  tie  ^auer 

gen?orfen. 
S^  lag  iiber  tem  ©argc  unt  h^ 

tecfte  ten  SeictyUam^ 


Reading  Lesson, 
^n  ben  2Routi. 
Slttf  bid^  BUdfet,  auf  tir  meilet  oft  mein  3lug'  *  in  fitter  Su|l,t 
^n  tir  :^aff  id^,  an  tid)  fent'  ic^  man^'  ^mU  a^^  fro^er  33ru(l. 


*  The  apostrophe  stands  in  place  of  c;  as,  Slug^ — Sluge. 
f  Enchantment. 


142  KlUUTKB  AND  INTBANSITIVE  VEEB3. 

3  tt  bi(%  fe^ct,  In  tlr  pnbet  meine  ^^antafie  ijiel  ©cencn, 

Unter  tie  p^  gem  fi(^  trdumet,  unt  er  tenen  tort  lie  [(^onen 

<SeeIen,  liber  tiefe  Srt'' er^o^et,*  uBer  ©rdbcrn  manteln. 

55  0  r  jni(^  trittf  tann,  »  o  r  mir  fle^t  tann  tcr  (£ntf^lu§,  n&jt  gut  ju 

l)anl)eltt» 
3  w  i  f  d)  e  n  biefen  ©trducben  fi^^  i^r  3  m  i  f  d)  e  n  fie  fiie()It  fi*^  !Dein 

iltlnn  mii^  pnft,  J  n  e  6  e  n  mir  ru^t  fie,  He  f^reunbin  tneincr  SBa^I ; 
i;  i  n  t  e  r  mi(%  ftill  ^ingefd)tid»en,  ftanb  fie  lad)tn'D  I)  i  n  t  e  r  mir, 
Un^  mir  reben  »on  ben  ©ternen,  unfern  2ieBen  §  unb  i?on  I)ir» 


LESSON   LXIX.  2cttwn  69* 

Neuter  and  Intransitive  Verbs. 

Obs.  I. — ^Verbs  that  ascribe  to  their  subject  a  state  or  condi- 
tion wbich  is  neither  active  nor  passive,  are  neuter; 
as,  i  (^  ft  e  ^  e,  I  stand;  i  d^  f  c^  I  a  f  e ,  I  sleep,  etc.,  and 
such  as  express  an  action  that  does  not  pass  over 
to  an  object,  are  intransitive;  as,  i  (^  I  a  u  T  e ,  1  run; 
t  cb  f  p  r  e  d)  e ,  I  speak,  etc. 

Obs.  n. — The  conjugation  of  the  neuter  and  intransitive  verbs 
does  not  differ  from  that  of  the  active  verbs,  except 
in  the  compound  tenses,  where  those  that  express  a 
mere  activity,  a  continuous  state,  without  a  change 
or  transition  of  their  subject  from  one  state  into 
another,  such  as,  I e  b  e  n ,  to  live;  f  i  ^  e  n ,  to  sit,  are 
conjugated  with  !^  a  b  e  n ,  and  those  that  express  a 
change  or  transition  of  their  subject  from  one  state 
into  another,  a  motion  from  one  place  to  another,  such 
as,  fl  e r  b  e  n ,  to  die;  g  e  ^  e  n ,  to  go,  are  conjugated 
with  f  e  i  n, 

•  That  have  been  raised  above  this  earth, 
t  Presents  itself. 

t  ©  i  n  f  t  cannot  be  rendered  literally  here  ;  the  translation  of  nt^tu 
m\6)  f  t  n  f  t  is  descends  near  me,  foUowed  by  cmd. 
§  Of  those  we  love. 


KEUTER  AND  INTRANSITIVE  VERBS. 


143 


Conjugation  of  a  Neuter  Verb. 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
1st  Future. 
1st  Conditional. 
Perfect, 


Pluperfect, 


^  0  m  m  c  tt,  to  come. 


INDICATIVE. 


2ncf  Future, 
2nd  GandUional. 


ScJ)  fomme,  I  come,  etc. 
3c^  Urn,  I  came 
3(^  rotxU  fommen,  I  shall  come 
3c^  ttjiirte  fommen,  I  should  come 
3^  B  i  n  gefommen,  I  Mve  come 
tu  Hji  ge!ommen,  thou  hast  come 
cr  ifl  gefommen,  he  has  come 
'  ttjir  (Int  gefommen,  we  have  come 
i^r  feib  (tSie  ftnt>)  gefommen,  you  have  come 
pe  ftnt  gefommen,  they  have  come 
3^  W  a  r  gcfommcn,  I  had  come 
tu  warjl  gefommert,  thou  hadst  come 
cr  war  gcfommen,  he  had  come 
n>ir  ttjaren  gcfommen,  we  had  come 
i^r  waret  (Sicnjaren)  gcfommen,  you  had  come 
fie  maren  gefommcn,  they  had  come 
3c^  wcric  gefommen  fein,  I  shall  have  come 
3c^  toixvU  gefommen  f  e  i  n,  I  should  have  come 


Reading  Exercise  LXIX. 

SGo^in  ge^jl  tn?  3*  Q^¥  tn  Me  ©c^ule.  ©e^en  3^re  5^effen 
na^  ^arig  ?  3<^  fonnte  geftern  nld)t  fommen  obgleid)  t^  motltc . 
SSann  merten  ©ie  fommen  ?  3c^  tt^^rbe  am  ©onnaBent  fommen, 
wenn  id)  nic^t  na&i  33erlin  fa^^re.  SSotlen  ©ie  mit  mir  fpajicren 
ge^en?  5^ein,  ic^  werbe  tn^  3;teater  ge^en.  3fi  ier  (53efantte  »on 
Snglant  mit  fcer  Sifenk^n  juriicfgefe^rt  ?  Sin  33ote  i(l  ^eute  nac^ 
Sranffurt  abgereifl,  menn  i(^  es  gen)u§t  :^atte  mitrte  i(^  mit  i^m  ge^ 
gangen  [ein.  3fi  ^er  ©efanbte  »on  granfreic^  3urii(fgefct)rt  ?  3ft  tein 
©rnber  fd^on  aufgejlan^en ,  id>  ^aBe  i^n  feit  einigen  3:agen  nid)t 
gefe:^en.  Sarum  fdjrie  5a«  ^int?  (S«  lief  gu  fi^nett  unt  i|l 
gefallcn. 


144  .     NEUTER   AND   INTKANSITIVE   VEBBS. 

Theme  LXIX. 

Where  is  the  ambassador  going?  My  uncle  has  arrived 
from  Berlin,  and  I  must  send  a  messenger  to  the  railroad  for 
his  luggage.  Have  you  risen  early  this  morning?  I  have 
often  come  from  Vienna  to  see  my  friends.  Has  the  Russian 
ambassador  not  yet  returned  from  Munich  ?  Has  the  pro- 
fessor gone  out  ?  The  child  would  not  have  fallen  if  it  had 
not  run  so  fast.  "Why  have  you  not  followed  me?  The 
messenger  has  passed  several  times  to-day.  The  general  has 
just  gone  to  bed,  you  cannot  see  him.  What  has  become  of* 
Robert  ?  Has  the  messenger  not  returned  from  the  railroad 
with  the  luggage  of  my  uncle  ?  He  has  perhaps  gone  to  th© 
room  of  your  uncle. 

Conversation. 

2CoC(en  @ic  tnit  mix  in^  3;^eater  3^^  H«  3U  tniibe,  i6:j  Un  ticfen 

ge^en  ?  9^ad)mtttag  fpajiereit  gemefen. 

SBarum  Mft  bu  nic^t  ju  mix  Qt^  3^  njar  »er^tnt)crt;  mein  Dn!el 

fommen  ?  ift  na(^  SBien  aBgereift. 

3ft  ter    engllfc^e  ©efantte    ijon  9loc^  nic^t,  er  mxi  erft  in  gt»el 

faxi^  aurucfgefe^rt  ?  Socmen  auriirffe^rcn. 

©int)  ®ie  tseute  frii^  aitfgeflan^  ^a,  t(^  bin  :^eute  fc^on  urn  fiinf 

ten  ?  U^r  aufgeftantcn. 

SBarum  fc^rie  t»a5  Mnr>  ?  Sg  ift  cjefallen. 

So  ^abtn  @ie  unfer  33uc!^  gefun^  (Jg  ift  auf  tern  Soten  gelegen, 

ten? 

^at  man    tie  ^ferbe  fc^on  ge^  3a,  ter  ©tallfned^t  ^at  |tc  ekn 

trdnft  ?  getranft. 

SBarum  ift  3^r  Dnfel  nic^t  nac^  3d)  fann  e«  nid)t  fagen,  i)iettci(!^t 

S3ru|Jel  gereipt  ?  ttjar  er  ijerMn^ert. 

Reading  Lesson. 
2)er  SBttiibcrcr  unb  bic  Ducffc. 

Sin  SBanterer  f  ant  im  ^^eipeftenf  ©ommer  ju  einer  Huette.    @r 
ttJar  fdjneK  unt  langc  gegangen;  Sc^iueig  j^ant  auf  feiner 
*  Render  to  became  of,  tt>erbcn  tttt5.  f  In  the  heat  of. 


THE   ADVERBS.  1^5 

©time  unfc  fcine  Bwng^  »  ^  ^  ^om  T)urPe  fafl  » e  r  t  r  o  c!  n  e  t.  Va 
\a^  er  l>tc^  fllber^ettc  SBaflier,  glaubtc,  ^icr  neue  ^rafte  *  gu  fammeln, 
unb  tranf  mit  gtcrigcn  3wgf«»  Slber  tie  ^iilte,  melc^c  3U  f^neiljent 
va(o  au  fc^nell  abttjec^felnH  f  war,  roivttt  \o  fc^aclic^  auf  i|n,  bag  er  ^u 
Soten  f  an  f.  —  „5lc^,  [(^tolic^e^  ®ift !"  defer,  „n)er  miirCe  unter 
cinem  fo  reijenJenj  2lnf(^ein  fot(^  eine  S3o^^eit  »ermut^et  l^aBcn?" 

„3(^  ein  ®ift?"  fprac^  He  Duelle.  „2Ca^rlic^,  bu  »erlaumbe(l  mid^. 
©ie^,  t)ie  ?$Iur  ringg  um^er  griinet  unb  lefct  turc^  mic^.  SSon  mir 
trdnfen  pc^  §  tie  ^eerten,  unt  2:aufente  teiner  35ruter  fanten  ^ier 
erfrifc^ung  unt  eincn  Safcetranf.  ^nx  UeBermag  unt  Unvorfid^tigfeit 
»on  teiner  ©eite  ||  madden  tir  ten  ®enu§  fc^ailic^.  3d)  bin  f(!^uItIoS 
on  teinen  ©d^mer^en  unt  felbfl  an  teinem  3:ote,  folltc  er  tir  aud^  U^ 
»or(ie^en.1f  SGSaaner. 


LESSON   LXX.  Settiott    70. 

On  the  Adverbs. 

Obs.  I. — Adverbs  modify  verbs,  adjectives,  or  other  adverbs. 
They  denote  manner,  place,  time,  quality,  comparison, 
quantity,  etc.,  and  are  invariable,  with  the  exception 
of  those  of  manner,  quality  and  time,  which  are 
compared  Hke  adjectives.  Most  adjectives  are  also 
frequently  used  as  adverbs  of  quality  without  a 
change  of  form,  even  in  the  comparative  degree. 
In  the  superlative  they  are  preceded  by  am  or 
ani'^if  instead  of  the  article,  as:  am  fc^bnften, 
a  u  f '  ^  ^  b  d^  jl  e ,  }c.  Some  take  the  terminations 
end  instead,  as:  B  e  jl  e  n  0 ,  f  p  d  t  e  fl  e  n  5. 

•  Translate  ^raftc  in  the  singular, 
t  3u  f^neH  abwcc^fclnb,  too  sudden  change. 
X  Inviting, 

§  SUon  mir  tranfen  ftc^,  must  be  translated  here,  of  me  drink,  dropping 
entirely  the  reflexive  pronoun  f  i  d^. 
II  On  your  part. 
S  £)ir  bevorfte^n,  lit.,  he  lefore  you,  to  be  translated  here,  come  upon  you. 


146 


THB   ADVERBS. 


Obs.  n.— The  prefixes  ^in  and  ^er  of  the  adverbs  ^inein, 
:§erein,  ^naui,  ^tvau^,  are  separable,  and  are  fre- 
quently preceded  by  a  noun  with  the  preposition 
ju,  as:  Der  Wlann  tarn  jur  X^ixtt  :^erein, 

Obs.  m. — Instead  of  adverbs  of  time,  the  genitive  of  substan-^ 
tives  is  used  when  the  time  is  indefinite,  as:  bed 
SJiorgenS,  or  SJJorgend,  and  when  the  time  is 
distinctly  expressed  the  accusative  of  substantives 
is  used  as  an  adverbial  expression  of  time;  as: 
iefcen  Z  ag, 

Obs.  rV. — ^Adverbs  of  time  precede  other  adverbs  or  adver- 
bial expressions,  and  take  their  place  after  the 
subject  and  the  verb,  but  when  an  adverb  or  ad- 
verbial expression  begins  the  sentence,  the  verb 
precedes  the  subjects. 


Degree  of  Comparison  of 

Positive.  Comparative. 

2So|I,  well  fcejTer,  better     , 

klD,  soon  I  i?^^^^'  sooner 

gem,*  willingly    lieber,  better 
oft,  often  ijfter,  oftener 


kjlc, 


fe^r,  very 
libel,  evil 
»ie(,  much 
menig,  little 


arger,  worse 
ttte^r,  more 
ntinter,  meniger, 


Irregular  Adverbs. 

Superlative. 
Md  tefien  (yr  CiXi\'i 
the  best 

f  am  e^ejlen,  the  soonest 
( BalJigft,  very  soon 
am  tiebften,  best 
am  ^uftgflen,  the  oftener, 

(most  often) 
^ii\i,  au^erjl,  extremely 
am  argften,  the  worst 
(m  meiften,  most 
am  minteflen   (ttjenigften) 
the  least 


Reading  Exercise  LXX. 

SCic  ijiel  foflet  blefe^  ^au^  ?  3<^  »erbe  fpatej^ett^  urn  ad^t  U^r  gu 
^aufe  fein.    ipeittrtc^  fi^t  au^n?enbig  mit  bem  ^utfc^er.    Diefe  pax 

*  ®crn,  licber,  am  liebf^cn,  correspond  to  I  like,  I  like  better,  I  like  best, 
in  English,  and  are  mostly  used  in  connection  with  a  verb,  as  :  3c^  laufc 
gem,  I  like  to  run ;  id^  fa^re  licber,  I  like  better  to  ride,  etc. 


THE  ADVERBS.  147 

m'a^tn  (tnt)  immer  Betfammcn,  ©ic  miiflfert  ten  Jpcrrn  anber^wo 
fit^en-  Die  ©tatt  lag  feitwart^.  3ft  ^er  iperr  mixUtv  okn  ?  5flein, 
crijluntem  2Cie  ^afl  feu  gcfd^Iafen  ?  ^^erjentge,  »e%r  am  Ibeften 
reiten  unt  am  [(^netlflen  laufen  !ann,  tcxxl  r»en  ^rei3  er^lten,  3)^an 
gewo^nt  pc^  na^  unb  nac^  taran,  3^r  ^Setter  grietric^  wirD  libera 
morgen  mit  un3  gu  3)^ittag  fpeifeit.  3c^  ^ann  morgen  frii^er  lommen, 
wenn  (5ie  ed  ttjiinf^en.  'Die  !Deutf^en  fagen:  „3u  ttjenig  unt)  su 
»iel  »ert)lrbt  allca  Spiel."  Sr  i^t  ©emiifc  lieber  aU  gleifc^.  Un^or^^ 
Pc^tige  Seute  irren  am  ^aupg^en,  3c^  »ei^,  tag  ^einric^  eg  gem 
ijfter  t^un  »irt.  3^  ^onnte  ed  tir  wo^l  fagen.  3<^  Mttc  urn  no^ 
eine  a:airc  3:^ee. 

Theme  LXX. 

We  shall  praise  the  most  skillful  persons  most.  George 
and  John  are  improving  very  much  in  German.  When  will 
you  depart?  To-morrow  or  the  day  after  we  shall  go  to 
Berlin.  How  much  did  the  tailor  ask  for  your  coat?  I 
like  to  ride  in  a  carriage,  but  I  like  better  to  ride  horseback, 
and  I  like  best  to  ride  by  (ouf  with  def.  art.)  railroad.  This 
careless  man  makes  mistakes  (the  oftenest)  most  often.  The 
general  dines  precisely  at  twelve  o'clock.  The  price  of  this 
cloth  is  extremely  high.  I  shall  bind  the  dictionary  very 
soon.  The  scholar  who  can  read  and  write  best,  will  receive 
the  prize.   Henry  has  been  at  least  three  or  four  times  here. 

Conversation. 

SBo^er  fam  3|r  53ruter  ?  gr  !am  ^u  gu§  »on  j^bln. 

3^  ^abe  3^re  <B6^m^tx  (ange  nic^t    <Sie  n?ar  feit  einigen  3Boc^en  in 

gefe^en,  too  ip  pe  ?  ^ari3,  aber  Pe  ip  ^eute  toa^x* 

fc^einli^  ju  §aufe. 
SBirt  §cinri(^  auf  mic?^  marten  ?      Sin  menig  aber  nic^t  lange. 
(Se^en  ©ie  gem  in^  3;^eater  ?  9^ein,  ic^  ge:^e  IteBer  in  tie  Dper. 

SCelc^e  2eute  irren  am  meipen  ?       !l:ie  Unoorpc^tigen  irren  am  pws= 

pgPen. 
^aBen  @ie  ten  ^ann  gefel^en,    ^dn,  i^  ^ak  ten  ^J^ann  gefe^en, 

me^er  am  bepen  ritt  ?  welder  am  ft^ncUpen  fu'^r. 


148  THE  CONJUNCTIONS. 

Reading  Lesson, 
^et   alte  iSanbmann* 

35  i «  an  tein  fueled  Qkah, 
Unb  ttjeidje  feinen  Singer  breit 
SSon  dotted  SBegen  aK 

D  a  tt  tt  tvlrjl  bu  trie  auf  griinen  ^lu'ti 

!Durc^^  (Srtenlebett  ge^n; 
D  a  n  n  lannjl  tu  o^ne  Surest  unt  ©rau'n 

^em  Zo\}  fn«  2luge  fe^'n, 

D  a  n  tt  fegnen  SnM  beine  ®ruft 
Un^  ttjeinen  3:^rdnen  t)  r  a uf  f 

Unt  ©onnenblumen  i?oU  »ott  Duft, 
©lii^'n  au5  ten  2;^rdnen  auf. 


$5U!>. 


LESSON   LXXI.  2emvn   -71. 

On  the  Conjunctions, 

Obs. — ^In  German  some  of  the  conjunctions  have  a  great  in- 
fluence on  the  position  of  the  verb,  and  must  therefore 
be  divided  into  three  classes:  the  co-ordinative,  ad- 
verbial and  sub-ordinative  conjunctions.  Those  of  the 
first  class  (the  co-ordinatives)  serve  merely  as  Hnks  to 
sentences,  and  have  no  influence  on  the  position,  while 
those  of  the  second  class  (the  adverbials),  when  be^ 
ginning  the  sentence,  cause  the  svhject  to  be  placed  after 
the  verb,  and  those  of  the  third  class  (both  the  simple 
and  compound  sub-ordinatives),  require  the  verb 
governed  by  them  to  be  placed  at  the  end  of  the 
sentence. 

*  The  apostrophe  stands  in  place  of  e>  as :  ii  J  ^  for  u  b  c. 
t  Darauf. 


THE  CONJUNCTIONS.  149 

FiBST  Class  :  Cchordinative  Conjunctions, 
Sf6er,  fottbem,  allein,  but  fon?o^(-aU,  both-and 

benn,  for,  since        itnD,  and      oter,  or 

Second  Class  :  Adverbial  Conjunctions. 
Sllfo,  therefore,  thus  entlic^,  at  last,  at  length 

CiVi6it,  also,  too  entweter — oter,  either — or 

aug erbem,  iibertem,  besides  cr(l,  juerj^,  at  first 

balD — Bate,  sometimes— some-     femcr,  further 
ba,  tann,  aUDann,  then      [times  ^emac^,  nac^^cr,  afterwards 
bagegcn,  )  on  the  contrary  faum,  scarcely 

l^ingegen,  j  on  the  other  hand      nic^t  nur,    ^  — fon?  C     not 
txi^tx,  ee§megen,  ]  therefore,  on    nic^t  alleirt,  (-    tern   -j   only — 
barum,  fcef  ^aI6,  j  that  account     ni(^t  6Io^,   ;    auc^    (  but  also 
bemnadb,  folqliA,  >  ,,      nodb,  still 

mitMn,  '5  consequently    „„„  (je^,),  ^ow,  then 

bcnnoc^,  and  yet,  still  fo,  so,  thus 

bc^gletd^en,  Ukewise  ;  no(!^,  nor      fonfl,  else,  otherwise 
beffcnungeac^tet,     )     neverthe-     t^eil^ — i^txU,  partly — ^partly 
ni(^t^bc|lon)cniger,  j  less  tiBerbie^,  besides 


bejlo, 
urn  fo, ) 


the  (with  a  com-  iibrigcnd,  as  for  the  rest,  how- 

parative.J  ever 


boc^,  glcid^wo^I,  ]    yet,  still,  tttelmc^r,  much  more,  rather 

Jebo^,  inbejfen,  [    however  ttjcber — no^,  neither  nor 

cinerfeit^,    |  on  the  one  hand      n?o^I,  ^ttjar,  indeed,  it  is  true 


J 


anbrerfeitd; )  on  the  other  hand 


.  Reading  Exercise  LXXI. 

3^  '^aBe  i^tt  gc^ort,  abtx  t^  )^aU  i^n  tti(^t  gefe^ett.  dt  »erflanb  <Bxe 
nid^t,  benn  <Bit  fpraci^en  gu  fdjnett*  Du  mupt  bie  Seftiort  fc^reiben  ober 
ic^  wevbe  ed  bent  Se^rer  fagen.  9iic^t  nur  ber  3Sater  fonbem  auc^  bie 
SJZutter  werben  c«  erlauBcn.  2Beber  ber  Partner  nod^  bie  ©artnerin 
t^uen  i^re  ^flid^t.  <Sie  muffen  entweber  fleigiger  arBeiten  ober  mein 
ipaud  tterlaffen,  3<^  ^ann  nic^t  anggetjen  ba  id)  !ranf  Bin.  <BaQtn 
©ie  mir  wann  fie  fommen  mirb.  Du  Bifl  faul,  folglii^  mu§t  bu  su  ^^wfc 
BleiBen.  ^aum  :^attc  er  e«  gefagt,  fo  lief  id^  ba\)on.  3:^r  ^leffe  ^at 
mir  nid)t  gef^rieBen,  bejwegen  merbe  id^  i^n  nidfet  erwarten.  3(^  njoHte 
nid^t  mitge^en,  uBrigen«  (liBerbied)  ^atte  id^  !einc  3eit. 


150  THE  OONJUNCJTIONB. 

Theme  LXXI. 

John  has  translated  his  Theme,  and  Frederick  has  learned 
his  Conversation,  but  Emily  is  lazy  or  sick,  for  she  has  not 
learned  the  lesson.  You  must  go  to  (the)  school  directly, 
or  your  father  wiU  punish  you.  The  teacher  did  not  punish 
him,  but  he  was  dissatisfied  with  him.  You  must  either  be 
more  dihgent  or  leave  the  school,  else  I  shall  send  you  away. 
Neither  the  postman  nor  the  workman  wiU  come.  I  shall 
buy  either  a  working  table  or  a  wardrobe.  We  have  not 
only  a  play-ground  but  also  a  piano.  My  teacher  has  not 
returned  to  me  my  copy-book,  consequently,  Ig  shalli  (be 
obliged)  have  to  write  my  theme  this  afternoon.  The 
Egyptian  is  a  little  unskillful,  but  he  is  nevertheless  a  good 
man.  I,  had^  scarcelyi  returned  from  the  park.  It  is  true, 
we  could  nota  sees  himi  but  (atlein)  we  heard  his  voice.  John 
has  worked  in  the  forenoon  and  is  tired,  he  must  therefore 
(on  that  account,  consequently)  stayg  atg  homcithisi  afternoon., 

Thibd  Class:   SvbordincUwe  Conjunctions. 

aU,  when,  as  ungeac^tet,  notwithstanding    ^, 

bettor,  t^t,  before  i»a|rent,  while,  whilst 

M^,  until  tounn,  when 

ta,  as,  since  (reason)  tueil,  because 

t)amit,  in  order  that  totnn,  if  when 

t)a^,  that  au&j,    "I 

fatt^,  in  case  that  tcenngleic^,  [•  although 

inliem,  while,  as  f^on,  ) 

je — ^the — (with  the  comp.)  toit,  how,  when,  as 

nac^Dem,  after  tt?ic  iiu6^,  however 

je  nac^^em,  according  as  t»iewo^(,  although 

ob,  whether,  if  trofem,  if,  in  case,  that 

obgIei(^,  obfdjon,  )  though,  tooiixx,  wherefore 

ob»o^l,  wienjo'^t,  )  although  toona6^,  whereafter 

felt,  feitDem,  since  (time)  tooxan,  whereat 

fo  oft  (o.U),  whenever  jvorauf,  whereon 

fo  Bal^  (aU),  as  soon  as  motto n,  whereof,  etc. 

fo  lange  (aU),  so  long  as  wm3u(M;i^A^e/?i^7i.),inorderto 


THE   CONJUNCTIONS.  151 

Additional  Reading  Exercise. 

2(13  i(^  x^n  fauntc,  mar  er  uoc^  ein  ^in^.  3^  ^^T^^tt  (tc  ni(^t  fe^en, 
ba  e^  gattj  tunfel  mar.  2Ber  fagte  tir,  ^a^  i(^  angefommen  Hn  ? 
S'^ac^Cem  mir  gefrii^j^iicft  fatten,  gingen  wir  auf^  San^.  3^^  njurte 
3^tten  ten  2Bert()  te^-Suc^e^  kaa^len,  obgleic^  ^  arm  Un.  2Bir 
l^aBen  graulein  SJiiiUer  ni^t  gefe^en,  feit  fie  itt  3}iun(^en  mo^nt. 
®ujla»  fdjiief  ten  ganjen  9Za^mittag,  md^rent  ?^rtetri(^  jcten  Sliu 
genHic!  ma^ma^m.  SCiirten  tie  9J^enf(^en  ni(^t  gtiicflic^er  fein,  wenn 
fte  3ufrictener  mdren.  Sr  fc^wor,  intern  er  feinen  2lrm  au^jhecfte. 
©ie  :^alten  i^n  ni(^t  fiir  faul,  fontern  fxir  Bo^^aft.  2Bir  ge^en  lang^ 
fam,  tamit  n?ir  nid)t  miitc  werten.  SBittft  tu  marten,  M^  i^  meinc 
SlufgaBe  gefc^rieBen  ^ah  ?  (S^e  man  i§t,  foil  man  ®ott  tan!en.  @o 
lange  man  gefunt  ifl  ten!t  man  felten  taran,  ta§  man  auc^  fran!  mer* 
ten  tann. 

Additional  Theme. 

Do  you  Imow  (mijfen)  whether  the  stars  shine  ?  Although 
I  had4  seeiia  thisj  maus  when  he  was  a  boy,  Ij  recognizedi  him 
not.  Our  teacher  does  not  like  Henry  as  (ta)  he  is  neither 
diligent  nor  attentive.  The  workman  thinks  that  you  will, 
paya  him.j  My  uncle  told  me  that  you  had  been  in  Munich,  so 
I  believed  it.  We  must  take  a  walk,  though  it  is  impleasant. 
We  shall  come  if  you  will4  gOj  outg  withj  us.j  She  has  not 
heard  from  Miss  Miller,  since  we  left  Philadelphia.  I  have 
written  my  theme,  while  you  read  the  newspaper.  When 
can  you  eat  ?  I  cannot  eat  now,  because  I  am  not  hungry. 
One  does  not  know,  whether  any  body  Hves  in  the  stars.  As 
soon  as  I  shall  have  acquired  the  German  language,  I  shall 
study  the  French  language.  There  will  always  be  strife 
among  (the)  men  so  long  as  they  are  discontented. 

Conversation. 

893ie  fa:^  er  au^  aU  tu  i^n  fa^(l  ?      2^  erfanntc  i^n  hum,  cr  mar  fo 

Hei(^. 
itonntejl  tu  ten  Setriiger  pnten  ?     2^  fant  i'^n  ni(^t,  ta  e^  tun!cl  mar* 
SBer  fagtc  tir,  tag  i(^  ^ier  Hn?        grang  fagte  e«  mir  f(^on  gejlem. 


152  THE  AUXnJAEY   tOtt^  ett  AND  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 


SBannreifleS^rDnMab? 

SBirt)  bcr  Slrbeitcr  im  ^axi  ax^ 

kitcn  ? 
SCirft  t)U  tern  ^einrid)  scr^cikn  ? 

oDer  nx6^t  ? 
@eit  »ann  |aBt  itsr  ^erm  ,^o^Ier 

unD  grdulein  SKiillcr  ni6t  gc^ 

fe^en? 
S5ag  t^atefl  bu,  ma^rent  teine 

^reunte  fpagieren  gingen  ? 
SCiirbejl  tu  tcutfd^  lemen,  trenn 

tu  ®clD  ^atteft  Unterric^t  su 

nelsmeti  ? 


!Dtefen  iD^orgen,  nac^bcm  er  gc* 

fru()|lucft  i)atte* 
5^id)t  o^ne  Ca§  fic  i^n  tafiir  k^ 

^f^i^t  eber  al5  H^  er  ftc^  fceffert. 
Bir  memn  c5  be^alten,  ta  fcu  c« 

bradjtci't,  obgleid)  e^  t^eitcr  i|i. 
8eit  njtr  9)^und)en  »erlic§en,  l^a^^ 

ben  »ir  fie  nic^t  gefc|cn. 

(Srfl  arkitetc  ic^  tut  ©artcn  uiO) 
tann  fcbriefe  tc^  nteine  Slufgabc. 

3(^  miirte  ni(^t  alletn  tjeutfds, 
fontern  auc&  bad  granjojifc^c 
lemen. 


Reading  Lesson. 

^ic   ft^onjlc   6:^rif!itt. 

Xentt  cu(i^  cine  weiHic^e  ©eele,  weld^e  totel  Icitet;  aber  (letd  ^u 
®ott  auf|'(^auet,  »elc^e,  fie  ma^  inncn  mimn  unt  Bluten  »ie  fie 
»tH *  immer  wie  eine  greufce  ijor  SJlenfdjen  au^pe^t, f  unb  jvelAc 
tie  ©titrmc  ber  SBelt  tt>  e  b  e  r  »erructen  n  o  d^  »erftnflem  :  n?o  fle|t 
i^rSbenHIb?  —  3lm  ipimmel:  ba  fte^t  ter  JJlegcnbogen ;  i^^n  benjegen 
bie  2BoI!en  unb  bie  SCinbe  nidjt,  bie  auf  i^n  fliegen,  fonbe  rn  er 
id^immert  fort  »or  feiner  (Sonne,  unb  feine  2:ropfen  merben  garben, 
unb  er  liegt  am  §imme(  aU  gidnjenber  iUlorgent^au  eined  f^bncn 
iaged.  91  i  (^  t  e  r  (3ean  3>aul) . 


LESSON   LXXn.  2eftwn  72* 

The  Auxiliary  tucrbcn  and  the  Passive  Voice. 

Obs.    I. — The  various  modes,  tenses,  etc.  of  regular  and  irre- 
gular active  verbs  are  formed,  for  the  passive  voice. 


•  SGBic  fic  willf  must  be  translated  here,  ever  so  much. 
f  Ever  appears  before  men  an  imctge  of  joy. 


THE  AUXILIABT   WCttCn   AND  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 


153 


from  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  auxihary  verb 
tt)  e  r  t  c  n  and  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be 
conjugated. 
Obs.  n. — The  past  participle  of  the  auxiliary  n)  e  r  b  c  n ,  to 
be,  to  become,  is  gcworten,  but  when  used  to 
form  the  passive  voice  of  verbs  9  c  is  omitted,  and 
n?  0  r  t  e  n  only  is  used. 

Conjugation  of  Verbs  in  the  Passive  Voice. 


INDICATIVE. 


Present  Tense. 

3c^  t»ert)C  g  c  1 0  b  t ,  I  am 
bu  wirjl  gelo&t,  thou  art 
er  wirD  gelobt,  he  is 

trir  mcrticn  gclobt,  we  are 
i^x  »erbct  gcIoBt,    )  you 
@ic  werDen  gelobt, )  are 
Pe  trerben  geloBt,  they  are 


Imperfect. 

3(^  tomtit  g  c  t  i  c  H ,  I  was 
tu  wurtejl  gcUebt,  thou  wast 
cr  wurbe  gcliebt,  he  was 

tt)ir  ttjurben  geliebt,  we  were 
i^r  njurtct  geliett,   )    you 
@ie  murbcn  geliebt,  )  were 
fie  wurben  geliebt,  they  were 


1st  Future  Tense.  3c^  ttJ^rbe  g  c  fl  r  a  f  t  irerben,  I  shall  be  punished 
bu  wirfi  gcfltaft  wcrben,  jc. 

Isi  Conditional.      3^  tuurbe  g  c  ^  a  §  t  tuerben,  I  should  be  hated 
bu  »urbe(l  ge^a§t  werben,  «♦ 

3c^  Hn  g  c  a  (!^  t  c  t  worben,  I  have  been 
bu  M(l  geacbtct  ivortcn,  thou  hast  been 
cr  ifl  gead^tct  morben,  he  has  been 


njtr  f!nb  gcad^tet  worbcn,  we  have  been 
i^r  fetb  gea^tet  itjorben,  )  „  ,  , 
©te  finb  geadjtet  ttjorbm,   j  ^^^  ^^^^  "^^^^ 


o 

trt- 


fic  jinD  geac^tet  morben,  they  have  been 

Pluperfect.    3^%  war  »erbor]&en  ttjorben,  I  had  been  spoiled 

bu  warj^  tyerborben  tuorben,  jc. 
27ic2  Future.  3^^  J^^^be  g  c  t  a  b  c  It  morben  feiti,  I  shall  have  been 
blamed 

bu  h)irjl  getabelt  morben  fein,  )C. 


154  THE   AUXILIARY   ttJerfcett   AND  THE  PASSIVE   VOICE. 

2iid  Conditional.    3^  xom^a  b  e  I  o  ^  n  t  trorben  fcin,   I  should 
have  been  rewarded 
tu  miirbejl  klo^nt  ivorben  fein,  :c. 

INFINITIVE. 

®cIoH  n?crben  or  geloBt  ju  werten,  to  be  praised 

IMPEBATIVE. 

SBerbe  geloBt,  be  (thou)  praised    SBcrbet  geloBt,  be  (you  or  ye) 

praised 


Reading  Exercise  LXXII. 

3^  njcrbc  »on  mcinem  Scorer  gelobt,  tuenn  i^  meinc  Slufgakn  temc 
unb  ge^orfam  Mn»  X;u  wirfl  »on  beinen  SItem  nid^t  geliebt  n>erbcn, 
benn  bu  M|l  nidjt  flei^ig  wnb  ge^orfam  gemcfen.  (Ein  tugenb^after 
^JJenfci^  n?irb  »on  3cbermantt  ^eac^tet,  unb  feinc  ?^reunbf(^aft  mirb  ijon 
alien  ®uten  gefudjt.  S3ir  werben  oft  fiir  unferc  gutcn  ipanblungcn 
gctabelt  unb  fclten  Belo^nt;  nic^td  bejlowenigcr  ijt  ti  unfere  ^^W 
©uted  au  t^un,  Diefe  ^naSen  ftnb  na^  ^aufe  gef^idft  ttjorben.  !Diefe 
©tabt  wiirbe  ijon  ben  g^inben  jerjlbrt  worben  fein,  n?enn  unferc  ©olba:? 
itn  nid)t  ta))fer  gcfoc^ten  'fatten.  3fne  arme  Hinbe  grau  murbe  i)on 
bent  ^aufmann  betrogen.  Diejenigen,  welc^e  c:^rU(^  n?aren,  wurben 
gefc^d^t.  ©eac^tct  merben  ifl  Bejfer  al^  ge^§t  ju  n?erben.  T)iefe  Slufj? 
gaBen  ftnb  anjeimal  atgefc^rteben  »orben. 

Theme  LXXII. 

I  am  punished  by  my  parents,  when  I  am  disobedient  and 
do  not  work  diligently.  Thou  art  often  praised  by  thy 
teacher.  Ton  are  called  by  your  father  ;  why  do  you  not  go 
to  him  ?  Emma  is  often  blamed  by  her  music-teacher,  be- 
cause she  is  so  negligent.  This  letter  was  given  me  by  your 
servant,  it  must  be  sent  to  *  the  post-ofl&ce.  If  I  had  not  been 
here,  your  watch  would  have  been  stolen.  Those  who  were 
polite,  were  not  only  esteemed  but  also  rewarded.  The 
workmen  have  been  paid  well,  because  they  worked  well 
during  the  heat  of  the  day.  A  false  and  faithless  man  is 
feared  and  hated  by  every  body. 

*  Render  to  hero  auf. 


THE  AUXILIAKY   W  C  r  t)  f  tt  AND   THE   PASSIVE  VOICE.  155 

Conversation. 

Du  trirfl  »on  beinem  2c^rcr  oft  ^d)  ^ak  nur  be^  Sl&enbs  3^it  unb 

getacelt;  marum  lemft  Du  l>eine  felbjl  tann  werbe  id^  oft  taran 

5lufgat)e  nic^t  bejjer  ?  oer^intert. 

55on  toern  ijl  biefe  2lufgaBc  ^jer^?  @ie  ijl  son  mir  »erbcffcrt  toorben, 

tefliert  n)orC)en  ?  tueit  ter  2e^rer  feinc  3ctt  ^attc, 

2Barum  ftnb  tiefe  33ricfe  aweimal  2Beil  ftc  fo  fc^Iedjt  gefd?rieBen  jua;? 

abgefd^ricben  worben  ?  ren,  ba§  i^  fte  nld)t  (efen  !onnte, 

iBon  went  wirb  ber  tugenb^aftc  Sr  wirb  »on  3ebcrmann  gead^tct 

9}Zenf(^  geaci^tet  ?  unb  fcine  ^reunbfd)aft  mirb  »ott 

alien  ©uten  gefudjt. 

SCurbcn  biefe  iJJ^dbc^ctt  T)Ort  i^rem  ©ie  njurben  ijon  i^rem  Se^rer  Qt^ 

Se^rer  nad^  Jpaufc  gcfc^icft  ?  lobt  unb  nad)  ^aufe  gefd^icft,  n?eU 

ftp  i^re  2lufgabe  gelernt  fatten* 

Reading  Lesson. 
^aS   geflo^lcne   $fcrb. 

'Dad  f^bnflc  ^fcrb  cincd  33auer3  nj  u  r  b  e  Bet  9lac6t  aui  feinem 
Static  9  e  ft  0  ^  I  e  n»  Der  53aucr  begal>  ftc^  ba^er  au\  einen  3)ferbe^ 
marft,  toeld^er  ge^n  ^eilen  oon  ba  ^t^aUtn  n?  u  r  b  e ,  in  ter  21B^ 
ft(^t,  ein  anbere^  gu  !aufen.  Sr  mar  fe^r  erftaunt,  unter  ben  ^ferben, 
bic  ^um  5Ser!auf  audgeftellt  waren,  ba^  feintge  gu  erfennen.  @r  nal)m 
ce  fogleid)  beim  3^wme  unb  rief  au0:  „Xit\t^  ^ferb  ge^^brt  mir. 
35or  brei  2;agen  ijt  eg  mir  gefto^ten  worbe  n»" 

„3^r  irrt  eu(J^,  lieber  greunb,"  fagte  fek  ^cflid)  ber,  meld^erbad  5^ferb 
^erfaufcn  woUte ;  „icb  ^abe  biefed  ^ferb  fd^on  longer,  aU  ein  3a|r.  @« 
ij^  ni(^t  bag  Surige;  aBer  eg  ijl  mbglic^,  ^a^  eg  einige  Slel^nlic^feit  mit 
iW  I)at." 

!Der  Sauer  legte  f(^ne(I  fetne  Beiben  ipanbe  auf  bie  Slugen  bc«  ^fer^ 
beg  unb  rief:  „®ut!  wenn  bag  2:^ier  euc^  f^on  fo  langc  ge^brt,  fagt 
mir  nun,  auf  tt>eld)em  2luge  eg  Hinb  ift." 

!Der  Slntere,  meld^er  mirllidb  ta€  ^ferb  gefto^Ien  ^atte,  aBer  ber  eg  nid^ 
genau  unterfud)t  ^atte,  n?urbe  gana  Betroffen.  SlBer  ba  er  (^ttoa^  fagen 
mu§te,  antttjortete  er  aufg  ©erat^eroo^h*  „5Iuf  bem  linfen  3luge."-^ 

*  At  random. 


156  BEFLEXIVE    VEEBS. 

„3f^v  irrt  (in6^,"  fprac^  ber  55auer,  ^tad  J^ier  ifl  ni&t  Hint  auf  tern 
linfen  2luge,"  „0^ !"  rief  ter  Xicfe,  „tct)  ^be  mid)  nur  tter|>ro(i^en, 
mlt  fcem  rec^ten  5luge  pc^t  ed  itidjt." 

ipierauf  t)  e  d  t  c  tcr  S3auer  Me  Sliigen  teg  |)ferfced  auf  wnb  fagtc: 
„(S3  ijl  ie^t  offcnbar,  baj  tu  ein  ©(i^urfc  M(l  unt»  eiit  XieB,  @e:^t,  ta« 
^ferb  iji  gar  ttic^t  Mtnb.  ^&j  ^aU  tiefe  ^i^agen  nur  gct^n,  urn  ben 
Diefcj^a^I  ^eraudgukingcn. 

Xer  XieB  »  u  r  t  c  genbt^igt,  bad  5>f«b  suriidjugekn  unb  B  c:? 
ft  r  a  f  t ,  »ie  er  ee  »ett)icnt  ^atte. 


LESSON   LXXm.  Seftiott    73* 

Reflexive  Verbs. 

Obs.  L — Reflexive  verbs  are  sucli  as  have  the  same  person 
or  persons  for  both  subject  and  object.  The  latter 
is  always  a  personal  pronoun  and  stands,  either  in 
the  dative  or  accusative;  as: 

3c^  jie^e  mid)  an,  I  dress  (myself)    3d|  ^elfe  mir,  I  help  myself 

Obs.  n. — In  German,  as  in  English,  nearly  every  transitive 
verb  may  be  changed  into  a  reflexive  verb,  but 
there  are  a  great  many  verbs  used  only  as  reflexive 
verbs,  of  which,  in  EngHsh,  some  have  the  additional 
pronoun;  while  others  express  the  same  idea  by 
the  active  or  passive  voice  of  simple  verbs;  as, 

3^  frcue  mic^,  I  rejoice  3<^  H(bc  mir  ein,  I  fancy 

Conjugation  of  Reflexive  Verbs. 

INDICATrV^* 

Present.   3<^  »afc^c  m\^,  I  wash  or  I  am  washing  (myself) 
ttt  irafd^efl  tic^,  thou  washest  (thyself) 
er  wafdJt  P(i^,  he  washes  (himself) 


BEFLEXIYE  YEBBS.  157 

2Bir  wafc^en  un«,  we  wash  (ourselves) 
i^rwafc^eteuc^      I    you  wash  (yourselves) 

fie  mafc^en  (i^,  they  wash  (themselves) 

Imperfect.  3c^  vcxtt  mic^,  I  was  mistaken 

tu  irrtejl  tic^,  jc. 

Is/  Future.  3c^  ttJ^'^^c  »t^  anfleitcn,  I  shall  dress  myself 

tu  wirft  tixdij  anfleicett;  jc. 

1st  Conditicmal.  •  3c^  ttJUY^c  »^^r  einMttcn,  I  should  fancy 

tu  wiirtejl  tix  einbilt>cn,  thou  wouldst  fancy 

Obs.  m. — The  compound  tenses  of  reflexive  verbs,  are  with 
one  exception,  *  formed  with  the   auxiliary  verb 

Perfect.    3^  ^^^^  «Tid)  getub^nt,  I  have  accustomed  myself 
tu  ^ajl  tid)  gcmb^nt,  thou  hast  accustomed  thyself 
er  ^at  |t(^  genjo^nt,  he  has  accustomed  himself 

SJir  ^ahn  un^  gewb^nt,  we  have  accustomed  ourselves 
i^r  ^abct  euc^  gewb^nt,    )  you  have  accustomed 
Sic  ^abcn  fid)  gcmb^nt,  )  yourselves 

fie  ^aUn  ftd^  getrb^nt,  they  have  accustomed  themselves 

Pluperfect.  ^6)  ^attc  mid)  geirrt,  I  had  been  mistaken 

tvL  patted  li6)  geirrt,  k. 

2nc;  Future.  ^^  tverte  mi(^  ausgeffeibet  ^aben,  I  shall  have 

undressed  myself 
bu  ttjirfl  t)i(^  au^gellei^et  ^ahn,  jc. 

2n<Z  Conditiontd.  3(^  ttjurt)e  mi^  angefleifcct  ^abcn,  I  should  have 
dressed  myself 
tu  wiirtejl  bi(i^  angefleibct  ^aBm,  jc. 
Infinitiiie.  (^ic^  Beflagen,  to  complain 

*  The  verb  fi(^  Bcwu^t  fctn,  to  be  Conscious  of,  is  conjugated  both 
iYi  the  simple  and  compound  tenses  with  the  auxiliary  fein;  as:  3  (^ 
bin  mir  ttroix^t,  ic,  3c^  Hn  mir  bcwupt  gewefcn,  k. 


158  ^    BEFLEXIVE  VERBS. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Singular.    SBafc^e  bic^,  wash  (thyself) 

Plural.        SBafc^et  tu6)  or  tvaf^en  ©ie  jtc^,  wash  (yourselves) 


Reading  Exercise  LXXIII. 

3c^  Wclbc  ntld^  Jebctt  SJZorgen  an.  2::u  ^a(l  ti(^  gclrrt,  id^  Bin  nid^t 
ter,  ten  er  fuc^tc.  ^arl  wafc^t  ftc^  Jeben  3:a9.  ©ic  l^aben  pc^  nod) 
ni^t  au^gefleitet,  |le  ujerben  ftc%  erjl  urn  je^n  U|r  au^lleitien.  2)tcfe 
§erren  irren  flc^,  mcnn  jte  glaubcn,  ba§  mir  rcicb  (tnb.  !Diefe  @d)uler 
t»erben  jtc^  iiber  i^ren  Se^rer  kflagen;  pe  fagen,  baf  er  gu  jbrenge  tp. 
©eine  ©c^meftcr  MItet  p(^  ein  fd^on  ju  fein.  3^^  ntiigt  eu(^  gut  ^t^ 
tragen  unb  e^rli(^  fein.  Der  ©ele^rte  gewo^nte  pc^  pittsu  p^en.  @ie 
juiirben  p^  gemb^nen  frii^  aufjupe^en.  SBir  ^tten  un5  \?era6rebet 
einen  ©pagiergang  ju  madden.  3^^^^  ?0^dnner  '^altn  pc^  getbbtet. 
S3  freut  i:^n  fe^r  bic^  gu  fe^en.  ^^rcing  Befanb  pc^  gepem  nic^t  »o^I; 
er  war  gan;^  Heic^ ;  ic^  glaube,  ba§  cr  ^opfwe^  %oXit. 

Theme  LXXIII. 

I  rejoice  very  much  to  see  you.  John,  hast  thou  washed 
thyself  ?  My  sister  always  behaves  well  and  is  (passive)  loved 
by  every  body.  We  have  not  yet  dressed  (ourselves),  we  shall 
dress  directly.  The  children  were  undressing  when  I  came. 
There  are  many  people  who  fancy  themselves  to  be  better  than 
others.  Frederick  had  wounded  himself  with  my  penknife; 
it  was  newly  (fr  if  c^)  sharpened.  I  felt  (found  myself)  better 
yesterday  than  Friday.  You  will  have  been  mistaken,  Sir. 
Why  would  he  complain  ?  The  soldier  would  have  killed 
himself.  Mary  had  just  dressed  when  her  uncle  came  toj 
secg  her.i  Those  boys  should  have  accustomed  themselves 
to  rise  at  six  o'clock  every  morning.  Mithridates  defended 
himself  with  great  courage  against  the  Romans. 

Conversation. 

4>aben  ^6^  9lofa  unb  Smilte  ge;;    ©ie  l^aBen  p(^  noc^  nic^t  gehJaf(^ett, 

»af^en  ?  Pc  fleiben  pc^  eicn  an. 

mit  Bcpnbct  ^6^  3^  Srau  «Wutter  ?  Siemlic^  gut ;  i^  ban! e  3?ne«» 


REFLEXIVE  VEEBS.  159 

^at  f!c^  Staxl  nt^t  gutBetragen?      S'lcin,  er  muf  flc^  getvb'^nctt  jlitt 

SilDen  ©ie  f!(^  etn,  bag  ©ic  t>ie  3<^  H"  niAt  fo  narrift^,  mir  ein^ 
tcutfdje  @prad)e  in  einigen  33^0^  juHltcn,  tag  ic^  bicfe  fc^mcre 
naten  eriemen  fonnen  ?  ©pradje  fo  |'d;net(  werte  erlcri^ 

nen  fonnen. 
SBoriikr  Beflagtcn  pe  Pc^  ?  ©ie  ktlagten  pc^  ii&er  tic  ©trengc 

teg  Se^rerg. 
©agtet  i^r,  tag  itart  pd^  Jjerwun^    dx  f^at  pc^  mit  einem  frif(i^  gefc^Uf* 
tet  ^ot  ?  fenen  Sl^efcr  gefc^nitten. 

Reading  Lesson, 
fitter  ober  bcr  ^nbcrc. 

3ur  3eit  ipeinrid^'d  IV.,  ilonigs  »on  Sran!rcic6,  ritt  einmat  eitt 
Sauerlein  »on  feinem  X)orfe  nac^  ^ari«J.  9lic^t  n?eit  oon  tcr  8tatt 
begegnete  cr  einem  0leiter.  ®5  toax  ter  ^bnig.  (Bein  Ocfolge  war 
abP(^tlic^  in  einiger  (Sntfernung  geHiefcen.  „2Co^er  te^  SKegg,*  mein 
^eunt  ?  ipabt  i^r  ®ef(i)afte  ju  ^arid  ?" 

„3a/'  antwortete  ter  Sauer;  „m6^  ntoAteic^  gem  einmal  unfem  qm^ 
ten  ^bnig  fe^en,  ter  fein  3SoIf  fo  jdrtlid^  liebt." 

Xer  ^onig  Id(^elte  unt  fagte:  „Daju  !ann  Suc^  fRat^  toertcn.^f 

„2l6er  »enn  id^  nur  wiigte,  tocher  c«  ip  unter  ten  »ielen  ipopingen, 
»on  tenen  er  umgeben  fein  tvirt." 

„V<ii  ttjitt  ic^  (Sud^  fagen:  3^x  tiirft  nur  5ld)tung  gcBen,  n?eld)er 
ten  ^ut  auf  tern  ^opfe  be^alten  wirt,  menn  atle  Slntem  f  i  ^  e^rerMe? 
tig  ttjerteji  entbtbgtj  ^a^tn, 

<Bo  ritten  pe  miteinantcr  nad)  ^ari^.  I^er  Sauer  gaB  tern  ^bnig 
auf  alle  feine  ?^ragen  gefprdd)ige  5lnttt)ort.§  Sr  erjd^Ite  i:^m  5Jlanc^es 
liber  ten  i^^Itbau,  au«  feiner  ^au3^altung  unt  mie  er  jumeilen  ted 
©onntagd  aud^  fein  ^u^n  im  a;opfe  :^aBe,  unt  merlte  langc  nid^td. 
21U  er  aber  fa^,  njie  aUe  ^tn^tx  fi^  i^ffneten  unt  atle  ©tragen 

♦  Where  do  you  come  from  ? 
f  This  will  not  be  difficult. 
X  Uncovered. 
§  Ready  answer. 


160  IMPERSONAL   VKRB8. 

I 

f  i  (^  mit  ?!)?enf*cn  a  n  f  ii  11 1  e  n ,  trie  Sc^crmantt  e^^rerBictig  mi^ 
wic^,  ba  ging  i§m  cin  Sid.t  auf.  * 

„i]S)k'in  ^err,"  fagtc  er  ju  feinem  wnbeJannten  Scgleiter,  ben  er  tnit 
Slengftlid^leit  unt)  SSerttJunterung  anfci^aute,  „cntn?eber  felt  3^r  ter  ^5:? 
nig  oter  ic^  Mn'0;  bcnn  n?ir  53eite  ^aben  allein  nocb  ben  ^ut  auf  bem 
^opfe." 

Da  lii^eUc  tcr  ^bnig  nnb  fagte:  „3c^  bin'^,  SCenn  i^r  cuer  9lbg^ 
Ian  in  ben  ©tall  gefteUt  unn  euer  ©efc^aft  beforgt  ^aU,  \o  fommt  ju 
ntir  auf  mein  ©c^Io^,  ic^  mill  euc!^  bann  mit  einer  ^D^ittag^fuppe  auf^ 
marten  unt  eu^  ben  Dauphin  jeigen." 

i>ebeL 


LESSON   LXXIV.  ^eftivn  74. 

Impersonal  Verbs. 

Obs.  I. — The  subject  of  impersonal  verbs  is,  as  in  English, 
the  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  singular 
number,  neuter  gender ,  as: 

ti  regnet,  it  rains  e^  bonnert,  it  thunders 

a  f^neit,  it  snows  eg  Hi^t,  it  Hghtens 

ed  ^agclt,  it  hails  tt>  friert,  it  freezes 

t&  t^aut,  it  thaws  H  reift,  it  is  a  hoar  frost,  it  rimes 

ti  tagt,  it  dawns.  ed  giebt  (gi6t),  there  is 

Conjugation  of  an  Impersonal  Verb. 

Present.  S^  regnet,  it  rains 

ImperfexiU  S^  fc^ncite,  it  snowed 

1st  Future.  S^  mirb  frieren,  it  will  freeze 

1st  GonditionaL  S«  miirbe  bonnem,  it  would  thunder 

Perfect.  @«  :^at  getli^t,  it  has  lightened 

Pluperfect.  (£«  ^atte  ge^agelt,  it  had  hailed 

2nd  Future.  (I«  »irb  getagt  l^ahtn,  it  wUl  have  dawned 

2nd  Conditioned.  (S^  murbegeti^aut^aBen,  it  would  have  thawed 

<»  (£ln  £t<^t  aufge^ftt,  to  understand,  to  get  light — on  a  subject 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


161 


Obs.  n. — ^There  is,  are,  was,  were,  etc.,  when  expressing  a 
definite  existence,  or  when  a  circumscribed  distinct 
place  or  space  is  added,  are  translated  by  c  « *  and 
the  verb  f  e  i  tt ,  and  the  predicate  noun  is  in  the  nom- 
inative; as,  ^S  ift  ein  "Mann  im  ipaufe,  there 
is  a  man  in  the  house;  &^  toavtn  a  »  c  i  @  t  u  fc  e  n^f 
ten  im  Concert,  there  were  two  students  in  the 
concert     But  when  an  indefinite  existence  is  to  be 
expressed,  no  distinct  place  being  mentioned,  use  cd 
and  the  verb  gefcen  with  its  proper  case  (accusative), 
as:    @^  ^i{t)ht    gutc    unt   f^Ie^tc    2eutc, 
there  are  good  and  bad  people. 
Obs.  m. — A  number  of  impersonal  verbs  are  also  followed 
by  a  personal  pronoun  of  the  dative  or  accusative 
(reflexive  form,  see  preceding  Lesson),    of  any 
person  or  number. 

With  the  Accusative.  With  the  Dative. 

Sd  biinft  mid),  it  appears  to  me  (S^  begegnct  mir,  it  happens  to  me 

cd  fcurjlet  mid),  I  am  thirsty  c3  fdCt  mir  ein,  it  occurs  to  me 

e^  freut  mi(^,t  I  am  glad  c^  gefaUt  mir,  I  am  pleased 

ii  friert  mid),t  I  am  cold  ti  gelingt  mir,  I  succeed 

C0  ^ungcrt  mic^,t  I  am  hungry  c«  i)l  mir  \t\l,    ]    I  am  sorry 

ti  iammert  mid),  I  pity  e3  t^t  mir  Icit,  J*       for  it 

cd  reut  mic^,  1  repent  ti  ift  mir  ttjarm,  1 1  am  warm 

e3  f^aubert  mic^,t  ^  shudder  ti  ifl  mir  wo^I,  I  feel  well 

e«  [(^mergt  miA,  I  grieve  C0  fommt  mir  »or,  it  seems  to  me 

e«  tjer^rieft  mi^,  it  vexes  me  cd  liegt  mir  »iel  tdrart,  it  is  im- 
e«  wunbert  mic^,  I  wonder  portant  to  me 

*  (£0  is  omitted  in  the  interrogative  form,  as :  Is  there  a  bird  in  this 
cage?  3|l  ein  SJogcl  in  biefcm  ^afig? 

t  Verbs  marked  thus  f  are  also  used  personally  ;  as :  3c^  frcue  mxHi ;  l^ 
fricre;  \^  Jin  burflig  or  i(^  ^at>e  Durfl, 

X  It  is  improper  to  say  :  3d^  Mn  warnt,  or  id^  l)alit  tt> a r m.  Like- 
wise  is  it  incorrect  to  say,  ic^  Ijfn  foU,  but;  c*  i(l  mir  warm,  c« 
ifl  mir  fait,  ici^  frier  c,  are  right. 


162  IMPERSONAL   VERBS. 

With  the  Accusative.  With  the  Dative, 

ti  fragt  ftcfe,  it  is  a  question  e5  fc^wittbelt  mir,  I  am  giddy 

ti  fc^idt  P(%,  it  is  proper  c3  mirt)  mir  iikt,  I  feel  sick 

e^  i)erj^e^t  pd),  it  is  a  matter  of  S3a^  fe^It  '^^Mn%  wliat  is  tlie 
course  or  of  course  matter  with  you? 


Reading  Exercise  LXXIV. 

S^  regnete  nic^t,  a6er  c5  n)irt»  ^agcln.  S3  miirbc  fc^nelcn,  njentt  e« 
nlc^t  fo  fait  ttjdre.  S3  ^t  bie  gan^c  9Iad)t  getJonnert  unb  gcBIi^t* 
S3  Wirt  SJlorgen  [clones  ^Better  fcin*  S3  ijl  I)cute  nic^t  fe^r  U\t,  e3 
t^aut,  S3  njirti  l>ic^  reuen,  baf  tu  ni^t  nad^  33crlin  gegangen  Bijl, 
SCie  geflel  e3  3^«fii  in  5Jiunc^en  ?  S3  n^untert  \m^,  bag  griebri^ 
no(^  nid)t  atgereifl  ijt.  S3  »erbro§  un3»  ^am  e3  bir  nic^t  »or,  al3 
06  er  bie  Unwa^r^eit  fagte?  S3  fing  an  l^eE  ju  n^erbett,  al3  Jt>ir  in 
^ari3  anfamen*  X;a3  Heine  SJ^ab^en  ij^  burftig,  geben  @ie  i^r  ein 
ttjenig  SBajfer.  S3  njirb  '^{)ntxi  nic^t3  nii^n  na(^  ^ari3  ju  ge'^en, 
wenn  @ic  nicbt  Sranjofifc^  fpre(^en  !bnnen.  S3  fragt  ft^,  0I&  er  ein 
Slmerifaner  i|l*  S3  fe^len  mir  einige  Sucker,  n?o  fmb  pe  ?  SCenti  e3  !ein 
enjtge3  Sekn  giiBe,  miirne  ber  ^enfd^  nic^t  fo  gliicflii^  fein  aU  \i(ki  Z^xtx^ 
S3  jammertc  mic!^  i^n  in  einem  fo  ungliicflic^en  3ufiftnbe  gu  flnben. 

Theme  LXXIV. 

Was  it  fine  weather  yesterday  ?  It  rained  and  hailed  the 
day  before  yesterday.  Will  it  snow  to-morrow  ?  It  has  been 
very  cold  every  day  of  this  week.  Yesterday  it  thawed,  to- 
day it  freezes.  Were  you  hungry  ?  I  am  very  thirsty  now, 
but  I  shall  be  hungry  at  twelve  o'clock.  It  thunders,  it  will 
soon  lighten.  Will  there  be  many  walnuts  (in)  this  year? 
There  is  a  street  in  Berlin  over  two  miles  long  ;  it  is  one  of 
the  finest  streets  in  the  world.  It  dawned  before  we  left 
Berlin.  It  is  very  important  to  me  to  know  how  old  you  are. 
We  shudder  when  we  think  (of  it),  how  the  poor  suffer  from 
the  cold  this  winter.  I  wonder  that  he  has  not  written  you, 
for  he  promised  it  before  he  went  away.  It  occurred  to  me 
after  I  had  left  your  uncle.  It  was  proper  to  send  her  a 
dollar,  for  she  is  very  poor. 


IMPERSONAL   VERBS.  163 

Conversation. 

2Ba3  fiir  SBettcr  ifl  c0  f^tntt  ?  S^  ifl  ^eute  nic^t  fe^r  angene^mc3 

SBetter,  ee  ^at  fcen  ganjcn  5)Zori! 

gen  gef(^tteit  itn^  ge^cigelt, 
ipotcgQeflemgercgnet?  Sf^em,  e^  regnetc,  fconncrtc  unt) 

Ht|tc  ttja'^rcnD  bcr  S'Zai^t. 
©laitkn  <Sic,  tap  e5  SJiorgcn  fe^r    @3  Jvirt)  warm  fein,  »enn  ed  nid)t 

fait  fein  n?irt?  ?  f'^ert. 

S3i)l  bn  ^ungrig  oter  burflig  ?  3^^  Hn  fc^r  ^ungrig,  Bitte,  gekn 

©ie  mir  ein  @tuc!d)en  33rot. 
ipot  e«  3^nen  in  ^iinc^cn  nid^i    9lein,  e5  gepcl  mir  in  ^Berlin  i)iel 

gcfaUen?  fecifer. 

2BirD  ta^  Setter  pc^  antern  ?  S^  fi^eint  mir  fo ;  ttjenigj^end  fangt 

e^  an  ju  t^auen. 
2Bad  ijl  bir  gefd}c"^en  ?  ©^  tjertrieft  mid),  tag  mir  ju  $awfe 

fcleiben  miiiJen. 
SBarum  ftnt  jle  fo  traurig  ?  (£^  fc^mer^t  [it,  ta§  ftc  i^ren  trcucn 

2)iener  tterloren  ^akn, 
®iBt  e^  etma5  ^tmi  {or  2Ba3    ^err  Lincoln,  fcer  fiir  me'^r  benn 
giebt'^  ^tm^)  ?  »ier  3^^^^  ^rafibent  ber  5Serei:; 

nigten  @taaten  war,  tjl  ermor^j 

bet  morben, 

Reading  Lesson. 

(£  d  giBt  roixUi6^  fe^r  »iele  ^enfc^en,  bie  Ho§  lefen,  ttjeil  f!c  nic^t 
benfen  biirfen* 

„5Bie  ge^t'g  ?  "  fragte  ein  33Iinber  einen  Stai^mm.  „5Bie  @ie  fe^en/' 
antmortete  ber  Sa^me,  ^ganj  paffakL"* 

Ss  !lingt  Id(i^erli4  aber  ed  ifl  ma^r:  wenn  man  etn?a«  ®uted 
fd^reifecn  mill,  fo  mup  man  eine  gute  ^eter  ^akn,  '^auptfat^Iic^  eine, 
bie,  o^^nc  bag  man  briidt,  Ici(^tmeg  fc^reiBt. 

*  Quite  passable ;  tolerably. 


164  .    IMPERSONAL   VERBS. 

SCetttt  3fntani)  ctwad  fc^Ie^t  madjt,  tad  matt  gut  crwartetc:  nun 
Ja,  fo  fanti  ic^  ed  auA.*  S  d  9  i  H  trenige  3flet)endarten,  tic  fo  i)tel 
33ef^eiten^cit  tterrat^eit, 

SCenn  i(^  eitt  teutfc^ed  33u^  tttit  loteinifc^cn  33uc^|labett  getrucft  lefe, 
fo  fo  mmt  e^  mir  »or ,  aU  rnii^tc  i^  cd  mir  erft  iikrfe^cn; 
ebenfo  menn  ic^  tad  33ud)  »crfe^rt  in  tie  ^ant  ne^iitc  unt  lefc, — ein  33e= 
mi^,  toit  fc^r  unfere  33egriffc  felbfl  »on  tiefen  Ztx6^tn  ab^angcti, 

Sic^tcnberg. 

*  Supply  m  a  ^  ( n  in  this  sentence. 


P^RT  III 

SYNOPSIS   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR. 


THE  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 
1 .    The  Parts  of  Speech  in  German  are  ten  : 
I.  The  Abticle,  VI.  The  Verb. 

n.  The  Noun  or  Substantive.       VII.  The  Adverb. 
ni.  The  Pronoun.  Vm.  The  Preposition. 

IV.  The  Adjective.  IX.  The  Conjunction. 

V.  The  Numeral.  X.  The  Interjection, 

a)  Of  these  (ten)  parts  of  speech  the  first  six  are  capable 
of  inflection.     The  remaining  four  are  invariable. 

b)  The  genders  and  numbers  are  the  same  as  in  English. 

c)  The  relation  of  words  to  each  other,  in  English  ex- 
pressed mostly  by  means  of  prepositions,  is  in  German  also 
denoted  by  a  change  of  the  ending  of  the  noun  and  the  article 
preceding.  These  changes  of  the  endings  are  divided  iuto 
diflferent  classes,  called  cases,  and  correspond  best  to  those  of 
the  ancient  languages.     They  are: 

1.  The  Nominative)  answering  to  the  English  nominative. 

2.  The  Genitive,  usually  corresponding  to  the  English 
possessive,  or  to  the  objective  after  the  preposition  of. 

3.  The  Dative,  usually  corresponding  to  the  EngHsh  objec- 
tive after  the  preposition  to. 

4.  The  Accusative,  correspondiug  to  the  English  objective 
after  an  active  verb,  or  after  other  prepositions  than  of  or  to. 

THE  AKTICLE. 

fB.  Remark. — The  German  has  two  articles,  the  Definite 
and  the  Indefinite.  Both  are  declined,  and  by  their  end- 
ings serve  to  indicate  the  gender,  number  and  case  of  the 
noun,  to  which  they  belong. 


166 


PARADIGMS. — DECLENSIONS. 


Declension  of  the  Definite  Article. 


Singula/r. 


Plural 


MASC. 

PEM.        NEUTER.     foT  the  three  genders. 

Nom. 

bet 

He       ba^              bie,         the 

Gen. 

bed 

bet       be^              bet,      of  the 

Dat. 

bent 

bev       bent             ben,     to  the 

Ace. 

ben 

bie       ba^             bie,          the 

3. 

Declension  of  the  Indefinite  Article. 

MASC. 

PEM.               NEUTER.                                2^0  Plurol. 

Nom. 

tin 

cine           etn,              a  or  an 

Gen. 

cined 

emet         citted,       of  a 

Dat. 

einem 

einer         cinem,      to  a 

em. 


THE   NOUN. 

Declension  of  Common  Nouns. 

4:»  Bemare. — We  divide  the  common  nouns  into  four 
declensions.  The  first  three  contain  the  nouns  of  mascuHne 
and  neuter  gender,  the  fourth  the  nouns  of  feminine  gender. 

First  Declension. 

•5.    The  first  declension  contains  all  masculine  and  neuter 

nouns  ending  in  el,  en,  et,  and  the  diminutives  in  <^ett  and 

lettl.      They  add  §  in  the  genitive  singular,  and  it  in  the 

dative  plural.*    In  the  plural  the  radical  vowels  a,  O,  n,  are 


modified. 

SingiUar. 

MASCULINB. 

NEUTER. 

Nom. 

bcr  ©c^luffel 

bcr  ©arten 

hai  Stio^tx 

bad  S3dum(^en 

Gen. 

be«  mmtis 

be^  ®arten5 

bed  J^Iofierg 

bed  Sdum^enS 

Dat. 

bcm  ©d^luffcl 

bem  ®artcn 

bem  ^lofler 

bent  Sduntd^en 

Ace. 

bra  ©d^liifrel 

ben  ®arten 

bag  ^tofler 

bai  Sdumd^en 

Plural. 

Nom. 

bie  ©(^liilfcl 

bie  Oarten 

bie  ^liifler 

bie  Sdumd^en 

Gen. 

bcr  ©(^litfTel 

ber  ®artcn 

ber  ^lijfier 

ber  Sciumc^en 

Dat. 

ben  ©^luffcln 

ben  ®drten* 

ben  ^loflem 

ben  SSdwmc^en* 

Ace. 

bie  (Sc^Iiiffet 

bie  ®drtcn 

bie  ^lof^er 

bie  SSdumc^en 

*  AU  nouns  add  n  in  the  Dat.  plur.  unless  already  endin^]^  in  n. 


paradigms:  kouns. 


167 


6.     COMPOUND  NOUNa 

Compound  nouns  are  governed  in  their  declension  by  the 
last  component.  Those  belonging  to  the  first  declension  aa:e; 
ttx  ®rofi)ater,  Der  epradjle^rer,  Uv  ^au^fdjliiffel,  i^er  3ug»ogel,  tad 
getermejfer,  Dad  ©djlafgimmer* 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


bet  ©roidotcr 

bem  ®ro§»atcr 
ben  ®ro§t>ater 


bic  ®ropt)ater 
bcr  ©rofwater 
ben  ®ro§»aterii 
ble  ®rop»ater 


}  Notice  that  in  com- 
pound words  the  last 
component  only  is  in- 
flected. 


7.     EXCEPTIONS. 


I. — -^er  Sinter,  ^cr  ^alcr,  fcer  ^u(^en,  ber  txo)p\tn,  and  ter  3lme^ 
rifaner,  do  not  modify  the  radical  voweL 

n. — Ten  nouns  of  this  declension,  ending  in  cn,  frequently 
drop  the  tl,  and  end  in  the  nominative  in  e  only:  ter  5^amen 
or  ^amc,  ber  ©laukn  or  ©tawbe,  f er  gunfen  or  gunfc,  fcer  ^aufen 
or  ipaufe,  ber  ©ebanfeti  or  ®ebanfe,  ber  %xk't}m  or  t^riebe,  ber  SSilien 
or  SBitle,  ber  ©amen  or  ©ante,  ber  S3u(^jlakn  or  33uc^j^aBe,  and  ber 
gelfen  or  ^el^. 

m. — The  following  masculine  nouns  are  regular  in  the 
singular,  but  take  tl  in  all  cases  of  the  plural  and  do  not 
modify  the  vowels :  ber  S3auer,  Saier,  55ctter,  ^a6:ibat,  ©ta(^el, 
^antoffel,  ©eoatter,  and  ^udfel.  Words  in  or,  derived  from 
the  Latin,  take  ctl,  with  the  exception  of  SJJajcr,  which  takes 
e  only. 


EXAMPLES. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Bat. 
Ace 


Singula/r. 

bet  a3aucr 
be«  SBaiterS 
bem  S3aucr 
ben  SBauer 


Plural. 

bic  SBauerti 
ber  SSauetn 
ben  Sauern 
b»e  aSauern 


Singular. 

ber  5>rofeffor 
beS  9)rofeffor8 
bem  9)rofeJTor 
ben  ^^rofcffor 


Plural. 

bie  9)rofefforeil 
ber  5)rofefforctt 
ben  ^JrofefTcrcn 
bic  9)rofef|'oteit 


8.   Second  Declension. 

To  this  declension  belong  all  masculine  substantives  and 
national  appellations  ending  in  e,  a  few  monosyllabic  words 


168 


PARADIGMS  :    NOUNS. 


that  were  formerly  dissyllabic  and  ended  in  t,  and  all  foreign 
nouns  of  the  masculine  gender  having  the  accent  on  the  last 
syllable,  except  those  ending  in  r,  al,  an,  and  aft.'  Mascu- 
line nouns  and  national  appellations  ending  in  e,  add  n  •  all 
others  add  en  through  all  cases  of  both  numbers  (the  nomi- 
native, of  course,  excepted).  The  radical  vowel  of  nouns 
belonging  to  this  declension  is  not  modified.  Adjectives 
and  participles,  when  used  substantively,  take  the  inflec- 
tion of  this  declension  ;  e.  g,,  from  alt,  old,  kr  2llte,  the  old 


man. 


MASCULINE 
NOUN. 


Nom.  ber  ^n<At 
GeiL    bed  ^na&eit 
Dat.    bent  i^naben 
Ace.    ben  i^naben 


EXAMPLES. 


NATIONAL 
APPELLATION. 


FOREIGN 
NOUN. 


ADJECTIVE  DECLIIf. 
ED  SUBSTANTIVKLi; 


Singular. 

ber  Sranjofc  ber  5Wonard^'  ber  STUe 

bed  granjofen        bed  «Wonar(ieti  bed  Sttten 

bcm  granjofen       bem  5Wonarc^cn  bent  SlUeii 

ben  granjofert        ben  3«onar(^cii  ben  Stlten 


Nom.  bie  Jhtaben 

Gen.  ber  iJnabcit 

Dat.  ben  ^nabett 

Ace.  bte  i?nabcn 


Plural. 
bte  graujofen         bie  9)?onard^eii 


ber  grannofen 
ben  ^ranjofcn 
bie  Sfranjofcn 


ber  SKonard^en 
ben  5Wonard^en 
bie  ^omxi^xk 


bte  Sllteit 
ber  sruen 
ben  mxtn 
bie  ^Itea 


MONOSYLLABIC  NOUN,  FORMERLY 
DISSYLLABIC. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


ber  ®raf 
bed  ®rafcn 
bem  ©rafen 
ben  ®rafeii 


Plural. 

bie  ®rafcn 
ber  ®raffn 
ben  ®rafen 
bie  ©rafen 


To  this  class  belong:  ber  ©fir,  bet 
e^rift,  ber  %m>  ber  ®raf,»  ber  ^flb,» 
ber  ^crr4*  ber  ^<ixx,%  ber  9?er»4  ber 
9)oet4  ber  S^or,  ber  a)?enfci^4  ^^^  ^^ 
Dd^d.t 


*  Foreign  nouns  ending  in  Xt  ttl#  ftll*  and  afi  belong  to  the  third  de- 
clension. 

'  Old  German :  ber  ®ra»e. 

'  ^etb  is  dissyllabic  in  Anglo-Saxon :  healeth. 

*  Those  marked  with  an  X  are  still  frequently  spelled  with  f  and  so 
pronounced  by  the  vulgar  in  some  parts  of  Germany. 


PARADIGMS  :    NOUNS.  169 

9.  Third  Declension. 

This  declension  contains  all  masculine  and  neuter  noun 
not  already  enumerated  in  the  first  (el,  en,  CV,  <|ien,  and 
leitt)  and  second  (e)  declensions.     They  are  : 

1.  All  MASCULINE  and  neuter  monosyllabic  roots ;  and  such 
as  take  a  prefix.  2.  Most  of  the  masculine  and  neuter  com- 
pound words.  3.  Masculine  derivatives  ending  in  i^,  i^, 
ot,  tn^,  and  Ittt^.  4.  Some  masculine  and.  all  neuter  nouns 
of  foreign  origin  having  the  accent  on  the  last  syllable.  5. 
All  nouns  ending  in  t\^nm,  and  some  in  iii§. 

Nouns  in  this  declension  add  in  the  singular  cd'  in  the 
genitive,  and  c'  in  the  dative.  In  the  plural  they  add  e  in 
all  cases  and  in  the  dative  besides  the  c  an  tt.  Masculine 
nouns  modify  the  radical  vowels  a,  0,Xi* 

EXAMPLES  OF  MASCULINE  NOUNS. 
monosyllabic    noun  with         derivative,     foreign  noun. 


ROOT. 

Nom.  ber  Slug 
Gen.    beg  Bluffed 
Dat.    bem  ^luffc 
Ace.    ben  %\vl^ 

PREFIX. 

Singular. 
ber  Scfe^t               ber  5taft3 
beg  S3efc^l8              beg  ^dftgS 
bem  Sefc^lc             bem  ^dftge 
ben  Sefc^l                ben  ^dftg 

bcr  ilorbinal 
beg  iiParDinalS 
bem  ^arbtnale 
ben  A'arbinal 

Nom.  bie  gliifle 
Gen.    ber  g-lulfc 
Dat.    bengliiffctl 
Ace.    bie  gliijfc 

Plural. 
bie  ©cfe^le               bie  i^dftge 
ber  Sefc^le              ber  ^djtgc 
ben  SBefe^Icit           ben  ^dftgen 
bie  a3cfc^le              bie  tdfige 

COMPOUND  WORD. 

bie  5taTbindte 
bcr  ^arbinalc 
ben  ^arbindleii 
bie  ^arbindle 

Singvlar.                   Plural. 

Nom.    bcr  STpfcIkum           bie  tl^felboumc     ^ 
Gen.     beg  SlpfelbaumeS        ber  Slpfelboumc      I 
Dat.      bem  2tpfclbaume        ben  Stpfelbaumen    ( 
Ace.      ben  STpfelbaum          bie  Slpfelbaume     j 

Notice  that  in  com- 
]X)und  words  only  the 
last  component  is  in- 
flected. 

*  Masculine  derivatives  in  ig  add  8  only. 

'  Most  writers  elide  the  c  in  the  genitive  and  dative  singular  in  dis- 
syllabic and  polysyllabic  nouns,  unless  accented  on  the  last  syllable. 


170 


PABADIGMS  :    NOUITS. 


10.   EXCEPTIONS. 

I.— Der  ^xm,  ZaQ,  ^mt,  (B6:i\if^,  !Ea^5,  Sac^g,  Slal,  ^fab,  ©toff, 
^nnlt,  ®rab;  and  Jpuf  do  not  modify  the  radical  vowel  in  the 
l^lural. 

11. — Der  <Btaat,  ©tra^I,  ©ci^mcrg,  ©pom,  !Dom,  and  ©ee  add 
en  in  the  plural  and  are  not  modified. 

in.— !Der  mann,  2Balc,  2eib,  ®eift,  3Burm,  ^anb,  ©ott,  Drt, 
5)ormunb,  Sleic^t^um,  and  3^^^w»i  modify  the  radical  vowel  and 
take  et  in  the  plural. 


Exception  I. 

Exception  II.               Exception  III. 

SingtUoT. 

Nom.  bcr  ^unb 

ber  <Stxa^l             ber  SBurm 

ber  9iei(|t^um 

Gen. 

bca  ^unbcS 

bed  ©trailed          bed  SBurmed 

bed  9lei(^tiumc0 

Dat. 

bcm  ^unbe 

bem  ©tragic           bem  SSurmc 

bem  JReic^t^umc 

Ace. 

ben  ^unb 

ben  ©tro^l             ben  SBurm 
Plural. 

ben  Dteid^f^um 

Nom 

.  bie  ^unbe 

bie  <Stra^lett          bie  aBurmer 

bie  9leii^t^iimcr 

Gen. 

ber  ^unbe 

ber  ©tra^Ien          ber  SSiirmer 

ber  JReic^t^itmcr 

Dat. 

ben  ^unbelt 

ben  ©tra^Icn          ben  SBiirmcm 

ben  9iei(i^tpmcm 

Ace 

bie  $unbe 

bie  ©tra^lctt          bie  SSiirmcr 

bie  fRtx^t^vLmev 

EXAMPLES  OF  NEUTER  NOUNS. 

MONOSYLLABIC 

NOUN  WITH              foreign 

WORD  ENDING  IN 

ROOT. 

prefix.               noun. 

Singular. 

t^um. 

Nom 

.  baa  (S6)af 

bad  ®eBet            bad  Concert 

bad  ^atfert|um 

Gen, 

bea  ©c^affg 

bed  ®eBetcS          bed  goncerteg 

bed  ilatfcrt^umc? 

Bat. 

bem  ©c^afc 

bem  ®ebete           bem  Goncerte 

bem  ^aifert^ume 

Ace. 

bod  ©(^af 

bad  ©ebet            bad  Concert 
Plural. 

bad  ^aifert^um 

Nom 

.  bie  <Sd)afc 

bie  ©ebete            bie  donccrtc 

bie  ^aifertpmcr 

Gen. 

ber  ©cDafe 

ber  ®ekte            ber  (Soncerte 

ber  ^aifertMmcr 

Dat. 

ben  ©(^afctt 

ben  ©ebeteit          ben  Soncerteil 

ben  A'aifertliimem 

Ace 

bie  ©c^afe 

bie  ®ebete            bie  Soncerte 

bie  ^aifert^umer 

!!♦   EXCEPTIONS. 

L— 2)ad  5rmt,  33anb,  33irb,  33Iatt,  33ud^,  l;aA,  !t)orf,  (Si,  Setb, 
®clb,  ®hi,  ®rab,  §awd,  $orn,  ^u^n,  ^alb,  ^inb,  ^leib,  2amm, 


paradigms:  nouns. 


171 


Sanb,  Stcb,  ^t%  SIlab,  ©^lof,  Z^d,  2Bei&,  Sort,  ^log/  ©emad^, 
©emiit^,  ©eftc^t,  ©ef^Iedjt,  ^amifol',  Sflegiment',  (BpitaV,  ^aifert|um, 
and  giirpent^um  modify  the  radical  voweP  and  take  er  in  the 
plural. 

n.— t)ad  Sluge,  Sett,  (Snce,  $emb,  3nfe!t,  D|r,  and  bad  ^cra,  the 
heart  (which  takes  ett^  in  the  genitive  and  etl  in  the  dative 
singular,  as,  bed  ^eractl^,  bem  ^eqett),  take  en  in  the  plural. 

m. — A  few  words  ending  in  al,  derived  from  the  Latin, 
take  ten  in  the  plural :  bad  Capital,  mmxai,  Snaterial,  &c. 


Exception  I.                   Exception  II. 

Exception  III. 

Singular. 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 

bad  Slntt 
bed  ^mttS 
bent  Simtc 
bad  Stmt 

hai  ©eniad^              bad  STuge 

bed  ©emac^eS           bed  STugeg 

.   bent  ®ema(^c            bcm  STuge 

bad  ©emad^              bad  Singe 

Plural. 

bad  Sta^ital 
bed  ^apitaI0 
bent  Capitate 
bad  i^apital 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Aoc. 

bie  ttemtet 
ber  Sfenttcr 
ben  Slemtent 
bieSIemter 

bie  ®cma(^cr           bie  Slugen 
ber  ©cmac^cr           bcr  STugeit 
ben  ®cmad^crn         ben  STugen 
bie  ®entaci>cr           bie  Slugeit 

bie  ^apitalien 
ber  ^apitalicn 
ben  ^apitaltcn 
bie  ^apitalten 

la.  Fourth  Declension. 

All  feminine  substantives  belong  to  this  declension.  In 
the  singular  they  remain  unchanged.^  In  the  plural  the 
monosyllabic  nouns  add  e*and  modify  the  radical  vowel,  while 
the  dissyllahic  and  polysyllabic  nouns  take  Ctl,"  but  do  not 
modify  their  radical  vowel." 


^  5lo§  takes  e  only. 

*  Words  in  t^um  modify  this  syllable 


Siirjlcnt^itmer. 

^  Feminine  nouns  had  at  one  time  an  inflection  in  the  singular,  and 
vestiges  of  that  practice  still  remain  in  poetry  and  in  certain  phrases; 
e.  g.,  auf  (Erben  (instead  of  auf  ber  6rbe),  on  earth. 

*  In  the  dative  n  is  of  course  added. 

'  Feminine  dissyllabic  and  polysyllabic  nouns  ending  in  c  add  n  only ; 
e.  g.,  bie  ®abc,  plur.  bie  ®abcn. 

*  !Die  WtutttV,  the  mother,  and  bie  3^o(|tcr,  the  daughter,  modify  the 
radical  vowel,  but  do  not  change  their  ending,  as,  bie  5Wiitter,  bie  %o<i)Ux. 


172 


paradigms:  nouns. 


MONOSTLLABLE. 


EXAMPLES. 

DISSYLLABLES  WITH  U  AND  Ctt.       POLYSYLLABLE. 

Siri^vlar. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


bic  ©and 
ber  ®an« 
bcr  ®and 
bie  ©and 


bie  ©tunbc 
bcr  (Stunbc 
bcr  <5tunbc 
bic  ©tunbc 


Nom.  bic  ®onfc 
Gen.    bcr  ®anfe 
Dat.    ben  ©anfeii 
Ace.    bic  ©cinfe 


bic 
bcr 
ber 
bic 
Plural. 
bie  ©tunbcit  bic 
bcr  ©tuttben  bcr 
ben  ©tunbcit  ben 
bic  ©tunben         bic 


mm 
mm 

mmtn 
mmtn 
mmtn 
W^mtn 


bic  Slufhtcrffamfeit 
ber  Slufmerffamfeit 
bcr  9lufmerffam!cit 
bic  SlufmerffamfciJ 

bic  Slufmerffamfciten 
ber  STufmerffamfcitcn 
ben  Slufmerffamfcitcn 
bie  Slufmcrffamfcitcn 


13.    EXCEPTIONS. 

I. — ^The  following  twenty-seven  feminine  monosyllabic 
nouns,  which  were  formerly  dissyllabic  (see  Second  Declen- 
sion, Monosyllabic  Nouns  and  Notes),  still  retain  the  old  in- 
flection, viz.,  en  in  the  plural  instead  of  c :  ^xt  2lrt,  33a^n,*  * 
S3u*t,  33urg,  ^aH  ?^Iwr,  §tut|,  gorm,''  grau/  ®Iut^,  SagD,  Sajl, 
|)flid)t,  ^oji;  Dual,  (S*aar  *  ©(^la^t,  (Sc^rift  *  ©c^ul^  ©pur,  2^at, 
Zxd^i,  U§r  *  SBa^t,  5De(t  *  3a^l,  and  3elt. 

n. — ^Dissyllabic  and  polysyllabic  nouns  ending  in  the  sin- 
gular in  I  or  t,  add  only  n  in  the  plural. 

m. — ^The  following  nouns  add  only  e  in  the  plural :  T){e 
Sctriibni^,  Srlaukif ,  ginjlernig,  ^enntnif,  and  2;riibfal. 


MONOSYLLABLE. 

DISSYLLABLE  IN  X  AND  I.      POLYSYLLABLE  IN  ni§. 

Singula/r. 

Nom. 

bie  Sud^t 

bie  ©(^toeflcr            bic  S^abcl 

bic  SBctriibnig 

Gen. 

bcr  asucit 

ber  ©c^wejler            bcr  9'JabcI 

ber  S3etriibni§ 

Dat. 

ber  ^m 

bcr  ©(^wcjler           bcr  SiJabcl 

bcr  gSctritbnif 

Ace. 

bic  ^m 

bic  ©d^wefier            bic  !»abcl 

bie  Setriibnip 

Nom. 

bic  ^mtn 

bic  <S^»cflerit         bie  Si^abctn 

bic  SBctriibniffe 

Gen. 

bcr  Sudeten 

bcr  <5^»cjlerii         bcr  9?abcltt 

ber  aSetriibniffc 

Dat. 

ben  aSuc^teit 

ben  ©(^wcflcm         ben  9?abclit 

ben  Setriibniffen 

Ace. 

bic  a3u(^tcit 

bic  ©c^mcjiern          bie  9?abelrt 

bie  SSetriibniffc 

*  Words  marked  with  an  *  are  still  sometimes  pronounced  by  the 
lower  classes  in  some  parts  of  Germany  as  if  they  terminated  in  c. 
»  9)ofi  and  gform  are  derived  from  the  French,  la  poste,  la  forme. 
'  Old  German ;  grauc. 


PARADIGMS. — PROPER  NOUNS.  173 

PROPER  NOUNS. 

Declension  of  Proper  Nouns  of  Persons. 

14.  The  Names  of  persons  are  declined  either  with  or 
without  the  article  (definite  or  indefinite). 

1.  In  the  singular,  proper  nouns,  when  preceded  by  the 
article,  remain  uncJianged ;  but,  when  used  without  the 
article  they  add  $  in  the  genitive.* 

2.  In  the  plural,  proper  nouns  are  used  only  when  the  same 
noun  is  common  to  several  individuals,  or  as  common  nouns. 
Those  denoting  masculine  persons  add  e,f  those  denoting 
feminine  persons  add  Ctt» 

MASCULINE.  FEMININE. 


Louis 

Homer 

Mary 

Anna 

^ng.  N.  ^er  2u^n?icj 

^om'er 

bic  mark 

Slnna 

G.  bed  2m)»ig 

$omerd 

tct  ^arie 

5lnnad 

D.  beitt  2ut)tt)ig 

Corner 

feet  ^arie 

2lnna 

A.  ttn  SutttJig 

Jpomer 

Me  ^naric 

Slnna 

Henry 

SchiUer 

Louisa 

Joan 

Plur.  N.  bte  Jpcinric^c 

tic  (Slider 

tic  2ouifen    ' 

tie  3o^annctt 

G.  tcrJ^einrid^e 

tcr  8d)iner 

tcr  Soutfeti    1 

jcr  3o^annett 

D.  fcen  ^einridjctt  Un  ©^itlcrtt  ben  Souifeii  ben  ^o^anneti 
A.  bic  ^einric^e      bie  (Bc^ifler      bic  Souifeit    bie  3o^«nneit 

Icl.  Exception  I. — Masculine  names  ending  in  S,  ^,  f<^, 
^,  I?,  or  g  take  end  in  the  genitive. 

n. — Feminine  names  ending  in  e  add  tld. 

HL — ®ott  (God)  is  declined  without  the  article.  In  the 
genitive  ed  is  added. 

rV. — ^Foreign  names  ending  in  §  do  not  add  another  §  in 
the  genitive,  but  use  the  article  instead. 

Note. — S^rif!u3  and  3efuii  are  declined  as  in  Latin,  as :  N.  3eftt8  S^ri^ 
jlag,  G.  3eftt  S^rijlt,  D.  Sefu  S^riHo.  A.  Sefum  S^riflttHt. 

*  If  several  proper  nouns  stand  together,  the  last  only  is  inflected.  If 
the  word,  §ert,  ^fttttt,  SWtttlom,  ^rduletn,  or  some  other  common  nomi, 
expressing  a  title  or  dignity,  when  accompanied  by  the  article,  precedes 
a  proper  noun,  only  the  common  noun  is  declined. 

f  In  the  dative  n  is  of  course  added.  Words  ending  in  c  in  the  sin- 
gular  do  not  add  another  e,  and  the  names  of  male  persons  ending  in  tX, 
cUf  er,  and  d^cn  remain  unchanged. 


174 


PABADIQMS. — ^PKOPER  NOUNS. 


Ex.  to  Exc.  I.  Ex.  to  Exc.  II.  Ex.  to  Exc.  III.  Ex.  to  Exc.  IV. 

Francis  Emily  God  Alcibiades 

N.  grana  (Smilic  ®ott  5l(ciBiat)eg 

G.  ^ran^cn^  gmiUcnd  dotted  ^c^  2llciMat)e3 

D.  ^rana  gmilic  ®ott  5lIciHa^e« 

A.  grans  ©milie  ®ott  mdUaUi 

Names  of  Countries,  Places,  Elvers,  Lakes,  etc. 

1 6.  Names  of  countries  and  places  do  not  take  the  article, 
but  add  §  in  the  genitive. 

Nom.  Deutf^Iant,  Germany  S3erlin,  Berlin 

Gen.    Deutfc^lantd  Serlind 

Dai    !i:eutf4tant>  S3erlin 

Ace.    !Deutf4lant>  S3erlin 

1 7.  Exception  I. — ^Names  of  countries  and  places  ending 
in  $,  "^f  or  3,  remain  uninflected  in  the  genitive,  but  are 
preceded  by  the  preposition  »on. 

II. — Die  (B6^m\i,  Switzerland,  and  tie  2;Mei  (Jiiirte^),  Turkey, 
are  treated  as  common  nouns. 

1 8 .  Names  of  rivers,  lakes,  &c.,  take  the  article  in  Ger- 
man, and  are  declined  as  common  nouns. 

National  Appellations. 

19.  1.  National  masculine  appellations  are  formed  from 
the  names  of  the  respective  countries  by  adding  ct,  and  are 
declined  as  common  nouns, 

2.  National/emimwe  appellations  are  formed  from  the  mas- 
culine* by  the  addition  of  itl(n)  in  the  sing,  and  inn  in  the 
plural ;  e.  gr.,  tie  ^olitttien,  the  Pohsh  ladies* 

20.  Exception.— The  following  are  formed  irregidarly. 
ter  (Sad^fe,  the  Saxon  ter  ^reuge,  the  Prussian 
ter  T)eutf(^e  *  the  German             ter  ^ole,  the  Pole 

ter  X:dne,  the  Dane  ter  3flujfe,  the  Eussian 

ter  Bran^ofe,  the  Frenchman         ter  (Sd)n?ete,  the  Swede 


ter  ©riec^e,  the  Greek 
ter  (Spanier,  the  Spaniard 


ter  3:iirfe,  the  Turk 
ter  33ater,  the  Bavarian 


Note.— Adjectives  denoting  nationality  are  generally  formed  by  add- 
ing  ifll^  to  the  roots  of  national  api)eilations,  e.  g.,  ruffitd^f  except  iieutfl^* 
*  Feminine,  4.nc  QDeutjc^c,  but  ciu  2)cut|d)cr#  a  (iermau^ 


PAEADIGMS. ^ADJECnVKS. 


175 


The  Adjective. 

21  ♦  1.  The  German  adjective  is,  whenever  it  is  a  predi- 
cate, indeclinable,  and  is  generally  separated  from  the  noun 
by  a  VEEB  ;  e.  g.,  Xtv  SBein  ift  gut,  the  wine  is  good. 

2.  When  the  adjective  is  a  quahfying  attribute  to  a  noun 
it  precedes  the  latter,  and  agrees  with  it  in  gender,  number, 
and  case ;  e.  g.,  tad  fleine  ^oud,  tie  fleinetl  ipiiufcr,  the  small 
house,  the  small  houses.  ^ 

Declension  of  the  Attributive  Adjective. 

3.  The  attributive  or  qualifying  adjective  has  three  dif- 
ferent forms  of    declension  : 

a)  When  preceded  by  the  definite  article ; 
6)  When  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  ; 
c)  When  it  stands  vrithout  any  article. 

32»     The  Adjective  peeceded  by  the  Definite  Article. 

Adjectives,  when  preceded  by  the  definite  article,  or  by  a 
pronoun  declined  like  the  definite  article,  take  the  inflection 
of  the  Second  Declension,  i,  e.,  t,  in  the  nomiaative  singular; 
Ctt*  in  all  other  cases.  The  accusative  singular  fem.  and  neut. 
being  always  hke  the  nominative  are,  of  course,  excepted. 


masculine. 
the  good  man 
N.  ^ct  gute  ^axm 
G.  ted  giitcti  banned 
D.  tern  guteit  SJZanne 
A.  ten  guten  ^ann 

N.  ^tc  gutcn  *3)?anner 
G.  ter  gwten  ?S)^dnner 
D.  ten  gutctt  ^3)?annent 
A.  tie  guten  banner 


Singular. 

feminine. 
the  beautiful  woman 
bic  fd)one  %tau 
ter  fd^bnen  %vavL 
tie  f^bne  %xau 
ter  fdjonctt  %xan 

Plural. 
hit  fA'bncit  %cciVitn 
ter  fd)b«cn  ^rauen 
ten  fd^onen  %c^mn 
tie  fc^bnctt  ^rauen 


neuter. 
the  small  child 
bad  fleinc  ^int 
tc«  Heinctt  tinted 
tern  Heincti  ^inte 
ta0  Heine  .Jtint 

Mc  Heinctt  Winter 
ter  fleinett  Winter 
ten  Heinctt  ^intern 
tie  Heinctt  Winter 


Adjectives  ending  in  t\,  eit,  or  tt>  drop  the  c,  when  declined. 


176  PARADIGMS. ADJECTIVES. 

23.    The  Adjective  preceded   by   the  Indefinite  Article. 

Adjectives  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article,  by  a  posses- 
sive pronoun,  or  by  f  ctn  (no),  add  in  the  nominative  singular 
tt  in  the  masculine  and  c^  in  the  neuter. 


MAeCULINE. 

feminine. 

NEUTER. 

a  poor  painter 

an  old  woman 

a  sick  child 

N. 

tin  armcr  ^alcr 

Cine  altc  %van 

etit  fran!es  ^tnb 

G. 

cined  armctt  ^alcrvJ 

einer  alien  %xan 

eine^  Iranfen  .tinted 

D. 

cincm  amieit  Wakv 

ciner  alien  %xau 

cinem  fran!cn  RinU 

A. 

einen  armen  3)^aler 

cine  altc  %xavi 

tin  tranled  ^int> 

5^4.    The  Adjective  Without  an  Article. 

Adjectives  not  immediately  preceded  by  an  article,  or  by  a 
pronoun,  decUned  like  an  article,  take  the  ending  of  the  ar- 
ticle to  indicate  the  gender  of  the  noun  which  they  qualify. 


Singular. 

KASCULINE. 

feminine. 

neuter. 

red  wine 

fresh  milk 

black  cloth 

N. 

Tot^cr  3©ein 

fri)d;c  mi^ 

fd)a>ar^e$*  3:uc^^ 

G. 

rotten  Seined 

frifc^ct  mH^ 

fcl)irarjctt  3:uc^d 

D. 

rotletit  SC^einc 

frijUcr  ^ilc^ 

)d)\vax^cm  3:u^ 

A. 

rotten  ©ein 

frif^e  mm 

Plural. 

fd^ttjaqe^  2:u(^ 

red  wine 

warm  soups 

new  books 

N. 

rot^c  Seine 

n?arme  ©uppen 

neuc  53uAer 

G. 

totter  Sein 

njatmct  ©uppen 

neuer  33ud^er 

6. 

rotten  SBeinen 

warmen  ©uppen 

neweii  33u^ern 

1. 

rot'^e  Seine 

toaxmc  ©uppen 

neue  Siid^er 

^9.    Adjectives  used  as  Nouns. 

Adjectives  used  as  nouns  begin  with  a  capital  letter  ;  e.  gr., 
from  geijig  (avaricious),  ^cr  ©eijige,  the  avaricious  man. 

*  In  colloquial  language,  ti  is  sometimeB  omitted,  as  :  fd^toarj  %u^,  etc 


PARADIGMS  :    NOUNS. 


177 


a6.  Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

Adjectives  add  cr  in  the  comparative  and  ft  in  the  super- 
lative, and  modify  the  radical  vowels  a,  O,  u  in  these  two 
degrees;  e.  gr., 

Superlative. 
iiingfl,  licr  iungf^c*  or  am  jungfTcn 
cbclfl,  bcr  ebel|1c,  or  om  cbelftcu 
weifcfl,  l>cr  weifejlCf  <>r  am  wcifeilcii 
»Ubcfl#  tier  n)ilbejlc»  or  am  trilbcilen 
oltcfl*  bcr  oltejlo  or  am  alteflen 
fii^cfi/  Jier  [m^t,  or  am  fu§e|lcit 

Note. — ^Notice:  1.  That  those  ending  in  el  reject  e  in  the  compara- 
tive ;  e.  y.y  ebler  (not,  ebeler).  2.  That  those  ending  in  c  do  not  add  an- 
other e;  e.  g.,  weifer  (not,  wcifecr).  3.  That  adjectives  ending  in  X^,  i,  or 
a  sibilant  (j,  i,  flf,  §,  \%  insert  e  in  the  superlative  before  f|. 

ar,    EXCEPTIONS. 
Adjectives  of  two  or  more  syllables,  monosyllables  con- 
taining the  diphthong  ail,  as,  Man,  laut,  &c.,  and  those  con- 
tained in  the  following  list,  do  not  admit  of  the  modification 
of  the  radical  voweL 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

jungr  young 

iiingcr 

cbcl#  noble 

ebler 

ttjctfc,  wise 

»>eifcr 

IdUD,  wild 

»ilbcr 

alt,  old 

filter 

fu§,  sweet 

fu^er 

hla$,  pale 

farg,  scanty 

»)tatt,  fla 

flarr,  stiflF 

fcunt,  speckled 

flor,  clear 

\)l\im)?,  clumsy 

l^ol;;,  proud 

falfc^,  false 

fnapp,  close,  scarce 

ro^,  raw,  rude 

flump f,  blunt 

flad^,  flat 

la^m,  lame 

runb,  round 

toUr  mad 

fro^f  merry 

log,  loose 

fanft,  soft 

»olI,  full 

^0^1,  hollow 

matt,  tired 

fc^laff,  slack 

ja^m,  tame 

l^olb,  kind 

worfc^,  rotten 

f(^tanf,  slender 

fa^l,  bald 

natft,  naked 

f(^rof,  rugged 

28. 

Irregular  and  Defective  Forms. 

Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

Mb,  soon 

e^cr,  frii^cr,  sooner 

am  c^ejlen,  the  soonest 

grog,  great 

9r6§er,  greater 

bcr  grogle,  ant  gr6§tcn,  the  greatest 

9Ut,  good 

beffer,  better 

bcr  bcf^e,  am  beflen,  the  best 

^0(^,  high 

^o^er,  higher 

bCT  ^0(||le,  am  ^oc^jlen,  the  highest 

na^c,  near 

nailer,  nearer 

ber  nac^jlc,  am  nac^j^citf  the  nearest 

»icl,  much 

me^r,  more 

bcr  mcijle,  am  meijlcn,  the  most 

imrnxQ,  little 

<  weniser, )  ^^^ 
<mtnber,  ) 

j''""'f"'3fl™-K],e  least 
( am  mmbeften, 

178  THE   NUMEBALS. 

THE  NUMEBALS. 

^9.    Cardinal  Numbers. 

tin,  (elrtd),  one  adjtgebtt,  eighteen 

jiuei,  two  neunjcjitt,  nineteen 

brei,  three  S^^^wj^/  twenty 

»ier,  four  ein  unb  swanjig,  etc. 

fiinf,  five  ^rci^iG^  thirty 

fcc^^,  six  iJtergi^,  forty 

peben,  seven  fiinfjig  or  funfjtg,  fifty 

ad)t,  eight  fec^Jt^;  sixty 

tteutt,  nine  ftebenjt^  or  fiebgtg,  seventy 

Se^n,  ten  ad)tjig,  eighty 

elf,  eleven  ncunjt^,  ninety 

jttjolf,  twelve  l^untcrt,  a  hundred 

breijejjit,  thirteen  l^unbert  unb  dn^,  etc. 

ijicrjcl^tt,  fourteen  girei^unbert,  etc. 

fiinfgcl^tt  or  funfgel^tt,  fifteen    taufcnt),  a  thousand 

fec^get>tt,  sixteen  eine  SJ^illion,  a  million 

ftc&engel^ti,  seventeen  gmci  SJlillionctt,  two  millions 

30.  (Eina  is  used  in  counting ;  e.  g.,  iini,  g»et;  einmal  cinS  ijl  tin8» 
&c.,  or  when  no  allusion  or  reference  is  made  to  any  particular  object ; 
e.  g.,  Sd  ^at  cinS  gefc^lagtn,  it  has  struck  one. 

31.^  hundred,  a  thousand,  is  in  German  l^unbcrt,  taufcnb ;  but  one 
hundred,  one  thousand  is  cin^unbert  and  cintaufenb. 

32.  ®itt  {one)  is  decHned  Hke  the  indefinite  article,  but 
has  a  stronger  accent,  and  is  often  written  with  a  capital ; 
e.  g.,  @itt  ^CLXvx,  one  man.  With  the  definite  article,  it  is 
dechned  like  an  adjective;  but  when  alone,  referring  to  a 
noun  understood,  it  takes  the  same  endings  with  the  posses- 
sive pronoun  (Less.  XXV.,  Obs.  L);  e.  g.,  ber  @itte  SSlam, 
the  one  man  ;  bem  ©inctl  ijl  ^u  warm,  tern  Slnberen  au  Mi,  the 
one  is  too  warm,  the  other  too  cold  ;  ^aben  @{e  cincn  4)ttt  ? 
ipicr  ij^  einet.    Jpat  cr  eine  ®akl?    Sr  "^at  eine. 

33,  StfCt  and  ^rel  not  preceded  by  the  article  add  et 
in  the-genitive,  and  Ctt  in  the  dative  ;  e.  g,,  "Lk  .^o^e  gmcicr 
Wcinmx,  the  height  o/*  two  men  ;  bic  2;ru)))jen  »on  fcreiett  ©taatcn, 
the  troops  of  three  States. 


THE  NUMERALS.  179 

34.  The  other  cardinals  add  eil  in  the  dative  when  em- 
ployed as  nouns  :  e.  g.,  mit  ©ecfofett  fa^ren,  to  drive  (with)  six 
(horses);  auf  alien  ^iercil  ge^en,  to  crawl  on  all  fours  (i.  e., 
hands  and  feet). 

S5*  When  the  cardinals  stand  before  nouns  expressing 
measure,  weight,  or  quantity,  the  noun  must  be  in  the  singu- 
lar; e.  g,j  3^^"  %^i(  two  feet;  fiinf  5>funt,  five  pounds;  a&it  <Stuc^ 
eight  pieces. 

36.  Exceptions. — The  following  feminine  nouns  ending 
in  c  are  excepted  :  ^lafc^e,  bottle  ;  ^attne,  can  ;  Xonnt, 
ton  ;  &ilt,  eU  ;  ISfttilt,  mile. 

37.  From  the  cardinals  the  following  nimierals  are 
formed  : 

1.  The  Tariatiyes,  by  the  affix  lei  (equivalent  to  Slrt, 
kind) ;  e.  g.,  cinerlei,  of  one  kind  ;  jmcierlci,  of  two  kinds,  etc. 
For  the  sake  of  euphony  tt  is  inserted. 

2.  The  Mnltiplicatives,  by  the  affix  fo<^  (fold)  or  falttg ; 
e.  g.,  dnfa^  or  etnfalttg,  single ;  gnjcifac^  or  jnjcifaltig, 
double  or  twofold,  etc. 

3.  The  Iteratives,  by  the  affix  tttal ;  e.  g.,  eintttal,  once ; 
gweimal,  twice,  etc. 

4.  The  Distribntiyes  (Latin,  bini,  temi,  etc.)  are  formed 
by  coupHng  the  cardinals  by  the  conjunction  uni: ;  e.  g.,  gmei 
nnb  imx,  two  and  two.  Instead  of  unt),  the  adverb  je  (ever) 
may  be  used  like  at  a  time  in  English  ;  e,  g.,  \t  t)rei,  three  aJt 
a  time. 

38.  The  English  expressions  what  o'clock  or  what  time,  are  trans- 
lated n)ie  »tet  U^r;  e.  g.,  What  o'clock  (what  time)  is  it,  wieijiel  U^r  i|l  eS  ? 
When  speaking  of  the  hour  ^alb  ^alf)  and  SRicrtet  (quarter)  are  placed 
hefore  the  next  number;  as,  '^alb  'o'm,  (half  past  three)  literally  half 
(toward)  four ;  ctn  SJiertel  auf  fcd^d  (a  quarter  past  five)  literally  a  quarter 
towards  (of)  six. 

30.  The  practice,  in  English,  of  placing  one  or  ones  after  the  ad- 
jeetive  is  not  admissible  in  German ;  we  must  translate  a  good  ONH, 
cin  gutcr  (fem.  cine  gute/  neut.  rin  guteg). 


J  80 


THE   NUMERALS. 


40.    Ordinal  Numbers. 


bcr  erjie,  the  first 

ter  jnjeite,  the  second 

ter  Ixittt,  the  third 

ter  »iertc,  the  fourth 

ter  fiinfte,  the  fifth 

ter  fed^fte,  the  sixth 

ter  fiebentc,  the  seventh 

ttv  ad^tC;  the  eighth 

tcr  neunte,  the  ninth 

ter  ge^nte,  the  tenth 

ter  elfte,  the  eleventh 

ter  stublfte,  the  twelfth 

ter  treije^nte,  the  thirteenth 

ter^ierje^nte,  the  fourteenth 

ter  funfge^nte,  the  fifteenth 

ter  fecfcige^nte,  etc. 

ter  gmanjigfte,  the  twentieth 


ter  etn  unt  swangigjle,  the  twenty- 

first,  etc. 
ter  treigigfle,  the  thirtieth 
ter  ttiergigjle,  the  fortieth 
ter  fiinfjiglte,  the  fiftieth 
ter  fecbjtgfle,the  sixtieth 
ter  (teB(cn)gi(jlle,  the  seventieth 
ter  ac^tjigjle,  the  eightieth 
ter  neungigfte,  the  ninetieth 
ter  ^untertfie,  the  hundredth 
ter  ^untcrt  unt  erfte,  the  hun- 
dred and  first,  etc. 
ter  ;5»ei^untertfte,  the  two  hun- 

dreth,  etc. 
ter  taufentfte,  the  thousandth 
ter  ameitaufentfte,  etc. 
ter  (tie,  ta3)  le^te,  the  last 


41 1  ♦  In  comi)ound  numbers  the  last  only  is  ordinal ;  e.  g.,  tlie 
1338th,  bcr  jwiilf^unbert  ac^t  unb  brei^igflc. 

4L^«  When  no  more  than  two  objects  arc  referred  to  bcr  aitbcre 
(the  other),  is  used  instead  of  bcr  jtoeite  ;  e.  g.,  cin  Slrm  i|l  fiirjcr  aU  bcr  an» 
ierc,  one  arm  is  shorter  than  the  other. 

43.  !Der  erflc  and  bcr  Ic^te#  when  referring  to  two  persons  or  ob- 
jects, take  generally  the  form  of  the  comparative. 

44.  From  the  ordinals  the  following  compound  numerals 
are  formed  : 

1.  The  Fractionals  (with  the  exception  of  ^alb)  by  add- 
ing the  letter  I ;  e.  g.,  ein  Drittel,  a  third  part  or  one-third. 
They  are  declined  like  neuter  nouns. 

Note. — The  adjective  ^alb,  half,  is  placed  after  the  article. 

2.  The  Dimidiatiyes,  by  adding  the  word  l^alb.  Their 
v.^gnification  is  peculiar  ;  e.  g.,  ^titte^alb  (literally  the  third 
half)  means  ttuo  whole  ones  and  a  half  of  the  third.  25icrtebalf) 
=  3i.     (Sometimes  the  e  before  ^atb  is  omitted  ;  e.  g.,  \>%txU 


THE   NUMERALS. 


181 


f)aib.)     It  is  not  usual  to  say  imitti^ali,  but  antttt^alh* 

The  half  means  tie  ipdlfte. 

3.  The  Distinct! TeS)*  by  adding  Cttd,  the  final  e  of  the 
ordinal  being  thrown  out ;  e.  g.,  crftCttS  (sometimes  also  erjl^ 
li(^),  first,  firstly,  etc. 

Note. — With  distinctives  may  also  be  classed  some  numeral  nouns 
formed  from  the  Cardinals  by  suffixing  tv,  to  indicate  the  age  of  a  per- 
son, the  names  of  certain  coins ;  e.  g. : 

ein  iBrcipigcr,  a  man  of  thirty 
cine  ©ec^jigcrin,  a  woman  of  sixty 
cin  ©reier,  three  German  pennies 
cin  (Scd^fcr,  six  German  pennies 

45.  There  is  also  a  sort  of  interrogative  ordinal  formed 
from  tute  (how)  and  t>icl  (much)  used  to  put  questions 
as  to  number,  e.  g..  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day  ? 
fccr  tt>tet>ieUe  ifi  Jjcute?   or,  im  t»itt>itittn  u^  Wlonati 

^abm  njir  l)eute  ? 


The  Indefinite  Numerals. 

46.     The  greater  part  of  the  indefinite  numerals  are  used 
and  inflected  as  adjectives.     They  are  : 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Muter. 

Plural. 

3ctet  (jetmeter,  itQli^ 

jete 

icfced 

{wanting) 

ct)er),t  every,  each 

allcr  (aa),  all 

aU 

atlc§  (aE) 

aHe,  all 

Icin,  n 

feinc 

fein 

feine,  no 

mand)Ct,  many  a  (an) 

manctyC 

man(^c§ 

mand^c,  some 

mi,  much 

tiele 

ttiel 

»iclc,  many 

meni^,  little 

juenige 

tveniij 

ttjcnigc,  few 

hive,  pL  both 

einige  (ctii^c),pl 

some,  a  few! 

mt^xctt,pl.  several 

[           Mc 

meifteit,  pi  most 

*  The  distinctives  are  sometimes  called  Ordinal  Adverbs. 
f  Sebweber  and  jcgltc^er  are  rarely  used,  except  in  poetry. 
X  The  plurals,  cintgC  and  etUdjC,  relate  exclusively  to  number.    Wheir 
Tised  as  indefinite  pronouns  (which  see),  they  begin  with  a  capital. 


182  THE   NUMERALS. 

4:7,  %tt  is  never  followed  by  the  definite  article ;  e.  g.,  all  the 
wine,  ttUer  SBcin  {not,  aUcr  i)cr  SBein);  all  t?ie  girls,  aUc  iWiilll^Ctt  (woi, 
oUc  tilt  SJliiiJI^cn).  In  the  singulab,  when  followed  by  a  pronoun,  it  is 
used  without  the  inflection;  e.  g.,  instead  of,  aHcS  Unfcr  ®clb,  we  say, 
all  unfcr  ©clU  ;  but,  aUc  meine  Sreunbc.  In  the  neuter  singular,  it  often 
denotes  an  indefinite  number  or  amount ;  e.  g.,  5lttc5  freut  ftc^,  everybody 
is  happy.  For  the  English  all,  used  in  the  sense  of  the  whole,  use  gan| 
(which  denotes  completeness),  and  not,  tttt ;  e.  g.,  all  the  day,  i.  e.,  the 
whole  day,  ben  ganjeit  lag. 

48  •  The  article  after  both  (beibe)  may  be  omitted  in  German.  If 
used,  its  place  is  before  beibe;  e.  g.,  both  the  prisoners,  liie  beiben  ©cfangcncitr 
(<?r  beibc  ©efangenc).  If  a  possessive  pronoun  is  used  instead  of  the  article, 
its  place  is  also  before  beii)C  ;  e,  g.,  both  his  daughters,  fcinc  beiben  Soc^ter, 

49.  The  English  some  or  any,  before  a  noun  in  the  singular,  it  is 
best  not  to  render  in  German ;  e.  g.,  Here  is  some  butter,  l^ier  t|l  SButter. 
But  before  a  noim  in  the  plural,  it  is  rendered  ctltige  ;  e.  g.,  Give  me 
some  (i.  e.,  a  few)  pens,  gebcn  ©ie  mir  einigc  ^ebern.  When  in  a  reply  the 
noun  after  some  is  merely  understood,  render  some  by  the  accusative  of 
tteld^cr  (welc^cn,  ireld^c,  iDcId^e^),  or  by  babon  if  the  noun  understood  is  in 
the  singular,  and  by  einige  if  the  noun  understood  is  in  the  plural ;  e.  g., 
Have  you  some  bread,  l^abcn  ©ic  SBrob  ?  Yes  I  have  some  ;  ja,  id^  ^abc  tuels 
^C5.  Have  you  any  pens  ?  I^bctt  ©ic  Sebern  ?  Yes,  I  have  some  ;  ja,  td^ 
l^be  einigc. 

•50.     JBicl  and  tncnig  are : 

1.  Uninflected  when  they  imply  a  reference  to  measure  or  quantity : 

2.  Inflected  (like  adjectives)  when  they  imply  a  reference  to  number : 
e.  g.,  !&crnc  nic^t  ouf  einmal  ^itXti,  fonbcrn  t\t\,  do  not  study  many  things 
at  once,  but  endeavor  to  learn  much  of  one  thing : 

3.  When  preceded  by  an  article  or  pronoun,  they  are  invariably  in- 
flected, no  matter  whether  they  imply  reference  to  number,  measure, 
or  quantity;  e.  g.,\>Oii  tJtcIc  ®elb;  fcin  »iclc5  ®elb;  fcine  tJicIcn  ®efd^aftc; 
bicfer  tuenige  9Bctn;  nteinc  tDenigen  ^reunbe. 

Note. — Instead  of  tin  9Bentge0»  we  say  also,  em  toenig,  to  indicate  a 
small  quantity  of  a  thing ;  e.  g.,  ein  tuentg  <Satv  a  little  salt. 

4)  Used  as  indefinite  pronouns  (No.  Ill)  relating  to  persons,  »icl  and 
toenig  are  invariably  inflected  and  begin  with  a  capital ;  e.  g.,  JBiclc  finb 
l^erufetw  aber  SBenige  ftnb  mUtmix^M,  many  are  called,  but  few  are  chosen. 


THE  NUMERALS.  183 

THE  PKONOUNS. 

5 1 .  The  pronouns  are  in  German  divided  into  Personal, 
Possessive,  Demonstrative,  Kelative  and  Correlative,  In- 
terrogative, and  Indefinite. 

Personal  Pronouns. 

52,  The  personal  pronouns  are  i^,  I ;  hu,  thou ;  ct 
(masc),  he  ;  fit  {fem.)y  she  ;  and  eS  (neuL),  it ;  toit,  we  ;  i^r 
(®ie),  you  ;  fie,  they.     They  are  decHned  as  follows  : 


ir. 

l&T  PERSON.  2d  person. 

For  aU  genders. 


Nom.    i&j,  I 

tu,  thou 

Gen.     meiner  *  of  me 

fceincr,  of  the© 

Dat.      mir,  to  me 

tir,  to  thee 

Ace.      mic^,  me 

8d  person. 

ti*, 

thee 

Mase. 

Fern. 

Neuter, 

Nom.     cr,  he 

pc,  she 

e5,  itf 

Gen.     feiner  *  of  him 

i^rer,  of  her 

feiner,  of  it 

Dat.      i^m,  to  him 

i^r,  to  her 

i^m,  to  it 

Ace.      i^n,  him 

jie,  her 

e^,  it 

Plural.    For  all  genders. 

1st  ierson. 

2d  person. 

3d  PERSOlf. 

Nom.  njir,  we              i:^r 

or  (5ie, 

you 

pc,  they 

Gen.   unfcr(er),  of  us    eu(r)erj  or  3^rer,  of  you   i^rer,  of  them 
Dat.    un^,  to  us  eud^        or  3^nen,  to  you   i^nen,  to  them 

Ace.    irn^,  us  euc^        or  @ie,  you  pe,  them 

53.     In  German  there  are  two  modes  of  address,  bu  and  StC.     ^U 

is  employed  in  addressing  the  Deity,  near  relations,  intimate  friends, 
servants  and  inferiors  generally.  Sic  is  the  polite  mode  of  address  ;  it 
is  used  particularly  with  strangers  and  superiors,  and  is  distinguished 
from  the  form  of  the  third  person  plural  by  the  initial  capital. 

*  2llein>  bcin,  fcin,  are  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  full  forms,  mci» 
mXf  ijcincr,  feiner. 

f  @8  is  sometimes  contracted  with  a  verb  or  with  a  pronoun  im- 
mediately preceding  ;  e.  g.,  3d^  |ob'0,  instead  of  x^  ^ate  eg. 

X  The  lengthened  form^  tViXtX,  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  euer. 


184  THE  PERSONAL  PROIIOUNS. 

5^»  In  German  inanimate  objects  and  abstract  ideas  may  be  eitber 
masculine,  feminine,  or  neuter.  Hence  the  pronoun  answering  to  the 
English  it  must  in  German  be  of  the  same  gender  as  the  noun  for  which 
it  stands ;  thus,  to  the  question,  Where  is  thy  pen  ?  the  German  an- 
swers, fic  i|l  ^ier;  because  %thtx  is  a  feminine  noun. 

S3,  When  the  personal  pronouns  refer  to  persons,  whether  male 
or  female,  who,  for  some  reason,  are  put  in  the  neuter  gender,  (dimi- 
nutives and  words  like  9Beib,  graucnjimmcr),  the  pronoun  agrees  with  the 
natural  sex ;  e.  g.,  Yoai  ma(|t  S^r  <So|n(^en  ?  i|l  cr  nod)  franf  ?— how  is  your 
little  son  ?  is  he  still  ill  ? 

56.  ®§  is  also  employed,  like  it  and  there  in  English,  as 
a  nominative  both  before  and  after  a.  verb  without  regard 
to  any  noun  understood  or  expressed  and  without  distinction 
of  gender  or  number,  merely  as  an  aid  to  the  sound  rather 
than  to  the  sense  of  the  sentence  ;  e.  g.,  It  is  the  teacher,  cd 
iflter  Se^rer;  e$  ift  He  ©rdfin;  cd  ftnt)  meinc  33rutcr,  etc.  When 
e0  is  used  in  this  manner  with  a  personal  pronoun,  the  posi- 
tion of  words  is  in  the  affirmative  form,  in  German,  precisely 
the  reverse  of  the  English,  as: 


It  is  I,  id)  hin  e5  it  is  we,  hjir  fttt^  e^ 

It  is  thou,  bu  Hit  ed  it  is  you,  i  ^^  ^^^^ 

It  is  he  (she),  er  (fte)  ijl  e^        it  is  they,  fic  ftttb  ed 


INTEKROGATIVE  FORM. 

Is  it  I  ?  ^iti  i(^  eg?  Is  it  we?  finh  Wir  c5 ? 

Was  it  thou  ?  warfl  tu  e^  ?         Were  it  you  ?  njaren  ©ie  ti  ? 

•JT.  (S3  is  sometimes  replaced  by  the  demonstrative  pronoun  (see 
No.  58)  iJeffcn  or  Iieffclben.  In  the  dative  after  a  preposition  the  ad- 
verb 2)a  (there)  coalesces  with  the  preposition,  and  is  used  instead ;  e.  g.. 
How  much  has  he  paid/(?r  itf  tt)ie»tel  ^at  er  llttfur  teja^It  (and  not  fiir  c«). 

58.  The  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  cr,  jie,  c^  (in 
any  case),  to  avoid  repetition  is  replaced  by  the  demonstrative  berfelbf, 
biefclbe,  baffelbc  (lit.  the  same) ;  e.  g.,  the  answer  to  the  question  :  Have 
you  given  him  the  stick  ?  I  have  given  it  to  him,  is  rendered,  i(|  f^cAt  i^m 
benfeliien  gcgckn  (instead  cf  i(^  i^aU  ifjn  i^m  gegc^ftt)*  (see  No.  7»). 


THE  PEBSONAL  PRONOUNS.  186 

The  Eeflexive  Personal  Pronoun. 

•59.    The  personal  pronouns 

1.  Of  the  first  and  second  persons  are  endowed  with  a 
reciprocal  power,  hence  the  English  self  can  not,  in  these  two 
persons,  be  separately  expressed  ;  e.  g.^  I  excused  myself ,  ic^ 
cntfdjul^igte  tttic^. 

2.  For  the  third  person  a  distinct  reflexive  and  reciprocal 
pronoun  is  used  in  place  of  i^n :  ftc^  ;  e.  g.,  He  excused  him- 
self,  er  entfc^ulligtc  ftc^ ;  plur.,  they  excused  themselves,  (le 
entfc^ultigten  ft<^.  @i<^  has  only  one  form  for  the  three 
genders  both  in  the  singular  and  plural.* 

3.  When  the  pronouns  myself,  thyself,  etc.,  are  only  em- 
phatic repetitions  of  the  nominative,  use  felbfltf  alone 
without  the  other  pronouns  ;  e.  g.,  The  physician  himself 
is  sick  ;  he  cannot  cure  even  himself,  fccr  2lrjt  fclbft  ij^  frantj 
er  lann  felbfl  ftc^  nic^t  ^cilen* 

The  Possessive  Pronouns. 

00.  Possessive  pronouns, 

1.  When  in  connection  with  a  noun,  are  called  conjunctive 
possessive  pronouns,  and  take  in  the  singular  the  ending  of 
the  indefinite,  and  in  the  plural  that  of  the  definite  article ; 
e.  g.y  Have  you  the  book  of  my  brother  ?  ^afeen  ©ie  fca^  33u(^ 
meine^  33rurcr^  ?  She  has  seen  the  hats  of  thy  sisters,  fic  |at 
tic  ipiitc  teincr  ©d)njc[lern  gefe^cn. 

Note, — In  German  the  possessive  pronoun  agrees  with  the  object  poa- 
sessed. 

2.  Not  immediately  connected  with,  but  simply  referring 
to,  a  noun  already  mentioned  or  understood,  they  are  called 
absolute  possessive  pronouns,  and  are  used  in  German  either 
with  or  without  the  article. 

— ' _ a  _^  ' • 

*  When  this  reciprocal  signification  might  be  confounded  with  the 

mere  reflexive  sense  {e.  g.,  they  love  themselves  [fIc  liebeit  jtd^]  and  they 

love  each  other),  the  indeclinable  pronoun  einattliet  is  used  ;  e.  g.,  We 

know  one  another,  tttr  fmnctt  etnanber. 

t  <ScIbfl  placed  before  a  noun  or  pronoun  answers  to  the  English  even; 

e.  g.f  Even  the  enemies  admired  him,  fclbfl  tie  iJcinbe  bewunberten  i^n. 


186 


THE  P08SESSIVB  PK0N0UN3. 


0 1  ♦  The  absolute  possessive  pronoun,  not  accompanied 
by  the  definite  article,  has  the  inflection  given  to  attributive 
adjectives  used  without  the  article  (see  No.  24),  viz.:  ct 
(masc),  c  (fern.),  c^  (neut.);  e.  g.,  meiner,  beine,  feincd,  etc. 

63.  But  when  the  definite  article  precedes  the  absolute 
possessive  pronoun,  it  takes  the  same  ending  as  an  adjective 
preceded  by  the  definite  article  (see  No.  22) ;  e.  g.,  ^ct  nteinc, 
bit  teinc,  bo§  feinc,  etc. 

63.  Most  generally  the  absolute  possessive  pronoun,  when  pre- 
ceded by  the  article,  inserts  ig  between  the  root  and  the  ending;  e.  g., 
!lDer  mcintgc,  bic  bcinigc,  hai  fcinigc,  etc. 

Note. — Absolute  possessive  pronouns,  when  used  as  nouns,  have  a 
capital  initial ;  e.  g.,  2)ie  S^ctnigcn  jtnb  aUe  gcfunb,  my  family  are  all  well. 

64.  As  a  predicate  with  the  verb  fcitt  the  absolute  possessive 
pronoun,  like  predicate  adjectives,  generally  remains  uninjiected,  e.  g., 
^icfeS  $aua  tjl  mtin,  this  house  is  mine. 

65.    The  Conjunotive  Possessive  Pronouns. 

Singular.  PluraL 


Masc. 

Fern. 

mtixi 

nteine 

ttin 

tcinc 

fein 

fcine 

i^r 

i^rc 

fcitt 

feine 

unfcr 

unferef 

3^r 

3^rc 

cucr* 

cueref 

i*r 

t^re 

Neuter. 
tttein,  my 
tein,  thy 
fein,  his 
i^r,  her 
feirt,  its 
irnfcr,  our 

euer,  [y^"' 
i^r,  their 


For  all  genders. 
meinc,  my 
'ttint,  thy 
feine,  his 
i^re,  her 
feine,  its 
itnfcre,  our 
3^re,  ] 

cuere  (eure), )  ^^^^ 
i^re,  their 


*  S^ro  was  formerly  used  instead  of  ^^rCf  her,  and  also  in  place  of 
euer,  your,  in  addressing  persons  of  high  rank  ;  e.  g.,  3^ro  (now  ^^rc  or 
(Sure)  SWajejldt,  your  Majesty.  In  written  commimications,  the  pronouns 
dun,  your  ;  ©cine,  his;  and  ©einer*  to  his,  used  in  addressing  persons  of 
great  distinction,  are  commonly  abbreviated  into  ®tlJ.,  @C.,  <Sr. ;  e.  g., 
dh).  2)urd^lau(^t,  your  highness  ;  Se.  5Wajcflat  bcr  tontg,  his  majesty  the 
king ;  @r.  ^JJajeflat  bent  ionise,  to  his  majesty  the  king. 

f  The  euphonic  change  to  which  adjectives  ending  in  r*  I,  or  en,  are 


THE  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


187 


66»    Declension  of  the  Conjunctive  Possessive 
Pronouns. 

Singular.  Plural. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Meuter. 

Far  the  three  gendeft. 

Nom. 

mein 

tttelnc 

mein 

meine,    my 

Gen. 

meined 

meinet 

meinet 

mcinet,  of  my 

Dat. 

meinem 

mcinet 

meinem 

meineit,  to  my 

Ace. 

meinett 

meine 

mein 

meine,    my 

67.    Declension  of  the  Absolute  Possessive  Pronoun 
with  the  Article. 

Singular.  Plurals 


Masc.  Fern. 

N.  fcetmein(ig)e  btemein(ig)e 
G.  te^  meint^en    ber  meint^eti 
D.  bem  meinigeit  ter  meintgen 
A.  t)en  mcinigett  tie  meinige 


Neuter.  For  all  genders. 

ha^mt\n(i%)t  Memein(ig)ett 
teiJ  meinigen     ter  mcinf^en 
bem  mcintgcn    ben  meiniijen 
ba^  meinige       bie  mcintgcn 


08.  In  German  the  definite  article  is  used,  instead  of  the  poflsec- 
sive  pronoun,  in  sentences  where  no  ambiguity  exists  relative  to  the 
I)088es8or  ;e.g.,  He  had  a  knife  in  his  hand,  cr  ^attc  cin  2)teffer  in  ttV  ^anb» 

The  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 


69.     The  demonstrative  pronouns  are  : 

Masc. 

Fern.                   Neuter. 

biefer 

biefe 

biefe^,  this 

jenet 

ienc 

jene^,  that 

foldjer 

fo^e 

foId?e§,  such 

t>tt 

betjenige 

He 

Heicnige 

\^l',    .      I  that,  the  one 

berfel&e 

biefelbe, 

^«f^,.^    Uhesame 
ba^  namlic^e, ) 

bet  ndm(i(^e 

fete  ndmli(^e 

eknbetfelbe 

eBenbiefelbe 

ebenbafi'elbe,  the  very  same. 

subject,  applies  also  to  possessive  pronouns ;  e.  g.,  unfere  or  unfrc  ;  unfcrer 
or  unfrcr  ;  bcr  unfcrigc,  or  better,  unfrige)  cuere  or  curej  euercr  or  curct;  b« 
eucrigc  or  eurige. 


188  THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Declension  of  the  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

70.  X)iefer,  this  ;  and  jener,  that,  have  the  endings  of  the 
definite  article,  except  in  the  Nom.  and  Ace.  femin.  and  plur., 
where  i  is  dropped  and  e  alone  is  used  ;  e.  g.^  tiefe  (instead 
of  tiefie).  In  the  Norn,  and  Ace.  neut.,  a  changes  to  c;  e.  g., 
tiefe^*  (instead  of  Diefae). 


Plural. 

Maac.      Fem.       Neuter.  For  the  three  genders, 

Nom.    liefer    Mefe      Hcfe$,    this  tiefe,    these 

Gen.  tiefcS  fciefct  biefed,  of  this  biefer,  of  these 
Dat.  biefcm  biefer  bicfettt,  to  this  biefeit,  to  these 
Ace.      tiefen   niefc      biefcd,    this  ttefe,    these 

7 1 .  Instead  of  bicfcr,  or  jcncr,  the  numerals  ber  cine,  bcr  onbcrc,  the 
one,  the  other ;  t>cr  er jlcrc,  ber  le^tere,  the  former,  the  latter ;  ber  erfte,  ber 
jweite,  the  first,  the  second,  are  sometimes  used ;  e.  g.,  I)er  cine  (biefer) 
fagt  3a,  ber  anbere  (letter)  fagt  9ieinr  the  one  (this  one)  says  Yes,  the  other 
(that  one)  says  No. 

73.  1.  ^f>l6^tt,  folc^C,  fpl<^c^,  is  declined  like  biefer 
and  jener,  vrhen  used  without  the  article. 

2.  When  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article  it  takes  the 
same  endings  as  adjectives  with  the  indefinite  article;  e.  g., 
tin  foId)cr,  einc  folc^e,  ein  foIcfceS. 

3.  Placed  before  the  indefinite  article  it  is  indeclinable  ;  e.  g.y 
fQl<^  ein  ?S)lenf(^,  such  a  man;  fol<^  eine  X^at,  such  a  deed. 

73.  In  German,  the  pronouns  for  this  or  tMt,  separated  from  the 
subject  by  the  verb  to  be,  take  the  neuter  form  of  the  nominative  singnalar 
without  regard  to  the  gender  or  number  of  the  noun  folloTving.  Mc. 
This  is  my  son,  It'icfcg  ifi  ntcin  ©o^n;  are  these  your  gloves?  ftitb  bie^(eS) 
3^re  |)aitbfd^u^e  ? 

74.  ^erjetttge,  that,  the  one  ;  berfclbe,t  the  same  ; 
also  ^cr  ttdmlic^e,  the  same,  and  ebctt  hcticlhc,  the  very 

*  For  biefer  or  jcneS  Germans  often  use  an  abbreviated  form:  t>k$ 
and  hai,  respectively,  and  also  e*. 

f  Poets  sometimes  omit  the  article  of  this  form,  and  give  it  the  in. 
flection  cr,  C/  tS,  thus  :  fel6er,  felJe,  fel^Cg, 


THE   DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS.  189 

same,  have  the    endings  of  attributive  adjectives  with  the 
definite  article  (see  No.  22). 

y^.    Declension  of  the  Demonstrative  ^ericntgc. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neuter.  For  aU  genders. 

N.  bcrjenige      bicjcntge  ^rtSjenigc,  that       btciemgeit,  those 

G.  bc^ienigctt     fcerienigcii  te^jenigcti,  of  that    terjenigen,  of  " 

D.  bemjenigeti    terjenigett  bemjenigeti,  to  that  benjemgen,  to  " 

A.  tenjenigctt     tiejcnigc  ta^jenige,  that        Mejenigeti,  those 

■^0.    Declension  of  the  Demonstrative  2)cr.* 

N.  hr*  tic  tag,  that  tic,  those 

G.  fceffettf  tereti  keffen,  ofthat  tcrer,  of  those 

D.  tern  tcr  bent,  to  that  tenett,  to  those 

A.  ten  tic  tag,  that  tic,  those 

7T.  The  genitive  sing,  of  the  demonstrative  ber  is  sometimes 
employed  for  the  possess,  pron.  of  tlie  third  person,  to  avoid  ambiguity ; 
e.  g..  She  has  seen  our  sister  and  her  daughters,  their  nieces,  and  their 
relations,  ftc  :^at  unfere  ©^toefter  unb  bcrcn  3:o(^ter,  i^rc  ^\^\t%  unb  liercn 
SJemanbtc,  gefel^en  (i|r  answering  both  to  her  and  their  is  ambiguous), 

T8.  The  third  person  of  the  pers.  pron.  in  all  its  cases,  is  some- 
times replaced  by  the  full  form  of  the  demonstr.  pron. ;  e.  g.,  I  shall  give 
it  to  him,  ic^  wcrbe  i^m  baffelbe  geben;  instead  of  \ij  toerbc  ti  \^m  gcben,  or 
referring  to  a  masculine  noun,  ic^  werbe  i^m  bcnfelkn  gcbcn,  instead  of,  tc^ 
toerbc  i^tt  i^m  geben. 

The  Eelative  Pronouns. 

79.     The  relative  pronouns  are  :  ttrelcf^et,  VOtX^t,  tOtU 

^t^  (abbreviated  form,  bet,  hic,  ba^),  who,  which,  or 
that ;  toet^  who,  and  t»a^,  what.  They  are  declined  as 
follows  : 


*  The  demonstr.  bcr  receives  more  stress  than  the  def.  art. 
f  Instead  of  beffen,  be§  is  used  in  poetical  language. 


190 


THE  RELATIVE  PK0N0UN3. 


80.    Declension  of  the  Eelative  2Bcl^et* 

1.    The  Complete  Form. 
lar.  Plural. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

i^<?r  all  genders. 

N. 

welcbet 

welc^e 

njeld^eS 

n?cId)C,  who,  which  (that) 

G. 

Jjcffeti* 

betett 

^effen 

berctt,  of  whom,  whose,  of  which 

D. 

iveldjeiit 

melcber 

ttjeldjctn 

wcIc^Ctt,  to  whom,  to  which 

A. 

iveli^eti 

iuelc^e 

»cld:c§ 

ml6^t,  whom,  which  (that) 

2. 

The  Abridged  Form. 

Singular. 

Plural 

Masc. 

Fern. 

iV^ew^er. 

For  aU  genders. 

N. 

bcr 

He 

t>a^ 

Mc,  who,  which  (that) 

G. 

tcffctt 

bcreit 

fccffctt 

Dcten,  of  whom,  whose,  of  which 

D. 

^etn 

ber 

3)  em 

ben  en,  to  whom,  to  which 

A. 

^ett 

^ie 

Dad 

bie,  whom,  which  (that) 

Note. — In  the  gen.  plur.  the  relative  is  bercit;  not  berer* 


81.    Declension  of  a»cr  and  9Bo8. 


Masc.  &  Fern 
N.  l»er,  who 


Neuter. 
tt>a§,  what 


Plural, 
{warding) 


G.  meffett,  (or  wegf), whose  tueffeii,  (orn?e§), whose 

D.  n?eitt,  to  whom 

A.  wctt,  whom  tt?a3/what 

83.  The  relatives  tAt\&itX,  tocll^e,  tticl(ftc5,  or  ber/  Wt  bag  are  used 
indiscriminately  of  persons,  animals,  or  things.  They  require  the  principal 
verb  at  the  end  of  the  sentence.  If  an  auxiliary  is  also  used  its  place  is 
immediately  after  the  main  verb ;  e.  g.,  I  know  the  man  whx)  loves  you, 
'\6)  fcnne  ben  ?Wann,  toeljfter  (or  Ijcr)  <Stc  \\tU ;  you  live  in  the  house  which 
I  have  bought,  ©ic  wo^ncn  in  bem  ^aufe,  ttiel^e  (or  lia§)  ic^  gefauft  J^aBc 

83.  The  genitive  of  the  relative  hieli^cr  or  ierr  beffeit*  bcrcit» 
beffenf  like  whose,  in  English,  always  precedes  the  word  by  which  it  is 

«  ^cr  is  in  poetical  language  preferred  to  bejfcn. 
f  SBcr  occurs  also  in  the  adverbs,  tocfe^alb,  toe§tt>cgcn#  why,  wherefore, 
on  which  (what)  account. 


THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS.  191 

governed  ;  e.  g.,  A  book,  whose  leaves  (the  leaves  of  which)  are  soiled 
ein  33u(^,  Deffcn  SSIatter  kf^mu^t  finb. 

84L.  The  relative  SBcr*  always  begins  a  clause  or  sentence,  but 
toad  may  either  commence  a  clause  or  sentence  or  may  be  placed  after 
its  proper  antecedent ;  e.  g.,  SBer  ni(^t  tj'mn  toiU,  ber  mu§  fii^Ien,  he  who 
{i.  e.,  whoever)  will  not  hear  must  feel ;  load  ditd^t  tfl/  Mcifct  fRtd)t,  wliat 
{i.  e.,  whatever)  is  right,  remains  right ;  SIIIc^,  toad  i<|  ge^ort  l^attc,  all 
that  (i.  e.,  that  which)  I  had  heard.  These  pronouns  are  employed 
wherever  the  antecedent  is  not  definitely  known  ;  e.  g.,  SBet  ta^  S«fci9t 
^at  ijl  ein  9?arr,  (he)  ^Ao  has  said  it  (this)  is  a  fool ;  3(^  ^ortc  nt(^t»  tQa0  cr 
fagte,  I  did  not  hear,  what  he  said. 

8t5.  When  the  antecedent  is  definite,  toel^er,  tocl^e,  tuelll^ed  'n^ust 
be  used;  e.  g.,  "Den  ©tocf,  toell^ett  bu  mir  gcgekn  ^ajl,  the  stick  which  you 
have  given  me. 

80.  Often,  tucr  (tUttS)  has  at  once  the  force  of  both  a  relative  and 
an  antecedent ;  e.  g.,  i&tx  bic  ®cfe^e  e^rt,  ifl  ein  pter  SBiirger,  he  who  {i.  e., 
the  man  who)  respects  the  law,  is  a  good  citizen  ;  ttiad  gut  i)l,  ifl  nic^t  im*' 
mer  f(^ijn,  what  {i.  e.,  that  which)  is  good,  is  not  always  beautiful. 

87.  In  German  the  relative  pronoun  must  always  be  expressed  ; 
e.  g.,  This  is  the  horse  which  I  bought  at  Berlin,  biefcd  ij!  bad  9)ferb, 
tOtl^tS  (or  l)ag)  ic^  in  S3erltn  faufte. 

8  8 .  $cr  is  used,  instead  of  lueld^er,  after  the  personal  pronouns  of 
the  first  and  second  person,  when  these  pronouns  are  to  be  rex)eated, 
after  the  relative ;  e.  g.,  3(^,  ber  i<i)  fo  »icl  ®elb  »erloren  ^abe,  I «  who  have 
lost  so  much  money. 

89.  SScl(ftcr»  C#  t8,  or  'titVt  connected  with  ni^t>  answer  to  the  Eng- 
lish but  after  a  negative  clause  ;  e.  g.,  There  is  no  man  but  has  his  faults, 
t^  giebt  feincn  ^ienfc^en,  toclt^cr  (or  tier)  ni^t  fetne  Scaler  ^at. 

90.  SBcI^cr  is  used  in  the  sense  of  some  or  any,  as  a  substitute  for 
a  noun  previously  expressed;  e.  g.,  ^afl  bu  HBrobr  hast  thou  bread?  Sa, 
\&)  ^aht  tocl^elr  yes,  1  have  some. 

91.  The  following  adverbs  are  also  used  relatively,  in 
place  of  the  relative  pronoun  with  corresponding  preposi-^ 
tions  (English,  whereof,  whereby,  etc.)  Like  relative  pronouns, 
they  require  the  verb  at  the  end  of  the  clause. 

*  Notice  that  in  English  the  personal  pronoun  is  not  repeated.  The 
order  of  the  words,  however,  might  be  reversed  ;  e.  g.,  3lt&  ^tXt  instead 
of  ter  i^,  when  the  English  would  be  /,  I  who,  etc. 


192  THB  CORBELAUVE  PRONOUNS. 

»o§tt,  to  which  or  what  worauS,  from  which  or  wh^x 

tvobtitf^,  by  which  or  what      njorttt,  in  which  or  what 
njoitttt,  with  which  or  what      n>orttber,at(over)which  or  what 
iDobcl,  at  which  or  what  tcoratif ,  upon  which  or  what 

wofur,  for  which  or  what         tuoratt,  at  which  or  what 
tt30t>Oll,  of  which  or  what  ttjomtttet,  among  which 

Note.— Notice  that  t  is  inserted  between  the  adverb  and  the  pre- 
position, when  the  latter  begins  with  a  vowel. 

92,  These  adverbs  (91),  must,  however,  not  be  employed  relatively 
to  persons.  For  this  purjwse  the  prepositions  and  the  relative  pronoun 
are  used ;  e,  g.,  with  whom  I  was  traveling,  niit  Ijcm  (or  toell^cm)  i^  reiilc. 

Correlative  Pronouns. 

03.  When  a  relative  pronoun  is  preceded  by  a  demon- 
strative, the  two  conjointly  are  called  Correlatives.  Thus  : 
Masculine,     ^crjenigc,     m\&tt,     ^tt\tnio^t,  \  he  who,   that 

^er,  or  ^tx,  welder  (ter),  )         which. 

Feminine,     JDieienige,  mldc,  Jj)ieienige,  Me^  \  she  who,  that 

or  Jt)ie,  njcld;e  (tie),  j        which. 

Neuier.  J^JaSjenige,   tveldjc^,   ^aSjentge,  ]    that  which, 

toa^,  or  ^a^,  trcld^cS  {^y^ai),     I         what. 
Flurcdforall^itimQCn  mldc,  ^icienigctt,  >     those  who, 
genders,     hic,  or  ^ic,  weld)C  (tic),  )    those  which. 

In  the  same  manner  are  used  : 

^crfclbe  (or  ekttterfelbe),  toti^ct,  (or  Ux),  the  same  who, 

which,  etc. 
aSJer— (bet),  he  who— (he)  ;   never,  bcr,  mv,  except  when 

some  word  intervene. 
Note. — SScr  and  toad  may  be  made  more  emphatic  by  adding  the  ad- 
verb tmmer,  the  conjunctive  mdi,  or  au(^  nur,  aut^  immer ;  e.  g.,  toad  fie 
oud^  gefagt  l^akn  mag,  whatever  she  may  have  said. 

The  Interrogative  Pronouns. 
94.    The  interrogative  pronouns  are: 

SSer,  who?  SBel^cr,  which,  what? 

SBad,  what?  2Ba5  fiir  (cin),  what  kind  or  sort  of? 


THE  INTEEKOGATIVE  PBONOUNS.  193 

95,  The  interrogatives  toct  and  Wod  are  declined 
exactly  like  the  relatives  »er,  toai ;  tocl^er  like  the  demon- 
stratives tiefcr,  jener,  etc.  Of  toad  fitc  etit  only  the  indefinite 
article  ein  is  declined  (see  No.  3). 

96.    Declension  of  the  Interrogative  Pronoun  mld^tt. 

Singular,  Plural 

Masc.  Fern.  Yeuter.  for  ail  genders. 

N.  welder  melc^e  melcfced,  which?  weldje,  which ? 

G.  welded  welc^cr  weldjed,  of  which?  melc^er,  of  which? 

D.  jrelc^eiti  welc^er  totlAtm,  to  which  ?  welc^eit,  to  which  ? 

A.  ttjeldjeit  ttjeldje  njclc^ed,  which  ?  welci^e,  which  ? 

97.  Declension  of  the  Interrogatives  wcr  and  wal. 
N.  tt>et,  who  ?  t»a^,  what  ? 

G.  tocf^tu,*  whose  ?  toeffctt,*  of  what  ? 

D.  to  cm,*  to  whom?  „  )  to  what? 

A.  toeii,whom?  "'^^M  what? 

98.  1,  ©er  is  only  used  mbstantively,  B.nd  refers  exclusively  to 
persons;  SBaSf  is,  like  wcr,  used  substantively,  but  is  applied  only  to 
things  or  indefinite  objects;  e.  y.,  ffler  ifl  ba?  einSWann,  tine  5rau,  eini!inb— 
who  is  there?  a  man,  a  woman,  a  child;  SBaS  (not  »er)  ijl  bad  ?  ein  9)?cnf(^r 
obcr  ein  Saum  ?   what  is  that?  a  man  or  a  tree? 

2.  SQSel^er  refers  to  particular  objects,  and  answers  exactly  to  the 
English  interrogative  which ;  e.  g.,  Which  boy,  welc^er  5?nabc  ? 

3.  SBa0  fiit  ein  is  used  in  asking  after  the  kind,  qumlUy,  or  species  of  a 
thing ;  e.  g.,  SBttS  fur  ein  5>lantt,  what  sort  of  a  man?  xoai  fitr  eine  <S(!^uIc, 
what  kind  of  a  school ?  »a0  fiir  ein  ^aud,  what  sort  or  kind  of  a  house? 

4.  Sell^er  and  toad  fiir  ein  are  used  adjeaively,  and  appear  as  nouns 
only  when  referring  to  a  preceding  noun  ;  Sell^er  in  asking  after  a  parti- 
cuUir  person  or  thing,  toad  fiir  cilt  after  a  particular  kind  of  persons  or 
things ;  e.  ^.,  ^ier  ifi  ein  graucr  unb  ein  fd^warjer  |)ut,  hietifien  totllfl  bu  ^aben, 
here  is  a  gray  and  a  black  hat,  which  one  will  you  have  ?  SBag  fiir  eitt 
©(^neibcrijl  jener  ?Kann,  what  (kind  of  a)  tailor  is  that  man?  3d^  weig 
m(^t  »ad  fur  einer  cr  ifl,  I  do  not  know  what  kind  of  a  one  he  is. 

Note. — Notice  that  of  wad  fiir  ein,  when  used  substantively,  ctn  takes 
the  endings  of  an  adjective  not  preceded  by  the  article  (see  No.  24). 

*  SBeffeit  and  teiem  are  used  only  in  reference  to  persons. 
t  £3a9  is  used  for  tt)ie»iel;  as,  tDQ0  ®oIb!  what  (a  quantity  of)  gold  I 
and  in  exclamation  :  toad  Xaufeilll !  what  (a  wonder  1)  indeed  I 


194  THE  INTEKROGATIVE  PB0N0UN8. 

99.  Before  names  of  materials  and  in  the  plural  the  In- 
definite article  ein  after  tua^  ftit  is  dropped,  and  wad  fiir  is 
immediately  followed  by  the  substantive;  e.  y.,  toad  fttt 
SBeinc,  what  kinds  of  wine  ? 

100.  Declension  of  toa0  fur  cm  before  a  Noun. 

Singular.  Plural 

Mase.  Fern.       Neuter.  for  aU  genders. 

N.  »ad  fiir  cm         eine        ettt  toa^  fftr,  what  kind  of 

G.  toai  fiir  fined      cincr      elncd  tt>a^  fiir 

D.  ma^  fiir  eincm     einer      eincm  tt>aiJ  fiir 

A,  ttja^  fiir  einen      eine        ein  tt)a^  fiir 

101.  Declension  of  mas  fiir  ein  without  a  Noun. 


Plural 

ifase.  Fern.  N&uter.  for  all  genders. 

N.  njad  fiir  einer         eine  eined  )t)a3  fiir  (luelc^c) 

G.  wad  fiir  cined  einer  einer  toai  fiir  (welc^er) 

D.  wad  fiir  einem        einer  einetn  xoa^  fiir  (wel^en) 

A.  iuad  fiir  eineti         eine  eined  mad  fiir  (wel(^e) 

Note. — In  conversational  language,  wad  fur  is  in  the  plural  generally 
followed  by  toel^e. 

lOS.  The  signification  of  the  interrogatives  is  this:  ttier 
and  toad,  simply  demand  to  know  the  species  to  which  the 
object  in  question  belongs  ;  lt>a§  fiir  tin  a  more  particular 
description  of  the  nature  or  condition  of  the  object  in  ques- 
tion; and  tuelc^er,  V0tX6^t,  tt>el<^e$,  a  precise  designation 
of  the  object  itself;  e.  g.,  Ser  ijl  t>a?  who  is  there?  din 
SRcifenber,  a  traveler,  ^ctd  fur  einer  ?  what  traveler  (what 
kind  of  traveler)  ?  (Sin  ©cbutle^rer  mi  33erHn,  a  schoolmaster 
from  Berlin.  SSJelc^^er  8(^nUe:^rer?  which  schoolmaster? 
^err  2lmoIt,  Mr.  Arnold,  etc. 

103.  The  interrogative  pronouns  wTiat  and  which,  when  im. 
mediately  followed  by  the  auxiliary  verb  to  he  (fetn)f  are  rendered  by 
toell^ed;  both  in  the  singular  and  plural. 


THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS.  195 

104:»  1.  SBoS  connected  with  prepositions,  substitutes  r  for  g  and 
is  prefixed  to  the  preposition,  (exhibited  in  No.  91) ;  e.  g.,  SBatUttt  jhrei* 
iti  i^r  ?  for  (about)  what,  or  wherefore,  are  you  quarreling  ?  But 

2.  SBog  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  roarum,  or  the  preposition  is 
placed  before  tuad  ;  e.  g.,  For  what  (wherefore,  why)  are  you  beating  me, 
»ad  fc^Iagil  bu  mic!^  ?  What  are  you  quarreling  about,  um  tllo5  flrcitct  i^r 

105.  astt0  fur  ein,  and  mX^tx,  tueldje,  ttJClrfteS,  serve  also  as  ex. 
clamations,  to  express  surprise,  amazement,  or  admiration  ;  e.  g.,  roai 
fiir  ein  5Wann !  wclc^cr  ^lam !  mld)t  ©c^on^eit  J  »)elc^c«  ©efc^rei  I  what  a  man  1 
•what  beauty !  what  noise  1  etc.  In  this  signification  welc^cr  may,  like 
folc^cr^  drop  its  endings  and  place  before  the  noun  the  indefinite  article ; 
e.  g.,  SBell^  ein  SWann  i|l  bad  I  what  a  man  he  is !  Thus  hjcld)  stands  some- 
times also  immediately  before  an  adjective,  and  takes  the  inflection  of 
an  adjective  without  the  article  (No.  24),  and  the  adjective  itself  the  ia- 
flection  of  an  adjective  preceded  by  the  definite  article  (No.  22),  or  toeld^ 
may  remain  unchanged,  and  the  adjective  take  the  inflection  of  an  ad- 
jective not  preceded  by  the  article  ;  e.  g.,  wcld^er  f^iJne  SWann^  or  toel(4 
fd>oner  SWann  I  what  a  beautiful  man ! 


The  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

100.     The  indefinite  pronouns  are: 

Wtati,  one  (French,  on),  they.        Stwa«,  anything,  something. 
Sebermann,  every  one,  every  body,  ^i&it^,  nothing,not  anything. 
3emant,  some  one,  somebody.       ©clbfi  (or  felbcr),  self. 
Alternant),  no  one,  nobody.  Sinanter,    each   other,    one 

another. 

107.  ?Wan  occurs  only  in  the  nominative,  and  requires  the  verb 
in  the  singular.  It  is  expressed  in  English  by  one,  they,  or  by  the  pas- 
sive :  gjlttlt  fagt,  one  says,  they  say,  or,  it  is  said.  When  another  case  is 
required,  the  corresponding  oblique  case  of  ctnet  is  used ;  e.  g.,  btt  ttiUjl 
'.eincm  nie  bein  2eibcn  flagcn,  you  wiU  never  teU  any  one  your  troubles. 

108.  3ietJennttntt  takes  9  in  the  genitive,  the  other  cases  remain 
unchanged.  3cmonb  and  9ltetttattt)  add  §  or  c«  in  the  genitive.  In  the 
dative  they  add  em^  and  in  the  accusative  ctt»  when  the  simple  form 
would  be  ambiguous ;  e.  g.,  e§  ifl  9Ztcmanbem  einc  ^iitfc,  it  is  a  help  to  no. 
body,  where,  IRiemanb^  might  be  read,  nobody  is  any  help ;  jtc  loh  S?ie^ 
ntattben^  she  praises  nobody ;  (ftc  lott  92iemanbf  nobody  praises  her). 


196 


THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


Declension  of  gcbcrmann  and  Scmanb. 


N.  3«fefr«t<intt;  everybody 

G.  S^^ci^nt'i^in^/  of  everybody 

D.  S^^^^^iwann,  to  everybody 

A.  3^^cf»^^^"^  everybody 


3eman^,  somebody 
SemancS  or  ^tmanlt^ 
Semanl)  or  3fmanJem 
3cmant  or  ^tmanltn 


109*     Not-— anybody,  not— any  one,  are  rendered    by  9{temanll 

(nobody) ;  e.  g.,  I  have  not  seen  anybody,  \^  ^abe  9liemanltett  gcfc^en. 

Note. — ^When  Germans  intend  to  denote  anything  to  be  very  in- 
definite,  they  place  before  (£iner,  Semanb,  or  Ctwad  the  adverb  irgeitb ; 
before  tto,  where,  it  denotes  somewhere  {%.  e.,  place  not  definitely  known). 

110.  @elbfl*  or  felber  is  invoHable,  and  may  be  added  f  to  any 
personal  pronoun  or  noun;  e.  g.,i6i  fclbflr  bu  \t\hft,  etc.;  bet  (So^n 
felbft>  bic  %oi^ttx  felb^;  or  felbfl  may  be  placed  nearer  the  end  of  the  sen- 
tence (see  No.  59) ;  e.  g.,  biefc  Seute  brauc^en  i^r  QJelb  felbft/  these  people 
need  their  money  Xhemaelvea. 

111.  The  indefinite  numeral  adjectives  are  used  as  in- 
definite pronouns,  when  the  noun  wluch  they  qualify  is  only 
understood.     They  are : 


Masc.                  Fern. 

Neuter. 

Plural. 

Seber  (3ettt)eter,  3e9'  3ct>e 

Seted 

(wanting) 

Ud^er)!  or  tin  ^tln, 

every,  each 

met  {M),  all          Me 

mt^  {M) 

m{t),  all 

Reiner,  no                ^eine 

^eitt 

^eine,  no 

Siner,  some  one        Sine 

(Sined 

(wanting) 

^anc^cr,Tnanya(an  9Jiand)e 

'iBlan^^t^ 

SyJan^e,  some 

SSiel,  much                  SSiele 

25iet 

5Slete,  many 

fflBenig,  Httle               SCenige 

©enig 

ffienige,  few 

*  The  English  self  must  previously  be  compounded  with  a  pronoun, 
Buch  as  him,  her,  my,  thy,  etc.,  to  qualify  it  for  an  adjunct  to  a  noun  or 
personal  pronoun ;  e.  g.,  The  man  himself,  the  woman  herself,  we  our- 
ieloes,  etc. ;  but  the  German  fel6fl  is  neither  compounded  nor  declined. 

f  When  placed  before  a  noun  or  a  pronoun,  it  is  an  adverb  and  signi- 
fies even;  e.  g.,  Sel&fi  er  !ann  ed  ntc^t  t^un^  eten  he  cannot  do  it. 

X  3e))Ulft)fr  and  ^egU^rr  are  rather  antiquated. 


THE  INDEPINITIfi  PRONOUNS. 


197 


Moac.  Fern.  Neuter.  Plural. 

^er  ^mXi^t,  the    ^ic  ^lamlldje  ^ae  5^dmU^c  Mc  9lamli(!^ctt 

same 
^et  Slntere,  the     Mc  Slntere     bfl^  Sincere     bic  Slnteren 
other 

S3eite,  pL  both  (Sinigc  (etUc^e);*  pi.  some,  a  few 

2)le^rcte,  pi.  several        tie  ^}}iei|tetl,  pi.  most 
Sinige — %x(^txt,  some — others 

Note. — Notice  that  when  the  indefinite  numeral  adjectives  are  used 
as  indefinite  pronouns,  they  begin  with  a  capital. 

113.    ^eben  ^etttoetier;  ^egli^en  Wim^tx,  (SXmx,  and  irgent 

Oilier  are  declined  like  tlie  demonstr.  pron.  bicfer.  %tx  6tne,  Der  %Xi\^tXt, 
and  l)er  9lamli(^e,  like  the  possess,  pron.,  bet  meinc. 

113.  §!^att<^ev^  when  immediately  followed  by  ctn,  is 
used  without  the  termination;  e.  g.,  ^fftan^  tin  SJiann,  etc. 

114:.  tKHc^r  followed  by  the  relative  pronountDfld  or  bad  luaSr  is 
rendered  by  a^  or  a«  tMt ;  e.  g.,  %UtB  toad  i<^  ^U,  ttill  \6)  3^nen  jeigcit, 
all  (that)  I  have  I  will  show  you. 

NoTR — 5tttcd  is  also  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  all  person*. 

I.I.S.  One,  pi.  ones,  after  an  adjective,  is  rendered  by  the  ending 
of  the  adjective  itself ;  e.  g.,  I  have  a  black  coat  and  a  brown  one^  i(^  ^abc 
einen  fc^marjen  9lo(f  unb  eincit  braunen. 

110.  Some,  when  referring  to  a  noun  that  has  preceded,  is  ren- 
dered by  the  accusative  of  toelf^er,  C^  C^»  if  the  noun  to  which  it  refers 
is  in  the  singular,  and  by  toel(^e^  Cttltge^  or  Hatlon,  if  the  noun  is  in  the 
plural;  e.  g.,  SBoUcn  ©ic  SBctn  trtnfcn?  will  you  drink  wine?  3a,  gebcn 
©ie  ntir  toeldlen,  yes,  give  me  some. 

IIT.  Soms  (persons),  others  (other  ones),  corresponds  to  the 
German  ginioc— %ni)ere ;  e.  g.,  Some  say  this,  others  say  that,  ^inige 
fagen  bie«,  9lnJ)erc  fagen  bad. 

118.  Any,  is  an  interrogative  sentence,  is  not  translated,  unless 
equivalent  to  every,  when  it  is  rendered  by  jcbet,  t,  Cd  ;  e.  g..  Do  you  not 
find  that  most  any  (i.  e.,  every)  jserson  has  his  faults,  ftnbcn  (Sic  nici^t,  baf 
bcina^c  jeUcr  SKenf^  feinc  gc^ler  ^at  ? 

*  C^tH^er  is  rather  antiquated. 


198  PABADIGMb  :    VEKBS. 


THE    VEEBS. 


Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  ^aUn,  TO  HAVE, 
Principal  Parts :  ipaben,  f^attt,  gel^aH, 

INFINITIVE.  PABTICIPLE. 

Present.  ^aUn,  to  have  Present,  ^abtnti,  having 

Perfect  ®if)(iH  ^abcil»  to  have  had    Past.       ®t1)aM,  had 

IMPERATIVK 

^alt  (bu),  have  (thou)  ^abtt,  ^aHn  ©ic,  have  (you) 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

t^  ^aht,  I  have  i(!^  ^abt,  I  have 

bu  ^aft,  thou  hast  bu  ^altfit  thou  have 

cr  ^ai,  he  has  er  ^abc»  he  have 

i»ir  ^Itnt  we  have  tt)lr  l^aUn,  we  have 

»j!\«\^'     [you  have  Jl^  ^f  f '    [you  have 

jlc  ^abcilf  they  have  ftc  ^aben,  they  have 

Imperfect. 

id^  ^cttCf  I  had  *  id^  ^iittc,  I  had 

bu  ^atitftf  thou  hadst  bu  f^attt^,  thou  had 

cr  fatter  he  had  cr  ^attc,  he  had 

tt)ir  battel!/  we  had  air  l^dttcn,  we  had 

t^^attct,    ly^^y^  tjrptct,    )        j^^^ 

©ic  fatten, )  ©«  fatten, ) 

fli  ^tten»  they  had  ftc  ^tttn,  they  had 

Id^  ^5c  gc^ftbtf  I  have  had  ic^  |a5e  gc^al&tr  I  have  had 

bu  ^afl  ge^abti  thou  hast  had  bu  ^abefl  ^tf)cAt,  thou  have  had 

cr  ^at  ge^abt,  he  has  had  cr  '^abt  gc^abt,  he  have  had 

tetr  ^bctt  ge^abt,  we  have  had  »lr  ^abcn  gc^abt,  we  have  had 

t^r^abtgc^abt,    [y^u  have  had  J^r  ^abct  ge^aM,    [        have  had 

©tc  ^abctt  gc^abt, )  ©ic  ^aben  ^c^abt, ) 

jlc  ^abcn  ge^abt,  they  have  had  flc  ^abcn  ge^abt,  they  have  had 


PARADIGMS  :    VERBS. 


199 


DTDICATIVE. 


i^  f^attt  gc^a^t  I  had  had 

bu  ^attejl  gel^aM,  thou  hadst  had 
cr  ^atte  ge^abt,  he  had  had 
voir  fatten  ge^abt,  we  had  had 
i^r  ^attet  gc^abt,    U^ahadhad 
©ic  fatten  gc^abt, ) 
fie  fatten  Qtf^abu  they  had  had 


8UBJXJNC3TIVBL 

Pluperfect. 

i(^  ^atte  ge^afet,  I  had  had 

bu  idm\l  ge^abt,  thou  had  had 

cr  lljatte  ge^abt,  he  had  had 

»ir  fatten  gc^abt,  we  had  had 

i^r  ^attet  ge^abt,    ^yo^^adhad 

©ic  fatten  ge^abt,  J 

fic  l^attcn  ge^abt,  they  had  had 


jWr«f  Future. 


i(i)  tecrbc  l^aBen^  I  shall  have 
bu  njirfl  ^aben,  thou  wilt  have 
cr  wirb  ^abcn,  he  will  have 
JDtr  werben  ^abcn,  we  shall  have 
i^rwerbct^aben,    I  you  will  have 
©le  wcrbcn  ^aoeitr ) 
f!c  wcrbcn  ^abcn,  they  will  have 


ic^  wcrbc  '^aben,  I  shall  have 
bu  merliefl  ^aben>  thou  wilt  havs 
cr  tuerDe  ^aben,  he  will  have 
»ir  roerben  l^aben,  we  shall  have 

i^tmrtet^aben,    Uou  will  have 

©le  wcrben  l^aben, ) 

ftc  tDcrben  ^aben,  they  will  have 


Second  Future. 


id)  tDcrbc  ge|abt  laben,  I  shall 
tu  wirfl  ge^abt  ^aben,  thou  wilt 
cr  wirb  gc^abt  ^aben,  he  will 
n>ir  toerben  ge^abt  ^a1>tnt  we  shall 
i^r  werbet  ge^abt  ^aben,    )         ^jj 
©iewerbcngc^abt^abcn, ) 
jtc  tocrben  gc^abt  $aben,  they  will 


i(^  toerbc  ge^abt  ^aben^  I  shall 
bu  toerbefl  ge^abt  ^aUn,  thou  wilt ' 
er  werbc  gc^abt  l^abcm  he  will 
wir  wcrbcn  ge'^abt  ^aben,  we  shall 
i^rwcrbctgc^abt^abcn,    [yo^^i^ 
©icttjcrbcnge^abt^aben,  ) 
(Ic  werbcn  ge^abt  ^aben,  they  will 


JPlrit  Conditional. 
i^  tturbc  l^ben        or    td^  fatter  I  should  have 
bu  JDurbejl  ^aben       or    bu  ^attefl,  thou  wouldst  have 
cr  njiirbe  ^aben         or    cr  ^atte,  he  would  have 
Wir  wurbcn  l^abcn      or    tt)tr  fatten,  we  should  have 
i^r  wiirbct  |abctt    )       i  i^r  ^attet,    i 
©ie  wurbcn  ^abcn  f  ®'  \  ©ic  fatten,  f  ^^^  ^^^^  ^*^® 
fie  Wiirbcn  ^abcn       or    f!c  fatten,  they  would  have 


Second  Conditional. 
or    id)  ^cittc  gcl^abt,  I  should  have  had 
or    bu  l^attcjl  ge^abt,  thou  wouldst  have  had 
or    cr  ^dtte  gc^abt,  he  would  have  had 
or    h)ir  fatten  gc^abt,  we  should  have  had 
t^r  ^attet  gc^abt, 


id)  ttiirbc  gc^abt  ^aben 

bu  tt)itrbcfl  QC^abt  ^abcn 

cr  ttiirbe  ge^abt  ^aben 

toix  ttiirben  gc^obt  ^abcn 

i^r  ttiirbct  ge^abt  ^ben  )       i  tpr  ^attet  gc^aDt,    }  _  ,        ,    , 

©ic  wiirben  gcbabtbabcnf  "'^  ]  ©ic  fatten  gc^abt,  \  ^^^  ^^'"^^  ^^^®  ^^ 

fie  tourben  gc^abt  l^aben      or    ftc  fatten  gc^abt,  they  would  have  had 


200 


FABADIOMS  I   VEBBS. 


Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  <5ciit,  TO  BK 
Principal  Parts :  Scin,  mar,  gewefcti* 


INPINITITEu  PABTTCrPLB. 

Present,  ©ein,  to  be  Present.  (SeienU,  being^ 

P6r/«c<.  ®ctoc(cil  fein,  to  have  been    Pcut.       ©etoefeiti  been 


6c!r  be  (thou) 


IMPERATIVE. 

*3eij  or  feieu  ©ic,  be  (joi^ 


INDICATIVE. 


t(^  6inr  I  am 
bu  bijli  thou  art 
cr  Ifl,  he  is 
toil  flnb,  -we  are 


t^r  fcib, 


youar© 


€ie  fmb» 

fie  finb,  they  are 


Present. 


subjunctivb; 


ic^  fcir  I  be 
bu  fcicfi*  thou  be 
er  fei/  he  be 
»ir  fcicn,  we  be 

t^'^''    [you  be 

fie  fcien,  they  be 


i<^  tettr»  I  was 

bu  toarflr  thou  wait 
er  v>axt  he  was 
tt)ir  waren,  we  were 
ijTtsaret,   J  ^re 

©te  waren,  \ 
fie  »aten,  they  were 


Invperfect. 

ic^  iDttTff  1  were 
bu  todreff*  thou  wert 
cr  n>drf »  he  were 
tt)ir  wdren,  we  were 

'%''^'^''     i you  were 
@te  »aren,  ) 

fie  ttdren»  they  were 


Perfect. 


xi)  bin  getorfen*  1  h/ive  been 
bu  bt|l  gewefen,  thou  hast  been 
er  if!  getoefeUf  he  has  been 
JPtr  jtnb  gewefeitf  we  have  been 
i^rfcibsewefen,    ^  you  have  been 
Sic  fInb  gettefen, ) 
jie  pnb  gewefen,  they  have  been 


xii  fci  gettefen,  I  have  been 

bu  feicfl  gettefen,  thou  have  been 

er  fel  gettefen,  he  have  been 

tttr  feien  gewefen,  we  have  been 

{^r  feiet  gettefen,    I  you  have  been 

©le  feten  gewefen,  ) 

fie  feten  gettefen,  they  have  been 


PARADIGMS  :    VERBS. 


201 


rNDICATIVB. 


id^  war  gcttefcn,  I  had  been 
bu  warjl  gewcfcn,  thou  hadst  been 
cr  war  gcwcfeitr  he  had  been 
Wir  warm  gcwcfen,  we  had  been 
i^rwaretgcwefcn,    [y^u  had  been 


(Sic  waren  gewefeit, 

fie  waren  gewefcn,  they  had  been 


BUBJUNCnVB. 

Pluperfect. 

id)  ware  gewcfcn,  I  had  been 

bu  warcfl  geroefen,  thou  hadst  been 

cr  ware  gewcfen,  he  had  been 

Wtc  wdrcn  gewefcn,  we  had  been 

i^r  waret  acwcfen,    i         t    ^  v 
Z.      ..     ^        r      c  you  had  been 
©le  waren  gcwefen,  > 

fic  waren  gewefcn,  thej  had  been 


\^  werbe  fettlr  I  shall  be 
bu  wirfi  fein»  thou  wilt  be 
er  wirb  feinr  he  will  be 
wir  werben  fein,  we  shall  be 
i^rwerbetfein,    [  iu  be 

©ie  werben  fern, ) 
jlc  werben  fcin#  they  will  be 


Mrst  Future. 

i^  werbe  fein,  I  shall  be 

bu  toerbefi  fcin,  thou  wilt  be 

er  ttJCrte  fetn,  he  will  be 

Wir  werben  fein,  we  shall  be 

l^r  werbct  fein,    )  .,, , 

<5ie  werben  fein» ) 

fte  werben  fein,  they  will  be 


Second  Future. 


td^  werbe  getoefett  fein,  I  shall 
bu  wirfl  gewefen  fein,  thou  wilt 
er  wirb  gewefen  fein,  he  will 
wir  werben  gewefen  fein,  we  shall 
tlrwerbetgewefenfein,    }   ^^^u 
©te  werben  gewefen  fern,  ) 
fie  werben  gewefen  fein,  you  will 


i(^  werbe  gepefen  fein,  I  shall 
bu  werbefl  gewefen  fein,  thou  wilt 
er  werbe  gewefen  fein,  he  will 
wir  werben  gewefen  fein,  we  shall 


§  i^r  werbet  gewefen  fein,  Uouwill\ 

'^   <5ie  werben  gewefen  fein,  j  I 

fte  werben  gewefen  fein,  they  will  ' 


First  Conditional. 


\6)  witrbe  fein 
bu  wiirbefl  fein 
er  wurbe  fein 
wir  wiirbe  fein 
i^r  wiirbet  fein    j^ 
©ie  wurbcn  fein  ) 
fte  wiirben  fein 


or  ic^  wore,  I  should  be 

or  bu  warejl,  thou  wouldst  be 

or  er  ware,  he  would  be 

or  wir  waren,  we  should  be 

^^  i^r  waret, 
©ic  wdren, 

or  fte  wdren,  they  would  be 


en, ) 


you  would  be 


\ii  wiirbe  getoefen  fein 
bu  witrbcfl  gewefen  fein 
er  witrbe  gewefen  fein 
wir  witrbcn  gewefen  fein 
i^r  wurbet  gewefen  fein,  ) 
©ie  witrben  gewefen  fein,  f 
f[e  wurben  gewefen  fein 


Second  Conditional. 

\^  ware  gewefen,  I  should  have  been 

bu  wdrefl  gewefen,  thou  wouldst  have  been 

er  ware  gewefen,  he  would  have  been 

wir  wdren  gewefen,  we  should  have  been 

i^r  wdret  gewefen,    )         ^^^^^  ^^^^  ^^ 

©le  waren  gewefen, ) 

fte  wdren  gewefen,  they  would  have  been 


or 
or 
or 
or 


202 


PABADIGMS  :    VERBS. 


Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  aBcrbcn,  TO  BECOME, 
TO  GROW  (TO  BE), 

Principal  Parts :  SBcrfcen,  wurbe,  gettJorten 
{or  wort) en)* 

HfPINinVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Present,  fficrben*  to  become,  to  grow  Present.  SBerbcnil»  becoming  (being) 

(to  be) 

Per/ec^.  ©cworbeit  (worben)  feim  to  Past.      @cn>orben(tt)orben)» become 

have  become  (been)  (been) 


SSerbe/  become,  be  (thou) 

INDICATTVB. 

i(^  werbe»  I  become 

bu  tt>irfl,  thou  becomest 

cr  »trb,  he  becomes 

tttr  »crbcn»  we  become 

i|rtt)erbct,    Uou  become 

©le  tocrbcn* ) 

fie  »erbeilr  they  become 


id^  wurbc,  I  became 
bu  ttjurbcilr  thou  becamest 
cr  tt)urbc,  he  became 
Wir  wurbert,  we  became 

i^rwurbet,    j.        |,ecame 

(Ste  ttutbcn,  ) 

fie  tpurbciif  they  became 


IMPERATIVE. 

SBcrbet  or  wcrbcn  ©ie,  become,  bo 
(you) 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

\0i  tt)crbc»  I  (may)  become 
bu  tccrbcftf  thou  become 
cr  werbCi  he  become 
»ir  aerbctt*  we  become 

i^rwcrbet,    I  you  become 

<Stc  ttcrbcHf ) 

jic  »crben»  they  become 

Imperfect 

\^  witrbcr  (if)  I  became 
bu  tt)tirbcflf  thou  became 
cr  ttiirbc,  he  became 
»tr  tourbctt,  we  became 
i^rwurbet,    [became 

flc  »firbcn,  they  became 


Perfect. 


I  have  become  or  grown 
i^  Bin  {^etnortien  {or  wrrbcn) 

bu  bif!  gettorbcn 
cr  ifl  gctDorben 
»tr  f!nb  gctoorbcn 
i^r  fcib  Qcworbcn    ) 
©ic  flnb  gcworbcn  ) 
fie  f!nb  gen>crbett 


I  may  Tiave  become  or  grown 
i(^  fct  gcTOorbctt  (or  tcorbcn) 
bu  fetcjl  gcworbeti 
cr  fct  gctoorben 
toir  fcien  Qciuorbcn 
t'^r  fcict  QCiDorben    ) 
<Sic  feicn  gcworben  f 
flc  fcien  geworbcn 


PARADIGMS  :    VERBS. 


203 


INDICATIVE. 


Pluperfect. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


I  had  become  or  grown 
i^  tocLx  getoorben  {or  worben) 
bu  »arjl  gctoorbm 
cr  toax  gcttorben 
wir  toaxtn  geworben 
i^r  »aret  gcioorben    ) 
<Sie  ttarcn  gcnjorbcn  ) 
fie  toaxtn  getooiben 


(if)  I  had  become  or  grown 
i^  todxt  gcroorbctt  {or  worbcn) 
bu  todrcjl  getoorben 
cr  toiixt  gejporbm 
»»ir  tt>dren  getoorben 
i^r  wdrct  gctoorben   ) 
©ic  todrctt  gctDorben  f 
fie  mdrcn  getoorbeu 


i7|r«<  Future. 


I  shall  become 
i(^  werbc  toetlieu 
bu  wtrfl  tocrben 
er  »irb  werbcn 
tDir  werbcn  ©erben 
iffx  toerbct  ttcrben    ) 
©ie  werben  ocrben  f 
flc  »erbcn  toerbctt 


I  shall  become 

iii)  tterbe  wcrben 
bu  werbcfl  rocrbea 
er  wcrbe  jDcrbeu 
ttir  tDcrbcn  tocrben 
i^r  »crbct  toerben    ) 
©ie  tterben  toerben  > 
fte  werben  toerbes 


Second  Future. 


I  shall  ha/oe  become  (grown  or 
been) 

ic^  »crbe  gctoorbett  feln  . 

bu  toirfl  getoorben  feitt 
cr  wirb  gcttjorbcn  fein 
»ir  werbcn  getcorben  fein 
i^r  werbet  gcworbcn  fein    » 
©ie  toerbcn  gcworben  fein  ) 
fie  »erbcn  gcicorben  fein 


I  shall  have  become  (grown  or 
been) 
i(^  toerbe  geworben  fein 
bu  toerbej!  ge»orben  fclu 
«r  wcrbe  geworben  fein 
ttir  tterben  geworben  fein 
i'^r  tuerbct  geworben  fein    ) 
©ie  werben  geworben  fein  ) 
fie  werben  geworben  fein 


Mrst  Conditional 
I  should  become  (grow  or  be) 

t(!^  wiirbe  werben 
bu  wurbejl  werben 
er  wurbe  werben 
Wir  wflrben  werben 
i^x  wiirbet  werben    ) 
®ie  wiirben  werben  f 
f!e  wfirben  werben 


Second  Conditional. 

I  should  have  become  (grown  or 
been) 
iiS^  Wiirbe  geworben  fein 
bu  wurbefl  geworben  fein 
cr  wiirbe  geworben  fein 
Wir  wiirben  geworben  fein 
i^x  wiirbet  geworben  fein    ) 
<5ic  wurbcn  geworben  fein  ) 
gt  Wiirben  geworben  fein 


204  TH£   BEGULAB   VKBLS. 

The  Eegular  Verbs. 

119.  German  verbs  end  in  the  present  infinitive  in 
*n^  By  removing  this  ending  we  find  the  root ;  e.  g.  Men, 
to  praise.* 

"Exceptions. — The  verb  fettt,  to  be,  tl^utt,  to  do,  and  all 
verbs  whose  roots  end  in  cl,  CV,  add  only  n  in  the  in- 
finitive. 

Note.— In  German  the  following  verbs  are  followed  by  the  infinitive 
without  the  preposition  |u : 

1.  The  auxiliaries  of  mode  (See  No.  135) ; 

2.  also  ftnlicn^to  find ;  fu||Ien,  to  feel ;  fe^eil,  to  see  ;  §orH!,  to  hear  ; 
lltittn,  to  remain  ;  ^ei§en,  to  bid  {not  to  call)  ;  ^elfcn>  to  help ;  (e^ren, 
to  teach  ;  (ernett*  to  learn  ;  and  mai^en^  to  make. 

Ex. — (1.)  I  attempted  to  hear,  3c^  »crfu(f)te  ju  ^oren. 
(3.)  I  see  him  write,  3(fe  fc^e  i^n  fdjreiben. 

The  Active  Voice. 

120.  The  Present  Participle  is  formed  by  adding  tub 
to  the  root ;  e.  g.,  tanfetl^,  thanking  ;  and  the  Past  Participle 
by  prefixing  ge  and  affixing  t ;  e.  g.,  gclcmt,  leamed.f 

Exceptions. — The  prefix  gc  is  not  used  in  the  participle 
past,  with  the  following  verbs: 

1.  All  those  of  foreign  origin  ending  in  i  (e)rett ;  e.  gf,,  max^ 
}d}irctt,  to  march  ;  max\Mtt  (not  gemarfc^irt),  marched. 

2.  Such  as  have  the  unaccented  prefix  be,  ge,  cnt,  eittV/ 
cr,  »er  and  jer  ;t  e.  g.,  befudjcn,  to  visit,  be)ud;t  (not  gebcfui^t) 
visited. 

1S1«  The  ImperatiTe§,  which  has  only  one  person  for 
#ach  number,  is  formed  in  the  singular  by  adding  e ;  e.  g., 

*  Almost  every  infinitive  may  in  German  be  used  as  a  neuter  noun  of 
the  first  declension ;  f.  g.,  dancing  is  fatiguing,  bag  Xaitjen  ifl  crmiibcnb. 

f  Both  participles  may  be  used  as  adjectives  ;  e.  g-,  bcr  letHetllie  SKann, 
the  suffering  man  ;  bag  geltelite  ^inb. 

X  Gomp  13T— 150. 

§  Since  a  direct  request,  command,  exhortation,  advice,  warning  or 
prohibition  can  be  addressed  only  to  the  person  spoken  to  there  can  be 
only  one  person  in  the  imperative.    When  referring  to  a  third  person 


THE    BEGULAB  VERBS.  205 

^oic,  fetch  (thou)  ;  and  in  the  plural  by  adding  tt :  in&ct, 
seek  (ye),  or  ctl  when  the  verb  is  followed  by  the  pron.  <B\t: 
loben  <Bit,  praise  (you).* 

122.  1.  The  Present  tense  is  formed  by  adding  e  to 
the  root ;  e.  g.,  3<^  Itebe,  I  love,  I  do  love,  or  I  am  loving. 

2.  The  Imperfect  by  adding  te ;  e.  gr.,  3^  tanfte,  I  thanked, 
I  did  thank,  or  I  was  thanking. 

Note. — The  subjunctive  is  generally  used  to  indicate  that  a  statement 
is  rather  indefinite  or  at  least  uncertain.  It  is  used  especially  to  give  the 
assertions  of  other  persons,  without  assuming  ourselves  the  responsibil- 
ity of  their  correctnesa  Some  conjunctions  govern  the  subjunctive  (see 
p.  98).  It  is  also  used  in  exclamations  and  wishes  where  the  conjunc- 
tion is  understood,  quite  frequently,  and  instead  of  the  Conditional. 

133,  The  Gomppund  tenses  are  formed  in  German 
nearly  as  in  English. 

1.  In  the  Perfect  the  participle  past  of  the  principal  verb 
is  preceded  by  the  present,  and 

2.  In  the  Pluperfect  by  the  imperfect  of  ^alitxi  (sometimes 
fcin)  ;  e.  g.,  ic^  J)dbc  ^elemt,  I  have  learned  ;  ic^  f^attt  gclicbt^ 
I  had  loved. 

3.  In  the  First  Future  and  First  Conditional,  the  infinitive 

of  a  principal  verb  is  combined  with  the  auxiliary  tt^etbett 
(like  shall  and  should  in  English) ;  e.  g.,  3<^  tuetbe  f  attfett; 
I  shall  buy  ;  e.  gr.,  3c^  tO^tbe  ma^etl,  I  should  make. 

4.  In  the  Second  Future  and  Second  Conditional  the  past 
participle  of  the  principal  verb  is  inserted  between  the  aux- 
iliary tt^erben  and  the  infinitive  of  l^aben  (sometimes  fctll) ; 
e.  g.,  3dj  toixu  qcbant  ^aBen,  I  shall  have  built ;  id)  roiirDe  ges 
J)Ot^t  'i^ai>tn,  I  should  have  obeyed. 


it  is  expressed  by  periphrasis  with  the  auxiliary  verb  foIIen»  shall ;  as : 
cr  foU  arbcitcti/  he  shall  work,  etc.  In  an  admonitory  or  exhortative  sense, 
the  verb  IafTen»  to  let,  is  employed ;  as  :  laffct  und  lefcn,  let  us  read. 

*  In  conversational  style,  the  form  followed  by  <Bk  is  preferred  :  e.  g^ 
Come,  fotnmtn  <Sk,  instead  of  fomntct 


206 


PARADIGMS. YERBS. 


Conjugation  of  a  regular  transitive  Verb. 

Coficit,  TO  PRAISE, 

Principal  Parts :  loBcit,  loHc,  gcIoBt. 

-A.CTIVE    VOICE. 

INFmiTIVB.  PARTICIPLES. 

Pret.  SoBen,  to  praise.  Pres.  So(ent),  praising 

Per/.  ®tloH  ^abcn,  to  have  praised.    Past.  ®tioH,  praised. 


IMPERATIVE. 

SoBc,  praise  (thou). 

Sobct 

or  loBcn  ©ie,  praise  (you.) 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

STJBJnNCTIVE. 

I  praise,  am  praising,  do 

praise. 

I  praise,  etc. 

3(3^  lo&e. 

3^  loBc, 

bu  lobflf 

bu  Io6efl, 

ttUht, 

cr  loht, 

to'it  lo^eit. 

toil  Miti, 

Sit  loben,  f 

i^rlobet, 
©ielokn,  ' 

fie  lo&en* 

Imperfect. 

ftc  loben* 

I  praised,  was  praising,  did 

[  praise. 

I  praised,  etc. 

m  loHt, 

3(^  lobcte  or  Ulit, 

bu  lobtefir 

bu  lobtcf!, 

cr  lobtCf 

cr  lobte, 

»tr  loHttlt 

»ir  lob  ten, 

i^xUHttf    \ 
<Bxt  UHtn,  \ 

i^r  lobtet,    ) 
®ic  lobtcn,  i" 

fie  UHtn. 

Perfect. 

f!e  lobten. 

I  have  praised. 

I  have  praised^ 

3(^  |a(e  gctobt, 

3(^  ^<ih  pelobt, 

bu  ^afl  gelobt, 

bu  §akfl  gelobt. 

er  ^at  gelobt. 

er  ^tt6c  gclobt, 

toir  ^ben  gelobtf 

toir  ^abcn  gelobt, 

©ie  ^abcn  gelobt,  J 

i^r  ^abct  gclobt,    ) 
©ic  l^abcn  gclobt,  ) 

fie  ^ben  gelobt. 

fit  ^bcn  gelobt. 

PABADIGMS  :    YEBBS. 


207 


INDICATIVE. 


I  bad  praised 

i^  ^atte  gelobt 

bu  ^attefl  gelobt 
er  l^atte  gelobt 
»ir  fatten  QtUU 
t^r  ^attet  gelobt  ) 
©ic  fatten  gclobt ) 
ftc  fatten  gclobt 


BUBJUNCTIVa. 


Pluperfect. 


(if)  I  had  praised 

\^  ^atte  gelobt 
bu  ^dttefl  gelobt 
cr  ^ttttc  gclobt 
»ir  fatten  gclobt 

©ic  fatten  gelobt  i 
fte  fatten  gelobt 


I  shall  praise 

i^  tnerlie  lobeit 
bu  wirjl  lobcn 
cr  »irb  loben 
toil  wcrbcn  lobcn 
i^r  tt)crbet  loUn 
©ic  wcrben  loicn 
|tc  »erben  loben 


jP*r«<  Future. 

(if)  I  shall  praise 

tc^  werbe  loben 
bu  mertiefi  loBen 
er  toetbe  loben 
tt)ir  »erben  lobm 
i^r  »crbct  lolm 
©ic  toerbcn  lobm 
|?e  ttttbcn  lobctt 


Second  Future. 


I  shall  have  praised 

\^  werbc  gelobt  ^abcn 
bu  n>ir|l  gelobt  ^aben 
er  wirb  gclobt  l^aben 
ttir  ocrben  gclobt  :^aben 
i^r  werbct  geloBt  ^aben    ) 
(Sic  werbctt  gctobt  ^abcn  f 
fie  wcrbcn  gclobt  §abcn 


(if)  I  shall  have  praised 

i(^  tterbc  gelobt  ^abctt 
bu  trcrbejl  gclobt  ^aben 
er  werbc  gelobt  l^abcn 
tt)tr  tBcrben  gelobt  ^aben 
i^r  wcrbct  gctobt  ^abcn    ) 
©ic  toerbcn  gclobt  ^abcn  ) 
Pe  toerben  gtlobt  ^aben 


First  Conditumal. 
I  shoTild  praise 

id^  JDurbe  lobcn 
bu  tuitrbejl  lobcn 
er  ttjfirbe  loten 
n>ir  tourben  lobcn 
t^r  tt)urbet  loBcn   ) 
©ic  tt)iirbctt  loben  j 
fie  Mrbett  lotcit 


Second  Conditional. 
I  would  or  should  have  praised 

xi)  wurbc  gclobt  ^a6en 
bu  wurbefl  gclobt  ^abm 
cr  ttJiirbc  gelobt  ^abcn 
»ir  tturbcn  gclott  ^abcn 
i^r  tofirbct  gclobt  ^abcn    ) 
©tc  ttjiirbcn  gclobt  ^abcn  ) 
fie  tofirbctt  gcIoBt  ^Bcn 


208  THE   REGULAR   TERES. 

124.  For  the  sake  of  euphony  regular  verbs,  whose  roots 
end  in  h,  t,  ^n,  %n,  ^m,  ffii,  4m,  or  t\^m,  as  rebcn,  bctcn, 
orbnen,  \t%ntn,  wi^mcn,  rcd^nen,  offneit,  at^en,  generaUy 
retain  e  before  the  termination,  in  every  mood,  tense  and 
person,  if  the  ending  does  not  begin  with  e. 

EXAMPLE. 

9f  eben,  to  talk. 

Present.  Imperfect. 

id>  rcte,  I  talk  i(^  retcte,  I  talked 

bu  refccfl,  thou  talkest  tu  rcbctejl,  thou  talkedst 

er  retet,  he  talks  cr  retetc,  he  talked 

ttjir  ret  en,  we  talk  wir  rctcten,  we  talked 

*!'«»'''    [you  talk  'i';"^*''''    Uou  talked 

@ie  reten, )  <Bxt  rereten, ) 

fte  reten,  they  talk  fte  receten,  they  talked 

Perfect.  Pluperfect. 

id)  ^aBe  geretet,  I  have  talked     i(^  ^atte  gcretet,  etc. 

125.  Verbs  whose  last  radical  letter  is  a  sibilant  (f,  ff, 
f<^,  or  %) ;  e.  g.,  rafeti,  to  rage  ;  ^affen,  to  hate ;  ttitttfc^en,  to 
wish ;  fc^en,  to  put,  place,  also  generally  retain  the  e  of  the 
termination;  e.  g.,  \6^  xom\^t,  tu  ttJiinf^eji;  ic^  |affe,  bu  ^affejt,  &c. 

The  Passive  Voice.* 

1 S56.  The  various  modes,  tenses,  etc.,  of  verbs  are  formed, 
for  the  passive  voice,  from  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  aux- 
iliary verb  toerbett  and  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  he  con- 
jugated ;  e.  g.,  ^eliebt  tOCthtn,  to  be  loved. 

Note. — The  past  participle  of  the  auxiliary  toerbett,  to  be,  to  hecome, 
IB  getOOtlienf  but  when  used  to  fonn  the  passive  voice  of  verbs  the  prefix 
ge  is  omitted  ;  e.  g.,  3d^  bin  getabelt  toorbettr  1  have  been  blamed. 

*  9B(rlien>  construed  with  the  participle  past  of  an  active  verb,  can 
denote  only  a  passive,  hence  the  passive  voice  can  in  German  never  be 
confounded  with  the  past  tenses  of  a  neuter  verb,  as  is  apt  to  be  the 
case  in  English  ;  e.  g.,  <Sic  ifl  gegangcn,  and,  cr  ttiirt  9ef(^la9en,  she  is  gone 
and  he  is  beaten,  present  two  distinct  ideas  to  the  mind.  The  use  of  fein» 
as  in  fie  tft  ficgangcnr  makes  it  clear  that  the  verb  is  in  the  past  tense  of 
the  active  voice,  while  the  use  of  tocrbcn,  as  in  cr  tntrt  gcfi^kgcn,  informs 
Qg  that  the  verb  is  used  in  the  paspivb  voice. 


PABADIGMS:    VERBS. 


2oy 


I>-A.SSIVE    VOICE. 

INPINITIVK. 

Present.  ®cIoBt  toetlien^  to  be  praised 

Perfect,  ©elobt  »orbcn  fcin,  to  have  been  praised 

^  PARTICIPLB. 

Present,  gu  Iobenll»  to  be  praised 
Past.       ®t\oH,  praised 

IMPERATIVB. 

Sinnvlar.  fflerte  gclobt,  be  (thou)  praised 

Plural.      2Berbct  or  wcrben  6ie  gclobt,  be  (you)  praised 


INDICATIVE. 

I  am  praised 
i(^  toerUe  gelobt 
bu  »irfl  gelobt 
cr  ttirb  gelobt 
»ir  »crbcn  geloBt 
t^r  toerbct  gelobt 
©ic  werbcn  gclobt 
f!e  toerben  delobt 


I  was  praised 

i(t  tourte  gelott 
bu  tvurbefl  ^eloM 
er  »urbc  gclobt 
t»ir  wurbcn  gclobt 
i^r  wurbct  gclobt    ) 
®ic  wurbcn  gclobt  j 
fie  tourben  gelobt 


Present. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I  may  be  praised 
ic^  »crbc  gclobt 
bu  toerHefi  gelobt 
er  tnerbc  geloBt 
ttir  toerben  gelobt 
t^r  wetbet  gelobt     ) 
©ic  werben  gelobt  ) 
lie  aerben  aelobt 


Imperfect. 


(if)  I  were  praised 
i(^  lourbe  gelobt 
bu  witrbefl  gelobt 
er  tciirbe  gelobt 
tt)ir  iDurben  gclobt 
i^r  wurbet  gelobt    J 
©ic  wiirben  gelobt  i 
fte  wiirben  gelobt 


Perfect. 


I  have  been  praised 

{(^  Bin  ^f\t>H  toorben 

bu  bijl  gelcbt  worben 
er  if!  gclobt  worben 
»ir  finb  gclobt  »orbett 
i^r  feib  gelobt  »orben    ) 
©tc  jlnb.gelobt  worben ) 
fie  finb  gelobt  worben 


I  may  have  been  praised 
x^  fct  gclobt  worben 
bu  fciefl  gelobt  worben 
er  fei  gelobt  worben 
»ir  fcten  gelobt  worben 
ibr  fetet  gelobt  worben    ) 
©ie  fcten  gelobt  worben  ) 
fie  fcien  gelobt  worben 


210 


PAEADIGMS;   YEBBS. 


INDICATIVB. 

I  had  been  praised 

i(^  toar  QtloU  tooxbtn 
bu  toax\i  QdoU  JDorben 
cr  war  gelobt  worbcn 
»tr  »aren  gclobt  »orbcn 
i^r  wcret  gclobt  worben 
©tc  warm  gclobt  worbm 
f!e  toaren  geloM  tooibtn 


SUBJUNCTIVB. 

Pluperfect 

(if)  I  had  been  praised 

tc^  toare  gelobt  toorben 
bu  toarefl  gelobt  worben 
cr  »are  gelobt  »orben 
Wir  wdren  gcloit  »orbm 
i^r  »aret  gcloit  worben   ) 
©ic  wdren  geloBt  worben  ) 
ftc  wdren  gcloJt  worben 


I  shall  be  praised 

i^  tott'Ot  gelobt  tuttUn 

bu  wirjl  gelobt  werben 
er  wirb  gelobt  werben 
wir  werben  gelobt  werben 
i^r  werbet  gelobt  werben    ) 
©ic  werben  geloBt  werben  ) 
Pe  werben  gelo&t  werben 


jPYr»«  Future. 

(if)  I  shall  be  praised 

i(^  werbe  geloM  werben 
bu  tnerbefl  gelobt  werben 
er  tocrbe  gelobt  werben 
wir  werben  gelobt  werben 
l^r  werbet  gelobt  werben 
©ie  werben  geloBt  werben 
fie  werben  gelobt  werben 


Second 
I  shall  have  been  praised 

id^  werbe  gelobt  toorbett  fetn 

bu  wirfJ  gelobt  worben  fetn 
er  wirb  geIot»t  worben  fetn 
Wir  werben  gclobt  worben  fetn 
i^r  werbet  gelobt  worben  fetn     ) 
©ie  werben  gelobt  worben  fetn  f 
fie  werben  gelobt  worben  fcin 


Future. 

(if)  I  shall  have  been  praised 

^  werbe  gelobt  worben  fetn 
bu  toerbefl  gelobt  worben  fein 
er  mttt  gelobt  worben  fcin 
wir  werben  gelobt  worben  fein 
i^r  werbet  gelobt  worben  fetn    ) 
©ie  werben  gelobt  worben  fein  f 
fie  werben  gelobt  worben  fetn 


Mrst  Conditional. 
I  should  or  would  be  praised 

x^  tDurbe  gelobt  tDerbett 

bu  wiirbejl  gelobt  werben 
er  witrbe  gelobt  werben 
wir  wiirben  gelobt  werben 
ibr  wiirbet  gelobt  werben    ) 
©ie  wiirben  gelobt  werben  f 
fit  wiirben  gelobt  werben 


Second  Conditional 
I  should  or  would  have  been  praised 

i^  witrbe  gelobt  toortiett  fein 

bu  wiirbefl  gelobt  worben  fein 
er  witrbe  gelobt  worben  fetn 
wir  wiirben  gelobt  worben  fein 
ibr  wiirbet  gelobt  worben  fein    ) 
©ie  wiirben  gelobt  worben  fein  ) 
fie  wiirben  gelobt  worben  fein 


IBBSGULAB  VERBS.  211 


Irregular  or  Ancient  Verbs. 

1 37  •  There  are  in  German  nearly  two  hundred  irregular 
verbs.  They  deviate  from  the  regular  verb  particularly  in 
the  Imperfect  Indicative  and  in  the  Past  Participle. 

128.  1.  In  the  Imperfect  IndicatiTe,  irregular  verbs 
change  their  radical  vowel^  and  do  not  admit  of  a  termination  ; 
e.  g,y  to  dng,  fingen,  I  sang,  id^  fang. 

Note. — The  Imperfect  Subjunctim  is  formed  re^arly,  i.  e,,  by  add- 
ing Cf  and  modifying  the  radical  vowel  when  it  is  a>  0/  or  u ;  e.  g.,  gcbcn* 
(to  give);  Indicative,  ic^  gttb;  Subjunctive,  ic^  ga^e. 

2.  In  the  Past  Participle  they  affix  ctl  instead  of  t;  e.  g., 
ladm  (to  bake):  gebadetl,  and  frequently  change  their  radical 
vowel  also  ;  e.  g.,  Berflen  (to  burst) :  geborften. 

139.  Exceptions. — ^The  following  verbs  change  their 
radical  vowel,  but  take  also  the  ending  of  the  regular  verb 

1.  In  the  imperfect :  e.  g.,  Brennen,  Imperf.  brannte  (not 
Ixaxmt). 

2.  In  the  past  participle :  e.  g,,  vtnntn,  ^erannt  (not  ge^ 
wnnen). 

S3rennctt,  to  bum  itenncn,  to  name 

Bringcn,  to  bring  renncn,  to  run 

benfen,  to  think  fenten,  to  send 

!ennen,  to  know  (French,  con-  njcn^en,  to  turn 

naitre)  n?ijfen,  to  know  (Fr.,  savoir) 

Note. — SBtffen  inserts  e  in  the  present  singvla/r :  t(§  wcip*  bu  ttciit>  er 
»eip»  ttit  »iffen,  i^r  wiffct  (Sic  tciffcn),  f!e  totffen. 

1 30.  Some  of  the  irregular  verbs  (see  the  list  pp.  214 — 
218)  also  modify  or  change  their  radical  vowel 

1.  In  the  second  and  third  person  singular  of  the  Present ; 

e.  g.y  badfen,  to  bake :  bu  Bdtffl,  er  Bddft;  and 

2.  In  the  Imperatiye  singular  ;  e.  g.^  gebcn  (to  g^ve):  gie6. 


212 


paradigms:  vebbs. 


Ooiyugation  of  an  Irregular  or  Ancient  Verbi 
@ckn,  TO  GIVE. 

Prirwipal  Parts :  OeBcii;  gaB,  gcgeBett. 

INFINITrVE.  PABTICIPLB. 

Present,  ©ebciif  to  give  Present.  ®ebcni)#  giving 

Perfect.  ©t^tbtn^aHn, toh&vegiyeii   Past.       ®C0etcn»  given 


Singular.  ®itb,  give  (thou) 


IMPERATIVE. 

Plural.  ®ebct  (gcbt  or  gebcn  Bit), 
give  (you) 


INDICATIVE. 

I  give,  I  am  giving,  I  do  give 

i^  gebe 
bu  gtebfl 

er  gifbt 
wtr  gcben 
i^r  gcbet    j. 
©ie  geben  ) 
fie  geben 


Present. 


Imperfect. 


I  gave,  I  was  giving,  I  did  give 
i^  gttb 
bu  gabfl 
er  gab 
wir  gaben 
ibr  gabct     ) 
<£ie  gabcn  ) 
fie  gaben 


Perfect. 


I  have  given 
i<^  llabe  gegeben 
bu  ^afl  gegeben 
er  \)at  gegeben 
n>ir  ^aben  gegeben 
i^r  ^abt  gegeben 
©ic  baben  gegeben 
fie  baben  gegeben 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

(if)  I  give,  &c 
icb  gcbc 
bu  geBefl 
tt%tU 

»ir  geben 
tbr  gebet    } 
<B\t  geben  ) 
fte  geben 


(if)  I  gave,  &c. 
i(b  giibe 
bu  gdbejl 
er  gabe 
tt>tr  gaben 
i^r  gabct     ) 
©ie  gaben  ) 
jle  gaben 


(if)  I  have  given 
id^  i)aU  gegeben 
bu  ^aM  gegeben 
er  §abe  gegeben 
wtr  bflben  gegeben 
ibr  ^abet  gegeben    { 
©ie  baben  gegeben ) 
fie  b<^ben  gegeben 


PARADIGMS  :    VEBB8. 


113 


INDICATIVE. 

I  had  given 

i^  ^tttte  gegcben 
bu  ^attefl  gegeben 
er  ^attc  gcgebcn 
xoix  ^tten  gcgebcn 
i^r  ^attct  gcgebcn 
©Ic  fatten  gcgebcn 
pc  fatten  gcgebcn 


Pluperfect. 


BUBJUNCTIVa. 

(if)  I  had  given 

i(^  liitte  gcgebcn 
bu  ^ncfl  gcgebcn 
cr  mtt  gcgebcn 
ttir  l^dttcn  gcgebcn 
i!^r  ^cittet  gcgebcn     ) 
<Stc  fatten  gcgebcn  ) 
ftc  fatten  gcgebcn 


Mrst  Future. 


I  shall  give 

ic^  ttiertc  gcbcn 
btt  tDtrfl  gcbcn 
tr  wirb  gcbcn 
tDiT  werben  gcbcn 
t^r  acrbct  gcbcn 
©ic  werbcn  gcbcn 
He  n>crbcn  gcben 


(if)  I  shall  give 

idf  werbc  gcbcn 
bu  tuertefl  gcbcn 
cr  meriic  gcbcn 
»ir  »erben  gcbcn 
i^r  ttcrbet  gcbcn 
Sic  werben  gcbcn 
fit  tocrbcn  gcbcn 


Second  Future. 
I  shall  have  given  (if)  I  shall  have  ^ven 


i^  toerbe  gcgebcn  |aben 
bu  toirfl  gcgebcn  ^aben 
CT  »irb  gcgebcn  l^abcn 
tDtr  werben  gcgebcn  ^aben 
i^r  njcrbet  gcgebcn  b^ben 
©ic  werben  gcgebcn  ^abcn 
fie  wcTbcn  gcgebcn  ^abcn 


t(^  werbc  gcgebcn  ^aben 
bu  wcrbctl  gcgebcn  U^m 
cr  tt>erbc  gcgebcn  ^aben 
wir  werben  gcgebcn  ^aben 
i^r  ttjcrbet  gcgebcn  ^aben   ) 
©ic  werbcn  gcgebcn  baben  ) 
Pc  werben  gcgebcn  ^abcn 


First  Conditional 
I  should  give 

id)  »iirbe  gcbcn 
bu  »urbc|^  gcbcn 
cr  tturbe  gcbcn 
»ir  »urbcn  gcbcn 
\^x  n>urbct  gcbcn    ) 
©ic  toiirben  gcbcn  f 
fie  wurbcn  gcbcn 


Second  Conditional. 
I  should  have  given 

id^  ttJiirbc  gcgebcn  ^abcn 
bu  toilrbcjl  gcgebcn  ^aUn 
cr  wiirbe  gcgebcn  ^aben 
tt)ir  wiirben  gcgebcn  ^aben 
ibr  njurbet  gcgebcn  ^aben   ^ 
©ic  ttjurben  gcgebcn  ^abcn  ) 
(ic  toflrben  gcgebcn  ^bcn 


214 


LIST  OF  IBBEGULAB  YESB& 


An  Alphabetical  List  of  all  the  Irregular  Verbs. 


Infinibi/06, 

Imperfect. 

Pa«<  Par<. 

Page 

Sflcfen,  to  bake 

iud  (fcatftc) 

gebttffcn 

116 

**bcburfcn,  to  need,  like  bftrfcn 

Jeburfte 

bcburft 

— 

Pres.  t(^  bcbarf 

hfc^Ien,  to  order,  to  command 

befall 

befbbim 

119 

icfleiicn  (ftc^),  to  apply  one's  self 

befli§ 

bejliffcn 

123 

icginncit,  to  begin 

begamt 

bcgonnen 

129 

5ei§cn,  to  bite 

bip 

gebiffen 

122 

fccfleminen,  to  press 

beflomm 

beflommen 

125 

Jergen,  to  hide,  to  conceal 

bars 

gcborgcn 

119 

ietflen,  to  burst,  to  crack 

barfl 

gcborjlen 

119 

Jeflnnen,  to  meditate 

befann 

bcfonnen 

129 

tcfl&cn,.  to  possess 

befa§ 

bcfcdcn 

— 

Ictrugejtr  to  clieat,  to  deceive 

betrog 

betrogm 

127 

^ttot^txit  to  induce 

bettog 

betoogen 

125 

bicgettr  to  bend 

bO0 

gcbogen 

126 

Heteit,  to  offer 

bot 

gcbotcn 

126 

tinbcn,  to  bind,  to  tie 

bonb 

gebunbm 

128 

bitten,  to  beg,  to  request 

l<a 

gebeten 

129 

Hafcn,  to  blow 

blie« 

geblafen 

116 

Wctben/  to  stay,  to  remain 

blieb 

gebliebcii 

123 

Wcid^cnr  to  bleach 

blid& 

geblid^n 

123 

tratcn,  to  roast 

briet 

gcbratcn 

117 

(redden,  to  break 

brfi^ 

gebroc^m 

119 

*  brcnncitf  to  bum 

brannte 

gebrannt 

120 

♦fcringen^  to  bring 

brad^te 

gebrac^t 

120 

*  2)cnf  en,  to  think 

ba(^te 

gcba(i^t 

120 

bingen*  to  hire 

bung 

gebungm 

129 

brefc^en,  to  thrash 

brofc^ 

gebrofd^ctt 

119 

bringcn,  to  press,  to  nigo 

brang 

gcbrungcn 

129 

gmpfangen,  to  receive 

empjtng 

cmijfangett 

— 

empflnbcn,  to  feel 

empfanb 

empfiinbcn 

129 

empfe^len,  to  recommend 

cnn>fa^l 

enn>fo^Ictt 

119 

cntrmnen,  to  escape 

entrann 

entronnen 

129 

trbleii^eiw  to  turn  pale 

crblic^ 

erblic^cn 

123 

crfurcn,  to  choose 

etfor 

crioren 

127 

*  These  figures  indicate  the  page  on  which  each  of  the  irregular  verb« 
are  given  in  their  respective  classes. 

*  The  verbs  marked  *  are  partly  irregular. 


LIST  OF  IBBEGULAB   VEBBS. 


215 


Infinitive. 

Imperfect. 

Past  PaH. 

Page. 

frlofi^cn,  to  become  extinct 

crlof(^ 

crlofd^ctt 

127 

crfc^allen,  to  resound 

crf(^oa 

erfc^ottctt 

125 

erfc^rerfen,  to  become  frightened 

erfc^ratf 

erfc^roden 

119 

erwcigen,  to  consider 

crVDog 

erwogen 

126 

effcitr  to  eat 

ap 

gcgeffen 

119 

§a^ren,  to  drive 

W 

gefa^rcn 

116 

fatten,  to  fall 

pel 

gefattctt 

117 

tangen,  to  catch 

fieng 

gcfangen 

117 

fcc^ten,  to  fight 

foc^t 

gefo(^ten 

125 

finben,  to  find 

fanb 

gefunben 

129 

fle^ten,  to  twist 

(loc^t 

gcfIo(^ten 

125 

fitcgen,  to  fly 

Pofl 

gcflogcn 

126 

flte^cn,  to  flee 

m 

geflo^en 

126 

flicpen,  to  flow 

m 

gcfloJTen 

126 

fragen,  to  ask 

frug  (fragtt) 

gefragt 

— 

frcffen,  to  eat  (to  devour) 

fra§ 

gefrejTen 

119 

frieicn,  to  freeze 

fror 

gcfroren 

126 

©a^ren,  to  ferment 

go^r 

gego^rcn 

127 

gebaren,  to  bring  forth 

gebar 

geborcn 

119 

gebcn,  to  give 

gab 

gegeben 

119 

ficMcten,  to  order,  to  command 

gcbot 

gcbotcn 

— 

ficbei^CHf  to  thrive 

gebtc$ 

gebic^ctt 

123 

gefaUen,  to  please 

gePel 

gefatten 

— 

ge^cn,  to  go 

sing 

gegangcn 

117 

gclingen,  to  succeed 

gelang 

gelungen 

129 

geltcn,  to  be  worth 

gait 

gcgolten 

119 

gene  fen,  to  recover 

gena§ 

genefen 

119 

genie§cn,  to  enjoy 

genoi 

gcnoffcn 

126 

gerat^en,  to  fall  into 

geriet!^ 

geratl^en 

— 

gefi^el^en,  to  happen 

gefc^a^ 

gefc^e^en 

119 

gcwinnen,  to  win,  to  gain 

gewann 

geiDonnen 

129 

gie^en,  to  pour 

go§ 

gegoffen 

126 

gletd^en,  to  resemble 

gli^ 

gegltd^en 

123 

glciten,  to  glide,  slide 

glitt 

geglitten 

123 

glimmen,  to  bum  faintly 

glomm 

gcglotttmen 

126 

graben,  to  dig 

gtub 

gcgrabcn 

116 

greifen,  to  gripe,  to  grasp 

griff 

gegiiffcn 

123 

fallen,  to  hold 

^ielt 

gei^alten 

117 

^angen,  to  hang 

^icng 

gebangcn 

117 

^auen,  to  hew 

^teb 

gebaucn 

117 

^ien,  to  lift 

^ob 

ge^oben 

125 

^iien,  to  be  called,  to  bid 

^ieg 

ge^cigen 

123 

ielfeiu  to  help 

^If 

ge^olfctt 

119 

216 


LIST   OF   IBRBGDLAR   VERBS. 


InfinUive. 

Imperfect. 

Past  Part. 

Page. 

*fttmtn,  to  know 

fanntc 

gefamit 

120 

flitUn,  to  cleave 

Hob 

gcfloben 

— 

llimmcn,  to  climb 

flomm 

geHommen 

126 

Ilingen,  to  tingle,  to  sound 

flang 

'   gcflungeit 

129 

Incifcn,  to  pinch 

m 

gefniffcn 

123 

freifc§en#  to  scream 

^m 

gcfrifd^ctt 

— 

fommen#  to  come 

hm. 

gefommen 

120 

fncd^cn,  to  crawl,  to  creep 

fro(§ 

gefroci^en 

126 

fitabtn,  to  load 

tub 

gclabcn 

116 

laffcn,  to  let,  to  leave 

Iteg 

gelttflfcn 

117 

laufcn,  to  run 

lief 

gelaufen 

117 

letben,  to  sufifer 

li.t 

gcUtten 

123 

lei^en,  to  lend 

lie^ 

gcUcl^ett 

123 

Icfcn,  to  read 

lad 

gclefen 

119 

Uegcn,  to  lie 

lag 

gelcgen 

130 

lugcn,  to  lie 

H 

gelogen 

127 

ma^tn, 

— 

gema^len 

— 

meibcn,  to  shun,  to  avoid 

mteb 

gcmicbcn 

123 

melfen*  to  milk 

molf 

gcmolfcn 

125 

mcffcn,  to  measure 

mag 

gemcffcn 

119 

migfallcn^  to  displease 

migitel 

mi§fallen 

— - 

9lt\^rMn,  to  take 

na^m 

genommen 

119 

•  ncraicn,  to  call 

nannte 

gcrannt 

120 

fjfcifen,  to  whistle 

Pflff 

gepftffen 

123 

pf[C0cn,  to  entertain,  nurse 

Pflog 

gepflogcn 

125 

j)reifcn,  to  praise,  to  extol 

pried 

gepriefcn 

123 

CtteIIen>  to  spring  forth 

quoll 

ge()uoIlen 

125 

Rai^etw 

roc^  (rac^te) 

gcro(^cn  (gcrfi(^t) 

127 

rotten,  to  advise 

riet^ 

gerat^cn 

117 

rcibcn,  to  rub 

rub 

gcricben 

123 

rei§en#  to  rend,  to  tear 

rip 

gertJTen 

123 

xtitttit  to  ride  (on  horseback) 

ritt 

geritten 

123 

♦rcnncn,  to  run,  to  race 

rannte 

gerannt 

120 

ricd^cn,  to  smell 

xoHi 

geroi^en 

126 

tingen,  to  wrestle,  to  wring 

rang 

gentngen 

129 

linnen,  to  leak,  to  flow 

rann 

geronnett 

129 

Tufen,  to  call 

rief 

gerufcn 

117 

@o«fcn,  to  drink  (of  animals) 

fof 

gefoffcn 

127 

faugcn,  to  suck 

fog 

gcfogcn 

127 

f(i^affcn»  to  create 

f^uf 

gefd^affen 

116 

fc^eiben,  to  separate 

fd^teb 

gefc^teben 

123 

fd^cintttr  to  seem,  to  shine 

f(^icn 

gefiiicnen 

123 

fd^ltetu  to  scold,  to  chide 

mu 

gefd^olten 

120 

LIST  OF  IBEEGULAB  VERBS. 


217 


InjiTvitive. 

ImperfecL 

PaaPa/ri. 

Page. 

fi^cmiw  to  shear 

f*or 

gcfd^orm 

125 

f(j^it(enr  to  shove,  to  push 

f(^0b 

gcfi^obra 

126 

fij^tcgcn,  to  shoot 

W^ 

fiefi^offcn 

126 

fd^inben,  to  flay 

— 

gcfd^unbett 

129 

fd^Iafeitr  to  sleep 

Wief 

gcfc^Iafcn 

117 

^lagen,  to  beat,  to  strike 

Wn 

gcft^kgen 

116 

ftJ^leU^etif  to  sneak,  to  steal  into 

w\^ 

ficfd^Ud^cn 

123 

fj^lelfen,  to  sharpen,  to  grind 

f^^liff 

8ef(^nffcn 

123 

fd^Uiien,  to  sUce 

fW 

eef(^UfTra 

123 

fd^Ucgnii  to  lock,  to  close 

m^ 

gcf(^lofren 

126 

fc^Uitgen*  to  wind,  to  twist 

fc^lang 

gcfc^lungen 

129 

f<^mci§en,  to  fling 

fc^mii 

gcfc^miffen 

123 

f(^meljenf  to  melt,  to  smelt 

f(^molj 

gcfc^moljm 

125 

((^jwubcn,  to  breathe,  to  snort 

f(^no6 

gefc^nobctt 

127 

f<^nciben,  to  cut 

fc^nitt 

gefc^nittcn 

123 

fc^rciben,  to  write 

f(^ricb 

gcfc^ricbm 

123 

fd^retcn,  to  cry,  to  scream 

f(^rie 

gefc^riecn 

123 

fc^reiten,  to  stride,  to  step 

fc^ritt 

gef(^rimn 

123 

fd^vdren,  to  fester 

f(^»or 

gcfd^worcT! 

127 

fc^toeigen,  to  be  silent 

fd^wieg 

geff^iDtcgm 

123 

f<^»ctten,  to  swell 

fd^tooU 

gefc^ttsllen 

125 

fc^wimmeiw  to  swim 

fc^toamm 

gefc^tDommen 

129 

f(!^wlnbcn,  to  vanish 

fc^wanb 

gcf(^»unbctt 

129 

fd^wittgcrw  to  swing,  to  brandish 

fc^tpang 

gcfi^toungcn 

129 

f(^»6renf  to  swear 

fc^»or  (fc^JDUT) 

gefc^woroi 

127 

ft^en,  to  see 

fa^ 

gefc^cn 

119 

*  fenben,  to  send 

fanbte 

gefanbt 

120 

ftebcRf  to  boil 

fott 

gefotten 

126 

ftngcn,  to  sing 

fans 

gefungcn 

129 

pnfcn,  to  sink 

fanf 

gcfunfm 

129 

jlmien,  to  meditate 

fitttt 

gcfonncn 

129 

ji^ctt,  to  sit 

H 

gefcffctt 

130 

jpeien,  to  spit 

ftjie 

gcfptcen 

123 

fpleipenr  to  split 

ft)Iig 

gcfpltffctt 

123 

fpinttcn»  to  spin 

fpann 

gcfponnm 

129 

fpred^en,  to  speak 

fpra(^ 

gefprod&en 
gcfproffen 

120 

fpritgen,  to  sprout 

iVro§ 

126 

jpringen,  to  spring 
Siti^n,  to  stmg 

tVrang 
|lad& 

gcfprungm 

geflot^ett 

geflodfen 

gcflanbcn 

geflo^Ien 

129 
120 

(icdctt,  to  stick 
ftc^en,  to  stand 
Ue^Icn,  to  steal 

flotf 
flanb 

120 
116 
120 

Peigeti/  to  mount 

(Keg 

gcftiegcn 

12a 

218 


LIST  OF  IBBEGULAB  VERBS. 


Infinitwe. 

Imperfect. 

PflwiPar^. 

Page. 

flctfccn,  to  die 

fiar& 

gefiorbcn 

120 

flicben,  to  fly  off 

(lot 

gefloficn 

126 

ftinfcitr  to  stink 

(Ian! 

fiejhtnfen 

129 

ftopcn,  to  push 

^e0 

geflo^en 

117 

fhei(!^cn,  to  rub 

fhid^ 

gcjhric^en 

123 

l^rcitcn,  to  quarrel 

llritt 

fieflrittctt 

123 

2:^un,  to  do 

t^t 

get^an 

119 

tragcii/  to  cany,  to  wear 

tiug 

getrogcn 

116 

trcfen,  to  hit 

Jrof 

getrofm 

120 

Ucibtn,  to  drive 

ttith 

getrieben 

123 

tretow  to  tread 

trat 

getteten 

119 

trtcfcn,  to  drop 

troff 

— 

126 

trinfciw  to  drink 

ttOttf 

getranfcn 

129 

triigcn,  to  deceive 

Owg) 

(getrcgen) 

127 

gjci^ergen,  to  hide,  conceal 

•crlbarg 

»crborgcn 

— 

"OtiWUXif  to  forbid 

»erbot 

scrbotcn 

126 

j)crb«t>en,  to  spoil,  to  ruin 

»erbar^ 

vcrborben 

120 

Vcrbriff en,  to  vex 

»erbrog 

^crbroffen 

126 

»crgeffcn,  to  forget 

»erga§ 

VergclTen 

119 

veiUerov  to  lose 

»erlor 

verlorcn 

126 

*  »crm5gcn,  Prea.  i^  atnnag 

^  sjcmto^te 

•crmoc^t 

— 

*CTf(^»ini»nt,  to  disappear 

»CTf(|»anb 

»crf(^n)unbm 

— 

^croinen,  to  entangle 

»crworr 

»ertt>orrett 

126 

iftTjci^en,  to  pardon 

*critc^ 

»criie^ 

— 

©a^fcn,  to  grow 

tou^d 

gcwac^fcn 

116 

toagcn,  to  weigh 

»09 

gcwcgen 

127 

n>af(^cn,  to  wash 

»ufc^ 

gctuaf^cn 

116 

Jwien,  to  weave 

n>oib 

gewobcn 

125 

»ri(^«t,  to  yield 

tt>i(^ 

gen)i(|cn 

123 

»dfm,  to  show 

iDted 

gcttJtcfen 

123 

•  tocnbcttr  to  turn 

jDttnbte 

gen>anbt 

120 

tt)crbeit,  to  sue 

tt«T^ 

geworben 

120 

wcrfcn,  to  throw 

toarf 

gcworfcn 

120 

tefegnt,  to  weigh 

»09 

gewogen 

126 

XovcCom,  to  wind 

»anb 

gcjDunbcii 

129 

♦iDtffcn,  to  know 

ttufte 

-   gewnpt 

120 

get^tt/  to  accuse 

Jie^ 

gcjic^cn 

123 

jle^citr  to  draw,  to  pull 

JOS 

gejogcn 

126 

0SSi%VX,  to  force,  to  compel 

Ittang 

gejtottttgai 

129 

AUXILIARIES  OF  MODB.  219 

Auxiliary  Verbs  of  Mode, 

131.  There  axe  in  German,  besides  the  three  auxiliary 
verbs  of  tense,  ^aUn,  fein,  and  »erten,  seven  other  verbs,  called 
the  auxiliary  verbs  of  mode,  because  they  convey  no  full  idea 
in  themselves,  but  give  certain  modifications  to  other  verbs 
(than  required  to  be  in  the  infinitive).  They  are  : 
tiirfeit  laffcn  ntiiffen 

fonnen  rtio^m  foHeit  and  n^oHen 

13^.  .^dnnett,  ^fitfeti,  and  ntd^en  express  possibility 
or  ability  ;  m^ffett,  foUett,  and  tOOUett  imply  necessity;  but 
laffen  expresses  both  possibility  and  necessity,  refening  to 
the  subject  of  the  sentence,  and  is  accordingly,  in  the  form 
oi  a, permission  or  of  a  command;  e.  g.,  ®r  lic§  bctt  ^ieb 
laufett,  he  allowed  the  thief  to  escape  ;  et  Ue^  bctl  Wftann 
f^inti^ttn,  he  had  the  man  executed,  i,  e.,  he  ordered  the 
man  to  be  put  to  death. 

Compound  Tenses, 

133,  The  compound  tenses  of  the  auxiliaries  of  mode 
are  formed  like  those  of  lokn  (see  No.  133). 

The  Conditionals. 

1341.  The  auxiliaries  of  mode  generally  use  for  the 
first  conditional,  the  Imperfect,  and  for  the  second  condi- 
tional, the  Pluperfect  SabJunctiTC)  as  :  icb  f  dtittte,  ic^  l^atte 

qtfonnt,  in  place  of  i&j  toiixU  lomm,  ic&  n?urfce  gcfonnt  )^abm, 

13«(.  The  auxiliaries  of  mode,  used  in  conjunction  with 
the  infinitive  of  another  verb,  must  be  in  the  djpinitive  present, 
instead  of  in  the  past  participle ;  e.  g.,  Sr  ^dttc  c3  nid^t  ^kn 
f dttttett  (instead  of  gefottnt) ,  he  could  not  have  had  it. 

136.  When  an  auxiliary  of  mode  is  to  be  negated,  put 
1ti<^t  before  the  Infinitive  (which  stands  last  in  the  clause) ; 
e.  g.,  (£r  fann  ten  35rief  tiic^t  fc&rei6cn,  he  cannot  write  the  letter. 

Note. — The  auxiliary  verbs  of  mode  are  not  eusceptible  of  the  im- 
perative. 


220 


PABADIGMS:   VEBB6. 


Coiyugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  Stemtn, 
TO  BE  ABLE. 

Principal  Farts :  Stottntn,  lonittc,  gelonnt 

INPINITITB. 

Present.  Stowxtn,  to  be  able 

Perfect.  ®ttomt  ^ahtn,  to  have  been  able 

PAKTICIPLE. 

Present.  St'oraitntf  being  able  (seldom  used) 
Past.       ®ctonnt,  been  able 


IKDICATIYE. 

I  can  {or  am  able) 
i^  lam 
bu  fannfl 
cr  fann 
loir  fonneit 
i^r  fbrmct  or  Umt } 
<Sit  fonnett  > 

f!e  toimen 


I  was  able  (or  I  could) 
id^  fonnte 

bu  fonntefi 
er  fonnte 
loir  fonnten 
i^r  fonntet    j. 
©ie  fonnten ) 
fie  fonntett 


Present. 


Imperfect 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I  may  be  able 

id^  fonne 
bu  fonnefl 
er  fonne 
n)ir  fonneit 
ii^r  fonnet    ) 
©ie  fonnen  f 
fie  fonnen 


I  might  be  able 
ici^  fonnte 
bu  fonntefi 
er  fonnte 
»ir  fonnten 
i^r  fijnntct    ) 
<Sic  fonnten  f 
fie  fonnten 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Perfect.  i^  f^abt  gefonntf  I  have  been  able 

Pluperfect.  i6)  ^atte  gefonnt*  I  had  been  able 

Mrst  Future.  \6)  wcrbe  fonnenr  I  shall  be  able 

Mrst  Conditional.  l(^  tt>urbe  fonnen^  I  should  be  able 

Second  Future.  t(^  wcrbe  gefonnt  l^abcn*  I  shall  have  been  able 

Second  ConditioruU.  i(^  t»itrbe  gefonnt  ^itUt  I  should  have  been  able 


PABADIGMS. — ^VEBBS. 


221 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  aWogcn,  MAY,  TODESIBE, 
TO  LIKE  A  THING,  ETC. 


INFINITIVE. 


Present.    M^tn,  to  like. 

Perfect.     (Bmc^t  ^Itn,  to  have  liked 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present.    WoQtnt,  liking,  (seldom  used). 

Past         @eQtoif)t,  liked. 

INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

I  may,  I  like. 

I  may  like. 

3c^  ntttg, 

3c^  moge, 

bu  ntttgfl* 

bu  mfigejl. 

er  mog, 

cr  miJge, 

tttr  mfigeitr 

tt>ir  mogcn, 

t^r  moget  or  mogl* 
©ic  tnogcn, 

t^rmiJgct,    ) 
©ic  mbgcn, ) 

fit  miJgcn. 

*ic  m60cn« 

Imperfect, 

IHked. 

I  might  like. 

3c^  modjte. 

3(^  mbi^te. 

bu  moc^teH, 

bu  m6d>tejl, 

cr  ntod^te. 

cr  mSd^tc, 

»ir  moc^ten. 

wtr  m8(]^tctt» 

©ic  mcdiUn, ) 

i^r  m()(^tct,    ) 
©ic  mod^tctv ) 

fic  moc^ten. 

fte  mod^tcn. 

Compound  Tenses. 

Perfect.                 5*  ^abc  gemoc^t. 

I  have  desired. 

Pluperfect             3(3^  ^attc  gemoc^t. 

I  had  desired. 

la^  Future.            3(^  ttcrbc  mfigcn, 

I  shall  desire. 

1«^  Conditional.      3<i  wiirbc  ntbgcn, 

I  should  desire. 

2nd  Future.           3ci^  wtrbc  gcmo(^t  ^aBcn, 

I  shall  have  desired. 

2fMi  Conditional.    3(^  »iirbe  gemod^t  ^abcn. 

I  should  have  desired. 

222 


PARADIGMS. VERBS. 


Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  SJiuffen,  MVST, 

TO  BE  OBLIGED,  ETC. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present.    SWufTcn,  to  be  obliged. 

Perfect,     ©cmu^t  ^aben,  to  have  been  obliged. 


PARTICIPLES. 

PreserU.    «WufTettb,  being  obliged,  (seldom  used). 

Pa^t.         ©cmuf  t,  being  obliged. 

INDICATrVB. 

SUBJDNCnVB. 

Present. 

I  am  obliged  (must). 

I  may  be  obliged. 

^^  mui* 

3c^  miilTc, 

bumugt. 

bu  ntiiffcH, 

cr  mugf 

er  mulTc, 

tt>ir  ntiiflen. 

tt)ir  miiffen, 

i^r  miiffct  or  miipt, ) 
©ic  mulfcn,            f 

i^rmufTet,    ) 
©ie  mitffcn, ) 

fie  muJTen. 

flc  miiffen. 

Imperfect. 

I  was  obliged. 

I  might  be  obliged. 

3(^  nm§te» 

^^  mii^tc, 

bu  ntugteUr 

bu  miiptcfl, 

er  mvi^it, 

cr  mii§tc, 

»ir  mugteilf 

toir  miipten/ 

i^r  mu§tet 
©iemu§tctt» 

t^rmiigtet,    ) 
©tc  ntu^tcn,  f 

flc  mu^teiu 

fie  miiiten. 

Compound  Tenses. 

Perfect.                3(^  ^abe  genrn^t. 

I  have  been  obliged. 

Pluperfect.            5(^  l^atte  gemu^t, 

I  had  been  obliged. 

1«^  Future.            3d^  wcrbe  miiffen, 

I  shall  be  obliged. 

l8«  Conditioned.      3(^  Wiirbc  mitffen, 

I  should  be  obliged. 

2?id  Future.           S(^  werbe  gcmu^t  ^ahn, 

I  shall  have  been  obliged. 

27id  Conditional.    3c^  ttiirbe  gcwupt  ^aben, 

I  should  have  been  obliged. 

PABADIGMS  :    YUBBS. 


223 


Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  Surfeit,  DABEy  MAY, 
TO  BE  PERMITTED,  ETC, 

Principal  Parts :  !Durfett,  burfte,  geturft 

rNPINITIYE. 

Present.  2)urfcn»  to  be  permitted 

Perfect.  @eburft  ^abcn»  to  have  been  pennitted 

PAKTICIPLB. 

Present.  !3Durfcnb»  being  permitted 
Past.       @eburft«  been  pennitted 


INDICATIVE. 

I  ms,j  (I  am  permitted) 

i(^  bttrf 
bu  borffl 
cr  borf 
tt>ir  burfcn 
i^r  biirfct     j. 
<Bk  biirfen  f 
fte  biirfea 


Present. 


SUBJUNCnVH. 

I  may  (I  be  permitted) 
i^  biirfe 
bu  burfefl 
cr  biirfe 
tt)ir  biirfen 
il^r  burfct    ) 
©ic  biirfen  f 
fie  biirfen 


Im^perfect. 


I  was  permitted 
\^  burftc 
bu  burftcd 
er  burftc 
tt)tr  burftcn 
t^rburftct     ) 
©ie  burftcn  f 
fie  burftcn 


I  were  permitted 
ic^  biirfte 
bu  biirftejl 
cr  burfte 
»tr  biirftcii 
i^r  biirftet    \ 
®te  biirften  f 
fie  biirften 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Perfect.  xij  ^a6e  gcburft*  I  bave  been  pennitted 

Pluperfect.  id^  ^attc  gcburft^  I  bad  been  pennitted 

First  Future.  \^  h>erbe  burfcn*  I  shall  be  pennitted 

First  Conditional,  x^  ttiirbe  burfcn»  I  should  be  permitted 

Second  Future.  id^  tt>crbe  gcburft  ^oAtn,  I  shall  have  been  permitted 

Second  ConditiancU.  i(^  toiirbe  gcburft  ^ten,  I  should  have  been  pennitted 


224 


PABADIGMS:    VERBS. 


Conjugation  of  the  Aimliary  Verb  aBaffcti,  TO  BE 

WILLING  (TO  WISH). 
Frincipal  Parts :  Swollen,  teolltc,  gettJoUt^ 

IKFINITIVB. 

Present  SBoffcHi  to  be  willing 

PerfecL  ©eaoUt  ^abcHi  to  have  been  willing 

FABTICIFLB. 

Present.  SSottenb»  willing  (seldom  used) 
Past.       @c»oIIt»  wiUed,  been  willing 


INDICATIVB. 

I  wiU,  am  willing 
bu  tDtttjl 

cr  Witt 

toir  loolletl 

i^r  wollet  or  weUt  J 

@ic  woflcn  I 

fie  noUcn 


I  was  willing 

i(^  iDoQte 
bu  n>oUte^ 
ft  wotttc 
tDir  n)olIteti 
i^r  tDotttft    ) 
<£ie  ttoatcn ) 
ftc  ttoUteu 


Present, 


Imperfect. 


BUBJUNCTIVK. 

I  may  be  willing 

bu  moQefl 
CT  tt)oKe 
to\i  woQeit 
i^r  wollct     ) 
©ic  woUctt  ) 
fie  woQeit 


I  might  be  willing 

i(^  ttotlte 
bu  tvoUtefl 
er  n)»Ilte 
»iT  wotttctt 
i^r  woUtet   ) 
Bit  ttottten  J 
fie  tDoQten 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Perfect.  \&j  ^abe  gcwoUt*  I  have  been  willing 

Pluperfect  ic^  ^tte  gctt>o fltf  I  had  been  willing 

Mrst  Future.  iij  »crbc  WDHfn,  1  shall  be  willing 

First  Conditional,  vij  trurbe  »otIcn»  I  should  be  willing 

Second  Future.  \^  werbc  gcwoUt  ^abcn»  I  shall  have  been  willing 

Second  Conditional,  ic^  toiiTbe  getvoUt  ^aben>  I  should  have  been  willing 


FABADIOMS  :    VEBBS. 


225 


Ooiyugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  SoIIen,  TO  BE 

OBLIGED, 
Principal  Parts :  ©ollen,  foUte,  gcfolU. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present.  ©oIIe«#  to  be  obliged 

Perfect,  @cfottt  ^ot>en»  to  have  been  obliged 

PAKTICIPLE. 

Present.  ^oUtntit  being  obliged  (seldom  used) 
Past,       @efoUtr  been  obliged 


niDICATIVB. 

I  ftm  obliged 
ic^fott 
bu  foad 
tr  fott 
n)ir  follett 
i^rfoflet    ) 
©tc  fotten  f 
fte  foHen 


Present. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I  may  be  obliged 
^  foUe 
bu  foffeU 
cr  fette 
mit  follcn 
i^r  follct    I 
<Sk  fotten  f 
fit  fottctt 


Imperfect. 


I  was  obliged 

i^  fottte 
bu  fotttcfl 
er  fottte 
tt>ir  fottten 
i^r  fotttct     j 
©ic  fottten  f 
|!c  fottten 


I  might  be  obliged 

i(^  fottte 
bu  fofltefl 
er  fottte 
tt)ir  fottten 
i^r  fotttet    ) 
<Ste  fottten  f 
fie  fottten 


COMPOUND  TENSES.  . 

l^erfeet.  id^  f^aU  gefofftr  I  have  been  obliged 

Pluperfect.  id^  ^atte  gcfottt  I  had  been  obliged 

First  Future.  id^  werbe  fotten?  I  shall  be  obliged 

First  Conditional,  id)  tt)urbe  fottett»  I  should  be  obliged 

Second  Future.  idj  rocrbc  grfottt  ^atiett;  I  shall  have  been  obliged 

Second  Condition^,  i^  tourbe  gefottt  ^b(n»  I  should  have  been  obliged 


226 


PARADIGMS  :    VERBS. 


Conjugation  of  the  Auxiliary  Verb  fioffcn,  TO  LET, 

TO  PERMIT,  TO  LEAVE. 

Principal  Parts :  2affcn,  \xt^,  gelaffett* 

iNPmmvE. 
Present.  CajfcWf  to  let,  to  permit 
Perfect,  ©clajfen  ^HXi,  to  have  let 

PABTICIPLB. 

Present.  Caffcnb  (is  never  used) 
Past.       ©elaffeUi  let  {or  permitted) 

niPERATIVB. 

Singular.  £a|fe  {or  lap),  let  (thou),  (French,  laisser) 
Plural.     2affct  (left  or  laffcn  ©ic),  let  (you) 


INDICATIVE. 

I  permit  {or  I  let) 

i(^  Ittffc 

bu  lajfcfl 

er  Vm 

air  laffen 

i^r  Ia§t  (or  laffet) ) 

©ic  rafTen  ) 

r«  lafrm 

I  permitted 
i(^  Uci 
bu  Itepefl 
cr  lie§ 
»ir  Ucgeil 
i^r  Mi     I 
<Sie  liegen  i 
fte  licpcii 


Present. 


Imperfect. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I  may  permit 
t(^  ittffe 
bu  IttlfcH 
cr  laffe 
ton  laffcn 
t^rlaJTet  \ 
(Sic  lalTcn ) 
jtc  lafTcn 

I  might  permit 

i^  licpc 
bu  licgefl 
cr  Ucpe 
n)ir  Uc§cn 
i^rlicict    ) 
<Sic  licgctt  ) 
ftc  Ucpcn 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Perfect.  id^  ^abc  9elaffcn»  I  have  permitted 

Pluperfect.  \^  ^attc  0elaffc«f  I  had  permitted 

First  Future.  i^  »crbc  lajfcit;  I  shall  permit 

First  Conditional,  id^  wiirbe  laffcn^  I  should  permit 

Second  Future.  t^  tt>crbc  gelaffen  ^a^en»  I  shall  have  permitted 

Second  Conditional.  \6i  wiirbc  jclafTcil  ^a&en»  I  should  have  permitted 


COMPOUND   VERBS.  227 

Compound  Verbs. 

137«  In  German,  most  simple  verbs  permit  certain  par- 
ticles* to  be  prefixed  to  them,  and  thus  become  compound 
verbs;  e.  g.,  fdjreiben,  to  write  ;  ttb^fdjreikn,  to  copy. 

Note. — Particles  when  separated  from  their  radical  syllable  receive 
the  full  or  principal  accent. 

Separable  Oompound  Verbs. 

138.  Verbs,  whose  particles  have  a  signification  of  their 
own,  and  have  the  primary  or  full  accent,^  are  called  separable 
oompound  verbs  ;  e,  g.,  attd-gei^en,  to  go  oiU, 

1 30.  The  separable  particles  are  the  prepositions,  ah,  axu  aHf»  ani, 
bti,  mil,  nad^,  »or,  ju;  the  adverbs,  ta,  bar,  cmpor,  fort,  f^tm,  l^cr,  ^in,  loi, 
niebcr,  oh,  tocg,  jurudE,  jufammen;  and  bo,  ^in,  ^er  and 'oox,  compounded  with 
prepositions  or  adverbs;  as,  tiahti,  l^inauff  ^erab,  Doron^  etc. 

14:0,  In  principal  sentences,  when  the  compound  verb  is 
in  the  present,  imperfect,  or  imperative,  the  prefixes  or  par- 
ticles are  detached  and  placed  at  the  end  of  the  clause  ;  e.  g., 
Pres.,  ic^  QCl^e  ^tntt  nidjt  and,  I  do  not  go  out  to-day  ;  Imperf., 
g^itt^ett  @ic  geftem  ail§  ?  did  you  go  out  yesterday?  Imper., 
ge^c  mit  mix  au^,  go  out  with  me. 

1 41*  Exception. — ^In  a  dependent  sentence  beginning 
with  a  relative  pronoun  or  a  subordinative  conjunction  (174, 
175),  which  require  the  verbs  to  be  last  in  the  clause  or  sen- 
tence, the  prefix  is  not  separated  from  the  verb ;  e.  g.,  !Cer 
^ann,  tuelc^er  je^t  fottge^t,  the  man  who  is  now  going  away. 

1 42^  The  prefix  gc  of  the  past  participle  has  its  place  in 
compound  verbs  between  the  particle  prefixed  and  the  verb  it- 
self ;   e.  g.,  ah\6^xtiUn,  abgcfdjriebcn.     This  is  the  place  also 

*  Under  the  name  of  Pasttcle  we  comprehend  all  those  indeclinable 
words  (such  as  adverbs  and  prepositions),  which  are  tmited  with  other 
words,  to  modify  or  change  their  signification.  The  simple  words  to 
which  they  are  prefixed  are  generally  verbs  ;  but  often  noims  and  ad- 
jectives are  used  as  prefixes  to  change  simple  verbs  into  compound 
verbs;  e.  g.,  from  ^anb  and  Ifabtn,  §anl)^aben,  to  manage. 


228  COMPOUND  VERBa:  sepaeable. 

for  the  preposition  in,  when  required  in  the  infinitive ;  e.  g., 
U  i(l  Iei(^tcr  atijttfangcn,  it  is  easier  to  commence. 

Conjugation  of  a  Separable  Verb. 

Infinitive. 

Slbf^rcibcn,  to  copy. 

Imperatice. 

©(^reik — ah,  copy  (thou)  fitreiben  ©ic — ttb,  copy  (you) 

Participles. 

Pres.  231b)'^rcibcnt),  copying  Past.  €ih^t]6^xkUn,  copied. 

'^ 
Present.  Imperfect. 

3^  )6:iniU—ah,  I  copy  3c^  fc^rieb— ob,  I  copied 

In  fc^reibjt — ah,  thou  copiest  In  fd^riebft — ah,  thou  copiedst 

er  fd^rcibt — ah,  he  copies  er  fcbricb — ah,  he  copied 

»ir  fc^reiben — ab,  we  copy  tt)ir  fc^rieben — ah,  we  copied 

i^r  fc^reibt — ab,     )  i^r  f^riebct — ab,   )  .  ^ 

@ie  fdjreibcn-ab,  I  ^^^  ^^P^  @ie  f(^rieben-~ab,  I  ^^^  ^^P^^^ 

fic  fci^reiben — ah,  they  copy  pc  f(^rieben — ab,  they  copied 

First  Fut.   3<^  ttJfr^c  abfcibrciben,  I  shall  copy,  &c. 
First  Cond.  3(^  wiirCc  abfcbreiben,  I  should  copy,  &c. 
Perfect.       3c^  l<Jbe  abgefc^riebcn,  I  have  copied,  &c. 
Pluperfect.  3^  ^atte  abgefc^rieben,  I  had  copied,  &c. 
Sec.  Fut.     3c^  ttjerbe  abgefc^rieben  ^abcn,  I  shall  have  copied,  &c 
Sec.  Cond.   3cb  »urbc  obgcfc^rteben  ^abcn,  I  should  have  copied, 

&c. 
143.     The  following  verbs,  formerly  written    as  two  separate 
words,  are  now  treated  as  separable  compound  verbs  : 


Infinitive. 

Pres. 

Past  Part, 

gfe^Ifc^Iagcn,  to  miscarry 

ic^  f<^Ia9C-fe|I 

fc^Igefj^lagnt 

'rcifUTe(^c«,  to  acquit 

ic^  fprct^c— frci 

frcigefpro(^en 

^Icilftfommcn,  to  equal 

tc^  fommc — gleic^ 

glcic^gcfrmmeit 

ifb^abcn,  to  love 

i6)  ^abc — Itcb 

licbgc^abt 

^iflfd^wctgcn,  to  be  silent 

ic^  rd)»ci9C — flill 

giUgefi^wiegen 

#tttlftiibett  (impers.),  to  take  place 

c«  finbet— fktt 

fiattgcfunbm 

COMPOUND  YEBBS  :   INSEPABABLE.  2l29 

Compound  Inseparable  Verbs, 

1 44.  Compound  inseparable  verbs,  or,  as  the  name  im- 
plies, those  compound  verbs  from  which  the  prefix  can  never 
be  detached,  are  formed  with  prepositions  or  adverbs  having 
only  the  secondary  accent,  or  with  unaccented  syllables,  which 
have  no  meaning  of  their  cum, 

14LS,     The  prefixes*  of  the  inseparable  verbs  are  the  unaccented 

syllables  be,  cmp,  ent,  er,  ge,  mi§,  »cr,  jcr,  the  prepositions  toibcr  and  ^imcr,t 
and  the  adverb  »olI. 

1 40.  The  inseparable  verbs  do  not  admit  of  the  augment  ge  in  the 
past  participle ;  e.  g.,  |erjl6rt,  and  not  gcjerj!6rt.  The  place  of  ju,  when 
required  before  a  verb  in  the  infinitive  is  before  the  compound  form  of 
the  inseparable  verb ;  e.  g.^  3(^  fam  ^icr^cr  3^re  5Int»ort  jit  empfangcn  (not 
cmpjufangcn),  1  <iame  hither  to  receive  your  answer. 

1 47.  Exception. — ^But  if  the  prefix  is  a  compound,  of  which 
the  first  is  a  separable  and  the  second  an  inseparable  particle,  ju  is  in- 
serted between  the  two ;  e.  g.,  er  foil  ftc^  untcrflc^cn  j!c  an^ju'crfennen,  let  him 
dare  to  recognize  thein. 

Note. — The  prefix  mi§  in  a  few  instances  admits  the  augment  ge  in 
the  past  participle,  «.  g.,  (from  mtpbeutcn,  to  mwinterpret),  gcntipbcutct. 

148.  The  following  verbs  are  also  ins&parable,  but,  contrary  to 
rule  (No.  144),  prefix  ge  in  the  past  participle  to  the  inseparable  particle, 
and  have  the  prima/ry  accent  on  the  latter ;  e.  g.,  from  ax%XD'i\)ntn,  past 
part,  geargwo^nt. 

ttntwortcn,  to  answer  (ie(!ofen,  to  caress 

orgwo^ncn,  to  suspect  Ittfttoanbcln,  to  take  a  pleasure- walk 

6rttnDf<i>a^en,  to  sack  mnt^ma^va,  to  conjecture,  guess 

fro§lo(!en4  to  exult  tiarfttwanbcln,  to  walk  in  the  sleep 

frii^llucfen,  to  breakfast  ttotl^juc^tigcn,  to  ravish,  violate 

tianH^aben,  to  handle,  maintain  quadfalbern,  to  use   or  give  quack 
l^eirat^cn,  to  marry  medicines, 

longtoeilen,  to  annoy  tat^fdylagcn,  to  deliberate 

liebaugcln,  to  caress  rer^tfcrtigen,  to  justify 

*  On  the  influence  which  these  prefixes  have  on  the  meaning  of  verbs 
see  Johnson  and  Worman's  Eberhard  Synonym.  Diet. :  Introduction. 

f  The  prefixes  l^intcr,  nti§,  bofl  and  tDltitt,  when  serving  to  compound 
a  noun  or  adjective,  have  the  primary  accent. 

X  SfTO^lodcn  and  willfa^reit  mostly  omit  gc  in  the  past  participle. 


230  COMPOUND  VERBS  :   INSEPAEABLE. 

urt^eilen,  to  judge,  criticise  tlicttcifcrn,  to  emulate 

tlictffagctt,  to  prophesy  toiUfa^rcn,*  to  gratify 

and  four  verbs  with  mi^r  viz. ; 

itttpiffiscn,  to  disapprove  ini|beuten,  to  mmnterpret 

wiPrau(^cn,  to  misuse,  abuse  mipanbcln,  to  misuse,  abuse 

140.  Verbs  having  inseparable  particles  compounded  with  sepa- 
rable particles  are  treated  as  inseparable,  and  have  the  accent  on  the 
second  syllable  of  the  particle.f 

Separable  and  Inseparable  Compound  Verbs. 

150.  Verbs  compounded  with  ^nv^,  ^hct,  nm,  nnttt, 
and  toieber  are  separable^  when  the  prefix  and  the  radical 
retain  each  their  own  pecuhar  and  natural  sense,  and  have 
the  accent  on  the  prefix  ;  but  when  they  assume  a  figurative 
or  metaphorical  sense,  they  are  inseparable,  and  have  the  ac- 
cent on  the  radical  syllable.  In  the  former  case,  they  are 
generally  intransitive^  in  the  latter,  transitive. 

EXAMPLES. 
Sepa/rabk.  Inseparable.^ 

bur^ringcn,  to  press  or  force  through  tux^litin^tn,  to  penetrate 
u6erfe^en»  to  set  over  (cross)  uierfc^Cllf  to  translate 

umQC^en,  to  associate  umgel^en/  to  go  around,  evade 

untcrjle^cn,  to  go  under  shelter  jld^  untcrflc'^cn,  to  darg 

tOteiier^oUn/  to  fetch  or  bring  back     t»teber|olcn,  to  repeat 

Neuter  and  Intransitive  Verbs. 

1 5 1  ♦  The  conjugation  of  neuter  and  intransitive  verbs 
•liffers  from  that  of  active  verbs  only  in  the  compound  tenses. 

1.  Such  as  express  a  mere  activity ,  a  continuous  state,  with- 
out a  change  or  transition  of  their  subject  from  one  state  into 
another ;  e.  g.,  lebeti,  to  live  ;  ff^en,  to  sit,  form  their  compound 
tenses  with  J^nhtVt. 

*  See  note  §  on  preceding  page. 

f  Except  '&c\>orfle^en,  which  is  separable ;  ic^  fle^c  te»or. 


NEUTEB  AND   mTRANSITIVE   VERBS.  231 

2.  Those  that  express  a  change  or  transition  of  their  subject 
from  (me  state  into  another,  a  motion  from  one  place  to  another, 
e,  g.,  fallen,  to  fall ;  ge^cn,  to  go,  form  their  compound  tenses 
with  fcitt^  when  the  place  or  the  manner  of  the  motion  is 
referred  to. 

15S*  Exception. — ^They  are  conjugated,  however,  with 
l^abett^  when  a  simple  action  is  designated,  or  the  verb  is 
taken  in  a  figurative  sense  ;  e.  g.,  2^  bin  in  fcie  <Stabt  geritten, 
I  rode  {literally:  I  have  ridden)  into  the  city  ;  but,  id^  ^aht 
tai  ^fe«  geritten,  I  rode  {literally :  I  have  ridden)  the  horse. 

A  Neuter  Verb  conjugated  with  ^cin^ 
^ommtn,  to  come. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present.  5^  hmmt,  I  come,  &c. 

Impeifect.       3<^  ^cim,  I  came 
First  Future,  3(^  wertc  fommen,  I  shall  come 
First  Gond,     3^  toixx'tt  fommen,  I  should  come 
Perfect.  3c^  I^itt  gefommen,  I  ham  come 

ttt  Hjl  gefommen,  thou  hast  come 

er  ijl  gefommen,  he  has  come 

tDir  jtnti  gefommen,  we  have  come 

i^r  feib  (<3ic  jtnt)  gcfommen,  you  have  come 

fte  finl)  gefommen,  they  have  come 
Pluperfed..      3c^  toar  getommen,  I  hxjd  come 

bu  n?arft  gefommen,  thou  hadst  come 

er  njar  gefommen,  he  had  come 

t»ir  ttjaren  gefommen,  we  had  come 

i^r  maret  (@ie  waren)  gefommen,  you  had  come 

fte  waren  gefommen,  they  had  come 
Second  Fut,    3^  ttjerbe  gefommen  fcin^  I  shall  have  come 
Second  Gond.  3^  ttJiirte  gefommen  fcin,  I  should  have  come 

Note. — Neuter  and  intransitive  verbs  have,  in  German,  no  passive 
voice ;  but  some  of  them  occur  impersonally. 

1 03.     A  number  of  transitive  verbs,  with  a  causative  signification, 
are  derived  from  intransitive  verbs  by  a  change  or  modification  of  the 


232 


NEUTER  AND  INTRANSITIVE  VERBS. 


radical  vowel ;  e.  g.,  fi^cn,  to  sU  ;  fe^cn»  to  set.  When  intransitive  these 
verbs  are  irregular  and  form  their  compound  tenses  with  fcill*  but  when 
transitive  they  are  regular  and  form  their  compound  tenses  with  |alben. 


Inirarmli'oe. 

etttfci^Iofctt,  to  fall  asleep  : 

ertrinfen,  to  be  drowned : 

fo^rcn,  to  drive: 

follctt,  to  fall : 

Piemen,  to  flow: 

^angen^  to  hang : 

lauten>  to  sound : 

liegcn,  to  Me : 

faugen^  to  suck : 

f^»immcn»  to  swim : 

fmfen,  to  sink : 

fi^cn,  to  sit : 

fpringcn,  to  leap,  to  jump,  to  btUfSt, 

to  crack : 
trinfcn,  to  drink : 
scrfd^rotnben,  to  vanish : 
toicQCttf  to  weigh,  to  be  of  weight : 

Also: 
fle^cn  to  stand : 
fleigctt,  to  mount : 

Note. — The  intransitive  verbs, 
form  their  compound  tenses  with 


Transitive  and  regvlar 

cinf^liifern,  to  put  or  lull  asleep 

crtriinfem  to  drown 

fii^rcn,  to  guide 

foKen,  to  fell 

flogcn,  to  float 

^angen>  to  hang  up 

Ijittten,  to  ring  the  bell 

ItQtUt  to  lay,  to  put 

fdugmr  to  suckle 

f(j^n>emmenr  to  bathe  horses 

fcnfen,  to  (make)  sink 

fe^cn,  to  set,  to  place 

fprengoif  to  break  open,  to  blow  up, 

to  gallop 
tronfcn,  to  water 
»crfd^»ent)cn,  to  waste 
toa^tn,  to  weigh,  to  ascertain  weight 

fleflen»  to  put  upright 
ficigcrttf  to  raise,  to  enhance 

lautettr  faugeiir  jle^en#  txinUn,  and  tvtegeiir 


Eeflexive  Verbs. 


1 54.  Nearly  every  transitive  verb  may  be  changed  into 
a  reflexive  verb,  but  there  are  also  a  great  many  verbs  used 
only  as  reflexives,  which  in  English  are  expressed  by  the 
active  or  passive  voice  of  simple  verbs.  These  verbs  govern 
the  reflexive  pronoun  in  the  accusative ;  e.  g.,  3^)  gewb^nc 
mic^,  I  accustom  myself.  Keflexive  verbs  form  their  com- 
pound tenses  v?ith  l^abett. 

1 55.  Exception  1. — The  following  verbs  require  the  reflex- 
ive pronoun  to  be  in  the  dative  : 


EEFLEXIVE  VERBS.  233 

flc^  anmafctt,  to  usurp  (!(^  f6mei(i^eln,  to  llatter  one's 

jtc^  au^Mtten,  to  request  self 

fic^  einHlten,  to  imagine,  fancy  (td^  »ornc^mcn,  to  take  the  reso- 
fic^  bic  ^^rei^cit  ne^meit;  to  take      lution,  make  up  one's  mind 

the  Hberty  jtc^  iJorjicUen,  to  imagine 

fi(^  getraucn,  to  dare  jtc^   ttje^e   t^un,  to  hurt    one's 

fic^  ijcrfd^affen,  to  procure  self 

156.  Exception  2. — ^Whenever  neuter  verbs,  generally 
conjugated  with  fcttt^  in  compound  tenses,  are  used  re- 
flexively  with  an  adjective,  they  form  their  compound  tenses 
with  l^abcn  instead  ;  e.  g.y  fl4>  la^m  reitcn,  to  ride  one's  self 
lame,  i  e.,  to  make  one*s  self  lame  by  riding ;  e.  g.,  fi^  miitc 
laufen,  to  run  one's  self  tired,  to  make  one's  self  tired  by 
running  (also  used  for  incessant  walking).  The  German 
language  abounds  in  such  elliptical  expressions,  in  which 
mac^ett  is  understood  to  refer  to  the  adjective  employed ; 
thus  :  3d)  ^^^^  ^^^  J^^«^  gcritten,  is  equivalent  to,  i(^  ^ah  mi^ 
turd?  rciten  la^m  ^etttat^t,  or  the  adjective  may  be  converted 
into  a  noun  preceded  by  gtt  ;  thus,  instead  of  ftc^  tott  arkiten : 
fic^  gtt  'Zoht  arkitcn. 

157.  The  following  phrases  illustrate  the  use  of  Ger- 
man reflexive  verbs  : 

33emii^en  @ic  ft<^^  take  the  pains. 
®e6cn  <Sic  fi^  iiidjt  t>te  Wixi)i,  do  not  take  the  trouble, 
©ic  |at  fl^  fc^r  verantert,  she  is  quite  altered. 
!Da^  S3etter  dnrerte  fi^,  the  weather  changed. 
!Der  SBinb  »irC  fic^  Icgen,  the  wind  will  cease. 
3c^  ttjerbe  mid^  nad?  ^^arid  kgeben,  I  shall  go  to  Paris. 
S3crufcn  ©ie  fi4>  auf  mid),  appeal  to  me. 
3d)  ent^altc  litt4>  U^  Seincg,  I  abstaiii  from  wine. 
2Dir  fii^Ien  iinS  gliirfUd),  we  feel  happy. 
t)k  Z^xt  bjfnet  fit^,  the  door  opened. 
^t^mm  (Sie  ft^  in  2ld)t,  take  care. 

I)ie  ©ac^c  »cr^alt  flcS^  fo,  that  is  the  way  the  matter  stands. 
@ic  jcrfheutctt  ftc^^  they  dispersed. 

JBente  bi^  an  ten  ^bnig,  apply  (address  thyself)  to  the  king. 
(Sic  rdd)en  fi<^  an  i^ren  geinten,  they  revenge  themselves  on  their 
enemies. 


234  BEFLEXITE  V£BBS. 

Conjugation  of  a  Eeflexive  Verbi 

(Sit^  frcucn,  to  rejoice. 
Infinitive.  Participle. 

Pres.  ft<^  freuen,  to  rejoice  ^6^  freuenti,  rejoicing 

Perf.  fic^  gefreut  ^abm,  to  have    ftd)  gefreut  ^abent),  having  re- 
rejoiced  joiced 
Imperative. 

Sing,    freue    hi^,    rejoice      Plur.  freuet  cud^,  or  frcucn  (Bit 
(thou)  f[<3^^  rejoice  (ye) 

Present.  Imperfect. 

ic^  freue  ttti<^,  I  rejoice  i6:)  freute  mtdti,  I  rejoiced 

bu  freufl  ^t<^  bu  frewtefl  blc^ 

er  freut  fi<^  er  freute  fl<^ 

tt)ir  freuen  tttt$  tt>ir  freuten  uitd 

{:^r  freut  tu^  i^x  freutet  tu^ 

<Bit  freuen  ft<^  ©ic  freuten  fitfy 

fie  freuen  ft^  jle  freuten  ficJ^ 

Per/:  ic^  ^abe  nti<|>  gefreut,  I  have  rejoiced,  etc. 
Pluperf.  i^  l^atte  ttti^  gefreut,  I  had  rejoiced,  etc. 
First  Fut.  ic%  mxU  ittic^  freuen,  I  shall  rejoice,  etc. 
Sec.  Fut.  i^  werte  mid^  gefreut  ^Ben,  I  shall  have  rejoiced,  etc. 
First  Gond.  i^  tDiir^e  ttti<^  freuen,  I  should  rejoice,  etc. 
Sec.  Cond.  ic^  wiirbe  ntic^  gefreut  :^aben,  I   should   have  re- 
joiced, etc. 

Impersonal  Verbs. 

ltS8,  The  subject  of  impersonal  verbs  is,  as  in  English, 
the  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person^  singular  number^ 
neuter  gender,  as  ;  e§  regnet,  it  rains  ;    e§  fc^neit,  it  snows,  etc. 

Note. — The  auxiliary  verb  tDcrben  like  the  English  verb  to  grow,  helps 
to  denote  an  incipient  state.  Thus  in  speaking  of  the  -weather ;  it  grows 
cold,  ti  tuirl)  !alt;  it  grows  late,  c^  tlitrb  ft»at.  This  indication  of  an  in- 
cipient state  is  also  extended  to  such  expressions  as  eS  ifl  mir  ubcl,  I  feel 
sick,  and  to  denote  tJie  incipient  state  of  those  situations  we  say,  S3  tuirll 
mir  uBcIr  or  mir  ttlirb  iitel,  I  am  growing  (getting)  ill.  By  the  same  anal- 
ogy, Sind  fctnr  means  to  be  agreed,  to  le  unanimous  ;  ®in3  tDerl)en#  to 
agree,  to  become  unanimous. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 


235 


Present 
Imperfect, 
1st  Future. 
1st  Conditional. 
Perfect. 
Pluperfect, 
2nd  Future. 
2nd  Conditional 


Conjugation  of  an  Impersonal  Verb. 

di  regnet,  it  rains 
S^  fdbneite,  it  snowed 
@^  ttjirt)  frieren,  it  will  freeze 
S^  tuiirte  fconnern,  it  would  thunder 
©^  ^at  geHi^t,  it  has  lightened 
@5  ^attt  ge^gclt,  it  had  hailed 
S^  njirD  getagt  }}abcn,  it  will  have  dawned 
S^  n)irt)  Qtt^ant  l^ahcn,  it  would  have  thawed 
1«I9.     ITiere  is,  there  are,  there  vxis,  there  were,  etc.,  are 
rendered  in  the  following  manner  : 

1.  ViThen  expressing  a  definite  existence,  or  when  a  circum- 
scribed distinct  place  or  space  is  added,  by  C0  and  the  verb 
fein*  Like  the  English  to  he,  fettl  serves  merely  as  a  copula, 
while  the  noun  following  it  becomes  a  predicate,  and  is  in 
the  same  case  as  the  subject ;  i.  e.,  in  the  nominative;  e,  ff,,  Sd 
tft  cin  Wlann  braugcn,  there  is  a  man  outside. 

Exception. — In  the  interrogative  form,  e§  is  omitted  ;  e.  g,, 
Is  there  a  bird  in  this  cage  ?  ifi  etn  SSogel  in  ticfem  ^aftg  ? 

2.  When  expressing  an  indefinite  existence,  no  distinct  place 
being  mentioned,  use  e^  and  the  verb  ^ebett  with  the  noun 
following,  as  the  object  of  the  sentence,  in  the  accusative ; 
e.  g.,  S^  qicht  (or  gibt)  rotten  unt  weigen  SJBeln,  there  is  red  and 
white  wine. 

160.    The  following  impersonal  verbs  are  also  reflexive  : 

Witli  the  Dative. 
S3  a^nt  mir,  I  forbode 
cS  bcgegnet  mir,  it  happens  to  me 
ti  bduc^t  mir,  methinks 
ed  efelt  mir,  I  nauseate 
c3  fallt  mir  cin,  it  occurs  to  me 
c§  Qcfafft  mir,  I  am  pleased 
e3  gelingt  mir,  I  succeed 
c3  ij^  mir  leib,      /  ^  »     .^ 

catgut  mir  leib,   [  I  am  sorry  for  it 
ii  t|l  mir  aarm,  I  am  warm 
c3  ijl  mir  too^l,  I  feel  well 
ii  fommt  mir  »or,  it  seems  to  me 
c5  Ucgt  mir  »iel  baran,  it  is  important 
tome 


With  the  Accttsative. 
di  bctud^t  mi^,  it  seems  to  me 
cd  bunft  mici^,  it  appears  to  me 
ed  burjlet  mid^,  I  am  thirsty. 
c3  frcut  mi(^,  I  am  glad  (rejoice) 
c3  fricrt  mic^,  I  am  cold 
ti  ^ungert  mid^r  I  am  hungry 
eS  jammer t  mid^,  I  pity 
c«  rcut  mic^,  I  repent 
ti  fd^aubcrt  mi(^,  I  shudder 
c3  fc^ldfcrt  mid^,  I  am  sleepy 
ed  fc^merj^t  mtd^,  I  grieve 
cd  »crbrtc§t  mic^,  I  am  vexed 
t€  »erlangt  mic^,  I  desire 


236  THE  ADVERBS. 

WUh  the  Acettsative,  With  the  Dative. 

c«  njuttbcrt  ntic!^,  I  wonder  e«  fc^winbclt  mir,  I  am  giddy 

cd  fragt  ft(^i  it  is  a  question  ea  wirb  mir  itbcl,  I  feel  sick 

c«  f(^icft  fli,  it  is  proper  xoa^  fc^lt  3^ncn  ?  what  is  the  matter 

ti  »erflel^t  f!c^,  (it  is  a  matter)  of  course  with  you  ? 

Note. — Sd  may  be  omitted  and  the  reflexive  pronoun  precede  the  verb ; 
thus,  miii  bun!t,  mir  efclt#  etc. 

161.  A  rather  poetical  construction  is  to  place  tlie  sub- 
ject rfter  the  verb,  and  give  to  the  latter  the  impersonal  form, 
beginning  the  sentence  with  c$ ;  e.  g.,  S^  ging  tin  Sdger  tur^ 
ten  SBalt),  there  went  a  hunter  through  the  woods. 

163.  The  impersonal  passive  form  is  used  to  avoid 
defining  or  pointing  out  the  subject ;  e.  gr.,  @d  t»trt»  in  I^cutfc^:^ 
lant  »icl  33ier  gctntnlen,  (or  man  trinft  ttiel  33ier  in  I)eutfc^Ianb),  there 
is  much  beer  drank  (i.  e.  people  drink  much  beer)  in  Germany. 

Adverbs. 

163.  In  German,  as  in  EngUsh,  adverbs  modify  the  sig- 
nification of  verbs,  adjectives,  or  other  adverbs,  and  denote 
manner^  place,  time,  qvality,  quantity,  comparison,  etc.  They 
are  indeclinable,  and  formed,  either  by  derivation  or  compo- 
sition, from  almost  every  other  part  of  speech. 

Comparison  of  Adverbs. 

164.  The  adverbs  of  manner,  quality,  and  time  only, 
are  susceptible  of  comparison.  The  positive  and  comparative 
of  adverbs  are  the  same  as  those  of  adjectives,*  but,  in  the 
superlative,  instead  of  the  simple  article  the  preposition  an  is 
contracted  with  the  definite  article  into  am  (an  tern);  e.  g,, 
am  fdjbnften. 

16«S.  If  the  comparative  is  to  express  excellence  or  eminence,  it 
may  be  done  1.  by  using  the  simple  or  absolute  form  of  the  superlative 
(see  No.  26) ;  e.  g.,  cr  bittet  ^offid^ft,  he  asks  very  politely  ;  2.  by  adding 
to  the  simple  form  the  ending  enS  ;  e.  g.,  er  la§t  fic  teflcttfi  ^ru^tn,  he  sends 
you  his  most  sincere  regards  ;  3.  by  exchanging  the  preposition  an  for 
ouf  (which  contracted  with  the  article  gives  onfg  =  ciuf  bad),  or  for  jtl 
(contracted  jum  =  J«  bent) ;  e.  g.,  cr  gru^t  <Sie  aufd  ^crjlic^fle,  he  sends  you 
his  regards  in  the  most  friendly  manner. 

*  See  No.  2«. 


THE  ADVEEBS. 


237 


166.     Irregular  Comparison  of  Adverbs. 


Positite, 
tnoi^Ir  well 
(altir  soon 

%ttn,*  willingly, 
oftf  often 

|e^r»  very 
ubeU  evil 
tlte(>  much 

tocnig;  little 


Comparative. 
beffcr,  better 


j  frii^cr, 


Ucber,  better 
ofter,  oftener 


firgcr,  worse 
mc^r,  more 
minbcr,  ) 


less 


wentgcr, 


Superlative. 

cm  beflcn»  or  aufd  kfler 
{ am  t^c\ttn,  the  soonest 
( klbigjl,  very  soon 

cm  liebflcn,  best 

cm  ^auftgjlen,  the  oftener, 
(most  often) 

f)o6)\t,  au§cr|l,  extremely 

am  argjlen,  the  worst 

am  meijlen,  most 

( am  minbcflemUhe  least 
i  am  wcnigjlen, ) 


16T«  A  number  of  adverbs  of  time  and  place  are  converted  into 
ADJECTIVES  denoting  the  particular  circumstances  of  time  and  place,  by 
affixing  the  syllable  t0>  and,  like  other  adjectives,  are  declined,  but  do 
not  admit  of  comparison ;  e.  y. : 

balbtgf  prompt  bamalig,  of  that  time 

^eutig,  of  to-day  ie^ig,  present 

^ieflg,  of  the  place  cinfhDeiUg,  ad  interim 

geflrigr  of  yesterday  morgenb,  of  to-morrow 

168.  The  adverbs  |>et  and  ^itl,  and  the  numerous  par- 
ticles compounded  with  them  (e.  g.,  herein,  l^inein,  etc.),  must 
be  carefully  distinguished,  ^et  and  its  compounds  denote 
motion  towards  the  speaker,  while  ^in  and  its  compounds 
denote  motion  avxiy  from  the  speaker ;  e.  g.,  ^ommen  <£ie  fo? 
fort  gu  mir  ^crauf,  come  at  once  to  me  up-stairs.  ©e^en  @ic  ju 
i^m  l^tiiauf,  go  up-stairs  to  him. 

1 60.  Adjectives  and  adverbs  are  negated  by  prefixing  the  nega- 
tive particle  un»  answering  to  the  English  un,  dis,  &c, ;  e.  g.,  gem,  wil- 
lingly— ungern,  t^nwillingly ;  glutfUc^,  happy — Uttgludlic^,  wnhappy. 

170.  Adverbs  of  time  precede  other  adverbs  or  adverb- 
ial expressions,  and  take  their  place  after  the  subject  and 
the  verb,  but  when  an  adverb  or  adverbial  expression  begins 
the  sentence,  the  verb  precedes  the  subject  (see  No.  199,4). 

*  ®crn,  Itcbcr,  am  liebjlcn,  correspond  to  I  like,  I  like  better,  I  like  best, 
in  English,  and  are  mostly  used  in  connection  Avith  a  verb,  as :  3^  lauft 
gentf  I  like  to  run  ;  id^  fal^re  Wtltx,  I  like  better  to  ride,  &c. 


238  CONJUNCTIONS* 

Oonjunctions. 

1 7 1  ♦  In  German,  conjunctions  exert  a  great  influence  on 
the  position  of  the  verb.  We  divide  them  into  the  following 
three  classes  :  1.  the  co-okdinative,  2.  the  adverbial,  and  3. 

THE  SUBOBDINATIVE  CONJUNCTIONS, 

173,  The  €o-ordinatiye  Coiynnctions  (hston  p.  149) 
serve  merely  as  links  to  sentences,  and  exert  no  influence  on 
the  position  of  the  verb  ;  e.  g.,  3<^  ^cik  i^n  gel^brt,  abet  id)  |atc 
i^n  nid^t  gefe^en,  I  have  heard  him,  hut  I  have  not  seen  him. 

1 73,  The  Adverbial  Coiyunctions  (list  on  p.  149),  when 
beginning  a  sentence  or  clause,  require  the  suiy'ect  to  be  placed 
after  the  verb  or  predicate  ;  e.  g.,  ^toat  ^attt  tt  SRec^t,  aUx  (aHein) 
tnlc^  ju  fc^tagen,  ^a^  war  Unrec^t,  it  is  true  that  he  was  right,  but 
to  beat  me  was  wrong.  3^i^  ^^leffe  ^at  mi(^  iti^t  bcja^U,  f ol^Uc^ 
twerfcc  4<^  i^n  ttcrllagen,  your  nephew  has  not  paid  me,  co/ise- 
quently  I  shall  sue  him. 

1 74,  The  Subordinatire  Coiganctions  (list  on  p.  150) 
[both  simple  and  compound],  if  they  begin  the  sentence,  re- 
quire the  verb  governed  by  them  to  be  placed  at  the  end  of  the 
first  clause,  and  the  second  clause  to  begin  with  the  verb  followed 
by  the  sulyect ;  e.  g.,  Slid  iA  i^n  guerjl  f  attttte^  toot  er  no(^  ein 
^nak,  when  I  first  knew  him,  he  was  still  a  boy. 

Eelative  Oonjunctions. 

1 75,  All  adverbs  of  interrogation,  in  indirect  questions,* 
become  relative  conjunctions,  and  require  the  verb  to  be  placed  at 
the  end  of  the  clause.     Such  are  : 

SBann,  when  tt)e§^alb,   )     ,       .       tt)ie,  how  toielange,  how  long 

warum,  why  wc^wcgen/ )       ®^®  ^^  »iei>iel,  how  much  »o,  where 
and  all  the  compounds  of  WO  as  tOO^er,  tUO^ttt,  &c. 

Ex.  (Sagen  ©ie  mir,  too  ic^  i^n  tteffcti  tann,  tell  me,  where  I 

can  find  him? 
S^ai  man  tir  ni6)i  fagen  woKcn,  V^atrxm  er  nid)t  gcfommen  tft? 

would  they  not  tell  you,  why  he  did  not  come  ? 

*  Direct  questions,  placed  in  dependence  on  a  preceding  verb,  become 
hidirect,  and  require  the  verb  to  be  at  the  end  of  the  clause  ;  e.  g.,  SEBei^t 
tttr  loer  tied  gefagt  ^at  ?  Indirect  question :  2Bex  ^ai  tied  gefagt  ? 


THE  CONJUNCTIONS.  239 

1 76.    ^Ut,  aUtin,  \6nhtm,  but. 

1.  5lber,    i  do  not  always  place  the  sentences  in  apposition  to  each 

2.  ^Klleitt^  f  other  ;  i.  e.,  they  are  disjunctive,  but  aUx  may  also  be  cop- 
ulative. %htv  and  ttUeitt  are  used  indifferently,  if  the  antecedent  does 
not  contain  a  negation;  e.  g.,  ^i)  wod^tc  biefc^  ^au^  faufcn,  ahtt  (or  atteilt) 
ic^  ^abc  !ein  ®elb,  1  would  like  to  buy  this  house,  but  I  have  no  money ; 
but  when  the  second  clause  has  its  own  subject  and  verb  use  ttbcr,  even 
after  a  negation  ;  e.  g ,  dx  i^  noc^  itilftt  cingctrofen,  abet  cr  toirb  ge»i^  fom" 
men,  he  has  not  yet  arrived,  but  he  will  surely  come. 

3.  Sontiern  is  diqunctive,  and  is  used  only  when  a  decided  contra- 
diction of  a  statement  denied  in  the  antecedent  clause  is  to  be  made ; 
e.  g.,  9li(ftt  a«3  Ciebc,  fonbern  au«  |)a§  gcgen  feinen  ©cgner  ^at  cr  bic«  get^am 
not  out  of  love  for  the  cause,  but  out  of  hatred  to  his  opponent,  has  he 
done  it. 

1 T  7.  WIS  (when,  as,  then,  but).  1.  At  the  beginning  of  a  clause  or 
sentence  signifies  wTien,  if  followed  by  the  verb  in  the  Imperfect  or  Plu- 
perfect tense ;  e.  g..  When  I  told  it  to  him,  aid  i<^  eg  i^m  fagtc;  when  he 
had  finished  his  exercise,  alS  cr  feine  Sifufgabe  bcenbct  l^atte. 

2.  It  answers  to  than  or  cw,  after  an  adjective  in  the  comparative,  or 
after  fo  or  ebenfo  followed  by  an  adjective  ;  e.  g.,  John  is  taller  than  my 
brother,  So^ann  ifl  grofcr  al0  wein  S3ruber ;  he  knows  it  just  as  well  as  you, 
cr  fann  c«  ebcttfo  gut  aid  bu. 

3.  It  answers  to  but  after  an  adverb  of  negation ;  e.  g.,  She  shall  say 
nothing  but  the  truth,  fe  foU  nti^td  old  bie  SBa^r^eit  fagen. 

4.  It  may  denote  quality  or  condition ;  e.  g.,  He  acted  aa  a  man,  cr 
l^anbcltc  aid  3)?arat. 

Note. — Sometimes  the  present  participle  is  used  in  English  instead 
of  the  conjunction  as,  followed  by  a  past  tense  ;  e.  g.,  Standing  {i.  e., 
as  I  stood)  by  the  window,  aid  i^  am  Scnfler  flanb;  but,  if  a  simultaneous 
action  is  spoken  of,  the  participle  present  is  rendered  by  inbem  ;  e.  g.. 
Stretching  out  his  arm,  he  cried,  int^ttn  cr  feinen  5lrm  au^jlrcrftc,  ferric  er. 

178*  ^a  (as,  since)  denotes  a  reason  or  cau^e  ;  e.  g.,  ^o  i^  3ett 
^abe,  [o  toerbe  x^  ge^eUf  as  I  have  time,  {therefore)  I  shall  go. 

1 79.  Obglctlft,  obftftOttf  obtoOl^I  (though,  although),  are  all  synon- 
ymous, but  obgleifll  is  most  frequently  employed.  They  are  generally 
divided  when  one,  two  or  even  more  monosyllables  follow ;  e.  g.,  ob  i^ 
tttid^  glei^  freuc,  or  obglcit^  \^  ntic^  frcue,  although  I  am  glad.  When  they 
begin  a  sentence,  the  following  member  corresponds  to  them  by  means 
of  the  conjunctions  bO(^,  llCttnoil&,  or  similar  particles ;  as,  bemuitgeai^tet, 
notwithstanding  that ;  ntl!^tdbe^0tlicnt5er^  nevertheless  ;  e.  g.,  O6fd)on  er 
no^  iung  ifl,  ^at  er  tio^  f^on  graue^  ^aar,  although  he  is  still  young,  yet 
he  has  already  gray  hair ;  o^  cr  glcic^  alt  iflf  fo  $at  er  itii||td)ie^Otoeniger 


240  THB  CONJUNCTIONS. 

ben  volligcn  ®ebrau(3^  fciner  ©etflc^frfii'tc,  although  he  is  old,  he  has  still  the 
perfect  use  of  his  mental  faculties. 

1 80»  1.  So  (so,  thus,  as)  often  serves  to  connect  the  subordinate 
clause  with  the  antecedent,  when  the  sentence  begins  with  ba>  the  con- 
junctions nac^bcm,  o^Uid),  obfc^on,  obwo^I,  mil  mm  or  \m  ;  but  they 
need  not  be  translated  into  English  and  may  be  omitted  even  in  Ger- 
man ;  e.  g.y  %tk  er  bid  je^t  ni^t  gefommen  \^,  fo  n^erbe  ic^  m(|t  langer  tt>arten/  as 
he  has  not  yet  come,  I  will  wait  no  longer. 

Note.— We  might  just  as  properly  say :  2^  toerbc  nx^i  langcr  »arten, 
ba  er  bid  je^t  vMijX  gefommen  \%  &c. 

2.  @o  before  an  adjective,  followed  by  the  conjunction  m^,  answers 
to  however  ;  e.  g.,  iSo  gro^  au(^  bic  <Sd^rccf en  bed  ^rieged  fein  miigen,  however 
great  the  terrors  of  war  may  be.  Sometimes  al§  is  inserted  before  aU(^  ; 
e.  g„  So  ongene^m  al0  cd  aU(^  fei«  ntag  (fo)  fann  t^  ed  bo(^  m(^t  billigen,  how- 
ever pleasant  it  may  have  been,  I  can  nevertheless  not  suffer  it ;  or  an 
inversion  of  the  sentence  may  take  place  and  au^  be  entirely  dropped ; 
e.  g.,  Slngcne^m  aid  cd  war,  fo  fonntc  i^  ed  boc^  nic^t  bittigen. 

181*    To  when  correspond  in  German 

1.  SBantt  the  interrogative  adverb  of  time  ;^  e.  g.,  SBaittt  Wcrbe  i^ 
bi(i^  ju  ^aufc  ftnben  V  when  will  I  find  you  at  home  ? 

2.  SBenit,  the  conjunction  of  time  referring  to  events  supposed  to 
occur  ;^  e.  g.,  SBettn  bcr  Center  tommit  lag  m\6)  rufcn,  when  the  teacher 
comes,  call  me. 

Note. — SBenn  is  used  also  as  a  conjunction  of  condition  answering 
to  the  English  if;  e.  g.,  SBenn  bu  franf  bijl,  fti^rcibc  mir,  if  you  are  sick, 
write  me.  When  a  verb  in  the  imperfect  is  used  with  tnenit,  the  rest 
must  be  in  the  subjunctive  mood  ;  e.  g.,  He  would  be  glad,  »/she  came, 
cd  ware  i^m  Ikh,  toenn  ftc  fame. 

3.  9110»  the  conjunction  of  time  past ;  e.  g.,  %U  i^  franf  taatt  lam  cr  tag' 
lid^  ju  mir,  when  I  was  ill,  he  came  daily  to  see  me. 

182.  But  or  but  that,  1.  after  a  negative  clause  in  which  otJier- 
wise,  or  anything  else,  is  understood,  with  the  adverb  anberd,  render  aU 
baft ;  e.  g.,  3c^  »cip  nit^t  anberd,  aU  boft  cr  feinc  (Sd)ulben  c^rlic^  bejal^It,  I 
don't  know  but  (that)  he  always  pays  his  debts. 

Note.— 9113  iiaft  is  also  employed  when  ju  is  used  in  the  sense  of 
TOO,  to  indicate  that  a  certain  action  spoken  of  is  too  much  beyond  prob- 
ability to  take  effect ;  e.  g.,  The  news  was  too  good  to  be  believed,  bit 
S'iac^ric^t  war  Ju  gut,  aU  bag  man  fie  glauben  fonnte. 

2.  But  after  an  excluding  negation  is  rendered  o^Ut  t)a§  ;  e.  g.,  Not  a 
moment  passes,  but  I  think  of  you,  nid^t  cine  flKinute  vcrgc^t,  o|ne  ta§  idf 
an  <Sie  benfe. 

^  SSenn  and  toann  are  frequently  used  without  discrimination  one  for 
the  other;  bo  are  benn  and  bann.  ^etitt  is  properly  used  only  as  a  con- 
iunction  of  cause— 'Hann  as  an  adverb  of  time. 


NUMBER   OF  N0X7NS.  ^41 

Additional  Eemarks  on  the  Number  of  Nouns. 

183.  There  are  a  great  many  nouns  in  German  which,  from 
their  signification,  cannot  be  used  in  both  numbers. 
While  some  of  them  have  no  singular  form,  others 
are  without  a  plural  form. 

1.  Nouns  that  are  used  only  in  the  Singular  are  : 
o.  The  names  of  Materials,  as  : 

tad  ®olt,  the  gold  fcad  ^upfer,  the  copper 

ter  iponig,  the  honey  ta^  S3rot»,  the  bread,  etc. 

Remark. — Some  names  of  materials  have  a  plural  form 

when  different  kind  of  the  same  material  are  referred  to  ; 

e.  g.,  bic  SSJcine,  (the)  wines,  i.  e.,  the  different  kinds  of 

wine. 

b.  Abstract  Nouns,  as 
tcr  ©(i^lttf,  (the)  sleep  bte  Sicbe,  (the)  love 

ter  hunger,  (the)  hunger  tic  Sugenl),  the  youth,  etc. 

Remark. — ^Notice  that  while  in  English  abstract  terms 
are  used  mthaiU  the  article,  this  is  not  the  case  in  German. 

2.  Nouns  that  have  only  a  plural  form  are  :* 

tic  5l^nen,  the  ancestors  bie  (Sefd^roifter,  children  of  one 
tii  33einfIeiDcr,  the  trowsers  family  (brothers  and  sisters). 

(pair  of  pantaloons)  tic  Stc^tm  or  Unfojicn,  the  costs, 
tie  (iinfiinftc,  the  revenues  expenses 

lie  (Eltern,  the  parents  tic  Seute,t  (the)  people 

tic  Sericrt,  the  vacation,  hoH-  tie  SJ^afcm,  the  measles 

days  tic  SJZolfen,  the  whey 

tic  3?orfa^ren,  the  ancestors  tie  Mnk,  the  tricks  (pranks) 

tic  ©e^riiler,  (a  mercantile  tie  2:rummcr,  the  ruins 

term)  the  brothers  tic  2:ruppcn,  the  troops 

*  Da3  aScinfleib/  ber  S5orfa^r(c),  ber  Xxu^pt,  are  sometimes  used, 
t  Scute  expresses  the  plural  of  persons  in  a  very  indefinite  manner 
without  regard  to  class,  species,  or  sex.  Human  beings,  are  designated 
by  ?Kcnfd^en  ;  the  male  sex  by  5Wanner,  etc.  We  must  say  Unmenfc^en,  but 
not  Unlcutc.  Thus  also  S^cleute  means  married  people  and  G^cmanncr, 
married  men. 


3*8  NUMBEB  OP  NOUNS. 

also  the  following  : 
5ie  ^a^m,  (the)  Lent  tie  ^ftngjlen,  (the)  Whitsuntide 

Die  Dftern,  (the)  Ea,ster  tie  ^eii)nacl)ten,  (the)  Cnnstmas 

3.  Mascuhne  and  Neuter  Nouns*  implying  quan- 
tity, weight,  or  measure,  when  preceded  by  a  nu- 
meral, and  followed  by  a  noun  or  adjective,  are  used 
only  in  the  singular  form  and  are  put  in  apposition 
with  the  nouns  following,  as  : 
!Da«  S5u(^,  a  quire  (of  paper) ;  e.  g.,  funf  ^U(^  papier,  five  quires 

of  paper. 
Dag  Du^ent),  a  dozen  ;  e.  g.,  ijier   ^tt^eti^  3:afc^entii(^er,  four 

dozen  handkerchiefs. 
Der  %a^,  a  foot ;  e.  g.,  jmci  5tt#  {^^^  5w§0  ^^"9f  *"^o  feet  long. 
Dag  3yial,  time,  repetition  ;  e.  g.,  cin  ^Sftai,  once  ;  jwei  ^ia(, 

twice,  etc. 
Dag  ^aar.f  a  pair;  e,  g.,  irei  ^Saav  (5trum))fe,  three  pair  of 

stockings. 
Dag  5^fuitD,  a  pound  ;  e.  g.,  ad^t  ^ftlttb  iponfg,  eight  pounds  of 

honey. 
Dcr  3otI,  an  inch  ;  e.g.,  neun  ^oU  hvtit,  nine  inches  broad. 
1 84,  Compound  words  ending  in  Wlann,  change  this  ending 
in  the  plural  to  'imk,  when  the  substantive  implies  a 
person  without  special  regard  to  sex,  as  : 
ter  ^mtmann,  the  sheriff ;  pi.  W  Slmtlewte. 
ter  (EMmann,  the  nobleman  ;  pi  tie  Stelleute* 
ttx  ^antelgmattii,  the  tradesman  ;  pi  tie  Jpantelglctttc. 
ter  ^auftnattn,  the  merchant ;  pi  tie  ^auflctlte. 

If,  however,  the  term  is  to  express  a  distinction  of 
sex,  the  regular  form  Wftdnnct  is  used,  as  : 
Der  (i^imann,  the  husband  (married  man)  ;pl  tie  S^emannct. 

(Die  S^elCttte,  married  people,  meaning  man  and  wife.) 
Dfr  S^renmann,  the  man  of  honor  ;  pi  tie  (S^renmanncr. 
Der  ©taatgmann,  the  statesman ;  pi  tie  Staatgmdnnct. 

*  Feminine  nouns  and  all  those  which  express  time  are  used  in  the 
plural ;  e.g.,  jwei  Gtten  Stud^,  two  ells  or  yards  of  cloth ;  brci  Sa^re  lanj* 
for  three  years. 

t  9>aof  also  signifies /««j;  e.  g.,  cm  9>aar  (Stunbcn,  a  few  hours. 


GENDEB   OF   SUBSTANTIVES.  243 


Gender  of  Substantives. 

Bem. — This  part  of  German  grammar  is  unfortunately  so 
difficult  to  reduce  to  general  and  precise  ruleSy  that 
the  student  can  be  successful  in  learning  the  genders 
of  nouns,  only  by  a  careful  study  of  the  following 
rules,  and  a  constant  attention  to  the  article  belonging 
to  each  noun,  and  noting  its  gender. 

185*  In  German,  the  gender  of  a  substantive  is  noty  as  in 
English,  determined  merely  by  the  signification,  but 
also  by  the  endings.  The  names  of  inanimate  things, 
therefore,    may    be    either    masculine,    feminine,   or 

NEUTER. 

1 86 .    MASCULINE  by  SIGNIFICATION. 

1.  Appellations  op  MaleSj  as : 

ter  Syiann,  the  man  ter  Come,  the  lion 

ter  ^aifcr,  the  emperor  fccr  2lller,  the  eagle 

Note. — Diminutives*  are  always  neuter. 

2.  Names  of  Celestial  AND  Infernal  Being^s,  and 
Planets,  as: 

ber  (Snget,  the  angel  ber  ^ont),  the  moon 

lit  %i\x\t\,  the  devil  t)er  @tern,  the  star 

EXCEPTIONS. 
bie  <Sotttte,t  the  sun  hit  (Srbc,t  the  earth 


•  In  German  nearly  all  substantives  may  be  formed  into  diminutives 
by  aflBxing  d^cn  or  lein.  Nouns  ending  in  e  drop  this  letter  in  tbe  dimi. 
nutive  form,  and  those  containing  the  vowels  <x,  c,  u  modify  it.  The 
diminutives  are  used  not  only  to  express  smallness  of  size,  but  also  affec- 
tion, and  in  some  cases  oddity,  as,  ?Wann,  tWanni^cn;  Koc^ter,  Sijc^terlcitt; 
S3aum,  33ttum(^ctt;  ^unb,  ^iinb^cn.    See  also  Lesson  III. 

t  See  189. 


244  GENDEB  OP  SUBSTANTIVES. 

3.  Names  of  Seasons,  Months,  Days,  Points  of 
the  Compass,  Winds,  and  Stones,  as  : 

ter  ©omnter,  summer  ber  9lort  (en),  (the  north) 

ber  3<inuar,  January  ter  (Bamum,  the  Simoom 

ter  greitag,  Friday  ter  ^Diamant,  the  diamond 

EXCEPTIONS. 

bog  Sal^rr  the  year,  and  its  compounds,  e.  g.,  iai  Srul^ja^r,  spring. 

187^MASCULINE  by  TEEMINATION. 

1.  Nouns  ENDING  IN  cti*  (not  6^m),  tg,  i^,  inq, 
AND  littQt/  as 

ter  ©atten,  the  garden  ter  SRegeit,  the  rain 

ter  ^btitg,  the  king  fcer  faring,  the  herring 

ter  ^ftr|i<^,  the  peach  fcer  ©iinftUtig,  the  favorite 

EXCEPTIONS. 
ha^  35e(!en,  the  basin  ba§  2a!en,  the  sheet 

ba§  Sifen,  the  iron  ba§  Se^ett,  the  fief 

^a§  i^iitlen,  the  foal,  ha^  SBa^jpen,  the  escutcheon 

^ad  ^tjfen,the  cushion,  pillow  ^a§  S^idj^it,  the  sign 
tas  ^ing,  the  thing  ^a$  SJJefftng,  the  brass 

2.  Five  Nouns  ending  in  ee : 
ber  ^ajfec,  the  coffee  ter  ©c^nee,  the  snow 

tier  2:^ee,  the  tea     ber  ^lec,  the  clover     ber  @ce,J  the  lake 

188.    FEMININE  BY  SIGNIFICATION. 
1.  Appellations  op  Females,  as : 

bie  %xan,  the  woman  bie  2lmme,  the  nurse 

bie  3wtt0ff<^u,  the  maid  bie  ^aiferin,§  the  empress 

EXCEPTIONS. 
bad  SBeib,  the  wife,  woman    bad  %xanm^immtx,  a  female  person 

*  Infinitives  used  substantively  are  neuter,  see  190.  3. 

f  See  Third  Declension, 

j  2)ic  <BeCr  the  sea,  has  no  plural 

§  See  197. 


GENDEB  OP  SUBSTANTIVES.  '      245 

2.  Names  of  Trees,  Fruits,  Plants,  and  Flowers,  as: 

tie  Sic^c,  the  oak  tie  ^flanae,  the  plant 

tit  S3irnc,  the  pear  tie  Silie,  the  lilj 

EXCEPTIONS. 
hct  Sl^orn,  the  maple  btt  §ot(unber,  the  elder  tree 

^et  2lpfe(,  the  apple  htt  Sac^^olter,  the  juniper 

^er  33aum,  the  tree  ha^  55ergi§meinni(i^t,  the  toget- 

her i^H^ter,  the  lilac  me-not 

^er  ©olclarf,  the  wall-flower 

3.  The  Names  op  Rivers,  as : 

tie  !£;onau,  the  Danube  tie  (Spree,  the  Spree 

EXCEPTIONS. 
^cr  3J?a{n,  the  Main  ^cr  Sa  ^fata,  the  La  Plata 

^er  ^iJWifftfpppi,  the  Mississippi     tct  D^o,  the  Ohio 
^er  SJ'iijIburi,  the  Missouri  ber  0l^ein,  the  Rhine 

189.— FEMININE  by  TERMINATION. 

1.  IVonns  ENDING  IN  c  (not  ee)  not  havino  the 

Prefix  @e,  as  : 

tie  (5tra§e,  the  street  tie  ipiitfe,  the  help 

tic  Slefee,  (the)  love  tie  S^re,  the  honor 

EXCEPTIONS. 
ha^  Sluge,  the  eye  ha^  Srbe,  the  inheritance 

ba§  Snte,  the  end  hct  ^afe,  the  cheese 

Note. — Words  like  ©ame^  cannot  of  course  come  undei 
this  rule,  as  their  original  ending  is  en. 

2.  Nouns    ENDING   IN   ONE   OF    THE    AFFIXES    tl    (ci^), 

^tit,  feit,  a^t,  i^aft,  n^t,  iing^  ulb  or 
ttttft^  as: 

tie  (Sc^meic^elei,  flattery  tie  ^tl<^t,  the  bay 

tie  ^reil^cit,  freedom  tie  Slc^tting,  esteem 

tie  greutttUcbfeit,  kindness,  affa-  tie  ®ctulb,  patience 

biUty  tie  5ln!ttttft,  the  arrival 

tie  greuntfd^aft,  friendship 


246  GENDER   OP   SUBSTANTIVES. 

190 ^NEUTEB  by  SIGNIFICATION. 

1.  The  Letters  of  the  Alphabet,  as : 
tag  21,  the  A  tag  2^,  the  M 

2.  The  Naivtes  op  Netals  and  Materials,  as : 

tag  ®oI&,  the  gold  tag  ^ol3,  the  wood 

EXCEPTIONS. 

hit  ^latina,  platina  ^er  3:ombadf,  pmchbeck 

htt  <Bta^,  steel  ^et  2^nt,  zinc 

3.  Infinitiyes  and  Adjectives  used  as  Nouns,  as : 
tag  SRaud^Ctl,  smoking  tag  2:rin!etl,  drinking 

tag  S3ttter,  the  bitter  tag  (B&i'enc,  the  sublime,  beau- 

tiful 

4.  Collectiye  Nonns,  especially  those  with  the 

Prefix  @e,  as : 
tag  ©ejlnte,  domestics  tag  5Sie^,  the  catile 

tag  ®etirge,the  chain  of  moun-  tag  3SoIf,  the  people 
tains 

EXCEPTIONS. 
^er  ©ebraud^,  the  use  hie  ®ekrtc,  the  gesture 

btt  (^ctanfe,  the  thought  Me  ©eturt,  the  birth 

htv  ®e^alt,  the  salary  hie  ©ebii^r,  the  tax 

^er  ©e^orfam,  obedience  hie  ®efa^r,  the  danger 

^cr  ®enuf ,  the  enjoyment  hit  ©cmeinte,  the  parish 

hct  ®crud),  the  smell  bie  ©eftidjte,  history 

hex  ©efattg,  the  song  ^le  ©efd^wwlfl,  the  tumor 

^er  (^ef^macf,  the  taste  hie  ®eftalt,  the  form,  shape 

het  ©eflanf,  the  stench  hie  (3ma\t,  the  power 

het  (Sewinn,  the  gain  hie  ®etult,  patience 

191.— NEUTER  BY  TERMINATION. 

1.  DiminntiTes  in  c^en  and  leitt,  as  : 

tag  ©iS<»*^en,  the  Httle  son        tag  ^hnm^en,  the  little  tree 

2.  Nonns  formed  with  the  Affixes  fel,  fal,  ttl, 
t^nm,  and  tttf ,  as : 


GENDER   OP   SUBSTANTIVES.  247 

ta^  Slat^fel,  the  enigma  ta6  S^riftentl^ttttt,  Christianity 

taiS  ©cfcicffal,  fate  ba^  33untttt^,  the  alliance 

ta^  Wlittclf  the  remedy,  means   ba^  ^Ser^dlttti^,  the  relation 

EXCEPTIONS.! 
^cr  (Btbpfel,  the  stopper  t>ic  Smpfangnif ,  conception 

hie  Zxixb\al,  the  sorrow  hic  (Erfenntnig,  perception 

htt  3rtt^um,  the  mistake,  error  ^tc  (£rlau6tti§,  the  permission 
bcr  3lei(^t^um,  the  wealth  ^ie  SrfparniJ,  savings 

^cr  S3a^^tt}um,  the  growth         ^ie  gdulnig,  the  putrefaction 
^te  33ebrdngni§,  grievance  ^te  ^enntni§,  knowledge 

hit  33e!umtttcrni§,  sorrow  hit  5)crtammni§,  damnation 

^ie  53eforgnt§,  apprehension        hit  3Serfdumni§,  the  omission, 
hit  S3ctrubtti^,  affliction  delay 

hit  33enjant)ttig,  condition  ^te  Siltnif,  the  wilderness 


Exercise  on  the  Gender  of  Nouns.* 

2CoIf»  S3dr.  9Henf(^.  %tau.  ^on'a.  ©onnc.  3;cufel» 
Stem.  Srbc.  ^al)n»  ^entte.  SJlai.  3Jiontag,  ^naBc.  Come* 
Xiamant,  ©arten*  grul)ial}r.  Sci^t^unbert,  Sifen.  Sle^en* 
©olD.  (SilBer.  %Mtn.  Safen.  ^i|Ten.  2e^en.  ©unftHttg, 
Sungfrau,  5l^orn*  ©prce,  !l)onau»  Sl^ein,  9l^one.  (Sic^e* 
Sirnc.  ^bitig.  faring,  ©c^nee.  ©ta'^L  ?5rcunt)fc^aft.  SicBc, 
Sluge.  SBac^^oltcr.  Z^n,  ©ante.  ©ebub.  Slnfunft.  fRd^^ 
t^um.  (3fmijfdngm§»  ©eburt.  ®enu§,  Sftaud^ett,  ®ebirge» 
@i3^n(^en.  t^rdutein.  9)^dtd)en.  Stc^tung.  ©(^meidjelel.  ^fir^ 
ftc^.  3^i<^^tt*  Silie.  ©tern.  Sltler.  ©amen.  SJlont).  2lmmc* 
©ee.  SBappen.  ?^rei^eit.  Sld^tung.  3:ruBfaL  33e(fen.  ©topfcL 
S3dum(^en.  S3unt)m§.  Srfparni^.  51  unb  53,  S^re.  (SebulD* 
2:omBa(i.  33eforgmg.  ©^t(ffal.  Sac^^t^um.  (Srlaufentg.  SJlit^: 
tel.  3in!.  3Sic^.  Zxiih]al  ^enntnig.  (S^efd^macf.  ©cBirge* 
25er9i§meinnid)t.  ^ain,  SSer^dltni^.  ^^i^eunblicbfeit.  ©efa^r. 
Srrt^um.     SRdt^fel.    ^otlunber. 

*  Let  the  pupil  determine  the  gender  of  each  nonn. 
f  Xritbfal,  SSefummernip,  empfangnii,  ©rfenntnip,  (£rfparmp,  ©erbertnip,  and 
83etfaumni^  are  also  neuter  Bometimes. 


248  GENDEB   OF   SUBSTANTIVES. 

Gender  of  Compound  Substantives. 

193. — Compound  Substantives  taJce  the  gender  of  their 
last  component*  as  : 

EXCEPTIONS. 
a.  The  following  words    are   FEMmiNE,  although 
their  last  component  is  masculijie : 
l)te  2Inmut^,  grace  tie  Sangmut^,  forbearance 

tie  3lrmut^,  poverty  tie  ©anftmuti  meekness 

tie  Xiemut^,  humility  tie  (Bc^njermutt),  melancholy 

tic  ©rogmut^,  generosity  tie  Se^mut^,  sadness 

Note. — Other  words  compounded  with  mut^  are  masculine; 
e-  <7-.  tier  |)oc^mut^,  haughtiness. 

6.  The  following  words  also  deviate  from  the 
general  rule : 

bet  2lbfc^eu  (Cie  (B^m),  abhorrence 
bit  9Zcunaiige  (vai  2luge),  the  lamprey 
^tc  2lntn?ort  (t>a^  2Bort),  the  answer 
ba^  ©egent^eil  )  ( the  reverse 

ba^  ^intert^eif  [•  (rer2:^eiI),t-<  the  hind  part 
bad  35ortert^ciI  )  ( the  fore  part 

Double  Gtender. 

1 93. — ^The  following  nouns,  written  and  pronounced  alike, 
change  their  signification  with  their  gender  : 
^er  ^ar(S),  the  binding  of  a     ba^  Sant,  the  ribboUj  bond 
book  or  a  volume 

*  In  French  the  gender  of  compound  nouns  is  detennined  by  the  Jirst 
component, 
f  Sometimes  also  neuter. 


GENDER  OF  SUBSTANTIVES. 


249 


hex  SBauer,  the  peasant,  fanner 

^cr  SunC,  leagU3,  confederacy 

hct  (Et)or,  the  chorus 

^cr  Srbe,  the  heir 

bet  ©ei^el,  the  hostage 

hcv  ^a\t,  the  hold,  clasp 

bet  ^arj,  the  Hercynian  Mts. 

hex  ^eiDc,  the  heathen 

bet  ^ut,  the  hat 

bet  liefer,  the  jaw 

^tx  ,^unl>e,  the  customer 

bet  Setter,  the  conductor 

htx  Mangel,  (the)  want 

hie  ^ar!,  the  mark,  boundary 

bcx  Wla^,  the  mast  (ship) 

hex  33^enf(^,  the  man 

htx  9lei«,  the  rice 

hex  8c^ilC,  the  shield 

hex  See,  the  lake 

htx  ©projfe,  sprout,  scion 

bie  ©teuer,  tax,  contribution 

hex  @ttft,  the  tag,  peg,  pencil 

hex  Z^ox,  the  fool 

hex  SSerMen^  the  earnings 

bie  SBe^r,  the  defence 


ha^  33auer  *  the  cage 
ha^  53uttr),  the  bundle 
ha^  (£^or,  the  choir 
ha^  Srbe,  the  inheritance 
hie  ®eigcl,  the  scourge 
bte  ^aft,  the  custody 
ha^  iparj,  the  rosin 
hie  ^ciu,  the  heath 
hie  iput,  the  heed,  pasture 
hie  liefer,  the  Scotch  fir 
bte  ^unte,  notice,  intelligence 
hie  Setter,  the  ladder 
hie  'MaxiQd,  the  mangle 
bad  ^laxf,  the  marrow 
bie  Wla\i,  fattening  of  cattle 
ha^  SJienfc^,  the  wench 
ha^  d\d&,  the  sprig 
ha^  ©cbiIC,thesign(of  ahouse) 
hie  ©ee,  the  sea  (ocean) 
hie  ©proffe,  step  of  a  ladder 
ha^  @teuer,  the  helm 
ha^  (Sttft,  foundation, 
ha^  Z^ov,  the  gate 
ha&  3Serl)tenfl,  the  merit 
ha&  SCc^r,  the  weir 


Double  Form  in  the  Plural. 

194. — The  following  nouns  have  a  double  form  in  the 
plural  with  different  significations  (comp.,  brother  ; 
plural y  brothers  and  brethren,  &c.)  : 


SingiUar. 
bad  SBanb,  ribbon,  tie 
bie  S3anf,  bank,  bench 
bad  ®end)t,  face  , 
bad  ^orn,  horn 
ber  Caben,  stop 


bie  fd'dnbcx,  ribbons 
bie  S3dnfc,  benches 
bie  ®efid^tcr,  faces 
bie  ■Corner,  horns 
bie  Cdben,  shops 


Plural. 
SSantJC,  ties  (bonds) 
SBanfcn,  banks 
®eftc^tc,  visions 
^orne,  kinds  of  horn 
Sabcn,  shutters 


SBaucr,  cc^e,  is  also  masculine. 


250  GENDEB    OF   SUBSTANTIVES. 

Singvla/r.  Plural. 

certain    (  '^'^^^f '  indefinite  or  vast 
baS  Sanb,  land,  country  bic  Sttnbcr*  ]  countries  )       Portions  of  country  ; 

^  (  Canbcreieilf  lands 

ba<J  ^Wf  light,  candle    bic  Cic^tcr,  lights,  flames  Sic^tc,  candles 
ber  Drt,  place  bic  Ocrtcr,  single  places    Ortc»  places 

bcr  ©traup,  nosegay,        bic  ©triittpcr,  nosegays      ©trauBC,    ©traupen, 

battle,  ostrich  bic  6trdupe,  battles  ostriches 

bad  SBort,  word  bic  SCortcrf  single  words  SBorte,  coherent  words 

Note. — X)ad  3ntcrcffc,  the  interest,  concern,  "advantage,  has   in  the 
plural,  bie  Sntcrcffcn  meaning  the  interest  of  money. 

19«>. — The  following  nouns  have  a  change  of  gender  but 

not  of  signification  : 
bcr  or  bic  Sac^,  the  brook  bcr  or  bad  Z^d\,   the  part,  share, 

bcr  or  bad  Col^n,  the  reward,  wages      bcr  or  bad  Bcug,  the  cloth,  material, 
bcr  or  bad  Drt,  the  place  trash 

196. — The  following  nouns  have  a  double  form  in  the 
plural,  but  without  a  change  of  signification : 

Singular.  Plural. 

bcr  2)orn,  the  thorn  bic  Socmen  or  2)brncr 

bod  ®au,  the  country  bic  ®aue  or  ©aucn 

bad  ®c»anb,  the  garment  bic  (SJcicanbc  or  ©cwiinber 

bcr  ^alm,  the  blade  (of  grass)  bic  ^almc  or  ^almctt 

bad  ^cmb,  the  shirt  bic  ^cmben  or  Member 

bad  ^amifolf  the  waistcoat  bic  i^amifolc  or  itamifoler 

bad  2Ra^U  the  repast  bic  5Wa^lc  or  Wi^^tx 

bad  <SciI,  the  roi)e,  line  ^  bic  <£cilc  or  ©cilcr 

bcr  <S^orn,  the  spur  bic  ©pornen  or  ©porcii 

bcr  <3trau(!^,  the  bush  bic  ©trouiJ^c  or  ©trduc^er 

bad  %\iOi\,  the  valley  bic  S^ale  or  X^alcr 

bad  3;uc^,  the  cloth  bic  %\x^z  or  a:ii(^cr 

bcr  SBurm,  the  worm              ,  bic  SHJiirntc  or  SSiirmcr 

bad  3clt,  the  tent  bic  3cUe  or  Belter 

Formation  of  Feminine  Appellations. 

197. — Most  feminine  appellations  are  derived  from  the 
corresponding  masculines  by  adding  in  or  itttl  in 
the  singular,  and  the  plural  takes  ea.  If  monosyl- 
lables, the  radical  vowels,  a,  o,  n,  are  modified  in 
the  plural ;  e.  g.,  Xtx  ®raf,  the  count,  tie  ®rdfin(tt), 
the  countess,  pi.  tie  ©rdfttinctt;  the  countesses. 


CONSTRUCTION.  251 


Oonstrnction. 

Kemaek. — ^The  German,  like  the  Latin,  admits  of  a  great 
variety  in  the  arrangement  of  words  in  sentences,  thus  afford- 
ing great  faciHties  for  securing  proper  emphasis,  and  for 
imparting  to  its  periods  the  same  harmonious  flow  for  which 
the  Latin  classics  are  distinguished.  But  with  all  this  free- 
dom every  word  or  member  of  a  sentence  in  German  takes 
its  position  according  to  certain  definite  laws  o^  arrange- 
ment, which  cannot  be  disregarded  without  great  offence 
against  euphony. 

I.  The  Principal  or  Simple  Sentence. 

a.  COMMON  CONSTRUCTION. 
198, — ^1.  As  in  other  languages,  every  simple  sen- 
tence must  have  at  least  two  principal  parts, 

1.  A  subject)  (noun  or  its  equivalent),  and  a  predicate 
verb  (expressed  or  implied).^ 

Ex.— X)a«  ^int)  tceint,  the  child  cries. 

Note. — The  verbs  fcilt  (unless  it  signifies  to  exist),  to  be,  tDCttJcn,  to 
become,  f(!^einen^  to  seem,  blcibett^  to  remain,  l^ei^en,  to  be  called  [not  to 
call)  serve  merely  as  the  copula,  while  the  noun,  pronoun,  adjective,  or 
participle,  which  follows  serves  as  the  predicate,  and  is  put  in  the  same 
case  as  the  subject  (nom.)*    (§  25,  p.  312,  I. ;  §  9,  Exc). 
Ex.— (Sin   guter  3)?enfi^  ijl  cin  gliilllli^cr  Wtn\^,  a   good  man  is  a 
happy  man. 
SlritDlb  wurbe  cin  IBcrtot^er  feineS  S5aterknbe«,  Arnold  became  a 
traitor  to  his  country. 

2.  If  the  predicate  has  an  object,  the  latter  constitutes 
the  third  principal  part,  and  is  placed  after  the  predicate. 

Ex.— ©r  fc^reibt  cincn  S3rtcf,  he  writes  a  letter. 

*  The  subject  is  sometimes  called  the  grammatical  sutject,  and  the 
predicate  the  grammatical  predicate ;  tlie  entire  subject  is  sometimes 
called  the  logical  subject,  and  the  entire  predicate,  the  logical  predicate. 

'  Tins  is  the  case  also  with  any  of  those  verbs  which  in  the  active 
govern  two  accusatives  (p.  '368,  2.)  when  employed  passively. 


252  coNSTEUcnoN. 

3.  When  the  leading  verb  is  used  in  a  compound  tense, 
the  auxiliary  holds  the  place  of  the  predicate,  and  the 
participle  or  infinitive  stands  last  in  the  sentence. 

Ex. — 23ir  j^abett  beinen  S3rief  cr^altcn,  we  have  received  your  letter. 

Note  1. — If  both  the  infinitive  and  the  past  participle  occur,  the  in- 
anitive  is  put  last. 

Ex. — 3d^  wurbe  i^n  gcJoBt  l^aBett,  I  should  Mve  praised  him. 

Note  2. — When  the  aux.  is  in  a  comp,  tense,  the  simple  tense  holds 
the  place  of  the  predicate,  and  the  complement  foUowa  the  leading  verb. 

Ex. — Sr  ifl  beJTen  bcfci^ulbigt  tuorHen,  he  lias  been  accused  of  it. 

4.  When  the  leading  verb  is  a  compound  separable, 
the  radical  holds  the  place  of  the  predicate,  and  tjie  par- 
ticle stands  last  in  the  sentence. 

Ex. — Dag  2ld)t  9  e  f)  t  ttU0,  the  light  goes  out. 

Note. — There  are  several  phrases  consisting  of  verbs  and  nouns, 
some  of  which  are  accompanied  by  prepomtions  or  adjectives,  in  whicli 
the  noun  is  made  to  serve  the  part  of  a  separable  particle  of  a  compound 
verb,  and  occupies  also  the  same  place.    They  are : 

^d)t  gcten,  to  -p&j  or  give  attention^    Sro^  Meten,  to  bid  defiance 

fcf^  fallen,  to  hold  fiast  «md  Seben  bringen,  to  kill 

®efa^r  laufen,  to  run  a  risk  urn  fRat^  fragen,  to  ask  advice 

®e|or  gebcjt/  to  grant  a  hearing  ju  ®runb€  gc^en,  to  perish 

^ulfc  Iei|tcn,  to  render  aid  ju  ®runbc  rid^ten,  to  ruin 

tng  ©erf  fe^en,  to  execute  ju  ^ulfe  fomnicn,  to  come  to  the  aid 

fSiat^  geben,  to  advise  |U  Wittaq  effen,  to  dine 

HxU  fle^en,  to  stand  still  ju  ©tanbe  bringen,  to  accomplish 

Sorge  tragcn,  to  take  care  ju  3:^eil  tt>crben,  to  fall  to  one's  part 

5.  When  there  are  two  objects  in  a  sentence,  that  of 
the  person  precedes  that  of  the  thing. 

Ex.— 3^  ^be  metnem  ©ruber  ctncn  Srtef  gcf(^rieben,  I  have  written  ms 

brother  a  letter. 
Note. — ^Notice  that  the  personal  object  is  in  the  Dative  (comp.  §  18). 

G.  When  both  objects  are  persons,  the  accusative  precedes 
the  dative. 
Ex. — 3d^  werbc  ^\}Xtn  Sol)n  metnem  greunbc  empfefilen,  I  shall  recom- 
mend your  son  to  my  friend. 

»  (Compare  French, /aire  aiiention,  (to  m^aJce  attention). 


CONSTRUCTION.  253 

Exceptions. 

1.  When  one  of  the  two  objects  is  a  personal  pronoun, 
place  it  before  the  noun. 

Ex.— &err  ©c^uljc  ^at  rair  cinen  SBejuc^  abgejlattct,  Mr.  Schulze  has  paid 
we  u  visit. 

2.  When  both  objects  are  personal  pronouns,  the  mono- 
syllabic one  is  placed  first  (1.)  ;  but  if  both  are  monosyl- 
labic, the  Qjccusative  precedes  (2.)';  e.  g.y 

Ex. — (1.)  dx  ^attc  c8  S^nen  Qt^d^xkUn,  he  had  written  it  (to)  you. 
(2.)  5lnna  l^at  fie  mir  gelie^cn,  Anna  has  lent  tJiem  (to)  me. 

7.  Adverbs  and  adverbial  expressions  of  place  and 
manner  are  placed,  (1.)  immediately  before  the  participle^ 
when  the  verb  stands  in  a  compound  tense  ;  but,  (2.) 
when  the  verb  is  used  in  a  simple  tense,  such  adverbs 
are  placed  last. 

Ex.— (1.)  2Bir  laben  bad  i?tnb  u6eraQ  gcfuti^tr  we  have  looked  (for) 
the  child  everywhere. 
(2.)  Sir  crfutten  unfcrc  ^^xiji  mi  ^reubeit,  we  fulfil  our  duties 
gladly. 

8.  Adverbs  of  time  and  adverbial  expressions  of  time 
are  generally  placed,  (1.)  before  the  object,  and  (2)  before 
adverbs  (or  adverbial  expressions)  of  place. 

Ex. — (1.)  3c^  iDcrbe  ciligfl  cinen  Sotcn  fenben,  I  shall  hurriedly  despatch 
a  messenger. 
(2.)  (£r  fott  geflern  fi^on  cincn  Sricf  gefci^rickn  ^aben,  he  is  said  to 
have  written  a  letter  already  yesterday. 

Note. — In  a  sentence,  containing  two  adverbial  expressions  of  time, 
the  true  adverb'  precedes  the  noun  used  adverbially. 

Ex. — ©ie  mufTen  tmmer  (be<3)  SI  b  c  n  b  d  ju  ^aufc  Ikihin,  you  must  always 
remain  at  home  in  the  evening. 

9.  Personal  pronouns  without  a  preposition  precede 
adverbs  of  time. 

Ex. — 3d^  |abe  il|n  »orgcf!ern  gcfc^en,  I  saw  Mm  the  day  before  yesterday. 

*  3Wir  and  Dir,  however,  may  be  used  before  or  after  the  accusative. 


254  CONSTRUCTION. 

Exception. 

Pronouns  governed  by  a  preposition/oZZoi<?  the  adverb  and 
the  object. 
Ex.— 2»eine  Stante  ^at  gejlern  btefe^  S5uc^  Bci  ^^nctt  Qefe^cn,  my  aunt  saw 
this  book  yesterday  at  your  house. 

10.  9(li<j^t  is  placed  after  the  direct  object  (accusative). 

Ex.— ^arl  ^at  feine  Slufgaie  ttil^t  fiut  gefti^riekn,  Charles  has  iiot  written 
his  theme  well. 

Note. — 'yiii^i  if  used  in  a  clause  with  an  auxiliary  of  mode  is  placed 
before  the  Infinitive,  e.  g.  Sr  fottn  ben  S3rief  nil!)t  f(i^reit>en,  ho  canrwt  write 
the  letter. 

Exception, 

^ic^t  is  placed  before  the  direct  object, 

1.  when  the  latter  is  preceded  by  a  preposition. 

Ex. — 3<^  fprac!^  nic^t  *on  biefem  ©Inge,  I  did  not  speak  of  this  thing  (affair). 

2.  When  that  which  is  in  one  clause  denied,  is  in  another 
affirmed  of  a  different  object. 

Ex. — 3(^  ^k  nir^t  ba^  3>apier,  fonbern  ben  S3leijlift,  I  have  not  the  paper, 
but  the  pencil. 

3.  Also  in  interrogative  sentences. 

Ex. — ^akn  ©tc  nx^i  ben  Sleiftift  ?  Have  you  not  the  pencil. 

11.  Adverbs  of  place  and  manner  stand  ojter  nic^t. 

Ex. — 2)eine  ©(|roejler  ill  itilftt  ^ler  gcwefen,  your  sister  has  not  been  here. 

b.    Inversion. 
199. — The  general  order  of  words  may  be  inverted 
for  the  sake  of  giving  especial  emphasis  to  a  particular 
j^art  of  speech,  by  removing  it  from  its  usual  place  to 
uhe  beginning  of  the  sentence. 

INVERSION  OF  THE  SUBJECT. 
1.  The  snbject  and  predicate  (verb)  may  be  inverted  : 

a.  In  interrogative  sentences. 

Ex.— ®(oub|i  b  u ,  tt)a«  er  fagt,  do  you  believe  what  he  says? 

Sottte  C  r  e^  nlc^t  geprt  l^akn,  should  he  not  have  heard  it  ? 
6.  In  optative  and  imperative  sentences. 
Ex.— Si^rciBc  (bu)  fofort,  write  thou  at  once! 

^fittc  er  boc^  ba«  ntd)t  gef(^riet)en,  had  he  only  not  written  that  1 
c.  When  the  sentence  begins  with  the  pronoun  C^. 
Ex. — (Ed  Um  9Ziemanb,  nobody  c&me. 


CONSTRUCTION.  255 

c.  As  in  English,  in  conditional  sentences,  when  the 
conjunction  toetttt,  if^  is  not  used. 

Ex.~28ttrc  i  d)  nic^t  franf  Qcwefen  (instead  of  toenn  iu)  ni(^t,  &c.),  had  I 
not  been  sick. 

cZ.  After  adverbial  conjunctions  (see  p.  329,  IV.). 
Ex.— fittUm  ^  a  1 1  e  i  c^  t)ie  X^iire  gcofnet,  scarcely  had  I  opene<tthe  door. 

INVERSION  OF  THE  OBJECT. 

2.  The  inversion  of  the  object  takes  place  when  a  par- 
ticular stress  is  to  be  laid  upon  it.  In  such  a  case  the 
subject  is  placed  after  the  verb.  The  sentence  :  3c() 
ne^me  3^t  3lnerbicten-mit  greuten  an,  appears  inverted  thus: 

S^r  SlnerHcten  ne^me  tl^  wit  Srcuben  an,  your  proposal  I  accept 
with  pleasure. 

3.  Monosyllabic  personal  pronouns  often  precede  the 
subject  when  the  latter  is  dissyllabic  or  polysyllabic. 

Ex. — !Da  3^nen  92  i  e  m  a  n  b  ©twa^  in  ben  SBcg  legt,  as  no  one  hinders  you. 

INVERSION  OF  ABTERBIAL.  £XPRESSIO]%^S. 

4.  Adverbial  expressions  (especially  those  of  time) 
very  frequently  begin  the  sentence  when  a  particular 
stress  is  to  be  laid  on  them.  Here  also  the  verb  pre- 
cedes the  subject. 

Ex. — @cflerit   9l6cnt)  fam  mctnc  ©^tceflcr  in  3>an5  an,  last  evening  my 
sister  arrived  at  Paris. 

5.  According  to  the  stress  to  be  laicj  upon  certain 
"words,  the  following  and  similar  sentences  may  be  ex- 
pressed in  various  ways : 

1.  3)cr  Siirfl  ga^  bent  SBauer  bag  ®elb,  the  count  gave  the  money  to  the 
peasant. 

2.  Da^  ®elb  gab  ber  ^fiirfl  bent  93auer. 

3.  ®em  Saucr  gab  bcr  giirll  bad  ®elb. 

4.  Der  ^iirfl  gafc  ba«  ®etb  bent  Saucr. 

6.  1)0.i  ®elb  gab  bent  33auer  ber  giirfl. 


256  CONSTRUCTION. 

Bemabe. — ^According  to  some  ancient  obsolete  words  which 
poets  frequently  make  use  of,  we  might  also  say 

(6.)  2)cm  ©o|nc  ber  SJatcr  ben  ©egcn  gat, 
(7.)  Dcr  SJater  bem  ©o^ne  ben  <5cgcn  gab. 

n.  The  Accessory  or  Subordinate  Sentence* 

300. — ^An  accessory  sentence  always  begins  either 
with  (1.)  a  relative  pronoun^  or  (2.)  a  relative  adverb.  The 
order  of  the  subject,  object,  and  adverbials  remaining 
unchanged,  the  verb  (predicate)  is  placed  at  the  end  of  the 
sentence.  When  (3.)  the  verb  is  used  in  a  compound 
tense,  the  participle  or  infinitive  precedes  the  auxiliary. 

Ex.— (1.)  2)aa  |>au«,  toelt^ed  n>tr  i)on  S^ncn  f  a  u  f  t  e  n ,  tfl  cin  fe^r  altti, 
.  the  house  (which)  we  bought  of  you,  is  a  very  old  one. 
(2.)  2)ie  Ce^rcrin  jragtc  mic!^,  tuorum  bu  ni(^t  in  bic  ©d^ulc  f  a  m  fl , 

the  teacher  asked  me  why  you  did  not  come  to  school  ? 
(3.)  2)en  <Sto(f,  » e  I  (^  e  n  id^  derloten  i^  a  1 1  c ,  ill  tticbcrgefiinben 
toorben^  the  cane  which  I  had  lost,  has  been  found  again.' 

Exception. 

In  a  sentence  containing  two  infinitives  or  an  infinitive  and 
a  participle,  the  auxiliary  precedes. 

Ex. — t>tx  ©ee,  in  wetc^em  i^  bic^   l^aBc   l&aben  fC^cn,  the  lake  in 
which  I  have  seen  you  bathing. 

Note. — This  is  the  case  also  when  the  infinitive  form  of  the  auxilia- 
ries of  mode  is  used  in  place  of  the  participle  (p.  110,  IV,). 

Ex.— 3Han  figte  mir,  bag  i(i^  bid^  ni^t  toiirtc  fe^cn  fonncn,  they  told 
me  that  I  could  not  see  you. 

III.  The  Compound  Sentence. 

^01. — The  Compound  Sentence  is  formed  either  by 
co-ordination  or  by  sub-ordination. 

a.   CO-ORDINATE  COMPOUND  SENTENCES. 
30d. — ^There  are  three  ways  of  co-ordination. 


'  The  poets  sometimes  place  the  auxiliary  first. 


ooNSTRUcnoN.  257 

1.  Two  sentences  may  be  placed  simply  beside  each 
other  without  any  connection. 

Ex. — 'Lit  %a^nm  flattertcn,  c$  fc^metterten  Xrompctcn,  the  flags  fluttered, 
the  trumpets  resounded. 
®c^c  (bu)  linfd/  ic^  wcrbc  rec^td  gc^en,  you  go  to  the  left,  I  will  go 
to  the  right 

Bemaek. — This  omission  of  the  conjunction  is,  in  Enghsh, 
called  asyndeton. 

2.  They  may  be  connected  either  by  a  demonstrative 
pronoun  (a.) ;  by  a  co-ordinate  conjunction  (6.);  or  by  an 
adverbial  conjunction  (c). 

Ex.— (a.)  Sllexanber  bcr  ®roge  unb  G^rud  watcn  m'^  ntcic^tigc  Jlrifgct ;  [tntv 
serBttitb  SScig^ctt  mtt  3:apferfeit,  \i\c\tx,  &c,  Alexander  the 
Great  and  Cyrus  were  two  mighty  warriors,  the  former 
joined  wisdom  to  bravery,  the  latter,  &c. 

(&.)  3*  serlaJTe  bic^  je^t,  ahtt  i^  toerbe  bic^  Mt  wieberfe^en,  I  leave 
you  now,  but  I  shall  soon  see  you  again. 

(c.)  !Dtefe  ©ta^Ifebcrn  jinb  ju  ^axt,  tiePal6  taugcn  ftc  nic^t  jum  ©<!^rei^ 
Itn,  these  steel-pens  are  too  hard,  Tience  they  are  not  fit  to 
write  mth. 

Note.— Sentences  joined  by  a  relative  pronoun  are  not  considered  as 
compound,  but  as  accessory  sentences. 

Ex.— 3d^  tyibt  ba(5  a3uc^  cr^altcn,  ttJClc^eS  ©tc  mtr  gcfanbt  l^aJcn,  I  have  re. 
ceived  the  book,  whicJi  you  sent  me. 

b.  SUBORDINATE  COMPOUND  SENTENCES. 

§  203. — 1.  Compound  sentences  with  subordinate 
clauses  consist  of  two  essential  parts,  the  principal  sen- 
tence, and  the  subordinate  (accidental)  sentences.  Their 
connection  is  effected  by  means  of  the  subordinative  con- 
junctions, (see  p.  332.) 

2.  Subordinate  clauses  are  characterized  by  the  follow- 
ing particulars  : 

a.  They  cause  the  verb  to  be  removed  to  the  end. 
Ex. — (£d  toar  bunfeL  aU  i^  i^n  ttaf,  it  was  dark,  when  I  met  him. 


258  CONSTKUCTION. 

h.  In  compound  tenses  tJie  participle  precedes  the  aux- 
iliary. 
Ex. — !Da  er  cinen  g)a§  er|aUen  ^attt,  as  he  had  received  a  passport. 

c.  The  prefix  of  separable  comp.  verbs  is  not  separated. 

Ex.— ©ic  ifl  ni^t  gefunb,  tocil  fte  m6)t  taglid^  ttttgfa^rt,  she  is  not  well, 
because  she  does  not  ride  out  daily. 

d.  Depending  cases  are  placed  between  the  subject  and 

the  verb. 

Ex.— SBiirbefl  bu  ntir  jiimen,  totm  t^  ben  Sticf  bciner  Sil^toefier  mcincm 
SSruber  fcnbe>  would  you  be  offended  with  me,  if  I  should 
send  your  sister's  letter  to  my  brother  ? 

3.  The  subordinate  sentence  may  be  either  the  first 
member  or  the  second  ;  if  placed  first,  the  subject  of  the 
principal  sentence  stands  after  the  verb.  Frequently  this 
is  indicated  by  f»  (not  generallj^  translated). 

Ex.— ©r  fc^rcibt  mir  nic^t,  wcil  er  trdge  ijl,or,  SSJcil  cr  tragc 
i  fl,  (fo)  fc^reifet  cr,  &c-,  he  does  not  write  me,  because  he  is  lazy 

4u  When  the  pronoun  of  the  subordinate  sentence 
represents  a  person,  an  inanimate  object,  or  an  abstract 
idea  of  the  principal  sentence,  the  pronoun  and  the  noun 
exchange  places. 

Ex. — Dl)f(^on  unfcr  ^a^Hx  xtx6)  ifl,  ij!  cr  boc^  nici^t  glMIici^,  although  our 
neighbor  is  rich,  he  is,  nevertheless,  not  happy.  (Regular 
order  :    Unfer  9lttl^6or  ifl  bod)  nic^t  gliitfUc^,  Dh\6^on  er  reic^  ifl.) 

5.  The  subordinate  sentence  may  even  be  inserted  be- 
tween the  words  of  the  principal  sentence,  without  affect- 
ing the  order  of  the  words  of  the  principal  sentence. 

Ex.— 3)?an  t^eilte  mir  fogleic^,  al0  i^  ton  mciitcr  IRctfc  juriidfc^rtC/  ben 
Sob  bciner  ©d^wefier  mit,  they  informed  me  of  the  death  of  your 
sister,  immediately  on  my  return  from  my  journey. 

6.  The  conjunctions  III  enn  and  ^a^  are  frequently 
omitted.     In  this  case  the  verb  is  not  removed  to  the  end. 

Ex. — ^atte  ic^  eS  getwu^t,  fo  n>iirbe  i^  gerne  ju  bir  gefontmen  fein,  ?iad  I 

known  I  would  gladly  have  come  to  you. 
Note. — The  order  of  words  is  exactly  the  same,  if  several  subordinate 
clauses  occur  in  a  compound  sentence; 


COMPOUND   VEBBS. 


A  List  of  Compound  Verbs, 

which  are  either  separable  or  inseparable,  according  to  their 
signification.  "When  separable,  the  accent  is  on  the  prefix, 
when  inseparable,  on  the  root  of  the  verb. 

Separable. 

b  u  r  (^  Hicf  en  to  glance  tlirough 

burd^bo^ren  to  bore  througk 

burc^bringen  to  force  through 

burc^glu^en  to  heat  through 

burc^ge^en  to  run  away 

burc^Iaufcn  to  run  through 

burd^reifcn  to  travel  through 

burd^fc^auctt  to  look  through 

burc^fd^ie^en  to  shoot  through 

burc^fci^neiben  to  divide  by  cutting 

burc^flo^en  to  push  through 

bur(^|lrei(|cn  to  strike  out 

u  b  c  r  brtngen  to  bring  over 

iikrfallett  to  fall  over 

uberfu^rcn  to  convey  over 

iibcrgc^cn  to  go  over 

ubcr^cben  to  lift  over 

iibcrlaben  to  load  over 

iibeflcgcn  to  lay  over 

iiSerlaufen  to  run  over 

Hberreidt)en  to  reach  over 

ukrfc^Iagen  to  turn  to  one  side 

ukrfd)reiben  to  write  over 

ukrfc^uttm  to  spill  over 

iiberfe^en  to  pass  over 

uberfpringen  to  leap  over 

iiberflcigen  to  mount  over 

ubcrtragen  to  carry  over 

ubcrtreten  to  go  over 

ubcrroerfeit  to  throw  over 

iiberjie'^en  to  draw  over 

u  m  gelen  to  go  around,  to  associate 

umflciben  to  change  clothes 

urn  fasten  to  ride  over 

RntfaJTcn  to  set  anew 


Inseparable. 
to  know  one's  design 
to  pierce 
to  penetrate 
to  inflame 
to  examine 
to  peruse  hastily 
to  travel  over 
to  penetrate 
to  interleave 
to  cross 
to  pierce 
to  roam 
to  dehver 
to  take  by  surpriEe 
to  convict 
to  overlook 
to  dispense  with 
to  overburden 
to  reflect 
to  importime 
to  deliver 
to  calculate 
to  direct 
to  cover  with 
to  translate,  to  overcharge 
to  skip 
to  surpass 
to  transfer 
to  transgress 
to  fall  out  with  one 
to  cover 
to  elude 

to  clothe  on  all  sides 
to  sail  around 
to  embrace 


260 


NEUTER   AND   INTRANSITIVE   VERBS. 


Separable. 

Inseparable. 

umfd^iffctt 

to  put  into  another 

•ship 

to  circumnavigate 

untfd^rciben 

to  recopy 

to  circumscribe,  to  paraphrase 

umfc^iittcn 

to  pour  into  another  vessel 

to  place  around 

umfpanneti 

to  change  horses 

to  span 

umflcllcn 

to  transpose 

to  surround 

untwc^en 

to  blow  down 

to  blow  upon  from  all  sides 

umjte^ctt 

to  change  clothes, : 

remove 

to  beset,  to  overcast 

untctgraben 

to  dig  under 

to  undermine 

untcr'^alten 

to  keep  under 

to  entertain,  to  support 

untcrfci^teten 

to  shove  under 

to  substitute  falsely 

untcrfc^Iagcn 

to  beat  under 

to  embezzle 

untcrflel^cn 

to  stand  under 

to  venture 

untcrjie^en 

to  draw  under 

to  undergo 

»  0 1 1  fiiHen 

to  fill  full 

to  fulfill 

j»  i  e  b  c  r  ^olen 

to  fetch  back 

to  repeat 

A  List  of  Neuter  and  Intransitive  Verbs, 

which  are  conjugated  in  German  with  fcin  (to  be),  but  in 
English  with  to  have. 


SIbfallcn,  to  decay 

Qblaufctt,  to  run  down 

abrcifen,  to  depart 

abweic^en,  to  deviate 

aufj^e^cn,  to  rise 

ftufn>a(i>cn,  to  awake 

aufleben,  to  come  to  life  again 

auffd^icpcitf  to  shoot  up 

ttuftrctcn,  to  step  up 

aufwad^fm,  to  grow  up 

au^arten,  to  degenerate 

ouggleiten,  to  slip 

au^iuanbcrn,  to  emigrate 

au^;(ic^en,  in  the  seme  of  to  move  out 

of  a  house 
bcgegnctt,  to  meet 
berf!cit,  to  burst 
bleiben,  to  remain,  to  stay 
bo^onlaufen,  to  run  away 
tinbringen,  to  penetrate 
cinf(^lafen,  to  fall  asleep 


cntfallcn,  to  slip  from 
entflic^en,  to  escape  by  flight 
entgel^en,  to  escape  by  going 
entlaufen>  to  escape  by  running 
entfc^Iafen,  to  fall  asleep,  to  expire 
entfc^liijjfcn,  to  escape  by  slipping 
cntfprtngen,  to  escape  by  springing 
cntweid^ettf  to  escape  by  yielding 
entwifc^cn,    to    escape   by    gliding 

away 
crblafTm,  to  grow  pale 
erfalten,  to  grow  cold 
errot^en,  to  blush 
crfc^cincn>  to  appear 
erfd^reifcn,  to  be  frightened 
crfiaunen,  to  be  astonished 
ertrinfen,  to  be  drowned 
crttjac^en,  to  awake 
fa^ren,  to  ride  in  a  carriage 
fatten,  to  fall 
faulen,  to  rot 


NEUTER   AND    INTRANSITIVE   VERBS. 


261 


flattent,  to  flutter 

jlie^en,  to  flee 

fttepert/  to  flow 

folijea,  to  follow 

gebei^cn,  to  prosper,  thrive 

ge^eti,  to  go 

gelingen,  to  succeed 

genefen,  to  recover 

gerat^eit,  (in  or  unter  etwa^);  to  get 

into,  fall  among 
gerinneu,  to  coagulate 
gefc^e^ettr  to  happen 
flettern,  to  climb 
fommcn,  to  come 
lanben^  to  land 
quellcn,  to  gush  forth 
reifertf  to  ripen 
rotten,  to  roll 
roflen,  to  rust 
[mtixit  to  sink 
fc^Iet(i>en,  to  sneak 
fc^meljcn,  to  melt,  smelt 
fc^liipfen,  to  slip 
fd^minben,  to  vanish 
fc^wettttt/  to  swell 
flerben,  to  die 
jlranben,  to  strand 
umfommen,  to  perish 
Seralten,  to  become  antiquated 
Jjerarmen,  to  become  poor 
»erblet(i>cn,  to  grow  palo 
»crblu^en,  to  fade 
»erburj!cn,  to  die  of  thirst 

The  following  intransitive  verbs,  wliich  express  motion  produced  by 
the  acting  power  of  the  subject,  are  conjugated  with  f  c  i  n,  when  a  refer- 
ence to  a  place  or  space  is  denoted  ;  with  ^  a  b  e  n ,  when  expressing  a 
mere  activity,  a  continuous  state  without  a  change  or  transition  of  their 
subject  from  one  state  into  another. 


tcrfallcn,  to  decay 

»erfaulen,  to  rot 

»erfltegen,  to  evaporate 

serge^en,  to  pass  away 

fter^ungern,  to  starve 

Deria^ren,  to  become  invalid  by  time 

»eroben,  to  become  desolate 

»errauc^en,  to  evaporate 

Uerreifen,  to  go  on  a  journey 

»erro(len,  to  be  consumed  by  rust 

tierfci^atten,  to  cease  sounding 

locrfc^eiben,  to  depart  this  life 

5Derfd)n)inben,  to  disappear 

Dcr)lreic^cn,  to  pass  away,  to  elapse 

»er|lummcn,  to  grow  dumb 

Vcrtrocfnen,  to  dry  up 

tjerwelfen,  to  fade 

»crwcfen,  to  decay 

Jjorbringen,  to  press  forward 

n>ac^fen»  to  grow 

tt)anbertt,  to  wander 

toeid^en,  to  jdeld,  to  give  way 

joerben,  to  become,  to  get 

gerfaffen,  to  fall  to  ruins 

gcrfpringen,  to  burst 

jufrieren/  to  freeze  over 

juriidEfe^ren,  to  return 

juriidftrctcn,  to  step  back 

jufammenlreffcn,  to  meet  together  ;— 

and  all  separable  verbs  compounded 

with  blciben,  fasten,  fallen,  folgen,  ge* 


©ilen,  to  hasten 
fliegen,  to  fly 
l^ii^jfen,  to  hop 
flettern,  to  climb 


friec^cn,  to  creep 

laufen,  to  run 

retten,  to  ride  on  horseback 

reifen,  to  travel 


fc^wimmcn,  to  swim 
fpringcn,  to  spring 
fleigen,  to  mount 


2G2 


REFLEXIVE  VEBBS. 


Verbs  reflexive  in  German,  but  not  in  English. 

Obs.    When  reflexive  verbs  are  compounded  with  a  separable  prefix, 
they  must  be  conjugated  with  l^aten  (see  154  and  156). 


<Bi6)  anma§en,  dat.  to  presume 
fici^  anne^men,  gen.  to  take  care  of 
fit^  argern,  ukr,  to  be  vexed 
fi(^  auffii^rcnr  to  behave 
fid^  auf^atten,  to  sojourn 
^\i)  auf^atteitr  vlUx,  to  criticize 
ft(^  du§crn,  iiBcr,  to  express  one's  self 
ftd^  bebanfen,  fiir,  to  return  thanks 
{id)  bebenfen,  to  consider 
flc^  bebienen,  gen.  to  make  use  of 
ft(^  befinben,  find  one's  self  (feel) 
ftd^  bcjiel^en  or  jt<^  bcflei§igcn»  to  en- 
deavor diligently 
[id)  begebcn,  to  repair 
ftd^  begebcn*  gen.  to  give  up 
f!c^  be^elfeiif  to  make  shift 
Oc^  beflagen,  ubcr,  to  complain        [of 
[xd)  bemfic^tigen,  ^e/i.totake  possession 
fid)  bejinnen,  gen.  to  recollect 
fid)  bcj^rcbcn,  to  endeavor 
fid)  betragen,  to  behave 
ftc^  betrinfetif  to  get  drunk 
fid)  betruben,  uber,  to  be  afllicted 
ft(^  bitcfen,  to  stoop 
ftc^  einbtlben,  a/^c.  to  be  conceited 
fid)  cinbtlbcitf  dat.  to  imagine 
f!c^  entfernen,  to  withdraw 
jtc^  ent^altcn,  gen.  to  abstain 
fid)  cntf(^liepen,  to  be  determined 
ftd^  crbarmen,  gen.  to  have  mercy 
fid)  crbretflen,  to  dare     [come  to  pass 
fid)  creigneit/  impers.  to  happen,   to 
fid)  ergeben,  to  surrender 
■ftd^  ergeben,  impers.  to  result 
fid)  er^olen,  to  recover 
fid)  crinncrn,  gen.  to  remember 
fid)  crfditen,  to  catch  cold  [hood 

fid)  ernd^rcn,  mit,  to  get  one's  liveli- 


fid)'fxtvitn,  to  rejoice 

|ii^  fugen,  in,  to  comply  with 

fid)  fuxd)\tn,  »oj,  to  be  afraid 

ftc^  gefatten,  to  be  pleased  [dare 

fid)  getrauen,  dat.  to  be  confident,  to 

fic^  grdmen,  uber,  to  grieve 

jtc^  ^uten,  »or,  to  beware  of 

ftcb  irreitr  to  be  mistaken 

ftd^  mifc^en,  to  mix,  to  meddle 

jtc^  nd^cntf  to  approach 

fid^  neigen,  to  incline 

ftc^  nieberlaJTen,  to  settle 

flc^  nieberlegen»  to  lay  down 

fid)  rii^men,  gen.  to  boast,  to  glory 

ftc^  rii^reiif  to  bustle  [ashamed 

fid)  fc^dmen,    »or,   iibcr,  gen.  to   be 

fte^  fd^idtn,  in,  to  comply  with 

ftc^  fc^icfen,  impers.  to  be  becoming 

fid)  fe^nen,  nac^,  to  long  for 

fid)  fe^en,  to  sit  down 

ffd^  fputen»  to  make  haste 

^d)  jlcffen,  to  feign,  to  pretend 

fid)  trcnncn,  to  separate,  to  part 

fid)  tummein,  to  hurry 

fid)  umfet)en,  to  look  about  or  back 

fid)  mttxfitf)tn,  to  venture 

fid)  uereinigen,  to  agree        [to  oflfend 

ftd)  verge^en,  an,  to  fail  in  one's  duty, 

fid)  uxixxtn,  to  lose  one's  way 

fid)  ^erlaJTen,  aiif,  to  rely 

fid)  ^erfantntcln,  to  assemble 

fid)  ijerfe'^en,  to  commit  an  error 

fic^  ijerflellen,  to  dissemble     [resolve 

ftc^  »ome^nicn,  dat.  to  determine,  to 

ftc^  jjorj^ellen,  dat.  to  imagine 

fid)  wibcrfe^cn,  dat.  to  resist 

[id)  wunbern,  uber,  to  wonder 

fid)  jutragen,  impers.  to  occur 


PEEPOSITIONS. 


List  of  Prepositions  with  the  Oases  which  they  govern, 


sin,  on,  at,  to,  dot.  or  ace.  (Less.  68). 

an)latt,  instead  [of],  gen. 

auf,  on,  upon,  dat.  or  ace.  (Less.  68). 

au^,  out  [of],  dat. 

ouper,  except,  outside  of,  dat. 

ki,  by,  near,  witli,  dat. 

bieffeit[^],  on  this  side,  gen, 

burd),  through,  ace. 

entgegen,  towards,  dat. 

fur,  for,  ace. 

gegcn,  against,  towards,  dat. 

gegenuter,  opposite,  dat. 

gema^,  conformable  [to],  dat. 

l^alkrt  or  ^alber,  on  account  [of],  gen. 

l^tnter,  behind,  tZ«^.  or  ace.  (Less.  68). 

in,  in,  dat. — into,  ace.  (Less.  68). 

inncr^alfe,  within,  gen. 

ienfett[a],  on  that  side,  beyond,  gen. 

fraft,  by  virtue  [of],  gen. 

lang^,  along,  ^ew.  <?r  dat.* 

XolvA,  according  to,  gen. 

mit,  with,  dat. 

mittelflf  by  means  [of],  ^<}7». 

narf),  after,  to,  dat. 

notc^fl,  next,  near,  dat. 

nebcn,  beside,  <?a^.  <>r  aee.  (Less.  68). 

net»jl,  together  with,  dat. 

ob,  on  account  [of],  (?a<. 

o^er^alb,  above,  ^ew. 


ol^nc,  without,  ace. 

olngeoc^tet,  see  ungcad^tct* 

famntt,  together  with,  t^. 

feit,  since,  dat. 

fpnber,  without,  oAic. 

Jlatt,  instead  [of],  ^e?i. 

tro^,  in  spite  [of],  ^e/i.  or  dat* 

iil6er,  over,  e?a^.  or  ace.  (Leas.  68). 

urn,  around,  aec. 

unfern,  not  far  from,  gen. 

ungeac^tet,  notwithstanding,  gen. 

unter,  below,  under,  dat.  or  aec. 

(Less.  68). 
unter:^alb,  below,  gen. 
untDcit,  not  far  from,  gen. 
ttermoge,  by  dint  [of],  gen. 
son,  of,  from,  by,  dat. 
»or,  before,  dat.  or  aec.  (Less.  68). 
sermittelft,  see  mitteljl. 
njd^renb,  during,  gen. 
jrcgen,  on  account  [of],  ^e?i. 
toiber,  against,  aee. 
jit,  to,  at,  dM. 
pnad^fl,  next,  6?a<. 
jufolge,  in  consequence  [of],  ^«w.  <?r 

dat.* 
jumtber,  contrary  to,  <fa^. 
jtoifc^en,  between,  dat.  or  ace. 

(Less.  68). 


*  Sanga,  jufolge,  and  tro^,  govern  generally  the  genitive,  but  they  cai 
also  govern  the  dative : 

r,  %xt^  tttciner  9rufft(^t  (dative)  nteincm  flarfcn  ©uc^cn 
flo^  ^oParfeitcn,  noc^  ge^eime  ©c^d^c  \" 

(Schiller,  ''Maria  Stuart"), 


VOCABULARY. 


EXPLANATION    OF    ABBREVIATIONS. 


ad^.  adjective. 

adv.  adverb. 

conj.  conjunction. 

/.  8.  feminine  substantive. 

interj.  interjection. 

mod.  modified. 

m.  8.  masculine  substantive. 

n.  8.  neuter  substantive. 

pi.  plural. 


prep,  preposition. 

pron.  pronoun. 

V.  a.  verb  active. 

V.  a.  and  n.  verb  active  and  neuter. 

V.  aux.  verb  auxiliary. 

XI.  imp.  verb  impersonal. 

10.  ir.  verb  irregular. 

V.  n.  verb  neuter. 

«.  refi.  verb  reflexive. 


Whenever  the  ending  of  substantives  differs  in  the  plural  from  that 
of  the  singular  the  termination  is  given.  The  word  "  modified  "  refers 
to  the  radical  vowels  a,  o,  u,  only.  Proper  nouns  not  spelled  alike  in 
the  two  languages  may  be  found  on  the  last  page  of  the  vocabulary. 


GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH. 


«. 


%oX,  m.  «.,  pi.  -it  eel. 
Slbcnb,  m.  «.,  pi.  -c,  evening. 
STbcnbd,  adv.  in  the  evening. 
okr,  conj.  but. 
a  I  gefc^rieben,  see  o^fd^rciten. 
a  b  ^ngcn,  v.  ir.  to  depend  on. 
a  &  reifen,  v.  a.  to  depart,  set  out. 
a  b  fd^reiben,  v.  ir.  to  copy. 
5lb|tc^t,  /.  8.,  pi.  -en,  intention. 
«bft(|tlicf),  adj.  intentionally.- 
abwed^fclnb,  adj.  changeable, 
a  b  J»cid^cn,  v.  ir.  to  deviate  from. 
a^  \  irUerj.  oh  1 
ad^ten,  v.  a.  to  regard,  esteem, 
^d^tung/  /.  8.  attention,  regards. 


Slffc,  m.  s.,  pi.  -n,  ape,  monkey. 
3le^nlic^fett,  /.  «.,  pi.  -en,  similarity. 
SfengflUc^feit,  /.  8.  fear. 
allein,  adj.  alone ;  conj.  but. 
allcr,  c,  i^,  adj.  all. 
allntdc^ttg,  conj.  omnipotent. 
<xU,  conj.  than,  as,  when. 
al^bann,  adv.  then. 
alfOf  adv.  &  conj.  thus,  so. 
alt,  a^.  old,  aged,  ancient, 
an,  prep.  on.  at,  in,  by,  near. 
anber,  adj.  other,  next, 
anberfcitig,  adv.  on  the  other  hand. 
anbcrn,  v.  a.  refl.  to  change,  alter. 
anber^wo,  adv.  elsewhere. 
Slncrbictcn,  n.  s.  offer. 


VOCABULARY. GERMAN   AND  ENGLISH. 


-u5 


«  n  fattcttf  v.ir.  to  attack. 

Slnfang,  m.  s.,  pi.  -c  &  mod.  beginning. 

c  n  fangen,  v.  ir.  to  begin,  commence. 

ongcne^m,  adj.  agreeable,  pleasant. 

a  n  fleiben,  v.  a.  &  refl.  to  dress. 

a  n  fomntett/  v.  ir.  to  arrive. 

SInfunft,  /.  s.,pl.  -t,  &  «20{f.  arrival. 

a  tt  nel^men,  t>.  ir.  to  accept. 

Slnfd^eiiu  w.  «.  appearance. 

antrageiir  v.  ir.  to  oflfer. 

5lnttt)ort,  /.  «.,  jp?.  -en,  answer. 

ontworten,  v.  a.  to  answer,  reply. 

Qiijic^enr  V.  ir.  to  put  on ;  attract. 

2lpfel,  m.  8.,  pi.  mod.  the  apple. 

Sir  belt,  /.  «.,  pi.  -tn,  labor,  work. 

orbciteiu  v.  a.  &  n.  to  labor,  work. 

Slrbciter,  m.  s.  workman. 

Slrbcitdtifd),  m.  «.,  pi.  -i,  work-table. 

^rm,  m.  s.  arm,  adj.  poor. 

vlrmut^,/.  *.  poverty. 

ortijj,  adj.  pretty,  courteous. 

Slf(^e,  /.  s.,  pi.  -XI,  ashes. 

Sift,  771.  «.,  pi.  -c,  &  «M?(I.  branch. 

Slt^cm,  m.  s.  breath. 

aud)/  cdAy.  also,  too,  likewise. 

5Iue,  /  8 ,  pi.  -n,  meadow. 

auf/  ^r^^.  on,  in,  at,  upon. 

a  u  f  btu^cn,  «.  n.  to  spring  up. 

a  u  f  ttdtttf  V.  a.  to  uncover. 

Slufgak,/.  ».,  p^.  -n,  lesson,  theme. 

0  u  f  ge^citf  «.  iV.  to  untie. 

0  u  flatten,  V.  ir.  to  delay. 

Q  u  f  ^ebcn,  ©.  ir.  to  lift,  or  pick  up. 

a  u  f  mac^ettf  v.  a.  to  open. 

oufhtcrffam,  adj.  attentive. 

a  u  f  fdyauctif  ij.  a.  to  look  up. 

auf  lichen,  v.  ir.  to  rise. 

au fjic^cn,  c.  »V.  to  bring  up;  to 

wind  up. 
augc,  m.  «.,  pf .  -ttr  eye. 


STugcnblitf,  m.  «.,  pi.  -t,  moment. 
ani,  prep,  out  of,  from,  by, 
a  u  5  Qcben,  v.  ir.  to  spend,  expend, 
a  u  d  ge^cn,  -o.  ir.  to  go  out. 
a  u  ^  fleiben,  v.  a.  &  re^.  to  undress, 
a  u  S  rufen#  ©.  ir.  to  exclaim. 
au€  ru^en,  «.  n.  to  rest,  repose. 
a  u  S  fc^lagen,  v.  ir.  to  kick,  to  refuse. 
avii  fe^en,  tJ.  ir.  to  look  like. 
au§crbcm,  adD.  besides,  moreover. 
a  u  a  fe^en,  v.  a.  to  set  out,  find  fault. 
Slu^fid^t,  /.  s.,  pi.  -ttlf  view,  prospect, 
a  u  S  flcllcn,  V.  a.  to  expose ;  censure, 
aui flrctfen,  v.  a.  to  stretch  out. 
Slu^wanbercTf  m. «.  emigrant. 
an^ aenbig,  adv.  outside ;  by  heart. 

S3a«^,  m.  s.,  pi.  -t,  &  mod.  ^rook, 
bacfen*  v.  ir.  to  bako. 
Scidfer,  m.  8.  baker, 
balb,  adv.  soon,  shortly. 
SBaC,  m.  «.,  pi.  -t,  &  «k)d.  ball. 
SBanb,  w.  «.,  p/.  -cr,  &  mod.  volume  ;- 

n.  8.  the  ribbon. 
aSanf,  /.  8.,  pi.  -t,  &  wkwf.  the  ben#h. 
baucn,  v.  a.  to  build. 
b  e  bc(f  en,  v.  a.  to  cover. 
Sebicntc,  m.  s.,  pi.  -n,  servant. 
b  e  burfcn*  v.  ir.  to  need,  want, 
b  e  enbigcn,  v.  a,  to  finish,  terminat 
b  c  fe^len,  fj.  ir.  to  command,  order. 
b  c  ftnben,  v.  refl.  to  find  (to  feel).' 
befletpigcn,  v.  ir.  refl.  to  endeavor, 

apply  one's  self, 
begcgnen,  v.  n.  &  refl.  to  meet,  hap^ 

pen  to. 
beginncn,  v.  ir.  to  begin,  undertake 
beglciten,  ».  a.  to  accompany. 
S3egleiterr  vn.  ».  companion. 


*2P6 


TOCABULARY. GEBMAN   AND    ENGLISH. 


J&tgnf,  m,  8.,  pi.  -<f  notion. 

I  £  '^Itcn,  10.  ir.  to  keep,  retain. 

lei,  prep,  by,  near,  at. 

Iclbe,  adj.  both. 

93cin,  71.  «.,  p?.  -e,  the  leg. 

fcetna^e,  ad/o.  almost,  nearly. 

beifaramen,  adv.  together. 

SBeifpicl,  n.  8.,pl.  -c,  example ;  jum  — , 

for  example. 
Id^iUt  -D.  ir.  to  bite. 
5c!an«t,  adj.  acquainted. 

I  i  flagen^  v.  a.  to  lament,  deplore;  v. 

refl.  to  complain. 

I I  ilmxxitn,  V.  a.  to  press. 
Itdcibigcn,  v.  a.  to  offend. 
I  c  lo^Hcn,  «.  a.  to  reward. 
SBelo^ung,  /.  «.,  pL,  -en,  reward, 
tqnent,  afZ;.  commodious,  convenient. 
S3erg/  w.  «.,  pi.  -t,  mountain. 
IcTijejt,  D.  ir.  to  hide,  conceal. 
Iberilen,  v.  ir.  to  burst. 

SScruf,  m.  8.  calling,  vocation. 
5erii^mt,  adj.  renowned,  celebrated, 
tefc^ciben,  adj.  discreet,  modest. 
SSefd^eiben^cit,  /.  «.  modesty. 
\  e  [c^mu&cn,  «.  a.  to  soil,  dirty, 
©cfea,  m.  8.  broom, 
b  e  jtnncit,  v.  ir.  &  re^.  to  recollect. 
\  e  frijeit,  t.  ir.  to  possess. 
JefTcrn,  v.  refl.  to  better,  improve. 
5  e  forgert,  ^.  <2.  to  take  care;  ©efii^^ftc 
— ,  to  dispatch  business. 
S&cfut^,  m  «.,  ^?.  -c,  visit, 
b  e  f«d|en, «».  a.  to  visit, 
i  c  firafen,  -o.  <;t.  to  punish, 
bcten,  f).  ir.  to  pray,  say  prayers. 
I  c  tragcti,  i>.  ir.  &  r^;/?.  to  behave. 
betroffen,  participle  &  a<Zj.  surprised. 
htrubt,  <M??.   aflaicted;  —  fein,  to 
feel  sad. 


B  c  triigcn,  -».  tV.  to  cheat. 
aSetruger,  m.  «.  cheat. 
Sett,  n.  8.,  pi.  -en,  bed- 
it  e  utt'^eilcn,  v.  n.  to  judge,  criticise. 
aSeutel,  m.  a.  bag,  purse. 
be»or, conj. &  adJ?).  before  ;  —  fl cl^ c n , 

«.  iV.  to  impend,  to  be  about  to 

occur  or  take  place. 
betDcgen,  v.  ir.  to  move,  induce. 
I  e  ttjeincn,  v.  a.  to  we/ep. 
S3e»ci3,  m.  «.,  pi.  ~t,  proof. 
SBewo^ner,  w.  «.  inhabitant. 
b  e  wunbern,  v.  a.  to  admire. 
a3ei»unbcrung,/.«.,|)^.-en,  admiration. 
b  e  ia^len,  ^j.  a.  to  pay. 
bcwuft,  a(Z;.  conscious  ;  fi  c^  — fein, 

to  be  conscious  of. 
biegcn,  v.  ir.  &  refl.  to  bend. 
SBier,  n.  s.  beer, 
bieten,  v.  ir.  to  bid,  offer. 
aSiQet,  n.  «.,  pi.  -e,  ticket. 
93inben,  v.  ir^  to  bind,  tie. 
SBtrne,  /.  «.,  pi.  -n,  pear. 
bid,  conj.  &  flw^iJ.  until,  up  to, 
bitten,  V.  ir.  to  beg,  request, 
blafcn,  V.  ir.  to  blow  (sound). 
23latt,  n.  8., pi.  -ct  &  mod.  leaf, 
blau,  adj.  blue, 
bleibcn,  «.  ir.  to  remain,  stay. 
bleid^,  adj.  pale. 
©lei,  7i.  «.  lead ;  -  jli  f  t ,  w,  «., i)^.  -e, 

lead  pencil. 
bitdfen,  t>.  n.  to  gleam,  look, 
blinb,  adj.  blind ;  -e,  m. «.,  2>^.  -n,  blind 

I)crson. 
S3It^,  w.  «.,  pi.  -e,  lightning. 
bUljer,  t\  n.  to  lighten. 
bIo§,  aw^'.  naked,  bare ;  — adf).  only 
Slumc,  /.  «.,  i??.  -n,  flower,  -ntopf» 

m.  8.,  pi.  -e/  &  mod.  flower-pot. 


VOOABULAEY.— GEHMAN   AND   ENGLISH. 


267 


Sluten,  «.  n.  to  bleed. 
aSobeitf  m.  s.  ground,  bottom. 
bo^^aftr  adj.  malicious,  wicked. 
fQo&^dU  f.  8.,  pi.  -tn,  maliciousness, 

wickedness. 
S3ote,  m.  s.,  pi.  -n,  messenger, 
bratctt,  V.  ir.  to  roast. 
brauc^eiTf  «.  a.  to  use,  need. 
braun,  adj.  brown. 
bred^en,  «.  ir.  to  break, 
breitr  adj.  broad,  wide, 
brcnncn,  «.  ir.  to  bum. 
S3rief,  m,  s.,  pi.  -t,  letter ;  -b  o  t  c ,  w. 

«.,  p?.  -n,  postman ;  -  taf^e,  /.  «., 

pi.  -n,  portfolio, 
bringen, «).  ir.,  to  bring. 
23rob»  w.  8.,  pi.  -c,  bread. 
SBriiif Cr  /.  «.,  p^.  -n,  bridga 
aJruber,  m.  s.,  pi.  mod.  brother. 
Srunnen,  m.  s.  well,  spring. 
SSud^,  n.  8.,  pi.  -ix,  &  mod.  book;  -  b  i  n* 

ber,m.«. bookbinder;  -^anblcr, 

m.  8.  bookseller;  -labeiif  m.  s. 

bookstore;  -flabe,  w.  «.,  pi.  -n, 

letter  (of  the  alphabet). 
SSuc^fcr/.  «.,  ^^.  -n,  gun,  box. 
S3urflc,  /.  8.,  pi.  -n,  brush. 
a3utter,/.«.  butter. 

o;. 

damcrabr  m.  8.,  pi.  -en,  comrade. 
Sanbibat,  m.  «.,  ^?.  -en,  candidate. 
Sapellc,  /  8.,  pi.  -n,  chapel 
Sapitol,  n.  8.  capitol. 
S^or,  m.  8.,  pi.  -e,  &  mod.  chorus ; 

n.  8.  choir. 
d^rifl,  m.  8.,  pi.  -en,  Christian. 
C^ronif,/.  «.,  jp^  -en,  chronicle, 
ftigarre,/.  8.,  pi.  -n,  cigar. 


Sttrone,/. «.,  pi.  -n,  citron. 
Soncert,  ti.  «.,  p^.  -c,  concert. 

2). 

!Da,  «<?«>.  there,  where ;  corj.  when, 

becausa 
bafitr,  a<f«.  for  that,  for  it. 
bagegen,  adv.  against  that, 
ba^er,  adv.  thence ;  conj.  therefore. 
Dame,  /.  8.,  pi.  -n,  lady. 
bamit,  adv.  therewith ;  conj.  that. 
banfen,  v.  a.  to  thank, 
bann,  adv.  then, 
baran,  adv.  thereon,  in  that ;  -lie^* 

g  e  n ,  to  care  about  or  to  care  for. 
barauf,  adv.  thereupon,  on  it,  at  it, 

after  that. 
barum,  ad/o.  therefore. 
ba§,  conj.  that. 
ba»on,  adv.  thereof,  of  that;  -lau* 

f  en,  «.  ir.  to  run  away 
bcmnad^,  conj.  therefore,  then,  con- 
sequently, 
benfen,  v.  vr.  to  think, 
benn,  conj.  than,  but,  for. 
be^gletc^en,  adv.  likewise. 
be^^alb,  adv.  for  this  reason ;  cor^. 

therefore, 
be^wegen,   adv.  conj.  therefore,    on 

that  account. 
bejlo,  c(mj.  the ;  -m  c^ r ,  the  more. 
!Dic^ter,  m.  8.  poet. 
t)ieb,  m.  8.,  pi.  -e,  thief. 
bienen,  v.  n.  to  serve. 
Diener,  m.  8.  servant. 
2)ienflmabd^en,  n. «.  maid-servant. 
bingen,  v.  ir.  to  hire.  [stand. 

T)\ntt,f.  8.  ink;  Dlntenfap,  n.  8.  ink- 
bo(^,  conj.  yet,  however,  but,  for  all 

that. 


268 


VOCABULARY. — GERMAN   AND  ENGLISH. 


bonncrn,  v.  imp.  to  thunder. 
2)orf,  n.  8.,  pi.  -tx,  &  mod.  village, 
bort,  borten,  adv.  there,  yonder. 
brcfc^cn,  «..  ir.  to  thrash, 
bringcttr  v.  ir.  to  penetrate,  urge,  com- 

I)el. 
bro^cttf  V.  n.  to  threaten, 
brudE  en,  v.  a.  to  print  ;hxuitn,  v.  a. 

to  pinch,  press. 
X)uft,  m.  s.  vapor,  fragrant. 
bumm,  adj.,  dull,  stupid, 
bunfcl,  adj.  dark, 
bunfeit/  «.  n.  &  impers.  to  seem. 
burd^,  jprep.  through,  by. 
b  u  r  d^  reifen*  v.  sep.  to  travel  through  ; 

ins^.  to  travel  over, 
b  u  r  c^  fc^Iagcit/  «.  to  pierce ;  to  blot, 
b  u  r  d^  fe^cn,  «.  to  carry  through. 
2)urfl,  m.  8.  thirst ;  -l  g »  cwZ;.  thirsty; 

-en,  v.  a.  to  thirst. 
X-u^enb,  n.  a.  dozen. 


CbcnMlb,  n.  a.  image. 

etcnfo — Oi\^t  adv.  as — as. 

e^e,  adv.  ere,  before. 

e^rcrbietig,  adj.  reverent. 

cigcn,  a^.  own,  proper. 

©ilc,  /.  «.  haste. 

ein  wenig,  adv.  a  little. 

einanber,  adj.  one  another. 

cinbilben,  v.  refl.  to  imagine. 

cinerfeit^,  adv.  on  the  one  side. 

cittfallen,  v.  ir.  to  occur. 

cinigf  adj.  sole,  only. 

einjigf  ad;,  only,  alone. 

(Sifen,  n.  s.  iron;  -b  a  :^  n ,/. «.  rail-road. 

Slenb,  n.  s.  misery. 

(£ffc,  /.  «.,  ^^.  -n,  yard  ' 

aittxn,  pi.  parents. 


@m}5fang,  m.s.  receipt. 

c  m  p  fangen,  v.  ir.  to  receive. 

Smpfanger,  m.  «.  recipient. 

c  m  p  fe^Ien,  «.  ir.  to  recommend. 

e  mp  ftnben,  ij.  ir.  to  perceive,  feel. 

enblic^,  adj.  finite ;  odiJ.  at  last. 

Snfel,  m.  «.  grandson. 

entblo§en,  v.  a.  to  lay  bare,  uncover. 

©ntfcrnung,  /.  5.,  pi.  -en,  distance, 

e nt l^alten,  v.  ir.  to  contain ;  v.  refl.  to 
abstain. 

©nt^altfamfeit,  /.  8.  abstinence. 

entret§en,  v.  ir.,  to  tear,  snatch  from. 

e  n  t  rinnen,  v.  ir.  to  run  away. 

e  n  t  fc^Iafen,  v.  ir.  to  fall  asleep,  die. 

e  n  t  fd^Iie§en,  v.  ir.,  to  decide. 

Sntf(^lu§,  m.  8.  resolution. 

entfpred^en,  v.  ir.  to  answer,  to  cor- 
respond to. 

entweber-ober,  conj.  either-cr. 

e  rbleid^en,  v.  ir.  to  grow  pale,  to  die. 

(£rbe,/.  8.  earth ;  -n I eb c n ,  n. «.  life 
on  the  earth. 

e  r  fasten,  v.  ir.  to  experience,  learn. 

©rfal^rung,/.  «.  experience. 

Srfrifd^ung,  /. «.  refreshment 

erfutten,  v.  a.  to  fill,  satisfy. 

er^alten,  v.  ir.  to  preserve,  obtain,  re- 
ceive. 

erfennen,  v.  ir.  to  perceive,  recognize. 

erfiirett,  v.  a.  to  choose,  elect. 

eriangen,  v.  a.  to  acquire. 

erlauben,  v.  n.  to  permit. 

erlcrnen,  v.  a.  to  learn,  acquire. 

crlofd^en,  v.  ir.  to  go  out,  extinguish. 

ermattcn,  v.  a.  &  n.  to  weary,  tire,  fa- 
tigue. 

ermorbcn,  v.  a.  to  murder. 

eroBcrn,  «.  a.  to  conquer,  to  take,  to 
gain. 


VOCABULABY. GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH. 


erfd^allen,  v.  ir.  to  resotmd. 
erfci^retfenf  v.  a.  to  terrify,  frighten. 
erjl,  adv.  first,  at  first, 
erflaunen,  v.  n.  to  be  astonished. 
Crtrog,  m.  ».,  pi.  -c,  &  m<>c?.  produce, 

profit. 
crtragcn,  v.  ir.  to  bear. 
trtod^tn,v.ir.  to  consider,  reflect  upon. 
erwa^nen,  v.  a.  to  mention, 
crwartcn,  v.  a.  to  expect, 
emicbcrnf  v.  a.  to  reply. 
crjd^Ien,  v.  a.  to  narrate. 
Grja^Iung*  /.  s.,  pi.  -en,  narration. 
(£fel»  w.  ».  donkey,  ass. 
eJTcn,  V  ir.  to  eat. 
ciicr»  pron.  your. 

cttuad,  pron.  something,  somewhat. 
ewtg,  acfj.  eternal. 
(ixm^d,  n.  s.  example. 

ga^ren,  !>.  tr.  to  go  in  a  carriage, 
drive,  to  carry. 

Salfc,  m.  8.,  pi.  -n,  falcon. 

fatten,  v.  ir.  to  fall. 

fattd,  <w^.  in  case  (that). 

fangen,  v.  ir.  to  catch. 

%axU,  f.  «.,  ^.  -n,  color. 

^a§f  n.  «.,  p?.  -cr,  &  modi,  barrel. 

fafl,  adv.  almost. 

faut,  adj-  idle,  lazy. 

%avi^,f.  8.,  pi.  -t,  &  mod.  fist. 

fed^ten,  v.  ir.  to  fence. 

Oeber,  /. «.,  pi.  -n,  pen,  feather ;  -mcf<» 
fer,  n.  a.  pen-knife. 

fc^Ien,  V.  n.  &  imp.  to  err,  fail,  mis- 
take, to  ail,  be  the  matter  with. 

Seller,  m.  8.  fault,  mistake. 

Seinb,  m.  8.,  pi.  -c,  enemy. 

gelbf  n.  8.,  pi.  -er»  field ; — ^au,  m.  s. 
agriculture. 


S^nfler,  n.  8.  window. 

ferner,  adj.  &  adv.  further. 

fcrtig,  adj.  ready. 

fettf  adj.  fat. 

%mx,f.  8.,  pi.  -en,  figure. 

ftnben,  v.  ir.  to  find. 

%'mQix,  m.8.  finger;  -l^ut,  m.8.  thimbla 

gif^,  m.  8.,  pi.  -t,  fish. 

glaf(^e,  /.  ».,  pi.  -n,  flask,  bottle. 

%Ux^,  n.  8.  flesh,  meat. 

jTei^ig,  adj.  diligent. 

gliege,  /.  «.,  pi.   -n,  fly. 

Piegen,  ??.  ir.  to  fly. 

flie^en,  d.  ir.  to  flee. 

fliepen,  i).  ir.  to  flow. 

5Io§,  m.  s.,pl.  t,  &  wo<f.  raft. 

^liigel,  m.  «.  wing. 

glur,/.  8.,  pi.  -en,  field,  plain,  level 
ground. 

glu^,  m.  «.,  pi.  -<,  &  morf.  river. 

folgen,  v.  n.  to  follow,  obey. 

folglid^,  adj.  subsequent ;  ad/v.  &  conj. 
consequently. 

foltcrn,  V.  a.  to  torment>  rack. 

fort,  adv.  away. 

Srage,  /.  ».,  pi.  -n,  question. 

fragen,  v.  a.  to  ask. 

Srau,  /.  «.,  j3^.  '^n,  woman. 

i^raulein,  n.  8.  (diminutive  of  Frau), 
Miss. 

fret,  adj.  free. 

^^rei^eit,  /.  «.,  pi.  -en,  freedom. 

freJTen,  v.  ir.  to  eat  (applied  to  ani- 
mals). 

Sreube,  /.  «.,  pi.  -n,  joy. 

Sreunb,  m.8., pi.  -e,  friend;  -f(]^afl> 
/.  «.,  p^.  -en,  friendship. 

frieren,  v.  ir.  to  freeze. 

frifd^,  <w?;.  fresh ;  adv.  newly. 

frj)'§,  (c<?mp.  fro^er),  adj.  joyfoL 


270 


VOCABDLABY. QEBMAJT   AND   ENGLISH. 


Srud^t,  /.  8.  pi.  -e,  &  mod.  fruit; 
fruc^tbar,  adj.  fruitful. 
fru^,  a^.  &  adv.  early. 
Srupiidf,  n.  s.  breakfast, 
fru^jlutf cn»  V.  a.  to  breakfast. 
%\x3)$,  m.  «.,  pi.  -t,  &  mod.  fox. 
fallen,  v.  a.  to  feel,  perceive. 
fii^ren,  v.  a.  to  lead, 
futtcn,  V.  a.  to  fill. 
fiir,  prep.  for. 
^ux^t,  f.  8.  fear. 

Sfurfl,  m.  8.,  pi.  -en,  prince,  duke. 
Su§,  w.  «.,  p^.  -e,  &  ?w<?d.  foot ;  8U  — f 
on  foot. 


®abcl,  /.  «.,  jp^.  -itf  fork. 

gd^ren,  «.  *>.  to  ferment. 

ganj,  am^".  whole,  entire  ;  adt.  quite. 

Oartcn,  m.  8.,  pi.  mod.  garden. 

®artncr>  m.  8.  gardener. 

gebdren,  c.  ir.  to  bring  forth. 

geben,  v.  ir.  to  give. 

QJcbet,  n.  «.,  ^.  -c,  prayer. 

9  c  bictcn,  i>.  ir.  to  command. 

OeMrge,  ti.  «.  chain  of  mountains. 

gebrad^t,  brought. 

®ebrauc^#  m. «.,  p?.  -c,  &  mod.  use. 


©eburt^tag,  m.  8.  birth-day. 
gcbct^cn,  v.  ir.  to  prosper. 
®cbi(^t,  71.  «.,  pi.  -t,  poem. 
g  e  fattcitf  ».  ir.  to  please, 
gefangen,  ac0.  imprisoned. 
Oefangcne,  m.  8.  prisoner. 
Oefdngnip,  n.  «.,  pi.  -e,  prison. 
®efoIge,  ti.  «  attendant. 
(?Jefu^l,  7i.  «.  feeling, 
gcgcn,  prep,  towards,  against. 
QcgcKiiber,  prep,  opposite. 


g  e  prt,  heard ;  belongs. 

g  e  ^ox^^txit  V.  n.  to  obey. 

g  e  ^mn,  v.  n.  to  belong. 

ge^orfam,  adj.  obedient. 

®eijl,  m.  8.,  pi.  -er,  ghost,  spirit. 

gelb,  adj.  yellow. 

®elb,  n.  s.,  pi.  -tx,  money. 

©elegen^eitf  /. «.,  pi.  -en,  occasion. 

®ele:^rte,  m.  «.,  pi.  -n,  learned  man. 

gelingeit/  v.  ir.  to  succeed. 

geltcn,  v.  ir.  to  cost,  to  be  valuable. 

©cmdibe,  n.  8.  picture,  painting. 

©emufCr  n. «.  vegetables. 

gcmut^lid^,  adj.  good-natured,  kind, 
hearted. 

genau,  adj.  precise. 

General,  m. «.,  pi.  -e,  &  mod.  general. 

gcncfcn,  v.  ir.  to  recover, 
gcniegctt,  t>.  ir.  to  enjoy,  to  eat. 
genomntcn,  taken, 
gcnbt^igt,  adj.  obliged, 
gcnug,  adj.  &  adv.  enough. 
®cnup,  m.  8.pl.  -c,  &  mod.  enjoyment 
®cograb^ic,  /.  a.  geography. 
®cpd(f,  n.  8.,  pi.  -e,  baggage,  lug- 
gage, 
ge  ratten,  v.  ir.  to  come,  hit  or  fall 

upon,  to  thrive, 
gerec^t,  a^f;.  just. 

gem,  adv.  gladly,  with  pleasure. 
®cfanbte,  m.  «.,  pi.  -n,  ambassador. 
®efang,  m.  8.,  pl.-i,  &  m^d.,  song. 
gcfd^e^en,  v.  ir.  to  happen. 
®cf(^enf,  n.  8.,pl.  -c,  gift,  present. 
®cfc^id^te,  /.  8.  history,  narrative. 
gcf(^i(ft,  adj.  clever,  skillfuL 
gcfc^opcn,  see  f(^tc§en. 
gcfprod^cn,  see  fpred)cn. 
®eflaU,  /.  «.,  pi.  -en,  form. 
gejlern,  adv.  yesterday. 


VOCABULARY. ENGLISH   AND   GERMAN. 


271 


gcfunb,    adj.    healthy;   -^cit,  /.    8. 

health. 
©e»aUer,  m.  8.,  pi.  -n,  godfather. 
®cn)inn,  m.  s.,  gain,  profit, 
gewinneiir  «.  ir.,  to  gain,  win. 
geiDDl^nen,  v.  a.  k  imp.  to  accustom. 
©ewo^n^eit,  /.  «.,  pi.  -en,   custom, 

habit. 
gcwo^nlid^f  adj.  customary. 
fiicrig/  adj.  eager. 

Qtc^cn,  T.  ir.  to  pour.        [soned  cup 
®ift,  n.  a.  poison  ;  -bc(i^cr,  w.  «.  poi- 
glcinjen,  v.  a.  to  shine,  glitter, 
glaukn,  V.  a.  to  believe, 
gleic^,  adj.  equal,  even,  like;  adv. 

equally. 
gleid)en,  xi.  ir.,  to  resemble. 
gleic^ttJO^If  con;,  nevertheless, 
gleitciif  15.  zV.  to  glide,  slide, 
glitnmcn,  v.  ir.  to  glimmer,  glow, 

sparkle. 
®Iocfe,/.  «.,i??. -n,  bell, 
glucflid),  adj.  fortunate,  happy. 
®oIb,  -en,  adj.  gold. 
®ott,  m.  8.,  pi.  -cr,  &  mod.  God. 
©rab,  n. «.,  p?.  -cr,  &  mod.  grave, 
graben,  u.  ir.  to  dig. 
gretfen,  ©.  ir.  to  catch. 
@raf,  m.  8.,  pi.  -en,  count. 
©rauen,  n.  s.  horror ;  v.  n.  &i  im/p-  to 

abhor,  fear, 
©rcia,  m.  8.,  pi.  -c,  old  man. 
0ro§,  adj.  great,  grand  ;-»ater,  grand- 
father ;  -mutter,  grandmother. 
®ruft,  /.  8.,  pi.  -c,  &  mod.  grave, 

tomb. 
griin,  adj.  green, 
griincn,  v.  n.  to  become  green  ;  to 

flourish, 
©ulbctt,  7n  8.  florin  (a  coin). 


gitntlig,  adj.  fevorable. 
©iite,  /.  s.  kindness, 
gutig,  adj.  good,  kind. 


^aax,  n.  8.,  pi.  -c,  hair. 

^ageln,  «.  imp.  to  hail. 

l^alb,  adj.  half. 

|>al^,  m.  8.,  pi.  -c,  &  mod.  neck. 

^altcn,  V.  ir.  to  hold,  keep,  cling  ta 

jammer,  m.  8.  hammer. 

^anb,  /.  8.,  pi.  -e,  &  wodJ.  hand ; 

-fc^u'^,  m.  8.  glove, 
^anblung,  /.  «.  action, 
'(langcn,  v.  ir.  to  hang. 
'^angen,  v.  a.  to  hang. 
^art,  adj.  hard. 
|>afc,  m. «.,  j9^.  -n,  hare. 
^a§,  m.  «.  hate,  hatred. 
laffen,  v.  a.  to  hate. 
^^\\^,  adj.  ugly, 
^auen,  v.  ir.  to  strike. 
^aupt,  n.  8.,  pi.  -cr,  &  mod.  head ; 

-jlabt,  /.  a.  capital ;  -wort,  n.  9. 

noun,  substantive. 
^aul)tfad^ll(^,  adv.  chiefly,  mainly. 
^au5,  n.  8.,  pi.  -cr,  &  mx)d.  house; 

— l^altung,  /.  8.  household. 
^ekn,  V.  ir.  to  lift, 
^ecr,  n.  8.,  pi.  -c,  army. 
|)ecrbe,/.  8.,  pi.  -n,  herd,  flock. 
^cft,  n.  8.,  pi.  -c,  copy-book. 
^etbc,  m.  «.,  pi.  -n,  heathen. 
^eilen,  v.  n.  to  heal. 
|)cimat^,/.  8.  home. 
^ei§en,  u.  ir.  to  call,  command. 
^clb,  m.  8.,  pi.  -en,  hero, 
^clfcn,  V.  ir.  to  help, 
^cll,  adj.  clear,  light. 


272 


VOCABULARY. — GERMAN    AND   ENGLISH. 


|>clm,  m.s.,pl  -Cr  helmet, 
^emb,  n.  «.,  pi.  -en,  sliirt. 
^enfer,  m.  s.  hangman. 
|)enHe,  /.  «.  hen. 

Ijtxau^f  adv.  out ,  -bringen,  v.  ir.  to 
bring  to  light. 

^etna(^»  adv.  after,  afterwards, 
ptrr,  m.  «.,  jpi.  -en,  master.  Sir. 

^errlid),  adj.  beautiful. 

|>erj,  n.  «.,  pi.  -en,  heart. 

l^eute,  adv.  to-day. 

l^ier,  adv.  here;  -auf,  hereupon. 

^intmcl,  w.  s.  heaven. 

l^in,  adv.  thither,  along;  -at>,  adv. 
down ;  -gegen,  adv.  on  the  con- 
trary ;  -fc^Ieidjen,  v.  ir.  to  sneak  or 
steal  to  a  place. 

l^incin,  adv.  in,  into ;  -legen,  v.  a.  to 
place  into  something. 

l^inter,  prep,  behind,  after. 

^t^,  /.  «.,  pi.  -n,  heat. 

^od^  (^o^er,  am  ^oi-^flen),  ad^.  high. 

'^ofen,  V.  n.  to  hope. 

^ijfli^,  adj.  polite. 

|>b|c,  /.  a.,  pi.  -n,  hight. 

^o^le,  /.  s.,  pi.  -n,  cavern,  pit. 

^olen,  V.  a.  to  fetch. 

$015",  n.  s.,  pi.  -er,  &  mod.  wood. 

l^olitd)t,  adj.  woodlike,  wooden. 

l^orcn,  V.  a.  to  hear. 

p^fii),ac?/.  pretty. 

.^ugcl,  m.  8.  hill. 

Pu^n,  n.  8.  hen. 

NJulnd^en,  n..  8.  little  chicken. 

^unb,  w.  «., pi.  -c,  dog. 

"hunger,  m.  a.  hunger. 

fcungern,  v.  a.  to  hunger. 

l^ungT'ig,  adj.  hungry. 

^utr  m.  a.  pi.  e,  &  mod.  hat. 


I  3.  vVowel). 

Smmer,  adv.  always, 
in,  prep,  in,  into. 
inbem,  conj.  while,  when,  as. 
inbep,  inbeiTen,    conj.  in  the  mean 
I     time. 

Sn^U,  m.  a.  contents, 
innen,  adv.  inside,  within. 
Snfeft,  n.  a.,  pi.  -en,  insect, 
intereffant,  adj.  interesting. 
incn#  V.  n.  &  refi.  to  err. 

3.  (Consonant) 
3a,  adv.  yes. 

jagcn,  v.  a.  to  chase. 

Sager,  m.  a.  hunter. 

Sa^r,  n.  a.,  pi.  -c,  year, 

Sa^re^ieit,  /.  a.  season. 

jammern,  v.  n.  to  lament. 

je,  adv.  ever. 

jcber,  c,  e^,  pron.  every. 

icbo(!^,  conj.  yet,  however. 

Semanb,  pron.  somebody. 

ic^t,  adv.  now. 

3ube,  m.  a.,  pi.  -n,  Jew. 

Sungling,  m.  a.,  pi.  -c,  youth,  young 


^afee,  m.  a.  coffee. 

^afig,  m.  a.,  pi.  -e,  cage. 

^aifer,  m.  a.  emperor ;  -  t^um  n.  s. 

empire, 
^alte,  /.  a.,  pi.  -n,  cold,  coldness, 
^amm,  m.  a.,  pi.  -e,  &  mod.  comb. 
^anind^en,  n.  a.  rabbit, 
^dfe,  m.  a.  cheese, 
^a^c,  /.  a.,  pi,  -n,  cat. 
faufen,  v.  a.  to  buy. 


VOCABULARY. GERMAN    AND    ENGLISH. 


273 


Jtaufmann,  m.  s.,  pl.-lmtt,  mer- 
chant. 

faunt,  adv.  scarcely,  hardly. 

feittr  Reiner,  pran.  no,  not  any,  none. 

fcnncn,  v.  ir.  to  know. 

^inb,  n.  «.,  pi.  -er,  child. 

finbifd),  adj.  childish. 

^ird)e,  /.  «.,  pi.  -n,  church. 

^irfc^e,  /.  s.,  pi.  -n,  cherry. 

^Wttf-  «.,  pi  -n,  class. 

itla»ier,  n.  «.,  pi.  -i,  piano. 

^Icib,  n.  8.y  pi.  -tx,  dress. 

^leiberfc^ranf,  m.  s.  wardrobe. 

fleiben,  v.  a.  to  dress. 

flein,  adj.  little,  small. 

fllmmen,  v.  ir.  to  climb. 

fUngcitf  V.  ir.  to  soimd. 

flojjfcn,  V.  a.  to  knock. 

StncAt,  m.  «.,  pi.  -n,  boy. 

^ntc,  n.  8.  knee. 

^oc^,  m.  8.,  pi.  -if  &  mod.  cook. 

foc^cn*  D.  a.  &  n.  to  boil,  cook. 

Coffer,  m.  s.  trunk. 

ilij^ler,  m.  s.  collier. 

fonimen,  v.  ir.  to  come. 

^onig,  m.  ».,  pi.  -t,  king ;  -retd^,  m>.  8. 
kingdom. 

5^opf,  m.  «.,  p^.  -«,  head ;  -t»c^,  head- 
ache. 

Stt)Xl,  m.  8.,  pi.  &  mod.  basket. 

5lorpcr,  m.  s.  body. 

foflbar,  adv.  costly,  precious. 

^oflen,  pi.  expensea 

fof^cn,  V.  n.  to  cost,  taste. 

^raft,  /.  ».,  pZ.  -€,  &  wwd.  force, 
strength. 

^ragen,  m.  «.  collar. 

franf,  adj.  sick. 

frcifi^cn,  v.  n.  to  scream,  shout. 

J^rcujf  n.  ».,  jp?.  -c,  cross. 


fried^cit/  tJ.  iV.  to  creep,  crawl, 
^ricg,  m.  «.,  pi.  -t,  war. 
5lud)e,  m.  5.,  pi.  -n,  kitchen, 
jluc^citr  m.  8.  cake. 
^u^,  /.  8.,  -i,  &  mod.  cow. 
tvi^l,  adj.  cool. 
^iinilkr,  m.  8.  artist. 
fur,\ltd),  adv.  shortly,  lately, 
^utf^er,  m.  8.  driver. 


Cabctranf,  refreshing  drink. 

lad^cn»  V.  n.  to  laugh. 

lad^erlid^,  adj.  laughable,  ridiculoua 

laben,  v.  ir.  to  load,  lade,  charge. 

loJ^m,  {comp.  lnl;nter),  adj.  lame. 

Campe,  /.  s.,  pi.  -n,  lamp. 

Canb,  w.  ».,  jp^.  -c  r,  &  mod.  land, 
country ;  -mann,  coimtryman, 
farmer. 

lang,  adj.  long,  tall. 

laffcn»  ?j.  ir.  to  let,  to  permit. 

Idjlig,  a<??.  burdensome,  trouble- 
some. 

latcinifd),  a<Z;.  Latin. 

laufen,  v.  ir.  to  run. 

Ccbcn,  w.  «.  life  ;  v.  n.  to  live. 

Icc^jen,  V.  n.  »or  2)ur|l-,  to  be  very 
thirsty. 

leer,  adj.  void,  empty. 

Icgeu,  V.  a.  lay,  put. 

Scorer,  m.  s.  teacher. 

Se'^rflunbc,/.  8.,  pi.  -n,  lesson. 

Ccibr  m.  8.,  pi.  -e  r,  body. 

!2eic^nanir  m.  8.  corpse. 

letd^t,  adj.  light,  easy ;  adv.  easily, 
lightly. 

leic^twcSf  adj.  wanton,  thoughtless. 

Iciest jtnnig,  adj.  light-minded. 


274 


VOCABULARY. GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH. 


Setb,  n.  8.  sorrow ;  -f  e i n,  -t | u n,  to 

cause  sorrow  or  regret, 
leiben,  v.  ir.  to  suffer, 
lei^cn,  V.  ir.  to  lend. 
IGeintDanb/  /.  s.  linen,  linen-clotli. 
Ccftton,  /.  8.,  pi.  -e  n,  lesson. 
Icrnenf  t.  a.  &  n.  to  learn. 
Ufcn,  V.  ir.  to  read, 
le^t,  adj.  last. 
10 cute,  pi.  persons,  people, 
lieb,  adj.  dear,  beloved. 
Iteben^ipurbig,  adj.  lovely,  amiable. 
£ieb,  n.  s.,  pi.  -cr,  song, 
liegcn,  v.  ir.  to  lie,  place ;  baran- 

care  about, 
linfr   adj.  left, 
tinf^,  adv.  to  the  left, 
lotcn,  V.  a.  to  praise. 
loUnimxt^,  adj.  praiseworthy. 
Sod^,  n.  8.,  pi.  -c  r,  &  mod.  hole. 
£  off  el,  m.  8.  spoon. 
Sootfe,  m.  8.  pilot. 
CiJlDe,  m.  8.,  pi.  -n,  lion. 
liigen,  v.  ir.  to  lie,  tell  a  falsehood. 
2vL%  f.  8.,  pi.  -t,  &  mod.  pleasure 

delight ;  -^aben,  to  have  a  mind. 


to 


aw. 

3)?ac^cn,  v.  a.  to  make. 

3)?dbc^en,  n.  ».  maiden,  girl. 

SWagb,  /.  «.  pi.  -c,  &  wod  maid-ser- 
vant. 

5Wal,  71.  8.  time  (with  numerals.) 

SKaler,  m.  8.  painter. 

SWan,  iTM^e/.  pron.  one;  somebody, 

they,  people,  see  Less.  57,  Obs.  I. 

manci^mal,  ad'c.  sometimes. 

©lantel,  m.  s.,  pi.  &  Tnod.  cloak. 

SWatrofe,  m.  «.,  jp?.  -n,  sailor. 

5Wauer,/.  «.,p^.  -n,  wall. 


SWaurer,  m.  s.  mason. 

SWau^,  /.  8.,  pi.  -e,  &  mod.  mouBe. 

5D?ebaifle, /.  «.,  p?.  -n,  medal. 

SWeer,  n.  8.  ocean. 

me^r,  adj.  &  a<?«.  more. 

meiben,  ■».  i>.  to  shun. 

9)?eUe,  /.  «.,  ^?.  -n,  mile. 

metnen,  v.  n.  to  intend,  mean. 

m\%  adv.  most. 

SWeijler,  m. «.  master. 

melfeit/  ^.  t>.  to  milk. 

Wltxi^ii,  m.  8.,  pi.  -en,  man,  person. 

merfen,  ?j.  a.  to  mark,  perceive. 

meffen,  v.  ir.  to  measure. 

SKetatt,  n.  «.,  jp?.  -e,  metaJ. 

SWe^ger,  «i.  «.  butcher. 

miet^en,  t).  a.  to  hire,  rent. 

3«il(^,/.  «.  milk. 

mipbraud^en,  ??.  a.  to  misuse. 

SWiJTet^ater,  m.  s.  evil-doer,  criminal. 

mipfaUen,  v.  ir.  to  displease. 

mit,  prep,  with,  by,  at,  on ;  -bringert/ 
V.  ir.  to  bring  along  or  with;  -gc=' 
]|en,  -».  i>.  to  go  along  or  with  any 
one ;  -tl^eilen,  v.  communicate. 

ntitl^tn,  conj.  therefore,  consequently. 

SJiittag,  m.  8.  noon,  midday. 

SWittag^eJTen,  n.  s.  dinner. 

9)?ittel,  n.  8.  means,  remedy. 

mitt^eilen,  v.  a.  to  imi)art,  communi- 
cate. 

5W6bel,  pi.  furniture. 

moglid^,  adj.  possible. 

CWonat,  m.  s.,  pi.  -e,  month, 

5Wonb,  m.  8.  moon. 

Wloc^,  n.  8.  moss. 

5Kor9en,  m.  «.  morning;  ad/9,  to- 
morrow. 

3)?or9ent^au,  w.  «.  morning  dew. 

miibc,  ^wZ?  weary,  fatigued. 


VOCABULARY. GERMAN    AND    EIIGLISH. 


275 


fWiittcr,  m.  8.  miller. 

^Xi[x\,   f.  s.  music;    -le^rcr,  m.  s. 

music-teacher. 
SKut^,  m.  8.  spirit,  courage. 
Tluttn,/.  8.,  pi.  &  Tnod.  mother. 


Vta&,  prep.  &  adv.  after;  -af^mtn, 
•0.  a.  to  imitate  ;  -bent,  adv.  after- 
wards; conj.  after,  when;  -ben* 
fen,  V.  ir.  to  reflect ;  -\)cx,  adv.  after- 
wards ;  -IdlTig,  adj.  careless,  negli- 
gent ;  -mittag,  m.  «.  afternoon. 

nail  unb  na^,  adv.  by  and  by. 

Vlad^xii^t,  f.  8.,  pi.  -en,  intelligence, 

ffia^t,  f.  8.,  pi.  -e,  &  mod.  night. 

'iRahd,  f.  8.,  pi.  -n,  needle. 

^Rame,  m.  s.,  pi.  -n,  name. 

9?arr,  m.  8.,  pi.  -en,  fooL 

ndrrifd^,  adj.  foolish. 

neben,  prep.  near. 

ne^men,  v.  ir.  to  take. 

nein,  adv.  no. 

nennen,  v.  ir.  to  nama 

S'iefl,  n.  8.,  pi.  -cr,  nest. 

neu,  adj.  new. 

muli6),  adv.  newly,  lately. 

SRi(^te,  f.  8.,  pi.  -n,  niece. 

n^t^,  pron.  nothing. 

md^t^bellowentger,  adv.  nevertheless. 

nie  or  niemal^,  adv.  never. 

S'ilen.anb,  pron.  nobody,  no  one. 

nirgenb  («),  adv.  nowhere. 

nod^,  amj.  still,  yet ;  -einmal,  once 
more. 

^t\%  f.  8.,  pi.  -e,  &  mod.  need. 

nun,  adv.  &  conj.  now,  at  present ; 
-ya,  well  then. 

nur,  adv.  only,  but 


fR\i^,  f.  8.,  pi.  -e,  &  mod.  nut ;  -93aum, 

m.  8.  nut-tree. 
9?u^en,  m.  8.  use,    utility ;    nii^cn, 

V.  a.  &n.  to  make  use  of,  to  be  of 

use. 
nu^Iid^r  adj.  usefuL 

o. 

Db,  conj.  whether,  if;  -glctd^,  eonj. 

-fd^on,  conj.  -njo^l,  conj.  though, 

although. 
oben,  adv.  above. 
Dh%  n.  8.  fruit. 
Dcean,  m.  8.  ocean. 
Dc^g,  m.  8.,  pi.  -txu  ox. 
obcr,  conj.  or. 
Del,  n.  8.  oil. 

Dfen,  m.  s.,  pi.  &  mod.  stove,  oven. 
offen,  adj.  open ;  -bar,  «(^".  manifest 
Dfftjier,  m.  s.,  pi.  -i,  officer, 
ijffnen/  v.  a.  to  open. 
oft,  adv.  often,  oft. 
D^eim,  m.  s.  uncle. 
o^ne,  prep,  without 
Dnfcl,  m.  8.  uncle. 
Dper,  /.  «.  opera. 
Drt,  m.  5.,  _p^.  -er,  &  mod.  place. 

9)aar,  ti.  «.,  p?  -e,  pair,  couple. 
3)acf,  m.  s.,  pi.  -c,  &  /«<?<?.  pack. 
9)ala|l,  m.  *.,  ^^.  -e,  &  mod.  palace. 
3)antcffelf  m.  «.,  pi.  -n,  slipper. 
3)arf,  m.  s.  park. 
5)fa^l,  m.  ».,  2?^.  -e,  &  «?^.  pile^ 

stake, 
pfeifen,  v.  ir.  to  whistle. 
9) fell,  m.8.,pl.  -e,  arrow. 
5>fcnnig,  m.  s.,  p^.  -e,  penny. 
9)fcrbemaTft/  m.  8.  horse-market 


276 


VOCABULARY GERMAN   AND    ENGLISH. 


5)flattje»  /  8,  pi.  -n,  plant. 
pjTegen,  v.  a.  to  take  care  of. 
—  V.  n.  to  be  wont  to  do. 
5)p[i<^t,/.  8.,  pi.  -en,  duty. 
3)^ilofo^^ic,  /.  8.  philosophy. 
9)iano,  3)i(«iino,  n.  8.  piano. 
9)ortlon,  /.  8.,  pi.  -en,  portion. 
g)o|l,/. «.  post. 

9)raf[bent,  m.  ».,  pi.  -en,  president. 
*J)rci^,  m.  «.,  pi.  -e,  price,  prize. 
3)rtnj,  m.  s.,  pi.  -en,  prince ;  — cfiln/ 

/.  «.  princess. 
3>rofeffor,  m.  «.,  p?.  -en,  professor. 

D. 

Quatffalber,  wi.  *.  quack. 

Dual,  /.  «.,  pi.  -en,  torment,  pain, 

grief. 
Quelle,  /.  8.,  pi.  -n,  spring,  fountain, 
quetten,  v.  ir.  to  spring,  gush. 

m. 

fftah,  n.  8.,  pi.  -er,  &  mod.  wheel. 

9tanb,  m.  s.,  pi.  -er,  &  mod.  edge. 

ratten,  v.  ir.  to  guess,  counsel. 

Sfledynung,  /.  #.,  i>^.  -en,  account,  bill. 

ref^tferttgen,  ^.  refl.  to  justify. 

xi^ti,  adv.  to  the  right  hand. 

rcben,  v.  a.  &  n.  to  speak,  talk. 

SReben^art,  /.  s.,  pi.  -en,  phrase,  ex- 
pression. 

rebli-t,  adj.  honest. 

?{eblicf)fett,  /.  8.  honesty,  uprightness. 

iRegen,  m.  s.  rain  ;  -bogen,  m.  a.  raii)- 
bow. 

regieren,  v.  a.  to  reign,  govern. 

reiben,  v.  ir.  to  rub. 

xz\^,  adj.  rich. 

3lett^,  n.  «.  reign,  kingdom ;  -t^um, 
m.  8.  riches. 

icif,  adj.  ripe  ;'-en,  t.  n.  to  ripen. 


rein,  adj.  clean,  pure. 

9leife,/.  8.,pl.  -n,  journey. 

reifen,  v.  n.  to  travel. 

rci^cn,  v.  ir.  to  tear. 

rciten,  v.  ir.  to  ride  on  horseback. 

rcnncn,  v.  ir.  to  rxm. 

reucn,  v.  n.  &  imp.  to  rei)ent. 

ried>cn,  v.  ir.  to  smell. 

fRinc;,  m.  «.,  j9?.  -c,  ring. 

rlngen,  v.  ir.  to  ring,  to  wrestle. 

ringd,    adv.     around ;    -umt>cr,    all 

around. 
rinncn,  v.  ir.  to  run,  to  flow., 
9?orf,  m.  8.,  pi.  -c,  £i  mod.  coat. 
ffto^i,/.  s.,  pi.  -n,  (diminutive  SRo^ 

lein)  rose. 
fRo^,  n.  8.,  pi.  -e,  horse. 
rot|,  a^/-  J'sd. 
fUMk^x,  f.  8.  return. 
rufen,  v.  ir.  to  call. 
ru^en,  v.  n.  to  rest. 
?Ru^m,  m.  8.  renown,  fame. 
runb,  {camp,  runber),  adj.  round. 

©acf)c,  /.  8.,  pi.  -n,  thing. 

fagen,  -o.  a.  to  say,  tell. 

3al5, 71.  «,  salt. 

fammcln,  v.  a.  to  gather. 

<Sanb,  m.  8.  sand ;  -wiitle,/  /f.  desert 

©arg,  m.  8.,  pi.  -e,  &  m^d.  cofiln, 

faufcn,  T.  ir.  to  drink  (of  animals). 

faugcn,  v.  ir.  to  suck. 

faucr,  adj.  sour. 

fc^cibli^,  adj.  injurious. 

S^dfer,  m.  s.  shepherd. 

fitaffcn,  V.  ir.  to  effect,  created 

fcfwllen,  V.  n.  to  sound. 

Sc^anbe,  /.  s.  shame. 

fd)dnbUd^,  adj.  shamefoi. 


VOCABULABY. GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH. 


2/7 


fc^a^eti/  V.  a.  to  value, 
fi^ccrctt,  V.  ir.  to  shear, 
f^cibcn,  V.  ir.  to  separate. 
<S^em,  m.  «.  shine ;  appearance, 
fd^cmcn,  v.  ir.  to  shine ;  appear 
fc^eltcn,  V.  ir.  to  chide,  scold, 
fd^enfcitr  V.  a.  to  make  a  present, 
fti^icfen,  v.  a.  to  send ;  v.  rejl.  to  be 

suitable. 
f(^ieben,  v.  ir.  to  push. 
f(^ic§cn»  V.  ir.  to  shoot. 
©(i^iffcr,  7W.  8.  sailor. 
fc^inben,  v.  ir.  to  flay, 
©(^tnfen,  m.  *.  ham. 
<Sc!)la(^t,  /.  «.  battle. 
fc^lafen,  v.  ir.  to  sleep. 
fd^Iafeitb,  participle,  sleeping. 
fdjiagen,  v.  ir.  to  strike,  beat. 
fc^lcd^t,  adj.  bad,  mean. 
fc^lei^cn,  v.  ir.  to  sneak. 
[(i^Icifen,  V.  ir.  to  grind. 
fc^lci§en,  v.  ir.  to  slit,  split. 
f(^Uc§en,  V.  ir.  to  lock ;  to  shut. 
fc^lingen,  v.  ir.  to  sling. 
<B^lo^,  n.  8.  lock  ;  castle. 
<S(^IuffeI,  m.  8.  key. 
fd}mei§en,  v.  ir.  to  throw,  cast. 
fc^meljcn,  v.  ir.  to  melt,  smelt, 
©d^merj,  m.  s.,  pi.  -en,  pain,  ache. 
[(i^mu^ig,  adj.  dirty, 
fd^naubcn,  v.  ir.  to  snort  (of  horses) 
<B6)Mt,  m.  8.  snow* 
fci^nciben,  n.  ir.  to  cut. 
©c^nciber,  m.  8.  tailor, 
fd^ncien,  ■».  imp.  to  snow» 
fc^nett,  adj.  quick. 
fd^on,  ac?®.  already. 
©c^on^eit,  /.  ».,  p?.  -en,  beduty. 
©c^ote,  /.  «.,  p?.  -n,  pea. 
©c^ranf,  m.  s.  pi.  &  mod.  wardrobe 


f($raubcn,  v.  a.  to  screw. 

<Sd)recf,  (en),  m.  s.  terror. 

id^xidtw,  V.  a.  to  frighten, 

fdjrciben,  v.  ir.  to  write. 

fdbrctcn,  v.  ir.  to  cry,  scream. 

[c^reiten,  ■©.  ir.  to  stride. 

I'djulbig,  adj.  guilty. 

fc^ulblo^,  (wZ;.  guiltless. 

©c^urff,  7w.  «.,  ^^.  -en,  knave. 

fc^wad),  adj.  weak. 

©(i^roager,  7?i.  ».  brother-in-law. 

fd^waren,  t.  ir.  to  fester. 

[(^wetten,  v.  ir.  to  swell. 

fd^tter,  adj.  difficult,  heavy. 

fc^roimmen,  v.  ir.  to  swim. 

fc^njinbcn,  v.  ir.  to  disappear. 

fc^wingen,  v.  ir.  to  swing. 

fc^njoren,  v.  ir.  to  swear. 

©egen,  m.  8.  blessing. 

fcgncn,  v.  a.  to  bless. 

fc|cn,  D.  ir.  to  see. 

fc^r,  adv.  very,  much. 

feiben,  adj.  silken. 

feit,  prep.  &  conj.  since ;  -ivdrt^,  ado. 

aside. 
felbfl,  proTi.  self;  adv.  even, 
felten,  a<fi>.  seldom, 
fenbcn,  v.  ir.  to  send. 
fe^en,  v.  ir.  to  set. 
fiieben,  v.  ir.  to  seethe,  boiL 
©teg,  m.  8.  victory, 
ftegfn,  v.  n.  to  conquer. 
©ilkr,  n.  8.  silver. 
fingcn,  v.  ir.  to  sing, 
ftnfen,  v.  ir.  to  sink, 
ftnnen,  v.  ir.  to  think, 
ft^en,  V.  ir.  to  sit. 
©flaue,  m.  «.,  j?^.  -n,  slave. 
fo,  adv.  &  c<m;.  so,  thus ;  if,  so — b&. 
fofort,  foglcici^,  fl<ft>.  immediately 


278 


VOCABULABY. GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH. 


©ol^tt,  m,  8.,  pi.  -t,  &  mod.  son. 
folc^,  pro?i.  such. 
©olbat,  m.  s.,  pi.  -en,  soldier, 
fonbcrrt/  v.  a.  to  separate ;  co7^.  but. 
©onnc,  /.  8.  sun;  -{n)^d)im,  m.  8. 

parasol, 
fonfl,  adv.  else,  otherwise. 
fpat,  a4?-  &  <^^^- 1*"-^®- 
fpajicTcn  (gc^en),  v.  n.  to  walk. 
©pctf,  m.  8.  bacon 
fpcienr  D.  ir.  to  spit, 
fpcifcn,  «.  n.  to  eat. 
©picgcl,  w.  8.  looking-glass. 
©piel,  fi. «.,  pi.  -t,  play,  game ;  -jeug, 
w. ».  play-things ;  -pla^,  w.  5.  play- 
ground, 
fpiclen,  V.  a.  &  ?i.  to  play, 
fpinncn,  v.  ir.  to  spin. 

©pi^c,/.  «.,^;.  -n,  point. 

fpleipen,  v.  ir.  to  split. 

©pott,  m.  8.  mockery. 

©prac^e,  /, .'?.  speech,  language. 

fpre(^en,  v.  ir.  to  speak. 

fpriepcn,  v.  ir.  to  sprout. 

fprtngen,  i).  ir.  to  spring,  leap. 

©pruc^,  m.  s.,  pi.  -c,  &  inod.  pro- 
verb. 

©pur,  m. «.,  _p?.  -en,  track. 

©tac^el,  m.  s.  sting. 

8ta^t,  m.  8.  steel. 

*3taII,  w.  8.,  pi.  -c,  &  morf.  stable ; 
-htdi^t,  m.  8.  groom. 

ftart,  imperfect  of  fl  c  r  b  c  n. 

Stcirfc,  /.  8.  strength. 

^e^en,  v.  ir.  to  prick,  pierce. 

©tecfnabel,/.  8.,  pi.  -n,  pin. 

fie^en,  v.  ir.  to  stand. 

jli^Icn,  V.  ir.  to  steal. 

jlcigcn^  v.  ir.  to  step,  ascend. 

BttUt*  f.  8.,  pi.  -n*  place. 


fletten,  ®.  a.  to  put,  place. 

flerben,  ®.  *r.  to  die ;  jlcrknb,  |)arti- 

ciple,  dying. 
fierblid^,  adj.  mortal, 
©tern,  m.  s.,  pi.  -c,  star.  * 

jletd,  adv.  always. 

fiieben,  v.  ir.  to  fly  quickly ;  to  start, 
flitt,  adj.  stUl,  calm. 
©timmc,  /.  8.,  pi.  -n,  voice. 
flinfen,  v.  ir.  to  stink. 
©time,  /  8.,  pi.  -n,  forehead. 
flopen, «).  ir.  to  thrust,  push. 
firafen,  v.  a.  to  punish. 
©tral^I,  m.  «.,  p^.  -en,  ray,  beam. 
©trape,  /.  ».,  pi.  -n,  street, 
©traud^,  m.  «.,  2>^.  -e,  &  m^d.  shrub, 

bush, 
fhcid^en,  «.  ir.  to  rub. 
jlrciten,  «.  ir.  to  quarrel,  fight. 
©tu(f,  n.  8.,  pi.  -e,  piece. 
©tul^l,  m.  8.,  pi.  -e,  &  mod.  chair. 
©tunbe,  /,  8.,  pi.  -n,  hour,  lesson, 
©turm,  m.  8.,  pi.  -e,  &  mod.  storm, 
fuc^en,  V.  a.  to  seek,  search. 


2;abcln,  v.  a.  to  blame. 

Slafel,  /.  «.,  ^^.  -n,  blackboard. 

Sag,  m.  «.,  ^^.  -e,  day. 

tagen,  v.  imp.  to  dawn. 

tanjen,  v.  n.  to  dance. 

tapfer,  adj.  brave. 

Slapfcrfelt,  /.  8.  bravery,  valor. 

iTafd^c,  /.  «.,  p?.  -n,  pocket. 

Safc^entuc^,  n.  8.  handkerchief. 

Saffe,  /.  «.,  p?.  -n,  cup. 

%Oi%t,  f  s.,  pi.  -n,  paw,  claw. 

Sau&e,  /.  «,,  pi.  -n,  dove,  pigeon. 

3;dd^,  m.  8.,  pi.  -e,  pond. 

3:cmpcl,  m.  8.  temple. 


VOCABULARY. GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH. 


279 


3;i^al,  n.  s.y  pi.  -cr,  &  Trwd.  dale, 
valley. 

%^it,  m.  s.  tea. 

X^eil,  m.  8.,  pi.  -c,  part. 

tlfieilen,  v.  a.  to  divide. 

i\^z\U,  adv.  partly. 

t^eucr,  adj.  dear. 

S^ier,  71.  «.,  jp?.  -i,  animal. 

Z^ox,  n.  s.,  pi.  -c,  gate ;  m. «.,  pi.  -tn, 
fool. 

t^oric^t,  adj.  foolish. 

%^xdm,  f.  8.,  pi.  -Xit  tear. 

t^un,  V.  ir.  to  do. 

%^mt,  f.  8.,  pi.  -n,  door. 

ticf,  adj.  deep. 

Itefc,  /  «.  pi.  n,  depth. 

Xifd^ler,  m.  s.  joiner,  cabinet-maker. 

Joc^ter,  /.  8.,  pi.  mod.  daughter. 

Sob,  m.  8.  death. 

tobten,  ^.  a.  &  re/Z.  to  kill. 

Sonne,  /.  «.,  p?.  -n,  barrel. 

Sopf,  w.  ».,  ^^.  -e,  &  mod.  pot. 

tragcn,  t.  ir.  to  bear,  carry. 

tranfen,  v.  a.  to  water. 

Sraum,  m.  s.,  _p^.  -c,  &  mod.  dream. 

traurig,  adj.  sad. 

treffen,  v.  ir.  to  hit ;  to  meet. 

treikn,  v.  ir.  to  drive ;  to  practice 

trcten,  v.  ir.  to  tread,  step. 

trcu,  adj.  true,  faith/W/  -lo  3,  ac?;. 

faithfe«s. 
triefotf  -0.  ir.  to  drip,  drop, 
trinfen,  v.  ir.  to  drink. 
trotfen,  «^j.  dry. 
Sropfen,  m.  s.  drop, 
triigen,  «,  ir.  to  deceive. 
Sugenb,  /  s.  virtue ;  -^ft,  am^*.  vir- 
tuous. 
Sprann,  m.  «.,  pi.  -en,  tyrant. 


u. 

Uekl,  n.  8.  evil ;  a^Z;.  evil,  ill. 
iiben,  v.  a.  to  exercise,  practise, 
ubcr,  prep,  over ;  adv.  on,  upon,  be- 
yond. 
ii  b  e  r  bli(f  en,  «.  a.  to  survey ;  to  over- 
look. 
iibcrbie^,  adv.  moreover,  besides. 
ii  b  e  r  laufen,  v.  ir.  (separable)  to  nm 
over ;  (inseparable)  to  importune. 
Uebcrmap,  ti.  s.  excess. 
iibermorgcn,  adv.  day  after  to-morrow, 
u  b  e  r  fc^cn,  ^.  n.  to  leap  over ;  v.  a. 

to  translate. 
Ueberfe^ung,  /.  s.,  pi.  -en^  translation, 
it  b  e  r  treffen, '».  ir.  to  excel. 
ubcriicugen,  v.  a.  to  convince,  con- 
vict. 
ubrigen^,  adv.  moreover. 
Ufcr,  n.  8.  bank,  shore. 
U^r,  /.  8.,  pi.  -en,  watch ;  -matter,  m. 

8.  watch-maker, 
u  m  geben,  v.  ir.  to  surround, 
umge^en,  v.  ir.   (separable)    to  go 

around  ;  (insep.)  to  avoid, 
u  m  fe'^ren,  v.  n.  (sep.)  to  return ;  v. 

a.  (insep.)  to  turn  up. 
u  m  fd)Iagcn,  v.  n.  to  overset ;  to  turn 

over, 
u  m  menben,  v.  ir.  to  turn ;  to  invert, 
nngcad^tet,  prep,  notwithstanding, 
unten,  adv.  below,  beneath, 
u  n  t  e  r  gel^cn,  v.  ir.  (neut.)  to  go  down, 

perish ;  (act.)  to  undergo, 
itnter^altenb,  adj.  interesting. 
Untcr^altung,  /.  «.,  pi.  -en,  conver- 
sation, 
unterjoc^en,   v.  a.  to  subdue,    sub- 
jugate. 
Unterrtd)t,  m.  8.  instruction. 


280 


VOCABULARY. GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH. 


tt  n  t  e  r  fu(3^cn,  n.  a.  to  examine. 
UttteTt^ait/  m.  s.,  pi.  -en,  &  adj.  sub- 
ject, 
unterwcgg,  adv.  by  or  on  the  way. 

tktisorltc^ttgfeit,  /. «.,  pi.  -en,  careless- 


Unwa^r^cit,  /.  «.,  pi.  -en,  untruthful- 


2}eild)cn,  ti.  «.  violet. 
» e  r  a  hebcn,  v.  a.  to  agree  upon. 
» e  r  bergen,  v.  ir.  to  conceal. 
»  c  r  beffern,  v.  a.  to  improve. 
» e  r  bieten,  v.  ir.  to  forbid. 
»erberben,  v.  ir.  to  spoil ;  to  corrupt. 
»erbicncn,  v.  a.  to  deserve. 
»crbrte§en,  v.  imp.  ir.  to  displease, 
» er cimgen,  v.  a.  unite,  join;  v.  refl. 

to  agree. 
»erf!nflern,  v.  n.  to  darken. 
Sjergeffcn,  v.  ir.  to  forget. 
SJergniigen,  n.  «.  pleasure,  delight. 
»er^tnbern,  «.  a.  to  hinder. 
S^erfauf,  m.  «.,  ^^.  -e,  &  mocf.  sale. 
»erfe|rt,  ac?;.  perverted,  perverse. 
»  c  r  laffen ,  v.  ir.    to  leave  ;  to  rely 

upon. 
verlaumben,  v.  a.  to  calumniate. 
»erltcrcn,  v.  ir.  to  loose. 
SJerlufl,  m. «.,  p^.  -c,  loss, 
scrntfigctt,  u.  tr.  to  be  able;  n.  «. 

ability,  property. 
»erntut^en,  v.  a.  to  suppose,  presume, 
tier  ratten,  n.  ir.  to  betray. 
»erriitfen,  i).  a.  to  move. 
»erf(^teben,  adj.  different. 
»erfc^tt)enben,  vi.  a.  to  squander. 
» crf(^tttnben,  t>.  »>.  to  disappeaif. 


»  e  r  fprci^cn,  v.  ir.  to  promise ;  v.  reJL 
to  misspeak. 

» e  r  fle^cn,  v.  ir.  to  understand. 

» e  r  fuc^en,  i).  a.  to  attempt. 

ijert^eibigen,  v.  a.  to  defend. 

SJ  e  r  traucn,  ti.  5.  confidence ;  v.  n.  to 
trust ;  V.  a.  to  entrust. 

»ertro(fnen,  «.  ti.  to  dry  up. 

»erurfad)en,  v.  a.  to  cause. 

t)  e  r  njunben,  v.  a.  to  wound. 

SJerwunberung,  /.  s.  astonishment. 

BerttJunfc^ung,  /.  «.,  j9^.  -en,  impre- 
cation. 

» e  r  jei^en,  i).  ir.  to  pardon. 

S?ctter,  m. «.,  ^i.  -n,  cousin. 

»iel,  adj.  &  adv.  much. 

sielme^r,  adv.  rather. 

33oIf,  n.  s.,  pi.  -tt,  &  mo(f.  people. 

UOlhrcid),  adj.  populous. 

»ott,  ((kw?^.  »oUer),  «(^'.  full. 

i)or,  prep.  &  adv.  before,  for,  from. 

sorig,  adj.  former,  last. 

»  0  r  fommcn,  v.  ir.  (separable)  to  oc- 
cur; seem. 

S^ormittag,  m.  8.  forenoon. 

y  0  r  fe|en,  v.  ir.  to  take  care,  to  fore- 
see. 

SPtubcr,  adv.  over,  past, 

»ortrcffIic^,  adj.  excellent. 

uomdrt^,  adv.  forward. 

SGBaci^fen,  v.  ir.  to  grow, 
wagen,  v.  a.  to  venture. 
9Ba^I,  /.  Si  choice. 
wal^Ien,  v.  a.  to  choose, 
wa^nfinnig,  adj.  mad,  crazy. 
i\)a^rne^men,«?.t>.to  observe,  improve 
Sa^r^eit,  /. «.,  p^.  -en,  truth. 


VOCABULABY. GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH. 


281 


joal^rfd^cinli^,  adv.  probably. 

SBaife,  /.  «.,  pi.  -n,  orphan. 

SSalD/  m.  s.,  pi.  -er,  &  mod.  wood, 
forest. 

SBaUnup,/. «.  walnut. 

SSanb,/.  s.,pl.  -e,  &  mod.  wall,  par- 
tition. 

SBanberer/  m.  s.  wanderer,  traveler. 

»anbern,  v.  n.  to  wander,  traveL 

J»ann,  conj.  &  adv.  when. 

Xoaxm,  adj.  warm. 

ttarten,  v.  n.  to  wait. 

Warum,  adv.  why. 

t»af(!^cn,  V.  ir.  to  wash. 

toekn»  «.  iV.  to  weave. 

JBctier^  c<?W;;.  neither;  ttjcbcr-ttod^' 
neither-nor. 

SBcg,  m.  5.,  j?/.  -c,  way,  path. 

XotoS^xdiU,  V.  a.  to  send  away. 

tt)cibll(i^,  adj.  female. 

toti^tn,  V.  ir.  to  give  way,  yield. 

h)cil#  conj.  while,  because. 

SBetn,  m.s.,  pi.  -e,  wine. 

mifcn,  V.  ir.  to  point  out,  show 

toeiffoQcn,  v  a.  to  prophesy. 

tocit,  <w?;.  distant,  far 

2BeIIc,  /.  «.,  jpZ  -n,  wave. 

S55cU,  f.  8,pl.  -en,  world 

Jocnbcn,  ^.  z>.  to  turn 

ttjcnig,  adj  &  ado  little,  few. 

toenigf^en^,  adv.  at  least. 

tocnn,  conj~  when,  if;  -auc!^,  -glcii^f 
-f<^on,  though,  although. 

X0ix1)tn,  V.  ir,  to  raise  soldiers  ;  sue. 

toerfcn,  v.  ir.  to  throw,  cast. 

SEBcrf,  71.  «.,  pi.  -c,  work,  deed. 

SBcrtl^,  m.  8.  value. 

l»c§!^afi>f  «rf?).  why,  wherefore. 

SBcttcr,  n.  «.  weather. 

Wie,  adv.  how  ;  conj.  as,  like;  -au<!^# 


-Wo|I,   though,  although ;  -l»iel| 

how  much  ? 
tDiebcr,  adv.  again,  anew. 
Wiebergcbctt,  v.  ir.  to  return, 
toicgen,  v.  a.  to  weigh ;  to  rock. 
icilbf  adj.  wild. 

2BiIIe(n),  m.  a.,  pi.  -n,  will,  purpoea 
SSinb,  m.  «.,  pi.  -e,  wind. 
ttinben,  v.  ir.  to  wind,  twist. 
airfcn»  v.  n.  to  operate  \v.a.U)  effect. 
totrflid^,  a<^'.  real ;  adv.  really 
tt>»frcn»  V.  ir.  to  know. 
SBittwe,/.  8.,  pi.  -n,  widow. 
tvo,  <wfo.  where ;  conj.  if,  in  case. 
SCoc^e,/.  «.,  2^^,  -n,  week. 
ttofcrn,  conj.  if. 
ttcfur,  adv.  for  what. 
tt)0^er,  n)o^in»  adv.  whence ;  whither. 
SBo^l,  n.  8.  welfare ;  adj.  well. 
tto^lfcil,  adj.  cheap. 
Wo^nen,  v.  n.  to  dwell,  live. 
SCo^nung,  /.  «.,  _p^.  -en,  dwelling. 
2Bolfe,/.  «.,jp^. -n,  cloud. 
SBoUc,/.  «.  wool. 
»onad),  a(?».  whereafter, 
rooran,  adv.  whereat,  whereon. 
worauf,  adv.  whereon, 
ttorawd,  adv.  out  of  which. 
SBort,  n.  ».,  p^.  -er,  &  mM.  word. 
SBortcrbu(^,  n.  a.  dictionary. 
ttjpruber,  adv.  whereupon. 
tt>oi?on,  adv.  whereof. 
njunbern,  v.  n.  refl.  to  be  astopishftd 
»unfc^en,  v.  a.  to  wish. 
SBurnt.  7n.  «.,  pi.  -er,  &  mod.  worm 

3fl^n,  w.  «.,7)^.  -€,  &  mod  tooth. 

jartlid^,  a<?;.  tender,  kind. 

3aum,  w.  s.,  ;>2.  -e,  &  7?io(?.  bridle. 


282 


VOCABUIiAEY. — QEBMAN    Aim   ENGLISH. 


Qti^tn,  n.  s.  sign. 

geigcn,  v.  a.  to  show. 

jei^en,  v.  ir.  to  accuse. 

Beit,/.  8.,  pi.  -en,  time. 

Beitung,  /.  «.,  pi.  -en,  newspaper. 

Belt,  n.  8.,  pi.  -en,  tent. 

i  e  r  breci^en,  v.  ir.  to  break. 

jerlegen,  v.  a.  to  disjoin,  dissect. 

Berlegung,  /.  8.  dissection. 

jerrcipcn,  v.  ir.  to  tear. 

J  er  jloren,  v.  a.  to  destroy. 

Berflorung, /.  8.  destruction. 

jte^cn,  v.  ir.  to  draw,   march;  to 
move. 

jicmlici^,  adj.  moderate;   adv.  tole- 
rably. 

Bimmer,  n.  8.  room,  chamber. 

ju,  prep,  to,  at,  in,  on. 

i  u  bringen,  «.  i>.  to  bring  to ;  to 
away  (time). 


Butfcr,  m.  a.  sugar. 

juerjl,  adv.  first,  at  first. 

jufrteben,  adj.  contented. 

Bug,  m.  8.,  pi.  -e,  &mod.  procession, 
draught. 

J  umactien,  v.  a.  (separable)  to  shut. 

Bunge,  /. «.,  pi.  -n,  tongue. 

juriicf,  adv.  back,  backwards;  -be^ 
gleiten,  v.  (inseparable)  to  accom- 
pany back;  -geben,  v.  ir.  (separable) 
to  return ;  -fe^ren,  ■».  a.  (separable) 
to  return ;  -fc^id en,  v.  a.  (separable) 
to  send  back,  return. 

J  u  fct;liepen,  v.  ir.  (separable)  to  lock 
up. 

Bujlanb,  m.  s.  state,  condition. 

juweilen,  adv.  at  times. 

jwar,  C(?^j.  certainly,  indeed. 

jroingcn,  v.  ir.  to  force,  constrain. 

Bn>ifl#  wi.  «.,jp/.  -C/  dissension,  strife. 


VOCABULARY. 


ENGLISH    AND    GERMAN. 


A. 


Abdicate,  v.  aBbantcn. 
Abhor,  V.  »erabf{^cucn;  fi(^  grauen. 
Able  (to  be),  v.  vermogen,  fonnen. 
About,  prep,  urn ;  adv.  ungefd^r. 
Above,  prep,  itber,  ohm,  ober^alb. 
According  (to),  j^rep.  nac|. 
Account  (on— of*),  prep,  rocgcn* 
Account,  s.  bie  Diec^nung. 
Accuse,  V.  jei^en. 
Accustom,  V.  fic^  gewij^ncn. 
Acquire,  v.  crlangen. 
Action,  8.  bie  ^anblung. 
Admire,  v.  Immhtxn, 
Afflicted,  a(^.  betrubt. 
After,  prep,  nad^,  nad^bem ;  -noon,  s. 
ber9?a(!^mittag:  -wards,  conj.  m^i^" 

Again,  atZv.  tt)icber. 

Against,  prep,  gcgen,  wibcr. 

Aged,  adj.  alt,  beia^rt. 

Agree  (upon),  u  ft(^  scrabrebeil. 

Agreeable,  adj.  angene^m. 

Air,  s.  bie  8uft. 

Almighty,  «<?;.  atlmad^tig. 

All,  adj.  all'^  not  at  all,  ganj  unb  gar 

itid^t;  all  around,  rtng^  uml^cr. 
Almost,  fl^v.  beina'^c. 
Alone,  adv.  atlein. 
Already,  adv.  fd^on. 


Also, «(???.  aud^. 

Alter,  V.  anbern. 

Although,  conj.  obgleid^,  oBfd^oiu 

Always,  adv.  immer. 

Ambassador,  8.  bcr  ®efanbte. 

Amiable,  adj.  lieben^wurbig* 

Among,  prep,  untcr* 

Ancient,  adj.  ttU. 

Animal,  «.  ba^  I^icr. 

Answer,  tj.  antwortcn* 

Ape,  8.  bcr  5lfe, 

Appearance,  s.  ber  ©c^ein. 

Apply, «.  anwenben,  nac^fuc^cn. 

Army,  8.  bad  $ccr. 

Around, prep.  «nt;  all-,  ringd  um^cr* 

Arrival,  8.  bie  Sfnfunft. 

Arrive,  v.  anfomnten. 

Arrow,  s.  ber  5JfeiI. 

Artist, «.  ber  ^iinflter* 

As,  conj.  n>k,  aU,  ba. 

Ascend,  v.  flclgen,  ^tnauffleigen* 

Ashes,  5.  bie  Slfc^e. 

Ask,  V.  fragen,  bitten. 

Astonished  (to  be),  v,  jld^  IflJUtlbmt* 

At,  prep,  bet,  an,  auf,  ju. 

Attempt,  i?.  \)erfud^cn. 

Attentive,  adj.  aufmerffam* 

Attract,  V.  anjie'^en. 

Away,  adv,  »eg,  fort* 


284 


VOCABULABY. — ENGLISH   AND   GERMAN. 


Bad,  adj.  f<^Icd^t. 

Bag,  8.  ber  SSeutcI. 

Baggage,  8.  bad  ®epa(!. 

Bake,  v.  bacfcn. 

Baker,  8.  ber  S3a(fer. 

Bank,  s.  bad  Ufcr. 

Basket,  «.  ber  ^ort. 

Battle,  «.  bic  ©(J^lac^t. 

Boat,  'P.  fc^lagcn. 

Beauty,  8.  bie  Sc^onl^eU. 

Because,  cory.  n>ciL 

Bed,  8.  bad  SBctt. 

Beer,  «.  bad  S3ier. 

Before,  prep.  »or,  cl^c,  bc»or. 

Beg,  x).  bitten. 

Begin, «.  anfangen. 

Beginning,  8.  ber  Slnfang. 

Behave,  v.  fi(|  betragcn. 

Behind,  prep,  ^intcr. 

Believe,  v.  glaubcn, 

Bell,  8.  bic  ®mt. 

Belong,  u  gepren* 

Below,  adv.  unten. 

Bench,  «.  bie  S3anf» 

Bend,  ^.  biegen. 

Beside,  besides,  ^«p.  au§cr»  au§erbe»t. 

Betray,  v.  serraf^en. 

Between,  prep.  jtt)ifd^en. 

Bid,  t.  bieten,  gebteten. 

Bill, «.  bie  SRcd^ttung* 

Bind,  t).  btttben. 

Birth-day,  «,  ber  ©eburWtag. 

Bite,  V.  bei§en. 

Black,  flMfj.  fc^warj* 

Blame,  v.  tabcln. 

Bless,  i?.  fegnen. 

Blessing,  s.  ber  ©egctt* 

Blow, «.  blafen. 

Blue,  a<^*.  blau. 


Boat,  8.  \i(ii  S3oot 

Body,  8.  ber  ^ijrper,  Seib. 

Boil,  V.  fod^en. 

Book,  «.  bad  a5u(^;  -binder,  ber  ©uc^-- 

binber ;  -dealer  or  -seller,  ber  33uc^ 

pnbler ;  -store,  ber  S3uc^laben* 
Both,  adv,  beibe. 
Bottom,  8.  ber  Soben. 
Bough,  8.  ber  21)1. 
Box,  8.  bie  S3ii(^fe. 
Brave,  ad;,  tapfcr. 
Bravery,  s.  bie  lapferfeit. 
Break,  v.  brcc^en*  jerbred^en. 
Breakfast,  s.  bad  griibjhic!;  c.  frii^ 

jliicfen. 
Breath,  8.  ber  STt^em. 
Bridge,  8.  bie  S3rurfe. 
Bring,  ^.  bringen;  -along,  mitbringtn; 

-forth,  gebaren;  -to  light,  'Kraud* 

bringen. 
Brook,  8.  ber  SBad^. 
Broom,  s.  ber  SSefcn. 
Brother-in-law,  8.  ber  ©d^Wagcr. 
Brown,  ac?;.  braun. 
Brush,  8.  bie  S3iirfle. 
Build,  i?.  bauen. 
Burdensome,  adj.  laflig. 
Bum;  T.  brennen,  »erbrenncn. 
Burst,  ??.  bcrjlen. 
But,  conj.  a\>tx,  allcin,  fonbern. 
Butcher,  8.  ber  gleifd^er,  «We^er. 
Butter,  8.  bic  ©utter. 
By,  prep,  an,  aud,  bci/  uon. 


Cage, «.  ber  ^ffifig. 
Call,  X).  nifen;  to  be  called,  ^cipen. 
Calling,  8.  ber  33eruf. 
Calumniate,  v.  verlaumbcn. 


VOCABULARY. — ENGLISH   AND    GERMAN. 


285 


Cane,  s.  bcr  (Stocf. 

Capital,  s.  bic  ^auptflabt. 

Captain,  s.  ber  ^apitdn.  [baran  licgen. 

Care,  take  -  of,  v.  pflcgen  ;  -  about, 

Careless,  adj  uad^Idffigf  unvorftc^tig. 

Carriage,  8.  pi.  bie  ^utfci^e.        [fe^en. 

Carry,  v.  tragen;  -  through,  v.  tuxd)" 

Castle,  8.  bag  ©(^lop. 

Catch,  V.  fangen,  greifcn. 

Cause,  V.  »erurfad)en. 

Cautious,  adj.  sorftc^tig. 

Cavern,  «.  bic  ^b^Ic. 

Celebrated,  adj  bcrii^ntt. 

Certainly,  a(ii).  gcroip ;  jwar. 

Chair,  «.  bcr  <Stu^l. 

Change,  -».  tocc^fcln ;  jt^  dnbcrn. 

Charge,  ».  bic  ^oficn  ;  v.  fcelaben. 

Chase,  v.  jagcn;  «.  bic  3agb. 

Cheap,  adj.  Wo^Ifcil. 

Cheat,  8.  ber  SSctrugcr;  v.  fcetrugen. 

Cheese,  «.  ber  ^dfc. 

Cherry,  8.  bie  ^'irfc^c. 

Chicken,  s.  bag  ^ii^nd^en. 

Chiefly,  adv.  ^auptfdc^Iid^. 

Childish,  adj.  finbifc^. 

Choose,  c.  woolen. 

Church,  8.  bie  ^irc^c. 

Class,  8.  bie  Piaffe. 

Clean,  «(Z/.  rein. 

Clear,  adj.  Uax,  |cff. 

Climb,  V.  fiimmen. 

Cloak,  8.  ber  SKantcL 

Clock,  «.  bic  U^r;  SBanbu^r. 

Close,  «.  fc^Ue^cn,  jumac^cn. 

Coat,  8.  ber  9lptf. 

Coffee,  8.  ber  ^affee. 

Coffin,  8.  bcr  ©arg. 

Cold,  «.  bie  ^dUc ;  ac^.  fait. 

Collar,  8  ber  ^ragcn. 

Collier, «.  bcr  ^o^lcr. 


Comb,  *.  ber  ^amm.  [fommen* 

Come,  V.  fommen  ;  -  again,  wtcbcr" 
Comfortable,  adj.  kquem. 
Command,  v.  befc^len,  gebicten. 
Commence,  v.  anfangen>  kginnen. 
Communicate,  v.  mitt^eilen. 
Compare,  v.  tjcrglcid)en. 
Compel,  V.  jttjingcn. 
Complain,  v.  jic^  fceflagen. 
Conceal,  v.  Bergen,  »erbcrgcn. 
Concert, «.  bag  Soncert. 
Condition,  8.  bcr  Suj^anb. 
Confidence,  8.  bag  SDertraucn. 
Conquer,  v.  ficgen.      [|i(^  bctt>u§t  fctn. 
Conscious,  adj.  UtOM^t  ;  to  be  -  of, 
Consequently,  adv.  folgltc^,  mtt^tn. 
Contented,  adj.  jufriebcn. 
Convince,  v.  uberjcugcn. 
Cook,  8,  bcr  ^o6) ;  v.  fod^en. 
Cool,  adj.  fii^I.  [|)cfi. 

Copy,  V.  abfc^rctbcn  ;  -  book,  8.  bad 
Correct,  v.  uerbcffem. 
Correspond  (to),  v.  cntfprc(^cn. 
Cost,  V.  foflcn;  -ly,  adj.  fojltar. 
Counsel,  v.  ratten. 
Country,  a.  bag  \?anb. 
Couple,  8.  bag  ^aax. 
Courage,  «.  ber  SWut^. 
Cousin,  8.  ber  SJettcr. 
Cow,  8.  bie  ^tt^. 
Crawl,  V.  fried^en. 
Create,  v.  fc^affen,  crfi^affcn* 
Creep,  v.  fricc^cn. 
Criminal,  8.  ber  SWiffet^dtcr. 
Criticise,  v.  beurt^cilen. 
Cross,  8.  bag  ^reuj. 
Cry,  V.  f^reicn. 
Cup,  8.  bic  J^affc. 
Customary,  adv.  gcwo^nlid^. 
Cut,  V.  fc^ncibcn. 


286 


VOCABULARY. — ENGLISH  AND   GERMAN. 


D. 

Dance,  v.  tanjcn. 

Daughter,  s.  tie  %o6)ttx* 

Dawn,  V.  tagen. 

Day,  8.  ber  3;ag;  to-day,  ^eute;  -  after 

to-morrow,  ubermorgcn. 
Dear,  adj.  t^euer,  Uett. 
Deceive,  v.  triigen,  tetriigen. 
Decision, «.  tie  Sntfc^eibung. 
Deed,  «.  bic  %f)aU 
Defend,  v.  ftert^eibigen. 
Depart,  v,  abrcifen. 
Deplore,  v.  beflagen. 
Depth,  8.  bic  3;iefc. 
Deserve,  v.  »erbienen. 
Design,  8.  bic  Slbfic^t. 
Destroy,  v.  jerjlijrcn. 
Destruction,  8.  bic  Scrfloruttfl. 
Detain,  v.  auf^alten. 
Dictionary,  8.  ba^  2Bortcrbuci^. 
Die, «.  f^erbcn. 
Different,  adj.  »crf(^icbcn. 
Difficult,  ac^',  fd)Wcr. 
Dig,  V.  grabcn. 
Dine,  v.  fpeifen. 
Dinner,  a.  hai  ^JJittagcffen. 
Directly,  adv.  fofort.     . 
Dirty,  adj.  fc^mu^lg;  v.  bef^mu&cn. 
Disappear,  v.  ttcrfc^winben. 
Displease,  v.  mipfaflcn,  scrbricgen. 
Dissatisfied,  adj.  unjufriebcn. 
Divide,  v.  t^cilcn,  jcrlcgcn. 
Door,  8.  bic  2;prc. 
Down,  adv.  al,  l^erab,  finab* 
Dozen, «.  ba^  !Du^cnb. 
Draw,  1).  jic^cn. 
Dream,  v.  trdumcn. 
Dress,  «.  anfletbcn;  8.  ba3  ^teib. 
Drink,  v.  trinfcn;  (of  animals)  faufen» 
Drive,  v.  trcibcn,  jagen. 


Dry,  (w!;.  troffcn;  c.  (-up)  »crtro(fncru 
During,  prep,  wa^rcnb. 
Duty,  «.  bic  SJfli^t. 
Dwell,  ■».  njo^ncn. 
Dwelling, «.  bic  2Bo^nung« 

E. 

Eager,  adj.  gicrig. 

Early,  acZj.  frii^. 

Earth,  s.  bic  Srbc. 

Easy,  adj.  Iciest. 

Eat,  t?.  cflen;  (of  animals)  frcffcn* 

Edge,  8.  ber  SRanb. 

Else,  a(Z«.  fonfl. 

Emigrant,  s.  ber  Slu^n)anbcrcr« 

Emperor,  «.  ber  ^aifer. 

Empire,  8.  ba^  ^aijert^um* 

Empty,  ac^.  Iccr. 

Endeavor,  v.  ftc^  Beflcipigcn. 

Enjoy,  a),  genicpen;  jtd^  crfreueit. 

Enjoyment,  8.  bic  ^reubc,  ber  ®cmig* 

Enough,  adj.  genug. 

Entertaining,  adj.  untcr^altenb. 

Entertainment,  «.  bic  Unter^altung. 

Entire,  adv.  ganj. 

Equal,  adj.  gleic^. 

Err,  V.  ftc^  irrcn. 

Esteem,  v.  o(^tCtt. 

Even,  a<Z^.  [elbjl,  glei^. 

Evening,  8.  ber  5l6cnb ;  in  the  -,  Oc* 

Ever,  ado.  it,  jemald. 

Evil,  8.  ba«  Uebel;  -doer,  ber  SPUtfc* 

t^ater. 
Examine,  v.  untcrfuc^cn. 
Example,  8.  hai  ©cifpiel* 
Excel,  -0.  iibertrcffen. 
Exercise,  8.  bic  5(ufga6c» 
Expect,  V.  erwarten. 
Expenses,  8.  bic  ^oflen* 


VOCABULART. — ENGLISH  AND   GEBMAN. 


287 


Experience,  s.  bie  (Srfa^ntitg. 
Expression,  8.  bie  9iebeit^art. 
Extremely,  adu).  au§erfl. 
Eye,  8.  ba«  Slugc. 


Faithful,  adj.  treu. 

Faithless,  adj.  trculo3. 

Fall,  'D.  fatten. 

False,  adj.  falfd^. 

Fame,  «.  ber  9lu^m. 

Farmer,  ».  ber  S3auer,  Canbmann. 

Fast,  adj.  fc^nett. 

Fatigued,  adj.  mube. 

Fear,  «.  bie  gurc^t;  «.  |td^  fiirc^tcn. 

Feel,  V.  fit^Ien;  -  sad,  betriibt  fein. 

Feeling,  «.  ba^  ®efit§I. 

Ferment,  ij.  ga^ren. 

Fetch,  -0.  ^olen. 

Field,  «.  ba«  Srelb.  • 

Fight,  V.  fec^ten,  jlreitcn. 

Fill,  v.  fiitten.  [au^fe^en. 

Find,  t.  ftnben  ;  ftc^  ieftnben  j  -  fiault, 

Finish,  u.  beenbigen. 

First  (at),  acZij.  crfl,  juerfl. 

Fish,  «.  ber  ^if^. 

Flame,  8.  bie  ?5Iamme. 

Flay,  «j.  fc^inben. 

Flax, «.  ber  Sla^«. 

Flock, «.  bie  |)ecrbc. 

Florin,  s.  ber  ®ulben  (a  coin). 

Flourish,  V.  grunen. 

Flow,  V.  piegen,  rinnen. 

Fly,  8.  bie  ^liege. 

Follow,  XI.  folgen. 

Fool,  8.  ber  J'^or;  -ish,  ad^.  t^iJrid^t* 

Foot, «.  bet  %\x^, 

"Por,  prep.  f0r;  cowj.  benit. 

Force,  v.  jtvingen  ;  8.  bie  ^rafl. 

Forehead, «.  bie  ©time. 

Forenoon,  a.  bet  Sormittag. 


Foresee,  v.  »Dr|erfc^ett. 

Forest,  8.  ber  SBalb. 

Forget,  c.  sergeffen. 

Fork,  8.  bie  ®a5el. 

Form,  8.  bie  ©eflalt.  [e|emal«. 

Former,  adj.  »orig  ;  -ly,  adt).  frii^er, 

Fortunate,  <w?;.  gliicfUc^, 

Fortune,  8.  ba^  ®Iu(ff  SJermiJgen. 

Fountain,  s.  bie  Ductte^  ber  S3runncn. 

Fox,  8.  ber  Suc^3. 

Free,  adj.  frei;  -dom,  «.  bie  ^rei^eit. 

Fresh,  adj.  frifd). 

Friendship,  «.  bie  Sreunbf(!^aft. 

Frighten,  v.  erfc^redfen.  [bar. 

Fruit,  s.  bie  Srudjt ;  -ful,  <w?;.  fru^t" 

¥TovD.,prep.  »on,  au5. 

Furniture,  8.  ba«  SWobel. 

G. 

Gain,  8.  ber  ©etoinn;  «.  gewiimctt. 

Gardener,  8.  ber  ©artner. 

Gate,  8.  ba^  3;:^or,  ber  ©ingang. 

Geography,  ».  bie  ©eograp^ie. 

Get  (up), «.  auffle^en. 

Ghost, «.  ber  ®ei{!. 

Gift, «.  ba«  ®efc^enf. 

Give,  V.  gebcn. 

Gladly,  adv.  gem. 

Glide,  u.  gleiteit. 

Glimmer,  xi.  glimmem* 

Glitter,  v.  glanjen. 

Glove,  s.  ber  ^anbf(|u$. 

Go,  v.  ge^en;  -  for,  ^olen;  -  out,  auS" 

ge^en  ;  -  along  or  with,  mitge^en; 

-  down  (sink),  unterge^en. 
Gold,  golden,  adj.  golben. 
Good-natured,  adj.  gemiit^lid^. 
Govern,  x.  regieren. 
Grave,  8.  ba^  ®rab. 
Graveyard, «.  ber  ilird^^of. 
Gray,  adj,  grau. 


288 


VOCABULABY. ENGLISH   AND   GERMAN. 


Green,  adj.  griin;  to  become  -,  v. 

gritncn. 
Grind,  v.  fd^lctfcn. 
Ground,  8.  bcr  Sobcn. 
Grow  better,  v.  ftc^  k|Tern. 
Guess,  V.  ratten. 
Guiltless,  adj.  fd^ulbb^. 
Guilty,  adj.  fc^ulbig* 
Gun,  8.  bic  Sitd^fe,  bc^  Oetoe^r* 


Habit,  8.  bte  @cwo^tt^» 

Hair,  «.  ba^  ^aar. 

Half,  adj.  ^alb. 

Ham,  «.  bcr  ©d^ittfcn« 

Hand,  8.  bic  |)anb. 

Hang,  V.  ^dngcn;  -man,  «.  ber  ^enfer, 

Happen,  v.  gcfc^e^cn. 

Happy,  adj.  gliitflid^. 

Hard,  adj.  ^art,  fd^toer. 

Hardly,  a<2tj.  faum. 

Hate  (hatred),  8.  bcr  |>ag;  v.  ^affcn. 

Head,  ».  bcr  ^o})f;  -ache,  ^opf»e^. 

Heal, «.  ]|ctlen. 

Health, «.  bic  ®cfunb^cit. 

Healthy,  adj.  gcfunb. 

Hear, «.  ^orcn. 

Heart,  8.  bad  |)crj. 

Heat,  8.  bic  ^i^c. 

Heathen,  8.  bcr  ■^cibe* 

Heavy,  ar?;.  f^wcr. 

Helmet,  «.  bcr  ^clrn* 

Help, «?.  ^clfcn. 

Hen,  «.  bic  ^cnnc. 

Herd,  s.  bic  ^cfrbc* 

Here,  adv.  ^ter;  -upon,  ^iercttf* 

Hero,  8.  bcr  ^clb. 

Hide,  «.  ijcrkrgcn. 

Hight, ».  bic  |>ij^e. 


Hill, «.  bcr  ^iigcU 

Hinder,  v.  ^intern,  »cr^inbcrn. 

Hire, «.  bingcn,  mict^cn* 

History,  8.  bic  ©cfc^id^tc. 

Hit,  v.  trcffcn. 

Hold,  v.  I^altcn. 

Hole,  8.  bag  2o(^, 

Home, «.  bic  ^cimat!^. 

Honest,  adj.  c^rlid^* 

Honesty,  s.  bic  9icbUd^fcit, 

Hope,  V.  I^offcn. 
Horror, «.  bag  ®raucn. 

Horsemarket,  8.  bcr  9)fcrbcmarft# 
Hour,  8.  bic  ©tunbc* 
How,  adt).  KDicj  -much,  tt)ic  »icl» 
However,  conj.  inbcffcn,  icbo(^. 
Hunger,  s.  bcr  -5)ungcr. 
Hungry,  aw^.  ^ungrig* 
Hunter,  8.  bcr  Sager* 


If,  coTij.  mm,  o6,  »ofcm. 
Imitate,  -».  naci^al^mcn. 
Immediately,  adr«.  foglcid^,  fofort. 
Important,  adj.  »id(>tig. 
Imprisoned,  participle,  gefangcn. 
Improve,  •».  fid)  bcrfern;  fortfc^rcitcn. 
In,  into,   prep,  in,  an,  auf;    a&t 

^incin. 
Induce,  v,  bcn>cgcn. 
Inhabitant,  8.  bcr  Sinwo^ncr. 
Injure,  v.  scrle^en,  ieleibigcn. 
Instance,  a.  bcr  SIugcnMid. 
Instruct,  V.  untcrri(^tcn. 
Instruction,  8.  bcr  Untcrrid^t* 
Intelligence,  *.  bic  S'Zac^rid^t. 
Interesting,  a^.  untcr^altcnb^ 
Introduce,  v.  cinfii^rcn.      [2)imcnfa§. 
Ink,  8.  bic  Dintc  ;    -stand,  #.    ba4 


VOCABULABY. — ^ENGLISH   AND   GERMAN. 


2ba 


J. 

Jew,  8.  bcr  3ubc. 
Joiner,  8.  bcr  lif^lcr. 
Journey,  8.  bte  JRcifc. 
Joy,  8.  bic  grcubc. 
Joyful,  adj.  fro^. 

Just,  adj.  gerec^t;  ado.  efccn;  -now, 
fo  cbcn. 


Keep,  ©.  ^altcn. 

Kill,  V.  tobtcn;  (butcher)  fc^Iac^tcn. 

Kind,  adj.  gutig. 

Kindness,  8.  bic  ®utc. 

Kingdom, «.  bad  ^ontsrcid^. 

Kitchen, «.  bic  ^iid^c. 

Knave,  8.  bcr  ©d^urfc. 

Knee,  s.  bad  ^ntc. 

Knock,  V.  flopfcn. 

Know,  ^.  wiJTcn,  fcnncn. 


Labor,  8.  btc  5lrbeit;  v.  arbciten. 

Lame,  adj.  la^m 

Lament,  v.  bcfhj^cn,  jammern. 

Land,  «.  bad  i?anb. 

Lan^iage,  «.  bte  Sprac^c. 

Last,  ac?;.  le^t,  »orig. 

Late,  adj.  fpat. 

Lately,  adv.  neuUc^. 

Laugh,  ^.  lad) en. 

Laughable,  adj.  lci(i)tx\\^* 

Lay,  ij.  Icgcn. 

Lead,  8.  bad  Slei;  -pencil,  8.  bcr  SBlei* 

thft. 
Lead,  v.  fii^ren. 
Leaf,  s.  bad  SSIatt. 
Least  (at),  ado.  wentgflend. 
Leave,  v.  lalTen,  tterlaffen. 
L'jft,  adj.  linf ;  to  the  left.  Unfd. 


Leg,  «.  bad  ©cin. 

Lend,  v.  lei^en. 

Lesson,  8.  bic  Ccftion,  Slufgabc,  2c$r* 

flunbc. 
Let,  V.  laJTcn. 

Lie,  V.  liegcn;  (tell  a  falsehood),  liigen* 
Lift,  V.  ^eben. 

Light,  adj.  Iciest ;  -minded,  Icic^tflnnig. 
Lighten,  v.  bli^en. 
Lightning,  «.  bcr  SBIiU. 
Likewise,  adv.  gleid^faU^.  au^. 
Linen, «.  bic  gcinroanb. 
Lion,  8.  bcr  £ol»c. 
Live,  u  Icbcn,  wo^nen.  [to  dwell]. 
Load.  1).  labcn. 
Lock,  8.  bad  ©c^log. 
Look,  V.  fc^en;  -like,  audfc^cn  (»icX 
Looking-glass,  8.  bcr  ©picgei. 
Lose,  V.  ttcrlicrcn. 
Loss,  8.  bcr  23crlu|l. 
Love,  V.  licbctt. 
Lovely,  adj.  Ucbcndwiirbig. 
Luggage,  s.  bad  ®cpdcf. 


Maid,  8.  bic  2)?a(^b,  bad  5Kab(^cn. 
Mainly,  adv.  ^auptfad)lid). 
Make^  v.  madden. 
Malicious,  adj.  bod^aft. 
Mark,  v  mcrfcn;  8.  bad  3tel. 
Master,  s.  ber  ^crr,  2)?eijlcr. 
Mean,  v.  meinen. 
Means,  s.  bie  ?Wtttel. 
Measure,  v.  mefTen, 
Medal,  «.  bie  ?WebaiIIc. 
Meet,  V.  begegnen,  trcfTen. 
\'erchant,  s.  ber  ^aufmann. 
Messenger,  8.  ber  23ote. 
Metal,  ».  bad  ^Wctatt. 
Mile,  8.  bte  2)?eilc. 


290 


VOCABULARY. ENGLISH   AND   GERMAN. 


Milk,  8.  melfen. 

Miller, «.  ber  Soulier. 

Mind  (to  have  a  -),  2u|!  ^aBeii. 

Miss,  8.  ba^  Srauletn. 

Mistake,  s.  ber  Seller,  Srrt^um. 

Mistaken  (to  be),  d.  ftc^  irren. 

Misuse,  8.  mi^Braud^en. 

Mockery,  «.  ber  ©pott. 

Moment,  s.  ber  SlugenHitf . 

Money,  s.  ba«  ©elb. 

Monkey,  8.  ber  5lffe. 

Month,  s.  ber  !Konat. 

Moon,  «.  ber  3Konb. 

More,  ac^ij.  me^r;  -over,  ubcrbie^. 

Morrow  (to-),  adv.  morgcn;  day  after 

Mortal,  adj.  jlerblici^.   [-,  ubermorgcn. 

Moss,  adj.  ba«  SWood. 

Mountain,  s.  ber  33erg  ;  (chain  of 

mountains),  tai  ©et^irgc. 
Move,  V.  rii^rcn,  bewcgen. 
Much,  adv.  »iel;  how  much,  »ic  ijtel. 

N. 

Name,  «.  ber  9lantc;  v.  nenitcn. 
Narrative,  s.  bie  ®efd^id^te,  (grja^Iung. 
Near,  prep,  na^t,  mUn,  an,  ^ei. 
Nearly,  adv.  bcina^e. 
Neck,  8.  ber  ^aU, 
Necessary,  adv.  not^tg. 
Need,  s.  bie  ^ot^;  v.  Brauc^en. 
Needle,  8.  bie  9JabeI,  9?a^nabel. 
Neglect,  V.  ijernac^Iaffigcn. 
Neglected,  participle,  »ernoc^Iafjtgt. 
Negligent,  adj.  na(^Iaffig. 
Neighbor,  ».  ber  ^Jac^kr. 
Nest,  8.  ba«  S^ejl 
Never,  adv.  nit,  niemal^. 
Nevertheless,  adv.  nic^td  bcfh)  aeniger. 
Newly,  offj.  neuUd^f  frifc^. 
Newspaper,  «.  bie  Settung. 
Next,  adj.  md)%  folgenb;  anbere. 


Niece,  8.  bie  !Ric^tc. 

Night,  8.  bie  3la^t. 

Noon,  8.  ber  SKittag.  [nit^r. 

Not,  adv.  nic^t ;  -  at  all,  ganj  unb  gar 

Nothing,  adv.  nic^t^. 

Now,  adv.  it^u  nun. 

Nowhere,  adv.  nirgenbwo,  nirgenb^. 

Numerous,  adj.  iat)\xti^. 

Nut,  5.  bie  3^u^ ;  -tree,  ber  SfJup'SSaum. 

O. 
Obey,  V.  ge^or(i^en. 
Obliged,  adj.  genot^igt. 
Observe,  v.  tt)a^rne^men. 
Occasion,  s.  bie  ®elegen^eit 
Occupation,  «.  ber  S3eruf. 
Of,  prep.  »on,  aud. 
Offend,  i).  kleibigen. 
Offer,  V.  Uttm,  anbieten. 
OflBcer,  s.  ber  Dfftcier. 
Often,  adv.  oft. 
Omnipotent,  adj.  aUmdd^tiQ. 
On,  upon,  prep,  aw,  auf. 
Only,  od^.  nur. 
Open,  V.  offnen;  a^f;.  of  en. 
Opposite,  prep,  gegeniiber. 
Or,  conj.  ober. 
Order,  v.  befel^Ien. 
Orphan,  8.  bie  2Baife. 
Other,  adj.  onber ;  -wise,  adv.  fonfl 
Out,  out  of,  prep.  au(3. 
Owe,  V.  fi^ulben  (with  Dat.) 
Ox,  8.  ber  Dd^^. 

P. 
Pack,  8.  ber  9)a(f. 
Page,  8.  bie  <5eite. 
Painter,  s.  ber  SJZaler. 
Painting,  5.  ba^  ®emalbe« 
Pair,  8.  ba«  ^aax. 
Palace,  «.  ber  9)alafl. 
Pale,  adj.  blap,  blei^. 
Paper,  «.  bad  3)aHfr  ;  (news-),  bie 


VOCABULARY. — ENGLISH   AND   GERMAN. 


291 


Parasol,  s.  ber  ©onnenf^trm.  [Beitung. 
Pardon,  v.  ijerjci^en. 
x'arents,  s.  tie  Sltern. 
Park,  s.  ber  ^axt  [*or'6ci9e^cn. 

Pass  (through),  v.  bur^rcifen;  -  (by), 
Pay,  V.  hja^Ien. 
Pea,  s.  btc  ©d^otc. 
Penny,  s.  bcr  9>fcnmg. 
People,  8.  ha^  SSoU,  bie  2 cute. 
Perceive,  v.  tent  erf  en. 
Perhaps,  adj.  uieHeii^t. 
Physician,  5.  bcr  5lrjt. 
Piano,  8.  ba«  ^laijier. 
Picture,  s.  ba«  ®emalbe,  Silb. 
Piece,  8.  ba3  ©tutf . 
Pile,  8.  ber  9)fa^l. 

Pit,  «.  bie  |)o^Ie.  [ctnlegen. 

Place,*,  ber  Drt;  -d.  legen;  -(into, ^in* 
Plant,  s.  bte  'SJflanje. 
Play,«.  fpiclcn;  s.  ba^  ©picl:  -ground, 
bcr  ©pietpla^ ;  -thing,  ba3  ©pieljeug. 
Pleasant,  adj.  angene^m. 
Please,  t.  gefaUen. 
Pleasure,  s.  baS  SJergniigcn. 
Pocket,  8.  bie  Xafd^e ;  -handkerchief. 
Poet,  8.  ber  Dic^ter.    [ba^  2;afd^emud(>, 
Point  «  bie  ©pi^e. 
Poison,  «.  bad  ®ift. 
Pond,  8.  ber  3:ei(!^. 
Populous,  adj.  \)olfreid^. 
Portfolio, «.  bie  23rteftaf(^c, 
Possess,  V.  bcfit^cn. 

Post,  8.  bie  9)ofl;  -man,  ber  S5ricf6otc. 
Possible;  adj.  moglid^. 
Pour,  V.  giegen. 
Poverty,  s.  bie  STrmut^. 
Praiseworthy,  adv.  Iobend»ert^. 
Pray,  v.  tctcn,  bitten. 
Preci8e(ly),  adv.  gcnau. 
Precious,  adj.  foflbar. 


Prefer,  v.  sjoriie^en. 

Present,  v.  fc^enfen;  s.  baS  ®cfc^cn!. 

Press,  V.  briicEen,  beflemmen. 

Pretty,  adj.  \)\ib\6^,  axtxQ,  jiemlic^. 

Price,  8.  ber  9)rei<3. 

Prince,  s.  ber  9)rinj,  %Vix\i. 

Prison,  8.  bad  ©efdngnii. 

Prize,  8.  ber  3)reid,  bie  SBelc^mmg- 

Probably,  adv.  toal^rfc^einUc^. 

Profit,  s.  ber  ®eroinn. 

Promise,  v.  vcrfpred^en. 

Proper,  adj.  etgem  paffenb. 

Prophesy,  v  weiflagen. 

Prospect,  8.  bie  Sludfid^t. 

Prosper,  v.  gebei^en. 

Punish,  V.  tejlrafen. 

Pupil,  8.  ber  ©dottier. 

Pure,  adj  rein. 

Purse,  8.  ber  Seutel,  bie  SSiJrfe. 

Push, «.  flo§en. 

Put,  V.  jleKen;  -  on,  anjielen. 

Q 

Quack,  8  ber  STluacffalbcr, 
Quality,  s.  bte  eigenfd^aft,  Qualitdt 
Quarrel,  v.  ftd^  (Ireiten. 
Question,  8.  btc  ^rage. 
Quick,  ar^".  fd^ncU* 
Quite,  adv.  gar. 

R. 
Rabbit,  a  bad  ^anind^cn. 
Rail-road,  s.  bte  Stfenk^n. 
Rain,  s.  ber  Diegen  ;  -bow,  bcr  JUcgOII* 
Ray,  8.  ber  ©tra^U  [bogoiw 

Razor, «.  bad  SRaftrmelfcr. 
Read,  v.  lefcn. 
Reason, «.  bte  ©ernunft. 
Receive,  v.  er^alten,  empfangcn, 
Reception, ».  ber  Smpfang. 
Recogniae,  v.  erfcnncn. 
Recollect,  v.  {i^  tefinnen,  jic^  crinncrn. 


292 


VOCABULARY. — ENGLISH   AND   GEEMAN. 


Recover,  v.  gcnefen. 

Reign,  v.  rcgieren;  s.  ta^  SRetc^. 

Remain,  v.  bleiben. 

Remedy, ».  bad  WitttU 

Renown,  8.  ber  JRu^m. 

Renowned,  «(Z;.  beru^mt. 

Repent,  v.  reuen. 

Reply,  V  anitvortcn. 

Request,  v.  iidi  erbitteii  or  audbitten. 

Resemble,  v.  gleid^en,  audfc^en  (rote). 

Rest,  V.  audru(>cn;  8.  bie  9lu^c. 

Result,  «.  ber  (Srtrag. 

Retain,  v.  be^attcn. 

Return,  v.  umfe^rcn,  oiebergcben;  «.  bie 

SRitcffe^r. 
Reward,  v.  belo'^nen ;  «.  bie  Selo^nung. 
Riches,  s.  ber  JReid^t^um. 
Ride,  V.  (carriage)  fa^ren;  (horseback) 

reiten. 
Ridiculous,  adj.  lac^erlid^. 
Right,  rec^t;  to  the  right,  rec^td. 
Ripen,  v.  reifen. 

Rise,  V.  auffle^en;  (sun)  aufge^en. 
Roast,  V.  braten. 
Rock,  V.  wicgen. 
Room,  8.  bag  Btmmer. 
Round,  adj.  runb. 
Rub,  V.  retben,  f^rcici^en. 
Run,  V.  lauferu  rennen;  -away,  bason*" 

laufen;  -over,  iiberlaufen. 

S. 

Sad,  adj.  traurtg. 

Sailor,  8.  ber  «WatTofe,  ©(^iffer. 

Sale,  V.  verfaufen;  «.  ber  SJerfauf. 

Sand,  8.  ber  ©anb. 

Salt,  8.  bad  ©alj. 

Say,  ?j.  fagen;  -  prayers,  beten. 

Scarcely,  adv.  faum. 

Scissors,  8.  bie  (Sd^eere. 


Scream,  v.  freifc^en,  fci^reien. 

Screw,  V.  fc^rauben. 

Season, «.  bie  3a^re«jeit. 

See,  V.  fe^en. 

Seethe,  v.  fleben. 

Send,  V.  fenben;  -  away,  fortfdjicfcit. 

Separate,  v.  fonbern,  fd)eiben. 

Set,  V.  fe^en;  (sun),  unterf;e^en;  -out^ 

V.  abreifen. 
Shepherd,  8.  ber  ©c^dfer. 
Shine,  v.  f^einen,  glanjen. 
Shoot,  V.  fd^ie§en. 
Short,  adj.  furj. 
Shortly,  adv.  fiirjlid^. 
Show,  V.  jeigen. 
Shudder,  v.  f(!^aubertt. 
Shut,  V.  jumad^en,  fc^Ue^en* 
Sick,  adj.  franf,  unwol^l. 
Silent  (to  be),  v.  fd^weigen. 
Silk  &r  silken,  adj.  feiben. 
Silver,  8.  bad  ©ilber. 
Since,  prep,  feit ;  adv.  ba. 
Sing,  v.  ftngen. 
Sink,  V.  jinfen,  unterge^eu. 
Sir,  8.  ^err. 

Sit,  V.  ft^en.  -down,  [\6)  nicbcrfett-n. 
Sleep,  V.  fc^lafen. 
Sleeping,  participU,  f(!^lafcitb. 
Slide,  v.  gletten. 
Sling,  7).  fci)Iingen. 
Slipper,  8.  ber  3><intcffel. 
Smell,  v.  ried^en;  8.  ber  ©erud^. 
Smelt,  D.  fcfimeljen. 
Sneak  (to  a  place),  v.  ^tnfc^Ieid^eit. 
Snort,  V.  fc^naubcn. 
Snow,  V.  fd^neten;  8.  ber  ©d^nee* 
Soj  adv.  fo,  alfo. 
Soil,  ?).  befd&mu^en,  befd^micrra. 
Soldier,  8.  ber  (Solbat. 
Sometimes,  adv.  manc^mal. 


VOCABULABY. ENGLISH   AND   GERMAN. 


293 


Soon,  adv.  6alb. 

Sorrow,  s.  bie  ©orgc,  ^ai  £cib. 

Sorry  (to  be),  leib  t^un. 

Soul, «.  bic  ©eelc. 

Sound,  t.  flingcit/  fd^affcn,  blafen. 

Sparkle,  v.  Qlimmeu. 

Speak,  V.  fprcc()cn. 

Spend,  V.  au^gcbcn;  {-  time)  jubringcn. 

Spin,  V.  [pinnm. 

Spirit,  s.  bcr  ®ei|l. 

Spit,  y.  fpcicn. 

Spite  (in  -  of),  prep.  trotJ,  un9ea(]^tct. 

Spoil,  c.  »erbcrben,  ^crtDo^nm. 

Spoon,  8.  bcr  2offel. 

Spring,  c.    fpringcn,    quetten;  8.  bic 

DucUc. 
Sprout,  i).  fpric^cn. 
Squander,  v.  t)crfc&WCttbett» 
Stake,  8.  bcr  9)fa$L 
Stand,  ?j.  jlc^cn. 
Star,  8.  bcr  ®tcrn. 
Stay,  V.  blctbcri. 
Steal,  V.  flcttctt. 
Steamboat,  s.  ba3  !DamUf6oot* 
Steel,  8.  bcr  ©ta^l  ;  -pen,  bic  ©ta^l* 
Still,  a<i;.  jltll ;  adv.  nod^.  [fcbcr. 

Sting,  8.  bcr  ©tac^cl. 
Stove,  8.  bcr  Dfcn. 
Street,  «.  bic  ©trape 
Strength,  «.  bie  ©tdrfc* 
Stretch  out,  ^.  auaflrctfeiu 
Strife,  8.  bcr  (Btreit. 
Strike,  v.  fd^lagcn,  l^aucn. 
Strong,  a<^'.  flarf. 
Substantive,  «.  ba^  ^auptwort. 
Subdue,  V.  untcrjo^cn. 
Subject,  8.  bcr  Untcrt^an. 
Succeed,  v.  gelingen,  b  u  r(i^  fc^cn. 
Suck,  D.  faugcn. 
Suffer,  V.  Icibcn,  bulbcn. 


Sun,  8.  bic  ©ottttc. 
Swim,  V.  fci^njtmmcn. 
Swine,  «.  ba^  ©^tvctji. 
Swing,  i?.  fc^wtngen. 
Swear,  v.  fc^worcn. 
Sweat,  «.  bcr  ©d)tt)cig. 
Swell,  ^.  fd^lDcIIcn. 


Talk,  V,  rcbcn. 

Take,  v.  nc^mctt  ;  -(for),  ^altcn  (fur). 

Tea,  8.  bcr  S^cc. 

Teacher, «.  bcr  2c§rcr» 

Tear,  t).  icrrci§cn. 

Tell,  V.  fagcn. 

Tent, «.  baa  Belt. 

Terror,  «.  bcr  ©c^rctf,  ©d^rctfctt. 

Than,  conj.  aU. 

Theme, «.  bic  Slufgabc. 

Then,  conj.  bcnn;  ae^c.  bann,  al^bawi. 

There,  adv.  ba,  bort  ;  -fore,  bed^alb/ 

Thief,  8.  bcr  2)icb  [mit^ia. 

Thing,  «.  baa  ^ling,  bic  ©a^c. 

Think,  t).  bcnfen,  ftnnm. 

Thirsty,  adj.  burflig. 

Though,  conj.  obfci^on,  obtt)o^l.[fcnIoa 

Thoughtless,  adj.  Iciti^tjlnntg,    gcban- 

Thrive,  tj.  gcbci^cn. 

Through,  prep.  burd^. 

Throw,  V.  TOcrfcn,  fdi^mctfcn. 

Thus,  <wf«.  fo,  alfo. 

Ticket,  8.  baa  aSittct. 

Tie,  tj.  binbcn. 

Time,  8.  bic  3ett,  baa  3»al}  in  the 

mean  -,  adv.  inbcffctt. 
Tired,  adj.  mitbe. 
To,  prep.  ju. 
Too,  adv.  ju. 
Tomb,  8.  bic  ®rufl. 


234 


VOCABULAEY. ENGLISH    AND   GERMAN. 


Torment,  «,  bie  Cual;  v.  foltern. 
Track,  8.  bie  ©pur. 
Translate,  v.  iiterfe^en. 
Translation,  s.  bic  Ueberfe^ung. 
Travel,  v.  reifen. 
Troublesome,  adj.  lafitg. 
True,  adj.  roaf^x,  treu. 
Trunk,  s.  bcr  buffer. 
Trust,  V.  traucn,  ijcrtraucn. 
Truth,  s.  bie  SBa^r^eit. 
Turn,  V.  tt)cnbcn ;  -  over,  umf  e^rcn. 
Tyrant,  8.  ber  Ijjrann. 


Ugly,  adj.  ^dgli(^. 

XJndeT,prep.  untcr;  -take,  v.  unttx^ 

nc^men;  -stand,  v.  »erjlcl>cn. 
Undress,  v.  au^flciben. 
Unite,  V.  ttereintgcn. 
Until,  adv.  bid. 
Up,  upon,  prep.  an. 
Upset,  V.  umfd^Iagen. 
Use,  V.  gcbrauc^en;  (to  be  of-),  nfljjcn; 

8.  bcr  9?u^fn. 
Useful,  a<?/.  nii^Iidj. 


Valley,  «.  ba«  3::^al. 
Value,  t).  fti^ajjcn;  8.  bcr  SBcrt^. 
Venture,  v.  ttagcn. 
Victory,  «.  bcr  <Sicg. 
View,  8.  bie  Sludftc^t. 
Violet,  8.  bad  S5eil(^cn. 
Virtue,  8.  bic  Xugenb. 
Virtuous,  <wf;.  tugenb^aft. 
Visit,  5.  bcr  S3cfud) ;  v.  bcfuc^en. 
Vocation,  8.  ber  S3cruf. 
Voice,  5.  bie  (Sttmmc. 
Volume,  8.  bcr  93anb. 


Wait,  V.  wartcn. 

Walk,  V.  fpa5,ieren  (gc^n). 

Wall,  8.  bie  2Kauer;  -nut,  «.  bic  SSaU' 

ruj. 
Want,  V.  braud^cn,  bcbiirfen. 
War,  8.  ber  ^rieg. 
Wardrobe,  8.  ber  ^Iciber^^Sd^ranf. 
Wash,  V.  wafc^en,  bcbiirfen. 
Water,  8.  bad  ©alfcr;  (to -animals), 

v.  tranfen. 
Wave,  8.  bie  SBcfle. 
Way,  «.  ber  SBeg. 
Weak,  ttc?;.  fd)n)ad). 
Weary,  adj.  miibe. 
Weather,  «.  bad  SBcttcr. 
Weave,  v.  weben. 
Well,  8.  ber  SSrunnen;  a(f;.  tto^I. 
Wheel,  8.  bad  fRab. 
When,  conj.  &  ac?r,  ttjann,  aid. 
Whence,  adv.  toc^tr. 
Where,  adv.   tt)p;    -upon,  fttoriikrj 

-on,  worauf;  -in,  »crin;  -of,  too»on. 
Wine,  A  bcr  SBcin, 
Whether,  conj.  ob. 
While,  covj.  inbcm ;  prep,  wd^renb. 
Whistle,  V.  pfcifen. 
Whither,  adj.  iDo^in. 
Whole,  adj.  gan^. 
Why,  adv.naxnm,  wcd^alb. 
Wicked,  adj.  bod^aft. 
Wide,  adj.  breit. 
Will,  8.  ber  StIIe. 
Win,  V.  getoinnen. 
Wind,  8.  ber  SSinb;  v.  winbcn* 
Window,  8.  bad  t^enflcr. 
Wish,  V.  »itnfd^cn 
With,  prep.  mit. 
Without,  prep.  o^nc. 
Wood,  8.  bad  |>olj. 


PEOPEB  NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES. 


295 


Wool,  €.  bie  SBoIIc. 
Word,  8.  ba«  2Bcrt. 
Work,  8.  bad  SBerf ;  v.  arbcitcn ;  -man,  s. 
ber  Slrbeitcr;  -table,  ber  5lrbcU«ttf(^. 
World,  8.  bie  SBelt. 
Worm,  8.  ber  SBurm. 
Worth,  adj.  n>ert^ ;  to  be  -,  geltcn. 
Wrestle,  v.  ringen. 
Wring,  V.  ringen. 


Yard,  «.  bie  (Sffc;  ber  W. 
Year,  s.  bag  3a^r» 
Yesterday,  adv.  gejlern. 
Yet,  adJ«.  no(i^;  conj.  bod^. 
Yield,  ^j.  weid^en* 

Young,  <idj.  jung ;  -  man,  bet  Siing* 
ling. 


National  Appellations,  Proper  Nouns  and  Adjectives. 


Sttbolf  (3lboIp^),  Adolphus. 
Sfeg^pten,  Egypt. 
Sleg9pter#  Egyptian. 
2Ifrtfa,  Africa. 
STmcrifa,  America. 
9lmerifattcr»  American. 
Slflcnf  Asia. 
S3atcrn,  Bavaria. 
S3aicr,  Bavarian. 
(£dfar»  Caesar. 
Soln,  Cologne. 
beutfc^#  German. 
T)eutf(!^lanb,  Germany. 
T)eutfc^cr,  a  German. 
Sbuarb,  Edward. 
©milte,  Emily. 
Snfildnbcr,  Englishman, 
cnglifc^,  English. 
Sranffitrt,  Frankfort. 
t^ranfreic^,  France. 
^ranjofe*  Frenchman. 
franjoftfc^,  French. 
^ran^r  Francis. 
Srtcbric^,  Frederic. 
®corg,  George, 
©ried^enlanb,  Greece. 
^cinri^,  Henry. 


3o^ann,  John. 
3talien,  Italy. 
3taliencr,  Italian. 
^axl,  Charles, 
lateintfd^,  adj.  Latin. 
Cubwig,  Louis. 
Suifc,  Louise. 
^axit,  Mary. 
SWunc^cn,  Munich. 
Defireic^,  Austria. 
Defireid^cr,  Austrian. 
9)reu§cn,  Prussia. 
3Jreu^e,  Prussian. 
9?om,  Rome. 
JRomcr,  Roman. 
piu^Ianb,  Russia. 
9luJTe»  Russian. 
©(^webcn,  Sweden. 
©d^webe,  Swede. 
<S^mii,  Switzerland. 
(Sc^wctjer,  Swiss. 
<Sop|ie,  Sophy. 
(Spamen,  Spain. 
(Spanter,  Spaniard. 
Xurfet  (ZvLxUx!),  Turkey. 
2Blen,  Vienna. 
m^dm,  William. 


296 


ADDENDA   TO  VOCABULARY. 


GEEMAN    AND   ENGLISH. 


a'bgcrctjl,  partic.  departed,  set  out. 

Slrmec,  /.  «.,  pL  -w,  army. 

Slrjt,  m.  s.,  pi.  -c»  &mod.,  physician. 

Slumenfranj,  m.  «.,  pi.  -c,  &  mod., 
garland,  wreath. 

SBlut,  n.  8.  bloDd. 

S3ruflf /.  «.,  pi.  -c,  &  wi<?d,  bopom. 

Earf^ago,  Carthage. 

bid,  fl^-  thick,  big. 

!i)tebjla^t,  m.  s.,  pi.  -c,  &  mod.,  theft. 

eben»  adv.  just,  even,  exactly. 

Grbbeere,  /.  «.,  p^.  -n,  strawberry. 

crp^en, «?.  «.  to  raise,  lift  up. 

erflingen,  v.  irr.  to  resound,  sound. 

%a^nt,  f.  8.,  pi.  -n,  flag,  colors,  stand- 
ard, [friend. 

greunbin,/.  s.,  pi.  grcunbinnen,  female 

fru^er,  adv.  fonnerly. 

gcfauft,  past  partic.  bought. 

gemad^tr  past  partic.  made. 

®Iag,  n.  s.  glass. 

®ratnmatif,  /.  s.,  pi.  -en,  grammar. 

©ra^,  n.  s.  grass. 

^afer,  m.  s.  oats. 

^aftcn,  V.  n.  to  cling,  stay,  remain 
fixed.  [to  manage. 

^anbcln,  v.  n.  to  act,  deal ;  also  v.  a. 

^of,  m.  s.,  pi.  -t,  &  mA)d.,  yard,  court- 

i^ijln,  see  Soln  (page  295).        [yard. 

^ugel,/.  «.,  j)Z.  -n,  ball,  bullet. 

Itcbcitr  «.  a.  to  love,  like. 

SJleffcr,  n.  «.  knife. 

na^cn,  ■p.  ti.  to  draw  near. 

?)aptcr,  n.  8.  paper. 

9)ferb,  n.  s.,  pi.  -<,  horse.  [tion. 

9)^ntafte,/.  s.,pl.  -n,  fancy,  iraagina- 

tec^t,  ac^.  &  adv.  right,  correct ;  very. 


fR^tin,  m.  s.  the  (river)  Rhine. 

(Scene,  /.  s.,  pi.  -n,  scene. 

©d^eere,  /.  s.,  pi.  -n,  shears,  pair  of 

scissors, 
fd^immern,  v.  n.  to  gleam,  glimmer. 
fc^Juarj,  adj.  black. 
©c^roeip,  m.  «.  sweat, 
©eele,/.  «.,  j9?.  -n,  soul. 
8ta^Ifebcr,  /.  «.,  ^^.  -n,  steel-pen. 
©tocf,  m.  «.,jp^.  -e,  &  mod.,  stick,  cane. 
Strenge,  /.  «.  severity, 
iantc,  /.  5.,  pi.  -n,  aunt. 
I^aler,  m.  s.  German  dollar(72  cents), 
trdumen,   v.  a.  &  n.  to  dream ;  also, 

fid)  trdumen,  to  dream,  to  indulge 

in  dreaming. 
Itjrannei,  /.  a.,  pi.  -en,  tyranny.  - 
unjtt)eifel^aft,  adj.  undoubtedly. 
ijergiepen,  v.  a.  irr.  to  shed,  spill. 
2}or|aben,  m.  s.  undertaking,  design, 
ttortreten,   v.  n.  irr.  to  step  forth, 

present  one's  self. 
2Baffe,   /.   s.   instrument,  weapon ; 

scarcely  used  except  in  pi.  SBaffen, 

arms,  armor. 
Saffenjlilljlanb,  m.  s.  armistice,  truce. 
tvanbein,  v.n.  to  walk,  wander,  travel 
roeilcn,  v.  n.  to  linger,  delay. 
weinen,  v.  n.  to  weep,  lament. 
tt)et§,  (of  tuiffcil,  see  page  120)  know. 
wem  (see  n)er). 
wen  (see  wer). 
n>er  (see  p.  86),  pron.  who. 
3aun,  m.  s.,  pi.  -c,  &  mod.,  hedge, 

fence. 
jerbrod)en,  past  partic.  broken. 
j»i[d)en,  prep,  between,  among. 


ADD    NDA    TO    VOCABULARY. 


207 


ENGLISH   AND   GEEMAN. 


Admirably,  adv.    beteunbcmdwuibig, 

»ortrefflic^. 
Amusing,  adj  amufant. 
Anything,  adj.  &  pron.  tiXOCA* 
Apple,  8.  ber  5lpfel. 
Ass,  8.  ber  Sfel. 
Aunt,  8.  bie  Slantc. 
Barrel,  8.  ba^  ^a§,  bic  Jonnc. 
Beautiful, «(?;.  fc^on. 
Become,  r.  wcrben;p.  ^«r<.  geworbcn; 
Blood,  «.  ba^  Slut.  [— of,  werbenaug. 
Bought,  past  part,  gcfauft. 
Boy,  8.  ber  ^nal^e. 
Broad,  adj.  trcit. 

Broken,p.par<.gebro(^cn  ;(into  pieces) 
Calf,  8.  bad  ^atb.  [jerbrodjen. 

Cautious,  adj.  (-ly,  adt).)  »Drf!d^tig. 
Charge,   v.  {=  demand),  serlangen, 
Chronicle,  8.  bie  S^ronif.        [forbern. 
Clever,  adj.  gefc^icft. 
Conversation,  8.  bie  Unter^altung. 
Demand,  v.  forbern;  8.  bte  ^orberung. 
Diligent,  adj.  fleigig. 
Donkey,  8.  ber  ©fcl. 
Elegant,  adj.  jierlic^,  anmut^ig. 
Empress,  s.  bie  ^aiferin. 
Every,  adj.  &  ;>row.  ieber,  jebe,  jcbcd. 
Fine,  adj.  fcin;  (pretty)  fc^on. 
Friend,  8.  ber  ^reunb ;  fern,  bie  iJreun^ 
Garden,  s.  ber  ®arten.  [bin. 

Glass,  8.  bad  ®Iad. 
Good,  a^*.  gut. 
Grass,  s.  bad  ®ra3» 
Hat,  8.  ber  ^ut. 
Horse,  «.  bad  9)fcrb. 
House,  s.  bad  |)aud.    At  the  house 
Key,  8.  ber  ©(^Itiffel.  [of,  tei. 

Knife,  8.  bad  5Weffer. 
Lady,  a.  bie  2)ame. 


Learn,  v.  Icrnen. 

Leech,  8.  ber  SIutcgeL 

Letter,  s.  ber  Sricf. 

Like,  V.  lieben. 

Mark,  «.  bie  fWarfc. 

Naughty,  adj.  unartig. 

Neither — nor,  cmij.  ttjcbcr — w^. 

Penknife,  8.  bad  gebcrmefiTcr. 

Poor,  adj.  aim. 

School,  8.  bie  <B6^u\t,    To  —,  in  bic 

©(^ule ;  from  — ,  aud  (»on)  ber  ©d)ule . 
Several,    adj.    »erf(i^iebene,     inct^rerc. 

—  times,  »erf(^iebcne  (me^rerc)  SWal. 
Sharpen,  v.  a.  fd>leifen,  irr. 
Ship,  8.  bad  Sd^iff. 
Slave,  5,  ber  ©flavc. 
Snake,  s.  bie  ©d^Iangc. 
Some,  adj.  k  pron.  einigc;  etwad. 
Son,  8.  ber  ©o^n. 
Song,  8.  bad  Sicb ;  ber  ©efang. 
Stick,  8.  ber  ©trcf . 
Stream,  «.  ber  ©trom. 
Study,  V.  flubiren,  Icrnen. 
Summer,  s.  ber  (Sommcr. 
Supper,  8.  bad  SftenbcJlTcn. 
Sweet,  adj.  fu§. 
Tailor,  s.  ber  ©c^neiber. 
Tooth,  8.  ber  3a^n. 
Twelve  o'clock(noon),?Kittag;  (night\ 
Uncle,  8.  ber  Dl^cim.         [5Witte;nacl)t. 
Very,  adv.  fel^r. 

Weight,  8.  bad  ©ewid^t  j  (burden),  bic 
What,  ;)ro;i.  wad.  [Cafl. 

Which,  ^roTi.  JDclc^er,  -c,  -cd. 
White,  adj.  inei§. 
Who,  pron.  jpcr. 

Whom,  ^(m.  ttcrn,  wen  («/?e  p.  86). 
Wine,  8.  ber  2Betn. 
Wound,  8.  bie  SDunbe;  «.  serteunbcn. 


THE  NATIONAL   SERIES   GF  STANDARD   SCHOOL-BOOKS, 

MODERN    LANGUAGES, 

A    COMPLETE    COURSE  IN    THE    GERMAN. 

By  James  H.  Worman,  A.M.,  Professor  of  Modern  Languages  in  the  Adelphi  Acad- 
emy, Brooklyn,  L.  I. 

Worman's  First  German   Book. 
Worman's  Second  German  Book. 
Worman's   Elementary   German  Grammar. 
Worman's   Complete   German   Grammar. 

These  volumes  are  designed  for  intermediate  and  advanced  classes  respectively. 

Though  following  the  same  general  method  with  "  Otto  "  (that  of  ''  Gaspey  "),  our 
author  differs  essentially  in  its  application.  He  is  more  practical,  more  systematic 
more  accurate,  and  besides  introduces  a  number  of  invaluable  features  which  have 
never  before  been  combined  in  a  German  grammar. 

Among  other  things,  it  may  be  claimed  for  Professor  Worman  that  he  has  been  the 
first  to  introduce,  in  an  American  text-book  tor  learning  German,  a  system  of  analogy  and 
comparison  with  other  languages.  Our  best  teachers  are  also  enthusiastic  about  his 
methods  of  inculcating  the  art  of  speaking,  of  understanding  the  spoken  language,  of 
correct  pronunciation  ;  the  sensible  and  convenient  original  classification  of  nouns  (in 
four  declensions),  and  of  irregular  verbs,  also  deserves  much  praise.  We  also  note  the 
use  of  heavy  type  to  indicate  etymological  changes  in  the  paradigms  and,  in  the  exer- 
cises, the  parts  which  specially  illustrate  preceding  rules. 

W^orman's  Elementary  German   Reader. 
Worman's   Collegiate  German  Reader. 

The  finest  and  most  judicious  compilation  of  classical  and  standard  German  literature. 
These  works  embrace,  progressively  arranged,  selections  from  the  masterpieces  of 
Goethe,  Schiller,  Korner,  Seume,  Uhland,  Freiligrath,  Heine,  Schlegel,  Holty,  Lenau, 
Wieland,  Herder,  Lessing,  Kant,  Fichte,  Schelling,  Winkelmann,  Humboldt,  Ranke, 
Raumer,  Menzel,  Gervinus,  &c.,  and  contain  complete  Goethe's  "  Iphigenie,"  Schiller's 
"Jungfrau;"  also,  for  instruction  in  modern  conversational  German,  Benedix's 
**  Eigensinn." 

There  are,  besides,  biographical  sketches  of  each  author  contributing,  notes,  explan- 
atory and  philological  (after  the  text),  grammatical  reierences  to  all  leading  grammars, 
as  well  as  the  editor's  own,  and  an  adequate  Vocabulary. 

Worman's  German  Echo. 

Worman's  German   Copy-Books,  3  Numbers. 

On  the  same  plan  as  the  most  approved  systems  for  English  penmanship,  with 
progressive  copies. 

CHAUTAUQUA    SERIES. 
First  and  Second  Books  in  German. 

By  the  natural  or  Pestalozzian  System,  for  teaching  the  language  without  the  help 
of  the  Learner's  Vernacular.     By  James  H.  Worman,  A.  M. 

These  books  belong  to  the  new  Chautauqua  German  Language  Series,  and  are  in- 
tended for  beginners  learning  to  speak  German.  The  peculiar  feature;}  of  its  method 
are :  — 

1.  It  teaches  the  language  by  direct  appeal  to  illustrations  of  the  objects 
referred  to,  and  does  not  allow  the  student  to  guess  what  is  said.  He  speaks  from  the 
first  hour  understandingly  and  accurately.     Therefore, 

2.  Grammar  is  taught  both  analytically  and  synthetically  throughout  the 
course.  The  beginning  is  made  with  the  auxiliaries  of  tense  and  mood,  because  their 
kinship  with  the  English  makes  theui  easily  intelligible  ;  then  follow  the  declensions  of 
nouns,  articles,  and  other  parts  of  speech,  always  systematically  arranged.  It  is  ea.sy 
to  confuse  the  pupil  by  giving  him  one  person  or  one  case  at  a  time.  This  pernicious 
pi-actice  is  discarded.  Books  that  beget  unsystematic  habits  of  thought  are  worse  than 
worthless. 

43 


THE  NATIONAL   SERIES  OF  STANDARD  SCHOOL-BOOKS. 


MODERN   LANGUAGES  —  Co/itimted. 

3.  The  rules  are  introduced  after  the  examples;  the  purpose  being  to  employ 
first  the  lower  or  sense  faculty  of  the  mind. 

4.  Everything  is  taught  by  contrast  and  association,  to  avoid  overtaxing  the 
memory  at  the  expense  of  tiie  reason. 

5.  The  lessons  convey  much  practical  varied  information,  and  engage  the  ob- 
serving as  well  as  the  thinking  faculties  of  the  learner  s  niiiid. 

In  short,  this  brief  series  contains  within  its  few  pages  all  the  essentials  of  German 
Grammar  so  presented  that  their  mastery  is  easy,  and  the  student  prepared  upon  its 
completion  to  enter  upon  the  study  of  the  more  recondite,  complicated,  and  irregular 
principles  of  the  language. 


From  Prof.  Schele  de  Verb,  author  of  a 
French  Grammar,  Studies  in  English,  dc. , 
&c..  University  of  Virgiriia,  Va. 

Prof.  James  H.  Worman. 

My  dear  Sir,—  Your  very  liberal  pub- 
lishers (Messrs.  A.  S.  Barnes  &  Co.)  have 
done  me  the  honor  to  send  me  a  copy  of 
your  excellent  works,  The  First  French  and 
the  Second  German  Book.  It  needed 
no  introduction  in  the  shape  of  compli- 
mentary notices  sans  nombres  to  call  my 
attention  to  the  eminent  merits  of  these 
valuable  publications.  But  I  was  sin- 
cerely glad  that  the  public  at  large,  as 
well  as  me,  confreres  litteraires  dans  ce 
departement  de  la  Linguistique,  have  at 
length  discerned  the  great  advantages  of 
your  method,  and  enabled  you  and  your 
publishers  to  bring  out  your  works  in  a 
style  so  truly  in  sympathy  with  the  in- 
trinsic value  of  the  different  volumes. 

Most  unfortunately  —  for  how  I  should 
delight  to  wield  such  exquisitely  shaped 
and  sharpened  instruments  to  make  niy 
way  into  thick  crania  and  dense  brains  ! 
—  our  university  way  of  teaching  does 
not  admit  of  the  admirable  method  pre- 
scribed in  your  volumes.  The  laws  of 
the  Medes  are  as  irreversible  here  as  the 
Decrees  of  Mr.  Jefferson,  and  when  I  fan- 
cied I  had  obtained  the  victory,  I  found 
myself  faced  by  a  stem  decree.  All  1  can 
do,  therefore,  is  to  recommend  your  works 
most  earnestly  and  most  urgently,  in  the 
point  of  economy,  to  my  young  graduates, 
hundreds  of  whom  leave  us  every  harvest 
time,  to  scatter  their  seeds  broadcast  over 
the  vast  fields  of  the  South,  and  to  profess 
boldly  their  adherence  to  the  confessions 
of  their  teachers. 

Wishing  you  heartily  the  best  success, 
and  hoping  that  I  shall  be  able  hereafter 
also  modestly  to  assist  you,  I  remain,  very 
sincerely  yours,         Schele  De  Verb. 

From  Head  Master,  Boston  {Mass.)  Normal 
iScliooL 
Messrs,  A.  S.  Barnf^  &  Co.,— I  want  to 
thank  you  for  the  copies  of  those  beautiful 


little  books  for  beginners  in  German  and 
French  i»repared  by  Professor  Worman. 
The  Professor  is  taking  his  pupils 
ahmg  the  right  road  rapidly  and  delight- 
fully. 

Whatever  may  be  said  of  the  tedious- 
ness  of  learning  the  grammar  of  a  new 
language,  I  think  all  will  agree  that  the 
great  labor  is  mastering  the  vocabulary. 
And  it  is  just  at  this  point  that  1  think 
these  books  are  of  great  use.  The  exercises 
are  so  developed  out  of  pictured  objects  nnd 
actions,  and  are  so  well  graduated  that 
almost  from  the  very  outset  they  go  alone. 
A  beginner  would  have  little  use  for 
a  dictionary  in  reading  the  "  First  French 
Book;"  and  yet  the  words  are  so  introduced 
and  so  often  used,  that  the  meaning  is 
kept  constantly  before  the  mind,  without 
the  intervention  of  a  translation.  By  this 
means  the  pupil  soon  makes  them  his 
permanent  possession. 

A  dozen  volumes  as  well  graduated  as 

these  would  do  much  to  give  the  student 

an  extended  vocabulary.    I  trust  Professor 

Worman  will  continue  his  good  work. 

Yours  very  truly, 

L.   DUNTON. 

From  Mr.  R.  T.  Taylor,  of  Beaver,  Pa. 

Messrs.  A.  S.  Barnes  &  Co. 

Dear  Sirs,  —  Your  kindness  in  sending 
books  appreciated.  I  have  examined  Pro- 
fessor Worman's  "  First  French  Book  "  and 
I  think  it  the  best  thing  of  the  kind  I  have 
ever  seen.  There  is  just  enough  of  the 
grammar  combined  to  make  the  natural 
method  practicable.  I  shall  introduce 
the  work  into  my  school  this  fall.  We  have 
been  using  Professor  Worman's  German 
books  and  are  vei-y  much  pleased  with 
them.  The  "  Echo,"  in  particular,  de- 
lights pupils.  They  make  more  advance- 
ment in  one  vear  by  this  method  than  in 
two  by  the  old  manner  of  teaching 

Wishing  you  success  in  your  businessj 
I  am 

Yours  very  truly, 

R.  T.  Taylop. 


44 


THE  NATIONAL   SERIES  OF  STANDARD  SCHOOL-BOOKS. 


FRENCH. 

Worman's  First  Book  in  French. 

The  first  book  in  the  companion  series  to  the  successful  German  Series  by  the  same 
author,  and  intended  for  those  wisliing  to  speak  French.  The  peculiar  features  of  Pro- 
fessor Worraan's  new  method  are  :  — 

1.  The  French  language  is  taught  without  the  help  of  English. 

2.  It  appeals  to  pictorial  illustrations  for  the  names  of  objects. 

3.  The  learner  speaks  from  the  tirst  hour  under  standingly. 

4.  Gi-ammar  is  taught  to  prevent  missteps  in  composition. 

5.  The  laws  of  the  language  are  taught  analytically  to  make  them  the  learner's  own 

inferences  {=  deductions). 

6.  Rapidity  of  progress  by  dependence  upon  association  and  contrasts. 

7.  Strictly  graded  lessons  and  conversations  on  familiar,  interesting,  and  instructive 

topics,  providing  the  words  and  idioms  of  every-day  life. 

8.  Paradigms  to  give  a  systematic  treatment  to  variable  inflections. 

9.  Heavy  type  for  inflections,  to  make  the  eye  a  help  to  the  mind. 

10.    Hair  line  type  for  the  silent  letters,  and  links  for  words  to  be  connected,  in  order 
to  teach  an  accurate  pronunciation. 

Worman's  French  Echo. 

This  is  not  a  mass  of  meaningless  and  parrot-like  phrases  thrown  together  for 
a  tourist's  use,  to  bewilder  him  wlien  in  the  presence  of  a  Fienchman. 

The  "  Echo  de  Paris  "  is  a  strictly  progressive  conversational  book,  beginning  with  sim- 
ple phrases  and  leading  by  frequent  repetition  to  a  mastery  of  the  idioms  and  of  Die 
every-day  language  used  in  business,  on  travel,  at  a  hotel,  in  the  chit-chat  of 
society. 

It  presupposes  an  elementary  knowledge  of  the  language,  such  as  may  be  acqjiired 
from  the  First  French  Book  by  Professor  Worman,  and  furnishes  a  running  French 
text,  allowing  the  learner  of  course  to  find  the  meannig  of  the  words  (in  the  appended 
Vocabulary),  and  forcing  him,  by  the  absence  of  English  in  the  text,  to  think  in 
French. 


Cher  Monsieur  Worman, — Vous  me 
demandez  mon  opinion  sur  votre  "  Echo  de 
Paris"  et  quel  usage  j'en  fais.  Je  ne 
saurais  mieux  vous  repondre  qu'en  repro- 
duisant  une  lettre  que  j'ecrivais  derniere- 
ment  a  un  coUegue  qui  etait,  me  disait-il, 
*'  bien  fatigue  de  ces  insipides  livres  de 
dialogues." 

"  Vous  ne  connaissez  done  pas,"  lui 
disais-je,  " 'I'Echo  de  Paris,'  edite  par  le 
Professor  Worman?  C'est  un  veritable 
tresor,  merveilleusement  adajtte  au  devel- 
oppement  de  la  conversation  familitre  et 
pmtique,  telle  qu'on  la  veut  aujourd'hui. 
Cut  excellent  livre  met  successivement  en 
sc^ne,  d'uue  maniere  vive  et  interessante. 


toutes  les  circonstances  possibles  de  la  vie 
ordinaire.  Voyez  I'immeiise  avantage 
il  vous  transporte  en  France  ;  du  premier 
mot,  je  m'imagine,  et  mes  eleves  avec  moi, 
que  nous  sonimes  k  Paris,  dans  la  rue,  sur 
une  place,  dans  une  gare,  dans  un  salon, 
dans  une  chambre,  voire  meme  k  la  cui- 
sine ;  je  parle  comme  avec  des  Frangais  ; 
les  eleves  ne  songent  pas  a  traduire  de 
I'anglais  pour  me  repondre  ;  ils  pensent 
en  franQais  ;  ils  sont  Frangais  pour  le 
moment  par  les  yeux,  par  I'oreille,  par  la 
pensee.  Quel  autre  livre  pourrait  produire 
cette  illusion  ?  .  .  ." 

Votre  tout  devou6, 

A.  DE  BOUGEMONT. 


Illustrated  Language  Primers. 

French  and  English.        German  and  English. 

Spanish  and  English. 

The  names  of  common  objects  properly  illustrated  and  arranged  in  easy  lessons. 

Pujol's  Complete  French  Class-Book. 

Offers  in  one  volume,  methodically  arranged,  a  coni))lete  French  course  —  usually 
embraced  in  series  of  from  five  to  twelve  books,  including  the  bulky  and  expensive 
lexicon.  Here  are  grammar,  conversation,  and  choice  literature,  selected  from  the 
best  French  authors.  Each  branch  is  thoroughly  handled  ;  and  the  student,  having 
diligently  completed  the  course  as  prescribed,  may  consider  himself,  without  further 
application,  aufait  in  the  most  polite  and  elegant  language  of  modem  times. 

45 


'^'^^^fmi:^^i^> 


LAST 


DATE 


THIS  BOOK  IB^^^SbX^^' 

^^  OF  25  CENTS 

WIUU  BE  ASSESSED        ^^^  ^^^^J^HE  FOURTH 

DAY    AND    TO    *   •  ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ 

OVERDUE.  ^===^ 


RE^ 


*>  ^l 


926720 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


